The Students Greek Grammar.
GRAMMAE
OF THE
GKEEK LANGUAGE.
.By DR GEOKGE CUETIUS,
rBOrESBOE IN THE tTNITEESITY OP LEIPZIG.
TRANSLATED UNDER THE REVISION OF THE AUTHOR.
EDITED
By WILLIAM SMITH, LL.D.,
OLABSIOAL EXAMIIIES IN THE UNIVEKSITY OF LONDON, AND EDITOB OF THE 0LAS8I0AL
AND LATIN DICTI0NAEIE8.
For to^^^e qp Colleges a>4^ High - Schools.
NEW YORK:
HAKPER & BROTHERS, PUBLISHERS,
franklin square.
18 7 2.
5^/^J^
f XL
EDITOK'S PREFACE.
The Greek Grammar of Dj;. Curtius is acknowledged
by the most competent scholars, both in this country and
in Germany, to be the best representative of the present
advanced state of Greek scholarship. It is, indeed, almost
the only Grammar which exhibits the inflexions of the lan-
guage in a really scientific form; while its extensive use
in the schools of Germany, and the high commendations
it has received from practical teachers in that country, are
suflicient proof of its excellence as a school-book. It is
surprising to find that many of the public and private
schools in this country continue to use Grammars which
ignore all the improvements and discoveries of modern
philology, and still cling to the division of*the substantives
into ten declensions, the designation of the Second Perfect
as the Perfect Middle, and similar exploded errors. Dr.
Curtius has stated so fully in his Preface the principles on
which this Grammar is constructed, that it is unnecessary
to say more by way of introduction. It only remains to
add that the translation has been made from the fifth edi-
tion of the original work (1862), with the author's sanction,
and that the proof-sheets have enjoyed the advantage of
his final correction and revision.
An abridgment for the use of the lower forms is pub-
lished simultaneously with the present work.
w. s.
London, March. 1863.
Su f^
FROM THE AUTHOR'S PREFACE.
The fact that within a few years the present Grammar
has found its way into a large number of schools in various
countries of Europe seems to me a satisfactory answer to
the question whether a thorough knowledge of Greek is
attainable by the method I have adopted. Much, there-
fore, of what I thought it necessary to state on the first
appearance of the book does not now require to be repeat-
ed; but I consider it incumbent upon me to make some
observations upon the objects and the use of the Grammar,
•ancT I beg to recommend these to the careful consideration
of teachers.
Few sciences have within the last half century been so
completely reformed as the science of language. . Not only
has our insight into the nature and history of human speech
been greatly advanced, but— and this is justly regarded as
a matter of still greater importance — quite a different
method in treating language in general has been discov-
ered, after a new era had been opened up by the philo-
sophical inquiries of William von Humboldt, and the his-
torical investigations of Francis Bopp and Jacob Grimm.
No one, unless he desires to exclude schools from the prog-
ress thus made, and to confine, them to the mechanical
repetition of imperfect and antiquated rules, will probably
doubt that the new knowledge, the principles of which
have stood the test of nearly half a century, ought to exer-
cise its influence on the teachino^ of lano-uasre.
If the teaching of a language in our schools is intended
VI PREFACE.
to lead not only to a thorough understanding of the mas-
ter-works of literature, but at the same time to cultivate
and stir up the youthful mind by independent exertion,
and by occupation with a subject so immensely rich, and so
harmoniously quickening the most different mental powers
as language, such teaching can not possibly continue to
keep aloof from the progress of scientific inquiry, which is,
unfortunately, still the case in many places. The teaching
of Greek, however, seems to be specially called upon to
make a commencement. The modern science of language
has, indeed, exercised its influence on every part of gram-
mar, but none has been more affected by it than the first,
commonly called the accidence. In Latin, scientific in-
quiry into the structure of the forms has not yet reached
the same completeness as in Greek. The structure of the
Latin language is less transparent, and we miss so many
aids which we possccS for the Greek in the high antiquity
of its literature and in its dialects. A scientific treatment
of the structure of the Latin language in schools is, more-
over, a matter of great practical difficulty, on account of
the early age at which the elements must necessarily be
learned. We ought not, however, on this account, to sep-
arate the teaching of Latin from all contact with scientific
inquiry, the influence of which can show itself with advan-
tage, at least, in a more suitable arrangement and distribu-
tion of the matter. Granting, therefore, that our boys, as
heretofore, must commit to memory a large portion of Latin
forms ; granting that the most important object in learning
Latin consists, perhaps, more in the acquisition of fixed
laws of syntax, which obviously form the principal strength
of the Latin language, the case of the Greek is different.
' The Greeks are justly called an artistic people, and the
Greek language is the most ancient work of art which they
PREFACE. Vll
have reared upon a very primitive basis. The student,
who approaches the Greek after he has already gone
through a considerable preparation by the study of Latin,
ought to be impressed with the idea that the structure of
this language is one of the most marvelous productions of
the intellectual powers acting unconsciously. Every thing
lies here clear before us : the sources of our knowledge are
more varied, and the necessity of analyzing the given forms
is rendered so absolute, even on account of the Homeric
dialect, that this analysis has, in fact, never been entirely
wanting, and after the first appearance of Buttmann, in
1782, made considerable progress. The attempt, therefore,
to connect in a still higher degree the practice of the school
with the spirit of science, can here point to numerous
precedents ; and it is, no doubt, mainly owing to this cir-
cumstance that it has met with so favorable a reception.
My object has been to produce a consistent system, a care-
ful selection, and a clear and precise exposition, rather
than an entirely new system.
In selecting and expounding the results of scientific in-
quiry, I have always kept in view the idea that the book
was intended for practical use in schools. The first requi-
site, therefore, was not to admit any thing which is beyond
the sphere of the school, to explain only that which is nec-
essary, and to admit only that which is absolutely certain ;
for a school-book must speak categorically, must exclude
all matters of mere opinion, and has no space for discussion
and inquiry. It is, however, perfectly indifferent whether
a result has been obtained by special researches into the
Greek language or by the more general inquiries of com-
parative philology.
I was farther obliged to admit only those things which
find their explanation in the Greek language itself, or at
Vlll PKEFACE.
most in a comparison with the Latin ; but even within
these limits I have confined myself to such innovations as
really aiFord an important insight into the structure of the
forms, whereas all that belongs to philological learning and
many other things have been passed over because they
seemed unnecessary. Among such superfluous innovations
I include especially all changes of terminology, and the
entire alteration of whole parts of grammar which are often
still less necessary, but to which formerly too much impor-
tance used to be attached.
The new technical terms I have introduced have gen-
erally been approved of, and the principle stated in my
Preface to the first edition, though not followed with pe-
dantic consistency, " if possible, to put significant names in
the place of dead numbers," as, for e, (/., A Declension, O
Declension, instead of First and Second Declension, will
scarcely be found fault with, for a name with a meaning at
once gives a piece of information, and therefore facilitates
learning. Doubts have been raised only about the expres-
sions strong and -z^^^^^l', which I have employed to distin-
guish the two Aorists and Perfects. I am as well aware
now as I was at the first that, from the point of view of
scientific inquiry, much may be said against the expressions,
but I nevertheless feel that I can not give them up. For
the old designation by numbers is unsatisfactory, unless
we are prepared for its sake either to sacrifice a more con-
sistent arrangement of the verb, or to mislead the pupil by
calling the Aorist which is treated of first the second, and
first the one with which he is made acquainted afterward.
But a common name to distinguish the two forms of the
Aorist Active Middle and Passive, and of the Perfect
Active, is indispensable in a system of Greek Grammar.
An innovation had here become necessary, for both neg^
ative and positive reasons. The expressions strong and
weak have this advantage — that, after being introduced by
Grimm into his German Grammar, they have also been
adopted by English grammarians ; and, though I use them
not quite in the same sense, they are easily intelligible.
It will surely not be difficult to make a pupil understand
that those forms are called strong which spring from the
root, as it were, by an internal agency, and loeak those
which are formed by syllables added externally, especially
as he may easily compare the English tahe^ took, and love^
loved. I still know of no designation which, with so few
disadvantages, oifers so many advantages as this, and I shall
retain it until a better one is suggested ; and, after all, in
necessary innovations, it is often more important that men
agree than on what they agree.
The fact that the most essential changes I have made in
the arrangements of the subjects — as, for example, the strict
adherence to the system of Stems in all the inflexions, and
especially the ilivision of the verb according to temporal
Stems — have met with the approval of practical teachers,
has been to me a source of great gratification, it being a
clear proof that the demands of scientific inquiry are by no
means so much opposed to a right system of teaching as
is still imagined by many. The arrangement of temporal
Stems is made less upon scientific than upon didactic
grounds, in such a manner that kindred forms are joined
together, and due regard is paid to the progress from that
which is easy to that which is more difficult.
The chapter on the formation of words, though somewhat
enlarged, has, for the same reasons, still been kept very brief.
But, in treating of the verbs, I have directed attention to
the formation of verbal nouns : in treating of the verbs of
the different classes, I have always directed attention, by a
1*
PREFACE.
number of characteristic examples, to the application of the
different Stems in the formation of words. By this means
the learner has an opportunity, during the study of his
grammar, of making himself acquainted with a number of
words, and I have no doubt that teachers will give their
sanction to this arrangement.
In regard to Syntax, the positive results of recent lin-
guistic inquiries are as yet less numerous. In this part of
the Grammar, therefore, I follow the principle of stating
the essential idioms of the Greek language with the utmost
possible precision and in the utmost logical order. Only
in some chapters, especially in that on the use of the tenses,
does my system present considerable differences from the
usual one. All minute disquisitions, conjectures, and more
or less probable theories — among them especially the ever-
repeated theory about the original local meaning of the
cases, with which I can not agree at all — have been rigor-
ously excluded. In this part, also, I have never neglected
to compare the phenomena of the Greek language with the
corresponding ones of Latin, and occasionally also of En-
glish, where this could be done with brevity and advan-
tage ; for as the usage of a language must be mainly com-
prehended by a feeling of language, I imagine that every
appeal to a Latin usage already embodied with our feeling
of language, or to an English usage familiar to us from
childhood, advances our knowledge much more than philo-
sophical definitions or technical terms of vague or various
meanings. For the same reason, I every where attach
great importance to an accurate translation of a Greek
idiom into English or Latin. I need hardly guard myself
against the opinion that I considered such a translation to
be a philosophical explanation of a linguistic phenomenon.
A real explanation is beyond the problem of a Grammar.
PREFACE. XI
I scarcely need repeat here that the present book is not
intended, like an Elementary Grammar, to be committed
to memory paragraph by paragraph ; but, in teaching, a
suitable selection, according to the degree of the pupil's
advancement, should be made by the teacher. By a dif-
ference in type I have myself, at least partially, indicated
this.
It may be remarked in general that the first business
every where is that of memory, and only when the actual
forms, with the aid of the paradigms, have been committed
to memory, analysis may be added. First knowledge, then
understanding : this ought to be the leading principle ;
but, as I have said in another place, " Memory can neither
accurately grasp the great variety of Greek forms nor re-
tain them, unless it be supported by an analyzing and com-
bining intelligence, which furnishes, as it were, the hooks
and cement to strengthen that which has been learned,
and permanently to impress it upon the mind." If details
learned at different times and carefully committed to mem-
ory, during a subsequent repetition variously combine with
one another and form various groups ; if, then, many things,
at first sight strange, appear to the pupil in the light of a
law pervading the language, such insight is certainly not a
mere support of memory, but animates the desire to learn,
and incites to exercise the power of thought in a variety
of ways. The present book offers to teachers abundant
opportunities for such exercises, and acquires its highest
efficacy under the guidance of thinking teachers who are
truly familiar with it, and take a delight in its subjects.
That the book has actually found such teachers has been
proved to me in various ways, and caused me sincere grat-
ification. G. C.
TABLE OF CONTENTS.
INTRODUCTION.
THE GREEK LAI^GUAGE AND ITS DIALECTS.
FIRST PART.— ETYMOLOGY.
I. Letters and Sounds.
CHAPTER I.
THE GREEK CHARACTERS.
A.Letters § 1-9
B. Other Characters 10-16
C. Accents 1 7-23
D. Punctuation 23
CHAPTER II.
THE SOUNDS.
A. The Vowels 24-29
B. The Consonants 30-34
CHAPTER III.
COMBINATIONS AND CHANGES OF SOUNDS.
A. Vowels in Combination 35-39
B. Other kinds of Vowel Changes 40-43
C. Consonants in Combination with one another 44-54
D. Other Changes in the Middle of a Word 55-62
E. Changes of Sound at the End of a Word •. 63-69
CHAPTER IV,
DIVISION OP SYLLABLES AND THEIR QUANTITY.
A. Division of Syllables 70-73
B. Quantity 74-78
CHAPTER V.
ACCENTS 79-99
XIV CONTENTS.
II. Inflexion.
A. Inflexion of Nouns and Pronouns.
CHAPTER VI.
declension of substantives and adjectives.
First Principal (or Vowel) Declension.
A. The A Declension §112-113
{commonly called the First Declension?)
1. Feminines 114-119
3. Masculines 130-123
B. The O Declension 134-131
{commonly called tJie Second Declension.)
Attic Declension 133-133
Second Principal (or Consonant) Declension 135-143
{commonly called the Third Declension.)
1. Consonant Stems :
a. Guttural and Labial Stems 144-145
6. Dental Stems 146-149
c. Liquid Stems 150-153
2. Vowel Stems :
a. Soft Vowel Stems 154-158
h. Diphthong Stems 159-161
c. O Stems 163-163
3. Stems suffering Elision :
a. Sigma Stems 164-167
5. r-Stems 168-169
c. r-Stems 170-171
Irregularities in Declension 174-177
Case-like Terminations •. 178-179
CHAPTER VII.
OTHER INFLEXIONS OF THE ADJECTIVE.
A. Gender .*. 180-191
B. Comparison 193-300
C. Adverbs of Adjectives 301-304
CHAPTER VIII.
INFLEXION OF PRONOUNS 305-319
CHAPTER IX.
THE NUMERALS 320-234
CONTENTS. XV
B. Inflexion of Verbs.
General Remarks §225-230
LIST OF PAEADIGMS. Tabic.
Elfiijlam -.- I.
Synopsis of Xv w, Iloose (exhibiting the meanings of the Tenses) II.
VERBS IN Q.
A. Vowel Stems :
1. Uncontracted, Xuw .'. . III.
2. Contracted, Tiixdoj, ttoiew, dovXou) .- IV.
B. Consonant Stems :
1. Guttural Stems, TrXkw, ^eyyw, rdaffu) V.
2. Dental Stems, ^pivdofiai, ttciOw, KOfiiK(o VI.
3. Labial Stems, 7r£/i7rw, Xei'ttw, KaXinrTio VII.
4. Liquid Stems, dspcj, dyyeXXw, cnrdpio VIII.
VERBS EN MI.
First Class, tLOijui, didiofit, 'larrjin IX.
Second Class, Mkwhi X.
CHAPTER X.
FIRST PRINCIPAL CONJUGATION, OR VERBS IN Q.
I. The Present-Stem :
A. Inflexion of the Present-Stem : . . . § 231-233
B. TheAugment 234-242
C. Contracted Verbs 243-244
D. Distinction of the Present -Stem from the Verbal
Stem 245-253
n. The Strong Aorist-Stem 254-257
m. The Future-Stem 258-266
IV. The Weak Aorist-Stem 267-271
V. The Perfect-Stem 272
1. Perfect Active 276-282
2. Pluperfect Active -• 283
3. Perfect Middle and Passive 284-289
4. Pluperfect Middle and Passive 290-2^1
VI. Forms of the Strong Passive Stem 292-295
VII. Forms of the Weak Passive Stem 296-299
Verbal Adjectives 300
Verbs which leave their Stem- Vowel short 301
XVI CONTENTS.
CHAPTER XI.
SECOND PRINCIPAL CONJUGATION, OR VERBS IN MI.
Preliminary Remarks § 302-304
1. First Class 305-317
2. Second Class 318-319
CHAPTER XII.
IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION . 320-327
Anomalies in Signification 328-330
Outlines of the Accentuation of Verbal Forms 331-333
Peculiar Verbal Forms of the Ionic Dialect 334 D.-338 D.
III. Derivation.
CHAPTER XIII.
A. Simple Berivatwes 339-340
1. The most important Suffixes for forming Substan-
tives 341-349
2. The most important Suffixes for forming Adjectives. . 350-352
3. Derivative Verbs 353
B. Compound Derivatives ':
1. Form of the Combination 354-358
2. Meaning of Combination 359-360
SECOND PART.— SYNTAX.
Preliminary Remarks 361
CHAPTER XIV.
NUlteER 'and GENDER 362-367
CHAPTER XV.
THE ARTICLE 368-391
CHAPTER XVI.
. USE OF cases:
A. Nominative • 392-393
B. Vocative 394
C. Accusative 395-406
D. Genitive 407-428
E. Dative 429-443
CONTENTS. XVll
CHAPTER XVII.
THE PREPOSITIONS § 444
General View of the Prepositions . 448
1. Prepositions which take only One Case 449-457
2. Prepositions which take Two Cases 458-461
3. Prepositions which take Three Cases 462-468
CHAPTER XVIII.
THE PRONOUNS 469-475
CHAPTER XIX.
THE KINDS OF VERBS 476-483
CHAPTER XX.
USE OF THE TENSES 484
1. The forms for the Incomplete Action 486-491
2. The forms for the Indefinite (Aorist) Action 493-498
3. The Future 499-501
4. The forms for the Complete Action 502-506
CHAPTER XXr.
USE OF THE MOODS.
A. In Simple Sentences :
1. Indicative 507
2. Subjunctive 508-513
3. Optative 514-517
4. Imperative 518
B. In Compound Sentences :
Connexion of Sentences with one another 519-524
1. Dependent, Declarative, and Interrogative Sentences 525-529
2. Sentences expressing a purpose. 530-533
3. Conditional Sentences 534-550
4. Relative Sentences 551-555
5. Temporal Sentences 556-558
CHAPTER XXII.
THE INFINITIVE.
1. Use of the Infinitive in general 559-566
2. The Case of the Subject and Predicate with the Infinitive 567-572
3. The Infinitive with the Article 573-574
4. The Infinigve with av 575-576
5. THe Infinitive instead of the Imperative 577
XVlll CONTENTS.
CHAPTER XXIII.
ON PARTICIPLES.
1. Attributive Use § 578
2. Appositive Use 579-583
3. The Participle with an Absolute Case 584-586
4. Supplements to Participles 587-588
5. The Predicative Participle 589-594
6. The Participle with av 595
7. Verbal Adjectives 596
CHAPTER XXIV.
SOME PECULIARITIES IN RELATIVE SENTENCES.. 597-605
CHAPTER XXV.
INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES 606-611
CHAPTER XXVI.
THE NEGATIVES.
1. Use of Simple Negatives. 612-618
2. Several Negatives combined 619-621
3. Some Negative Phrases 622
CHAPTER XXVII.
THE PARTICLES.
A. Conjunctions 623
1. Copulative Conjunctions 624-625
2. Disjunctive " 626-627
8. Adversative " 628-630
4. Comparative " 631-682
"'5. Declarative " 683
6. Temporal " 634-685
7. Causal " 686
8. Inferential « 687
9.Final " 638
10. Hypothetical " 689
11. Concessive " 640
B. Emphatic Particles 641-643
Page
English Index - - . . 353
Greek Index - 357
THE
STUDENT'S GREEK GRAMMAR.
raTRODUCTION.
THE GREEK LANGUAGE AND ITS DIALECTS.
The Greek language is the language of the Ancient
Hellenes (^EXXr^veg), the inhabitants of Greece, with all
its islands and numerous colonies. It is related to the
languages of the Indians, Persians, Romans, Slavonians,
Lithuanians, Germans, and Celts. These are all sister-
languages, and together form the Indo-European family.
The Greeks were early divided into races, each of which
spoke a different dialect. The chief dialects of the Greek
language are the ^olic, Dorfc, and Ionic. At first each
race employed its own dialect both in poetry and in prose.
1. The Ionic dialect was spoken by the Ionic race, es-
pecially in Asia Minor and Attica, in numerous islands,
and in the Ionic colonies. It was the first of the dialects
developed by poetry, and produced three diiferent but
nearly related dialects, viz. :
a) The Old-Ionic or JE^pic dialect, which is preserved
in the poems of Homer and Hesiod as well as of their fol-
lowers.
h) The New-Ionic dialect, which we know chiefly from
the history of Herodotus.
Ob8. — The Old and New Ionic dialects are also designated by the
common name lonic^ as distinguished from the Attic.
c) The Attic dialect, in which are written the numerous
works in poetry and prose produced at Athens in the time
2 INTRODUCTION.
of her glorj. The principal writers of the Attic dialect
are — the tragedians ^schylus, Sophocles, Euripides, the
comic writer Aristophanes, the historians Thucydides and
Xenophon, the philosopher Plato, the great orators Lysias,
Demosthenes, and ^schines. Through the importance
of Athens in Greece, and the excellence of the Attic lit-
erature, the Attic became the chief dialect of the Greek
language.
Obs. — A less important distinction i^ made between the earlier and
later Attic writers. .The tragedians and Thucydides belong to
the earlier Attic, and the remaining authors to the later. The
language of Plato is intermediate between the two : that of the
tragedians has also many other peculiarities.
2. The ^OLic dialect was spoken by the 2Eolians, par-
ticularly in Asia Minor, Boeotia, and Thessaly. Alcaeus and
Sappho wrote in this dialect.
3. The Doric dialect was spoken by the Dorians, chief-
ly in Northern Greece, in the Peloponnesus, in Crete, and
in the numerous Doric colonies, especially Sicily and Lower
Italy. Doric is essentially the dialect of Pindar's lyric
poems and* Theocritus's bucolics (herdsman's poetry). The
choruses in the tragedies also contain some Doric forms.
4. After Athens ceased to be the leading city in Greece,
the Attic dialect still remained the language of educated
Greeks. But it soon began to degenerate from its primi-
tive purity and excellence, and thus, from the third century
before Christ, the common Greek dialect {{] koivyj ^laXtKroc)
was distinguished from the Attic.
On the boundary-line between the older Attic and the
common Greek dialect stands the great philosopher Aris-
totle. Among later authors, the most important are — the
historians Polyhius^ Plutarch^ Arrian, Dion Cassitts ; the
geographer Strabo ; the rhetoricians Dionysius of Hali-
carnassus and Lucian.
^^ 0^ Tfl-i
ItriTIVBESIf 1
ETYMOLOGY.
I. LETTERS AND SOUNBS.
Chap,
. L-
-The Greek Characters.
' .
A. Letters,
«
§ 1. The Greek letters are. the following:
Large Character. Small Character. Name.
Pronunciation.
A
a
> Alpha
a (short or long).
B
ft
Beta
b.
r
y
Gamma
g-
A
8
Delta
d.
E
£
Epsilon
e (only short).
Z
z
Zeta
z.
H
V
Eta
e (only long).
e
e
Theta
th.
I
I
Iota
I (short or long).
K
K
Kappa
k.
A
X
Lambda
1.
M
/^
Mu i
m.
â– N
V
Nu ';
n.
iS
I
Xi
X.
o
Omikron
o (only short).
n
TT
Pi
P-
p
9
Rho
r.
s
(^y
q Sigma
s.
T
T
Tau
t.
Y
V
Upsilon
•B (short or long).
<E>
i>
Phi
ph.
X
X
Chi
eh.
^
^
Psi
ps.
a
tJ
Omega
o (only long).
4 LETTERS. § 2.
§ 2. For 5 there is a double sign in the small character:
o- at the beginning and in the middle, and g at the end of
a word. Hence (rvv, aeiw, ^cav, but rrovog, Kepag. In
compound words g may also stand at the end of the first
word in the compound : wpog-Epxofjiai, ^vg-j^arog.
§ 3. From the names of the first two letters arose the
expression " Alphabet." The characters of the Greek al-
phabet do not essentially differ from those of the Latin
and of modern languages. All come from the alphabet of
the Phoeilicians.
In regard to pronunciation, the following points are to
be observed:
§ 4. All Greek letters are always pronounced alike.
But 7 is an exception, since, before y, k, x^, or ^, it is
pronounced n^. Hence in Latin it is represented by n :
Tiyyb) is pronounced tengo ; o-uy/caXw, synghalo ; \6y\r\y
longchl; (^top^iy^, jphorminx.
§ 5. ? is pronounced like the English z. It is of very
different origin in different cases. Compare imdZwv (for
fiiyiwv) from fiiyag ; ^wyoy with Latin jugum, English
"goke^ etc.
§ 6. ^ we pronounce as f, but probably the Greeks pro-
nounced the J9 and h separately ; hence pJi^ not f^ is used
in Latin for 0: (luXocro^iaf jphilosojphia ; ^LXoKT^rrig, Phi-
loctetes.
§ 7. we pronounce like the English th.
§ 8. Of the diphthongs, ai and u are both pronounced
as ei in height ; oi, as oy in l>oy ; au, as ou in sour ; ov,
as ou in tour ; vi, as wi in wing; ev and rjv, as eio vs\ few.
The iota subscriptum {underwritten) is not pronounced in
§ 3. Dialects, ^The Greek language had in the most ancient times
another letter, /, which was called Digamma (^t'yaft/xar=" double gam-
ma") from its form, and Vau {Pav) from its pronunciation. It was
pronounced like the Latin ti : Polvog, wine z=zltat. vinum. At a later
time it was written only by the ^olians and Dorians.
§ 14. OTHKK Cn^}^.^^^^^^
a, rjy to. It is not written under, but after capitals, as At,
Hi, £2<, but still remains unpronouncecl.
§ 9. When two vowels, usually pronounced together, are
to be pronounced separately, the latter has over it a diaere-
sis (Smt/o£o-fc'=<^^i>«^««^^'^^): thus TTuig is pronounced ^<2-^>/
avTTvog, a-iojpnos.
B. Other Characters.
§ 10. Besides the letters, the Greek language has also
the sign ', which is placed over the initial vowel to which
it belongs, and represents the h: e^ is pronounced hex;
aira^, hapax. This sign is called spirit us asper, "rough
breathing."
§ 11. For more exact distinction, the Greeks also mark
those initial vowels which have not this breathing with the
sign \ i. e., the sjpiritus lenis, " gentle breathing." This
sound indicates only the raising of the voice which is nec-
essary for the pronunciation of a vowel when no consonant
precedes : Ik is pronounced eJc ; ayw, ago.
§ 12. In diphthongs the breathing stands over the second
vowel: ovToq — hoittos ; ei^ov = eidon. But when the first
vowel is in large character, the breathing stands before it :
"AiZriQ= Hades; '£li^fi=Ode.
§ 13. Every initial p has the spiritus asper over it:
/oai//(j)Soc> f'ivfj.a. In Latin the aspirate is written after
the p : rhapsodies, rheuina. When two /o's come together
in a word, ' is usually placed over the first, and ' over the
second : Wvppoq — Pyrrhus ; KaWippor] = CalUrrhoe.
Obs. — Many write tlie double q without any breathing: TlvppoQ\
KaXKippuT],
§ 14. As in Latin, so in Greek, the sign ~ over a vowel
denotes that the vowel is long, "^ that it is short, and - that
it is sometimes one, sometimes the other. In Greek they
are used only with the vowels a, /, v, since f, rj, o, w, are
distinguished by their form.
6 ACCENTS. § 15.
§ 15. The sign ' at the junction of two words indicates
the omission of a vowel or diphthong, and is then called
an wpostroj)he : irap Ikeivi^ for irapa eKdvoj, with that one/
jLiri ^yu) for fxri syw (ne ego).
§ 16. The same sign has the name coronis (Kopwvig)
when it stands over the junction of two words contracted
into one : tovvojulu for to ovofia, the name / Kayadog for
icat ayaOog, and good. It indicates that a crasis {Kpamg,
mixtu7'e) or contraction of two words has taken place, and,
like the breathing, stands over the second vowel of a diph-
thong : TavTo for to auro, the same.
C. Accents.
§ 17. The Greeks also indicate the tone or Accent
(wpogij^^ia) of words. The sign ' over a vowel is called
the acute accent {b^ua irpogi^dia), that is, the sharp or
raised tone : Xoyog, rourwy, wapa, htpog. The syllable
thus marked must be raised above the rest.
A word having the acute accent upon the last syllable is
called oxytone (o^vtovov): irapa y uiri, (damXevg.
A word having the acute accent upon the last but one is
called paroopyto?ie {TrapoE,vTovov) : Xiyio, (l>aiv(jJ.
A word having the acute accent upon the last but two
is called proparoxytone (TrpoTrapo^vTOvov) : XiytTai, uTrtTe
§ 18. Obs. — A proparoxytone, having a long vowel or diphthong in
the second syllable of the word, ought to be pronounced so as to
give the accent on the third syllable, and yet preserve the length
of the second syllable : jSefBijKa should be pronounced hebeka ;
cLTTofSaive, apohaine.
§ 19. The sign ' over a vowel is called the grave accent
{fiapua TTpogoj^ia). It indicates a low tone, that is, that
a syllable is not raised in tone. Thus in airoj^alvt, the
last two might have the grave accent. The marking of
them, however, would be superfluous, the absence of the
acute being a suiBScient guide. All Avords without an
§ 23. PUNCTUATIOX. 7
accent on the final syllable are therefore called harytone
{^apvTOva) : Xeyw, trepog.
§ 20. The sign \ however, also denotes a subdued acute,
and occupies the place of an acute in every oxytone not
immediately followed by a pause : otto, from^ but aTro
TovTovyfrom this; (^amXevg^a kijig,hutj5a(n\svQ lyivtro,
he hecame king. Oxytones, therefore, retain their accent
unchanged only at the end of a sentence.
§ 21. The sign " over a vowel is called the circuwflex
accent (Trt/oto-Trw/ztyrj irpoqui^ia), from its shape. The cir-
cumflex is a combination of the acute and the grave, '\
A word having a circumflex on the last syllable is called
jperisjyoinenon {irspKrirwiui^vov) : ayaOoTg, crKiag.
A word having a circumflex on the last syllable but
one is called properispome?ion (TrpoTrEpicrirwiuLevov) : ^cOyt,
§ 22. In diphthongs, the accent, like the breathing (§ 12),
is put over the second vowel : (pavyei, tovto.
When the circumflex accent and the breathing meet upon
the same vowel, the accent is placed over the breathing:
ovTog, riOogf "^Qrog. The acute, in a similar case, stands to
the right of the breathing : aye, ip\ofiaif "Iwv.
Obs. — The acute is placed between tlie two points of a diaeresis (9),
aXhoQ^ but tlie circumflex over them, irpaisvai.
i
D. Punctuation.
§ 23. For the purpose of dividing sentences and periods,
the Greeks employ the comma and the full-point. For
the sign of interrogation they use the semicolon : rt uirag ;
what did yoio say 9 For the colon or semicolon they
place a point at the upper part of the line : Ipiortj vfiag '
Ti iTTonjaaTE ; I ask you : what did you do f kairipa i]v '
TOTS rjXOev ayyeXog, it was evening ; then a messenger
came.
8 VOWELS. § 24.
Chap. II. — The Sounds.
A. The Vowels.
§ 24. The Greek language, like the Latin, has ^nq^ vow-
els, of which the first four are like the Latin, a^ e^ o, i.
But instead of the Latin u, the Greeks have v (pronounced
nearly like the French u and the German it).
§ 25. The vowels, apart from the distinction of long and
short, are divided into two classes — the hard and the soft
vowels : a, 6, r?, o, w, are hard ; v, i, soft.
§ 26. From the union of hard and soft vowels together
arise di/phthongs {^i(l)Ooyyoi, i, e., double-sounds). They
are:
av, from a and v. ov, from o and v.
Of, " o " I.
27. The union of long hard vowels with i produces the
â– >
ti
a
a
I,
s
((
t
a
V.
»
a
£
((
^
§ 24. Dialects.'— The Dialects, in many words and forms, admit dif-
. ferent vowels from those usual in the Attic dialect. Thus :
1. The Ionic (Epic and New-Ionic) dialect prefers rj for Attic
d : Att. Oojpd^, Ion. Oiopi]^, hreastplate ; Att. dyopa^ Ion. dyopri^ mcirket ;
Att. vavQ^ Ion. vr]VQ^ ship ; but Ion. iiwa\i^p'n] for Att. fiE(Tt]fil3pia, mid-
day.
2. The Boric^ on the contrary, prefers d : Att. dtjfiog, Dor. ddfiog,
people ; Att. /xrjrijp, mother, Dor. ixdrjjp (comp. Latin mdter) ; Dor. 'AQdva
for 'A9r]vd, goddess Athena, even in Attic poets.
3. The Ionic dialect often changes e to «, and o to ov : Att. ^hog.
Ion. ^tivog, foreign ; At. 'ivsKa, Ion. uveku, on account of; Att. ]idvog, Ion.
fiovvog, alone ; Att. ovofia, Ion. ovvo/xa, name. Rarely o to oi, or a to at :
Att. riyvoTjae, lon. -qyvohim, he Tinew not.
§ 26. Dialects. — The Kew-Ionic dialect has moreover the diphthong
wu, which, however, only comes in place ,of av in the other dialects.
Oojvfia for Oav/na, iDonder ; tiovrov for iavrov, of himself : ojv must be
pronounced as ou.
§ 33. CONSONANTS. 9
spurious diphthongs a, r?, (j>, in which the underwritten
iota is not heard. (Compare § 8.)
§ 28. The Greek language also combines v with i, but
only before vowels: fivla, a fly.
§ 29. We farther distinguish the obscure o-sound (o, w),
the medium a-sound (a), and the clear e-sound (t, t^), and
the more obscure v from the clearer i.
m
B. TJie Consonants.
§ 30. The consonants are divided : I. According to
the position in the mouth where they are produced,
i. e., according to their organ {opyavov, " instrument"),
into :
1. Gutturals (throat-sounds), k, 7, x*
2. Dentals (teeth-sounds), r, S, 0, v, X, p, o-.
3. Labials (lip-sounds), tt, /3, 0, ji.
§ 31. II. According to ihe'ir power, that is, whether they
can be pronounced with or without a vowel, into ;
§ 32. 1. Mutes (mutaa) :
(a.) hard (tenues), k, t, tt.
ih.) soft (mediae), 7, S, /3.
{c.) aspirated (aspirata?), x, 0, (p.
Ohs. — The aspirated consonants contain each a 7iard consonant
with the rough breathing, % therefore = k' (kh) ] 9=zr (th) ; 0=
X (ph).
§ 33. 2. Vocals (semivocales) :
(a.) Liquids (liquida)), X, p.
{h.) Nasals (nasales), 7 (7 before gutturals, § 4), v, fi,
{c.) Sibilant (sibilans), o- (c).
§ 32. Dialects. — In the Ionic dialect the aspirates often lose the
breathing : Uko^xui for Attic ^kxo^ai^ accept ; avnc, for Attic avQiQ^
again. The New-Ionic sometimes transposes the breathing : KiQuiv
for Attic xiTh}v., tunic ; IvOev-ev for Attic evreuOev.
A2
10 VOWELS IN COMBINATION. § 34.
§ 34. The dovhle consonants belong to both kinds :
5, ;//, 2 : for ^ = k(j, ■^ — tto-, 2 = ^, with a soft sibilant
(§ 5).
Obs. — K(s only occurs in compounds with k: tKawKio, I rescue.
Chap. TIL— Combinations and Changes of
Sounds.
A. Vowels in Combination.
35. In the inner part of a word not all vowels may
§ 34. Dialects. — A peculiarity of the Greek language is the want
of the breathing v. The v^ however, was not altogether wanting ;
for —
1. The digamma (§ 3, D.) occurred in the Homeric dialect in
the beginning of the following words : dywixi, Ireak ; liXiQ^ numer-
ous ; aXitTKoixai, am caught; dva^, ruler ; dvatrauj, rule; dv^dv(>y^ jjlease ;
dpaide, tender; drrrv, city; tap, spring [««?']; tBvoQ, swarm, people ;
tiKom, twenty [Doric PiKan, Latin 'viginti]', eIku), yield; €»\w, p7'ess ;
eKTjTi, icillingly ; tKvpog, father-in-law ; tKwv, willing; tXTrojuai, hope;
the pronominal Stem i (to, sui), toiKu, appear; iirog, icord ; eIttov,
spoTce ; tpyov, worh ; tpyoj, close in; tppu), go on; Ipvcj, draic ; ipku),
shall say ; iaQriQ, clothing; el/jia, dress (Stem Peg, Latin vestis) ; trrjg,
relative; tiSvg, agreeable; "iXiog, city Ilios ; laog, equal; oIkoq, house;
olvog, wi7ie (pimim). On the operation of the digamma, see § 63, D.,
75, D.
2. The / in the middle occurred in o{g, sheep, from oPig (Latin ovis) :
vr}-6g,ofthe ship, from vdPog (Latin nams). Gen. of vav-g.
3. The Dorians and JGolians retained the digamma at the begin-
ning of many words : ^ol. Pkrog, year. Dor. Pi^wg, own.
4. In Homer, at the beginning of many words, e stands for P. te,
him, self; luKoai, ticenty ; itar}, equal; tedvov, marriage-gift =^ 'i^vov.
§ 35. Dialects. — The Dialects vary much in regard to the combi-
nations of vowels. The £Jpic and New-Ionic leave many syllables
uncontracted : tv = eu, icell ; dtofiai =z olofiai, I thinTc ; Trd'ig =. Traig,
doy ; voog = vovg, sense; (piXkrfTe =z ipiXijTs (ametis) ; uskcdv =z dKwv,
Some of the forms usually uncontracted are, on the
^ 37. VOWELS IN COMBINATION. 11
combine. The dissimilar vowels pair Avith one another
best:
1. The soft generally remain unchanged before the hard
vowels : ao<^ia, vnsdom / Xvw, I loosen / \avw, I slumfiber j
vu^ it rains ; ivvoia, benevolence.
2. Hard vowels hefore soft ones become diphthongs :
£u, 6u, good ; iraigy Traig, l)Oy ; yivu, yivei, to trie race,
Ohs. — Diphthongs sometimes lose tlieir second part before vowels :
^ov-6q becomes j3o-6g (hov-is) ; Kai-oj^ kol-o), hum. Compare §§ 160,
248, Oh.
§ 36. Similar (§ 25) vowels can not well stand together,
and hence, when they meet, are often contracted according
to the following laws :
1. Two similar vowels melt into one long vowel : \aag
becomes Xaq, stone j ZrjXow, ZrjXu), T a7n zealous; Xiiog,
XToc, (^ Chian ; (piXirjre, (piXriTE, ametis, in which cases g
and rj, o and w, are similar.
Still it must be observed that e f usually become u, and
o o become ov : Trofee, ttoUi, do / ttAooc, ttXcuc, passage hy
sea. Vowels before a similar one beginning a diphthong
disappear: ttXoov, tt\ov, of a passage ; oiKiu, oiku, dwells ;
^i\iyy (l)iXy, arnet.
§ 37., 2. Dissimilar vowels form a compound in which
contrary, contracted in these dialects: IpoQ^^upog^ lioly ; (idxjagzzz
(Sonffag, one wlw has called.
2. The abbreviation in the diphthongs ending in v is explained by
this letter first becoming P, and then being quite dropped (compare
§ 34, D., 2) : ^ov-6g—(ioP-6g [hov-is]— (io-6g.-
§ 37. Dialects. — 1. The Dialects supply many exceptions. Thus, in
New-Ionic especially, eo and eov are contracted into ev, not into ov :
TToisofiev, TToieujufv, we make ; Trodovm, Troievm, they make.
2. In the Ionic dialect, ao (rjo) often changes to ew : 'Arps/^ao, 'ATpeL-
de(o, of Atrides ; 'iXaog, 'iXeajg, merciful, a before w is often changed
into the thinner sound e : TlocraSewv = UotreLddiov, Att. UoaEidiov, the god
Poseidon.
3. In Doric, ao^ au), are contracted into d : 'ATpddao =z 'Arpeica, Uo-
(Kiddojv â– =. Xlotrei^dv, Q(.do)v (dearum) = Q^dv.
12
VOWELS IN COMBINATION.
38.
a) the obscurer vowel overpowers the clearer (§ 29).
Thus from
ao comes (X) m Tifxaofiev^
TinojfiEv, we honor.
vujSvvog, painless,
aiduj, pudorem.
Kr}Xu)Te, ye may de jealous.
yevovQ, of the race.
tr]\ov, be jealous,
tlldr), song.
Tifio), he honored,
fiiov, surely not.
Xpy(Tov, of the golden.
Xpvool^ the golden.
KnKoig^ thou art jealous.
olvovQ, abounding in wine.
■when the ti rejDresents the lengthening of «
§ 38. h) When the medium a-sound and clearer e-sound
meet, the first in order gains the upper hand :
T]0
a
(t)
' vri-odvvog
oa
u
U)
' aiSoa,
or]
u
•
<jj
' Kr]\6r]TE^
£0
u
ov
' ykvEog^
. 06
a
ov
' ^^\0€,
aoi
a
V
' aoi^}7,
aov
a
0}
' TLjxdoVj
t]OV
u
10
' /ir) oiiv,
iOV
u
ov
" X|0w(7£oy,
eoi
a
01
' XP^f^^oi,
oei
u
01
' KrjXoeiQ,
a
a
ov
" oivoeic,
Obs. — oei
become
OV -when tl
(§ 42).
ae become
a in de/cwv,
d»ca>v, unwilling.
art "
a
' TlfldtJTE,
Tifidre, honoretis.
aei "
^
' d£(^W,
^dit), I siiig.
ay "
?f
' rifidyg,
rifi^g, honores.
Ea
»7
' *>,
r)p, spring.
eai "
^
' Xveai,
Xvy, thou art loosened.
vat "
y
' XuTjat,
Xvy, solmris.
Obs. — In the contractions of an and eai, sometimes ai takes the
place of ^, €1 that of y. So from deiKrjg, unjit, comes alicfjg ; from
deipo), I lift up, comes alpu) ; from Xveat comes Xvei (with Xvy).
Exceptions, §§ 130, 183, 243 (nfidv), 244.
§ 39. Another mode of treating vowels which meet to-
gether is called Synizesis {GvviZ,r]Gig, i. e., sinking). It con-
sists in the first vowel being written but not pronounced
as a vowel : Qz6q — as one syllable.
§ 39, Dialects. — Synizesis is frequent in Homer, especially after t :
UrjXrfiddeu), of Felides ; xp^<^^oig, aureis ; vea,navem; also TroXiag, cities ;
uySoog, the eighth.
§ 43. OTHER VOWEL CHANGES. 13
B. Other Tcinds of Vowel changes.
§ 40. Another change of the vowels consists in their
being lengthened. Two kinds of lengthening are distin-
guished, viz. :
1. Organic lengthening^ i. e., that which is required by
inflexion or derivation. By organic lengthening —
a generally becomes »/, rt/zaw, / Jumor, Fut. n/tz/trw.
always " w, ^r]\6(x)^ I am jealous, " KijXuxru).
€ " " rj, TTodu), I TUaJce, " Troirjau).
1 either " 7, riio, I Jionor, " rro-w ;
or " £1, St. Xltt, Pres. XetTrw, I leave :
sometimes " oi, " Xitt, Adj. Xoi-koq, remaining,
V either " i", Xya», / loose, Fut. \v(r^>) ;
or . " tv, St. 0yy, Pres. <pevyu}, IJlee.
§ 41. O&s. — After e, t, and p, a is changed to d instead of r} : law,
/ leave, alloic ; fut. l6.(Sii) ; St. /a, Ileal ; iuTpoQ, physician ; St. bpa,
see; opd^ia, a view. The Attic dialect is altogether ai^erse to the
combinations £j], ir], pr], and frequently puts ed, id, pd in their place.
§ 42. 2. Co7)ipe7isato7'2/ lengthening, i. e., that which is
used as a compensation for lost consonants. By it a, even
when £, I, or p does not precede, is often changed to a :
Trac, every, from -n-a-vr-g — £ generally becomes ft : ufii,
Iain, from la-fii (§ 315) — o generally becomes ov : di^ovg
for §f So-vr-c [Lat. r/a-?i-5] — t always becomes 7, and v
always v : ^eiKvC-g for §£fKvu-vr-c^ showing.
Obs. — Exceptions, in which e becomes r], and o becomes w, are given
in § 147, and in which a becomes ?? in § 270.
§ 43. The three short hard vowels often interchange in
one and the same Stem, when, generally, t is regarded
as the Stem -vowel: Tpiirw, I ttorn ,' tr pair ov, I turned j
§ 40. Dialects. — The extension of v to ov appears in eiXriXovOa, am
come, from Stem IXvO (§ 327, 2).
§ 41. Dialects. — The Old and New-Ionic dialect does not avoid the
combinations erj, irj, and pr] : IHrj = Attic Irsd, willow ; lijrpog = Attic
iarpog, physician ; TrsLprjao/xai =: Attic Trupdaofiai, I will try.
The Doric dialect, on the contrary, regularly lengthens a into a :
Ti^dffoj =: Tifitjau), I will honor (§ 24, D., 2). _^
14 CONSONANTS IN COMBINATION. § 44.
TpoTTog, turning / Stem y^v^g, Nom. yivoq, race [compare
Lat. generis, Nom. gen ws] ; (pXtyu, I hum / ^Xo^, flame.
r\ also is at times changed to w : apy]yM,I help j apwyog,
helper.
C. Consonants in cornbinatiofi with one another.
% 44. Consonants, in regard to their combination, are
subject to still greater limitation and change than the
vowels. Those which are dissimilar (comp. §§ 32, 33)
agree hest with one another, especially the mutes with the
liquids.
That discordant consonants may continue together, they
are either made more like one another (assimilated) or more
unlike (dissimilated). The essential laws for the necessary
changes of consonants are the following :
§ 45. 1. Before micte dentals (§§ 30, 31), only conso-
nants of other organs which are of the same order (that is,
both hard, both soft, or both aspirated, § 32) can stand ;
consequently, the only allowable combinations of sounds
are — icr, ttt, yS, /3S, x^^ 0^-
When a different mute stands before the dental, through
inflexion or derivation, it must be assimilated to the order
of the latter. Consequently —
K^ and x^ become yS. tt^ and <pS become [3d.
ic9 " y9 " x^' 7r9 " [39 " <p9.
yr " xr " KT. /3r " ^r " ttt.
Therefore —
7r\EK-9riva^ becomes TrXex^^vat, from Tr\eK(o,Itceave.
Xey-Tog " Xe/crof, " Xeyio, I say
[lectus instead of leg-tus].
\ey-9r]vat " \Ex9rjvai, â– " Xeyw, / say.
Sex-Tog " dsKTog, " Sexo/^aL, I receive
[tractus instead of trah-tus, from tralw].
TV7r-9t]vai " TV(p9i]vaij from rvTrruj, I strike.
ypa^-Tog " ypuTTTog, " ypd<pio, I icrite.
ypa(p-dr}v " ypd[3driv, " " "
05s.— The preposition k, out of (Lat. ex), remains unchanged in all
combinations : iK9emg, casting out ; tKdpourj, running out.
§ 48. CONSONANTS IN COMBINATION. 15
§ 46. 2. Before mute dentals, mute dentals to be audible
are changed into o- {Dissimilatio^i), Therefore —
TT^ St, and 9r become or.
Te,d9, " 99 " (t9: hence
, dvvT-TOQ becomes dwaTog, accomplished^ from dvvTix)^ I accomplish.
4^-Tiov " ^(TTEov, canendum est, " ^du),Ising.
7rei9-9t]vai " Trei(T9fjvai, to he persuaded, " 7r€i0a», I p&rsuade.
§ 47. 3. Before /x a guttural becomes y, a dental a, a
labial jul. Therefore —
SiujK-ixog becomes diujyfiog, persecution, from ^twKw, I pursue.
/36-/3pfx-/iat " I3kl3peyfiai, I have deen wetted, from (3psx(o, I wet.
id-fjiev " co-zLtej/, 'Z/)6 ^Tioic, from ol^a, / ^/ioz(). [2)U8h.
rjvvT-naL " yvvajxai, I have l)een perfected, from dvvTO), I accom-
7rs-7rH9-fievog " TreTrutTfisvog, persuaded, from. TrEi9(t),I piersuade.
KOTT-fiog " K0fiii6g,a strilcing,ivoioii K6Tz-T(x},Istrike\summus,ivou\.
sup-mus].
Te-Tpi(i-fiai " TSTpifiixai, I have heen imhhed, from rpiiSoj, I rub.
â– ypa<}>-ixa " ypdfifia, letter, from ypd<p(o, I icrite.
Obs. — Sometimes in derivation the gutturals and dentals remain
unchanged : uKfirj, hloom; pv9fi6g, 7novement, rhythm; dpi9^6g, nwiv-
ber.
The jDreposition Ik leaves its k unchanged : tKfidcrcrio, I wipe out.
§ 48. 4. Before o-, as a hard consonant, y and ^ become
K, and ft becomes ir {Assimilation) : jco- is then written 5,
and TTo- \//. Therefore —
dy-<T(D becomes dK-crio, written a^-w, / sJiall lead, from dyio, I lead [rexi
instead of 7'e^-s^, from reg-o~\.
hx-<yofiaL " hK-(rofxai, written Si^o/xaL, I shall receive, from ^kxofiai,
I receive [traxi instead of trah-si, from, trah-o].
Tpi(i-(TM " • Tpi7r-(TU), written rpiipw, I shall rub, ti-om Tplf3io, I rub
[scripsi instead of scrib-si, from scrib-o'].
ypa<i>-(TO} " ypuTT-ffio, written ypdxpco, I shcdl write, from ypdcp-aj, I
write.
Obs. — It is clear from § 34 that every k and tt with <r must become
§ 47. Dialects. — The changes of dentals and gutturals before ft is
frequently omitted in Ionic: iK-fxevog, favorable, from St. ik (iKdvoj, I
come) ; dKcfxti^vog, pointed, from St. uk (Lat. acuo) ; dvTfxr], breath ; ddfufi,
smell, from St. od (o^w) [od-or], Att. da-firj ; 1S-/jisv, we Tcnow = Att. Itr-fiev;
Ke.Kopv9iikvog, equipped, from St. Kopv9 {Kopvacroi) = Att. KSKopvafisvog.
16 CONSONANTS IN COMBINATION. § 49.
I and \p: hence TrXeK-acj becomes TrXe^w, from ttXsko), I weave ;
XeiTT-cru) becomes Xei\po), from XetTrw, I leave.
§ 49. 5. The dentals, when standing separately before <t,
are dropped without compensatioii ; in like manner v dis-
appears before Z,. Therefore —
dwT-mg becomes dvvcng, accomj^lishment, from dvvTu), I accomplish.
i^d-<Tofiai " i](TOfiai, Iwhall rejoice^ from ijdofiai, I rejoice [laesi for
laed-si, from laed-o].
KopvO-ai " Kopvai, to the helmets^ from Kopvg^ Gen. K6pv-9oQ^ helmet.
5aifiov-ffi " datixom, to the dwmons, from daifiojv, dceinon. [yoJce.
avv-Kvyog " av^vyog, yoJced together, from avv, together, and ^vySv,
Hence a before another c is lost : Teixea-cn becomes re/'xe-ffi, to walls
(from r€t%of , wall) ; ka-ao^ai, t-aofiai.
Obs. l.—v is not always dropped before <t or ?• in composition. In
the preposition kv, the v remains for the sake of clearness : iv-
araZ^io, I trickle in; ivKevyw/xi, I harness. The v in ttuv, all, every,
and TrdXiv, again, either remains michanged or is assimilated to
the following a : irdvao(pog, aU-icise ; iraXifftrvrog, from iraXiv-
avTog, starting hack The v in (tvv, with, is dropped before ^ or c
with a consonant following : cv^vyog (see above) ; avtTrrjfia, sys-
tem ; it is assimilated before a simple a : avaaiTiov, from avv-mnov,
common mml.
2. Sometimes v remains unchanged before <t in the 2d Pers. Sing,
of the Perf Mid. : Tre-^av-crai, thou Imst appeared.
3. In exceptional cases, compensatory lengthening (§ 42) takes place
when a single v is omitted : for instance —
ci) In some Kominatives Sing. : fieXd-g, MacJc, for p,eXav-g.
h) In the 3d Pers. Pliir. of the chief tenses, where o- has taken
the place of r : Xv-ov-m, they loosen, instead of Xv-ov-ai (orig-
inally Xv-ov-Ti) (§ 60).
c) Often in derivation : yepovaia, senate, instead of yepovna, from
St. yepovT, Nom. yspojv, old man.
§ 50. 6. The comhinations vr, v0, vS, ar# likewise omit-
ted before o-, but cause a compensatory lengthening (§ 42) :
TravT-ai becomes Tram, to all, from St. ttuvt-, Nom. 7rd-g.
Ti9evT-g " TiOeig, putting, " " riOevT.
yepovT-at " yspovcn, to old m£n, " " yepovr, Nom. yspwv.
§ 49. Dialects. — Homer often assimilates a mute to the fallowing a :
7ro(T(7t=Att. TToai for 7rod-<n (pedibus). He often preserves one a before
another : la-o-o/nai, I shall he.
§ 51. CONSONANTS IN COMBINATION. 17
, (to those } r. ^,
dEiKvvvT-ai becomes hiKvmiA^j^^ shoicl' ^^â– '^^ Shkwvt, !Nom. detKvv-Q.
a^,v^-a<o " ^^^'^^-^^Zathm]^'' " ^'^^^^^ Pres. ^7rix.^a>.
TrevO-aofxai " Treiaofiai^IsMUsu^er, " " 7r€v0, Pres. 7ra<Txa>.
Ods. 1. — j/r disappears, without compensation, in the Dat. Plur. of
Stems of Adjectives in svr, Nom. ei-g : St. xapt€i/r, Nom. x«|Otetc,
Dat. Pkir. xapte-cri for xajOtevr-fri.
2. — Of j/0 before or, v remains in 'iXfiiv-g, tape-icorm, instead of t\-
jxivQ-g, Stem tXfiivO : Tipw-g^ the city Tiryns^ instead of 'Ti.pvvQ-Q^
Stem TipvvO.
§ 505. In later Attic a is readily assimilated to a preceding p : Old
Att. x^pf^ovr]<Tog, New Att. x^ppovrjaog, peninsula ; Old Att. QapaCj^
New Att. Oappu)^ I am courageous.
§ 51. 7. V remains unchanged before mute dentals; it
becomes the nasal y before gutturals (§ 4), ju before labials,
and is assimilated before liquid consonants :
avv-TiOrjiJii, I put together^ is unchanged.
<7yv-KaXea>, / call togeth£r^ becomes o-yy/caXew.
cvv-xpovoQ^ contemporaneous^ " crvyxpovog.
tv-TTupog^ experienced^ " t/xTreipog, from Iv and te7 pa, 2^'oof [so
in-peritus becomes im-peritus].
tv-\//vXOf , inspirited, " tfx\pvxog, from tv and ^wx*)? ^^^•
ev-jxerpog, metrical, " tfifierpog, from tv and fthpov, measure
[so in-modicus becomes im-raod-
icus].
avv-peoj, IJiow together, " avppaio, from auv and psw, I flow [so
con-ruo becomes cor-ruo].
avv-Xeyu), I collect, " o-yXXeyw, from cruv and Xeyw, / p'a^A^r
[so con-ligo becomes col-ligo].
0&8. 1. — V in the preposition Iv remains unchanged before p : tv-
pvBfiog, rhythmical.
2. — V is combined with p by means of ^ in av-^-p6g. Gen. of dvj7|0,
man. So is /[* Avith p by /3 in nEcrij/x-li-pia, midday, instead of
HS(Tr}fi(e)pia (jieffog and rjfiepa, compare" § 61, c).
§ 51. Dialects. — In the Epic dialect j3 is often inserted between ft
and p, and between p, and X : pk-p.-^-\ioKa, I Imxe gone, from Stem /loX,
by metathesis (§ 59). /* before X or p becomes /3 at the beginning of
a word : j3Xw-(t/cw, / go, Present of the Stem poX ; (Sporog, mortal, for
UpoTog, from the Stem fxpo or /iop \mor-ior, mortuus sum'l.
18 CONSONANTS IN COMBINATION. § 52.
§ 52. 8, Hard mutes (tenues) unite with a following
rough hreathmg (spiritus asper) into aspirates (x, Q, (p) :
hence^
t-rr' (fcTTi) and rjfiepa, day, become e<pf]ixepog,for a day.
deK (dsKo) " r)ix8pa,day, " hxhix^poQ^for ten days.
ten
avT {avTi) '"'' virarog, consul, " dvQinrarog, proconsul.
§ 53. 9. At the end of a word, when the following word
begins with a spiritus asper, the hard mute is changed into
an aspirate :
ovx ovrog, not this, for ovk ovtoq.
a((t i(TTiag,from the hearth, " cltt' (a7r6) hriaQ.
KaO' rjfiepav, by day, " kut {Kara) ijukpav.
Obs. — If another hard mute stands before the one to be aspirated,
the first must also be aspirated (§ 45): tTrrd and i)}ikpa form
i^9r}ixepoQ,for seven days; vvktu and dXrjv become vvxO' oXrjv, totam
noctem.
§ 53b. 10. Two syllables immediately following one an-
other can not both begin with aspirates in the following
cases :
a) In reduplication the corresponding hard mute takes
the place of the aspirate :
Ke-xiopn^a for x€-xw|07?/ca, I have proceeded, from xojplw, I proceed.
TL-9riixi " Qi-drjixi, I put.
TTB-^vKa " ^E-^vKa, I have become.
h) The Aorists Passive of the verbal Stems 0£ {ridrifii,
I put), 6v {Ovtjf I sacrifice), adopt the same modification ;
i'Ti-Qr]v,I was put, for e-Oe-Or^v ; l-rv-Orfv, I was sacrificed,
for l-Ov-Orjv. (Compare §298.)
c) In the Imperative of the First Aorist- Passive (§ 297),
on the contrary, the second aspirate is changed to a tenuis :
(Tw-6ri-Ti, he saved, for au)-6r}-9i.
d) Isolated instances are : o/xttcy^? embrace, for aji^^^ao ;
lKi\Hpia, for i')(jE\upia, armistice, from t\^iv, to hold, and
X^ip, hand.
§ 52 and 53. Dialects. — The aspiration is omitted in New Ionic :
l7rr)fiepoQ,J'or a day; dTrirjfii, I send away ; ovk ov-ojq :=^ ovx ovtoq, not so;
air ov,from the time when, Att. d(p' ov.
% 55, OTHER CHANGES OF SOUND. 10
Ois. — Sometimes tlie spiritus asper is changed to the lenis, be-
cause the following syllable begins with an aspirate : ti-^pa, till,
for 6-0|oa, from the relative Stem 6 (§ 213, 217), t'xw for s^w, from
St._*x(§327,6).
§ 54. Some Stems beginning with r change this letter
to 6 when an aspirate at the end can not be retained (§ 45).
This happens :
, a) In the Substantive Stem Tpi^, whose Nominative is
Opi^f hair, Dat. Plur. 6piE,L The other cases are regu-
lar, formed from the Stem rpix (Gen. rpixog, Nom. Plur.
rplx^g),
V) In raxyq, quick, whose comparative is Ocktcfljv for
TaxKj^v (§ 57 ; compare § 198).
c) In the following Verbal Stems :
Ta(i>, Pres. OdTTToj^Ihury, Fut. 6d\l/io, Aor. Pass. trd^TjVj Subs.
^ TUipdc, grave.
Tpe<p, '^ rpe^oj, I nourish,
" 9pe\pu}, Subs. Opefifia, cattle.
mx, " rpsxoj,Irun,
" Ope^ofiai )
Tpv(p, " epvTTTOj, I rit^ to 2nec€s,
" Op^cj [ (§ 260).
TV(p, " Tv<p(o, I smoJce,
" GvxPoj )
Obs. — In the Passive First Aorist (§ 296), and in the Infinitive of
the Perf. Mid., the aspirate of the Stem remains unchanged, yet
• the initial tenuis is aspirated, because the Stem-consonant is
not felt to be necessarily an original Aspirate, as it might have
been modified by the influence of the 9 after it (§ 45) : t9pe(p9T]v,
Te9pd<])9ai.
D. Other changes of Consonants and Vowels in the
middle of a Word.
§ 55. Important changes of sounds are produced by the
modifications of the soft vowel i in connection with conso-
nants (compare §§ 186, 198, 199, 250-253). Frequently,
for instance,
1. I after v or |0 is put a syllable farther back, where it
forms a diphthong with the preceding vowel. Hence,
20 OTHER CHANGES OF SOUND. § 56.
â– TEivcj, from TEv-iio, I stretch, St. rev [tendo].
ixaivofiai, " ftav-iofiai, I rage, " fiav.
dfiEivojVj " dfi£v-i()jv, better, " dfiev.
KEipoj, " KEp-iu), I shear, " Ksp.
SoTEipa, " dorep-ia, the giver, fern. " Sorep {Sorfip, gi^er).
Xslpojv, " xejO-ioiv, worse, " xejo.
§ 56. 2. ( is assimilated to a preceding X :
fiaXXov, from fiaX-iov, TTwre, from fidXa, much.
iiXXonai, " dX-iofiai, I spriTig, St. dX [salio].
dXXoQ, " aX-iog, another [alius].
(TTeXXu), " oreX-tw, / send, St. oreX.
§ 57. 3. Gutturals (r and less frequently) coalesce
with a following i to era- (New Att. tt) :
rjaawv, from ifK-nov, less, St. ifK, SUperL riKiara.
ep^(7(Ta, " ep(^K-ia, Thracian, fem. (masc. Qp^K)t St. e/o^cK.
rdaaii), " ray-iw, / arrange, St. ray.
cXdo-ffwj^, " tXax-twv, smaller, " tXax, superl. iXaxtoroc.
Kprjaaa, " K|Oj;r-ia, Cretan, fem. (masc. Kpi?^), St. KpT/r.
Kopvaaix), " KopvQ-iu), I arm,^ St. KopvO {Kopvg, helmet^.
§ 58. 4. 3 and sometimes y coalesce with a following t
to S.
e^ofiai, from id-iofiai, I sit, St. t^ (ro (Sog,the seat).
KpdK(t), " Kpay-iuj, I cry, " /CjOay (Perf. Kk-Kpdy-a).
Other changes of Sounds are : •
§ 59. 1. Transposition (lUETaOemg), ^Yhlch most frequent-
ly occurs with A, p, also with fx and v :
Opdaog, together with Odpaog, loldness.
Opuxricio, from the St. 9op, I spring, Second Aorist tOopov.
l3e-(3Xr]-Ka, " jSaX, I have thrown, " " tjSaXov.
Te-Qvij-Ka, " Oav, I am dead, "â– " tQavov.
"â– urj-aig, " Tefi,aciit, Vres. TEfxvu), I cut.
Obs. — In the last four examples the vowel is moreover lengthened.
§ 59. Dialects. — Transposition is more frequent in the Homeric dia-
lect (compare § 295, D.) : KuprEpSg and Kparepoc, strong ; KdpTKrrog z=
Att. KpdrKTTog, the strongest, from Kparog, strength; rpaTr-dofiw (compare
§ 295, D.) for Tapir-donEv, we desire to rejoice, St. TEpir {Tkpirofxai). So
also in iSpaKov, I saw, St. SepK (SepKOfiai) ; tirpaQov, I destroyed, St. irtpO
(TrepOoj). Homer: drapTrog =: Att. drpuTrog, path. -^
§ 62. OTHER CHANGES OF SOUND. 21
§ 60. 2. The weakening of single consonants. The most
important weakenings are :
d) The very frequent one, especially before t, of r to or :
avaiaQr]<Jia^ want of feeling^ for dvaiaOrjria, from dvaiaOTjTog, without
feeling.
^dai for ^avTi, they say.
On the rejection of v and the compensation for it, which
frequently occur in this case, see § 49, Ohs. 3, cy compare
§ 187.
li) The weakening of initial or before vowels to the spir-
itus asper:
vQ, swine, together with avg. Compare Lat. su-s.
'i-(TTr}-fii for m-arrj-fii, I place. Compare Lat. si-sto (§§ 308, 327, 5, 6).
§ 61. 3. The entire rejection of sounds. The following
cases are important :
a) (T is rejected where it would have to stand between
two consonants in inflexion :
y^ypd^-Qai for y£ypa(p-(T9ai, to he written, St. ypatp, Pres. ypd^oj.
TtTv^-Oe " re-Tvrp-aOe, he ye struck, " tvtt, " rvTrru).
h) (T between two vowels is very often rejected :
\eye-ai, Xeyy (§ 38), for Xeyeaai, tJiou art said, St. Xey, Pres. Xsyco.
edvva-o, ISvvoj, for tdvvatro, thou couldst, Pres. ^vvafiai.
yeve-oQ for yevetrog, of the race, St. y e v e tr (§ 166).
c) The rejection of a vowel between consonants in the
middle of a word is called syncojpe (o-uyicoTrr)) : \--KT-6-ixr\v
for f-7r£r-o-/zr]v, I flew, St. tt £ r (§ 326, 34). Compare § 51,
Ols. 2.
§ 62. 4. The doiibling of a consonant. This is rare,
§ 60. Dialects. — The Dorians retain r : <pavTi=(pd(Ti(v), they say. The
older Att. less frequently : rfj/xepov = (rrjfiEpov, to-day.
§ 61. Dialects. — Syncope is more frequent in Homer : nVre for riTrore,
why ever f why ? IkskXeto = t-KE-KsXeTo, he called, St. keX.
§ 62. Dialects. — In Homer simple consonants are readily doubled ;
the mutes more rarely: ottttw^ == Attic '67riog,7iow; ottttoToc = Attic
uTToloc, qualis ; orn =: Attic on, tJmt ; the vocal consonants often:
22 CHANGES AT THE END OF WORDS. § 63.
when it has not arisen through the assimilations men-
tioned above (§§ 47, 505, 51, 56). The liquid p is the
most frequently doubled : tpplxpa for eplipa, I hicrled /
apprjKTog for a-pr^KTog, not breakable. The aspirates can
be doubled only by the corresponding tenuis: Ba/cxoc,
E. Changes of Sowid at the end of a Word.
§ 63. When a word ending in a vowel is followed by
another beginning with a vowel, whether accompanied by
a spiritus lenis or asper, there is a hiatus. The Greeks
very often suffer the hiatus in prose ; but frequently the
hiatus is avoided, especially if the first word is a shorter
one and of itself of little importance. This is done in
thi^ee ways, that is, either by elision (rejection of the final
vowel), or by crasis (contraction of the two vowels), or by
synisesis (collapse of two syllables into one).
IXXa^e =: Attic £Xa/3€ , lie took ; ^iXonfiei^rjg = Attic ^i\oixHdr]c, readily
smiling; HwriTog =i Attic ev-vtjto^, well-woven ; cxraov =^ Attic b<Tov,7iow
great ; vkicvam = Attic veKvm, to the corpses ; 67riaa<o = Attic oTrtVw,
dach On the contrary, Homer sometimes has a single p where
the Attic has double : wKvpoog = MKvppoog, swift-Jlowing. Often also
both forms are usual together : 'AxtXewf and 'AxtWeyf, 'Odvaevg and
'Odvaaevg.
§ 63. Dialects. — The Homeric dialect admits the hiatus in many
cases : the most important are :
1. The hiatus is only apparent in words with the digamma : Kara
oIkov for Kara PoTkov, at Jwme.
2. It is allowed after weak vowels in forms with which elision is
not usual : TfaiU oiraaaw^ Tie gave to the son.
3. It is softened by a pause or a cgesura after the first short syllable
of the third foot : KaOrjao, kfK^ d' eTriTreiOeo nvQip^ sit down, and obey my
word ; tmv ot «^ lykvovro Ivl /leyapoKri, of which six were horn to him in
the chambers.
4. A long vowel or diphthong before another in the thesis be-
comes short, and causes only an improper or weak hiatus : 'ArpeTdai
re Kal dXXoi kvKvrjfiideg 'Axaioi, Ye Atridm and ye other well-greaved
Achoeans " " . Compare § 75, D., 2.
^65. ELISION. — CRASIS. ^3
§ 64. 1. Elisio7i^ or the rejection of the final vowel,
of which the apostrophe (§ 15) is the sign, occurs only
with short final vowels, but never with v ; most frequent-
ly at the end of dissyllabic prepositions, conjunctions, and
adverbs : Itt avT(J[), with ?dm, for Itti avT(^ ; ouS' l^vvaro,
he could not even^ aXX' f/XOtv, hict he ca'me , less fre-
quently at the end of nouns and verbs : ot iravr uqa^-
yiXXovTeg, i. e., ol navra elgayjiXXovregf who reported the
whole.
Obs. 1. — The prepositions Trep/, round^ dxpi and fiexpi, till, and the
conjunction on, that, never suffer elision.
2. In compounds also the elision occurs, without, however, being
indicated by the apostrophe : iTr-epxofiai, from tTn-kpxonai, I come
up; but Trepdpxofiai, I go round.
3. On the change of consonants occurring with elision (e^* rjukpq),
see § 53.
§ Q6. 2. Crasis {Kpaaig, mixing) is governed, on the
§ 64. Dialects. — Elision is much more frequent with the poets than
in prose ; thus, not only e and i even in nominal and verbal forms
are elided, but also the diphthongs ai and oi, in the verbal termina-
tions fiai, cat, rai, aOai, and in the forms /ioi and roi. In Homer, i in
oTi, tJmt, is also sometimes elided.
A change of the final vowel, occurring only in poets, is the apocope
{aTTOKoiri]). It is the rejection of a short final vowel before a word
beginning with a consonant. The apocope is frequent in Homer with
the prepositions ava, Kara, irapa, and with the conjunction apa, note,
seldom with airo and vtto : it takes place in compounds as well as
at the meeting of two separate words. The v of av{a) then suffers
the changes described in § 51 ; the r of Kar(a), the tt of a7r(6) and
i'7r(6), are made like the following consonant : dvdverai = dvaSvsTai,
emerges; kcltt tteSiov := Kara. 7re9iov, on the plain; KaXXi7r£=zKaT8\i7re,left
dehind; irap9ETx>z=zTrapiQEro,put before; dTnrefi^pet^z aTroTrtfi^pei, will send
away; KardavCiv = KaraOavelv, die.
§ 65. Dialects. — Crasis in Homer is very rare, but very frequent in
the Attic poets: e. g., ov^ = 6 l^, KwdvpsTai = Kal oSvpsTai, and laments;
S)va^ ■=■u) ava^, Icing ; ^wttocoi = koL ottoooi, and how many. — Herod.
a>XXoi=oi aXKoL, the rest. The loss of a short initial vowel is sometimes
indicated by the apostrophe (§ 15): firi yw r= /x^ tyw, ne ego; ijdii
'Upx^'rai = i]Sr) lUpx^T^^h ^^ ^ already coming out.
24 SYNIZESIS. § 66,
whole, by the laws given for contraction (§ 36-39). It
occurs chiefly after forlns of the article, of the relative
pronoun (especially 6, quod, and a, quce), after the prep-
osition TTpo, for, hefore, Latin pro, and the conjunction
Kaiy and. The syllable produced by crasis is necessarily
long. The sign of crasis is the coronis (§ 16) : rayaOa,
bona, from ra ayaOa ; raXXa, from ra aXXa, the other things;
Tovvofia, the name, from ro ovofxa ; ravro, the same, for to
Obs. 1. — The rou<?li breatliinor of the article or relative maintains
its place in spite of crasis : dvr]p^ tlie inan^ irregular for 6 avryp, in
which case the coronis disappears ; in Oolfidnov, from to ifidnov,
the dress, the spiritus asper has changed r into Q (§ 52) ; so also
Odrepov, irregular for ro ezEpov, tlie other.
â– 2. The new syllable, formed by crasis, has i subscript only when i
is the last of the contracted vowels: kuI tv,and i/i, becomes kuv,
but Kui elra, and then, becomes k^tu.
On the accent with crasis, § 89.
§ 66. 3. Synizesis (sinking, compare § 39) occurs at the
meeting of two words only after a long vowel, especially
after the conjunctions iwdy as, ?}, or, r\, num, iii],not, and
after f-yw, I : l-rrCi oh, as not ; fxrj^Woi, ne alii/ eyioyvy I
not. It is perceptible only in the poets, who reckon the
two syllables as one.
§ 67. -No Greeh roord ends in any consonant except the
vocal ones, v, p, and q (^, ^). The only exceptions are :
the negative ouk (before consonants oxi) and the preposition
f/c, o\it (^Z* (before vowels e^), which attach themselves so
closely to the following word that their k can hardly be
looked upon as final.
When any other consonant, except these three, appears
at the end of a word, it is usually rejected :
;.aXt, hmiey {mel), for ^.X.r (Gen. /.^er-oc) ) ^ ,^ § ^^^j^
aS)fia,Oody, acjfiaf (Gen. au)fiar-og) )
tjaav, they were, " i^aavT (compare Lat. erant).
§ 68. MOVABLE CONSONANTS. 25
But mute Dentals in this case are often changed into
vocal g:
irpoQ for TTpor, from Trport, to (Horn.).
Uq " ^00, " SoQi, give.
Tspag " TEpar, Gen. Tspar-oQ, miracle.
§ 68. Certain words and forms have, after a short vowel
at the end, a movcbble v {y If^ikKvaTiKov). This v is used
before words which begin with a vowel — by which the
hiatus is avoided — and before longer pauses. Poets em-
ploy it also before consonants, especially at the end of the
word, to make it more sonorous.
The words and forms which have a movable v are the
following :
1. The Dat. Plur. in ai{y)\ nacnv t^wKa, I gave to all;
but nam ^oku. ovtixjq uvai, to all it seems to he so.
2. The designations of place in (n(y) : ^AOrjvrjcriv rjv, he
was at Athens; but 'AOrfvriai to^s tyiverOfthis happened
at Athens.
3. The single words iiKO(n{v), twenty; iripvmiy), last
year; and 7ravTa7rao-f(v), entirely; ukoglv av^pig, twenty
men ; but eiKom yvvaiKeg, twenty women.
4. The third person Sing, in i.{y) : ecrtomv avrovg, he
saved them; but co-wo-e rovg 'AOrjvaiovg, he saved the
Athenians.
5. The third person Plur. as well as Sing, in crt(v) : XI-
yovmv IV, they sjpeah well, but XiyovGi rouro, they say this;
^uKvvmv iKeXdEf he points there, but ^siKvvaL tov av^pa, he
points out t%e man.
§ 68. Dialects. — To the words which have a movable v there are
added in Homer the adverbs of place in Bi.{y) : dvf.v9i{v)^from afar;
'7rdpoi9e(v),from iefm'e, formerly ; the particles Ke{v), perhaps^ and vv(v),
now.
The New-Ionic dialect, which admits the immediate succession of
vowels, omits the movable v. On the k in ovk before a spiritus asper,
§ 53, D.
B
26 . DIVISION OF SYLLABLES. § 69.
§ 69. Obs. 1. — In like manner, ov, not^ takes k only before vowels,
which becomes % before the spiritus .asper (§ 52) : ov ^rjm, Tie says
not; ovK. avTog, not he himself; ovx ovrojQ^ not so. The k appears
also in ovKkn and firjicen, no more.
3. Ik, out of, is t^ before vowels (Lat. ex) : tK Trjg ttoXewq, out of the
city; 1% cLKpoTToXeiog, out of the acropolis or castle; UXkyio,! speak
out; lUXeyov, I spoke out.
3. "Without any definite reason, the words ovnog, thus (adverb of
ovTog, this), dxpig, i^^xp^^i ^^^h ^^^1 frequently lose their final g ; but
TToXKaKig, many times, loses it only in the poets.
Chap. IV. — Division of Syllables and their
Quantity.
A. Division of Syllables.
§ 70. The Syllables (<7uXXaj3?7, collectiori) in Greek words
are divided according to the following rules. Every vowel
which stands before another, but does not form a diph-
thong with itj or collapse with it by synizesis (§ 39), is
reckoned a separate syllable : l-arpog, physician, trisyl-
labic.
§ 71. A consonant which stands between two vowels
belongs to the second syllable: t-^u, has ; ov-rog, this ;
i-Ka-v6gf capable.
Two or more consonants usually belong to the fol-
lowing vowel : a-TrXouc? simple ; a-pi-are-pog, on the left
hand; t-ay^ov , I had ; a-fiv6gylamb ; l-xdp6g, inimical ;
likewise double consonants : o--^o-fiai, I shall see ; t-X,iii,
I place. •
§ 72. Exceptions, l. Liquids and nasals join the pre-
ceding vowel : ap-juaf carriage / aSf X-^oc? brother ; Kay-
XaZii), I laugh ; cV-^ov, within ; aii-(^ii), both., ambo. [iv
only join the following vowel : Ka-juvu), I suffer. 2. When
a consonant is doubled, the first belongs to the preceding,
the second to the following syllable: \ir-"Kog, horse ; j5a\-
\(t), I throw / Yivp'pog. The same takes place when aspi-
§ 76 QUANTITY. * 27
rates follow the corresponding tenues : 'AT-Oig, Baic-xoc,
§ 73. Compounds are divided into the elements out of
which they are formed: avv-ixMyl hold together j l^-aydj,
I drive out.
B. Quantity
§ 74. With regard to the quantity (length or shortness)
of syllables, the same rules, in general, hold good for the *
Greek as for the Latin. An important exception, how-
ever, consists in one vowel before the other not needing to
be short in Greek : ^wr), penance ; Xaoq, jpeople ; jSlXrt'ov,
better. Nor do the special Latin rules for final syllables
hold good in Greek.
§ 75. A syllable is long hy nature when it contains
a long vowel or diphthong : hjiug, you ; K/orvw, / decide y
a^w, / sing. The recognition of quantity in Greek is ren-
dered much easier by the characters ; do/mog, roo7n, house /
^w/xa, house ; in other cases by tlffe accent (§§ 83, 84) ;
the rest can be learned only by practice and from the
lexicon.
Obs. — Every contracted syllable must, of course, be long : a/cwv, uvr
willing m dsfcwv, \p6Q â– =â– iepoc, Jwly.
§ 76. A syllable is long hy position when a vowel is fol-
§ 74. Dialects. — Diphthongs and long vowels are very seldom short-
ened before vowels in the same word: Horn. oIoq (qualis'^^, and jSe-
fiXrjai, with short rj.
§ 75. Dialects. — 1. The quantity of the common vowels is very un-
certain generally, but especially in Hom. 'tcj/xEv, let us go ; "Apsg, 'Ap^g,
Ares, Ares.
. 2. A final syllable ending in a long vowel or diphthong in Homer
and the tragic choruses is shortened before a following vowel : oIkoi
taav, they were at home ("""'); r)fikvri Iv, sitting in ('"""). Compare
§ 63, D. 4. But those words which began with digamma (§ 34, D.)
leave a preceding vowel long in Hom. : KaXXet re an'X/3wv kuI el/namv
(""" ")? glittering with beauty and garments.
28 * QUANTITY. § 77.
lowed by two or more consonants, or a double consonant,
whether —
a) both consonants or the double consonant stand in the
same word ; ya^iia^joy (" ") ; I^iq, mien (" ") ; Katxrw/j (" ") ; or
h) the first concludes the first word, and the rest begin
the second : 0f 6c ^f , ^ut God C " ") ; Iv rovrb^, meanwhiU
(— ); or
c) both or the double consonant stand at the beginning
of the second word: ra Krj)juara, the goods (""''''); 6 Z^dvy
the living one (" ").
Obs. — When the vowel thus placed is already long by nature, this
must be indicated in the pronunciation: the a in irpdvaM^I act^
sounds diflferently from that of raffcroj, I arrange, though both
words make a spondee in verse ; that in fidXXov different from
that of KotWog, leauty, though both form a trochee.
§ 77. When a vowel short by nature stands before a
mute with A, p, v, jx following, the syllable may be long or
short : riKvov, child (- '') ; rv(^\6gy Hind (- ^ ; ri ^pag, what
art thou doing (- ') ?
The syllable, however, is necessarily long in the follow-
ing cases :
§ 78. a) when the mute stands at the end of the first,
the liquid or nasal at the beginning of the second word ;
£K vYiCJVf out of the ships ( ) ; and in compounds in which
the mute belongs to the first element : kXlyw, / sjpeak out
h) when a soft mute (j3, 7, ^) is followed by X, ju, or v\
/3t/3Xoc, look (â– ") ; Tajfia, task (â– '') ; ix'^^^y snake (^'^\
§ 77. Dialects. — In Homer, a mute with \, p, v, [i following, almost
regularly makes position : t'ikvov tI KXaisic, child, why tceepest thou
( ) ? 'vTTvoQ TravdafidTiop, all-svibduing sleep ( ). Nay, even
X, p, V, fi, at the beginning of words, have often the power of length-
ening the short final vowel of the preceding word : Ka\r]v re fityaXrjv
re, a leautiful and great ( - - - -)^ ^ in the Stem hi {hlaai),fear^
and in ^r]v, long, has the same effect.
§83. ACCENTS, 29
Chap. Y. — Accents. -•
§ 79. The general rules for the accentuation of words
are the following :
1. Every word onust have 07ie, and can never have more
than g7ie principal accent, which is called simply the ac-
cent : TroXvTT pay luocrvvt), husy occupation / airaparjKivaaTog,
unj>repared. On the designation of words according to
the accent, see §§ 17, 19, 21.
* § 80. 2. There are two kinds of accents, the sharp ac-
cent or the ctciote (o^eta), and the lengthened or the cir-
cumflex {7r£pi(nrwij.ivri), On the mode of using both, see
§§ 17, 21.
§ 81. 3. The acute may be upon long or short syllables,
the circumflex only upon such syllables as are long hy
nature: ^?>,\iywylsay; \i]yijj,I cease ; Ka\6q,heautiful j
a\r\QnQ,true ; avOpwirog, man/ Ktifxevog, lying / KtLTat,he
lies; (Tbjfiafhody; ev,welL
§ 82. 4, The acute accent can be only on one of the last
three syllables, and on the last but two only when the last
is short : clttolkoq^ colonist,h\it not airoiKov (Gen.); tXeyov^
I said, but not tXcyrjv, I was said,
§ 83.» 5. The circumflex can be only on one of the last
two syllables, and on the last but one only when the last
is short by nature: avKov,flg,h\xt not gvkov (Gen.); awfia^
'body, but not atofiaTog (Gen.) ; irpa^ig, act, but not irpa^u^
(Norn. Plur.).
Obs. 1. — When the last syllable is long by position, it does not
hinder the circumflex from being on the last syllable but one :
avXdK, furrow, Gen, avXdicog, but it does when it is long by na-
ture as well as by position : 9Mpd^, h^east-plate, Gen. Qwpdicog. Com-
pare § 145.
2. Exceptions to 4 and 5 will be adduced separately in the chap-
ters on inflexions. It is specially to be observed that most of
30 ACCENTS. § 84.
the exceptions occur with the final syllables in at and oi : ajroiKoij
although 01 is long ; yvtofiai, opinions ; TvnT^Tai^ he is struck. Com-
pare §§ 108, 132 D. 3, 133, 157, 229, 268.
§ 84. 6. A last syllable but one, when long by nature,
can have no other accent but the circumflex if the last is
short by nature: (^>^vye,flee,i\oi (pevye; rtpxov, I reigned,
not i]pxov ; ^Xt ?, of the same age, not riXi^ (Ge«. r'lXiKog) ;
KparXvog, not Kparivog. It may, however, be without an
accent : elire, speak / avOpomog, 7nan.
Obs. 1. — Apparent exceptions, such as wore, so that, iy^e, this, are ex-
jilained in § 94. •
2. So fixed is the rule, apart from these cases, that the quantity of
the final syllable, or of the last but one, may often be inferred
from the accent: Wi (t), ffo ; Trpwra [ prima, 'Nom.FluT.] (a); yv-
vaiKUQ (a), women, Ace. Plur. ; yvwixag (a), opinions, Ace. Plur.
§ 85. 7. Compound words have the accent on the last
part but one of the word, as far as is possible according to
§ 82, etc. : airiOi, go away ; a(ln\oq, friendless ; (juXoywog,
friendly to women / aTroSoc, gi've hack / iraptvOec, put in
hesides. (Compare § 359, Ohs. 2.)
§ 86. The accent of a word is variously altered by the
changes which a word undergoes, as well as by the con-
nexion of a word with others in a sentence. That is :
1. Every oxytone subdues its sharp tone when followed
by another word, so that the grave takes the place of the
acute. (Compare § 20.)
§ 87. 2. In a contraction in the middle of a word, the
syllable produced by contraction acquires no accent if
none of the syllables to be contracted had it : jLveog, ye-
vovg, of the race ; rifiak, Tina, honor. The accent of a con-
tracted last syllable but one is manifest of itself from the
general rules on accent; hence rifiCiVT^gy honoring (Nom.
Plur.), from Tiij,aovTeg,TiiuiwvT(i)v (Gen. Plur.), from Ti/maov-
rwv (according to §§ 83 and 84). A contracted final syl-
lable has
§ 91. ACCENTS. 31
d) the circumflex, when the first of the imcontracted
syllables was accented : rifxaei, rijuia, lie honors / \pv(yiovy
Xpvaov, of golden ; •
V) the acute, when the last was accented ; laTawq, iaruyq,
standing.
§ 88. 3. With elision (§ 64), oxytone prepositions and
conjunctions entirely lose their accent ; all other kinds of
words throw it upon the previous syllable as acutes : W
avTt[}, on /mn = eTr\ avrc^ ; ouS' l^vvafn]v , I could not even=z
ov^e b^vvdiurjv; u^i '0^v(Tavg,Iam Odysseus — uixi 'OSuctevc;
t-KT riaav, there were seven — iina y]<jav.
§ 89. 4. With crasis (§ Q6) the accent of the first word
is lost: Taya9a,hona=Ta ayaOa ; Ooljuariovythe dress = to
ifxariov. Only when paroxytones change the first sylla-
ble by crasis into one long by nature, this receives a cir-
cumflex : TO. aXXa, alia, gives raXXa ; to tpyov, the work,
Tovpyov.
On the changes of the accent in declension, see §§ 107-109; on the
accent of verbs, see §§ 239, and 331-333..
§ 90. The dissyllabic prepositions, with the exception
of a^0t, avTi, ava, ^la, when placed after the noun or verb
to which they belong, throw their accent on to the first
syllable : tovtwv nipt, about those {irhpX tovtiov) ; in like
manner, when used adverbially, they include the substan-
tive verb, as Trapa = 7rape(TTi, it is there, near; lEvi = tv£(7Ti,
it is therein, is possible. This drawing back of the accent
is called anastrophe. Compare § 446.
§ 91. Some words of one and of two syllables unite so
closely with the preceding word that they throw their ac-
cent on to it. Such words are called enclitics {eyKXiTiKoi
§ 90. Dialects. — Prepositions, whose final syllable is lost by elision,
have not the accent even when they occupy the position indicated
in § 90. Homeric ryai Trap elvdereg x^XKevov, among them I forged niiie
years long.
32 ENCLITICS. § 92. •
Xi^aiQf i, e.^ inclihing words), and the throioing hack of the
accent is called inclination,
§ 92. The following are enclitics :
1. The indefinite pronoun riq, ti, some one, something,
through all forms (§ 214).
2. The three personal pronouns, in the forms fxov, juoi,
fie, mei, mihi, me/ (xoVf aoi, ctI, tui, tihi, te ; ou, oT, f, sui,
sihi, se ; a(^hiiv, to them two ; and a^iaii^^, to them,
3. The â– Indicative Present of uixi, I am, and of <^r\iii,
inquam, with the exception of the second Pers. Sing, d
and (^7jg,
4. The indefinite adverbs ttov or iroQi, somewhere ; tti],
somehow; noi, somewhither; irodiv, from somewhere';
-K or k, sometime ; Truyq, somehow ; TrM,yet.
5. The particles yi, quidem ; ri, and; roi, truly ; vvv
or vi), now ; Hom. kLv or K.iyjperhaps,I suj>j)Ose ; pa (apa),
then; Hom. dr)v, truly; irep,very; and Se (meaning to-
ward, and as a demonstrative appendage). Compare § 212.
§ 93. These words throw their accent back on the pre-
ceding word, in the following manner :
a) A preceding oxytone leaves its sharp tone unsubdued
(§ 20), and this then serves also for the enclitic : a'^a^ov
Ti, something good ; avrog (prjcriv, he himself says.
h) After Siperispome the accent of the enclitic is entirely
lost : opw Tivag, I see some ; vo lariv, it is well ; ti/uw <t£,
I honor thee,
c) After a jparoxytone, enclitics of one syllable entirely
lose their accent ; but those of two syllables retain their
accent on the last syllable: ^tXoc p.ov, my friend ; Xoyoc
Tiq, a speech ; but Aoyot nviq, some speeches, Xoywv rtvwv
(Gen. Plur.).
§ 92. Dialects. — The Ionic additional form of eZ = ele, is enclitic, so
also (jf^'iaq (Ace. Plur.), them^=^K\X. (T<pdg, and fiiv,Mm, Tier, § 205, D.
97. ENCLiT<iUHIVEESr m
c
d) Prqparoxytones and jprope^^^omes retain their ac-
cent, but receive also from the following enclitic another
accent as acute on the last syllable, which remains unsub-
dued : avOpwTTog rig, a man ; ^i^aioi elcriv, they are firm ;
Gwiia yt, the hody at least ; iraX^ig rivecy some hoys.
e) Atona (§ 97) receive the accent of following enclitics as acutes :
ov (prjmv, he says not ; ojq re, and how.
§ 94. Ohs. — Several words of one syllable form orie word with en-
clitics following : thus, wgre, so that ; elre, sive ; ovte, neque ; firfTe,
neque ; oIoqte, capable ; oqtiq, whoever ; yroi, truly; Kairoi, and yet ;
to this also belongs the ^s mentioned in § 92, 5 : oSe, this one ;
ohaSe, homewards. These words form partly apparent exceptions
to §§ 79 and 84.
§ 95. f) When several enclitics follow one another, each
throws its accent upon the preceding : a rig /mot (priai Trort,
if any one ever says to me.
§ 96. The enclitics in certain cases retain their accent
(become orthot07ied), viz. :
1. when an enclitic forms the first word in the sen-
tence, and therefore has nothing on which to throw its
accent : nvlg \iyovai, some say. This position, however,
is rare.
2. when an enclitic is made emphatic: al \iyii),1 7nean
you — no one else ^ u tanvyifit is really so. When tort
denotes exist, he allowed, jpossihle, it retains the accent,
and that, too, on the last syllable but one : cort 0foc? there
is a God ; ouk ianv, it is not allowed, not jpossihle. Com-
pare § 315, Ohs. 2.
3. After elision: ravr Icrri xpev^ri, this is false=Tavra
4. Enclitics of two syllables, in the case mentioned
§ 93, c.
§ 97. Atona, i. e., words without accent, also csilled pro-
clitics, or inclining forward, are several words of one syl-
B 2
34 ATONA. ^ § 98.
lable, which have so little independence that, in regard to
accent, they combine with the following word.
They are the following :
1. of the article, the forms 6, ??, o\, m ;
2. the prepositions, Iv {in^ with the Dat.), Iq or ^iq {into,
with the Ace), Ik or a^, out of;
3. the conjunctions, d, if and wg, how, that ; the latter
also in its use as preposition to y
4. the negative ov or ouk (oi>\).
Obs.-^ovxi-, a more emphatic oy, is always accented.
§ 98. Atona receive the accent only in two cases, viz. :
a) when they are at the end of a sentence, and ^Jierefore
have no following word on which they can rest : <^?7c ») ov ;
do you say so or not f so always wc when placed after the
word with which a comparison is made: ^eoc wg,liJce a
god, Horn. ;
h) when followed by an enclitic, which throws back its
accent : ov (firjcn, he says not. Compare § 93, c,
§ 99. The following particles are distinguished accord-
ing to the accent : »i, tha7i, or, and ^, truly, or interroga-
tive, Lat. num / apa, then, consequently, and apa as an in-
terrogative ; vvVf now, and enclitic vv{v), now, particle of
transition ; ojg, how, and log, so / ovkovv, therefore, and
ouKouv, not therefore.
§ 100. DECLENSION. 35
II. IISTFLEXIOK
A. INFLEXION OF NOUNS AND PRONOUNS.
Chap. YI. — Declension of Substantives and
Adjectives.
§ 100. Inflexion is the change which nouns, pronouns,
and verbs undergo to indicate their relation in a sentence.
A distinction must be made in inflexion between Stem
and Termination. Stem is the fixed part, Termination
the changeable part which is appended to the Stem to in-
dicate the different relations.
The inflexion of nouns and pronouns is called Declen-
sion. As the nominal and pronominal Stems are modified
according to Cases, the terminations added to them are
called Case-endings. The form which arises from a case-
ending being added to a Stem is called the Case-form.
Thus TTpayiiaT-oQ is a case-form of the Stem rrpayfiar,
formed by means of the case-ending -oc.
Great care must be taken not to confound the Stem and
the Nominative case. The Nominative is itself a case-
form, often quite different from the Stem. Thus the Nom-
inative of the Stem irpayfiar is irpayfxa, thing. Aoyoc,
speech, is the Nominative of the Stem X070, which appears,
for example, in the compound word \oyoypd(l)o-g, a loriter
of speeches.*
The Greeks distinguish in the Declension :
1. Three Numhers : the Singular for one, the Dual for
two, the Plural for several;
2. Five Cases : Nominative, Genitive, Dative, Accusa-
tive, Vocative. The Dual has only two case-forms, one for
the Nom., Ace, and Yoc, the other for the Gen. and Dat.
In the Plur., the Yoc. is always like the Nom.
3. Three Genders : Masculine, Feminine, Neuter.
* The Stem will always be left unaccented.
36 GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. § 101.
§ 101. The gender is known :
1. From certain general characteristics of sex, in which
the Greek language almost entirely coincides with the
Latin. Besides the rule founded in the nature of things,
that the designations of male persons are masculine, those
of females feminine, the following rules are to be observed :
§ 102. a) The names of rivers and winds (gods of rivers
and winds), and Tnonths (6 ixi]v, the month), are masculine :
6 Evpwrag, the River Eurotas j 6 Zf^ujooc, the west wind j
6 'E/caro^jSatwv, the month Ilecatombceon.
§ 103. h) The names of t7'ees, lands (17 yf/, the land),
islands {y\ vfjo-oc, the islaTid), and most cities^ are femi-
nine : 7} ^pvg,the oak; i] ' ApKalia, Arcadia ; 17 AeVjSoc,
the island of Leshos / /? KoXo^wv, the city of Coloj)hon.
Most abstract substantives also, i. e.^ those which denote a
condition, relation, act, or property, are feminine : 17 iXirig,
hope / 17 viKti, mctory ; 17 BiKaiocrvvr^f righteousness ; 17
rax^rrjc, quickness.
§ 104. c) Many names o^ fruits are neuter : to ctvkov, the
fig ; most diminutives also, both of masculine and feminine
words : ro yepovriov, dimin. of 6 yeptov, the old man / ro
yvvaiov, dimin. of r) yvvi), l^^ vsoman. Farther, every name
and word which is adduced merely as a word : to avOpMirog,
the name '' man f'' to ^iKaiocrvvt}, the idea of righteous-
ness f'' and the names of the letters, to aXcpa, to my pa.
§ 105. 2. From the ending of the Stem the gender is
known according to §§ 113, 125, 137-140.
3. In Declension, the Neuter may be distinguished from
the Masculine and Feminine, Jbr all Neuters have
a) no Accusative or Vocative distinct from the Nom.
h) no g as case-sign of the Nom. Sing.
c) the ending a in Nom. Ace. and Yoc. PI.
§ 106. The Greek language, like the English, employs
the definite Article. The forms of the Article are the
following :
109.
ACCENT IN DECLENSION.
37
Masc.
Fern.
Neut.
Singular.
Nom.
V
TO
the.
Qen.
TOV
Trig
TOV
of the.
Bat.
Ti^
â– ^y
T(^
to the.
Ace.
TOV
Trjv
TO
the.
Dual.
N.A.
TOJ
TO. or Thi
TU)
the.
G.D.
Tolv
TCLIV or TOlv
TOXV
of or to the.
Plural.
Nom.
01
ai â– ^^ TOi
the.
Gen.
tG)V
TUIV
tCjv
of the.
Bat.
toIq
Toig
TO~ig
to the.
Ace.
TOVQ
Tag
TO.
the.
The following general rules on accentuation apply to all
the declensions of substantives.
§ 107. a) The accent remains unaltered on the syllable
on which it stood in the Nominative as long as the gen-
eral laws of accent allow : avOptoTroQ, man, avOpwire (Yoc.) ;
avKoVfJig, (TVKa (Nom. Plur.). Exceptions, §§ 121 and 142,
181,2.
h) But when the original accentuation becomes impos-
sible by the length of the final syllable or by increase at
the end, the accent is shifted only as near to the end of the
word, and is changed only as much, as is absolutely neces-
sary : avdpisJTToq, onan, avQpwirov (Gen. Sing.), avOpcjiroig
(Dat. Plur.) ; (rCojuaf hody, awfiaTog (Gen. Sing.), cTMjuaTCJv
(Gen. Plur.) ; tcTxoc, wall, rsixovg (Gen. Sing.).
§ 108. c) The terminations oi and at are not considered
long in regard to accent ; hence avOpwirot, yvtojuai (yvw^r?,
opinion).
^§ 109. d) The Genitives and Datives of all numbers,
if the last syllable is long, can never have the acute upon
this syllable, but only the circumflex : iroTafiov, Gen. Sing.
38 THE A DECLENSION. § 110.
of 7roTafi6t;,rive7' ; TijuyjDsit. Sing, of n/xtj, honor ; ttoSwv,
Gen. Plur. of TTovg,foot ; iiy\voiv. Gen. Dual of p/v^ month,
§ 110. Originally there was only a single declension, for
which reason much has still remained common, which we
shall put together below, § 173. But we distinguish Two
Princvpal Declensions according to the ending of the
Stems :
1. the Fi7'st Principal Declension {vowel declension),
which comprehends the Stems ending in a and o ; and
2. the Second Principal Declension {consonant declen-
sion), which compreh^^s the Stems ending in consonants,
but also those in the soft ^wels i, v, in diphthongs, and a
small number of Stems in o.
First Principal Declension.
( Vowel-declension,)
§ 111. The first principal declension is subdivided into
two, viz. :
A. The A Declension,
B. The O Declension.
What is common to both is put together below, § 134.
A. The A Declension
{commonly called the First Declension).
§ 112. The A Declension comprehends those words
whose Stems end in a. In certain cases, however, this a
becomes r]. Hence the A Declension of the Greeks cor-
responds both to the A, or first, and to the E, or fifth. De-
clension of the Latin lang-uaffe.
§ 113. The A Declension contains only Masculines and
Feminines. The two genders are most easily distinguishil
in the Nom. Sing., in which the masculines take g, the
feminines no case-ending. Hence the terminations of
115.
THE A DECLENSION.
39
the Nom. Sing, are in the feminine a, rj, in the masculine
§ 114. 1. Feminines.
Examples.
X<^pa, Icind.
y\a)(T(Ta, tongue.
TifXT]^ honor.
Stems.
XOipa [terra]
yX(o<T<ra
tI ft a
Singular.
Nmn.
xwjoa [terra]
y\u)(j(Ta
Tifiy)
Gm.
XWpUQ
y\u}a<rr]Q
Tifirjg
Dat.
Xd>pq. [terras]
yXwacry
Tifiy [re-i]
Ace.
X(opd-v [terra-m]
yXaiaad-v
Tifiri-v [re-m]
Voc.
XU)pd [terra]
yXaxrad
Tifir)
Dual.
N. A. V.
X(opa
yXwaffd
Tina
G.D.
X(opaiv
y\b}U<jaiv
TijxaXv
Plural.
Nam.
Xiopai [ten'se]
yXwaaai
Tifiai
Gen.
Xwpwv
yXuxTcriov
TlfiU>if%''
Dat.
X<^paiQ
yXaxraaiQ
Tifidig
Ace.
X^pdg [terras]
yXwaadg
Tifiag
Voc.
XoJpai [terrse]
yXwcraai
Tifiat
Examples for Declensicn.
Bed, goddess. SS^a, ojnnion. yij, earth.
(TKid, shadow. TTvXr], gate. yvojfir], opinion.
(3ia,jorce.
§ 115. In certain cases in the Singular, but never in the
Dual and Plural, a becomes rj. Hence the following rules :
1. In order to form the Nom. Sing, from the Stem, or
from a given case-form of the Dual or Plural :
§§ llC-117. Dialects. — 1. The Doric dialect nsi'cr changes a into tj:
Tifid, Tifxag ; yXuJacra, yX^aadg.
3. The Ionic dialect changes every long a in the Singular into t] :
(TO017;, TTSTprj, jSamXdrjg, fxoipy. Short a is generally unchanged, as ^aai-
Xeid, fioXpdv : but in abstract substantives in -eid, -oid, a is likewise
changed into rj : dXi]9eiT], truth, Att. dXi^Oua ; EVTrXoir], good passage; and
also in Kvharj, steam from fat, SkvXX?/. The d remains in Oed and some
j)roper names.
3. The Voc. of vvfuprj, young woman, is in Homer vvficpa.
40 THE A DECLENSION-. § 116.
cb) a remains in the Nom. Sing, after £, i, or jo (§ 41) :
St. ao(^ia, Nom. Sing, crotpia, wisdom ; Dat. Plur. iriTpaig,
Nom. Sing, irirpa, rock.
h) a remains in the Nom. Sing, after o-, and after the
double consonants X,, S, ^, a a (or r r), XX, as well as in the
feminine designations in -aiva\ St. a ju a ^ a, Nom. Sing.
cLfia^a, carriage; Gen. Plur. Xtaivoiv, Nom. Sing. Xiaiva,
lioness.
c) After other vowels and consonants a is generally
changed into ri in the Nom. Sing. : St. j3oa, Nom. Sing.
j3o//, cry ; Ace. Plur. yvwfxag, Nom. Sing, yvw^ij (opinion).
More important exceptions are: to a) kto/ot;, girl; Kopprj, temple;
^eipr], neck — to V) tparj, dew — to c) arod, hall; xp^^i color ; TuXfia,
'boldness ; Siaira, mode of life.
§ 116. 2. In order to form the other cases in the Singu-
lar according to a given Nom. Sing. :
a) If the Nom. Sing, ends in rj, this letter remains
throughout the Sing. : ^iktj, justice, ciKr}g, ^iKy, ^iK-qv, ^ikt],
h) If the Nom. Sing, ends in a, this letter remains always
in the Ace. and Yoc. : a/uLa^a, a/uLa^av.
c) If the Nom. Sing, ends in o, this letter remains also in
the Gen. and Dat. when preceded by a vowel or /> (§ 41) :
Nom. Sing. (T0<^m, wisdom, Gen. ao^iag ; Nom. Sing, aroa,
colonnade, Dat. oro^t : also in some proper names with long
a : Nom. Sing. Ar)Sa, Gen. Aii^ac ; and in jxva (contracted
from fivaa), Gen. fivag,
d) Otherwise a of Nom. Sing, becomes t) in Gen. and
Dat. : Nom. Sing, fiovcra. Gen. juovcrrig ; Nom. Sing. ^laLTa,
Dat. diaiTT}.
§ 117. For thequantity of a in the Nom. and Ace. Sing.,
the general rule is : apurum (after vowels) and a after p is
long, every other a is short : Oed, goddess / afxiXkayfight.
The exceptions are generally shown by the accent (§ 84, Obs. 2).
The most important are the fern, designations in -rpia and -ua :
\paXTpta, female player ; (SaaiXeia, queen (but j3am\Eid, dominion) ;
and several words with diphthongs in the last syllable but one,
as <T<paipa, ball; evvoia, good will; /loXpa, fate.
§120.
THE A DECLENSION.
41
§ 118. The Gen. Plur. has the ending mv, which com-
bines with the Stem a to form awv, contr. wv. This is the
reason that the Gen. Plur. of ' all words in this declension
has the circwnjlex : x^P^f X^P^^ j Xiaiva, XeatvCjv (Excep-
tions, § 181. Compare § 123).
§ 119. The Dat. Plur. originally ended in cr i, before
which I is added to the a of the Stem. The aiai thus
formed is usually shortened into a i g, but the original form
is found even in Attic writers in poetry and prose. (Com-
pare § 128, D.)
§ 120. 2. Masculines.
Examples.
vedvidg, youth.
TToXiTijc, citizen.
'Epfirjg, god Hermes.
Stems.
vedvta
TT oXIt a
'Ep fiT] (from ' EjO/iea)
Singular.
Nom.
vedvid-g
TToXlTTJ-g
'Epfiij-g
Gen.
vedviov
TToXlTOV *
'EpfJiov
Dat.
vmviq.
TToXlTy
'Epfiy
Ace.
veavia-v
TToXlTIJ-V
'Epfirj-v
Voc.
vedvid
TToXlTa
'EpM
Dual.
J^.A.V.
vedvid
TToXlTd
'Epfid, statues of
Hermes.
O.D.
redviaiv
TToXiTaiv
'Epfxaiv
Plural.
JVom.
vedviai
TToXTrai
'Epfxal
Gen.
vEdvidv
TToXlruiv
'Epfxaiv
Dat.
veaviaiQ
TToXiraig
'Epfidig
Ace.
vedvidg
TToXirdg
'Epfidg
Voc.
VEaviai
TToXXrai
'Epfidl
§ 118. Dialects. — 4. The -aujv of the Gen. Plur. is preserved in the
Horn, dialect : KXimdiov (/cXter/a, tent), dyopdojv (dyopd, speech) ; but -siov
also occurs, in which case e is generally lost by synizesis (§ 39) : ttu-
aeiov, of all, fern.
The Dorians contract -aiov into dv (§ 37, D. 3) : Oedv, dearmn.
§ 119. Dialects. — 5. The Dat. Plur. in Ionic ends in -y(Ti(v), -yg (but
also in the Attic -aig) : KXi(ny<n, Trkrpyg.
42 THE A DECLENSION. § 121.
Examples for Declension.
rafiiag, treasurer. (TTpaTKOTije, warrior. dSoXhxvQ, idbbler.
Nifc/ac, Nicias. iraiSoTpi^riQ^ wrestling- ' AXKi^iddrjQ.
'Kpirrie, judge. master.
§ 121. In the Masculines, as well as in the Feminines,
when a vowel or p precedes, the a of the Stem remains
and is long; after every other letter it becomes r) in the
Nom. Dat. and Ace. Sing.
Those words which in the Nom. Sing, end in rri-g,
names of peoples, and compound words, have a short in the
Voc. Sing. : TroXTra, Ilipaa (Nom. Sing, llipar]-^, Persian) ;
y^wnirpa (Nom. Sing. ye(i)iuiTpr}-g, land-measxiver). The
Voc. Eiairora (Nom. Sing. ^eaTroTrj-g, lord) draws back the
accent, contrary to § 107, a, to the first syllable. All oth-
ers have t) in the Vocative : Kpovidrj (Nom. Sing. Kpo-
viSrj-g).
§ 122. The Declension of the Masculines is distinguished
from that of the Feminines :
1. in the Nom. Sing, by g being added to the Stem ;
2. by the Gen. Sing, ending in o u.
Ohs. — The termination of the Gen. Sing, of the masculines is prop-
erly -0, which, with the a of the Stem, foims -ao (see the Homeric
dialect); by weakening a to e (§ 118, D.) and contraction (§ 37)
arises ov : TroXirdo (ttoXitso), ttoXitov.
§§ 121 and 122. Dialects. — 1. The Epic dialect in some words omits
the Q of the Nom. Sing., in which cases the a remains short: 'nnroTd,
horseman; vetpeXijyepsTdjClovd-gathei'er. (Comi^are Lai. poeta, scriba.)
2. The Dorians also in the masculines put d for i], and contract a o
into d. (§§ 34, D. ; 37, D. 3.)
3. Homer has three forms in the Gen. Sing. :
a) the original -do : 'Arpeiddo ;
5) -eo) with the quantity transposed (where e is lost by synizesis,
§§ 37, D., 39, D.) : 'ArpdSeoj. The accent remains unchanged, in spite
of the w in the final syllable. The New-Ionic form is the same.
c) -u) by contraction : 'Epfielio (N"om. Sing. 'Epfieid-g = Attic 'Epfirjg),
^opiu) (Nom. Sing, ^opkdg). Compare § 37, a.
§ 125. THE O DECLENSION. 43
^oppcLQ (contracted from f3opm-g, north wiruT), contracts the original
a o in the Gen. Sing., after Doric fashion, into d : j3oppd. The
same takes place with some Doric and Roman proper names,
and a few other words: 'EvXXag, Sulla ; 6pvi9o9rjpa£j fowler, Gen.
Sing. a.
§ 123. In the Dual and Plural the Declension of the
Masculines is the same as that of the Feminines.
Exceptions to the accentuation prescribed in § 118 are xpv<^tv-Q,
usurer; tTrjmai, trade-winds, Gen. Plur. xpn<yT(t)v (xprjcrTuiv in the O
declension, fi-om XjO?](Tr6e, good) and irrjmiop.
B. The O Declension
{commonly called the Second Declension).
«
§ 124. The O Declension comprehends those words
whose Stems etid in o, together with a few whose Stems
end in w (§ 132). It answers to the o- or Second Declen-
sion in Latin.
§ 125. The O Declension is the complement of the A
Declension in regard to gender. It contains Masculines
and Neuters., but only few Feminines.
The termination of the Masculines and Feminines in the
Nom. Sing, is o-q, that of Neut'ers o-v [Lat. u-s^ u-mP\,
The Masculines and Feminines are declined alike ; the
Neuters are distinguished from them (compare § 105) only
by- . '. .
1. The Nom. and Yoc. Sing, taking the Accusative end-
ing V : Sw/oo-v (gift) \_donu-in\,
2. The Nom. Ace. and Yoc. Plur. ending in a : '^dpa
[dona'].
44
THE O DECLENSION.
§126.
§126
•
Examples.
6 av9po)7ro-g, man
ri 6d6-g, way.
TO diopo-v, gift.
Stems.
dv9 pOJTTO
6do
S Ui p
Singular.
Mm.
dvdpojTTo-Q [dominu-s]
oSo-g
dwpo-v [donu-m]
Gen.
dv9p(t)7rov
odov
diijpov
Bat.
dv9pu)7rq) [domino]
6 dip
diop(ii [dono]
Ace.
dv9pu)7ro-v [dominu-m]
6d6-v
Saipo-v [donu-m]
Voe.
dv9p(t)Tre [domine]
ode
dwpo-v [donum-]
Dual.
N.A.V.
dv9pu)7rb)
odo)
Swpoj
G.J).
dv9pwTroiv
odoXv
dilJpoiv
Plural.
Worn.
dv9poj7roi [domini]
odoi
Sdpa [dona]
Gen.
dv9p(o'!ro)v
ddu)V
ddjpojv
Dat.
dv9p(b7roiQ
oColg
dwpoig
Ace.
dv9pw7rovg [dOTTlino-s]
bdovg
duipa [dona]
Voe.
dv9pu)7roi [domini]
odoi
dwpa [dona]
6e6g, God.
vofiog, law.
Kivdvvog, danger,
ravpog^ Imll.
Esamples for Declension.
TTOTuiiog, river.
TTovog^ trovMe.
fiiog, life.
9dvarog, death.
(TVKOV, Jig.
fiBTpov, measure.
ifiaTiov, dress.
§ 127. Ods. — The Feminines are partly known by the general rules
already given (§§ 101, 103) : rj (prjyog, esculent oaJc; rj dfiTreXog, vine;
, rj vijaog, island ; t} -qTreipog, continent ; K6piv9og.
The following also are feminine :
1. The names of different kinds of earth and stones: ^d^^og, sand ;
Koirpog, dung; iv-^og^ chaTk ; 7r\iv9og, hrick ; (nrocog, ashes; 4^)}(pog,
pebble ; jSdaavog, touch-stone.
2. Different words for way: oS6g, KeXEv9og, drpairog, path ; dfia^irog,
carriage-road. In the same manner, r) Td(ppog, dike, but 6 orerwTrof,
narrow way.
3. Words conveying the idea of a cavity: xv^og, chest of draicers;
yvd9og, jaw ; KifiioTog, chest ; <Top6g, coffin ; \r}v6g, wine-vat ; Kupdo-
^ TTog, hneading-trough ; Kdjxlvog, oven.
4. Several adjectives used as substantives : rj didfxerpog (supply
ypa/^HT], line), diameter; avyKXrjTog (supply fiovKi], council), meeting
of the council.
§ 130. THE O DECLENSION. 45
5. Single words: /3t/3\oe, hook; pd(3dog, staff; StdXeKTog, dialect;
v6(Tog, disease ; dp6(Tog, dew ; doKog, 'beam. Many designations of
personal beings are common^ that is, with the same form they
are masculine when they denote a male, feminine when they
denote a female: 6 066^, god ; ^ 0£6e, goddess; 6 avOpiorrog and i)
dv9p<jJ7rog. ^
§ 128. The ending of the Gen. Sing, is -o, which, with
the o of the Stem, is contracted into ov (compare § 122) :
avBp(i)iro-o = avOpwirov.
§ 129. The Nominative form is sometimes used instead
of the Vocative form : the Vocative of Oeog is always the
same as the Nom. : w Oeog [Lat. deus] : a^e\(l)6g, brother,
has aScX^t in the Vocative with the accent thrown back.
Contracted Declension.
§ 130. Several words which have £ or o before the last
letter of the Stem may contract these vowels with the o.
The rules of §§ 36 and 37 are here applied : fa, however,
contrary to § 38, is contracted into a.
§ 128. Dialects. — The Epic dialect in the Gen. Sing, has the older
form 1 for the ending ; i o with o of the St. produces oio : dvOpcjTroio,
TTiSioLo {m^io-v) afield. We also, however, find the Attic ov.
Other Epic peculiarities are : -oav = oiv in the Gen. and Dat. Dual :
wfiouv ((hfiog, shoulder) : — oiai(v) = oig in the Dat. Plur. : dv9pu)7roi(n{v),
which is also New-Ionic, and is found even in Attic writers (compare
« 119).
§ 130. DinRts. — The Ionic dialect leaves the forms uncontracted.
46
CONTRACTED O DECLENSION.
131.
Examples.
6 vov-g, sense
TO 6<jTovv^ hone.
Stems.
V 00
6 <TTe
Singular.
Nam.
v6o-Q
VOVQ
6<tHo-v
OGTOV-V
Gen. n^
voov
VOV
offTeov
6<TT0V
Bat.
VOl^
Vi^
ocrrsqt
btJTif
Ace.
v6o-v
vov-v
0(TTeO-V
0<JTOV-V
Voc.
voe
VOX)
oarko-v
6(TT0V-V
Dual.
N. A. V.
v6<o
vw
OffHlO
6(TTb)
G.D.
VOOLV
volv
ocrrkoiv
6(TT0Xv
Plural.
Norn.
VOOl
vol
oarka
OCTTO.
Om.
v6(t)v
vG)V
6(TTe(OV
6(TTU)V
Bat.
vooig
vdiQ
offTtoig
ocrrolg
Ace.
VOOVQ
VOVQ
6(TTea
dtTTO.
Voc.
VOOL
vol
oarsa
oara
ttXouc, voyage.
Examples for Declension.
povQ^ stream. ddeX^idovQy 'brother's son.
§ 131. Some irregularities of accentuation occur in the
contraction, viz. :
1. the Nom. Dual is made oxytone, contrary to § 87. •
2. compound words leave the accent on the last syllable
but one, also contrary to § 87 : TrcjOtVXtf), Dat. of irepiirXovg,
circumiiavigation, for ir^pnrXiJ^, from -ow.
3. the word Kavwv, hasJcet, is contracted into gkvouv, con-
trary to § 87.
On contracted adjectives, see § 183.
Attic Declension.
§ 132. A small number of words, instead of the short
0-sound (o), have the long (w). This w at the end of the
§* 131. Dialects. — A Gen. ending -o appears in Homer in Ilerew-o,
Gen. Sing, from the Nominative n€r£w-c.
134.
ATTIC O DECLENSION.
47
Stem goes through all the cases, but at the same time takes
the case-endings as far as possible. Most ^f these words
have £ before w, and for -tw there also occurs the additional
form -a o : vew-g, temple, together with vao-g ; Xsuj-g, people,
together with Xa6-g (compare § 37, D.). This Declension
is called the Attic.
On adjectives in w-g, see § 184; on some words which
fluctuate between this and the second principal declension,
see § 174.
Examples.
6 vEU)-g, temple.
TO dvu)yeu)-v, upper room.
Stems.
V e u)
dvo) y eu)
Singular.
JVbm.
V(.(x)-Q
avwyeoj-v
â– Gen.
veu)
dvioyeu}
Dat.
VSijJ
dv(t)ye(p
Ace.
veu)-v
av(oyEU)-v
Dual.
N. A. V.
veto
dvujyEOi
a.D.
ve.ij}V
avioyEijiV
Plural.
Nom.
VEl^
dvioyeu)
Gen.
veujv
dvwyeiov
Dat.
vecpg
avojyeqtg
Ace.
vewg
dvojys(o
Another example : Kd\o)g, rope.
§ 133. The accentuation in these words has a twofold
irregularity, viz. :
1. €(u passes always for only one syllable in regard to ac-
cent : Mf vaXewc, apparently contrary to § 82 ;
2. even upon the Genitives and Datives, when they are
accented, the accent is put, not as a circumflex, but as an
acute, contrary to § 109.
§ 134. The A and O Declensions, that is, the Yowel or
First Principal Declension, have the following points, in
common :
48 CONSONANT DECLENSION. § 135.
1. the masculines have in the Nom. Sing, the ending -c.
2. the masculines have in the Gen. Sing. (§§ 122, 128)
the ending ~ov,
3. all three genders have i subscriptum with a long vowel
in the Dat. Sing.
4. all three genders have -v in the Ace. Sing.
5. all three genders have the Stem vowel lengthened in
the Nom. Ace. and Yoc. Dual.
6. all three genders affix -tv to the Stem vowel in the
Gen. and Dat. Dual.
7. all three genders have -wv in the Gen. Plur.
8. all three genders affix -mv or g with preceding i to the
Stem vowel in the Dat. Plur.
9. the masculines and feminines affix -i to the Stem vowel
in the Nom. Plur.
10. the masculines and feminines affix -g (for vg) in the
Ace. Plur., lengthening the Stem vowel to compensate for
the V dropped (§42).
The diiference, therefore, is only in the formation of the
Gen. Sing, of the feminines and in the accentuation of the
Gen. Plur.
Second Principal Declension.
Consonant-declension
(commonly called the Third Declension),
% 135. The Second Principal Declension comprehends
all the Stems which end in consonants^ the soft 'vowels t
and V, or diphthongs, and a small number of Stems in o
(Nom. w). The Stem is best recognized in the Gen. Sing.,
where what remains after rejecting the termination o g may
generally be considered as' the Stem : Gen. Xtovr-oc, St.
XfQvr (Nom. Xewv, lion) ; Gen. (j)v\aK-og, St. 0vXaK (Nom.
<pvXa^, guard).
§ 139. CONSONANT DECLENSION. 49
Hence, for the exact recognition of a word of this declension, not
only the Nominative, but also the Stem or the Genitive is neces-
sary : as, Nom. caig, St. ^air, or Gen. dairSg, meal [Lat. rex^ St. reg,
or Gen. regis].
To the second principal declension correspond in Latin the third
and fourth declensions. In it the case-endings iisually appear
pure, i. e., not mixed up with the end of the Stem.
The Stems ending in the soft vowels follow the third declension,
because the soft vowels (§ 35, 1) can be used together with the
vowels of the terminations : Gen. ttItv-oq (Stem ttitv^ Nom. Trirv-g,
pine-tree). In the Stems ending in diphthongs, the v is some-
times resolved into f : for example, the Stem (3ov (Nom. /3ou-f,
ox) was originally in some forms (3oP (Latin hov), as Gen. (3oP^6g
{=ih(yD-is). See § 35, Ods. The O Stems have probably lost a
final consonant.
§ 136. The Second Principal Declension comprehends
all three genders.
The Neuters may be recognized by the inflexion, accord-
ing to § 105, from their having the Nom. and Ace. alike,
and these cases in the Plur. always with the ending -a :
(T(jJiuaT-a (St. (TWjuar, Nom. Sing, (rtofxa, hody).
§ 137. For determining the gender from the Stem, the
following are the most important rules :
a) Mascioline are the Stems in su (Nom. cu-c), rrj/o
(Nom. rr]p), rop (Nom. Ttjp), vr (with Nom. c or v pre-
ceded by a long vowel), as well as most Stems in v (of
various Nominatives) with a preceding long vowel: St.
y paipev, Nom. ypacpevg, writer / St. and Nom. a-tjjTrjp, sa-
vior; St. pr)Top, Nom. pr]Twp, orator; St. X £ o v r, Nom.
\iwv, lion, leo ; St. and Nom. aywv, contest.
§ 138. h) Feminine are all Stems in S (Nom. -Tc, -ac)?
most in i (Nom. -l-q), those in o (Nom. -w or -w-c), and the
names of qualities in r r? r (Nom. -rrj-c) : St. s X tt t ^, Nom. l\-
TTig, liojpe ; St. TT o X f, Nom. ttoX^c, Gif'V y St. tt e 1 o, Nom.
iruOwf persuasion ; St. t o- o r tj r, Nom. to-orijc^ equality.
% 139. c) Neuter are the Stems in /xar (Nom. iia)^ the
substantive Stems in q with Nom. o^ or aq, those in t or i»
which append no q in the Nominative, and those in p pre-
C
50
CONSONANT DECLENSION.
§140.
ceded by a short vowel in the Nom. : St. o- w ju a r, Nom.
(T(oiua, hod?// St. y £ V £ c> I^om. yhog, genus / St. and Nom.
yvpaQf <^g^ / St. and Nom. mvairi, irhustard ; St. and Nom.
aoTw, ciUj ; St. and Nom. r]Top, heart,
% 140. The following words must be noticed separately :
77 yaGTr]p {j^t. y a a t e p), helly / 6 ttovq {St.7ro^),Jbot/ r]
X^ip (St. x^tp)fhand / to ovq (St. (jjT),ear/ 6 irri^^yg (St.
TT »7 X ^)' forearm ; ri ^piiv (St. /o § v), diajphragm^ mhid ;
6 TTtXeKvg (St. TTcXcfcu), axe / 6 j^orpvg (St. j5oTpv\
bunch of grapes ; 6 <jTaxvg (St. (rrax^)) ^^^ of corn; 6
a^i]^ (St. o-^ T^ »c), wasp ; 6 fxvg (St. jiv g), moitse [piles'] ;
6 Ixdvg (St. I X v)ijish ; 6 a//jO (St. a £ />), a^V/ ro irvp (St.
IT vp), fire; to vdwp (St. v^aT), water.
Of two genders (common) are several names of animals, as : 6 and
t) dXeKTpviov (St. dXe/cr/owov), coch and Ae7i/ o and ri vq or trvg
(St. if or 0- v), swjme [sMs] ; 6 and r) al'^ (St. a i y), goat; 6 and r) /3oi;c:
(St. /3ow), <?.»; and many names of persons: 6 and r) ttoXq (St.
Traid), boy and ^iW; o and 77 daifnov (St. daiiJiov)^ god and ^06?-
fZess; 6 and r; fiavnc, propTiet and prophetess.
§ 141. The endings of the consonant declension are the
following :
Masculines and Femininss. .
Neuters.
Singular.
Mui.
g, or compensation by lengthening
no ending.
Gen.
og
Bat.
I
Ace.
a or V
no ending.
Voc.
no ending, or as in the Nom.
u
Dual.
N.A.V.
8
,
G.I).
OIV
Plural.
Nom.
fC
a
Gen.
wv
Dat.
ci(v)
Ace.
ag
a
Voc— Nom.
fe
a
§ 141. Dialects. — The Hom. dialect has otiv for oiv in Gen. and
Dat. Dual (compare § 129, D.), iroS-oXiv, and in Dat. Vlwv. frequently
eaa i(v) for a i(v) : '7r6d-e(T<Ti(v), seldom ea i(v) : a1y-E(Ti(i').
§ 143. CONSONANT DECLENSION. 51
§ 142. The accent in the Second Principal Declension
deviates from the rules laid down in § 107 in the following
point :
Words of one syllable accentuate the Gen. and Dat of
all numbers on the case-ending (circumflex if the vowel
be long, § 109) : ttoS-oc, ttoS-i (but -rro^-a), ttoSoTv, ttoSwv,
TTOaL
Exceptions. — 1. Participles, as: wv, being, ovTog; jSdg, going, l5dvTog
— accentuate the Genitive and Dative of all numbers on the last
syllable but one.
2. Trdg, omnis, has iravToQ, TravH, but Trdvrojv^ 7ra.(TL(v).
3. The words Traig, hoy; dfiwg, slave; 9iog,jacJcal; Tpwg, Trojan; to
(putg, light ; rj <p(^g, Mister ; t) £^g, torch ; to ovg, ear; 6 arig, moth,
are paroxytones in Gen. Plur. and Dual : â– Kai^-_w u^ti(^-<>iv, Ooj-mv,
. Tpoj-iov, ^(t)T-(jjVj (p(jjd-(Dv, d(^d-(DV, <jjT-oi,v, cE-wv (compare farther
§ 177, or^^
4. The words which have become monosyllables by contraction :
tjp = tap, spring (ver), ijpog, ripi.
§ 142 &. In regard to the quantity, it must be observed that several
monosyllables, in spite of the short Stem-vowel, are lengthened :
St. TTod, Nom. Sing. 7rov-g,foot ; St. ttuvt, Nom. Sing. Neut. ttclv,
every thing; St. irvp, Nom. Sing. Trvp, fire; St. av, Nom. Sing, avg,
hoar.
§ 143. The Stems of the Second Principal Declension
are divided into three Classes with diiferent subdivisions :
I. Consonant Stems.
1. Guttural and Labial Stems.
2. Dental Stems.
3. Liquid Stems.
IL Vowel Stems.
1. Soft-vowel Stems.
2. Diphthong Stems.
3. o Stems.
IIL Elided Stems.
1. g Stems.
2. r Stems.
3. V Stems.
52
CONSONANT DECLENSION,
144.
I. Consonant Stems.
144. 1. Guttural and Labial Stems,
i. e., Stems in k, x> Jy tt, 0, /3.
Examples.
Stems.
6 (pvXa^^ guard.
<pvXdK
ri ^Xsipj vein.
Singular.
Nom. V.
Gen.
Bat.
Ace.
(pvXa^ [dux]
(pvXaK-oQ [duc-is]
(pvXdK-X [duc-i]
<pvXdK-d [duc-e-m]
0X€i// [pleb-s]
(pXef5-6g [pl5b-is]
<}>Xe(3-i [pl6b-i]
<l>Xe(3-d [plSb-e-m]
Dual.
NA.V.
G.B.
(l>vXdK-e
<pvXdK-oiv
^Xs^-e
(pXel3-oXv
Plural.
N(m. V.
Gen.
Bat.
Ace.
(pvXdK-eg [du<?-es]
(pvXaK-(ov [duc-um]
<pvXaKi{v)
tpvXdK-dg [duc-es]
<pXel3-eg
<pXs(3-ojv
tl>Xe(3-dg
Examples for Declension.
'O fjLvpfir}^^ ant, St. fi v p fi rj k. j) <p6pfxiy^, ??/r6, St. <p o p fi i yy.
Tj fidari^, whip, St. /* a o- r I y. 6 AiOio^p, .^Sthiopian, St. Ai9 lo tt.
r) ^r]H, cough, St. f3r]X.
§ 145. All these Stems are Masc. or Fem. The Nom.
Sing, is formed by affixing g to the Stem : the g with the
final consonant of the Stem forms 5, \p, as in the Dat. Plur.
(§ 48). The Yoe. is always the same as the Nom.
Ohs. — The Stem a X w tt e k has the vowel irregularly lengthened in
the Nom. Sing.: dXwTnjH, fox ; while, on the contrary, the long
vowel in the Stems ktjpvk, ^oivIk, is shortened in the Nom. ;
Kripv^, herald ; ^olviS,, palm-tree, where the accent shows that the
V and I are short by nature (compare § 83, Ob%. 1). rpix has Nom.
Sing. 10 1 1, hair, Dat. Plur. 9pi^i(y) (compare § 54, a).
§147.
CONSONANT DECLENSION.
53
• § 146.
2. Dental Stems, i, e.,
Stems in r.
e,s,v.
Examples.
â– q XajXTraQ
TO (Toifia
6 yspLoi
6 riySfiMv
Stems.
Xa fiTT a d
<T w/A a r
y e povT
-qyefiov
lamp.
lody.
old man.
leader.
Singular.
Nom.
XafiTrd-Q
(ToJfia
yep(x)v
rjyEjxwv
Oen.
XaftTrdS-og
(Tu)fidr-OQ
yspovr-OQ
Tjyefiov-og
Dat.
Xa/x7rdd-i
au)fidT-i
yepovT-X
rjyefiov-X
Ace.
Xa/XTrdd-d
aaifia
ykpovT-a
rjyefiov-d
Voc.
Xajiird-Q
auifia
ykpov
I'lyeficjv
Dual.
N.A. V.
XafiTrdd-e
(TtofidT-e
yspovT-e
7)yep.6v-e
Q.D.
XafiTrdd-oiv
aiofidr-oiv
yep6vT-oiv
tjyefiov-oiv
Plural.
N. V.
Xafi7rdd-eg
au)fidT-d
yepovT-eg
rjyefiov-eg
Gm.
XafX7rdd-b)V
aujfidr-ojv
ysp6vT-o)v
Tjyeix6v-ojv
Dat.
Xafi7rd-(TL(v)
(Tu)fid-cn(v)
ykpov-(n{v)
riyeix6-(n{v)
Ace.
XafiirdS-dg
awfidT-d
ykpovr-dg
â– qy^p-ov-dg
Examples for Declension.
T) TTUTpi-g, native country^ St-Trarpid.
TO ovofia, name^ St. 6v o fiuT.
if vv^, night [nox for nocts], St. w kt [tioc^].
77 KUKOTTj-g, badness, St. k a k o r ij t.
TO /uIXt, honey [mel], StfieXir.
6 o^ovg, tooth [den-s for dent-s]^ St. odovr [dent].
6 deXcpig, dol2)hin, St. dsXiplv.
o 7roifir]v, shepherd, St. tt o i fiev.
6 "EXXtjj/, Hellen, St. 'E \ X j? v.
6 aywv, contest, St. d y w v.
Adjectives :
7rkvT}-g, poor, St. TTEVJJT.
aKOJv, neut. uKov, unwilling, St. aKovr.
aTrpdyfiujv, neut. dirpayfiov, inactive, St. aTrpayfxov.
§ 147. In the dental Stems, as in the Stems to be no-
ticed below, the Xom. Sing. Masc. and Fem. may be formed
in two ways, viz. :
1. With Sigma affixed to the Stem. Before this sigma
54 CONSONANT DECLENSION. § 147.
the consonants r, ^, 6, when they stand alone, disappear
altogether (§ 49) : Aa/x7ra5-c, ^ajuira-g ; KopvO-g, Kopv-g,
helmet ; but v and vr have the short vowels of the Stem
lengthened by way of compensation (§ 42), so that a, t,. v
become a, 7, £» ; but £ becomes e f, and o,ov'. -Kavr-g, 7ra-c,
every; h-g,t1-g,one; oSovr-gyO^ov-g, tooth.
Exceptions. — The monosyllabic Stem irod [ped] (§ 143 h) has tlie
vowel lengthened exceptionally : rrov-g [Lat. j^e-s, i. e., ped-s] ;
dafxapT lias Nom. Sing, r) ddfiap, spouse, for Sajxapg, because of its
harshness.
2. Without Sigma being affixed to the Stem ; but in its
stead the Stem-vowel, in case it is short, is lengthened, so
that by this lengthening (§ 42, Ohs.) e becomes 17, and
o becomes 10: St. noLfxev, Nom. TToifii]v, shepherd; St.
-nyefiov, Nom. rij£fjiu)v. If the Stem- vowel is long of
itself, the Nom. Sing, is like the Stem : 6 aywy, contest.
The r of the Stems in v r in this formation is rejected,
according to § 67: yepovr, Nom. ysptjv (for yepwvT).
The simple t of the Participial Stems in or is changed
into g: St. XcX UK or, Nom. Sing. XeXukwc (for XeXvkwt),
having loosened.
Obs. 1. The vowel w shows that g is not a mere afl&x in XeXvkojc, one
who has loosened. Compare xa|0i-c,/<2w?', St. x'^pi-'^-
Ohs. 2. The Stems in 'd, 9, as well as those in avT, bvt, always
form the Kom. Sing, with sigma ; but Stems of substantives in
ovT and the Stems in v generally without g.
§ 147 h. The Neuter has the pure Stem in the Xom.
Ace. and Yoc. Sing. (§ 136), as far as the laws of sound in
regard to final consonants (§ 67) admit it : \v%iv{j), loosened
(see § 187), XeXu/coc (for X c X v »c o r) ; yaka, milk, from the
Stem yaXaKT (Gen. yakaKT-og = Lat. lact-is). On ttuv
(Stem iravr), see § 142 b. ■.
Obs. — On the Ace. Sing, in v, belonging to some Stems in it, i9, id,
v9, vd, see § 15C.
§ 149. CONSONANT DECLENSION. 55
§ 148. The Vocative of masculines and feminines some-
times has the pure •tem, as far as is possible : "ApTejuL (St.
ApT e jLLid), A7av (St. Alavr), yipov (St. y e povr); some-
times it is like the Nom. (necessarily so when the accent
is on the last syllable) : rjysfxwv ; and in all participles even
when the accent is not on the last syllable : Xiyijjv (St.
Xeyovr), speaking.
The Voc. irai, hoy, from the Stirai S, is specially to be
observed. *
0^8. — The Stems 'AttoXXwv, UoasidoJVj wliich are like the Nom.,
shorten the vowel and draw back the acqent in the Vocative :
"AttoXXov, JlotreiSov. The accent is also draw^n back in many
compound words : 'Aydfiefivov, ' ApiaroyuTov (§ 85).
§ 149. The formation of the Dat. Plur. results from the
laws of sound (§§ 49, 50). r, 3, Q, and simple v, are
dropped before (ti(v) without leaving any trace; but vt
is dropped with the previous vowel lengthened by way of
compensation.
Exception. — The adjectives (not participles) in evr admit no
lengthening of the vowel by w^ay of compensation : St. % a p t e vr
(Nom. Sing. xap'ffC, graceful^ Dat. Plur. x<ip'i^<^i^(y)- See Inflexion,
§ 187).
§ 148. Dialects. — The Vocative of the Stem dvaKx (Nom. Sing.
ava^^ ruler) is in Homer dvd (shortened from dvaKv: compare the
neuter ydXa, § 147 &) ; some Stems in v r lose the v in the Voc. : "ArXa
for ''ArXar(r).
§ 149. Dialects. — Homer forms the Dat. Plur. 7ro(rcr/(r) instead of
7ro^-(ri(v), Ait. TToaiv {ttovq^ foot) \ the d being assimilated instead of
being rejected.
56
CONSONANT DECLENSION.
§150.
§ 150.
3. Liquid Stems, i. e.
, Stems in X and
P'
Examples.
Stems.
6 (IXg
salt.
6 prjTiop
prjTop
orator.
IXTITep
mother.
6 Orjp
Orip
game.
Singular.
Nom.
Gen.
Bat.
Ace.
'Voe.
iiX-g [sal]
a\-6g [sal-is]
aX-i [sal-i]
icX-a [sal-e-m]
liX-g
pnT(op
phrop-og
pr]TOp-i
pr]Top-a
prJTop
firiTTjp [mater]
firjTp-og [matr-is]
prfTp-i [matr-i]
fxrjTsp-a [matr-e-m]
firjrep
Onp
9r]p-6g
9r]p-i
9fjp-a
9np
Dual.
N. A. V.
G.B.
uX-e
aX-olv
6r]Top-e
prjTop-OiV
pr]T£p-e
p.r]T'tp-oiv
9np-e
9r)p-oiv
Plural.
N. V.
Gen.
Bat.
Ace.
ciX-eg [sal-es]
aX-wv [sal-um]
aX-<Ti(v)
llX-ag
pr]TQp-eg
prjTop-oJv
pr)Top-ai{v)
pf]Top-ag
prjTep-eg [matr-es]
p7)Tsp-wv [matr-um]
pvrpd-<Ji{v)
fiT)T(p-ag
9np-eg
9r]p-CJv
9r}p-ai{v)
9iip-ag
Examples for Declension.
TO vEKTap, nectar. 6 Kpari'ip, mixing^ug, St. Kparij p.
6 ai9r}p, cether, St. al9 ep. 6 ^wjo, thief {fur), St. ({xo p.
§ 151. The only Stem in X which forms the Nom. Sing, with sigma
is dX ; all Masc. and Fem. Stems in p form the Nom. Sing, with-
out sigma (§' 147, 3) ; hence with long Stem- vowels the Nom.
Sing, is like the Stem ; short Stem-vowels, however, are length-
ened, i. e., e into i/, o into w.
The neuter has the pure Stem in the Nom. Sing. : to r/rop, heart.
Only the monosyllabic Stem irvp lengthens the v: to itvp^fire
(§143,&).
§ 152. The Yoc. Sing, has the pure Stem : pryrop. The
Stem (Tit)Tri p (Nom. (Tii)Tr]p, savior) shortens rj into e, and
draws back the accent (compare § 148) : Yoc. (TtJTsp,
§ 153. The Stems Trare p, fxrjrtp, Ovyars p, y a a rep,
§ 150. Dialects. — )? llXg, -poet, the sea.
§ 153. Dialects. — The e is often retained in the Gen. and Dat. by
poets : fiTjTEpog ; while it is rejected in other cases : 9vyaTpa. Instead
of aGi{v) in the Dat. Plur., there may be the iaai{v) mentioned,
§ 141, D. : 9vyaTkpeaai{v).
§154
CONSONANT DECLENSION.
57
^r]fxr]Ti:p (Noms. TraT{]pf father j' fxriTtip, mother; OvyaTt^p, ^
daughter ; yacjTrip, helly ; Ar}iui]Tr)p), reject e in the Gen.
and Dat. Sing. (§ 61, e). The first four throw the accent
on the case-ending ; the last draws it back {Trarpog, At/^tj-
rpog). The £ is accented where it appears : p.r]Tipa, in spite
of fxr^np, except in the Voc, where the accent is drawn
back r irdrEp, in spite of Trarrjp, but Ace. Sing. AtjfxriTpa.
In the Dat. Plur. the syllable rLg^p-beeomeaJi^UQaetath^^
(§ 59) T pa: fjir)Tpa-<Ti(v)*
Obs. — The Stem dtrrep (Nom. Sing, dcm'jp, star) belongs to these
words only in the formation of the Dat. Plur. : d(TTpd(n(v). For
dvrip (St. dvEp), see, under the irregular words, § 177, 1.
II. Vowel Stems.
§ 154. 1. Soft-vowel Sterns, i. e., Stems in i and v.
Examples.
Stems.
r) TToXig, city.
TToXl
rj (Tuf , SOW.
(TV
TO dtJTv (dfTTv), city.
Singular.
Nom.
Gen.
Bat.
Ace.
Voc.
iroXi-Q
Tr6Xs-it)Q
{TToXe-'i) ttoXei
TToXl-V
TToXl
ffv-g
(Tv-6g
av-i
av-v
av-g
atJTV
d<rT£-og or darE-cjg
{d(TT£-l) dOTU
dCTV
darv
Dual.
KA.V.
G.B.
TToXe-e
TToXe-oiv
<rv-e
(TV-o1v
{d(TTE-E) dffTT]
dark-oiv
Plural.
N. V.
Gen.
Bat.
Ace.
{TToXE-eg) TToXeig
TToXe-OJV
7r6Xe-m(y)
(TToXe-af) TToXeig
(Tv-eg
<TV-G)V
(TV-ffi(v)
(Tu-ag or (Tvg
{d(TTe-a) dart}
d(TT£-OJV
d(TTe-cn(v)
{dtTTE-a) dart]
'^Xi^^
Examples for Declension.
6 /3orpu-c, hincJi of grapes, ")
ri TTiTv-g, pine-tree J > according to § 157.
r 6 irrixv-g, fore-arm, )
ri^vvaiii-g, power I both according to § 157.
r) ardm-g, party, J action, )
Adjectives, § 185.
C 2
58 CONSONANT DECLENSION. § 155.
§ 155. The Nom. Sing. Masc. and Fem. is always formed
by Sigma. The Neuter Sing, as well as the Vocative
Sing, of all genders has the pure Stem. Yet sometimes
the^Nom. form is used for the Vocative, and this is the case
jn all monosyllables. In the Ace. Sing. Masc. and Fem. v
is affixed to the Stem. •
On the lengthening of monosyllabic Stems, § 142 h.
But this lengthening takes* place also in the Nom. and Ace.
Sing, of some polysyllabic words.
§ 156. Barytones in it, i^, tO, vd, v9 (Nom. i g, v g), form
the Ace. Sing, generally by affixing v after rejecting the
Stem-consonant : St. i pi^ (Nom. tpi-g, strife), Ace. epi-v ;
St. Ko pvO (Nom. Kopv-Q, helmet), Ace. Kopv-v ; St. 6 pviO
(Nom. opv'i-g, bird). Ace. opvl-v. Th^^Oxytones, on the
contrary, always have a : l\7ri-g, hope, Ace. tXTrtSa ; kXeiq,
hey, stands alone ; St. k X £ t 8, Ace. kKCiv (seldom jcXtt 3-a),
Ace. Plur. icXtTc or icXftSac.
Examples,
. r) tpi-e, strife.
r} t\7rt-f , Twpe.
Stems.
kpid.
IXttiS.
Singular.
tpi-Q.
tkiri-Q.
tpid-og.
l\7rid-0£.
?pid-i.
tXirid-i.
epi-v.
lX7rid-a.
§ 157. Most Stems in i, as well as adjective and some
substantive Stems In v, change their final vowel to t in
Gen. and Dat. Sing., and in all the cases of the Dual and
§ 156. Dialects. — The Ace. Sing, in a of dental Stems is more fre-
quent in Homer : yXavKdJirid-a (yXavKw-mg, hright-eyed), tpid-a ; kXeiq is
KXrjtg, Acc. KXrj'id-a.
§ 157. Dialects. — The Ionic dialect leaves i unchanged : Gen. ttoXi-oc,
Dat. TToXl (from xoXi-i), Nom. Plur. 7r6Xi-eg, Gen. ttoXi-wv, Dat. in Herod.
7r6\i-(ri(v), Homer 7roXi-e0(n{v), Acc. iroXi-ag (Herod, also iroXig). Other
additional forms of the Homeric dialect are : Gen. Sing. TroXrj-og, Dat.
Sing. 7r6\€-i and ttoXtj-V, Nom. Plur. TroXrt-eg, Acc. Plur. 7r6Xr)-ag.
The Stems in v have always o c in the Gen. Sing. The Dat. Sing,
only is contracted : ttjjx". £vpv-g, droad, has the additional form evpia
in the Acc. Sing.
§ 158. CONSONANT DECLENSION. 59
Plur. Before the ending of the Gen. Sing, this c remains
unchanged ; in the Sterns^, however, in /, and in some sub-
stantive Stems in v, £ is followed by w ^ (instead of og),
called the Attic termination, which does not prevent the
accent from being on the antepenult : iroXe-wg, ir^XiKe-wg
(iriXeKv-g, axe).
In the Dat. Sing. £ i is contracted into £ i, in the Nom.
Plur. £ £ c and Ace. sag into £ i g, and £ a of neuter substan-
tives into T]. Adjectives maintain the uncontracted form
£a : aarii]y but yXu/cta.
§ 158. The contraction of f £ to r? in the Nom. Ace. and
Yoc. Dual is rare. The Gen. Plur. of Stems in l follows
the accent of the Gen. Sing. : ttoXe-wv like ttoXs-wc-
Most substantive Stems in v leave this vowel unchanged ;
but others, like aarv, follow the analogy of Stems in i, and
change v into f . u £ are sometimes contracted into v in the
Nom. Ace. and Voc. Dual ; in the Ace. Plur. also we find
tx^uc, with lyfiv-ag (lxOv-g,Jish), and o^pvgy Ace. Plur. of
6(j)pv-gf eyebrow.
£y\£Xu-c, eel^ retains v in the Sing. : Gen. £yx^Xi»-oc ;
but changes it in the Dual and Plur. into £ : Nom. Plur.
l'^\kkug.
The adjective 'Icpi-g, acquainted with, St. Id pi, keeps
its I unchanged through all the cases.
§ 158. Dialects. — The Dat. IxQm is in Homer contracted into ixdWt
In tlie Dat. Plur. a is sometimes doubled: vkKv-crai(y) with veicv-Ea(n(v)
(yeKv-Qj corpse).
60
CONSONANT DECLENSION.
159.
§ 159. 2.
Diphthong Stems,
i. e., Stems
in sv, aVf ov.
Examples.
6 (3a(TL\evQ
i) ypavg
6 and tj (3ovg
Stems.
/3a<Ti\€ V
ypav
(3ov
Mng.
old woman.
ox or cow.
Singular.
Norn.
l3a(n\Ev-g
ypav-g
fiov-g [bo-s]
Oen.
(3a(n\k-u)g
ypd-6g
/3o-of [bov-is]
Bat.
(J3a(n\s-i) (SaaiKei
ypd-t
/3o-f [bov-i]
Ace.
(3a(nXe-d
ypav-v
^ov-v [bov-e-m]
Voc.
(SaffiXev
ypav
(iov
Dual.
JV.A. V.
/3a(TiXe-e
ypa-e
/3o-€
G.JD.
l3amXe-oiv
ypd-oTv
(io-oXv
Plural.
iV. V.
(J3a(n\e-eg) /3ao-t\r}e
or (3a<n\uQ
ypd-eg
(36-eg [bov-es]
Oen.
(iaaCkk-ojv
ypa-u)V
(3o-wv [bo-um]
Bat.
l3a<nX€v-ai(y)
ypav-(Ti(v)
^ov-<Ti{p)
Ace.
(iacnXk-ag
ypav-g
(iov-g
6 yov£v-g, parent.
Examples for Declension.
6 iepev-g, priest. 'OSvffaev-g, 'AxiXXeu-f .
§ 160. All diphthong Stems affix c in the Nom. Sing,
and cn{v) in the Dat. Plur. ; those in av and ov affix v in
the Ace. Sing, to the full Stem. In the Yoc. Sing, the
Stem appears pure.
^ Before vowel case-endings, i. e., in all other forms, the v
^f the Stem was changed into f (§ 34, D.) : j3o/'-oc [hov-is'],
and then was entirely lost : |3o-oc [j3o-wv = ho-u7n'] (§ 35,
D. 2).
OU. — An isolated diphthong Stem is o i, Nom. oT-g, sheep [ovi-s] :
olog, oil, olv; Plur. oleg, olutv, oi<Ti{v), olg. Compare § 34, D.
§ 159. Dialects. — Homer has yprjvg for ypav-g, Dat. ypijt, Voc. yprjv or
ypTjiJ ; from j3ov-g, Ace. Plur. (i6-dg, Dat. J36-e(T(n(v). The forms /3wc,
Nom., (3a)v, Ace. Sing., are Doric.
§ 160. Dialects. — Ionic oig (pvis) for olg. Gen. oiog, Dat. Plur. dt-effm or
oeam, Acc. dig.
§162.
CONSONANT DECLENSION.
61
Some compounds of Trov-g, Jvot, form the Ace. Sing,
like Stems in ov : Tpiwovg, three-footed., Ace. TpiTrow. For
vaif'Q, see among the irregular words, § 177, 11.
§ 161. The Stems in t v, moreover, have in the
a) Gen. Sing., wg for o^. Compare § 157.
h) Dat. Sing., c i always contracted for eV.
c) Ace. Sing, and Plur., a is long and not contracted.
d) Nom. and Yoc. Plur., etg contracted by older Attic
writers into r/ g, by the later into c i g.
e) Words which have a vowel before e v may be con-
tracted also in the Gen. and Ace. Sing., and in the Ace.
Plur. : St. Ue I paitv, Nom. Ilaipaiev-g, port of Athens^
Gen. Ilefjoatwc, Ace. Xlaipaia ; xou)-g, measure^ Ace. Plur.
Xo5c. ^
Obs. — The Gen. in -e w e has arisen by transmutation of quantity
(§ 37, D. 2) out of the Horn. r]og. Hence the length of the final
syllable. In the same manner, the Ace. Sing, ea has arisen out
of r\a : still ea is also found, like edg in the Ace. Plural ; eag is
contracted by later writers into eig.
162. 3. O Stems, i. e., Stems in o and w.
Ste:
Examples.
Stems.
?7 7ni9u), persicasion.
TreiOo
6 ijptogj Tiero.
rjpu)
4
Singular.
Norn.
Gm.
Dat.
Ace.
Voc.
TraOco
(TTEiOo-og) iruBovg
(irEiOo-i) TTElOol
(ireiQo-a) TreiOib
ireiOol
Tjpio-g
iipu)-og
rjpoj-i
ijpu)-a ijpu)
rjp(o-g
Plur. T/jOW-fc
rjpcj-ojv
Vipui-aiiy)
ijpdj-ag or
Vpujg
Dual and Plural of TruQto are
formed as in the o declension.
Dual ijpoj-e
rjpw-oiv
§ 161. Dialects. — The Epic dialect lengthens the e of Stems in cv
into T) before vowels : (3am\r}-og, (SamXij-i, (SacriXij-a, (SaaiXri-eg, (SaaiXri-cjv,
62 CONSONANT DECLENSION. §163.
Examples for Declension.
r) rixoi (St. 7)xo), echo.
KaXv\pw, Ar]Ta), dfxoj-Q (St. d fiio), slave,
firjTpio-g (St. /xTjTpu)), avunculus.
§ 163. The Stems in o, all feminine, form the Nom. Sing,
without sigma, except the Stem al^o, Ndm. Sing. al^a)-g,
sha7ne, Ace. al^oj. The Ace, which is like the Nom., is
oxytone (contrary to § 87) : Tnidw, not neiOoj.
The Vocative ends in o t ; all other cases are contracted.
The Ace. of Stems in oj usually remains uncontracted.
The Stem I w, Nom. r; tw-g, dawn, has Gen. Sing, tio, Dat.
£(j> (according to § 132), Ace. I'w (from 'iwa).
Obs. — Several Stems in o v follow the above declension in some of
their forms : drjdojv, nightingale^ Gen. arj^ovQ, with di)UvoQ ; e/fcwv,
image, Gen. ukovq (compare §171).
dpicrrrj-Effmiv) (dpiffTev-g, prince) ; still there are Genitives also in € o e
and BVQ ('0^u(7€we), Datives in tV, e t, and Accusatives in e a, 7/ : Tvdi).
The New-Ionic dialect leaves e frequently uncontracted : jSamXk-eg.
§ 163. Dialects. — Homer extracts ijpco'i into 7/py, Mivioa into' MtVw.
The old and poetic form fo^&-f is rjoj-g (St. ^ o), declined like aido)-g.
Some proper names in a> in the Kom. Sing, have in the New-Ionic
dialect an Ace. in ovv : ArjTovv, 'lovp.
165.
CONSONANT DECLENSION.
63
III. Elided Stems, i. e.^ Stems which reject the final
consonant in certain forms.
§164.
1. S Stems, i. e., Stems which elide sigma.
Examples.
TO yevog, race.
M. evyevfjg, N. evyeveg, of good family.
Stems.
ysveg
ev y ev eg
Singular.
,
Nom.
yevog [genus]
M. evyevrjg N. evyev'eg
Om.
(ysve-og) yevovg
(evyeve-og) evyevovg
Bat.
{ysve-'f) yevEi
(evyeve-'i) evyevel
Ace.
yevog
(evyeve-a) evyevrj N. evyev'eg
Voc.
yevog
evyev'eg N. evyev'eg
Dual.
iV. A V.
(yeve-e) yevrj
(evyev'e-e) evyevrj
G.D.
(ysve-oiv) yevoXv
(evyeve-oiv) evyevolv
Plural.
J^.V.
{yeve-a) y'evr)
(evyeve-eg) evyevelg N". {evyev'ea) evyevf}
Gen.
(yeve-(jjv) yevaiv
{evyeve-(i)v) euyevwv
Bat.
yevE-<Ti(v)
evyev'e-<n(v)
Ace.
(yeve-a) y'evr]
(evyeve-dg) evyevelg N. (evyevea) evyevfj
Examples fo» Declension.
TO eUog^form. Kd\\og,deauty. fiaXog, song. axOog, burden.
Adjectives :
(Ta^rjg, Neut. aa^eg, clear. aKpijSrjg, Neut. ccKpilSeg, exact.
evffOrjg, Neut. evrjOeg, simple.
§ 165. The sigma Stems retain their final consonant only
when it stands at the end, i. e., in the Nom. Ace. and Yoc.
Sing. Neuter, and in the Nom. and Yoc. Sing. Masc. and
Fem.
The Neuter substantives change the Stem-vowel £ into
o in the Nom. Ace. and Yoc. Sing. : St. y tvsg, yivog.
§ 165. Dialects. — The Epic dialect //•e(2'w^%, the New-Ionic always^
leaves the vowels of the sigma Stems uncontracted : ykveog^ y'evei.
Hom. sometimes has the Gen. Sing, evg (from € o c, § 37, D. 1) : Odp-
cevg {Qdpffog, courage).
In the Dative Plur. Homer has three endings : e-etrffi (v), e (t-<ti(v)j
and the usual e-<Ti(y): i3eXe-e(Tm{v), (3e\s(T-<Ti{v), ^e\e-ci(v), (jSeXog, dart).
64: CONSONANT DECLENSION. § 166.
JSTeuter adjectives leave f unchanged : EvyEvig. Masculines
and Feminines form the Nom. Sing, by lengthening eg
into rjg (§ 147, 2), as*c can not be affixed : tvyevrjg from
svyeveg, like Troiiurjv from ttoijulev.
Masculines and Feminines have the pure Stem in the
Voc. Sing., and in compound words which are not oxytone
in Nom. Sing, the accent is on the last syllable but two
(compare §§ 148, 85) : Nom. ^loKparrig, Voc. Sw/cparfe ;
Nom. ArijuioaOivrigfYoc. Ar^iuocrOeveg.
Obs. — The Neuter aXr]9kQ (Masc. d\r]9rig, true) draws back the accent
in interrogations : dXijOeg ; really ?
§ 166. In all other forms g is rejected (§§ 61 and 49):
yivE-'i for yivecr-L [^gener-i]. Wherever two vowels meet
they are contracted : € e in the Nom. Ace. and Voc. Dual
become r^ ; e a generally rj ; but when another vowel stands
before e they sometimes become a, according to § 41 : St.
ev^eeg, Nom. ev^erig, defective, Ace. Ivdea ; Stvyieg, Nom.
vying f healthy. Ace. vyiayhvit also vyirw St. \pEEg, Nom.
TO xpiog, debt, Neut. Plur. xpia, •The adjectives in ~^vi]g
(St. ^vig) have ^vYi and <^va : Exxpvng, well-disposed, ev^vii
and £v<pva.
Obs. — Barytone adjectives have the accent in the Gen. Plur. on the
last syllable but one, contrary to § 87 : avrapK^v (Nom. avTdpKrjg,
self-sufficient). So also Tpirjprjg, trireme, used as a substantive,
Gen. Plur. Tpirjpiov.
§ 167. Proper names in -kXetjq, compounded with Kkiog, glory (St.
KXeeg), have a double contraction in the Dat. Sing., and a single
one in all the other cases : Nom. (nepiKXerig) UspiKXijg, Gen. (Uspi-
KXeeog) UepiKXsovg, Dat. {UepiKXee'i, UepLKXki) UepiKXel, Acc. (UepLKXeea)
nepifcXea, Voc. {UepiKXeeg) UspiKXeig.
§ 166. Dialects. — A vowel before e is often contracted with it in
Homer : (nreog or (nrelog, cave, Gen. <nrtiovg, Dat. (ttt^-i (from (nrk'i), Dat.
Plur. (nrr}E(rai{v) and (T7re(T(n(v) ; evicXerjg, glorious, Acc. evKXelag (from
evKXeeag), hnt dKXrjsTg (from dKXer]g, inglorious). Herodotus ivdekg (Ivderjgj
defective), dvQpojirocpvkag (dvOpwTro^vrjg, human).
§ 167. Dialects. — The Epic dialect forms 'HpaicXfjg, 'HpaKXfj-og,
'BpaKXrj-i, 'BpaKXrj-a ; the New-Ionic, 'HpaKXkrjg, 'HpaKXe-og, 'HjoaKXI-V,
'HpafcXe-a.
169. CONSONANT DECLENSION.
§ 168. 2. T Stems, i. e., Stems which elide r.
65
Examples.
TO
Kspag, Tiorn
TO Kpsag,
meat
Stems.
KE
OUT
• KpeuT
Singular.
KA. V.
Kepag
Kpeag
Gen.
KEpaT-og
(Kspaog)
Kspwg
(Kpeaog)
Kpeutg
Bat.
KBpar-i
(Kspdi)
Kep<^
(icpsdi)
Kpk<f
Dual.
KA.V.
Kspdr-e
(Kspae)
Kspd
O.D.
KEpdT-OlV
(fCfjOffOtr)
KSpiiiV
Plural.
N.A. V.
Kspdr-a
{Kspaa)
Kspd
(Kpeaa)
Kped
Gen.
KSpdT-dJV
{Kepdojv)
KepuJv
(/cpedwv)
KpEa)U
Bat.
Kepd-(TL{v)
Kpsd-(n(y)
§ 169. r becomes g in Nom. Ace. and Yoc. Sing., accord-
ing to § 67. In the other cases some words always reject
it: e.g.,Kpiag,(Ti\agf splendor ; yripag,age; Kvi<^ag, gloom.
Others, like K^pag, retain both forms together, with and
without r. The vowels which meet are regularly contract-
ed. The quantity of a is very fluctuating. The Dat. Sing,
is written also at : aiXai.
In prose, only a few Neuters (Nom. a c) have a mova-
ble r.
§ 169. Dialects. — Homer has ^kTra-i<T(n{v) or ^sTra<T-(n(v), Dat. Plur.
of dsTrag, goblet. In Ionic a often becomes e : Homer ovSag, ground,
Gen. ovSe-og, Kwag, Jieece, Nom. Plur. Kw€-a ; Kkpag, New-Ionic Gen.
KEjOEOC.
A movable r appears also in the Stems i^pwr, yeXwr, X(t><«>7' (Nom.
t^/awf, sweat ; yeXojg, laughter; xp'^Qi sMn), Dat. l^jO^, Ace. idpw, together
with Gen. iSpoJTog ; yeXw ; and regularly in Homer xpo-of , xpo-t (poet.
Xpff), Xpo-a- Compare alddjg, ri(^g, § 163.
66 ' CONSONANT DECLENSION. § 170.
§ 170. 3. N Stems, i. e., Stems which elide v.
Examples. "
M. F. fieiKav, greater.
N. fxaiZov
Stems.
' fJLEl^OV
Singular.
,
N. V.
fid^ojv
N. fisi^ov
Oen.
IxeiZov-OQ
Bat.
fXElKoV-l
Ace.
fjid^ov-a [fiH^oa] jxeiKoi
N. fiei^ov
Dual.
J^.A. V.
HdZ,ov-f.
O.D.
fiaiZ,6v-oiv
Plural.
N. V.
fxei^ov-eg [/let^oeg] fiei^ovg
N. neiil^opa [jjiEi^oa] fxei^u)
Oen.
fiei^ov-iov
Bat.
fiEiZo-(n{v)
Ace.
fieil^ov-ag [fieil^oag] jxei^ovg
N. fxEiZova [ixEeZoa] fieiKd)
Examples for Declension.
jSeXriiov, 'better. ato-x/wr, TYiore liateful. dXy/wi/, more 'painful.
§ 171. The full and the contracted forms are equally in
use. But the open ones (/xctSoa) never occur. Compara-
tives of more than two syllables throw back the accent in
the Nom. Ace. and Yoc. Sing. Neuter upon the last syllable
but two : l^iXriov, a'/txYfoy.
Besides the comparatives (Nom. w v,- o v), there are only
the two proper names, 'AttoXXwv (Stem, and Nom.) and Ilo-
(TEi^ow (Stem and Nom.), Ace. 'AttoXXw (also 'A7roXXwv-a),
Tlocrei^M (also Iloo-ff^wv-a). On the Vocative, see § 148,
Obs. We may compare several Stems which fluctuate be-
tween o V and o (§ 163).
§ 171. Dialects. — Somer forms the Ace. KVKeai or KviceiCj from kvkewv^
mixture.
OP THK
172. . CONSONANT DEC^KgJON. ^^ ^ .^ .6^
§ 172. Synopsis of terminations in the Second Principal
Declension.
Nom.
Stem.
Gen.
in -a
-ar
TO (j(i)}ia^ l)ody.
aionaros
-ais
-aid
-air
6 Tralf, boy.
rj dais, meal.
Traidos
daiTos
-dv M.
-av K
-av
-avT
Udv, Pan.
Adj. TO irdv, the whole.
Uavog
iravTos
-ap
-ap
-apT
-a(p)T
TO tap, spring.
t) ddjxap, wife.
TO ^piap, fountain.
tapos
dafxaprog
(ppeaTog
-as F.
-as K
-ad
-air)
i) XafiTrds, lamp.
TO Kpkas, meat.
XafiTrddog
Kpeios
-ag M.
-avT
-av
6 yiyds, giant.
Adj. [ieXds,Uack
yiyavTOS
[isXavos
-avs F.
-a{v)
ri ypavs, old woTuan.
ypdos
-€t|0
-etp
r) xe/jO, hand.
X^^poQ
F.
-evT
-ev
-nd
Part. XvOeis, loosed.
Adj. els, one.
r) KXdg, Tcey.
XvQsvTog
tvos
KXeidos
-er K
-evT
-sv
Part. XvBkv, loosed.
Adj. dppEv, male.
XvQkvTos
dppevog
-6c K
<d
Adj. (Ta<pes, clear.
(Tacpovs
-€We ^1-
<v)
6 (povevg, murderer.
(poveojs
-?7v M.
-ev
-T}V
6 Xifxriv, harlfor.
6 "EXXi]v, Greek
Xifievos
"EXXtjvos
-rip
-ep
-vp
6 alQrjp, aether.
6 6r)p, game.
al^tpog
9np6s
m
CONSONANT DECLENSION.
§172.
Nom.
stem.
Gen.
-rig
r) (SapvTTjg, weight.
6, r) Tpirjpijg^ trireme.
(SapvTijTog
Tpiripovg
-I N.
-t
-tr
Adj. ISpi^ acquainted with.
TO fieXi, honey.
idpiog
fieXiTog
-IV
-tv
6 deXtpiv, dolphin.
deX(pXvog
-tg
-I
-iS
-IT
-19
-IV
7/ TToXig, city.
7] IXirig, hope.
' V xdpigjavor.
o, rj opvigj Mrd.
â– f} ^aXafiig, Salamis.
TToXsujg
IXTTidog
XdpiTog
opvWog
^aXafilvog
-ov N.
-ov
-OVT
Adj. evdaifiov,fortunute.
Part. Xvov, loodng.
evdaifiovog
XvovTog
-og N.
-or
TO ysvog, race.
Part. TTEtpvKog, having 'become.
yevovg
TTE^VKOTOg
-ovg
-OVT
-od
-o{v)
6 o^ovg, tooth.
6 irovg^foot.
6, r) /3owf , or, cow.
oSovTog
TToSog
(3o6g
-V N.
-V
TO dffTv^ city.
daTSog
-vv M.
N.
-vv
-VVT
6 fi6(Tvv, wooden tower.
Part. dsiKvvv, shmcing.
fioavvog
hiKvvvTog
-vg M.
F.
-VVT
-V
-vd
Part. deiKvvg, shmcing.
6 ixOvg,Jish.
6 TTfixvg, ell
r) x^^l^^G, chaTc.
SeiKvvvTog
Ixdvog
TTrjx^iog
xXajxvdog
-oi F.
-0
r) tthOu), persuasion.
Trei^ovg
-(OV
M.
-ov
-OJV
-OVT
rj dr]^o)v, nightingale.
6 dycJv, contest.
6 Xiwv, lion.
dri^ovog
dyCjvog
XkovTog
-WjO
'Op
6 pr]Tb)py orator.
pnTopog
173.
CONSONANT DECLENSION.
69
V
Nom.
Stem.
Gen.
-(og M.
-0
-or
-h)T
6 rjpvjg^ hero,
r) alSiog, shame.
Part. Trecpvicwg, having lecome.
6 tpcjg, love.
ripuiog
aidovg
TrecpvKOTog
ipojTog
-^
-TT
-0
6 yvxjyj vulture.
ri Karr)Xi-4/, upper story.
yvTrog
XdXvjSog
KarriXXcpog
-^
-K
-r
-X
-KT
6 (pvXa^, guard.
7] (fXo^.flanfw.
6 ovv^, nail.
rj vv%^ night.
<pvXaKog
<pXoy6g
OVVXOQ
VVKTog
§ 173. The Second Principal Declension agrees with the
First in the following particulars :
1. Masculines have g for the Nom. Sing, (or compensa-
tion for it) ; feminines are less consistent in this.
2. The Dat. Sing, affixes t (subscribed in the First Prin-
cipal Declension).
3. Yowel, and in part diphthongal, Stems take v in the
Ace. Sing.
Obs. — The original ending of the Ace. Sing, was also in the Second
Principal Declension every where v. This consonant was, how-
ever, connected with consonant-Stems by the connecting vowel
a : 6dovT-a-v=zL2it. dent-e-m. Subsequently v was dropped, and a
left, generally as the only siam : 6d6vT-a.
4. The Gen. and Dat. Dual have i v (aiv, oiv).
5. The Gen. Plur. w v.
6. The Dat. Plur. o-t(v) originally every where.
7. The Ace. Plur. g every where.
Obs. — The original ending of all Ace, Plur, was ve, but v was
dropped after vowels of the First Principal Declension, and was
compensated for by the lengthened dg, ovg. After consonants
there was the same process as in the Ace. Sing. : 6S6vT-a{v)-gj
Lat. dent-e-s for dent-em-s.
8. Neuters all have a in Nom. Ace. and Yoc. Plur.
70 IRREGULARITIES IN DECLENSION. § 174.
The principal differences in the endings are :
1. In the Gen. Sing., where the Second Principal De-
clension always has o g (wc)-
2. In the Nom. Plur., where Masc. and Fern, of the Sec-
ond Principal Declension always have £ c.
Irregidarities in Declension.
§ 174. The mixing of two Stems which may have one
Nom. is called Heterodizing {kr^poKXiaiafttifferent inflex-
ion) : Nom. (jKOTog, darJcness, Gen. gkotqv (0-Declension),
and GKOTovQ (Second Principal Declension) ; Xaywc, hare,
according to the Attic declension, but Ace. Xayw.
An important irregularity of this kind occurs with proper
names in r? c • SwKjoarr^c (St. S wic/oarcc)^ ^^^ Ace. '^^(OKpa-
Tr]v (as if from Stem Swic/oara of the A-Declension) with
Sw/Cjoarrj. But those in -kX^c (§ 167) follow the Second
Principal Declension exclusively. ^
§ 175. The formation of some cases from a Stem whicn
can not be that of the JSTom. is called Meta/plasm, (jiera-
irXaafioQ, cJiange of formation) : Nom. Sing, to ^Iv^pov,
tree, Dat. Plur. ^ivdpE(Ti(v), as if from Stem SevSpeg; Nom.
Sing. TO ^uKpvov, tear, Dat. Plur. ^aKpvai{v), from St. duKpv
(poet. Nom. SaKpu) ; to nvpffre, Plur. to. irvpa, Dat. rote
irvpoXg (0-Declension) ; NoiA. Sing, ovupo-g, dream, Gen.
ovdpaTog, Nom. Plur. oveipaTa.
§ 176. A peculiar irregularif^ appears in several Neuter
§ 174. Dialects. — Several Masc. Stems in a, Nom. rig in Herodotus,
have e a for r}v in the Ace. Sing. : SeaTrorri-g, master^ deaTroTEa. 6 6xo-g^
carriage, in Homer has Plur. rd ux^a, ox£(T(pi{v'), from the St. 6x^Q-
Oidi-n-ovg has poet. forms from a St.OiSnroSa, Gen. Sing. OidnroSao,
trag. OldiTTodd. Homeric ^ap-n-riddjv, stems ^ap-midov and ^apTrt]-
dovT. Mivcog, Acc. Sing. Miv<i)a (§ 163) and Mivbjv.
§ 175. Dialects. — Hom. metaplasms are : Dat. Plur, dvdpa7r6de(T<Ti{v),
Nom. Sing. dvdpaTro^ov, slave; Nom. Acc. Plur. TrpoaioTrara, Nom. Sing.
Trpoo-wTTov, countenance ; derxfiaTa, ionds, Sing. 6 Se(TiJ.6g ; tpirjpo-g, trusty,
Nom. Plur. epirtpeg ; d\Kr], strength, Dat. Sing. dX/c-i ; vafilvrj, hattle, vafilvi ;
ix^p, divine Uood, Acc. Sing. /x<^.
§ 177. IRREGULARITIES IN DECLENSION. 71
Stems in apr, as (j)pEapr. They reject r in the Nom. Ace.
and Yoc. Sing, and p in the other cases ; to <ppiap, well,
Gen. (f)piaTog (also (f)priT6g) ; to rjirap, liver, Gen. rJTraroc *,
TO aXeKpap and aXtK^cif Solve, Gen. aXd(l)aTog.
To these correspond the Stems (T/ca(/o)r and v^a{p)T:
Nom. (TKWjO, 6?^V^, Gen. o-icaroc ; vScdjo, Gen. vSaroc.
§ 177. Special irregularities in alphabetical order:
1. aviipy man (compare § 153), rejects e of the Stem
avsp, and inserts S in its place (§ 51,6^5^.2): av-^-p-6g,
avdpt, avSpa ; Voc. avsp ; Dual, av^pe, av^potv ; Plur. av^peg,
avdptiJVf av^pa(Ti{v), (iv^pag.
2. "Aprj g (the god Ares) : St. 'Ape c, Gen. "A/)€wc and
"Apeog, Ace. "Aprjv, together with "Apr] ; Voc. regul. *'ApEg.
3. a |0 V, without Nom. : Gen. tov and r^c apv-6g, of the
lamb, apvi, apva , Dat. Plur. apva(n{v).
4. r o yovv, Icnee {genu), Nom. Ace. Yoc. All the rest
from St. y ovaT, Gen. yovaTog.
5. 17 yvv 7/, woman. All the rest from St. y u v a t k-,
Gen. yvvaiKog, Dat. yuvaficf', Ace. yuvaTica, Voc. yvvai ; Dual
yuvaiica, yvvaiKoXv ; Plur. yi»vaT»c-£c> -wv, -5«(v), -a^.
6. TO ^opv, wood, spear : St. ^&paT (comp. 4.). Gen.
^opiiTog, poet, ^o p6 g, Dat. Sojoi and dopei.
7. Z £ V c (^^'^^^ ^<?<^ Zeus), Gen. Atoc, Dat. At/", Ace. At a,
Voc. Zed.
8. 6 and 17 kviov, dog, with Yoc. kvov, from St. kvo v.
All the rest from kvv: Gen. kiJvoc, Dat. kvvi, Acc. Kwva ;
Plur. KvvEg, kvvu)v, Kv<Ti{v), Kvvag.
9. 6 X a - c, stone, from Hom. Xao-c, Gen. Xa-oc^ Dat. Xa-V ,
§ 177. Dialects. — The following forms are peculiar to dialects :
1. dvfjp, poet, 'avep-og, 'avkp-i, 'avep-a ; Dat. Plur. dvdpe(T<Ti(v).
2. "AprjQ, Homer "Apijog, "Aprji, "Aprja.
4. yovv, Ion, and poet. yovvuT-og, yovvar-a, yovvdaiiy) ; Ep. Gen. Sing,
youvog, Plur. yovvd, yovvwv, yovv-(.a(n{y).
6. ^OjOf , dovparog, Ep. ^ovjoof, Sovpij dovpe, dovpa, dovpojv, dovpe<T<n{v)^
7. Zevcpoet. St. Z/j V : Z?jv-dc, Z);v-/, Zj/v-a (also Zrjv, from Zjj).
72 IRREGULARITIES IN DECLENSION. § 177.
Acc. Xaa-v, Xav ; Plur. Xa-sg, Xd-wv, Xd-£(T<7i{v) or Xd-e(Ti{v),
Xa-ag.
10. 6 /mdpTv-g, witness, with Dat. Plur. fidprvmiv), from
St. fxapr V. The rest from the St. fxaprv p : p,dpTvpog,
fidpTvpi, etc.
11. 17 vav-g, ship, ve-ivg, vr\-'L, vav-v ; Plur. vr]-ig, ve-iov,
vav-(Ti{v), vavg. Compare § 159.
Ohs. — The Nom. Acc. Sing, and Dat. Acc. Plur. rest on the St. vav.
Before vowels vav becomes (according to § 35, D. 2) vt]P, vt] ; ve-tog
is for vT}-6g (§ 37, D. 2).
12. 6 and 17 6pvt-g, bird, ^t. opviO and opvi: opvld-og,
opvWi, opvWa, and opviv ; Plur. opvlOeg and opveig, 6pv£(i)v,
13. TO ov g, ear. All the rest from St. w r : wrog, wrt ;
Plur. wra, wtwv, w-(Tf(v). (On the accent, § 142, 3.)
14. 17 n vv^ {the Pnyx), St. ttvk v, IIukv-oc^ TLvkv-i,
UvKv-a.
15. 6 7rpi(T(5v-g, the aged,hsis in the Gen. and Dat. Sing.,
and throughout the Plur., its forms from irp^a^vra (Nom.
Sing. wpiaftvTrig) : irpia^ug, TTplcrf^sioVf 7rpe(Tf5E(Ti{v), signifies
embassadors, to which the Sing, is irpEcr^evTrig.
16. TCLv. Only Yoc. io tclv or w rav, friend ox friends,
a defective Stem.
17. 6 viog^ son, St. vio, vt, viEv, Gen. vUogf Dat. vlu,
Acc. vUa (rare), Plur. vkXg, vliiov, vUmiy), vldg. But also
regularly vlov, etc.
18. 17 x^^Pf ^(^'^j St. ;)^ f t p, Dual xepolv, Dat. PL x^P<^K'^)'
Dialects. — 11. vav-g, from St. vijv, Ion. vr}v-g, Hom. Acc. Sing, vfj-a^
Dat. Plur. vr]e(T<T^{v), vr]v<xi{y), Acc. vr}ag.
from St. v(.Vj Ion. vs-oc, ve-t, V€-a, vk-ig, ve-wv, ve-ecrcrt, v£-af .
from St. vav, Dor. j/a-oe, va-i (navi), vd-e<T(Ti{v).
13. owe, Ion. ovag, ovar-og; Plur. ouar-a, Dor. log, tjT-6g.
17. vio-c, Ep. Gen. vl-og, vl-i, vl-a, vl-eg, vl-dai{v), vl-ag.
18. %€«>, poet, and New-Ion. x^p-og, x^p-'h Ep. Dat. Plur. xet/o-etn or
X€l/0-e<T(Tl(^').
To these add the words which are anomalous only in dialects :
19. Homer 'AtSri-g {Att"Aidr]g), St. 'Ai^, Gen. "AV^of , 'AV^-t, also 'AV-
dit)vev-g, with regular inflexion, according to § 159.
§ 178. CASE-LIKE TERMINATIONS. 73
Case-like TertniTiations.
§ 178. Besides the case-endings, there occur certain suf-
fixes or appendages, which in meaning very nearly resem-
ble case-endings. To these belong :
1. -di, answering to the question where: aXXo-6i, else-
where ;
2. -6 e V, answering to the question whence : 6tKo-9ev,
from home ;
3. -§£, answering to the question whither : o'lKa-^e, home-
wards.
Dialects — 20. 6 ip(og, lave, Stems kpioT and epo, poet. Ace. ipo-v.
21. Oefiig, justice, St. 9 e fit and 0e/ti<rr, Plur. OefiiaT-eg, OefiKxr-ag.
22. TO Kapa, Tiead, Horn. St. k apt] r, k a pij ar, k p dar, k p dr, Kup.
Horn. JVom. Sing. Kapr].
Gen. " Kdprjr-og, Kaprjar-og, Kpdar-og, Kpar-Sg.
Dat. " KaprjT-i, Kapr]aT-i, KpduT-i, Kpdr-i (trag. Kapq).
Acc. " Kapr], rbv Kpdr-a, to Kap.
Nom. Plur. Kapd, KaprjUT-a, KpduT-a, secondary form K.dprjva.
Gen. " KpaTCJV, Kaprjvojv.
Dat. " Kpd(ji{v).
Acc. " z=:Nom. (also Tovg Kpdr-ag).
23. t; /itdoTi^, whip, Hom. Dat. ndcTl, Acc. ^daTi-v. *
24. 6 ndg, month, Ion. = Att. fir]v.
25. oaaB, eyes. Kom. Acc. Dual, Neut. in Homer. The trag. have
Gen. Plur. oaaiov, Dat. oaaoig or oa(roiai{v).
§ 178. Dialects. — The three local suffixes are very frequent in Hom. :
oIkoOi, at home ; 'VkioQi irpo, in front of Ilios ; ovpavoOev, from heaven ;
dyopr]Q(.v,from the assembly. 9ev also supplies the place of the Gen.-
ending: Kara KprjOev, down from the head, entirely ; i^ d\6dtv, out of the
sea. -d e is generally affixed to the Acc. : oIkovSe, homewards ; KXimrjvSe,
into the tent; TroXivSe, into the city; (po^ov^E, into flight, (pvyade, into
flight, and tpaZi, to the earth, are peculiar.
A suffix peculiar to the Hom. language is ^ i (v) ; it is added to the
Stem of nouns, and supplies the place of the Gen. or Dat. termination
in both Sing, and Plur., as :
1. A- decl. : I3ir]-<pi, with force; KXtmri-tpi, in the tentj dirb vevprj-^iv,
from the dow-string.
2. O- decl: Oeo-ipiv, from the gods; 'l\i6-(l>iv,from Ilios.
3. Cons.-decl. : KOTv\T]dov-6-<piv, with the sucTcers (on the feelers of the
polypus); dir bx^<T-(pi{v) , from the carriage; Tcapd vav-<pi{v), alongside
the ships; dicb KpuTea-fiv, from the head. (§ 177, D. 22.)
D
74 INFLEXIONS OF ADJECTIVES. § 179.
These suffixes are joined to the Stem of the noun :
^A.dr]vr]dEv,fro7rh Athens (with Ion. ?j) ; KVK\6mv,from the
circle (kvkXo-q). Sometimes o comes in place of the A-
sound : piZoOev (radicitus), from piZa {radix) ; it also serves
as a connecting vowel with consonant-stenjs : iravr-o-OEv,
from all sides. The o is sometimes accented, contrary to
§ 107, a : kvkX-o-Osv, MapaOiov-o-dev, from Marathon.
The enclitic suffix S t (§ 92, 5) is often also combined with
the Ace. form : Mt'ya/oa-^f, to Megara ; 'EXfuaTy-a-^E, to
Eleusis. otK-a-Se, home^ from Stem o t k o, is irregular.
For ^ £ we find cr t, 2 £, with the same meaning : oWocte,
elsewhither ; 'AOr}vaZe, to Athens; 0?//3a?£, to Thehes ;
dvpaZe (foras).
§ 179. Moreover, a few words have an old Locative in
I for the Sing., and ai{y) (without a preceding i) for the
Plur., answering the question where : oikol, at home ; Ilu-
Oo7, at Pytho ; 'Io-0/ioT, on the Isthmus ; 'AOr]vri(Ti{v), in
Athens; n\aTaia(n{v)fin Platma ; 6vpa(n{v), at the door
(foris) ; wpa(Ti{v), at the right time.
Chap. VII. — Other Inflexions of the Adjective.
A. Inflexion according to Genders.
Adjectives of the Vowel Declension.
§ 180. The most numerous class of adjectives is that
which in the Masc. and Neut. follows the 0-Declension,
and in the Fem. the A-Declension ; which, consequently,
has in the Nom. Sing, oc, y\ (or a), ov [Lat. us, a, uni\.
§ 180. Dialecls. — The lonians have frequently here also r\ for Att.
a: aiax^.
§182.
INFLEXIONS OF ADJECTIVES.
75
Singular.
Masc.
Fem.
Neut.
Masc.
Fern.
Neut.
Nom.
dyaOog
dyaOfj
dyaOov
<piXiog
tpiXia.
^IXiov
am.
dyaOov
dyadijQ
dyaOov
(piKiov
<l)iXidg
<piXiov
Bat.
dya9<p
dyaOy
dyaOi^
(piXi<li
^iXi(f.
(piXi({)
Ace.
dyaOov
dyaOrjv
dyaOov
0/Xiov
(piXidv
(piXiov
Voc^
ayaQk
dyaOrj
dyaOov
(piXte
<l)iXia
(piXiov
Dual.
KA.V.
dyaOu)
dyaOd
dyaOu)
(piXioj
<}>iXid
^iXi(o
G.D.
dyaBdlv
dyaGdlv
dyaOolv
(j)iXioiv
tpiXiaiv
0t\totv
Plural.
Nom.
dyaOoi
dyaQai
dyaOd
(^iXioi
tpiXiai
<piXia
Oen.
dyaOojv
dyaOCjv
dyaOhiv
^iXioJV
^iXiojv
^iXicjv
Bat.
dyaOoig
dyaOaXg
dyaOolg
(piXioig
^iXiaig
(piXioig
Ace.
dyaOovg
dyaOdg
dyaOd
(piXiovg
<piXidg
(jiiXia
In the Nom. Sing. Fem. a stands after a voivel or p, else-
where r/ : ^iKaiog, ^iKaia, ^iKaiov, just / alaxpog, alaxp^t
al(T\p6v, hateful / (TO(l)6g, ao^i], croc^ov, wise.
Exception : ri stands after o, except when p precedes o :
dirXoog^ uTrXor], aTrXoov, Simple.
dOpoog, dOpod, dOpoov, assembled.
§ 181. Though the declension of these adjectives con-
forms to §§ 114, 126, the following points must be ob-
served :
1. a in the Nom. Sing, is always long.
2. In the accent of the Nom. and Gen. Plur. the Fem.
follows the Masc. : jSejSafoc, Jirm, Nom. Plur. Masc. /3f-
l^aioi, Fem. /3t/3atat (§ 108 would require jScjSataf, from
Nom. Sing. jScjSam) ; Gen. of all genders, jSejSatwv (not even
in the Fem. jSejSatwv, as would be required by § 118).
§ 182. Many adjectives of this class have only two end-
§ 181. Dialects. — ^Ta, Fem. of ^oc, heavenly, has in Horn. & : dTa Oedujv,
the heavenly one among the goddesses.
§ 183. Dialects. — The poets form a peculiar Fem. from many com-
pound adjectives : d^porrj (Masc. d/xfiporog, immortal), dvTiOeij (Masc.
dvTiOeog,
76
INFLEXIONS OF ADJECTIVES.
§183.
ings, the Masc. being used for the Fern. : Masc. and Fern.
r\(Tvxp^> Neut. ?7(Tuxov, quiet. Comj)ound adjectives espe-
cially are all of 07ily tioo endings : arf/cvoc, childless ;
Kapirocjiopog, fruitful.
§ 183. Adjectives ending in £ o c and o o c in tl^ Kom.
Masc. are generally contracted (§ 130) : yjivaioq, golden^
and oTrXooc, simple, are thus contracted :
Singular.
Masc.
Fern.
Neut.
Masc.
Fern.
Neut.
Nam.
XpvaovQ
Xpvar)
Xpvaovv
airXovg
UTrXfj
uTrXovv
Gen.
XpvcTov
Xpv(Tng
Xpv(Tov
airkov
airXrjg
UTrXov
Bat.
XpV(T(p
Xpvay
XpV(T(^
ttTrX^
airXy
a7rX(^
Ace.
Xpvaovv
Xpvariv
Xpvaovv
clttKovv
cnrXfjv
cLTrXovv
Voc.
XpvaovQ
Xpvtrn
Xpvaovv
cnrKovg
uTrXf}
ciTrXovv
Dual.
jsr. A. V.
XpvtTio
Xpvaa
Xpv(T(t)
drrXu)
aTrXd
ctTrXo)
G.D.
Xpv(Toiv
Xpvffdiv
XpvaoTv
airXoXv
cLTtXaXv
cnrXolv
Plural.
Nom.
XPV<T01
Xpvcrai
Xpv(Ta
cnrXdl
cnrXdi
ctTrXd
Gen.
Xpvffojv
XpvffCJv
XpvaHjv
airXCJv
cnrXCjv
dirXCjv
Bat.
XpvcroiQ
Xpvcraig
Xpv(Tolg
cnrXoig
cnrXaig
cnrXoig
Ace. %
XpVtTOVQ
Xpvaag
Xpvca
cnrXovg
cnrXdg
cnrXd
The Fern, ea is contracted to r), except when preceded
by a vowel or p ; it is then contracted to a : apyvpia,
apyvpa {a?'gentea). The Nom. Plur. oa, oai, produce a :
ai : aTrXa, aTrXai.
The contracted final syllable also receives the circumflex,
contrary to § 87 : \pvGiog, xpvaovg. But compound adjec-
tives retain the accent on the last syllable but one : ivvovg,
well-disposed, Gen. {vvov, Dat. cuvtf^, Nom. Plur. ^vvoi.
% 184. A few adjectives in w c in the Nom. follow the
§ 183. Dialects. — The adjectives in €oc, oog^ often remain uncon-
tracted : Horn. XP^^^V (where e disappears by Bynizesis), KoXXippoog,
heautifully-Jiowing.
§ 184. Dialects. — Horn. 'iXaog^ rrXtiog, TrXdrj, TrXaov ; New-Ion. eof =
Att. ew f ; for Att. aiog {sahm), Horn, ooog, ?;, ov, comparative aacjrepog.
§ 185.
INFLEXIONS OF ADJECTIVES.
77
Attic 0-Declension (§ 132) : VXswc, Neut. VXtwv, gracious ;
a^ioXp^ii^Q, Neut. -wv, considerable ^ TrXiwg, wXia, ttXuov,
full. (Twg (from aaog, salvus) has in the Nom. Sing. Fem.
and Neut. Plur. a a ; but also the forms ctwoc, trwa, Plur.
CTwof, (Hjjai.
Adjectives of the Consonant Declension.
§ 185. Other adjectives in the Masc. and Neut. follow
the Consonant Declension, and form from the Stem a pe-
culiar Fem. with the ending i a, which, however, undergoes
various changes in combination with the Stem. Such ad-
jective-stems of three denominations are :
1. Stems in v (Masc. and» Neut., § 154). The Fem. is
formed from J,he Stem as it appears in the Gen. {r\ St); €
and L a are contracted, and the accent remains on the last
syllable of the Stem : hence —
Masc.
Fem.
Neut.
Nom.
ij-g
eid
V
Singular.
Nom.
r/dv-g^ sweet.
r)deXa
rjdv
Gen.
r'iSeog
rideiag
ridhg
Bat.
?/^£l
97^a'^
rideX
Ace.
T)dvv
rj^Eiav
vSv
Dual.
Mm. Ace.
Tjdee
ri^eid
t)See
Gen. Bat.
r'/dkoiv
r'l^eiaiv
rjdeoiv
Plural.
'
JSom. •
r/ceig
rjSdai
-n^ka
Gen.
rjSkojv
it^uwv
ri^etov
Bat.
T)di<n{v)
r'jSeiaig
. ij^kaiiy)
Ace.
rjdeXg
r]Mdg
â– r)dsa
§ 185. Dialects. — Horn, sometimes has er] for Att. f la : (3a6eTj (J3a9da,
deep) ; the Ion. £ a for tia: Horn. ijKka ''Ipigj swift Iris. Besides OfjXvg,
feminine^ we find also ry^wc, irovXvg (iroXvg, much), as Fem. Sometimes
€ a is used for v v in the Ace. Sing. Masc. : evpea irovrov, the wide sea.
78
INFLEXIONS OF ADJECTIVES.
186.
Examples for Declension.
yXvKvg, sweet. jSpaxvg, short. evpvg, hroad.
(3padve, slow. raxvg, swift.
Obs. — OfjXvg, female, diflfering also in accent, occurs as a Feminine.
§ 186. 2. 8te7ns in v. The t in « a is transferred to the*
preceding syllable (§ 65) : St. ju c X a v, Nom. Masc. /LieXag,
Fern. fxiXmva (from lueXav-ia), Neut. juiXav, black.
Singular.
Masc.
Fern.
Neut.
Nbm.
/usXae
fikXaiva
fisXav
Gen.
\ik\avog
fieXaivijg
fieXavog
Bat.
[xeXavi
fxeXaivy
likXavi
Ace.
fieXava
fikXaivav
fxkXav
Voc.
fisXav
fikXatva
fisXav
Dual.
â– 1
K A. V.
fieXave
IxeXaiva
fieXave
G.D.
fxeXdvoiv
fieXaivaiv
H^XdvoVif
Plural.
Nom.
fisXaveg
fxeXaivai
fisXava
Gen.
fxeXdviov
fiaXaivwv
fieXdvojv
Bat.
fxeXafft
fieXaivaig
HeXafTi
Ace.
fikXavag
fieXaivag
jxeXava
Examples for Declension.
St. TaXav, ToXdgy rdXaiva, rdXav, unfortunate.
St. TEpev, Tsprjv, Tspeiva, Hpsv, tender.
§ 187. 3. Stems in vt. To these belong especially the
numerous participial forms. In the Fem. the v t combines
with the ending i a to form cr a, the previous vowel being
lengthened by compensation (§ 50) : Xtyovr-La becoming
Xtyoucra.
The adjectives in e v r have ^Gtra in the Fem. : -^apkig,
Xapk(j(Ta, ')(apUv, pleasing, St. xapievr. For the Dat.
Plur.,see § 149.
§ 187. Dialects. — Adjectives in evr (Nom. Masc. eic) are sometimes
contracted : IIom.Tifiyg=:riixr]Eig,?ionorable; Xix)TevvTa=.X(x)T6evTa, abound-
ing in lotuses; poet. irTepovcrcTazzzTrTepoeaaa,
187.
INFLEXIONS OF ADJECTIVES.
79
Masc.
Fern.
Neut.
Masc.
Fern.
Neut.
Sing.
hosing.
hosing.
Norn.
Xvcrdg
Xvcrdaa
Xvadv
Xviov
Xvovaa
Xvov
Gen.
XvaavTOQ
Xvadcnjg
XvaavTog
XvovTog
Xvov<TT]g
XvovTog
Bat.
XvaavTi
Xvadcry
XvffavTi
XvOVTl
Xvovcfy
XvOVTl
Ace.
XvaavTU
Xvaauav
Xv(Tav
Xvovra
Xvovaav
Xvov
Voc.
Xvcrag
Xvaacra
Xvaav
Xv<t)v
Xvovaa
Xvov
Dual.
iV. A. V.
Xvaavre
Xvadaa
Xv(Taj/Te
Xvovre
XvovGa
Xvovre
G.D.
XvadvTOiv
Xvadaaiv
XvadvToiv
XVOVTOIV
Xvoixraiv
XVOVTOIV
Plural.
Ncmi.
XvaavTSQ
Xvaatrai
Xvaavra
XvovTsg
Xvovaai
Xvovra
Gen.
XvrrdvTOJV
XvaaaCJv
Xv(TdvTii)V
XVOVTIOV
XVOVCTOIV
Xvovriov
Bat.
Xvadcn
Xvadaaig
Xvadcrt
Xvovai
Xvovaaig
Xvovai
Ace.
XvaavTag
Xvddaag
XvcravTu
Xvovrag
Xvovaag
Xvovra
Sing.
loosed.
giving.
Norn.
XvQdg
XvOelcra
XvB'ev
di^ovg
didovaa
dtSov
Gen.
XvQkvTog
XvOEicrrjg
XvQsvTog
SiSovTog
li^ovarjg
Stdovrog
Bat.
XvO&vri
XvQeicry
XvOkvTL
hdovTt
SiSovay
^idovri
Ace.
XvOavra
XvQuaav
XvBkv
diSSvra
didov<Tav
^idov
Voc.
XvOeig
XvOeXaa
Xv9ep
didovg
didoiKTa
dtdov
Dual.
N.A. V.
XvOevTS
XvBeitra
XvBevre
dlSoVTS
dL^ovara
SiSovre
G.B.
XvQkvToiv
XvQdaaiv
Xv9kvT0iv
didovToiv
Sidovaaiv
didcvroiv
Plural.
Mm.
XvOevTsg
XvOelcrai
Xv9evTa
SidovTig
diSovaai
diSovra
Gen.
XvQkvTiov
Xv9ei(Tu)V
Xv9evT0)v
did6vT(t)v
didov(TU)P
Sidovriov
Bat.
Xv9uat
XvOdaaig
XvBelai
didoixTt
didovaaig
diSovtri
Ace.
XvOavrag
Xv9el<Tag
Xv9kvTa
diSovTag
SiSovarag
^iSovra
Sing.
pleasing.
showing.
Mm.
Xapieig
Xapaaoa
Xapiep
deiKvvg
^UKVvaa
deiKvvv
Gen.
XapisvTog
Xapik<T(Tr]g
XapievTog
hiKvvvTog
deiKvvffrjg
dsiKvvvrog
Bat.
XapievTi
Xapikrray
XopiBi'Ti
SeiKVVVTl
SeiKVixry
SuKvvvri
Ace.
XapievTU
Xapkaaav
Xapiev
deiKvvvra
BuKvvaav
dsiKvvv
Voc.
Xaplev
XapU(T(Ta
Xctpiev
deiKvvg
hiKvvaa
SeiKvvv
Dual.
KA. V
Xapkvre
Xctpdaoa
XapkvTE
SeiKVVVTS
hiKVvaa
deiKvvvre
G.B.
XapikvTOiv x«ptso'(r«iv x"^P'^'^^tolv
SeiKVVVTOlV
dnicvixTaiv
deiKVVvroiv
Plural.
Mm.
XaplevTsg
Xapieccrai
XapiBVTa
SeiKvvvTsg
hiKvvaai
deiKVvvra
Gen.
XapdvTwv
Xapte(T<TMV
Xapdvrujv
dsiKVVVTCJV
dfiKWcraiv
ceiKVvvrwv
Bat.
Xapitai
Xapikaaaig
Xapi^frt-
deiKvvai
deiKvixraig
deiKVV(n
Ace.
XapkvTug
Xapdffffag
XapiEVTU
dtiKvvvrag
d^iKVVcrag
SeiKVvvra
80
INFLEXIONS OF ADJECTIVES.
188.
Obs. — The form of the Fern, is explained from r before t becoming
(T, according to § 60, i being dropped after <t, and v before a being
thrown out and compensated for by a lengthening of the vowel :
XvovTia^ Xvovcrta, Xvovaa, Xvovaa.
iravTia. Tzavaia. Travaa, Tcaaa
§ 188. 4. Stems in o r. The participles of the Perfect
Active in o r (Nona. Sing. Masc. w g, Neut. og) have v i a
in the Fem. : XeXukwc, XeXvKvTa, XeXvKog, one who has
freed. See §§ 146, .147.
Singular.
Masc.
Fern.
Neut.
Mm.
XeXvKoJg
XeXvKvla
XeXvKog
Gen.
XeXvKOTOQ
XeXvnviag
XeXvKoTog
Bat.
XeXvkoti
XeXvKvig,
XeXvKOTL
Ace.
XEXvKOTa
XsXvKvlav
XaXvKog
Voc.
XeXvkcjq
XeXvKvla
XeXvKog
Dual.
N.A.V.
XEXvKore
XEXvKvia
XeXvkots
Q.D.
XeXvkotoiv
XeXvKviaiv
XeXvKoroiv
Plural.
Nom.
XeXvKOTEQ
XEXvicvTai
XeXvKOTa
Gen.
XeXvKoTMjv
XeXvKviojv
XeXvKoTojv
Bat.
XeXvKofTi
XeXvKviaig
XeXvKoci
Ace.
XEXvKorag
XeXvicviag
XeXvKora
Obs. — The strange difference of the Fem. from the Stem of the
Masc. and Neut. is explained by the 7^ which was originally before
the 0. From Por-ia came first focr-ia (§ 60), then by a peculiar
contraction (Po becoming v) va-ia, finally (o- being dropped, § 61,
h) v-'ia and via.
§ 189. The most important adjectives of two endings with
Stems according to the Second Principal Declension are :
i. Stems in g (Inflexion given under §§ 164, 165), as :
aatprjg ffatpsg, clear. Gen. aa^ovg.
dXrjOrig dXt]Oeg, trice. " dXtjOovg.
Other Examples for Beclension.
irXriprjg^fuU. \pevSfjg, false. aff^aXrjg, safe. dvcr/ievrjg, hostile.
2. Stems in v (Inflexion given under §§ 146, 147), as :
TrSTTlOV TTETTOV, HpC. GCU. TTSTTOV-Og.
eMaiiJ-oJV evdaifiov, happy. " evSai/xov-og.
G<jj(pp(t)v (Tuxppov, reasonable.
G(t)<ppov-og.
§ 189. Dialects. — Herod, ipariv for dpariv.
191.
INFLEXIONS OF ADJECTIVES.
81
Other Examples for Declension.
ixvrjfiu)!/, mindful of. tTriXrjafKjjv, forgetful of.
TToXvirpdymuv^ much occupied.
3. Isolated forms, as :
UpiQ iSpi, acquainted with. " Gen. Idpi-oQ.
(Inflexion according to § 157, D.)
dppr]v (^dpffrjv), dppev, TUale. Gen. dppev-og.
Compounds of substantives, such as d-n-aTajp, Neut. dirarop, St. tt are jO
(Nom. TruTrjp), fatherless ; dvcfxrjTdjp, firjTtjp, unmotherly ; ^iXoiroXig, -t,
Gen, -iS-oc, loving the city; eveXirig (Gen. eueXTrt^-oc), hopefid.
§ 190. 4. Besides these, there is a large number of ad-
jectives which have only one ending, because either their
meaning or form excludes a Neuter : apira^, rapacious, St.
a piray ; ^vyag^ fugitive ^ St. v y a S ; ayvojQ, unacquaint-
ed, St. ay V it)T ', airaiQ, childless , St. a tt a f o ; jiaKpo^up,
long -handed ; 'Kkvy\q, jpoor, St. ^T^v^T\ yvjuvrig, light -
armed., St. yv\ivy]T. Some adjectives of one ending fol-
low the A-Declension, and are almost substantives, as :
t^cAovrr/c, Gen. IQ^ovtov, "Doluntary ; they occur only in
the Masc.
§ 191. The following adjectives are irregular: /uiyag,
great ; Trokvg^ much ; and Trp^og, gentle, the forms of eaph
being derived from different Stems, viz., in fiiyag, from
§ 190. Dialects. — Horn, has also many adjectives in the Fern, only:
KoXXiyvvaiKu, Acc. Sing. e. g., ^Trdprrjv, abounding in beautiful women;
ISioTidveipa, e. g. ^9ir], men nourishing.
§ 191. Dialects. — In Horn, both Stems, ttoXv and ttoXXo, in Masc.
and Neut., arc almost completely declined ; tliQ, Fern, is regularly
TToXXr).
N. TToXvg TTOvXvg or TroXXog
G. TToXXov or TToXiog
7roXX(^
TToXXov
TToXXoi
Sing. W. TToXvg
TTOvXvg 0]
G.
TTOXXOU
or
TcoXiog
D.
A.
TToXvV
TTOvXvV
Plur. N. TToXkg
{iroXHg)
.0^.
TTOXXOJV
or
iroXkwv
D.
7roXiea<n(v)
7roXk(jai{y)
A.
TToXeag
*
N. TToXv TTOvXv TZOXXOV
N. TToXv TTOvXv
TToXXoV
TToXXd
or TToXXoXg
JV. iroXXd
TToXkmiy)
TToXXovg
Herod, has scarcely any forms except from the Stem ttoXXo: ttoX-
XoVy TToXXoi.
D 2
82
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES.
192.
the Stems /mey a and /x c y a X o ; in TroXvg, from iroXv and
TT o X X o ; in irpaog, from ir p(}o and TTjoaii.
Sing.
Masc.
Fern.
Neut.
Masc.
Fern.
Neut.
Nom.
likyag
fieydXij
fikya
TToXvg
7ro\X?7
TToXv
Gen.
fieyaXov
fieydXrjg
fieydXov
TTOXXOV
iroXKifg
TToXXov
Bat.
H^yaXifi
fisydXy
fxeydXtit
TToXX^i
TToXXy
TToXXfp
Ace.
fikyav
fieydXijv
fikya
TTOXVV
TToXXrjv
iroXv
Voc.
fikya
HeydXrj
fikya
TToXv
TToXXrf
TToXv
Dual.
W.A.V.
fieydXu)
fiEydXa
fisydXu)
a.D.
fieydXoiv
fieydXaiv
fieydXoiv
Plural.
Nom.
[XEyaXoi
fiEydXai
fisydXa
TToXXoi
TToXXai
TToXXd
Gen.
fieyaXoJv
fieydXujv
fieydXiov
TroXXwv
TToXXwV
TToXXwP
Bat.
fieyaXoig
fiEydXaig
fiiydXoig
TToXXoXg
TToXXaig
TToXXolg
Ace.
fieyaXovQ
p.e.ydXag
fiEydXa
TToXXovg
TToXXdg
TToXXd
Sing.
Plural.
Nom.
Trp^oQ
TTpaeia
Trpav
Trp^ot, or
TrpaEig
TrpaCiai
Tvpaka
Gen.
Trpq,ov
TTpaeiag
7rpg,ov
TTpakwu
vpaHwv
7rpaku)v
Bat.
irp^ifi
Trpaeig.
^p4v
Trp^oig, or
7rpakm{v)
TTpauaig
Trp^oig, or
7rpakcn{v)
Ace.
TTp^OV
irpaelav
irp^ov
Trpq.ovg
Trpaeiag
irpaka
B. Comparison.
§ 192. The first and most frequent ending of tlie Com-
parative is r £ /o o (Nom. Tfjooc, Ttpa, Tepov)\ of the Super-
lative Taro (Nom. raroq, rarr], rarov), with the usual in-
flexion of adjectives (§ 180). These endings are affixed to
the pure Stem of the Masc., as :
Positive.
Stem.
Comparative.
Superlative.
Kov(j)og, light.
KOV<l)0
Kovtporepog, a, ov
KOvtporaTogy t] ov
yXvKvg, sweet.
yXvKV
yXvKvrepog
yXvKvraTog
jueXaf, blacJc.
fieXav
fieXdvrepog
fieXdvTarog
XapUig^ graceful.
Xapievr
Xapikarepog
Xapuararog
(from xf^-P^^vT-T^pog-, according to
§§46and|J).
(Ta<l)r]g, clear.
a a^eg
aacpkaTEpog
cra(pk(TTarog
fiUKap., happy.
fiaK ap
fiaKaprepog
fiaKaprarog
TrevTjg, poor.
7r€ vr]T
TreveffTEpog
TrevsaTttTog
(for TrevrjT-Tepog, rarog^ according to § 46, r} being shortened).
§ 197. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 83
§ 193. The following points are to be observed :
1 The Stems in o leave o unchanged only when the
preceding syllable is long (§ 74, etc.), but lengthen it to
w when that is short : Trovrjpo-Tepog, tvorse / wiKpo-TaTOv,
77iosi hitter; ao(pu)'TepoQ, wiser ; a^iw-TaTi], most worthy.
Every syllable with a vowel followed by two consonants
or a double consonant is here considered long (§§ 76,
77).
§ 194. 2. The o is always rejected after ai in the adjective yepatde,
senex^ sometimes in TraXato^ , antiquus^ and axoXdiog, at leisure : ye-
paiTepoQj TraXaiTarog.
§ 195. 3. The o or to is changed to at in fieaog, medius ; itrog, like;
ivdiog, clear ; Trpuiiog, early y oipiogy late : fietraiTarog, TrpojiaiTepov.
ijcTvxog, peaceful, has ricrvxaiTepog, and rjffvxdjrepog ; ^iXog, dear, be-
sides 0t\wrf)ooc, -TUTog, also (j)iXrepog, -TUTog, and ^iXairepog, -rarog ;
TrXrimaiTepogj TrXrjaLairaTog, belong to TrXrjaiov, near, and TrapaTrXt]-
mairepog, more like, to the same ; Trpovpyiairepog to rrpovpyov, from
irpb tpyov, advantageously.
§ 196. 4. The endings ear ep o-g, eararo-g, are inorganically ap-
plied :
• a) to Stems in ov : aco^poveffrepog (St. <t(o^ pov, Nom. aw^pojv, reason-
able), evdaifiovearepog (St. evdaifiov, Nom. evSai/xwv, fortunxxte).
TrloTspog, -TUTog, from 7r'nov,fat, and TreTraiTspog, -rarog, from TrtTrwr,
rijye, are exceptional.
5) to the Stems ofdKpdrog, unmixed; Ipfxofievog, strong; d(Tfievog, will-
ing : ciKparecrrepog, kpp<op.Evk(Tr^pog. More seldom to others.
c) to some Stems in oo contracted: evvovarepog for evvoecrrepog, from
evvovg, well-disposed.
§ 1 97. 5. i<rrepog, lararog, occur with XdXog, talkative ; rrrtoxog,
beggarly; 6\po<pdyog, epicure; fiovo(j)dyog, eating alone; and some
adjectives of one ending, as KXeTrrrj-g, thievish : XaXiarepog, tttw-
Xl<yrarog, KXeTrricrr^pog.
Others of one gender in rj-g follow the rule of those in o : v^piaro-
repog, from v^pi(Trr]g, haughty.
§ 193. Dialects. — The quantity of the 0-sound in poets is rather
doubtful : Hom. oi^vpwrarog, the most wretched.
Horn, has Idvvrara, from iQvg, straight ; (padvrarog, from ^auvog, glit-
tering ; dxap'Krnpog (for dxapir-repog, according to § 46), from «x«/otfj
graceless.
-84 COMPAKISON OF ADJECTIVES. § 198.
The compounds of xapig, grace, favo7% fonn their Comparative and
Superlative as if they ended in x«iOt7-o-c : tTnxapiribrepog, more
obliging.
§ 198. The second and rarer termination of the Com-
parative is f o V (Nom., Masc, and Fem. i w v, Neut. i o.^v) ;
of the Superlative, kjto (Nom. laToq, larr], kttov). The
Stem- vowel is rejected before i. The accent is placed as
far as possible from the end in the Comp. and Superl. In-
flexion of the Comp., § 170. So is formed from :
Comparative. Superlative.
ri^'uDV, -ov i]di(TTog, -r/, -ov
OdffaojVj -ov rdxKTTOQ, -rj, -ov
(from raxiojv, according to §§ 54, 57).
/teyaf, large. fiey a fiEi^ojv, -ov fieyitrrog
(from jxeyiujv, according to § 58).
Ods. — The length of a in Odaaov (compare /xdWov, § 202), and the
diphthong of fxei^iov, is explained from the i passing into the pre-
ceding syllable, as in dudviov (compare § 55);
Farther with suppression of p :
tx9p6, -e, hostile. txB'nov, -ov Superl. txBtcrog.
ahxpo, -f, sJiameful. aiaxioiv, -ov " alaxK^rog.
oiKTpo, -g, pitiable. " olKTicrrog.
ixOp-og and oiKTp-og also have the forms in T^po-g and raro-g.
§ 199. This comparison occurs also in connection with
Positive.
Stem.
i)Ug, agreeoMe.
r)5v
raxvg, swift.
raxv
§ 198. Dialects. — The endings t w v, i o- r o c, are more frequent in the
poets : Hom. ^iXiiov {<pi\og, dear) ; y\vKi<Dv (yXvKvg, sweet) ; ^Kiarog {ojKvg,
swift)', (3d9i(TTog (JiaQvg, deep) ; jSpdacTojv = jSpaxiiov (jSpaxvg, short), Bup.
poet. jSpdxKTTog, Hom. Superl. (idpharog (jSpaSvg, slow, § 59, D.) ; izdaaiov
=:7raxi(iiv {Traxvg, thick)', ndaaiov z=:^ ixcLk'hov (jiaKpog, long). Sup. firjKKTTog
(Dor. ficLKiaTog) ; KvdiiDv {tcvSpog, famous) ; jui^wv, ISTew-Ion. for fieiZiov.
§ 199. Dialects. — 1. Hom. Comp. dpdiov, Positive Kparv-g, Superl.
KdpTKTTog ; Comp. Xwinpog ; New-Ion. Kpscracov =: KpEiaawv ; poet. (3eX-
repog, (SeXrarog, <pepTepog, ^spraTog, or <pepL(TTog, mme excellent, most excel-
lent.
2. Hom. KaK(x)Ttpog ; x^PVQ^ Xfpeiwv, x^P^f^orepog, x^^porepog ; New. -Ion.
'd<T(X(t)vz=:r]cr(Twv. (Compare Kpk(jao)v, fik^iov, § 198, Obs.)
4. Hom. vTr-oXil(x)v.
§ 199.
COMPAKISON OF ADJECTIVES.
85
other peculiarities in the following adjectives, where the
changes of sound of §§ 55-58 are often applied :
1. For the idea Osgood:
Positive
ayaQoQ
[St. d /x e v]
[St. dpec]
[St. /3€Xro]
[St. KpaTv]
Comparative.
Superlative.
afMEivaJV, ajxuvov
[cijoet'wv, Horn.] dpiarog, t], ov
(SsXtiojv^ (ikXriov (ikXriaTog, ?/, ov
Kpuaavjv {KpeiTTiov) KpaTitrrog, ij, ov
N. KpeTaaov (kpeXttov)
[St. \ w y] X(i)twv or Xi^wv Xi^arog, tj, ov
i\r. Xijjiov or Xipov
Obs. — dfiEivujv and dpiarog rather express excellence, capacity; Kpdcr-
aojv, Kpariarog, strength, preponderance (Lat. superior) ; ijaatuv is op-
posed to Kpd<JGh)V.
2. For the idea of dad :
Positive. Comparative. Superlative.
KUKOg KUKllOV JV. KiXKlOV KUKKTrog
[St. xep] x^'P*^^ (deterior), JSF. x^pov xf/pioToe
[St. r) K v] i](T<Tiov (inferior), JV. tjaaov JV. PI. ijiciara, least of aU.
3. fxiKpog, small, besides fiiKpoTEpog
/xeiiov, smaller, If. jxeXov
4. oXiyog, little,
[St. £\a%w], iXd<T(r(i)v N. tXaacov
5. TToXvg, mucTi, TrXeiojv (ttXswv)
N". TrXeov (also ttXeTv)
G. KuXog, heautiful, as if from
KoXXog, heauty koXXiojv -ZV! koXXlov
7. p(}hog, easy, "*
[St. pa], p4^v N. pq.ov
8. dXyHvog, painful, as if from
dXyog, pain, dXyiwv . N. dXyiov
fiLKporarog
oXiyicrrog
tXdxKTrog
TrXeicTTog
KoXXiaTog
pq.aTog
dXyiarog
Dialects. — 5. Homer contracts TrXkov to irXwv, TrXeoveg to irXevveg;
Plur. also irXeeg, irXeag, TrXia.
7. Ion. pr]idiog ; Hom. prfiTEpog, ptjiarog, prjtraTog. Hom. forms single
degrees from substantives : Kvvrepog, more doggish (kvojv, dog) ; piyiov,
worse ; plyog, cold, shudder.
Defectives : Iveprepoi, also tragic vkpnpoi {inferi, for which Positive
ivepoi) ; Hom, TTVfxaTog and XolaOog, Xoiadiog, last ; vcrrdTiog z=: vaTurog,
devTUTog, in a like sense, Trpdjuarog ^=: irpwrog, the first.
86 ADVERBS FROM ADJECTIVES. § 200.
§ 300. Finally observe farther the Defectives :
varepoQ, later, vffTaTog, ultimus.
iffx^^Tog, extremus.
(yeog, new), vearog, novissimus.
(vTrep, over), v-jrarog, mmmus.
{irpo, before), TrpoTspog, prior, TzpCJTog, primtis.
(jrkpav, on the other side), Trepairspog.
C. Adverbs of Adjectives,
§ 201. Adverbs are derived from the Adjective Stem by-
affixing to it the syllable w g. The o of the Stem is en-
tirely dropped: <^tXoc, adv. ^tXwc The Stems of the Sec-
ond Principal Declension ffave the same form as in the
Genitive : raxvQf swift, rax^toQ ; ca^^ic, clear, (Ta(l)eiog,
contr. (Ta(l)LJg ; cruxppojv, 7'easonaMe, atvfppovujg. Contrac-
tion occurs only where the Genitive also has it. The ac-
cent of the adverb is always the same as that of the Geni-
tive Plural of the corresponding adjective : \pvxp6c, cold,
\pv\pLjg ; ^tKaiog, jiist, dtKaitog ; irag (St. tt a v r), iravriog,
every way.
The Neuter Accusative, both of the Singular and the
Plural, is moreover very often used as an adverb.
§ 202. An older adverbial form is that in a, as : ray^,
from rayyg, quich (meaning, in Att. prose, ^^M<^^) ; a^ia,
at the same tiine ; naka, very. The Comp. of [laka is
IxaXkov {jpotius)=^a\iov (§ b^)', Superl. juaXiaTa {jpotissi-
7)ium). fu, loell, as an adverb to ayaQogy good, stands alone.
§ 203. Adverbs in w ^ are also formed from Comparatives
and Superlatives : l^^f^aioTepwg, more frmly / KaWiovwg,
more beautifully. But, as a rule, the comparative has the
§ 203. Dialects. — The adverbs in a are more numerous in Homer :
&Ka {quickly, wKvg) ; \iya, aloud, Xiyvg ; Kapra, strongly, very, to Kparvg,
compare § 59, D. ; (rdcpa (clearly, aa(pr]g).
Homer has for w or iv the adjective ivg or rjvg, good.
§§ 303, 204. Dialects. — Homeric UaffTepu), iKacTTdro) (from iKdg,far);
daaov {pzayx'-^'^)-! aaaorkpio (dyxt, near), ayxi(fra', New-Ion. dyxorarw,
dyxorara. In addition to this, there is the Horn. kiraaavT^poi, en
with V instead of o.
205.
PERSONAL PRONOUNS.
87
Neut. Ace. Sing.^ the superlative the ISfeut. Ace. Plur., as
an adverb : l5s(5ai6TEpov, koXXiov ; |3fj3a(orara, KaXXtcrra.
§ 304. Adverbs in w, like dvo), above ; Kdrw, delow ; taio, inside ; t^w,
outside^ have no q in Compar. and Superl. .: avtuTspu), Karwrl/ow,
likewise dTrwrs/ow, farther (from diro) ; tyyvrepu) (or iyyvTepov),
iyyvTCLTO) (or tyyvrara), from cyyvf, wear, and some others.
Chap. VIIL — Inflexion of Pronouns.
§ 205. The Personal Pronouns are :
Singular.
Nom.
iyib, I [ego]
av, thou [tu]
Oen.
t/xoy, iiov
<TOV
ov, of him.
Bat.
kfioiy fioi
(TOt
ol
Ace.
ifis, Ilk [me]
as [te]
â– i [se]
Dual.
KA.
(vCji) vu), we.
(acpm) acpM, ye.
(acpios), they.
G.D.
{vmv) V(^v
(ffipioiv) a<p(pv
(atpiijtv)
Plural.
Nom.
t'l^iiQ, we.
vjieXg, you.
a(peXg, they.
N. a(p£a
Gen.
ilfiwv
v^S)v
acpuJv
Bat.
r'lUlv
VfiXv
a(pl-ai(y)
Ace.
r)fidg
vfidg
atpdg
N. a^sa
§ 205. Dialects. — The following are special additional forms of the
Ion. Dialect. (Those in brackets are merely New-Ion.)
Sin
rvvT] [tu]
\aso, aev (so, sv
[aeXo, as-Oev (flo, s-Qev
Toi, retv tot) compare § 34,
te j D. 4.
(vfikg) vfineg
v}ikit)Vy vfieiojv (T^fwv, a(pei(t)v
vnjxiiy) a(pi(v)
v^kag^ vufxe cr(pdg, a<pkag,
a(puag^ a<pe
An isolated Ionic form for the Accusative Sing, of the third person is
fx i p, trag. V i V, both enclitic ; in a like sense acps occurs in the poets.
viv seldom stands for the Plural.
Nom. tyojv
^^^'X^ilHO, l/i£-6l€v(§178,D.)
Bat.
Ace.
Plur, Nrnn. (v/xkg) dfifieg
Gen. rifiEiov, ijfidoiv
Bat. djifiiiy)
Ace. rineag, dfifie
88 PERSONAL AND POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. § 206.
§ 206. The Stems of the Sing, are : e fie, for the first
person ; a f , for the second ; e, for the third. The Nom-
inative, however, is formed differently from them : lyd), gv,
and that of the third person is entirely wanting.
Obs. — The <r of the Stem ae has arisen from r (§ 60, a) \te\ which
remains in many dialect-forms. The Stem t goes back to /^e,
and this to a still older form, aP^ [Lat. se for me\. (§ 60,^ 5.) In
the form <t0€, the f is hardened into ^.
The Stems of the Dual are : v w {jio-s], a(lni), (jcfxt). The
Dual of the third person does not occur in prose.
The Stems of the Plural are : 17 ju f , u /x e, <t t (e is gen-
erally contracted with the ending, hence the circumflex :
see Dialects).
§ 207. When there is no emphasis on the Personal Pro-
nouns, it becomes enclitic in the forms mentioned in § 92,
2 ; in that case the first person has the forms beginning
with ju. But when emphatic, as well as generally after
prepositions, it retains its accent, and the first person has
the fuller forms : doKu /uloi, it seems to me y IfioX ov aoi
TovTo ape<TKsi, this pleases m^e, not you.
The Gen., Dat., and Ace. Plur. of the first and second persons, when
not emphatic, sometimes have the accent on the first syllable :
rjixwv, v/iiv, and in this case the final syllable of the Dat. and
A!?c. is usually shortened : TJfiiv, rjixag (Hom.). When emphatic,
with the final syllable shortened, they are written t)fiiv, vfiiv.
§ 208. The Possessive Pronouns are formed from the
Stems of the Personal Pronouns :
St. € ju 6, e/tiof, my. St. ?7 /i €, r/fieTEpo^, our.
" (7 €, aoQ^ thy. " I* /i 6, vfierepoQ, your.
" e, og, his, her. " a<pe, cr^eTepog, their.
Obs. — The ending npog is that of the comparative (§ 193).
§ 208. Dialects. — Hom. additional forms of the Possessives : te6q
\tuus'\, log {suns'], afxag (properly Dor.), v/iog, acpog. From the Dual
Stems vw, (T(poj: vtJiTepog, nos-ter ; cr^mTEpog, belonging to you two; afiog
(also ufiog) often means my, og sometimes means own, without any ref-
erence to a particular person.
§ 211. REFLEXIVE AND OTHER PROXOUNS. 89
§ 209. avT(j-g, avTijf avro, self, is declined like a com-
mon adjective, except that the Neuter in the Nom. Ace.
Yoc. Sing, has no v (compare the article to).
6 avTog {avTog), 17 avrr) (avTr])y to qvto (rauro or TavTOv),
the same, Lat. idem.
§ 210. The Stems of the Personal Pronouns, combined
with avTog, produce the Reflexive Pronouns.
Singular. Gen. M. N. F. Dat. M. N. F. Ace. M. F. N.
1st person, IfiavTOv -fjQ Ifiavri^ -y tfiavTov -i]v^ myself,
2d person, treavTOv -iig ceavT<^ -y aeavrov -rjv, thyself.
or (TtwTov -rjg aavTi^ -y aavrov -r]v
3d person, iavTov -rjg tavT(^ -y iavTov -rjv -6, Mmself Tier-
or avTov -fJQ avT(^ -y avrov -t]v -6, self, it
In the plural, both Stems are declined together :
Plural. Gen. M.F.N. Dat.M.N. F. Ace. M. P.
1st person, yfidv avT&v r'lfiiv avToiq -aXg t]fiag avrovg -dg, ourselves.
2d person, vfiHiv avrwv vfxlv avrolg -a7g vfiag avrovg -dg, yourselves.
3d person, acpdv avrdv (T(pi<nv avroig -alg (T<pdg avrovg -dg^ themselves.
Neut. a(pi.a avrd
Yet the 3d person plural has also the compound form :
tavrCJv iavroXg -alg tavrovg -dg -d
or avrwv avroXg -alg avrovg -dg -d
§211. aXXo'Qy aXXr], aXXo, another (alius), is declined
like avTog.
The Stem aXXo combined with itself produces the Re-
ciprocal Pronoun aXX-r]Xo (for aXX-aXXo), occurring
only in the Dual and Plural.
§ 209. Dialects. — New-5onic bivrog, lovrri, rojvro ; Homeric cjvrdg = 6
avrog.
§ 210. Dialects. — The Epic dialect declines both Stems together
even in the sing. : Ifik avrov = ifiavrov, ol avrt^ ^ lavri^^ etc.
New-Ionic sfieujvrov, aecovrov, tcjvrov, stand for the forms with av.
90
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.
212.
Dual.
Masc.
Fern.
Neut.
G.D.
aKKy\Koiv
aKK.y]Kaiv
aXki]koiv
Ace.
aSXy]kixi
aKkr]Ka
d\\i]Xio
Plural.
Om.
aXKr\K{tiv
dXAjjXwv
dWrjXtov
Bat.
aKki]koiQ
aKKTf]Kaiq
d\\T]\0lQ
Ace.
afO<r\KovQ
aXAijXa^
dWijXa
§ 212. The two most important Demonstrative Pro-
nouns are :
ode, ijde, toSsj that. ourog, avrr}, tovto, this.
ode consists of the article 6 and the demonstrative enclitic
81, and is therefore declined entirely like the article with
de affixed, ovrog corresponds to the article with regard to
the rough breathing and the r at the beginning ; it also has
the diphthong au in the last syllable but one where the
article has a or t; (A-sound), and o v where the article has
o, w, or o u (0-sound).
Norn.
Singular.
Plural.
V
t6
01
at
Td
ode
ijde
Tode
o'ide
a'lSe
Tdde
OVTOQ
aVTTJ
TOVTO
OVTOl
avTai
TavTa
TOV
rrjg
TOV
TU}V
TovSe
TTjgde
Toiide
Tiovde
TOVTOV
TavTTjg
TOVTOV
TOVTOJV
rv
ry
Tq,
ToXg
Taig
Toig
Tqide
TySe
Ti^Se
ToXgSe
Toigh
ToTgde
TOVTlf)
TavTy
TOVTlf}
TOVTOig
TavTUig
TOVTOig
TOV
TT)V
TO
Tovg
Tag
Td
Tovde
Tt'ivde
Tode
Tovgde
TagSe
Tdde
TOVTOV
TaVTT]V
TOVTO
TOVTOVg
TavTag
TaVTU
Oen.
Bat.
Ace.
§ 212. Dialects. — In Homer, the article itself is a demonstrative pro-
noun, with these special forms : Nom. o ; Gen. rolo ; Gen. Dat. Dual
ToXiv ; Nom. Plur. roc, rai ; Gen. Plur. Fem. Tdiov ; Dat. Plur. Tolaiiy),
Tyai(v), or T7jg.
From ode we have Dat. Plur. rola^eo-t or ToTade(T(n{v)j and KeXvog, poet,
for tKeh^og.
§ 214. RELATIVE AND INTERROG. PRONOUNS.
91
TU)
TO.
Th)
' Toiv
Toiv
Toiv
ru}de
ToiSe
TOJde
G.D.
< ToTv^e
rdlvde
ToXvde
TOVTix)
Tavra
TOVTiO
i TOVTOIV
Tavraiv
TOVTOIV
N.A.V.
The adverb of oh is wh ; that of ovtoq, ovtojq or oi5rw, in this way.
Like ovTOQ are declined :
TO<TOVTOQ TOffaVTT) TOffOVTO OT TOffOVTOV, SO gVeOt {taUtUS) ;
ToiovTOQ ToiavTTi TOtovTo OT ToiovTov, suck (talis) ;
TtjXlKOVTOQ T1]klKaVTT} TTjXlKOVTO OT TTjXlKOVTOVj SO old /
in which, however, the r of the forms beginning with r is
dropped ; raura, but TO(T-avTa ; by affixing the enclitic dk, we have
the forms ToaogSe, so large; roldc^e, of such quality; ttjXikoq-Ss, of
such an age, with a regular adjective declension before the syl-
lable de.
kKEivo-g, EKeivT], Ikeivo, that, is declined like avTog.
A long accented i is often affixed to the Demonstrative Pronouns
to strengthen the meaning without affecting the declension, but
the € of ^€ is lost : ovTogi, odt, tKeiviovt, avrijt, ToigSt Compare the
Lat. ce in his-ce, has-ce.
§ 213. The Belative Pronoun has the rough breathing
in all cases, as :
Singular.
Plural.
Dual. »
Masc. Fem.
Neut.
Masc.
-Fem. Neut.
Masc. Fem. Neut
N&m.
og, wh). ri
o
di
di li
N.A. w li w
Gen.
ov rjg
ov
wv
G. D. olv div olv
Bat.
V y
V
dig
dig olg
Ace.
ov TjV
ovg
ug li
Obs. — In the phrases kul og etpri, and he said, and r) 5' og, hit he said,
og is used as a Demonstrative (compare the Dialects).
§ 214. The Interrogative Pronoun has the same Stem
as the Indefinite Pronoun, from which it is distinguished
§ 213. Dialects. — Horn, o = og, oov = ov, eijg = rjg, and signifies he.
Ion. olo = ov, and the forms of the Article which begin with r, are used
instead of those of the Bdati^e: tov = ov, cujus; r^ =z ^, cui; To~ig-=^
olg, quibus.
§ 214. Dialects. — Hom., partly also New-Ion. forms are : Gen. t^o,
Tw ; Dat. r£<^, T(p ; Gen. Plur. tbujv ; Dat. Plur. Tkoi(n(y) ; Neut. Plur.
daaa. The
92
INTERROG. AND INDEF. PRONOUNS.
215.
only by the accent. The Interrogative Pronoun has the
accent always on the Stem syllable ; the Indefinite is en-
clitic : hence rig, who f riq, enclitic, some one.
Interrogative.
Indefinite.
Singular.
Singular.
Nbm.
Tig tI
TlQ tI
Gm,
Tivog
Tivog
Bat.
TlVl
Tivi
Ace.
Tiva Tl
Tivd Tl
Dual.
Dual.
Nom. Ace.
TIVE
Tivk
Gen. Bat.
TIVOIV
Tivoiv
Plural.
Plural.
Mm.
TlV^Q Tiva
Tivkg Tlvd {CLTTO)
Gen.
TlViOV
TIVWV
Bat.
Ti<Ji(v)
Tl(Ti(v)
Ace.
Tivag Tiva
TLvag Tiva {aTTo)
Qba. — 1. Tov, T(^, which as indefinites are enclitic, are often used for
Tivog, Tivi, and for tivoq, tivi.
Obs. — 2. The Eelative and Indefinite combine to form dcFTig, ijTig,
o Tl, wTio. Both Stems are declined together : ovnvog, Tjgnvog,
t^Tivi, olvTivoiv (§ 93, d). A space is left between o and ti in o ti,
which, to distinguish it from the conjunction on, th/itt.
The shorter forms of tIq are also used with dg ; but the Stem 6 is
not declined : Gen. otov ; Dat. ot(i) ; more rarely Gen. Plur. otojv,
Dat. oToi(n{v). uTTa is an additional form for uTiva, not to be
confounded with dTTa for Tivd.
§ 215. Another Indefinite Pronoun is ^tlva, of three gen-
ders, quidam, sometimes undeclined, sometimes declined as
follows :
Sing. 6, 77, TO delva, ^eTvog, deivi, deiva.
Plur. oi, ai, deiveg, deivojv, ^eivag.
The following are special forms of the compound Relative in Hom.
and also in New-Ion. :
Sing. oTigy N. oTTi ; orev, ottso, ottev ; ors(p ; oriva, N. otti
Plur. N. ciarra ; orsiov oTtoKTi ; oTivag, N. iiaaa
(for arta, according to §57).
. The Stem of the Relative thus often remains unchanged.
217.
CORRELATIVE PRONOUNS.
93
216. The following are called Correlative Pronouns :
Interrogative.
Indefinite.
Demonstrative.
Relative.
TIQ, who ?
rig, some one.
o^e, ovTog, this.
og, ogTig, who.
TTOTepog, uter f
which of two ?
TTorepog, one of
two(alteruter).
erepog, the one of
two {alter).
uTTOTspog, which
of two.
-Koaoq, haw great ?
how much?
{quantus, quot).
TTocTog, of some
size or nwriber.
To^^-ocogh, To-
(Tovrog, so great,
so much itantus,
tot).
ocrog, oTToaog,
how great, how
much (quan-
tus, quot).
TToTof, of what
quality ? i^uxilis).
TToiog, of some
quality.
Tolog, ToiogSe, roi-
ovTog, of such a
quality (talis).
olog, oTTolog, of
what quality
(qualis).
TrrjXiKog, how old ?
TTTjXiKog, of some
age.
TTiXiKog, TTiXiKogde,
TT]\lKOVTOg, of
such age.
TtjX'iKog, oTnjXiKog,
of what age.
05s.— On the ending r e p o c, see §§ 192, 208, Obs.
In Attic prose of the Demonstratives generally only
those in -Se and -ovro-q are used.
§ 217. Correlative Adverbs are formed from the same
Pronominal Stems.
§ 216. Dialects. — oaaog (add. form oarsaTiog), roffcrog, are Epic for
o(Tog, Toaog. For every Interrogative tt the New-Ion. dialect Has k :
KocTog, Koiog, kote, kqv.
§ 217. Dialects. — ttoQl is Epic = ttov ; ttoQI =: ttov ; dem. toOi, there,
rel. Wi, where. In poetry, t6Qw is dem. to ttoOzv, New-Ion. ivOavra for
IvravOa, IvOevtev for IvtevOev.
wg in the Poets, like ovriog, means so, to be distinguished from ujg
(without accent), hoic ; it is written also we, with the meaning yet:
Kal log, and yet. With the meaning so, Twg also occurs, yxi is an ad-
ditional form of y. The tt is doubled : oinrojg, oTTTrore (§ 62, D.).
94
CORRELATIVE ADVERBS.
§218.
Interrogative. Indefinite
Demonstrative.
Relative.
TTov, where ?
{uUf)
TToOev,
TToT, whither f
(quo ?)
TTore, when ?
c at
TcriviKa < what
(timef
TTwc, how ?
( whither ?
. ^^ r some-
cvM) r^^'^'
TToOev ^ from
{all- > some-
cunde) ) where.
7V IsoM
^^, i whither,
quo) ^
TToH, sometime.
Try
â– <. in what
way i
T^y\
some whither,
in som^ way.
ov
OTTOV
) where
\ {ubi).
oQ^v \ whence
oTToOev S (unde).
) whither
) (qiM).
thitJier,
in this
way.
ol
OTTOl
OTEj OTTOTE, wheU.
tlv'iKa ) at what
oTnjviKa S time.
WQ, OTTiOQ, as.
c whither:^
( way.
Obs. — tv9a and ivQiv, in their original demonstrative sense, occur
only in a few combinations in Attic prose {ivBa dr),just then;
ivOa Kul ev9a, here and there) ; but they are regularly used in a
relative sense : where., whence.
To the Correlative Adverbs there belong also cwc, qtiamdiu (Rela-
tive, as long) ; rlwe, tamdiu (Demonstrative, so long), as well as
the poetic b^pa (for o^pa, § 53, c, Obs.) used in the same meaning
as «wf , and ro^pa as Hajg.
To^the simple UeXvog (that, § 212) correspond among the Adverbs
of place tm, there; eKEWev,from there; iKeiae, thither. The De-
monstrative iig occurs in Attic prose only in kuI wg, even thus, and
ovd' Mg, not even thus. It is also written Jtg in these combinations.
§ 218. The conjunctions Srj, Stjitote, and ovv (meaning ever, Latin
cunqu£), and the enclitic Trep, may be joined to any relative pro-
noun or adverb to give prominence: oang drj ttotb, whosoever ;
oTTiog ovv (utcunqy^), eiffirep, just as.
Sometimes ij is affixed to the interrog. tL in the sense of why f and
to the corresponding indirect interrogative B n : rirj, otitj, why ?
§ 219. There are also negative pronouns and adverbs to be noticed :
ovTig, fir]Tig, no one; ovSeTepogj^ff^Shepog, neither, neuter ; ovda/nov,
firidanov, nowhere ; ovda/idg, fiijdafiwg, in no way.
220.
THE NUMERALS.
95
Chap. IX. — The Numerals.
§ 220. The Cardinal^ Ordinal^ and Adverbial Numer-
als, with their value and signs, are :
1
d
elg, fiia, «V, one.
6 Trpwroc, thejirst.
uTra^, once.
3
i3'
dvo
devTspog
dig
3
7
TpHQ.rpia^
i Te(T(Tapeg, rka- )
rpiTog
rpig
4
h'
< aapa, or rkrvd- \
( joef , TETTapa )
TETapTog
TETpaKig *
5
e
TTSVTe
TTEfiTTTOg
TTEvraKig
6
t'
U
EKTOg
E%dKig
7
r
(.Tcrd
ffiSofiog
ETTTaKig
8
V
OKTU)
oydoog
OKTUKig
9
&
tvvka
Evarog {Evvarog)
ivaKig (Ivvdicig)
10
i
â– SsKa
dsKarog
^EKUKig
11
id
'svdeica
EvSEKarog
EvdEKUKig
12
c(3'
du)deKa
diodEKUTog
dbidEKUKig
13
ty'
rpigKaidsKa
TpigKaiSEKUTog
14
t^
\ TEcrrapiQKa'ihKa \
\ TsacapaKaideKa )
TEtraapaKai^EKaTog
15
IS
TrevreKaideKa
TTEVTEKaiUKarog
16
it'
SKicaiSeKa
EKKaidEKUTOg
17
tr
tTrraicaideKa
ETTTaKai^EKUTOg
18
IT}'
OKTiOKaiSeKa
oKTOJKaidEKarog
19
iff
IvveaKaidEKa
EVVEaKaidEKUTog
20
K
EiKoaiiy)
eiKOCTog
EiKoaaKig
30
X'
TpidKOvra
TpidKOCFTog
TpidKOVTUKig
40
/*;
TE(xaapaKOVTa
TEaaapaKoarog
TEcrcrapdKOVTaKig
50
v
TTEVTTJKOVTa
TrevTTtKOffTog
TTEVTTlKOVTdKig
60
r
e^rjKOvra
E^T]K0(TT6g
UT]KOVTdKig
70
6^
ijSdofirjKovra
tl3doiJ.T]KO(TT6g
ilSdo/jirjKovrdKig
80
IT
oydorjKOVTU
dySoT]KO(TT6g
oydorjKOVTaKig
90
q'
IvEvriKovra
EVEVtJKOdTog
EVEVTIKOVTUKig
100
p
Ikutov
EKaroarog.
EKaTOVTUKig
200
a
didicomoi^ ai, a
SiaKomocrrog
^laKoaiaKig
300
T
TpidKoaioi, ai, a
TpiaKoaioaTog
400
V
TETpdKOCTlOl, ai, a
TETpaKOmOCTTOg
500
Â¥
TTEvrdicoaioi, ai, a
TTEvraKoaiodTog
600
X
i^aKomoi^ at, a
E^aKOffLOtTTOg
700
f
iTTTdKoaioi, at, a
ETTTaKOCTLOaTOg
800
it)
OKTUKoffioi^ ai, a
oKTaKoaiooTog
900
^
j ivuKomoi, ai, a
EvaK0(TL0(TT6g or
I ivvdKoaioi^ at, a
EVvaKoaioffTog
1000
p.
Xi'Xtoi, aij a
XlXlOOTOC
XiXid/cig
2000
J3
SiQxiXioi, ai, a
Sigxi-Xioffrog
3000
n
Tpigx'iXioi, aiy a
vpigxiXiofTTog
10000
ji
fjivpioi, ai^ a
fivpioffrog
fivpidicig
96
THE NUMERALS.
221.
Obs. — The letters of the alphabet are used in numbers also in un-
interrupted succession. In the most frequent designation, given
above, stigma (<r') is inserted after k for the number 6 : a to &
are therefore units ; t is 10, k' 20 ; after it (= 80), Q' (koppa = 90)
is inserted; and after w (==800) ^ (sampi:i=:900). The alphabet
begins again at 1000, but here each letter has the accent under
it; hence ,/3r/tr=: 3344, ,aa>^/3'=1863.
§ 221. The Cardinal Numbers 1 tcr4 are declined:
1. Norti.
' elg fiia tv
2. W. A. dvo
Qm.
tvoQ fitdg evoQ
G. B. dvolv
Bat.
ivi inq, • tvi
Ace.
'iva fiiav 'iv
3. Nrnii.
Tpelg JV. Tpia
4. TEaaapeg
If. Tsaaapa
Oen.
Tpiaiv
Tecraapbjv
Bat.
rpi(T[{v)
rkaaapmiv)
Ace.
Tpe7g iV! Tpia
Ttaaapag
iV". Teacrapa
ov^dg, ov^e/iiiaf ov^ev-, and firtddgy no one, are declined
like HQ. ^vo is also used without inflexion, ^vfiv is an-
other form for ^voXv. tt occurs for o-o- in all forms and
derivations of TscrcrapeQ. a^^w {amho, hotJi), Gen. Dat. a/x-
0otv, is sometimes represented by the Plur. afK^iOTLpoi, ai, a,
of which the Singular ajuKfiOTepov, hoth, is also in use.
§§ 330-223. Dialects. — 1, Homer has the fem. Id, irjg, ly : also Neut.
Dat. T(^.
2, dvo) for all cases : ^orw, doioi, doiai, Sold ; Dat. doiolg ; Ace. doiovg,
dg, d.
3, Tp'iTaTog-=.TpiTog.
4, Hom. ^ol. TTitTvpEg, New-Ion. rkacrepsg, Horn. TSTparog (§ 59, D.).
7, kl^^ofxaTog. 8, dydoarog. 9, tivarog.
13, Hom. SvwdeKa, and dvo Kal dUa, dvodsKaTog.
20, Hom. kiKoai, kiKOffTog. 30, Hom. TpirjKOvra. 80, by^wKovTa. 90,
ivvTjKOVTa. 200, etc., also diijKomoi', Herod. TrevTijKotnoi, eivaK6<noi.
9000, Horn. IvedxiXoi. 10,000, SeKdxTXoi.
dixa, Hom. dixOd'^ likewise rpixOd, rerpaxOd, threefold, fourfold ; also
rpnrXy, TETpanrXy.
I
§ 224. NUMERALS. 97
§ 222. The numerals 5 to 199 are indeclinable.
We also find rpslg, rpia Kai dsKa, rkaaapEQ, r'taoapa Kai dsKa, for 13
and 14. The units and tens are united by Kai, in any order :
EiKoai Kai TrkvTE and Trevre Kai eiKoai ; or without Kai when the
tens are first : etKocrt Trsire, 25 ; so also kKarbv SeKa. For twenty-
j^rst we have eIq Kai dKoarog, or TrpCJTog Kai eiKoffrog, and eiKOffTog
TrpuJTog, etc.
The Cardinal numerals from 200 are, like the Ordinal,
regular adjectives of three terminations : ^taKomoi, ai, a.
The Ordinal numerals have the endings of the superlative,
except ^evTspog, which has that of the comparative (compare
§ 192).
§ 223. By combination with (tvv, the numeral Stems form Distribu-
tives: (tvvSvo, two and two; avvTpug, three aTid three; Multipli-
catives, by the syllable irkovg (from ttXooc, Lat. plex) : airXovg^
simple; SnrXovg, rpnrXoiig, TrevTaTrXovg, etc. Observe also hrraog,
twofold; Tpiffaog, threefold; dnrXdmog, twice as much; TpnrXdmog,
etc., TToXXaTrXdmog, many times as much. Adverbs : fiovaxy, sim-
ply (jiovog, alone) ; dixy or dixa, dmibl/y. Substantives : fiovdg (St.
fxovad), unity; Svdg, rpidg, rerpdg, Trefnrdg, i^dg, ij3dofidg, oydodg^
evvedg, deKdg, eixdg, tKaTovrdg, X'^*^?> /uupidg; hence rpelg fivpiddeg
= 30,000.
§ 224. The most important ge^iieral Adjectives of quan-
tity are : cicaoToc, each / kKanpog, either,' irag, Tracra, irav
(St. iravT), all / TTooToc, oirocTTog [quotjis] ; and the ad-
verbs : iroWaKig, many times, often ; tKaaraKig, every
time / oaaKig, as often as / ro<5avTaKiq, SO often / TrXet-
GjaKiQi very often ; dXiyuKig, seldom,
E
98 THE VEKB. § 225.
B. INFLEXION OF VEEBS.
General BemarJcs.
§ 225. The Greeks distinguish in the Verb —
1. Three Nmiibers : Singular^ Dual, and Plural.
2. Three Voices :
Active : t\vaa, I loosed ;
Middle : iXvcraiuYiv, I loosed for myself;
Passive : IXvOr^v, I was loosed.
Verbs which occur only in the Middle or Passive are called
Deponents : ^ixofxai, I receive,
Obs. — Only the Aorist and the Future have special lorms for the
Passive ; and only the Aorist special forms for the Middle : in
all other tenses the Middle forms have also a Passive meaning.
3. Two classes of Tenses :
A. Principal, viz. :
1. Present : \vii),Iloose ;
2. Perfect : \i\vKa, I have loosed ;
3. Future : Xvctw, I shall loose.
B. Historical, viz. :
1. Imperfect : cXuov, I was loosing ;
2. Pluperfect : eXeXvKEiv, I had loosed /
3. Aorist : tXvcra, I loosed.
4. Pour Moods, viz. :
' 1. Indicative : Xvoj, I loose /
Finite J 2. Subjunctive : Xikjj, I may loose /
Verb. I 3. Optative : Xvot/ii, I would loose /
. 4. Imperative : Xue, loose.
5. Three Verbal Nouns, viz. :
1. Infinitive : Xvhv, loose ;
2. Participle : Xvojv, loosing;
3. Verbal Adjective : XvHoq, to be loosed, soU
vendus.
§ 227. THE PERSONAL ENDINGS.— TENSE-STEMS.
99
226. The Personal Endings had originally the follow-
ing* forms :
*
Active.
Middle.
Principal Teuses. Hist. Tenses.
Principal Tenses.
Hist. Tenses.
Sing. 1. -/it
-V
-/xat
-firiv
3. -at
-C
-aai
-ao
3. -rt
—
-rat
-TO
Dual 1. -fiw
-fiEOov
2. -TOP
-(jQov
3. -TOV
-TTIV
-aQov
-aOriv "
Plur. 1. -fiw
-fie9a
2. -re
-a9s
3. -rn
-V
-vrai
-VTO
The Active personal endings of the principal tenses are
most easily observed in the verb :
€t-/it, I am.
l<T-<Ti (contr. d)
la-Ti(y)
t(T-fiev
ka-Tov
ia-Tov
ecr-fisv.
la-Ts.
H-ai(y) {pi:
60).
The endings of the three persons in the Sing, are really the per-
sonal pronouns alSixed, I^thou^ Jie^ and to be compared with the
Stems of the Personal Pronouns : {lo (St. ^ e), at ((re), n (the Stem
of the article, r o). The 1 Dual in the Active is always iden-
tical with the 1 Plur. The ending of the 1 Sing, of the Historical
Tenses was originally fi (Lat. era-m)^ which at the end of the
word was changed into v, according to § 67, Ods. The ending of
the 3 Sing, was originally r, which, however, could not continue
at the end according to § 67 (compare § 233, 3) ; and that of the
3 Plur. VT (Lat. era-nt) ; but the r was dropped (§ 67).
§ 227. The tenses, moods, and verbal nouns are classified
according to the Stems {Tense-Stems) from which they are
formed. The Tense- Stems are the following :
1. The Present Stem, from which the Present and Im-
perfect are formed.
§ 236. Dialects. — Instead of vrai, vto, the Ion. (especially New-Ion.)
often has arat, aro, in 3 Plur. Mid. The vowel a is here properly a
connecting vowel, as in the Ace. Sing, of the Second Principal Declens.
(§ 173, 3, Ods.) ; and v is dropped in both alike ; hence a-Tai, a-To, for
a-vTai, a-vTo (compare §§ 287, 302, 3).
100 'TENSE-STEMS. § 228.
2. The Strong Aorist Stem, from which the Second or
Strong Aorist Act. and Mid. are formed.
3. The Future Stem, from which the Future Act", and
Mid. are formed.
4. The WeaJc Aorist Stem, from which the First or Weak
Aorist Act. and Mid. are formed.
5. The Perfect Stem, from which the Perfect, Pluper-
fect, and Future-Perfect are formed.
These five Stems belong to the Active and Middle. There
are added to them, for the special forms of the Passive :
6. The Strong Passive Stem, from which the Second or
Strong Aorist Passive and Second Future Passive are
formed.
7. The Weah Passive Stem, from which the First or Weak
Aorist Passive and First Future Passive are formed.
The form from which all the Tense- Stems of a verb may-
be derived is called the Verbal Stem.
§ 228. The Suhjunctive is indicated between the Stem
and the ending. Long vowels are peculiar to it : Xv-w-/x£v,
solv-a-mus ; Xv-yi-te, solv-d-tis.
The vowel t is characteristic of the Optative^ which gen-
erally becom-es a diphthong with other vpwels : Xv-oi'/m^v,
we would loose. The Subjunctive has the^endjngs q£ tho"*
JlTiuCiW<f^ Aaa^i^.*? y the Optative (except 1 Sing. Act.) those
of the historical tenses.
The Pnperative has the following peculiar endings :
Active. Middle.
Sing. 2. -6i -ao
3. -rw -a9<»)
Dual 2. -TOP -gBov
3. -rwv -aOiov
Plur. 2. -re -aOe
3. -vTOJv or -Tojcrav -trOwv or -aOdxrav
§ 229. The general law for the accentuation of the verb
is that the accent is jplaced as far bach as jpossible from
§ 228. Dialects. — The Horn, dialect often shortens the long vowel
of the Subjunctive in the Dual and Plural.
§ 230. CONJUGATIONS. 101
the end, final a i not being considered long except in the
optative : Xuw, Xvere, Xvojuai.
Obs. — An exception is formed by the Participles, which in declen-
sion (chap, vii.), if possible (§§ 79-87), always keep the accent
on the same syllable as in the Nom. Sing. Masc. : Part. Pres. Act.
fiainXevcjv, regnam, Kent. (iamXevov (not (SamXevov, according to
§ 84), Part. Fift. Act. (iaaiXevaujv, regnaturus, Neut. (3amXev<Tov.
(The special exceptions, see §§ 331-333.)
§ 230. We distinguish Two Principal Conjugations :
1. The First — the far more frequent— connects the per-
sonal endings with the first two Tense- Stems by a connect-
ing vowel : Xv-O'iuev. The verbs belonging to it are called
verbs in w because the first Person Sing. Pres. Act. ends
in u) : Xvtt),
2. The Second — the less frequent, but older — affixes the
personal endings to the first two Tense- Stems without a
connecting 'dowel : la-iikv. They are called verbs in /x i
because the 1 Sing. Pres. Act. preserves the original end-
ing /x I : £i-/it.
The forms of the other five Tense- Stems are common to
both Conjugations.
The Paradigms of the verbs are given first : the forma-
tion of each Tense- Stem is then explained in order.
List of the Pakadigms.
Eifii,Iam Table I.
Synopsis of Xvu), I loose (exhibiting the meanings of the
Tenses) " II.
Verbs in q.
A. Vowel Stems.
1. Uncontracted, Xww " III.
2. Contracted, rt/taw, ttoieo), dovXoM " IV.
B. Consonant Sterna.
1. Guttural Stems, TrXsKio, ^evyw, Td<r(T(i) " V.
2. Dental Stems, xpevSofiai, TreiOio, KOfii^oj " VI.
3. Labial Stems, Trsfnroj, XtiTrw, KaXvTrTio " VII.
4. Liquid Stems, ^ipw, dyyiXXw, (nreipu) " VIII.
Verbs in mi.
First Class, tIOtjixi, ^I'^w/^t, 'IcTTrjiJii " IX.
Second Class, ^e/fcvvp " X.
102
PARADIGMS OF VERBS.
Table I.
PAEADIGMS OF YEEBS.
Et/it, I am. Stem kg.
Moods.
M
GQ
Present.
Imperfect.
Future.
g
1
.
Indicative.
s.
1
elfxi
i)v or ?}
tcTO/xai
2
el
fioBa
toy or tcrei
3
k(TTi(v)
r)v
tarai
D.
1
lao/xeOov
a
iarov
ijarov or rfrov
taeaOov
3
lOTOV
r)<TTi]V or iiTr]v
taeaOov
P.
1
(.(Tflkv
rjfxev
kaofieOa
2
iars
ricrre or ryre
i<TE(T9e
3
dffi
r}(rav
icrovTUi
Subjunctive.
S.
1
2
3
0)
V
~
D.
2
3
ijTOV
rjrov
P.
1
2
3
wfiev
r)TE
Optative.
S.
1
drjv
iaoinr]v
2
tirjg
iffoio
3
eit]
taoiTO
D.
1
.
kaoifieOov
2
elrjTov or dTov
IcroicrOov
3
eirjTijv or dTTjv
IcfoktOtj
P.
1
eiTjixav or dfxev
ktroifieOa
2
sirjTE or fire
tffoiaOe
3
dr]aav or dev
icroivTO
Imperative.
S.
2
3
taroi
D.
2
3
tffTOV
i(TT(iJV
P.
2
3
tare.
etTTuxrav or tffrcjv
Infinitive.
dvai
i<7£a9ai
Participle.
ovaa
ov (Stem ovt)
ttrofievog
i<TOfiEvr)
eao/iievov
Note. — The formation of the tenses of this verb is explained in
§ 315, but they are inserted in this place because some of them are re-
quired in conjugating the Middle and Passive Voices of ordinary verbs.
Table II.
PARADIGMS OF VERBS.
103
i
•2
^
91P
o 3 o o 53 ^o
/< /< r< ^ ^ /-i
S^
SKhS
^^J
b § b "b
1^ ^ ^ ^
S » S) S>
b § g^§
â– ^
"to
^ '3 <*) R" '!?â– 1*)
vj) ^ Q:> ^ <I) Qi
^ ^ /< ^ ^ /<
I It si -I
^ b b b
r> ^ ^^ .^
b b
^S s
/</</<<< ^
^ ?^ 5S
?? ^ ^
-5; p-O
i i
81P
CJI CJI
o>
?. ?k
=L a. :i. b b a.
s s s s -s s
^ /< /< 1^ ,< /<
3- ?^ A
3 3 o <o S 3
S -S »S IS ^s ^s
'«fH
O^S^fr
5-5*
3 o S
b b b
-s -s -s
>< ^ ><
s
iJ^
's
rtii-i
SSl-s
JaJ
b 3 « o « B
s b b b b b
^ ^S ^S »S JS ^s
^ ^ >< ^ << ><
^•n
o
11
'^'"refill
ii^.flit
1
3- § ^
B 3 o CO «3 '3
« Si Wj y a s,;
S "S ^S s s s
^ ^ /< ^ ,< /<
coOhhmPh
^ J
I -^
k s ^
J
b^
'^ b'^
"* 'Si S
^^^'^
o o .
b b oi
â– s s \o
;^ ;>
104 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. — VERBS IN Q. Table III.
A. VOWEL STEMS.
Active
Tenses.
2 ^
If
Indicative.
Subjunctive.
S S
.
Present.
Imperfect.
Present.
S. 1
Xvo)
iXvov
Xviij
2
Xveig
aXves m
Xvyg
3
Xmi
iXvelv)
Xvy
D. 2
XVETOV
iXviTOV
XvT]TOV
3
XVETOV
iXviTijv
XvTJTOV
P. 1
Xvofuv
iXvofiw
XvbJjXEV
2
Xvere
iXvere
XVTJTE
3
Xvov(Ti{v)
tXvov
Xv(t)(n(v)
Future.
S. 1
2
3
D. 2
3
P. 1
2
3
Xv(T(0
XvaeiQ
Xvaei
XlXTETOV
XvffSTOV
Xvarere
Xv<TOV(Tl(v)
1 Aorist
S. 1
tkvaa
Xv<T(0
(Weak).
2
iXvffag
Xvayg
t
3
iXvaE(y)
Xvcry
D. 2
iXvaarov
XvariTOV
3
iXvadrriv
XvffrjTOV
P. 1
iXvffaixEV
Xv(T(OflEV
2
eXvaare
Xv<TT]TE
3
tkvaav
Xv<TO}(Tl(v)
Perfect.
Pluperfect.
1 Perfect
S. 1
XkXvKa
iXEXvKElV
XeXvku)
(Weak).
2
XkXvKaQ
IXeXvKElQ
XEXvKyg
3
XsXvke(v)
IXEXvKei
XsXvicy
D. 2
XeXvKarov
IXeXvKeirov
XeXvkijtov
3
XsXvKaTOv
iXiXvKeiTijv
XeXvktjtov
P. 1
XeXvKafiev
kXeXvKEifiev
XeXvkwixev
2
XeXyKare
IXeXvKEiTe
XEXvKT]rE
3
XeXvKd(Ti(v)
IXeXvKScrav
or tXEXvKElffaV
XEXvK(o(n(v)
2 Aorist
Wanting.
(Strong).
2 Perfect and
Wanting.
Pluperf.(Strong).
Examples for
6vio, I sacrifice; 9EpairEvoj,Iserve; (3ovXEvtx), I advise; xop^vu),Idance;
tTravaOijv ;
Table III. paradigms of verbs. — verbs in Q. 105
1. UNCONTRACTED.
Voice.
Optative.
Imperative.
Infinitive.
Participte.
Xuot/ii
XVELV
XvdiV
Xvoig
Xve
Xvovaa
Xioi
XviTU)
Xvov
XVOITOV
XvfTOV
Xvo'lTTlV
XVSTOJV
Gen. XvovTog
XvOlflEV
XvovffTjg
XvoiTe
Xvere
XvovTog
XVOIEV
XvovTojv or XvETcotrav
St. XVOVT
Xvffoifii
XXXTEIV
XlXTOJV
Xvffoig
Xvffoi
â–
XvcTovffa
XvaoiTov
Xvaov
Xv<ToiTr}v
Gen. XvffovTog
XvffOljXEV
Xv<Tov(Tt]g
Xv(TOLT£
XvaovTog
XvaoiEv
St. XvaovT
Xvaaifxi
Xvaai
Xvoag
Xvcraig or Xvaeiag
Xv(TOV
Xvaaaa
Xmav
Xvcrai or XvffEie(v)
Xvadru)
Gen. XvaavTog
XvaaiTov
Xvaarov
Xvadarjg
XvffaiTTjv
Xv0a.Tix)v
XvaavTog
Xvcraifiep
St. XvaavT
XvaaitE
XvauTE [ffav
Xvaauv or Xvcreiav
XvadvTiov or Xvadrcj-
XeXvKOifxi
XEXvKEVai
XEXvK(x)g
XeXvKOig
XiXvKE
XeXvkvIu
XEXvKog
XeXvKoi
XeXvketo}
Gen. XEXvKOTog
XeXvkoltov
XEXvKViag
XeXvKoirrjv
XeXvketov
XEXvKorog
XfXvKOllXEV
XeXvketmv
St. XeXvkot
XeXvKOlTE
XeXvkete
XeXvicoisv
XeXvkovtojv or
XEXvKETOJcrav
Conjugation.
SaKpv(o,I weep; Travio, I maJce to cease (Mid., I cease). [1 Aor. Pass.
Verbal, Travarkog.]
E 2
106 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. — VERBS IN Q. Table III. —
A. VOWEL STEMS
Middle and
Tenses comTnon to
Tenses.
Si
Indicative.
Subjunctive.
Present.
S.
1
Xvofiai
Xv<t)ixai
2
Xvy or Xvei
Xvy
3
Xverai
XvjjTat
D.
1
XvofieOov
Xvo}fx.E9ov
2
XveaOov
Xvij(t9ov
3
Xve(t9ov
Xvt]<t9ov
P.
1
XvofiEQa
Xv(oixe9a
2
Xve<T9s
Xvr}a9e
3
XVOVTUI
XviOVTUl
Imperfect.
S.
1
2
3
iXvov
tXvETO
D.
1
2
3
iXv6ixe9ov
iXve<T9ov
kXvk(T9ijv
P.
1
2
3
tXv6ne9a
lXve(T9e
iXvOVTO
Future.
S.
1
Xvffo/xai [ofiai
etc., as in the Pres. Xv-
Perfect.
s.
1
2
3
XsXvixai
XkXvffai
XsXvrai
XeXvfievog w
D.
1
2
3
XeXvfiE9ov
XsXv<t9ov
XeXv(T9ov
P.
1
2
3
XeXvfiE9a
XsXv(r9e
XkXvvTai
Pluperfect.
S.
1
2
3
IXeXvfiijv
IXeXvffo
eXsXvro
D.
1
2
3
kXeXvixs9ov
iXeXva9ov
iXeXv(T9r]v
P.
1
2
3
eXeXvixE9a
lXsXv(j9e
IXkXvVTO
Future Per-
S.
1
XeXvarofiai [o/xai
fect.
etc., as in the Pres. Xv-
Continued, pakadigms of v]^Ba,=-=
I. UNCONTRACTED.
Passive Voices. (§ 225, OU. 2.)
1)0111 Voices.
Optative.
Imperative.
Infinitive.
Participle.
\vo'i\ir\v
Xvoio
XVOITO
Xvoi/xeOov
Xvoi(t9ov
XvoiaOrjv
Xvoi/iieOa
XvoiaOe
XVOIVTO
XveaOai
Xvov
XvkffOu)
XvsffOov
XveaOojv
XvetrOe
XvkrrOiov or
Xvkadioaav
Xvo/xEvog
XvofievT]
XvofiEvov
XvcroifiTjv [oifxrjv
etc., as in tlie Pres. Xv-
XvaeaOai
XvaofievoQ
XvaofievT)
Xvcrofievov
XeXvfievoQ drjv
XeXixrOai
XsXvcro
XeXv<t9(o
XeXvcrOov
XsXvcrOe.
XeXvaOiov or
XeXvaOitxrav
XiXvixevog
XeXvixevr]
XeXvfievov
XsXv(Toifirjv [oifiTjv
etc., as in the Pres. Xv-
XeXixrecrOai
XeXvcTofievog
XeXv(rofikvT]
XsXvaofievov
108 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. — VERBS IN Q. Table III. —
A. YOWEL STEMS.
Middle and
Tenses peculiar to
Tenses.
Indicative.
Subjunctive.
1 Aorist
(Weak).
S. 1
3
3
D. 1
3
3
P. 1
3
3
kXvadfiriv
iXvaaro
tXvadJleQov
tXvaaaBov
eXv(Td(T9r]v
kXvffdfieOa
IXvaacQe
kXvaavTO
Xv(T(t)fiaL
Xvay
Xvffijrat
Xv(Jb)}it9ov
Xvar]a9ov
Xv<Tt](T90V
Xv(rojiie9a
Xv<Tt](T9e
XvffiovTai
3 Aorist
(Strong).
Wanting.
Tenses peculiar to
1 Aorist
(Weak).
S. 1
-3
3
D. 3
3
P. 1
3
3
iXvQriv
IXvOrjg
IXiOri
iXv9rjTov
IXvOrjTijv
eXvOrjfiev
lXver]Te
IXvOtjffav
Xv9o}
Xv9y£
Xv9y
Xv9rirov
Xv9flT0V
Xv9a>ixev
Xv9T}re
Xv9(o(n(v)
1 Future
(Weak).
S. 1
3
3
D. 1
3
-3
P. 1
3
3
XvOrjaofxai
XvOrjay or Xv9r]<TeL
XvOricreTai
XvOrjao/xeOov
Xv9r}<Tea9ov
Xv9r](Te(T9ov
Xv97](r6iif.9a
Xv9r}cre<r9e
Xv9r](TovTai
3 Aorist
(Strong).
Wanting.
3 Future
(Strong).
Wanting.
Verbal Adjectives : Xvrog, rj, 6v. 3. XvHog, a, ov.
Continued, paradigms of verbs. — verbs in 12. 109
I. UNCONTRACTED.
Passive Voice.
fhe Middle Voice.
Optative.
Imperative.
Infinitive.
•
Participle.
Xv(TaifiT}v
Xvaako
XvGaiTO
Xv(TaiixE9ov
Xvaaia9ov
Xv(rai(T9r]v
Xv<jainE9a
Xv(jai(j9E
XvaaivTO
Xvaat
Xv(Td(T9u)
Xv(Taa9ov
Xvad(j9u}v
Xv(Ta(T9E
Xvada9(>)v or
Xv(Td<T9w(Tav
Xvaaa9aL
XvffdfiEvog
XvaajiEVT]
XvadfiEvov
the, Passive Voice.
Xv9Eiriv
Xv9Eirig
Xv9Eir]
Xv9EiT}Tov or Xv9eXtov
Xv9Eir]Tr]v or Xv9EiTr]V
Xv9Eit]fiEv or Xv9eXijlev
Xv9EiriTE or Xv9eIte
Xv9Eir]<Tav or Xv9eXev
Xv9r]Ti
Xv9r]T(ii
Xv9t]tov
Xv9r}Tiov
Xv9r]TE
Xv9r]T(t)ffav or
Xv9evtojv
Xv9r]vai
Xv9eig
Xv9Ei<Ta
Xv9ev
Gen. Xv9EVTog
\v9Ei(Trig
Xv9EVTog
St. Xv9Evr
Xv9T](T0iflT]V
Xv9r](Toio
Xv9r]<T0lT0
Xv9r]<ToifiE9ov
Xv9r](Toia9ov
Xv9r]<Joia9riv
Xv9T](ToiixE9a
Xv9r]<Toia9e
Xv9r]<T0lVT0
Xv9r)(TE<T9ai
Xv9r]a6}iEvog
Xv9tiaoiiEvr]
Xv9ri<T6nEvov
110 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. — VERBS IN Q. Table IV.
A. VOWEL STEMS.
Present and
Tlfidu), I honor
TToieu), I make
dovXoo), I subjugate.
[compare Lat. am{a)o'\.
[comp. Lat. rrumeo].
Stems: n^ia
TTOie
SovXo
• Active.
S. 1
Tljxdlt) Tlfld
TTOieu) TTOlG)
dovXoo) dovXd
2
rijiduQ Tifi^g
TTOikig TTOieXg
dovXoeig dovXoXg
i
3
Tiixdei Tifiq,
TTOUei TTOiel
dovXoei SovXoX
1
D.l
T5
2
Tifiderov Tifiarov
ttoiUtov ttoisXtov
dovXoSTOv SovXovrov
3
TlfldlTOV TlfiaTOV
TTOUeTOV TTOielTOV
SovXoerov dovXovrov
P
P. 1
Tifjidofiev TifiatfiEv
Troisojxev Troiovfiev
SovXoofiev SovXovfiev
Pk
2
TlfldETE r I ft UTS
TTodere Troielre
dovXoere SovXovte
3
Tlfld-OV- TlfxCj-
irOlkoV- TTOIOV-
dovXoov- SovXov-
<Tl(v) <'â– *(*')
m(v) ctCi^)
ai(v) <Ti(v)
S. 1
Tlfldu) TlflUJ
TTOteW TTOlUt
dovXoo) dovXoJ
2
Tifidyg Tifi^g
TTOuyg TTOiyg
dovXoyg dovXoXg
â–
3
Tifidy Tijxq,
TTody TTOiy
dovXoy dovXoX
1
D.l
2
rifidrjTov rifiaTOV
TroisijTov TTOiiirov
SovX6r}Tov dovXutTov
2*
3
Tindr]Tov ri/xarov
TTOUrjTOV TTOlrJTOV
dovXolJTOV dovXbJTOV
P. 1
Tifidu)fiev TijXbofxev
TTOlSlOfieV TTOlCjjXEV
dovXaiofXEv SovXwfiev
2
TifidrjTE Tifidre
TToieijTe TToiiJTe
dovXoJjTS dovXwTS
3
Tifidu)- rifiu)-
TTOIBIO- TTOIW-
dovXou)- dovXw-
(Ti(v) o't(*')
<n{v) fft(v)
(n{v) (T I (y)
S. 1
Tifidoifii rifK^ifit
TTodoifil TTOIOX/Xl
dovXooifii dovXoXfii
{-aoiTjv -(^Tjv)*
(eoirjv -oiijv)
{-ooirjv -0 i t) v)
2
Tifidoig TifKpg
TTOisoig 'KoioXg
dovXooig SovXoXg
(-aoiijg -(^r]g)
(-eoJTjg -oiTjg)
{-toirjg -oirjg)
3
TlfldoL Tlfltp
irodoL TToioX
dovXqoi SovXoX
{-aoirj -i^rj)
{-eoirj -0 i rf)
{-ooiij -0 i rf)
q5
•1
D.l
2
TlfidoLTOV Tifxqtrov
TTodoirov ttoioXtov
dovXooiTov SovXoXrov
{-aoir]Tov -(^t]tov)
(-eoir)TOV -oir}Tov)
{-ooir]TOV -oirjTOv)
o
3
TifiaoiTTjv riixt^rijv
â– JTOLeOlTTJV 7roioiTT]v
dovXooiTr]v dovXoirijv
(-aoiTjTTjv -(i)r]rr}v)
{-eoir)TT}v -oirjrriv)
{-ooirjTijv -oirjTTjv)
P. 1
Tifidoifiev rifxi^fiev
TTodoifiev TTOioX/xev
dovXaoiixev SovXoXfiev
{-aoi7]nsv -(^T]nsv)
(-eoirjfxev -oirjfiEv)
(-OOITJUEV -oijJUEv)
2
TlfxdoiTE rifK^TE
TTodoiTS TToioXre
dovXooLTE dovXoXre
{-aoiijTe -(^7]T()
{-eoirjTE -oiijTe)
(-ooirjTE -oiTjTe)
3
TlfldoiEV TlfK^ev
TTodoLEV TTOIOXeV
{-eoirjfTav -oirjaav)
dovXooiev dovXolev
* Obs. — The more usual forms are those printed in spaced type.
Table IV. pakadigms of verbs. — verbs in G. Ill
II. CONTRACTED.
Impeiifect Tenses.
Middle and Passive.
rifiaofiai Tifiwfiai
Tifidy, €1 r I /i ^
TifidsTai Tifxarai
TifiaofieOov TifKofie-
Qov
Ti}iataOov TifxdffOov
TifidecrOov TifidffOov
TijxaofieOa rifitofieOa
Ti/ideaOe rindcrOe
TifidovTai rifiojVTai
Trouofiai
TTodaTai
TTOieofieOov
TTodeaOov
TroisecrQov
TroieofxeOa
TToderrOe
TTOlSOVTai
TTOIOV fiai
TTOty, €l
TTOIOV fie-
Oov
TTO IEXgOoV
TToielaOov
TTOIOV fieOa
TToielcrOe
TTOiovvrai
dovXoofiat
dovXoy, €i
SovXoerai
dovXoofie-
9ov
dovXoecrOov
dovXoecrOov
dovXo6n£9a
dovXoEaOe
dovXoovrai
dovXov flat
dovXol
dovXovTui
dovXovfiE-
9ov
dovXovaQov
dovXovaOov
dovXovfieOa
dovXavaOe
SovXovvTai
Tifiaojfiai
Tifidy
TifidrjTat
Tifiau)ne-
Oov
TifxdijffOov
TlfldT](T90V
TifiaojiiE9a
Tifxdr](T9e
Tifidwvrai
Tifxiofxat TTOisiofiai
Tinq, TTOiky
Tifidrai TTodrjrai
TllMOJfie- 7T0Cf.i!jfXE90V
9ov
Tiiid(y9ov â– 7rodT](T9ov
Ti}ida9ov
Tifiu)fie9a
rifid(T9e
TifiatvTai
TTodr}a9ov
7TOie(t)ixe9a
7TodT)(j9e
TTodiiiVTai
TTOHOjiai
TTOiy
TTOifjrai
TTOloJfie-
9ov
TT0lfj(T90V
TT0liJG90V
TToiit) ixe9a
'7Toii}a9s
TTOlUJVTai
dovXoiofiai dovXiofiai
dovXoy - dovXoX
dovXoTjTai dovXatrai
SovXoMfia- SovXwfjLB-
9ov 9ov
SovX6t]<T9ov 5ovXuj(t9ov
dovX6r}a9ov dovXCJa9ov
^ovXo(jj}if.9a dovXa)ne9a
dovX6T]a9e dovXoj<r9e
dovXoiovrat dovXtoVTai
Tifiaoifirjv
Tifidoio
TifxdoiTO
Tifiaoijxe.-
9ov
Tifxdoia9ov
Tifiaoi(T9ov
TifiaoifiE9a
Tifidoi(T9e
TlfldoiVTO
Tlfl(i)IXT]V
TllK^O
TlfK^TO
9ov
TlfH^<T9oV
Ti^t^a9ov
Tifn^fiE9a
Tifi(^(T9e
Tljli^VTO
TT0l(.0l}Xr}V
TTO^OIO
TTodoiTO
7roieoiiJ.e9ov
TTodoia9ov
TTOieoi<T9r]v
TroieoifiE9a
TTodoi(T9e
7T0l0lfir)V
TTOLOXO
ttoioIto
TTOloiflE-
9ov
TToioXa9ov
TT0l0i<T9rjV
TT0l0iflE9a
ttoioX(t9e
TTOUOIVTO TTOIOLVTO
dovXooifjirjv dovXoifirjv
dovXooio dovXoXo
SovXooiro dovXoXTO
dovXaoi/xE- SovXoifXE-
9ov 9ov
dovXoot- dovXoX<T9ov
(t9ov
SovXooi- SovXoi<T9r]v
(T9riv
dovXooifiE- dovXoifieOa
Oa
^ovX6oia9E dovXoX(T9e
dovXooivTo dovXoXvTO
112 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. — VERBS IN Q. Table lY. —
A. VOWEL STEMS.
Present and Imperfect Tenses^
rTfidio, I TwTWr
[compare Lat. am{a)o\.
[comp. Lat. moneo].
dovXoo), I subjugate.
Stems: n^ta
TTOie
SovXo
Active.
s.
2
rt/^ae rifid
TToke TToiei
SovXoe dovXov
3
TifiasTU) rifidro)
TTOieeru} tt o t e i r w
dovXosru) iovXovro)
c5
D.2
TlfiCieTOP TLfXaTOV
TToderov Troieirov
dovXoerov dovXoiirov
3
rifXaeTlOV TtflOLTiOV
TTOiEtriov TTOieiriov
dovXokrwv S ovXovriov
p
3
TijxdtTE T I flare.
TTodere Troiilre
dovXSere SovXovre
1— 1
Tijxaov- TlflWV-
TTOieoV- TTOIOVV-
dovXoov- S ovXovv-
3
T(i)V TbJV
Tiov r(ov
T(ov r<jjv
TlfXaSTU)- TlflCLTlii-
TTOueru)- TTOietrw-
dovXokru)- dovXovru)-
e
aav aav
aav cav
aav aav
d
l-H
Ti^deiv Tiiiav
TTOueiv TTOielv
dovXoeiv SovXovv
Tifidcov rifidv
TTOUdJV TTOIOJV
dovXotov SovXwv
]3
rifidovaa Tinaxra
TTOiEovaa woiovcra
dovXoovaa S ovXovffa
rifidov TifioJv
TTOlkoV TTOIOVV
SovXoov d ovXovv
s.
1
eri/xaov iri/xwv
IttoLeov sTToiovv
idovXoov edovXovv
D.
2
3
1
erifiaeg kTifidg
kTifiae(v) krif^id
iTToieeg (Troieig
kTroies(v) tiro ill
•
iiroiUrov cTroteT-
idovXoEg edovXovg
tdovXoe{v) kd ovXov
2
tTlfldf.- BTiixd-
IdovXos- kdovXov-
a3
ft
a
TOV TOV
rov
Tov rov
3
tTifiai- krifid-
tiroid- IttoieL-
edovXos- tdovXov-
l-H
P.
1
rrjv TTjv
tTlfxdo- kTlfxCi-
Tr}v rijv
kTroikofiiv k'lroiov-
rrjv rr]v
tdovXoo- IdovXov-
2
tTifidET^ It I liars.
flEV
eTToikre 1 tt o t £ i r e
fiev fiev
MovXoere fdovXovre
3
krijiaov krifiwv
eTToieov tTVoiovv
edovXoov kdovXovv
The other Tenses are conjugated like the same Tenses in Xvu).
Examples for
ToXfido), I dare. law, / let (§ 236).
mydo), I am silent.
(Sodio, I call out.
d(TKS(i), I practise.
KO(Tfieio, I adorn.
Continued, pakadigms of verbs. — verbs in Q. 113
II. CONTRACTED.
Indicative Mood.
Middle and Passive.
TlHaOV TlfHx)
TifJidk(T9(t) niidaObJ
TifideaOov niidaQov
TifiaeaOojv TifidaOiov
TifideaOe rifidcrOe
TLfiaicrOwv TifidaOiov
TifiakaBi)}- TifidoOo)-
aav aav
TTOUOV TTOIOV
TTOii^aOu) ttoib'ktOo)
iroikaOov TrotElaOov
TTOlUaOiOV "TTOlElffOoJV
TToikaOe TroceXaOe
TTOiseaOiov TroieicrOojv
TTOueaOu)- TTOifiaOoi-
aav aav
^ovKoov ^ovXov
dovXoetrOoj 6 ovXovctOm
doifkoEtrOov dovXovtrOov
dovXoecrOojv dovXov(T9iov
dovXoerrOe. d ovXovaOs
dovXokcrOojv S ovXovcrOuiv
^ovXosado)- dovXovtrOoj-
aav crav
TifideaQai riixdcrOai
TTOikecrOai TroieXcrOat
dovXoeaQai dovXovtrOai
Tifiaofie- rifidJfie-
VOQ VOQ
Tijiaofikvr] TifitofievT]
TlfiaoflE- TlfKOflS-
vov vov
TTOieofie- TTOIOV ft e-
VOQ VOQ
TTOieOflSVt] TTOIOV fXeVT)
TTOLeSfie- TTOIOV fie-
vov vov
dovXoofie- dovXovfie-
vog vog
dovXoofievTj d ovXov fievT]
SovXoone- d ovXov fiE-
vov vov
tTlfia6flT]V ETlfHOfXlJV
BTlfldoV £TlflW
iTifidero enndro
krifiaSfxe- lrifi(i)fiE-
Oov Bov
erifide- erifxa-
(tOov <t9ov
kTijiak- tTifid-
(tOtjv adriv
Irifiaofie- er ifib) fiB-
Oa 9a
iTifxdeffBe kTifid(T9e
krifldoVTO STlflWVTO
STTOUOflTJV tTTOlOV flTjV
ETTodoV k TTOIOV
eTTOisero eTTOielro
tTTOLEOfXe- eTTOlOV fie-
' 9ov Bov
lTT0lkc90V tTTOiel-
<t9ov
tTT0iee(T9t]v eTTOiei-
a9r}v
tTTOLEOflE- ETTOlOVfie-
9a 9a
«7roi£€(r0€ ETTOiEXaBe
SITodoVTO eTTOlOVVTO
kdovXoofiTfv
kdovXovixrjv
edovXoov
edovXov
IdovXoETO
IdovXovTO
edovXoofxe-
edovXovfie-
Bov
Bov
IdovXoe-
kdovXov-
(tBov
aBov
edovXos-
kdovXov-
<TBr)v
aBriv
tdovXoofxe-
kdovXovfie-
Ba
Ba
tdovXoetjBe
sdovXovffBe
edovXoovTO
idovXovvTO
A Synopsis of these Tenses is given in the following Table
Conjugation.
dpLBfieiOj I count. Zrifiiou), I punish.
drjXou), I make clear.
ffTe(j)av6(t)^ I crown.
Xpvaoo),
114 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. — VERBS IN 12. Table IV.
A. VOWEL STEMS.
( Tlncontracted
Tensea*
Indicative.
Subjunctive.
Optative.
Active Voice.
Future.
Tl/Xr}(T(t)
TTOiriffiO
dov\(jj(r(o
•
Tiixrjaoijjii
7roir)<TOifii
dovXtoaoifxi
1 Aorist
(Weak).
iTifiijaa
kdovX(t)(xa
7rOlT]<TU)
dovX(0(T(t)
Tifir](Taifii
TTOiTjaaifii
dovXaxTai/xi
1 Perfect
(Weak).
TeTiixTjKa
TTETToitlKa
dedovXbJKa
TerifirjKUi
7re7roir]K<i}
dedovXwKU)
TeTifirjKoifii
â– 7re7roiT]Koifit
deSovXwKoifii
1 Pluperfect
(Weak).
kreTi/xriKeiv
eTreiroirjKeiv
kSedovXujKeiv
Middle and Passive Voices.
Future.
Tinr](TOfiaL
TTOiTjaofiat
dovXwaofiai
rifirjaoifirjv
TTOirjaoi/xTjv
^0vXh)(T0'lfir]V
Perfect.
TETifirinai
TTETroirjixai
dsdovX(ofiai
TETi}ir]fikvog hi
TTETroiijfisvog (5
SedovX(i)fxevog <L
TETi}ir}}ikvog eir]v
TTETroirifikvog eirjv
SeSovXhjfiBvog elrjv
Pluperfect.
kreTifirjixijv
hiTETroiriiiriv
kdedovXw/xrjv
•
Future Perfect.
TETifirjaoixai
7r67rot?7 (To/iai
dedovXbXTOnat
TeTiixr}(7oifir]v
7reTroiT](ToiixT]v
dedovX(»)(ToifiT}v
1 Aorist Pas-
sive (Weak).
kTTOLTjOrjV
sdovX(x)9t]v
Tiixr]9uj
Troir]9Cj
dovX(i)9oj
riixr]9eiiiv
'7roiTj9eir}v
dovX(i}9eir]v
3 Future Pas-
sive Weak).
Tiixi]9r](T0fiai
Troir]9r)<TOixai
^ovX(t)9r](TOjxai
TlfiT]9t]<T0ifl7]V
'7roir]9riaoijxr]v
dovXio9r](ToiiJirjV
Verbal Adjectives : 1. Tifirjrdg 2. TijxriTkog
TrOllJTOQ TTOirjTSOg
dovXiOTog dovXioTEog
Continued, paradigms of verbs. — verbs in Q. 115
1. UNCONTRACTED.
Imperative.
Infinitive.
Participle.
Active Voice.
7roif)aeiv
dovXioaeiv
iroiTjcriov
dovXu)(T(ov •
'
Tinrjaov
7roiT]<TOV
SovXwffov
Tifif}(Tai
TTOLtjaai
dovXwcrai
mirjaag
TTOirjCag
dovXwcrag
TerifiTjKe
TreTToirjKe.
SedovXwKe
reTi/jiTjKBvaL
TreTTOiijKSvai
dedovXojKevai
TETifir}Kwg
TreTTOirjKiog
dedovX(i)Ka>g
*
Middle and Passive Voices.
Tinr]qf.(j9ai
7roir](Te(T9ai
d07)X(O<TE(T9ai
Tifirjaofievog
TTOirjtTOIXEVOg
dovXoxTofXEvog
Teri/Jirjcro
TTSTToiljaO
deSovXuxTo
TETi^ri(T9ai
'rrtTroiri<T9at
^f.SovXu)a9ai
TETifitjfxevog
Treiroiijfievog
SeSovXojfievog
•
T€Tifir)(Tea9ai
7r€7roti7(T£(T0ai
dEdovXa)(Te<T9ai
reTifirjaoixevog
TrsTTOiijaoiievog
SsSovXioao/ievog
Tifir]9r]Ti
iroiri9r}Ti
SovXo}9tjti
TifiT]9rivai
7roiT]9fjvaL
dovXoj9T)vai
TifiT]9Eig
7roiT]9eig
dovX(i)9dg
Tifir]9r](TE(T9at
7roir]9r)as(T9ai
dovXiij9r](Te(T9ai
Tifir)9r](T6fievog
'7roir]9r}a6fiEvo^
dovXi>}9r)(T6fiEvog
•
116 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. — VERBS IN Q. Table V.
B. CONSONANT STEMS.
TrXeKio, I plait (Class 1) ; (pevyco, I flee (Class 2) ;
Tenses.
Indicative.
Subjunctive.
Active.
Present.
Present.
ttXckw
(pevyut
rd(T(Tit)
illJ
ttXIkw
^evyoj
rdaaio
Future.
•
ttXs^u)
1 Aorist (Weak).
2 Aorist (Strong).
1 Aorist (Weak).
fTrXe^a
i(pvyov
tTata
TrXfi^w
<l>vyoj
rd^oj
1 Perfect (Weak).
2 Perfect (Strong). .
1 Perfect (Weak).
Perfect.
TTSTrXExa
TTscpevya
rkraxa
Pluperfect.
iTTiTrXkxf^iv
tTTi^ivyuv
tTETdx^l-V
7r€7rX£\;a>
TTE^EVyU)
Tfraxw
Middle and Passive.
Present.
Present.
TrXkKOfiai
rdaaofiai
Imperfect.
tTrXeKofitjv
kTa<T<T6flT}V
TrXfKw/iat
rdaffiofiai
Future.
TrXk^ofiai
rd^ofiat
1 Aorist Middle (Weak).
kTrXt^d[ir]v
iTa^djjirjy
TrXk^iofiai
rd^iofiai
Perfect.
Perfegt.
TTSTrXey/iai
TSTayixai
Pluperfect.
tTrETrXsyfiijv
eTETdynTjv
TfeirXEy fxevog at
TETaynsvog <Jj
Future Perfect.
TreTrXk^ofiai
rerd^ofiai
2 Aorist Pass. (Strong).
1 Aorist Pass. (Weak).
iTrXdicTjv
kTdxOijv
TrXaKd
TUxOd
2 Future Pass. (Strong).
1 Future Pass. (Weak).
TrXaKriaojiai
raxOhf^Ofiai
Verbal Adjectives : 1. tzX^ktoq, <l>evKT6£, toktoq.
Examples for
ayw, / drive (Aor. ijyayov, Perf, Act. ijxa) ; dpxio^Irule, both of Class
(Pres. -ff(Tio, rarely -?w), see § 850. Nouns are formed from the Pure
V dpx-n-i ^^ government.
Table V. paradigms of verbs. — verbs in Q. f 17
I. GUTTURAL STEMS.
rdaaix)^ I arrange (Class 4). Verbal Stems: ttXek, (pvy, ray.
Optative.
Imperative.
Infinitive.
Participle.
Active.
TrXsKoifit
(pevyoifii
rdffaoifii
TrXsfcg
<j)evye
TrXsKELV
(pevyEiv
rrXsKdJV
(pevy(t)v
TrXs^oifxi
(pEv^oifirjv
TOL^Olfil
ttXb^hv
^ev^eaOai
rd^eiv
ttXs^ojv
Ta^ojv
TrXe^aifii
(pvyoifxi
Ta^aifii
TrXe^ov
<l)vye
TOL^OV
TrXe^ai
<pvyEiv
rd^ai
TrXe^ag
Takag
TrerrXexoifit
Tre<pEvyoifii
TeTaxoi/Jii
TTETrXexe
TreTrXexEvai
Trecpevysvat
TETax^vai
TreTrXexwf
TTSipevywg
TETax*i)Q
Middle and Passive.
rrXeKoiixrjv
Taoaoiji'qv
TrXsKov
rdaaov
TrXeKetrOaL
Td(T(T(.a9ai
TrXEKofiivog
TatTcrofxevog
7rXe^oifjii]p
Ta^oifiriv
TrXe^eaOai
rd^eaOai
TrXe^ofievog
ra^ofievog
TrXe^aifiT]v
ra^aifir)v
TrXe^ai
rd^ai
TrXe^aaOat
rd^atrOai
TrXE^dfiivog
Tu^dfievog
â– jreTrXeyfievog tlr]v
TETayfikvog eIijv
TTSTrXe^o
Tera^o
TTETrXkxOcti
TETdxOai
TTETrXeynevog
TETayixevog
TTSTrXe^oifirjv
TETaKoifirfv
TTETrXe^earOat
TETd^EffOai
TTEirXE^OflEVOg^
TETa^OftEVOg
TrXaKEiTjv
TaxOEirjv
TrXdicTjOi
rdx^^Ti
TrXaKTJvat
raxOrjvai
TrXuKEig
raxOEig
7rXaKr](TciffiT]v
rax9r]<ToinT]v
7rXaKr]<TE(T9ai
TaxQr)<TE(TQai
TrXaKTjaofiEvog
TaxOrjffSfiEvog
2. irXEKTSOg, (pEVKTEOg, TUKTEOg.
Conjagation.
1; opvaffu), I dig, Stem op^x, Class 4, a; for other guttural Stems
Verbal Stems, as r6 TrXsy-fia, the wreath (§ 47); ri rdKi-g^ arrangement ;
11§ PARADIGMS OF VERBS. — VERBS IN Q. Table YI.
B. CONSONANT STEMS.
\pevdofiai, I lie (Class 1) ; TreiOw, I persuade (Class 2) ;
Tenses.
Indicative.
Subjunctive.
Active.
Present.
Present.
7r€l0(U
Imperfect.
tKOfllHioV
7rei9(o
Future.
KOfllio
1 Aorist (Weak).
tTTHaa
tKOfiiaa
KOfllffU)
2 Perfect (Strong).
1 Perfect (Weak).
Perfect.
Trs'7roi9a
KEKOfXlKa
Pluperfect.
£7r67roi0eiv
tKiKOfllKBlV
7mroi9to
KEKOfllKa)
Middle and Passive.
Present.
Present.
ipe.v^onai
7rei9oixai
KOfiiKofiai
Imperfect:
i-il/evd6/xT}v
kTrH96fir]v
eK0fiiZ6fir}v
^l/ev^lof^al
7rei9(i)fiai
KOfiiZuifiai
Future.
â– ^pevaojxai
rrdcTOfiai
Koiiiovfiai
1 Aorist Middle)
(Weak).
k-i\/Evadfir]v
irru<rdixr]v
eKoiXKjdinijv
y\/EV(TiO}xat
TTElCTCOfiai
KOfiiffwuai
Perfect.
Perfect.
t-^EV<Tfiai
7rs7rei(Tfiat
KSKOfllfffiai
Pluperfect.
ItpEVaflTjV
iTre7rei(TfXT]v
lKSK0lxi(TflTIV
ixliEvafisvog <L
TreTreicrfievog w
KEKOflKTIXSVOQ h)
1 Aorist Passive
(Weak).
l'ipev<T9ijv
l7rei(T9r)v
tK0fii(T9r]v
â– ipEV(T9(0
7rEl(T9u}
K0fll(T9u)
1 Future Passive
(Weak).
\pevcr9rjcrofiai
'7rH(x9r](TOfiai
K0fii(T9ri(T0fiai
#
Verbal Adjectives : 1. }Psv<tt6q, TTHcrrog, KOfxiarog.
Examples for
(TTTEv^w, libo^ Fut. o-TretVw, Perf. tairEiKa, Perf. Mid. toirEKxnai, Aor. Pass.
For verbs of a Dental Stem, with the Present ending in -aau)^ see § 250,
tlie lie; r) Tria-Ti-g, the faith; rj <nroyd-T]j the libation; 6 kXw^-wv, Gen.
Table VI. paradigms of verbs. — verbs in Q. 119
II. DENTAL STEMS.
KOfii^u), I carry (Class 1,5). Verbal Stems : 4^evd, ttiO, KOfitd.
Optative.
Imperative.
Infinitive.
Participle.
Active.
KOfli^Olfil
KOfll^S
irdQuv
KOfliZ,tlV
7rsi6(t)v
KOfii^tOV
KOflloTfll
TreKTHv
KOfllElV
TreKTaifii
KOfxirraiixi
KOfllffOV
KOfiitrai
KOfiiaaQ
TTETTOiOoiHt
KEKOfllKOlfll
KEKOfllKe
TTSTTOiOevai
KEKOfllKSVai
TrETroiOwg
KSKO/llKWg
Middle and Passive.
rpevdoifiTjv
7rei9oifir]v
KOfll^oifi.1]V
\pEvS0V
TTUOOV
KOniZ,ov
\pevdea9at
TreiOeaOat
â– ypevdofievoQ
TreiOofiEvog
KOfii^ofiavog
\l/ev(ToifiT]v
TTSKToifirjV
KOflloifilJV
-ipeixTsaOai
ireiaeaOai
KOfiiHadai
xpevaSfievog
TreKTofievog
KOfJLiovfiavog
xpevaaifXTjv
KO/XKTai/lTIV
xpev(xai
TTHCai
Kofxiaai
TtHaaaOai
KOfiiaaaQai
â– tpevad/xevog
Treiadfievog
KOfiKTafievog
lipev(Tfievog elrjv
7re7r€i<Tfitvog drjv
KSKOfllffflEVOg HT]V
ttpevffo
Tr'sTTHGO
KeKOflKTO
t^evffOai
TTETTEiaOai
KEKOfxicQai
xpevaOEirjv
iruaQdriv
KOfiiaOEirjv
xlyeixrOrjTi
TrdffOrjTi
KOfiiaOrjTi
xpEvaO^vai
7rHa9fjvai
K0fii(r9f}vai
Irpevfffievog
TTSTreicTfievog
KSKQ flier fievog
tpevaOeig
â– KuaQdg
KOfiiaOdg
\pevaOT](ToifiT]v
TreicOrjffoifiijv
KOflKTOlJffoiflTjV
^EvaOrjaEaOai
TrnffOrjaeffOai
KOfii(T9r)<Te(T9ai
xpevcrOrjffofisvog
TTHaOrjaofi^vog
KO/iKTQrjfTo/xevog
2. ypevcTTeog^ TretoTso?, KOfiiffTeog.
Coiijugation.
iffirehOrjv ; kXv^io^ I wash
Obs. Nouns are formed from
K\v6<av-og, tlw wave ; rj dpTray-rj
dpTrd^it)^ J snatch; IXtti^oj, I hope.
the Pure Verbal Stem, as : to \pevd-og,
plunder.
120
PARADIGMS OF VERBS.
Table VII.
B. CONSONANT STEMS.
Trefvrio, I send (Class 1) ; XtiTrw, / leave (Class 2) ;
Tenses.
Indicative.
Subjunctive.
Active.
Present.
Present.
TTSflTTU)
XeiTru)
KaXvTrro)
Imperfect.
tTTt/iTTOV
IXeiTTov
iKaXvTTTOV
XeiTTb)
KaXvTrro)
Future.
Xeiipu)
KaXvxpoj
Aorist 1 (Weak):
2 (Strong).
1 (Weak).
tXlTTOV
iKoXvipa
XlTTit)
KaXvxpu)
3 Perfect (Strong).
2 Perfect (Strong).
Perfect.
irsTTOfKpa
XsXonra
Pluperfect.
€7r€7ro/i0etv
kXfXoiiruv
TTETTOfUpoi
XeXoiTTw
Middle and Passive.
Present.
Present.
TTSflTTOfiai
Xuirofiai
KaXvTTTOfiai
Imperfect.
iiTEfnroiXTjv
IXeiTTofiijv
eKaXvTrrofiTiv
XeiTTCJuai
KoXvTTTOJfiai
Future.
TTSfixpoixai
XEi\pofiai
KaXvxpo/xai
A . . (1 (Weak).
Aonst Jn/Oi.,.? {
l7reiJ,\pdfiT]v
iXnrojJiijv
eKaXvtpdfirjv
7re fi-ipMfiai
XtTTwyuat
KaXv^jyiofiai
Perfect.
Perfect.
TTETrEflfiai
XeXeiixjxai
KeKoXvfifxai
Pluperfect.
iireTrkufiriv
eXeXdfi/jir}v
IkekoXv/xixijv
TTETrefjlflEVOQ (L
XeXeifinkvog w
KeKaXyfijiiBVOQ w
Future Perfect.
XeXei-^ofiai
KEKaXvypofiai
1 Aorist Passive
(Weak).
kTrkn^9riv
kXei<p9i]v
kKaXv<p9r}v
Xei<p9(o
KoXv^du}
1 Future Passive
(Weak).
7reix(p9rj<T0fiai
Xei(l)9r)aofiai
KaXv(l)9r)(rofiai
Verbal Adjectives
: 1. TrefiTrTog, Xem
Tog, KaXvTTTog.
Tpeiru),
Examples for
turn (Class 1) ; dXei(f)<o, I anoint (Class 2) ; Tpij3o), I rub
(§ 249). Nouns are formed from the Pure Verbal Stems, as 6 Tro/xTr-o-g,
ing, manner; t6 dXH<p-ap,the ointment; 6 rd^-o-g, the tomb.
Table VII.
PARADIGMS OF VERBS.
121
III. LABIAL STEMS.
KaXviTTix}, I cmer (Class 3). Verbal Stems: 7refi7r,Xi7r, KaXv(3.
Optative.
Imperative.
Infinitive.
Participle.
Active.
irsfiiroifii
XeiTTOlflL
KaXv7rT0i/j.i
KdXvTTTk.
â– JTEflTTElV
Xeitteiv
KaXvTTTElV
TTEinrojv
XeLttiuv
KaXvTTTiOV
irkfiipoifii
Xeixpoifii
KaXv-^oijxi
TTEIXXpElV
XElXpElV
KoXvtpElV
TTEH-ipUiV
XElXpCJV
KaXvxj/iop
Trefixpaifii
XiTTOlfll
KoXv-^aini
Trsuxpov
XiTre
KaXvxpov
XlTTElV
TTEfi^l/ag
XlTTWV
KoXvipag
TTETTOfUpOlfiL
XeXoiiroifii
mTrofKpE
XeXoiTTE
TTETTOflCpEVai
XEXoiTTEVai
TTETTO/iKpdjg
XEXoLTTWg
MWdle and Passive.
TrefiTToiixrjv
XenroinTjv
KaXvTrTOifirjv
TTEfXTTOV
Xelttov
KaXvTTTOV
TrtinrE(j9ai
XE'nrE<j9ai
KaXv7rrE(T9ai
TTEfiTTOfiEVOg
XELTTOHEVOg
KaXvTTTOflEVOg
Xei-tpoifirjv
KaXv\poiixr]v
TrE}i-^E(T9at
XEi\(/E(T9ai
KaXv\l/E(T9ai
7ren\p6fiEvog
XEi-^pofiEvog
KaXv^ofiEvog
Tre fixpaifirjv
Xnroinr]V
KaXvxpaifiTjv
TTEflXpat
XlTTOV
KoXvipai
7re/x\pa(T9ai
Xi7rEcr9ai
KaXvypa<T9ai
TrEntpdfiEPog
XiTrofiEvog
KoXvipdfiEvog
TTETrefifiivog e'irfv
XeXeififiEvog eirjv
KEKaXvfiiikvog etrjv
TreTrEfi-ipo
XeXEi-ipo
KEKaXvtpo
7re7rEfi^9ai
XEXEl<p9ai
KEKaXv(p9ai
TrETtEflflEVOg
XEXElflflEVOg
KEKaXvflflEVOg
XsXei\poifit]v
KEKaXv^oifnf]V
XEXEi->pE<T9ai
KEKaXv\pEa9aL
XEXElXpO/XEVOg
KEKaXvipOflEVOg
7refi(p9driv
Xei<p9eirjv
KaXvp9elT]v
Trkn(p9r]Ti
XEi(l>9r]Ti
KaXv(p9r]Ti
irEfi<p9^vaL
XEi<p9fjvat
Ka\v<p9rivai
7rEfi(p9Eig
XEi(p9eig
KaXv^9Eig
'7rEfi^9ri<ToifiT)v
XEi(p9r]<Toifir]v
KaXv^9r)<Toifir]v
7rEfi(p9rj(TE<r9ai
XEi^9t]<yEa9ai
KaXv(^9r](TEa9ai
TrEH(l>9r}a6fiEvog
XEi(l>9T}(r6fiEvog
KaXv<p9T}(T6nEvog
2. TTEfiTTTSog, XetiTTeog, KaXv-rrreog.
Conjugation.
(Class 2), as to its Perf., see § 279 ; 9d7rTio,Ilmry (Class 3), Stem tu^
the escort; Xoiir-o-g, remaining ; r} KoXv^-t}^ the hut; 6 Tpdir-o-g, the turn-
F
122
PARADIGMS OF VERBS.
Table VIII.
B. CONSONANT STEMS.
depoj, IsTcin (Class 1) ; ayyeXXw, I announce (Class 4, c) ; airdpu), I sow (Class
Tenses.
Indicative.
Subjunctive.
Active.
Present.
Present.
Sepu)
dyyeXKu)
(TTreipu)
fiiaivu)
Imperfect.
edepov
rjyyeXXov
tOTTHpOV
kfiiaivov
dsp(o
dyysXXc
(TTreipu)
fiiaivoj
Future.
dspuj
dyyeXio
ffxepu}
fiiavio
1 Aorist (Weak).
edeipa
ijyysiXa
ecnreipa
sfiidva
Seipoj
dyyuXd)
(TTTEipit)
fxidvo)
1 Perfect (Weak).
Perfect.
rjyyeXKa
iarrapKa
fiSfiiayKa
Mid. and Passive.
Present.
Present.
Sepofiai
dyytXXofiai
(jTreipo/^ai
juiiaivofiai
Pluperfect.
T^yy^KEiv
kairdpKHv
kfiefiidyKeiv
T^yyeXKOJ
tairdpKio
fisfxidyKu)
Imperfect.
Idepofirjv
T^yyeXXofirjv
ia7reip6fiT]v
eixiaiv6fjiT]v
dep(ofxai
dyykXXiofiai
(TTreipiofiat
fxiaiviofiai
Future.
depovfiai
dyyeXovfiai
GTrepovfxat
fiiavovfxai
1 Aorist Middle
(Weak).-
edeipdjurjv
riyyuXdfxriv
itTTTupdfiriv
k/xiavdfirjv
deipiofiai
dyyeiXojfxai
(TTreipojfiai
jxidvcjixai
Perfect.
Perfect.
Sedap/xai
ijyyeXnai
taTcapfxai
fxe/jiiarrfiai
Pluperfect.
iSeddpfirjv
T^yyeXfiriv
L(T7rdp/xr)v
ifXEflldffflTfV
dedapfisvog <5
i^yyeXfisvog &
Itnrapfisvog t3
fiE/xia(Tfisvog w
r4 Strong.
Aorist Jl Weak.
Passive j 2 Strong.
VI Weak.
iSdpriv
riyy'sXQriv
ktnrapriv
IfiidvOTjv
dapio
dyyeXOu
(TTrapSj
fiiavOio
r2 Strong.
Future ) 1 Weak.
Passive) 3 Strong.
U Weak.
daprjao/xat
dyyeXOrjcTOfiai
(nrapr](TOfiai
p.iav9r]<T0fiai
Verbal Adjectives : 1. dapTog, dyyeXroe, (nrapTog, fxiavrog.
Table VIIL
PARADIGMS OF VERBS.
123
IV. LIQUID STEMS (\, ft, v, p).
4,<?); pa/vw, J5oiZ(Class4, <Z). Verbal Stems: dep,dyye\,(T7r6p,niav.
Optative.
Imperative.
Infinitive.
Participle.
depoi/jii
ayyeXXot/ii
(TTTEtjOOt/il
fxiaivoifii
depe
dyyEXXe
ffTrelpe
fxiaive
depuv
dyysXXeiv
(TTreipHV
HiaivHV
depiov
dyysXXuv
(Tirdpojv
fiiaivwv
depoTiXL
dyyeXoXfit
(Tirapo'lfii
fiiavoifii
deipaifit
dyyeiXaifiL
ffTT^ipaifii
Hidvaifii
depeiv
dyyeXfXv
(TTrepelv
jxiavdv
deXpov
ayyuXov
(Tireipov
fiiavov
deXpai
dyyeXXai
(TTreXpat
fiidvai
depCjv
dyyeXuiv
(TTrepatv
fiiaviov
deipag
dyyEiXag
(TTrelpag
fiidvag
T^yyeXKOi/xi
l(T7rdpK0llXi
fisiiidyKoifiL
-ijyyeXKe
icFTrapKE
fie/xiayKE
i^yyeXKsvai
iaTrapKsvai
/leniayKSvai
i^yyeXKMg
tairapKMg
HEfiiayKwg
depoifiTjv
dyyeXXoifirjv
<T7reipoiixr]v
fiiaivoifiTjv
depov
dyysXXov
(TTreipov
fiiaivov
depsffOai
dyysXXEaOai
(TTreipetrOai
fiiaiveaOai
Sepofievog
dyyeXXofievog
(TTnipofievog
fiiaivofiEvog
SepoiiiTjv
dyyeXoifiriv
aTTEpoifitjv
/xiavoifiriv
depeXaOai
dyyeXeXtrOai
aTrepeXaOai
fxiavuaQai
depovfievog
dyyeXovfiEvog
(TTrepovfievog
fiiavovfievog
daipaifiijv
dyyEiXaifXT]v
<nrsipaifiT)v
fiiavaifirjv
deXpai
dyynXai
(TTreXpai
fiiavai
ddparrOai
dyyeiXaffOai
(TTreipacrOai
fiidvaaOai
deipdfievog
dyyeiXdfxevog
(TTreipdfievog
fiiavd/xevog
^edapfisvog Eirjv
riyyaXfisvog eiT]v
icTTrapfisvog eiTjv
fXEniaajikvog drjv
dEdapcro
i]yysX(TO
icrirapao
fiEfiiaffo
SeddpQai
â– qyykXOai,
l<nrdp9ai
fieHidvOai
h^apfxkvog
i^yyeXfikvog
iairapfikvog
/xeiiiatTfikvog
SapEirjv
dyyeXQeiTjv
(TTrapeirjv
fiiavOsiTjv
SaprfOi
dyyeXOrjTi
<T7rdpr]9i
fiidvOrjTi
dapfjvai
dyyeXOfjvai
(TTrapfivai
HmvQrivai
dapeig
dyyeXOeig
(TTrapeig
fiiavOeig
^apr](roifir]v
dyyeX9T](Toifxr}V
<r7rapr](ToifiT]v
fiiavOrftToifiTiv
daprfaeaOai
dyyeX9f](TE(j9ai
(TTrapri(Te(x9ai
Hiav9'q(TEa9ai
capriaofievog
dyyEX9r}(T6fiEvog
(nrapi](T6fievog
fiiav9T](T6ixevog
2. SapTsog, dyyeXHog, airaprkog^ mavrkog.
124 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. — VERBS IN fii. Table IX. ^
VERBS IN fii
ri-en-
til, I put.
di-du)-fii, I give.
'i-cTii-fJLi^ I place.
Pure Stems Oe
3o
GTa
Present Stems n-Oe
di-do
i-ara
Present. Active.
S. 1
Tl-OlJ-fJll
di-ScD-fxi
'i-arrj-fiL
2
ri-9r]-s
di-d(o-g
'i-(TTr]-g
g
3
TL-9r]-ai{y)
di-dio-(Ti{v)
'i-(TTtJ-(Tt(v)
D. 1
«
1
2
Ti-Oe-Tov
di-do-TOV
'i-ard-Tov
''B
3
Ti-Oe-Tov
Si-do-Tov
'i-OTCL-TOV
H- 1
P. 1
Ti-Be-fiev
di-do-fj.Ev
'i-(TTd-flEV
2
Ti-Os-re
di-do-TE
'i-OTCL-TE
3
Ti-9s-d-(n(v)
dt-86-d-(n(v)
i-(jTd-(n(v)
S. 1
Ti-Oa,
ai-^oi
t-OTW
2
Ti-Oy-Q
di-d(ii-Q
i-(TTy-Q
g
3
Ti-By
di-d(^
i-ary
•§
D. 1
2
ri-9i]-Tov
dl-^OJ-TOV
l-(TTr]-TOV
^
3
Tl-0i]-TOV
di-dio-Tov
i-aTrf-TOV
CO
P. 1
Ti-9w-fiev
dt-dd-fiiv
l-OTW-/i£V
2
Ti-Bij-re
Si-dat-TE
l-CTYI-TE •
3
Ti-9Ci-(n{v)
di-dio-(n(v)
l-(TTO)-ai{}')
S. 1
Ti-9eir]-v
di-doir}-v
i-(TTair]-v
2
Ti-9f.ir]-Q
di-doiij-g
i-crTair]-g
3
ri-9eiT]
di-doiTj
i-tTTairj
D. 1
2
. ri-9eiT]-Tov or
di-doL7j-Tov or
i-arairj-Tov or
05
>
ti9htov
didoXrov
laTOlTOV
3
Ti-9ur}-Ti)v or
8i-doiT}-TT]v or
i-aTairj-Trjv or
^
^
Ti9eiTT]v
didoiTriv
i(TTaiTT}V
P. 1
Ti-9eLT]-fiEv or
^L-doiTj-fiev or
i-crTaiTj-fiev or
riOeiixev
Sidolfiev
icTTalfjiev
2
ri-9eiT]-Te or
dL-8oiT]-Te or
i-aTair]-TE or
Tl9HTe
MoTre
laTdiTE
3
Ti-9eiT}-(Tav or
Si-SoiTj-tTav or
i-(TTaij]-(Tav or
Ti9eiev
didolev
laTOlEV
S. 2
ri-9si
di-dov
'l-<TTtJ
05
3
Tl-9s-TiO
dL-d6-T(o
i-<TTa.-T(o
D. 2
Ti-9e-T0V
di-do-TOV
'l-<TTd-TOV
S
3
Ti-9s-ru)V
dL-do-TMV
i-(TTa.-TOJV
1
1— I
P. 2
Ti-9e-Te
di-So-TS
'i-ara-TE
3
Ti-9k-vT0}V or
di-d6-vro)v or
i-trrd-VTwv or
ri-9k-r(o(Tav
di-d6-T(i)(Tav
i-<Trd-T(i)<Tav
Infin.
« "
Ti-9k-vai
di-do-vai
i-ard-vai
Part.
n-^ei-c, Ti-9el-(Ta,
Si-dov-Q^di-dov-aa,
i-ard-g, i-ard-ffa,
TiBkv G. Ti9svr-og
didov G. di-dovT-og
lardv G. i-(TrdvT-og
Table IX. paradigms of verbs. — verbs in jui. 125
FIRST CLASS.
This First Class consists of Verbs wliicli affix their terminations
directly to the Stem.
Present. Middle and Passive.
ri-Oe-fiai
di-do-ixai
i-ara-fiai
Ti-9e-(Tai
di-So-aai
'i-UTd-aai
ri-9e-Tai
di-do-Tai
'i-ara-Tai
Tl-Q't-jXiBoV
di-d6-fie9ov â–
i-GTa.-fiE9ov
Ti-Oa-aOov
di-do-aBov
'i-<JTa-(T9ov
ri-9e-a9ov
di-do-G9ov
'i-<TTa-<T9ov
rt-9e-fiE9a ,
Si-d6-fis.9a '
i-<TTd-fie9a
Ti-9e-(T9e
di-do-a9e
'l-<TTa-<T9e
Ti-9e-vTai
di-So-vrai
'i-ara-VTai
Ti-Bd-fiai
di-dio-fiai
i-GTCj-fiai
TL-9y
Si-d({i
i-<TTy
Ti-Bfj-Tai
Si-doj-Tai
l-ffTtj-Tai
rL-9<jj-fiE9ov
5t-du)-fie9ov
t-(TTa)-flE90V
Ti-9rj-a9ov
di-dio-<T9ov
i-(TTrj-&9ov
Ti-9i]-(r9ov
di-du)-a9ov
i-<tttj-(t9ov
Ti-9io-ixe9a
di-dit)-fie9a
i-<TTU)-fie9a
Ti-9rj-a9e
di-Sw-(r9e
i-<TTrj-<T9e
Ti-9u)-VTai
h-^S)-VTai
i-ario-vTai
Ti-9ai-ixr]v
di-doi^fi7]v
l-aTai-ixrjv
Ti-9u-o
di-doi-o
i-aToX-o
ti-9h-to
di-doX-TO
i-(TTai-TO
ri-9ei-fii9ov
Si-^oi-fiE9ov
i-(TTai-fxe9ov
Ti-9ei-(T9ov
di-dol-(T9ov
i-(TTai-G9ov
Ti-9d-(y9r]v
^L-^oi-(T9r]v
i-aTai-a9r]v
Ti-9d-nE9a
^i-Soi-fiE9a
i-CTai-fiEBa
ti-9h-<t9£
Si-SoX-(T9e
i-(TTdi-a9e
Ti-9ei-vTo
di-dol-VTO
i-(jTaX-VTO
tI-9e-<7o
di-So-(To
'i-(TTa-ao
ti-9s-<t9oj
di-d6-(T9i)j
i-(TTd-(T9(t)
Ti-9e-<T9ov
di-So-aBov
'i-aTa-<j9ov
Ti-9k-a9u)v
Si-S6-<t9(i)v
i-<TTd-(r9ojv
Ti-9e-(T9e
di-do-a9e
'i-(TTa-(T9e
ti-9s-(t9ojv or
di-d6-(T9ojv or
i-<TTd-(T9(t)v or
Ti-9k-cr9io(rav
Sl-S6-(T9u)(TaV
i-(TTd-(r9io(Tav
ri-9e-(T9aL
di-do-(T9ai
'i-ceTa-a9ai
Ti-Bs-fievo-g^ ijj o-v
dt-So-fievo-Qj r], o-v
i-ffTd-fievo-g, ij, o-v
126 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. — VERBS IN fit. Table IX. —
VERBS IN fit.
Ti-Orj-iJii, I put.
^i-dio-jjii, I give.
'i-ar7]-fii^ I place.
Pure Stems 9e
do
(Tra
Present Stems Ti-9e
di-do
i-(TTT}
S. 1
k-Ti-9f]-V
i-6i-dio-v
'i-(TTr}-v
2
k-Ti-9r]-g
e-di-du)-Q
'i-arri-g
^
3
t-Ti-9rj
i-di-do)
l-CTTIJ
1
D. 1
2
k-ri-9e-T0v
k-di-do-TOV
'i-<TTa-T0V
1
3
k-Ti-9£-rr)v
t-h-U-Tj}v
l-(7Ta-TT}V
P. 1
i-Ti-9e-iJ,ev
l-di-do-fxev
i-aTa-fiEv
2
k-Ti-9e-Te
k-di-do-re
i-ffTa-re
3
£-Ti-9s-(Tav
l-di-do-crav
i-<TTc^(rav
Second or Stro
ng Aorist. Active.
S. 1
[i-9v-v]
[e-doj-v]
t-(Trr]-v
2
[e-9r,-Q]
[e.du>.g]
i-arri-g
s
3
[i-er)]
[i-dio]
e-<rni
'^
D. 1
c3
2
i-9e-T0v
i-do-Tov
t-crrrj-rov
''B
3
l-9k-Tr]v
e-d6-rT]v
t-arr)-rriv
M
P. 1
i-9e-fiEv
i-do-fiEv
t-cTrrj-fxev
2
i-9e-Te
e-do-TE
i-(TTT]-Te
3
e-9e-aav
i-do-aav
i-<Trr)-(Tav
Sub).
9io
duj
(TT(0
9y-g
^V-Q
ary-g
etc., as in the
Opt.
9eir]-v
doiij-v
aTair}-v
etc., as. in the
S. 2
9e-Q
do-g
aTrj-9i.
3
9e-T(o
do-ro)
ffrrj-Tio »
D. 2
9e-tov
do-TOV
(rrij-TOV
2
1
H- 1
3
9s-T(OV
d6-Tit)v
arq-Ttav
P. 2
9e-TS
do-re
<TTfj-T£
3
9k-vT(t)v or
d6-vr(i)v or
(TTa-VTwv or
9k-Tit)(Tav
do-Tioaav
(TTT}-T(0<TaP
Infin.
9el-vaL
dov-vai
arfj-vai
Part.
9Ei-g, 9ei-(Ta^ 9'e-v
dov-g, dov-(Ta,
(TTd-g, (TTd-aa,
G. 9kvT-0Q
do-v G. dovr-og
(TTOLV G. ffTOLVT-Og
The following Tenses are formed
Active.
Future.
9fj(TU}
diixyto
(TTT]<Tb)
First or Weak
Aorist.
Wjjku
idioKa
iarTjffa
Perfect.
Tk9uKa
dsdioKa
e(TTr]Ka
Pluperfect.
iTi.9HKHV
kdeSbJKHv
k<TTr]KHV or
f.l<TTr]KUV
Verbals.
Continued, paradigms of verbs. — verbs in jut. 127
FIRST CLASS.
This First Class consists of Verbs which affix their terminations
directly to the Stem.
<
i
«
t
I
-Tl-Bk-flTiV
-Ti-BE-ao •
-t'i-Be-to
-Tl-Bk-fXEBoV
-Ti-BE-aBov
-Ti-B't-(jBriv
-TL-Be-fieBa
-tI-Be-<tBe â–
-t'l-Be-vto
k-Si-do-firjv
E-dL-do-tTo
E-di-do-TO
E-di-do-jXEBov
E-di-6o-(TBov
i-di-do-aBTjv
E-Si-do-fieBa
E-Si-do-aBE
l-di-do-VTO
'l-(TTa-(TO
'i-ara-TO
l-crrd-fMEBov
'i-ara-aBov
i-aTa-aBriv
l-ard-fiEBa
'i-ara-aBE
'l-(TTa-VT0
Second or Strong Aorist. Middle and Passive.
i-9e-fir]v
i-9ov
e-9e-T0
e-9e-fiE9ov
l-9E-a9ov
E-9k-a9r]v
k-9e-fiE9a
i-9E-a9E
i-9E-VT0
E-do-firiv
e-dov
E-do-TO
E-d6-fiE9ov
E-do-(T9ov
E-d6-<T9r)v
E-do-fieBa
i-do-rrBE
t-do-VTO
Wanting.
9CJ-nai
By
Pres. Subjunctive.
Sat-fiat
Wanting.
9Ei-fj,r}v
Pres. Optative.
doi-fiTjv
Wanting.
9ov
Bk-(TB(o .
Be-aBov
Bk-(rBii)v
Bk-aBE
9k-a9(i)v or Bk-aBioffav
dov
do-crBo)
do-aBov
do-aBiov
S6-(tBe
d6-aB(t)v or do-rrBoxrav
Wanting.
Be-aBai
do-crBai
Wanting. .
Bs-fiEvo-g, ri, o-v
do-fiEvo-g, ri, o-v
Wanting.
rni the anahgy of Verbs
in Q.
Middle and Passive.
Brjaofiai
Passive. TEBrjffofiai
dijjffofiai
SoBri<TOjJ,at
aTrjaofiai
(TraBr}(T0/xai
Middle. Wanting
PASSiVE. ItsBtjv
Wanting
IdoBriv
ECTT^aajiriv
EOrdBriv
HBEifiai
dsSoixai
scTTafiai
irEBEifirjv
edEdonijv
eaTdfirjv
Betoq
dETSOQ
Sorog
SoTsog
araroQ
crraTEog
128
PAKADIGMS OF VERBS. — VERBS IN fxt. Table X.
VERBS IN fit. SECOND CLASS.
This Second Class consists of Verbs which fonn the Present-Stem by-
adding vv to the Pure Stem.
deiKvvfii, I show. Pure Stem ^ e i k. Present Stem Seik-v v.
Present Active. Middle and Passive.
Indicative,
S. 1
2
3
D. 1
2
3
P1.1
2
3
dHK-VV-fXL
detK-vv-g
deiK-vv-ffi(v)
h'lK-VV-TOV
Mk-vv-tov
SeiK-vv-fiev
SeiK-VV-TB
deiK-vv-d(Ti{v)
deiK-vv-fxai
ddK-vv-uai
deiK-vij-Tai
deiK-vv-fi.e9ov
deiK-w-aBov
SeiK-w-aBov
hiK-vv-iit9a
deiK-vv-(T9e
deiK-vv-vrai
Subjunctive.
deiKvvo), yQ, y, etc.
deiKvvu)fiai, y, yrai, etc.
Optative.
dHKVVOLfll, Oig, 01, etc.
deiKvvoifiijVj oio, oiro, etc.
Imperative.
S. 2
3
D. 2
3
PI. 2
3
Mk-vv
deiK-vv-rcj
deiK-rv-Tov
deiK-vv-T(i)v
deiK-vv-Te
deiK-vv-vr(ov or
deiK-vv-TOjaav
deiK-vv-ffo
deiK-vv-<T9(o
SeiK-vv-a9ov
SeiK-vv-aBiov
£dK-vv-(T9e
deiK-vv-(T9ii}v or
deiK-vv-(T9u}(Tav
Infinitive.
deiK-vv-vat
MK-vv-a9at
Participle.
dHK-vi>Q, deiK-vv<Ta, hiK-vvv
Stem Sf.iK-vv-vT
deiK-vv-fiepog, rj, ov
Imperfect
Indicative.
S. 1
2
3
D. 1
2
3
P1.1
2
3
i-dsiK-vv-v
k-deiK-vv-g
k-h'lK-VV-TOV
i-SeiK-vv-rrjv
k-^UK-VV-jltV
k-h'lK-VV-TB.
e-deiK-w-aav
t-deiK-vv-fir]v
e-deiK-vv-ao
t-SeiK-vv-ro
i-hiK-vv-ni9ov
£-Mk-vv-(t9ov
k-hiK-vv-a9riv
k-deiK-vv-iie9a
e-deiK-vv-<T9e
k-hlK-W-VTO
Future.
deiK(o
dd^ofiai
Passive. ^Eix9r)<T0fiai
First or
Weak Aorist.
tdeiKa
Middle. iSu%dnr]v
Passive. IMx9t]v
Perfect.
dedeixa
dedeiyfiai
Pluperfect.
IdedeixEiv
ededeiyiJ.r]v
§232.
I. THE PRESENT-STEM.
129
Chap. X. — First Principal Conjugation,
or Verbs in w.
I. The Present- Stem.
A. Inflexion of the Present-Stem.
§ 231. The Present-Stem is the form which remains
after rejecting a> in the 1 Sing. Pres. Act.
On the distinction of the Present- Stem from the Verbal-
Stem, see § 245, etc.
The following Table exhibits the way in which the Per-
sonal Endings are affixed to the Present- Stem by means
of the connectins: vowels.
§ 232.
Active.
Middle and
Passive.
Present
1 Sing.
\v-u)
[solv-o]
Xv-o-iiai
Indicative.
2 "
\v-El-Q
[solv-i-s]
Xv-y or Xvu
3 "
Xv-ei
[solv-i-t]
Xv-e-TUL
IDual
Xv-6-fiE9ov
2 "
Xv-e-Tov
Xv-e-crOov
3 "
Xv-e-rov
Xv-e-a9ov
•
1 Plur.
Xv-o-fizv
[solv-i-mus]
Xv-6-ne9a
2 "
Xv-e-TS
[solv-i-tis]
Xv-a-(T6e
3 " •
Xv-ov-<n{v) [solv-u-nt]
Xv-o-vrai
Present
1 Sing.
Xv-O)
[solv-a-m]
Xv-(t)-fiat
Subjunctive.
2 "
Xv-y-Q
[solv-a-s]
Xv-y
3 "
Xv-y
[solv-a-t]
Xv-r]-Tai
IDual
Xv-(Sj-fieOov
2 "
Xv-Tj-TOV
Xv-rj-aOov
3 "
Xv-t]-TOV
Xv-t]-(t9ov
1 Plur.
Xv-oj-fiev
[solv-a-mus]
Xv-w-fie9a
2 "
Xv-ri-re
[solv-a-tis]
Xv-i]-a9e
3 "
Xv-<a-ai(v)
[solv-a-nt]
Xv-(t)-vTai
F 2
130
I. THE PRESENT-STEM.
232.
Middle and
Active.
Passive.
Present
1 Sing.
Xv-oi-fxt
Xv-oi-fiT]v
Optative.
3 "
\v-oi-g
Xv-oi-o
3 "
Xv-OL
Xv-Ol-TO
IDual
Xv-oi-fie9ov
2 "
Xv-Ol-TOV
Xv-oi-a9ov
3 "
Xv-oi-TT]v
Xv-oi-a9rjv
1 Plur.
Xv-ot-fiev
Xv-oi-fieOa
^
2 "
Xv-OL-re
Xv-oi-a9e
3 "
Xv-OL-EV
Xv-Ol-VTO
Present
2 Sing.
Xv-e [solv-e]
Xv-ov
Imperative.
3 "
Xv-k-T(o [solv-i-to]
Xv-£-a9u)
2 Dual
Xv-e-Tov
Xv-t-a9ov
3 «
Xv-£-T(t}V
Xv-k-a9(i)v
2 Plur.
Xv-e-TE [solv-i-te]
Xv-e-a9e
3 "
Xv-6-vTU}v [solv-u-nto] or
Xv-k-(T9u)v or
Xv-B-TO)(TaV
Xv-e-<T9io(Tav
Present
Xv-eiv
Xv-e-a9ai
Infinitive.
Present
Stem Xv-o-vT [solv-e-nt]
Participle.
Xv-iov
Xv-o-jxEvo-g
Xv-ovaa
Xv-o-fievT]
Xv-ov
Xv-O-flEVO-V
Gen. Xv-o-vT-oQ
[solv-e-nt-is]
Imperfect.
1 Sing.
t-Xv-o-v
k-Xv-6-}ir}v
2 "
t-Xv-e-g
k-Xv-ov
3 "
i-Xv-E(v)
E-Xv-E-TO
IDual
E-Xv-6-fiE9ov
2 "
l-Xv-e-TOP
k-Xv-E-<T9ov
3 "
k-Xv-k-TTiv
e-Xv-e-(t9t]v
1 Plur.
k-Xv-o-fxev
e-Xv-6-fiE9a
2 "
e-Xv-e-TE
k-Xv-E-(r9E
3 «
e-Xv-o-v
k-Xv-O-VTO
233. PERSONAL ENDINGS. 131
§ 233. Obs. — 1. The E-souncl (e, ?/, et) is used as a connecting vowel
except before nasals, where the 0-sound (o, w, o v) is used.
3. In 1 Sing. Ind. Act. w is the connecting vowel lengthened, the
ending fii being dropped. In the 2 Sing, e i ^ is for e o- 1. In the
3 Sing. € I for tn: Xv-ei-g for Xv-e-m, Xv-ei for Xv-e-n [compare
solv-i-t]. The ov of the 3 Plur. has arisen out of o by compensa-
tive lengthening (§ 42) : Xv-ov-ai, from Xv-o-v(n, for the original
and Doric Xv-o-vn [compare soh-u-nt]. In the 3 Sing. Imperf.
€ (v) stands for original s-t — compare solveba-t — as r at the end
could not maintain its ground (§67).
8. In the 2 Sing. Indie. Pres. Mid. y or e t arose from t{a)aL (§§ 61,
38) : \uy, from Xvt{iy)ai ; the ending ei is the Old Attic one ex-
clusively used in oiei, thou thinkest ; (SovXei, thou wishest ; y is the
one later in general use. Compare the Fut. ^u (§ 259).
A. The Subjunctive has always w, ?;, ^, for o (ow), e, e i ; the y of the
2 Sing. Mid. is contracted from r]{(j)ai (compare § 228).
5. In the 2 Sing. Imperat. Act. the termination after the connecting
vowelis quite lost, o w in the 2 Sing. Imperat. and Imperf. Mid.
has arisen from €((r)o, €o : Xvovz=Xve((T)o, tXvov^tXve(a)o (§§ 61,
37) ; o 1 in the 2 Sing. Opt. Mid. arose from o t (<t) o.
§ 238. Dialects. — 1. The Epic dialect sometimes has the original
ending ^ i of the 1 Sing, in the subjunctive : iOkXio-fii^ velim; the 2 Sing.
Subj. and Opt. often has the fuller ending aOa (for q) : t9kXr}-G9a=.
WkXyg, KXaioi-a9a = KXaioig (KXaioj, I weep)) the 8 Sing. Subj. has the
old ending a i (v), from r i : k9kXr}-<n{v) = WkXy.
«-^ 2. The long vowels of the subjunctive are often shortened in Homer :
lOvvETE for iOvvTjre {i9vv(o, I put straight) (compare § 228, D.).
3. The Epic dialect often has /u e v a i or /« e v in the Inf. Act. con-
nected with the Stem by an accented € : dfivv-e-fievai or dfivv-k-jx^v :=
dn^vHv, to defend.
4. The 2 Sing. Mid. often remains uncontracted in the Ion. dialect :
XiXaUai, thou wishest ; Subj. txwi (habearis), also shortened, fiicryeai
(miscearis) ; Imperat. sTreo, follow ; Imperf Ideveo, thou wast in want of.
f is also contracted to e u (§ 37, D.) : cVeu.
5. The 1 Dual and 1 Plftr. Mid. in poetry often has a for : (iov-
X6ixe<T9ov, -/i€(79a, we wish.
Q. uTo (§ 226, D.) occurs in the Ion. dialect regularly for vto in
3 Plur. Opt. : ^axoiaro {^naxoivro)^ they Tnay fight. In New-Ion. arat,
aro^ are also sometimes found in other forms where e is the connect-
ing vowel instead of o : Krid-k-arai = Krjd-o-vrai, they care : IfiovX-k-aro
=â– i(3ovXovTo. ,
132 I. THE PRESENT-STEM. § 234.
B. TJiG Augment.
§ 234. The Augment {Augmentum^ increase) is the
sign of the jpast in the Indicative of all the historical
tenses (§ 225, 3. B.). It has two forms ; that is, it appears
either —
d) As a SyllabiG Augment, in the syllable £ prefixed, or
J) As a Temporal Augment, in the lengthening of the
initial vowel.
All verbs beginning with a consonant have the Sylla-
hiG Augment : i-\v-o-v, t-ruTrr-o-jur/v, / was strucJc. p is
doubled after £ : tpplirTov, from ptirTtj,! hwl.
Obs. — The Syllabic Augment appears in the stronger form of r]
instead of e in -il-fieSX-o-v, I was about to, from /ueXXw ; ij-(iov\-6-fitjv,
I wished, from (iovkofiai ; i)-dvvd-fir]v, I could, from Svva/iai.
§ 235. The Temjporal Augment is used in all verbs which
begin with a vowel., whether aspirated or not. The Tem-
poral Augment changes
a to 77 : ayw, I lead. Imperfect r}y-o-v
« " 1]'. i\avv(>),I drive. " t/Xaw-o-v
o " w : dveiSi^u), I reproach. " wveidi^-o-v.
t "I: 'iKSTevo), I beseech. " 'iKerev-o-v
7. Homer, quite peculiarly, has in the 3 Dual Imperf. rov, <t9ov,
for Tr]v, (T 9 T}v : Itevx^tov, the two made; and Attic writers have Ttjv
for the 2 Dual of an historic sense: eixerrjv, ye two had; evpkrrjv, ye
two found.
§ 234. Dialects. — In Homer, and also in other poets, the Augment
may be entirely omitted: r6u%e, h^ made; tx^v, Tie had. X, fi, v, a are
also sometimes doubled after the Syllabic Augment : iXXiaazro (from
Xi<T(TOfiai, I beseech) ; d only in the Stem d i : iddsKra (I feared, § 817, 5).
On the contrary, p is sometimes left single : epdirTOfiev {pdirTio, I sew,
§ 235. Dialects. — By the Temporal Augment a becomes d in Doric :
dyov. The Temporal Augment is very often wanting in Herodotus,
especially in the case of diphthongs.
§ 238. THE AUGMENT. ' 133
i; to v : 'v(3piK(o, linsult. Imperfect 'of3piZ-o-v
ai " y : aiaOdvofiai, Ipercewe. " yaOav-o-firjv
ay" j]v: av^dvu), lincrease. " rjv^av-o-v
01 " (p : oiKTdpujj I pity, " t^Kveip-^v
Before vowels, a becomes a, not t; : 'aiw,! hear, 'diov.
The long vowels rj, w, 7, v, and usually the diphthongs
et, ev, ov, remain without Augment.
dKuKoj, I conjecture J eiKuK-o-v (also yKaZov);
EvpiffKU), IJind, evpi(TK-o-v (seldom Aorist rjvpov) ;
also a V and o i immediately before a vowel : avaivu), I dry^
avaivov ; omictgw, / 5#<?^r, oia/ctjov ; and other diphthongs
in isolated instances.
Obs. — The rough hreathing precedes the augmented
form when the verb in its unaugmented^form had it.
§ 236. £ becomes c i (instead of r/) in some verbs, viz., in
laii). Heave ; WiZ^bi, I accustom ; k\i(TGit),I roll ; cXkw or
kX^vii),! draw ^' 'iirofxai, I follow; lpyaZ,o^aiyIwor7Cj' epiru)
or kpTrvZ,(si, I creep / lorrmw, / entertain hospitably / txw, I
have. Compare below the Aorists : aV/zrjv (§ 313), cTXov {at-
piw, I take, I 327, l), uaa, I placed (§ 269, D.,iind § 275).
Obs. — These verbs originally began with a consonant, and therefore
had the Syllabic Augment : PepyaK-o-fiai (§ 34, D.), k-PepyaK-o-fxriv ;
<^«X-^ (§ 327, 6), i-aex-o-v. Then the consonant was dropped :
t-epya^-o-fir]v, e-ex-o-v ; finally ee was regularly contracted to «
(§ 36) : elpyaZ-o-fiTjv, slx-o-v.
§ 237. toprdKo), I celebrate^ has the Augment in the second vowel:
eojpTttZov for riopraKov (compare § 37, D. 2). Verbs which origin-
ally began with a digamma (§ 34, D.), consequently with a con-
sonant, have the Syllabic Augment in spite of their initial vowel :
dvddvoj, I please, e-dv5avov; ovp'no, I make water; ojOsoj, I push;
wvsofiai, I buy (§ 275). Both Augments, Syllabic and Temporal,
are combined in opdoj, I see, k^paov (tojpojv) ; dv-oiy-u), I open,
dv-k(j)y-o-v.
§ 238. Verbs compounded with a preposition have the
§ 237. Dialects. — Homer forms t<i}vox6u from olvoxokM, I pour out
wine ; irjvSavov (Herod, idvdavov) and r]vdavov from dvddvu), I please.
Compare § 34, D., 1 and 4.
134 I. THE PRESENT-STEM. § 239.
Augment immediately after the preposition : ug-(j)ip-(jj, I
carry in, eig-t-(pEp-o-v ; irpoq-ay-u), I lead to, irpoQ-riy-o-v ;
Ijc, out of, becomes l^ before the Augment ; I ^-ij^-o-v, I
led out. ^he true forms of lv,in, and (tvv, with, altered
by assimilation (§ 51) in the Present, appear again before
e : avX-Xiy-o), I collect, avv-i-Xey-o-v ; E/i-jSaXX-w, I invade^
ev-e-f^aW'O-v.
The final vowel of a preposition is elided : a7r-£-^fjO-o-v,
J carried away, from a7ro-<f)ip-(jj ; only irepl and irpo never
lose their final vowel ; but irpo is often contracted with e :
Trpov-j5aivov, from 7rpo-i-(5aiv-o-v, I inarched on.
§ 239. Exceptions. — Some verbs, which are not merely compomid-
ed with prepositions, but derived from already compound nouns
(Decomposita), have the Augment at the 'beginning: ivavTioo/iai
(from tvavTiog, against), rivavTiovuriv (from oonrjv), I icas against;
poet, rfvapov, from Ivaipo), I slay ; Trapprjaid^ofiai (from Trapprjaia,
freedom of speech), iirappri<nal6}iriv, I spoke freely ; but the majority
nevertheless have it in the middle : iKKXijaid^io, I assemble, from
tKicXrjffia, assembly, l^eKXrjmaZov ; vTroTrTevio, I suspect, from vTrowTog,
suspicious, VTTOJTrrwov ; Karrjyopsu), I accuse, Karrjyopovv (from eov).
Trapavofieu), I act contrary to law (from Trapd-vofiog, contrary to law),
has irregularly Traprjvofxow (eov).
§ 240. Many prepositions have in some compounds so far lost their
distinctive meanings that the verbs are treated as simple : KuOevdoj,
I sleep, tKaOev^ov, yet KaOijvSov also ; KaOi^io, I sit, tKaOi^ov. Com-
]3are the verbs 'Irjfii {d<pirip.i, § 313), 'ivwfii (dfi<pievvvixi, § 319, 5),
t)fiai {Kd9r]fiai, § 315, 2). Some verbs also have a double Aug-
ment : dvkxofiai, I endure, -qvuxonrjv ; dvopQoio, I raise up, rjvwpQovv
(oov) ; evoxXioj, I encutriber, rjvMxXovv (sov) ; irapoiveb), I a,ct as a
drunkard, iirapi^vow. So also ^lairdtx), I live (from diaira, mode of
life), ediyrcjv (aov) ; didicovsb),! serve, IdirjKovovv {eov).
§ 241. dvg, had, ill, in composition is preceded by the Augment
when the second word begins with a consonant or long vowel :
^vQTvx^i^i I cim unfm'tunate, ISvqtvxow (eov) ; dvgdJTrscj, I make a
sour face, i^vgw-n-ovv (eov) ; but short vowels receive the Temporal
Augment after bvg : SygapeffHio, I displease, dygi^pearow (eov).
Compounds with e v generally have no Augment : evrvxow (eov),
I was fortunate ; but short vowels occasionally receive the Tem-
poral Augment after ev : evrjpyeTow (eov), together with evepyerow,
from evepyerkio, I do good.
243. CONTRACTED VERBS. 135
§ 242. All other compounds have the Augment at the beginning :
TjOviiovv, from dOvixeio, I am without courage.
C. ContraGted Verbs
§ 243. Verbs whose Present- Stem ends in a, e, or o, reg-
ularly contract these vowels in all forms of the Present-
Stem with the connecting vowel, and hence are called Oo7i-
tracted Verbs. The laws of contraction given in §§ 36-38
§ 243. Dialects. — The Ion. dialect very often does not contract ; but
the three kinds of contracted verbs are treated differently.
A. Homer inflects the a-Stems in three ways ;
1. The syllables regularly contracted by the Attic writers remain
open and unchanged: doidid-ei,he sings; vaisTd-ovai, they dwell; and
the Fem. Part, vaierawora for vaierdovaa, with a remarkable change of
OV to (t).
2. Contraction takes place : dpsT^ = dpeTd-n, he thrives, from dpeTdw ;
Trpog-ijvSa = 7rpog-T]vSa-ej from Trpog-avddoj, I address. Sometimes a e
becomes rj (not d) : irpog-avSrfTriv (3 Dual Imperf ), oprjai — also with
regular accent — (from 6pd-eai) = Att. 6p^ (2 Sing. Pres. Ind. Mid.).
3. Extension instead of contraction takes place when a vowel of the
same kind is inserted before the long one which results from con-
traction : 6pdu),I see, contracted 6pu>, extended 6p6oj.
a) This inserted vowel is usually sJwrt. Hence opdio is thus in-
flected :
Mid.
Act. Pr. Ind.
6pd-(0
itt.
bpoj I
lorn
. bp6<o
opd-eig
op4q
u
bpd^g
bpd-si
bpq.
u
bpd^
opd-ovai
bpaxn
u
bpoiaai
Subj.
6pd-(o
bptj
u
bp6(i>
opd-yg
op^Q
a
bpdifg, etc.
Opt.
opd-oifii
bpvixi
u
bpotftfii
Inf.
opd-Eiv
bpdv
u
bpdav
Part.
bpd-iov
bpSiV
u
bpoiov
bpd-ovaa
bpSxra
((
bpoiacra
Gen.
opd-ovTog
bpwvTog
((
bpoojvTog
2. Sing.
Ind.
bpd-y
bpq.
((
bpdg,
3. Plur.
bpd-ovrai
bpwvrai
u
bp6u)VTai
Opt. 3.
Plur.
bpd-oiVTO
bpt^VTO
11
bp6(^VT0
Inf.
bpd-eaOai
bpdoBai
a
bpdaffOai
3. Plur.
Impf.
eojpd-ovTO
k(t)pS)VTO
u
bpodJVTO
136 I. THE PRESENT-STEM. § 243.
are observed. Paradigms of the three verbs tl/liciw, iroiew,
^ov\6(x), are given on p. 110-113.
Ods. — As the e i in the Infinitive f i j/ is not original, aeiv, oeiv do
not become ^v, oiv, but dv, ow (§ 37, Ois.).
Dialects.
I) sometimes long, e. g.,
r'lfid-ovcra Att. rjjSuKTa Hom. -q ^u)0) a a
from ri^du), I am youtliful ; so also from Spdijj,Ido;
dpd-ovai Att. dpwai Hom. d p w cj (t i
and from fivdonai, I remember ;
fivd-eaOai Att. iivdaQai Hom. fivdaaOai.
After long 'vowels, the one following is sometimes shortened :
fiva-ofievoQ Att. fiviofxevoQ Hom. jxv o) 6 fiev o g
r)(Bd-ovTeg " rjfiwvTeQ " r) fSMOVTsg
The metre chiefly determines which of the vowels "should be long
or short. Such forms, for instance, as dpsTdg, C ")? vjSoojvTeg (""""),
are inadmissible. ^^
In Herod., the Stems in a often pass over into the conjugation oi
the Stems in e : 6pk(o (but 6p^g, 6p^), dpeofiEv, bpkovai, opeovreg. Instead
of £0 we also find €w : opsiovTeg. Homer also has ijvTeov = Att. ijvriov
(from dvrd-(i), I meet) ; Xjoew/xevof = Att. xp'^h^vog, making use of.
B. Stems in e fluctuate between the open and contracted forms,
eo is often monosyllabic by synizesis (§ 39): Wpi^vEov, I complained ;
often also in Ionic contracted to e y : Hom. vevfiai =z Att, vkofiai, I
return home, eov rarely becomes e v : veiKevai = vuKovai, they quarrel.
e € becomes rj irregularly in Hom. : ofiapTrjrrjv (ofiaprsoj, I rmet with),
d-7rELXr]TT}v (aTTEiXeio, I threaten), dopTrrjrrjv (dopTreo),! Slip), Inf. ^oprjuevai =:
Att. (popeiv, to carry. An utterly anomalous Infinitive is (popjjvai.
The second e in the 3 Sing. Mid. is sometimes dropped : fivOsaL for
fivOkai (Att. fiv9y, fivOei, tTwu sayest) ; ttwXso = Att. iTrwX'ov, thou hadst
intercourse ; sometimes e e are contracted to e t : fivOelai. The first
way is usual in Herod. Homer also prolongs e to e t without con-
traction: veiKdtit =z Att. veiKw; ereXy'ero = Att. ereXelro (TeXw, I complete).
C. Stems in o are mostly contracted: yowovfiai, I supplicate. Some
have an extension like those in a : dp6io(n(v) =z Att. dpov(n(v), they
plow; dT]i6(i)ev =: Att. dr]'ioTev,t7iey would destroy; vTrvojovrag =z Att. vir-
vovvrag, the sleepers.
In Herod, o sometimes changes to e, and with o is contracted to
£v : tdiKai(ivv=: Att. ediKaiovv, deemed right.
§ 245. PRESENT AND VERBAL-STEMS. 137
§ 244. Obs. — 1. Monosyllabic Stems in t admit only the contraction
€1. All syllables which, contracted, would produce another
sound, remain uncontracted.
Stem TT \ € (Pres. ttXsw, / sail, Inf. irXuv) '
TrXkig 'jrXeiQ, but ttXsu)
TrXeei rrXei, " rrXkovci
tTrXEEQ iirXeig, " tirXeov
deio, I Und, forms an exception, having to dovv (Seov), ^oviiat, etc.,
to distinguish them from forms of deu), I am in want of; M, it is
necessary; to deop, duty.
2. Some Stems in a have a preference for rj, which they admit in
the place of d : ^a-w, / live, ^yg, Z,y, KvTe, Zi]v ; Truvd-oj, I am hun-
gry, TTHvriv', Sixpa-u), I thirst, di-^fjv; so also Kvd-u), I scratch ; afid-cj,
I stroke ; ^j^d-oj, I scrape ; and xpa-o/xai, I Tuake use of .
3. piyo-h), I freeze, has w and ^ for ov and oi: Inf. piyujv, Opt. pt-
4. Xovio, I wash, lav-o, has a peculiar contraction ; that is, the con-
necting vowel after o v disappears : i-Xov for e-Xov-e ; Xov-fiai for
Xov-o-fiai, etc. In like manner, ol-o-fiai is often contracted to
ol-jxai, I think, and the Imperf. (^-S-fiijv to (^-firjv.
D. Distinction of the Present-Stem J^rom the Verbal-
Stem.
% 245. We call that jjart of a verb the Verbal Stem
from the combination of which with the terminations of
persons, tenses, moods, infinitives, and participles, consist-
ently with the laws of euphony, all the forms of the verb
may be explained : X v, Pres. Xuw, Perf. XeXu/ca, Fut. Xuo-w ;
T t fxa, Pres. Tijicujjf Perf. rerijuriKa, Fut. tijuliictu).
Obs. — From the Verbal-Stem also nouns are formed by means of
the nominal suffixes : Xv-<n-Q, loosing ; Xv-rfip, looser; Xv-rpo-v, re-
demption fee; Ti-firj-m-g, valication ; Tifi7]-Tr)-g, censor.
When the Verbal- Stem can not be traced farther back,
it is called a Poot : X v, and a verb formed from it, a Root-
Verh: Xvw. But when the Verbal-Stem is itself a Nom-
§ 244. Dialects. — 3. For xRW^i- Herod, has xp«7-at.
4, Horn. 3 Sing. Imperf X6e (for Xofe, § 35, Ol)s.)=Xov6, tXove.
138 I. THE PRESENT-STEM. § 246*
inal-Stem formed by means of a. nominal suffix, it is said
to be derived : rifia is at once the Nominal- Stem o^ tijuti,
honor, formed by the nominal suffix ju a from the root r i,
and the verb* formed from it is a derivative one : Tifiait).
Obs. — Boots are almost all of one syllable ; derived Stems are of
two or more syllables.
§ 246. The Yerhal-Stem is not always like the Present-
Stem, but the Present- Stem is frequently an extension
of the Verbal-Stem : Pres. Xuir-is), I leave, Present-Stem
X £ t TT, Verbal- Stem X i tt (Aorist iXiirov),
Such additions are called enlargements of the Present ;
the Verbal- Stem divested of them is the jpii^re Verbal-
Stem.
Obs. — Where the Verbal-Stem differs from the Present-Stem, nouns
are usually formed from the former, not from the latter : Verbal-
Stem V y, Present-Stem ^ e v y, substantive ^uy-?? {fug-a)^ adj.
(pvy-diS) -Q, fugitive.
§ 247. The relation of the Present-Stem to the Verbal-
Stem produces four classes of verbs with some subdi-
visions.
1. First Class (unenlarged).
The Present-Stem is like the Yerhal-Stem.
This comprises, first of all, the pure verbs, i. e., verbs
whose stem ends in a vowel (with the exception of a small
number in c w, § 248, and many others besides : rijia-Wy
^ov\6-(i), irai^ev-u), I educate ; \v-w,I loose ; Ti-b),I honor ;
apx'h}, I rule ; ay-w, I lead ; Xey-tj, I say.
§ 248. 2. Second Class (lengthened class).
The Stem vowel is lengthened in the Present-Stem.
This comprises several verbs whose Stem ends in a
inute, and which in the Present have a diphthong or a long
vowel, as :
§ 248. Dialects. — To these belongs the Hom. (rivto^IJiurry^ from the
Stem cry.
§ 249. PRESENT AND VERBAL-STEMS. 139
({>Evy-ixi
, I flee, Pure Stem ^vy {^vy
-i), flight, Lat fuga).
XsiTT-a)
, I leave, "
a
XtTT
•
TreiO-ot
, I persuaxle, "
u
TT I e {mB-
av6-g, persuasive).
Tf]K-U),
I melt,
u
TOLK
rpt^-dj
,Irvb, "
a
rpi^
it, besides these, there are
also
six verbs in e w, viz. :
TrXeu), I sail,
Pure Stem
ttXv
Trvko),Il)low,
TTVV
veio, I sail,
" " .
VV
peu), I flow,
pv
Osio, I run,
9v
xki»,Ipour,
x^
Obs. — The v of these Stems was lengthened to e v, but resolved to
£p before vowels (compare § 35, D. 2) ; finally the f was dropped :
TrXv-TrXevM-TrXePio-TrXeu). The diphthong appears in the substan-
tives unresolved : 7rvev-fia, Ireath ; pev-fia, stream. Compare
§ 260, 2.
§ 249. 3. Third Class (T-class).
The Present-Stem affixes r to the Verbal-Stem.
*This comprises only verbs whose Pure Stems end in
Labials, as :
TviTT-oj, I strike. Pure Stem tvtt (rvTrog, stroke).
(SXaTTT-u), I injure, " " /3 \ a /3 (pXafif), injury).
(SaTTT-b), I dip, " " I3a<p (J3d<prj, a dip).
and, besides —
TiKT-u),Il)ringforth, " " t^k {rkROQ, child).
The final consonant of the Pure Stem is called here*, as
in the verbs of the following class, the character. On the
changes of sound, see § 45.
other Examples.
KOTTTO), I cut, Stem KOTT
KXhlTTii), I steal, " K \ € TT
KpitTTTii), I hide, * " Kpv<pOYKpv(3
Odirro), I bury, " r a (§ 54, c).
§ 249. Dialects. — The Stem (3Xa(3 in Hom. has a Pres. (BXafierai, like
class 1.
140 I. THE PRESENT-STEM. § 250.
§ 250. 4. Fourth Class (I-class).
The Fresent-Btem adds i to the Verbal-Stem [Latin
fug-i-o, Pure Stem fiog]. The l is here subject to the
various changes and transpositions discussed in §§ 55-
58^ viz. :
a) The Gutturals k, y, x foi"â„¢? with t, the group (to-
(New-Att.rr) (§57);
^v\daa(o,I gtiard^instesLd'of <pv\aKio), Pure Stem <i)v\aK ((pvXaKrt, a
guard).
rdcTffoj, Z arrange, " raytoj, " " Tay (Tayog, ar-
ranger),
rapdaai,}, I confuse, " rapaxio, " " rap ax {japaxh,
confusion).
Other Examples.
eXi(T(T(o (k) , I roll. 7rpd(Tffu) (y) , / do. dpvaao) (%) , / dig.
KT]pv<T(Tio (k) , I proclaim. o-^drrw (y) , / slay.
Obs. — The character of the Presents dpnoTTw, I fit ; Trdamo, I scatter;
Trkdaau), I shape ; (3pd<Tao), I seethe ; ipkaaio,! row ; TTTiaffoj^Istamp;
(SXiTTU), I abstract honey, is a dental ; Trecraa), I boil, has Stem ttstt'
irregularly.
§ 251. I) 8, and more rarely 7, with i, form Z (§ 58):
tZojuiai, I sit, instead of t^io/uai, Pure Stem £ ^ (fS-oc, seat,
Latin sedes) ; Kpa Jw, I cry, instead of Kpayiw, Pure Stem
Other Examples.
^pd(^io (S) , I say. oZio (d) , / smell. ax^Zm (S) , I split.
Obs. — Present-Stems in K which express a sound have the Verbal-
Stem in y: arevd^ii), I sigh ; olfiw^o), I wail; olfiojy-r], a wailing;
moreover, (rrdZio,! trickle; arilio, I priclc, Lat. in-stig-o; ixaari^io,
§ 250. Dialects. — The Stems of the Presents i/xdcrao), I whip; XiV-
aofiai^ I beseech ; Kopvcrcru),! arm; Herod, d^dcrao),! touch, end in Den-
tals (X I r, KopvO); Horn. Iviaau), I blaTne, has irregularly the Stem
IviTT.
§ 251. Dialects. — In all dialects, Presents in -Zio much more fre-
quently have a Guttural for their character, in Hom. especially in
dXaTrd^u), I conquer; datZco, I divide; ixepfir]pi(^<o, I ponder; TroXefil^u), I
war; ory^eXt^w, / strike, etc.
§ 253. PRESENT AND VERBAL STEMS. 141
/ wTiip, and some others. K\d^a>, / mZZ, Stem k \ a y y, K\ayy-rj, a
call; 7r\dZ(o, I mislead ; craXTriKd), Illoio a trumpet, haye a Pure
Stem in yy ; vi^u), I wash, has irregularly the Stem v i (5.
§ 252. c) X with l forms XX (§ 56):
/3aXAfa>, I throw, for (SaXioj, Pure Stem (3a\ (j3e\-og, a shot).
aXXofiai, I leap, " aXiofiai, " " aX [sal-i-o].
riXXii),Iplttch, " TiXiu), " " TiX
Other Examples.
9dXX(o, I lloom. <T<pa.XXoj, I cause to stagger. oreXXw, / send.
-TraXXd), I wield. dyyeXXu), I announce. xj^aXXcj, I play on the lyre.
§ 253. d) V and p throw the l into the preceding syllable
of the Stem (§ 66) :
Teivu, I stretch, for tsviu), Pure Stem rev (t6v-o-c, a stretching, Latin
tendo).
^Oeipoj, I corrupt, " <p9epi(o, " " (pOep {(pOop-d, corruption).
<paiv<i), I show, " (pavid), " " <p a v (d-^av-rjg, ir
Other Examples.
fxaivofiai, I rage. (nreipo), I sow. lyeipoi), I awaTcen.
aipu), I raise. dyeipoj, I collect. v^aivw, I weave.
Obs. — If the Stem syllable has i or v for its vowel, this is length-
ened by the retreating i : Kpivoj, T sever, judge, from KpXv-nt) ; adpio,
I drag, from, avp-nd.
A single Stem in \ also follows this formation, viz.: o^eX, Pres.^
ocpdXb), I owe, for 6<peXi<i), to distinguish it from o^lWw, / increase,
with the same Stem.
The t unites immediately with the final vowels of the Stems Kav
and KXav, which then sacrifice their v (P) : Ka-i(o, I burn ; KXa-ito,
I weep. Additional forms in Attic are Kdoj, »cXda> (§ 35, Obs.).
N.B. — The other less usual classes of verbs are given below.
§ 253. Dialects. — Homer joins i immediately with Vowel Stems :
da-i(D, I bum. Stem ^ a : na-io/jiai, I seeJc, Stem fi a ; va-icj, I dwell. Stem
V a ; and he uses d^tXXw in the sense of tlR Att. d(j)eiX(o ; but, on the
other hand, he has tiXw, / press, from the Stem I X for which one
might expect tXXw (Class 4, c).
142 II. THE STRONG OR SECOND AORIST-STEM. § 254.
11. The Strong or Second Aorist-Stem.
§ 254. The Strong or Second Aorist Active and Middle
is formed from the Strong Aorist-Stem, which is like the
Pure Yerbal-Stem, except the few cases named in § 257.
Pres.
Stem
XeiTT-a), I leave.
X I TT
rvTTT-o), I strike.
/3d\X-t
I3a\
I throw.
Active.
Aorist
Ind.
f-XiTT-o-v, / left.
e-XiTT-e-g
i-rvTT-o-v, I struck.
t-TVTT-E-Q
i-l3a\-o-v, I threw.
i-(3aX-e-£
etc., like the Imperfects tXeiTrov, trvTrrov, ijSaXKov
Subj.
fXi7r-a>
{XiTT-y-g
TVTr-(j)
TVTT-y-g
/3aX-w
(iaX-y-g
etc., like the Pres. Subjunctive XetTrw, rwTrrw, (5d\\i
Opt.
|{
XlTT-Ol-fll
XiTT-oi-g
TVTT-Ol-fll
TVTT-Ol-g
(idX-oi-^i
(idX-oi-g
etc., like the Pres. Optative Xhttolhi, tvtttoihi, (idXXoifii
Imper.
[XtTT-e
I Xnr-e-T(o
TVTT-e
TVir-k-T(o
/3aX-€
(iaX-k-Tia
etc., like the Pres. Imper. XeiTre, rvTrre, (idXXe.
Infin.
XlTT-UV
(iaX-Hv
Part.
XlTT-bJV, XiTT-ovcra,
XtTT-ov, Gen. XiTT-
ovTog
rvTT-iov, rvTr-ovcra,
TVTT-OV, Gen. TVTT-
ovrog
(5aX-d)v, (3aX-ov(Ta,
(3aX-6v, Gen. jSaX-
ovTog
Middle.
Indie.
|{
i-Xnr-6-iir]v i-Tvir^o-jxinv t(5aX-6-fir]v
k-XlTT-OV k-TVTT-OV £-/3aX-oi;
etc., like the Imperf. kXmronriv^ hvTrToixrjv, i(3aXX6fir]v
Subj.
IiXiTr-w-fxai Tvir-io-jiai jidX-oi-fiai
(Xiir-y TVTT-y j3dX-y
etc., like the Pres. Subj. X«Vw/iat, Tvirriofiai^ j3aXXw/iat
Opt.
ijXnr-oi-fH]v Tvir-oi-firiv (iaX-oi-ni]v
(XlTT-Ol-O I TVTT-Ol-O (idX-Ol-0
etc., like the Pres. Opt. XMroifii^v, rvTrroifirjv, iSaXXoifirjv
Imper.
JXlTT-oi) TVTT-OV (5aX-ov
I [Xnr-k-ffOu) TVTr-k-aQii) ^aX-'t-cQio
etc., like the Bres. Imper. Xeittov, tvtttov, (5dXXov
Infin. I XiTT-s-aBat
Tvir-k-trOat
I (iaX-'s-ffOai
Part. j Xi7r-6-/u£vo-c, ?;, o-v \ TV7r-6-/ievo-g, rj, o-v | f3aX-6-iiisvo-g, rj, o-v
§ 257. II. THE STRONG OR SECOND AORIST-STEM. 143
§ 255. 1. The Inflexion of the Strong Aorist-Stem dif-
fers from that of the Present- Stem (Imperfect and Present
tenses) ofily in the accent of the following forms : the In-
fin. Act. is perispome Q^vkuv), the Infin. Mid. paroxytone
{\i7ri(jdai)y the Part. Act. accents the 0-sound {Xnrtjv, \i-
TTovaa), the 2 Sing. Imper. Mid. is perispome {Xiirov).
2. The Aorist Middle has not, like the Present Middle,
the meaning also of the Passive : thus ipaXofirjv means only
I threw for myself but not I was thrown.
On the Augment of the Indicative, §§ 234-242.
§ 256. The Strong Aorist can be formed only from such
verbs as have a Present- Stem different from the Pure
Verbal- Stem, therefore not from the verbs of the First
(unenlarged) Class (§ 247). Also it is not usually formed
from many verbs of other classes, and scarcely occurs at all
from any hvX Root-Yerhs (§ 245).
Obs. — On the Aorists of the verbs ^w-w and ^y-w (class 1), see §§ 316,
16, 17.
§ 257. In a few verbs the Strong Aorist Stem is distinguished from
the Pure Verbal Stem ; viz., instead of e of the latter, the Strong
Aor. sometimes has a, by which rpgTr-w, / tum^ though belonging
to the first class, has a Strong Aor. : t-rpaTr-o-v (Impf t-TpETr-o-v),
e-Tpair-6-fir]v. An isolated formation is Pres. Tptljy-io, I gnaw, Aor.
t-Tpay-o-v. ay-Wj I drive, likewise belonging to the first class, by
doubling the Verbal-Stem forms the Aorist-Stem ay-ay, whence
Ind. : iiy-ay-o-v, Subj. dy-dy-w, Inf. ay-ay-uv.
§ 255. Dialects. — 1. All the peculiarities enumerated § 233, D., ex-
tend likewise to the Strong Aorist : 2 Sing. Subj. (SaXriaOa, 3 Sing.
(3aXT]<n, etc. The Inf Aor. Act. ends in Horn, also in Uiv instead of
elv (fiaXUiv).
2. The Middle Aorist forms of the Stems c r a (§ 316, 4), /3 \ t; (§ 316,
19), ovra (§ 316, 20), exceptionally have a Passive meaning.
144
III. THE FUTURE-STEM.
§258.
III. The Future- Stem.
§ 258. From the Future-Stem are formed the'Fut. Act;
ive and Middle.
First Future
{The a Future).
Second Future
(Contracted Future).
Pres.
Xuu), Stem \ V
Fut. Stem Xva
Pres. (paivo), I show, Stem (pav
Fut. Stem <pdve
Active.
Indie.
Xixr-w, I shall loose,
Xv(T-eig, etc.
like the Pres. Xv(o
(pavfo), a, I shall show.
<pdvk-(.ig, iig, etc.
like the Present tto/w
Opt.
Infin,
Part.
Xvff-oi-fit
XV(T-EIV
Masc. Xvff-wv
Fem. Xva-ovaa
Neut. Xv(T-ov
Gen. Xv(T-ovroc
(pave-oirjv, oii]v
<pavk-uv, elv
(pave-iov, wv
<pavk-ov(ja, ovaa
<pavs-ov, ovv
^avE-ovTog, ovvTog
Middle.
Indie.
Xv(T-o-ixai, I shall loose for
myself.
like the Present Xvo^ai
(pave-o-fiai, ovfiai, I shall ap-
pear.
like the Present iroiovfiai
Opt.
Infin.
Part.
Xv<r-oi-fir]v
Xv(T-E-(r9ai
Xv<T-6-fievog, ij, op
^ave-oi-firjv, oifiriv
<pavk-e.-(jBai, uaBat
(pave-o-fievog, ovfievog, t), ov
§ 257. Dialects. — Horn., in the case of several Stems with p, forms
the Strong Aorist by metathesis (§ 59), and by changing e into a :
depK-o-jxai, I see, t-SpaK-ov ; TrspO-oj, I destroy, e-rrpaO-o-v ; in others by
the syncope of € (§ 61, c) : l-rrT-o-firjv {-Trkr-op-ai, I fly)-, e-yp-e-ro (Stem
iyep, Pres. class 4, d, iyeipo), I awake) ; Part, dyp-6-fjievoi, assembled;
Inf. dyep-eaOai (Pres. class 4, d, dyeipnj).
Reduplication occurs in Homer in a great many Aorists : l-xk-^pdd-
o-v (Stem (ppad, Pres. class 4, h, ^pdZej, I indicate) ; m-TrXQ-o-v (Stem
TTiO, Pres. class 3, tthOo), I persuade) ; ire-TrdX-wv (Pres. class 4, c, TrdXXw,
I Tyrandish) ; Aor. Mid. 3 Sing. : TE-rdpTr-e-To {rkpir-o-^ai, I rejoice) ;
§ 260. III. THE FUTURE-STEM. 145
§ 259. 1. The Inflexion of the Future- Stem is the same
as that of the Present- Stem, i. e.^ that of the a Future is
the ordinary Inflexion, that of the contracted future is the
Inflexion of the contracted Present of £ Stems (§§ 231,
232, and 243).
§ 260. The <t Future forms the Future- Stem by adding
<r to the Yerbal-Stem: Xu, \va. All Stems ending in a
vowel or a mute have the a Future. The cr, according to
§ 48, with gutturals makes 5, with labials ;/», and admits
of no dentals before it (§ 49) : ay-w, / drive^ Fut. a^-w ;
ypa(j)'(i), J write, Fut. ypa^p-i*) ; a^-w, I sing, Fut. (ttr-w ;
(TTTtvS-w, liho, Fut. aTTEid-oj for o-TrtvS-orw (§ 50). About
Opi^w, Stem T pecj), Ovxpd), Stem rvcf), and others, see § 54.
2. Verbs of the second or extended class (§ 248) retain
the extended Stem also in the Future : Xt t/T-w, Xd\p-u) ; the
six verbs in eu) mentioned in § 248 show their strengthened
form in the Fut., though it is not seen in the Present : TrXtw,
TrXevaoiuai ; in like manner, icXatw brings out its Pure Stem
icXau in icXauo-a), and jcato) in Kavcrtsj (§ 253). About x^w,
see § 265.
3. Of verbs of the third or T class, and of those of the
fourth or I class (§ 249, etc.), the Pure Stem must be
found in order to form the Future : tvittu) (class 4), Pure
Stem TV IT, Fut. Tv\p<jj ; ^uXao-o-w, Pure Stem (pvXaK, Fut.
Stem <p I d (class 2), <pddofiai, Inf. Aor. 7re-(pid-s-(T9ai, also Fut. ttc-^i^-?}-
aofiai. Isolated Aorists are : £-/c8-/c(€)\-€-ro, he called, from KeXofiai ; tte-
(pv-o-v, I Mlled (Stem ^ e v) ; rk-rfi-o-v (I hit, Stem r e /w) ; rt-ray-wv
{seizing, Stem ray, Lat. tango). riv-iTr-aTr-o-v (T scolded, Pres. iv'nrTU)),
along with kv-kv'nr-o-v, and ripvK-aK-o-v (I kept &ac^, Pres. tjOVKw), have
the reduplication in the middle of the word. The reduplication in
this case every where belongs to the Tense-Stem, and, as in the Per-
fect-Stem (§ 273), is preserved in all the moods, in the Infin., and the
Participle. The Indie, may add the Augment or omit it before the
reduplication. (§ 234, D.)
§ 259. Dialects. — About the contraction, see § 243, D.
146 III. THE FUTURE-STEM. § 261.
(j)vXaK,w ; (f)paZ(j>), Pure Stem (p pa^, Fut. (l>pa(rii). Accord-
ingly^ verbs ending in the Present in -(raoj or -ttm gener-
ally make the Fut. in -gw, and those having the Present
in ^w generally have their Future in -o-w.
According to this rule, let the Future be formed of
iXiacFw, I roll / Krjpv(7<T(i), I jproclaim / irpaaad), I do /
o-\t'2aj, I split ; ^LKaZd), I judge ; ottXiZu), I arm ; and
let the Presents be found to the Futures dpv^w, (T(j)a^(i),
^laaopaiy Xoyttjopai.
Verbs with a dental character ending in the Present
in -aau) or -ttu), naturally (§ 250, Obs.) make the Future
in -(Tit) : ttXckho (Pres. TrXao-o-w, T shape), apfxoaw (Pres.
apfxoTTU), I fif) ; and, on the other hand, those with the
character y, which have the Present in -^w (§ 251, Ohs^,
make their Future in -^w : trrcva^w (Pres. (siival^u), I sigh) ;
GTi^w (Pres. (rrt^w, I jprick).
§ 261. Vowel^Stems have their vowels long before o- ;
a becomes a if preceded by f, t, or p (§ 41), in all other
cases it becomes x). Every other short vowel is changed
into the corresponding long one : ta-w, / leave^ ed(T-<jj ;
la-ojiaiy I heal, lacT-Ofim ; ^pa-w, I do, ^pdcr-ix) ; but rifxa-ii),
Tifiria-ix) ; /3oa-w, I cry out, Pot](T-oiuaL ; lyyva-(i), I hand
over, ^yyvrjcT-ii) ; iroii-u), 7rofr}o-w, ^ovXow, dovXtja-u).
The Stem x p « {xP^^>^ 9'^'^^ ^^ oracle ; xpao/uaiy Itcse)
exceptionally has t/ in the Future : \pi](Hi), '\pi](jop.ai ;
whereas aKpodofxai, T listen, has aKpoaaojuai,
Respecting the Future with a short vowel, see § 301.
§ 262. The contracted Future forms the Future- Stem
§ 261. Dialects. — The Ion. dialect has ri even after e,i,p: Trupijoofiai,
I shall endeavor. The Ep. dialect sometimes doubles the a when the
vowel is short : alSsaao/xai (aideoiJiai, I feel shame). The Hom. Futures
aXaTrd^w, TroXe/ii'^w, <TTV(pe\i^a), and others, with their Presents in -^w,
are explained in § 251, D.
§ 262. Dialects. — Stem Oep has in Hom. the Fut. Oepffofiai, Pres.
Osponai, I grow warm; Stem Kep (Pres. class 4, d, Keipao, I shave), Fut
KEpffo) ; Stem <pvp, Pres. (pvp(t),Imii:^ Fut. tpvpao).
§ 264. III. THE FUTURE-STEM. 147
by adding t to the Verbal- Stem : (pav, (pave. This form
of the Future occurs in Stems ending in X, iui,v,p; and
the Stem voioel is short : vejuw, I distribute^ Fut. ve\iu) ;
a^Vvw, I defend, a/uvvw. Verbs of the seventh class here
show their Pure Stem (§§ 252, 253) : /3aAXw, / throw,
paXu) ; (paivwj <f)avu) ; ktsivm, I hill, ktbvw ; (jiOeipio, (f)6epio ;
ayytWu), ayyeXw.
According to this rule, let the Future be formed of
<T0aAXw, I cause to fall; (rriXXw, I semi; p.aivo^ai, I rave ;
atpWf I lift ; and the Present (class 4) of (nrepw, irotKiXu),
trrifiavu), r}dvvLJ,
Exceptions. — The Stems /ceX (keXXw, class 4, c^ I Mock against) and
Kv p (Kvpeu), I meet) have the o- form of the Future : KaXaoj, Kvpffoj.
Obs. — The contracted Future is properly a peculiar fonn of the a
Future, for (pavs-oj has arisen from ^av-e-a-o) (§ 61, &), in which e
is the connecting vowel.
§ 263. Several Stems in c (Pres. tw), aS (Pres. a^w), and
iS (Pres. f^w), throw out the o in the Future. Those in s
and ad then contract the vowels £ and a with the connect-
ing vowel : TeXi-tj, I complete, rfXeV-w, rtXtw, rf Xw ; 1 Plur.
TfXto/xev, r £ X o u /i £ V (as in the Present) ; [5ij3a!^io, I hring,
(5ij3a(T-ii)y (5i(5au)y j3(j3w ; 1 Plur. j5if5aopev, /3</3w^£y. To
these also belongs IXckjo, eXw, 2 Sing. IX^g, 3 Sing. £X«, from
the irregular Present iXavvw,! d/'ive ; compare § 321, 2.
Stems in id after dropping the <t insert e, Avhich is con-
tracted with the connecting vowel : KOjUt'Sw, / carry, Fut.
Act. KOfxia-Wf Kopi'i-ii), Ko fxitjfl Plur. Kojuiiofiev, KOjuiovjuiev ;
Fut. Mid. KO fjiiov jjLai.
This form of the Future is called the Attic.
§ 264. Some verbs take an £ after the o- of the Future,
which is contracted with the connecting vowel : 7rv£w, I
hreathe. Stem irw, irvtvaovfiaL ; TrXew, I sail. Stem irXv,
§ 263. Dialects. — The Futures in aw in the Horn, dialect are treated
exactly like the Presents (§ 243, D. A.), hence tX6w, tXa^^, IXdq.
148 III. THE FUTURE-STEM. § 265.
TrXEVdovjuai along with TrX^vaojiaL ; (pavyii), I fl^^e^ Stem ^ u y,
(jiEv^ovfiaL and (pEvKofxai. This kind of Future, which oc-
curs only in the Middle voice with an Active meaning, is
called the Doric.
§ 265. Few verbs form their Future without any tense
sign : ^au), I^our, Fut. Act. x^^f Mid. x^ojiai, and so also
among the irregular verbs tdofiai, I shall eat (§ 327, 4),
and TTLoum, I shall drink (§ 321, 4).
§ 266. The Future Middle generally has a Middle sense,
but in many verbs it has a Passive, and in not a few an
Active meaning; the last is the case especially in verbs
denoting a bodily activity : r/^w, / sing ; aKova), I hear ;
cnravrdijjy I meet ; aTroXavu), I enjoy ; (dadiZtv, I walk
(f^adiovjuai) ; jSoaw, I call out / ytXaw, / laugh / oi/iwjw,
J bewail / aiyaio and o-twTraw, I am silent / cTrouSa^w, I
am zealous. Irregular verbs (§ 320, etc.) very frequently
have a Middle Future with Active meaning.
§ 265. Dialects. — The Horn. (3eiofiai or (ikofiai, I shall live, akin to
/3i6w, / live, is likewise formed without a tense sign.
§267.
IV. THE WEAK OR FI
ly. The Weak or FiRS^&e^fsf^S^H^^ v5^
§ 267. From the Stem of the Weak or First Aorist are
formed the Weak (or First) Aorist Active and Middle.
Pres.
\v-ixi
^aiv-oj
Stem
Xv
.Pure Stem (pdv
1. (T
Form.
2. Supplementary Form.
Stem of Weak Aorist Xva d
<pijvd
Active.
Middle.
Active.
Middle.
Indie.
i-Xv(Ta,Iho'sed.
e-Xvad-fiTjv^ I
loosed for myself.
showed.
t-<pr]vd-jxr]v
t-Xvaa-Q
l-Xvau)
t-(pi]va-g
k-(^r]V(i}
i-Xv(Te{v)
l-Xv<Ta-TO
e-Xv(Td-fie-9ov
t-(l)r]ve{v)
i-(pr]va-TO
k-pr]vd-fie-9ov
l-Xvaa-Tov
i-Xma-<j9ov
e-<l>r]va-TOV
i.-(pr]va-a9ov
h-Xv(jd-Tr]v
i-Xv(Td-a9i]v
l-<pT]vd-Tr]v
e-(l)r]vd-(x9t]v
i-Xvaa-fxev
t-Xv(Td-fie9a
l-(l>rjva-ixEv
i-(pT]vd-ixe-9a
i-Xvaa-re
e-Xv(Ta-(T9e
i-<prjva-TE
e<pr]va-(T9e
i-Xvaa-v
k-Xvaa-vTO
e-<pT)va-v
i-^{]va-VTO
Subjunct.
Xmu)
Xvcr<x)-fiai
(prjvoj
<pT)VU)-fiaL
XvayQ
Xvcry
<pf]vyQ
(pnvy
etc., lit
:e the Pres. Act. <
md Mid.
Optative.
Xv<Tai-fJLi
Xv(yai-fxr]v
(pr]vai-fit
^r]val-fir]V
Xvaai-Q or
Xvaai-o
^r}vai-Q or
<pr]vaL-o
XvauaQ
<pr]VHaQ
Xvaai or
Xvaai-TO
(prjvai or
(pr]vai-TO
Xvauiiy)
Xv(Tai-fie9ov
(l)r}veiE{v)
(j)r]vai-fis9ov
Xixjai-Tov
Xv(jai-a9ov
(prjvai-Tov
(pr}Vai-a9ov .
Xv(rai-rr}v
Xv<rai-(j9r]v
(pr]vai-Tr]v
(pT)vai-(T9r}P
XixTai-fxev
Xv(Tai-fie9a
^rjvai-fiev
(p7]vai-fii.9a
\v(Jai-TE
Xv(rai-<T9e
<pr]vai-TS.
<pr]vai-(79e
Xmai-ev or
Xvaai-VTO
(prjvai-ev or
(prjvai-vro
Xvaei-av
(prjvet-av
Imperat.
Xv(TO-V
Xvaai
(pfjvo-v
(l)i]vai
Xvad-TU)
Xv(Td-(79oJ
(j)r]vd-T(o
<pT]vd-(T9<x)
Xvcra-Tov
Xv(Ta-a9ov
(prjva-TOv
(pr]va-(r9ov
Xvtrd-Tiov
Xvad-<T9o}v
<p7]vd-TU)V
(pr]vd-a9iov
Xvaa-TS.
Xv(Ta-(T9e
<prjva-Te
<pr]va-(T9e
Xv(jd-VT(i)v or
Xv(Td-a9u)v or
^rivd-VTiov or
(privd-a9u)V or
Xvod-ruxjav
Xv(Td-(T9ij}(Tav
(pTfvd-Tiocrav
<j)rivd-(T9ioaav
Infinitive.
Xvaai
Xv(Ta-c9at
(pfjvai.
(pr)va-<T9ai
Particip.
Xvad-Q, daa, av
Xvad-fiivo-Q, T},
^T]vd-g, d(Ta, av
(ptjvd-fievo-g.
Gen. XvcravT-oQ
o-v
(pr]VavT-OQ
r],o-v
150 IV. THE WEAK OR FIRST AORIST-STEM. § 268.
§•268. The characteristic vowel in the inflexion of the
"Weak Aorist is a, which in the 3 Sing. Ind. Act. becomes
f , but every where else remains unchanged before the per-
sonal and modal signs. In the Subj. a is lengthened to
(1) and r?, whereby the endings become the same as those
of the Present. In the Optat. Act., the forms with h in
the 2 and 3 Sing, and 3 Plur. are more common than those
with ai : Xvaeiag, Xvaeitiy), Xvaeiav. In the 2 Sing. Im-
perat. Act. v is added, by which the a is rendered so ob-
scure as to become o: Xvao-v, and in 2 Imp. Mid. i is
added, which, with the a, makes ai. In the 2 Sing. Ind.
Mid. o- ig thrown out, as in the Pres. and Fut., so that
t-Xv(Ta{(j)o becomes tXuo-w, according to § 37.
Ols. 1. — Three forms of the Weak Aorist are the same, the 3 Sing.
Opt. Act, the Infin. Active, and the 2 Imperat. Mid. ; but in ac-
cent they differ ; for, as the ai of the Optat. is regarded as long
(§ 229), the first of these three fonns is always paroxytone :
\uaai, ypdxpai {ypa<pto^ I write), Traidevcrai (jrai^Evu), I educate) ; the
Infin. always has tlie accent on the penultima : Xvtrai, Traid^ixraty
ypdxpai ; the 2 Sing. Imperat. Mid., where possible, has the accent
on the antepenultima : jraidevaai, Xmai, ypdxpai.
Obs. 2. — The 2 Sing. Imperat. of the Weak Aor, Act. is the same in
form as the Neut. Partic. Fut. Xvaov, but in Verbal-Stems of more
than one syllable it differs from it by the accent : 7raiSev(7op, but
the Neut. Part. Fut. is Traidsmov (§ 229).
§ 269. The ct form of the Aorist differs from the Stem
§ 268. Dialects. — In the Ion. dialect, the 2 Sing. Indie. Mid. fre-
quently leaves the vowels uncontracted : tXixrao.
Some Aorists in Hom. tatoe the vowels o and e instead of a : Uov,
I came, l^eg ; if3r]<Tero (Jiaivo),! walk) ; Utrero (he set or went down, ^uw) ;
so also the Imperatives opo-eo, «me ; d^eTe,'bring; ol(Te,J)ring; \e^eo,lw
down ; TreXdaaerov = TreXdaarov, from rnXd^io, I approach.
§ 269. Dialects. — dcpvaaio,! draw water, has in Hom. the Fut. dipv^M,
but the Aor. d(i>va(Ta. Irregular Horn, forms without a *are : tx^va for
tx^vtja, from Pres. x^w, / pour; tKrja, 1 Plur. Subj. Krjofisv or Kdofi^v,
Imperat. Krjov or ksIov, Infin. Krjai or Kslai, from Pres. Kaio), I hum ; Stem
Kav (Att. tKav(Ta)', tcaeva, Tres. atvu), I drive away; the Infinitives
dXevaaOai or dXeaaOai, to avoid ; darkarrQai, from dareofiai, I distribute.
§ 270. IV. THE WEAK OR FIKST AORIST-STEM. 151
of the Future only by the addition of the a : Xu<t, Xvaa ;
ypa-ip, ypaipa ; 0i»Xa|, (l)v\aZa. Respecting the change of
vowels and consonants before <r, compare §§ 260, 261.
The irregular x^^ (§ ^^5) has the Aorist ex^a for exevcra.
Compare the irregularity in uira,! spoke / rjveyKa, I bore,
§ 327, 12 and 13.
§ 270. The Stem's in X, /i, v, p, forming their Future
without (7, reject this consonant also in the Weak Aorist,
which gives rise to the supplementary form, for thfe vowel
of the Stem is lengthened by compensation for the loss of
the (T.
a after t and p becomes d : Pres. Trepaivu) (class 4, d), I penetrate, Stem
TTEjOa v,Fut. TTEjoarcD, Aor. l-Trkpdva (§ 41) ;
otherwise ?; : Pres. (paivu) (class 4, d), Stem <pav, Fut.
(pdvuij Aor. i-(f)r}va.
£ becomes « : Pres. ayykWio (class 4, c), I announce, Stem
a y y 6 \, Fut. dyyeXw, Aor. ?yyyet\a.
" " Pres. vk}io) (class 1), / distribute, Fut. j/ejuw,
Aor. t-vHfia.
I " I : Pres. fcpiVw (class 4, <Z), I judge, Stem Kpt v,
Fut. KpXvCJ, Aor. t-KpLva.
V " -u : Pres. d^oi/w (class 4, ^), / defend, Stem
dfivv, Fut. dfivvd, Aor. ijfivva.
Obs. — The Stems d p (a^jow, / ^//i^) and d X (uWofiai, I lea])) have in
the Indie. ?/ because of the Augment : i)pa, r/Xd/jiriv, but in the
other forms a : dpag, dXdfievog. a instead of »/ occurs in some
elcra, I placed, is a defective poet. Aorist ; the Hom. Infin. is tWat,
Part. Eiaag and eWac (dveo-ag), 3 Sing. Mid. UcrcraTo. On the doubling
of the (T, see § 261, D. : Xoecrcra (XoP-e-ffaa) =: tXovaa (Xoixo, I wash), with
e inserted. (Compare § 35, Ohs.)
§ 270. Dialects. — 1. Homer makes the Aorist of several Stems in
X, ft, V, p with (T : tXaa, from tiXw, / ^;ress ; the defective diroepaa^ I
tore away.
2. In the ^ol. dialect, a is assimilated to preceding X, ft, v, p; an
example of it in Hom. is axpeXXa for uxptX-aa = Att. axpeiXa, Pres. 6<piXX(o,
I ina'ease.
3. The Augment of the Hom. Aor. yeipa, Pres. elpoj, I join, is quite
irregular. Compare § 275, D. 2.
152 IV. THE WEAK OR FIRST AORIST-STEM. § 271.
few verbs: Kepdaivio^ I gain ; opyaivo}, I cause anger; (rrjixaivo), I
indicate — karjfidva along with iarjfirjva. On the other hand, ?;
instead of d, in spite of the p, occurs in reTpaivuj, I hore, tre-
Tpriva.
§ 271. The Weak Aorist is the usual form in all verbs
whi(!h, accorcling to § 256, can not form the Strong Aorist,
that is, in all derivative verbs and in verbs of the first
class; but radical verbs of other classes, especially those
with Stems in X, ju, v, |0, also have the Weak Aorist.
The Weak Aorist Middle, like the Strong one, has only
a Middle sense, and is never Passive (§ 477, etc.).
Y. The Perfect-Stem.
§ 272. From the Perfect-Stem are formed the Perfect
and Pluperfect Active and Middle, and the third Future
{FutuTum exactum), which occurs only in the Middle.
§ 273. The essential characteristic of the Perfect-Stem
is the reduplication (compare Trc-Trrjy-a with Jjat. j>e-pig~i),
which generally takes the first place ; but in verbs com-
pounded with prepositions is put, like the Augment, after
the preposition (§ 238) : Xl-Xu-ica, but k-Xe-Xu-jca.
The reduplication belongs to the Perfect- Stem, and is
therefore, unlike the Augment, preserved in all the moods,
infinitives, and participles (compare 258, D.).
In verbs beginning with a consonant, it consists in the
initial consonant with e being placed before the Stem :
Stem Xu, Perfect-Stem XcXu, 1 Sing. Perf. Ind. Act.
Xl-Xu-jca.
§ 273. Dialects. — The reduplication can not, like the Augment, be
omitted in the Epic dialect; dky-jxaL forms an exception (3 Plur.
SeX-^-T^'-)^ though we also find ^s-^ey-fiai, I expect or receive, Part.
^e-8sy-ixhog, from Pres. Sex-o-fiat, (compare § 316, 34). Some verbs'
beginning with a vowel do not lengthen it in the Perfect in the New-
Ionic dialect.
273.
V. THE PERFECT-STEM.
153
â– I. Active.
Present Xv-ut
Stem Xv
Perfect Stem XeXw
Perfect : 1. Weak form
(paiv-io
Pure Stem ^ a v
TTC ?/ V
2. Strong fonn
Indie.
Xe-Xv-K-a, I have loosed.
Xe-Xv-K-a-g
Xe-Xv-K-e-(v)
Xe-Xv-K-a-Tov
Xe-Xv-K-a-TOV
Xe-Xv-K-a-jxev
Xe-Xv-K-a-TS
Xs-Xv-K-d-(n{v)
7r£-0)]v-a, I Mve appeared.
â– K'E-<pr}v-a-g
TrE-<l>riv-E{v)
TrE-<pf]V-a-Tov
TTE-tprjV-a-TOV
TrE-tprjv-a-fiEV
7rE-(pf]V-a-TE
7rE-(pr)V-d-(n(v)
Subj.
Xe-Xv-k-uj
XE-Xv-K-y-g
etc., like the Subj. Pre
TTE-^rjV-OJ
7rE-(pr]V-y-g
sent, § 232.
Optat.
Xs-Xv-K-oi-fii or XeXvkoiijv 7rE-(pT]V-oi-fii or irEiprjVoiriv
etc., like the Optat. Present, § 232.
Imperat.
Xe-Xv-k-e TTE-tpriV-E
etc., like the Imperat. Present, § 232.
Infin.
XE-Xv-K-EVai
TTE-^rjv-Evai
Partic.
M. XE-Xv-K-(ljg
F. Xe-Xv-k-vIu
K XE-Xv-K-6g
Crcn. XE-Xv-K-oT-og
(Inflexion, §147, 2.)
7rE-(pt}v-wg
TTE-ipriv-vla
TTE-^rjv-og
7rE-<pr]v-6T-og
Pluperfect.
Indie.
e-Xe-Xv-k-ei-v, I had loosed.
E-XE-Xv-K-El-g
e-Xe-Xv-k-ei
e-Xe-Xv-k-ei-tov
E-XE-Xv-K-El-rT]V
e-Xe-Xv-k-ei-^ev
e-Xe-Xv-k-ei-te
E-XE-Xv-K-E-crav or IXEXiiKEiaav
E-7rE-<pr}v-Ei-v, I had appeared.
E-TrE-<prjv-Ei-g
E-TTE-^rjV-Et
E-TrE-<pr]V-Ei-rQV
E-TTE-tprjV-Ei-TTJV
E-7rE-<j)T]V-El-flEV
E-TrE-<pr]V-El-TE
l-wE-(pr]V-E-(Tav or iTTEtprjvEKrav
G 2
154
V. THE PERFECT-STEM.
274.
II. Middle and Passive.
Perfect.
Indie.
•
Xe-Xv-fiaij I have loosed
for myself, or have
l)een loosed.
Xk-Xv-aai
Xk-Xv-rai
Xe-Xv-ne9ov
Xe-Xv-(T9ov
Xs-Xv-(t9ov
Xe-Xv-iJ.e9a
Xs-Xv-(T9e
Xk-Xv-vTai
Subj.
Xe-Xv-fjievog, a», yg, y, etc., § 315.
Optat.
Xe-Xv-fisvog, Hrjv, Eirjg, elij, etc., § 315.
Imperf.
Xk-Xv-<TO
Xe-Xv-aOo)
Xs-Xv-a9ov
Xe-Xv-a9ii}V
Xk-Xv-<T9e
Xe-Xv-(79(t)v or
Xe-Xv-(T9ioaav
Infin.
Xe-Xv-aQai
Partic.
Xe-Xv-fitvo-g, i], o-v
Pluperfect.
Indie.
e-Xe-Xv-fxijv, I had
hosed for myself
or had leen loosed.
t-Xk-Xv-ao
t-Xk-Xv-TO
l-Xe-Xv-fii9ov
i-Xe-Xv-aOov
t-Xe-Xv-<T9r]v
t-Xe-Xv-ixe9a
t-Xe-Xv-(T9e
e-Xs-Xv-vTo
Future Perfect.
Indie
. X£-Xo-(T-o-/iai, / shall have been loosed.
Xe-Xv-a-y, etc., like the usual Fut. Mid. (§ 258).
Opt. Xe-.
Kv-a-oi-fii]v
Inf. Xs-Xv-<T-e-<r6ai
Part. Xe-Xv-(r-6-inevo-Q
§ 274. The following points, however, are to be ob-
served :
1. An aspirate, according to § 53, a, is represented by the
§ 274. Dialects. — The full reduplication, in spite of the initial p,
occurs in the Horn. pE-pyTno-jjievo-g^ soiled ; on the other hand, the Per-
fects ffji-[xop-a (Pres. ^Eipofxai, class 4, d, I obtain) and ia-cv-nai (Pres.
(T6wfa), class 2, 1 hasten), instead of jxinopa, chvfiai, are treated like Stems
with p.
§ 275. V. THE PERFECT-STEM. 155
corresponding tenuis : Stem x^ P^t X^P^f ^ retreat, ke-
Xwprj-Ka ; Stem v, Ovw, I sacrifice, Tt-6v-Ka ; Stem <^ a v,
2. When a verb begins with two consonants, only the
first appears in the reduplication, and even this only when
it is a 7?itcte followed by X, fi, v, or p : Stem 7 ^ a ^, y/oa^w,
I write, yi-ypa^-a ; Stem tt X a 7, irXnaaii), I strike, iri-
TrXr/y-a ; Stem irvv, irviu), I hreathe, Tri-Trvev-Ka.
3. In every other case a Stem beginning with two con-
sonants takes only t for its reduplication: Stem ktev,
KTSivu), I hill, t-KTOv-a ; Stem ^ i] r e, Z^tco, I seeJc, E-Zr}rr}-Ka,
4. Stems beginning with p likewise have only e, after
which the p is doubled : Stem p i (p, piirTii), I throw, ip-pi(p-a
(compare §§ 62, 234).
Exceptions. — Verl3s beginning with yv, yX, and sometimes those
beginning with /3X, have a simple e for their reduplication. Stem
y V w, t-yv(D-Ka, I have come to Jcnow ; Stem (5}fa<TTe (jSXatrrw, /
germinate)^ i-^Xdarri-Ka. The Stems ktu (KTw/xai, I acquire) and
/ttva, on the other hand, have d-KTrj-fxai and fie-fxvT]-fjiai,Irem£m-
ler, me-min-i. Compare Tre-TTToj-Ka, I Jiave fallen, and Trk-Trra-fiai,
lam spread out, §§ 319, 3, 327, 15.
Instead of the reduplication ei appears in d-\T}(p-a, I liaxe taken (§
333, 35) ; u-\r\x-a, I have obtained (§ 333, 37) ; £i-Xoxa (from X^yw, /
gather) ; Si-ei-Xey-jxai (from ^taXeyojuai, / converse) ; u-pr]-Ka, I have
said (§ 337, 13) ; and in the aspirated e'i-nap-rai, it is fated, Stem
fiep.
§ 275. Initial vowels are lengthened as in the case of the
§ 275. Dialects. — 1. The Attic reduplication is more frequent in Ho-
mer, as: dp-rjpo-Tai, from dpoio, I plough; dX-dXrj-fiaL, from aXd-o-jxai,!
wander ; dp-rjp-a, I am joined, Stem d p ; u5-iod-a, I smell, o^w, compare
od-or ; o7r-w7r-a, I have seen, from the Stem 6 tt ; and with a v inserted :
kjxv-rjixv-Ka, from the Pres. i^fiv-oj, I droop the head. Herod, has dp-aiprj-
Ku, from aiptu), I take.
3. Instead of d-ioQa, Hom. also has l-ioQa, which is the only form
used by Herod. From the Stem kXir (originally PeXtt) i-oXir-a, I
hope; from Stem ipy (Pepy), i-opy-a, I have done. From the Stem
« p (Lat. sero), Pres. elpoj, 3 Sing. Pluperf. Mid. kpro, Part. Perf. Mid.
156 V. THE PERFECT-STEM. § 276.
Temporal Augment (§ 235) : Stem dpOo, opOio, I raise
ttp, iopO(i)-Ka. The verbs mentioned in § 236 have el here
also ; aiXiyfxai, Pres. iXiaauyyl roll.
1. Some Steins beginning with a, e, or o exceptionally take what is
called the Attic reduplication instead of the mere lengthening of
the vowel. This reduplication consists in the initial vowel with
its following consonant being repeated, and the vowel of the sec-
ond syllable being lengthened : Stem d \ i ^ (dXei'^w, class 2, /
anoint)^ dX-rjXicp-a ; Stem clko, dKovu), I hear, aK-rjKo-a (for dicrjKoPa,
§ 35, Ohs.), but Mid. fiKovcrfiai; Stem opvx (opvcraio, class 4, 1 dig)
6p-ojpvx-a; Stem dyep (dyeipu), claSS 4, d, I collect), dy-rjyEp-KU ',
Stem iXa (Pres. tXavpo), I drive, § 321, 2), IX-rjXd-Ka, Mid. IX-rjXa-
fiai ; Stem iXeyx, Pres. tXeyxo), I refute (class 1), Perf Mid. tX-rjXey-
fiai (compare § 286, Obs.) ; lyp-riyop-a, I am awaJce, from the Stem
eyep, Pres. lydpoj,! awaJcen (class 4, d), is ii-regular.
2. The Stems d X w (dXto-Koytiai, § 324, 17, / am made prisoner), d y
(dyvvfii, § 319, 13, Ihreah), eIk (not used in the Pres., § 317, 7),
and w V € (ojvkofiai, I luy) are likewise irregular ; but originally
they had an initial consonant (§ 34, D.) : c-dXw-Ka, e-dy-a, i-oiK-a,
k-MVi)-iiai ; tl!e Stem dvo ly (dvoiyu), I open) has dv-sipy-a. To
these may be added el-ojQ-a, I am accustomed, from the Stem i 9,
originally PeO (compare §§ 236, 237).
1. The Perfect Active.
§ 276. The terminations of the principal tenses are ap-
pended to the Perfect- Stem in the Indicative by means of
the connecting vowel a. The first person has no personal
ending at all ; in the third, a is changed into e. The Sub-
junctive, Optative, and the Imperative (which rarely oc-
curs) have the vowels of the Present ; the Infinitive ends
in -ivai (always paroxytone), and the Participle in -a»c,
-ma, -6q, Gen. -oroc (Stem or,% 188).
Upfisvog (compare § 270, D., 3). Th» following two are defective
Perfects in Horn. : dv-r]vo9-e{v) , it gushes forth ; kv-r}vo9-e{v), it is upon.
Both also occur as Pluperfects.
§ 276. Dialects. — In the Hom. dialect, the Part. Perf. Act. sometimes
has 0) instead of o : T£9vr]wTog =: Att. T£9vT]K6Tog (from 9vrj(7KU}, I die) ;
KEKXiiyioTeQ for KSKXTjyoTeg, calling, from Pres. fcXd^w. #
§ 278. THE PERFECT ACTIVE. 157
Obs. — The Subjunctive and Optative are not unfrequently formed
periplirastically by the Participle with the corresponding forms
of ei'/u/, / am.
§ 277. The Perfect Active is formed in two different
ways :
1. The Strong Perfect (Second Perfect)
is formed, like the Strong Aorist, directly from the Stem :
Stem IT pay, Pres. (Class 4, a) irpaacrw, I do, Perf. ttI-
TTpay-a. The Strong Perfect, like the Strong Aorist, oc-
curs almost exclusively in the case of radical verbs (§ 245),
and is generally the older and rarer form.
§ 278. The following changes of vowels are to be ob-
served in its formation :
a after p becomes d : Stdm Kpay, Pres. Kpd'Cuj, I
scream^ Perf. Ks-Kpdy-a.
a Otherwise becomes n : Stem irXdy^ Pres. TrXrjacro),
I strike^ Perf. Trs-TrXrjy-a.
Stem (pdv, Pres. (paivu), I
sTioic, Perf. Tri-<pT]v-a. Compare
£ becomes o : Stem (jTpe.^, Pres. arpk^u), § 40 to § 43.
/ tiirn^ Perf. t-<TTpo(p-a.
I " 01 : Stem XXtt, Pres. Xeittw, /
leave, Perf. Xk-Xonr-a.
V , " eu : Stem ^wy, Pres. (pevyoj, I
Jiee, Perf. 7rs-^evy-a.
The change of a into to is quite isolated : Stem pay,
Perf. ep-pioya, I am torn, Pres. pijyvv-pi (§ 319, 24), and
§ 277-280. Dialects.— The Hom. dialect is partial to the Strong Per-
fect ; the aspiration does not occur iij it : Stem kott (kStttu)), kekottojc-
The Part. Trt-^y^-dr-fL', from Stem (pvy ((pevyio), is quite an isolated
Hom. form. Hom. forms the Weak Perfect only froni Vowel-Stems,
and even here he has sometimes strong secondary forms : Stem v,
3 Plur. Perf. Act. rrE^vdcn = Att. TretpvKdcri, from ^vcj, I deget ; Stem kots
(koHu), I am angry), Part. Perf. k^kot^wq, § 317, D. In the Fcm. Part.
Perf. shortenings of vowels often occur : Stem d p, Masc. Part. Perf.
ctp-Tjp-ibg, joined, Fem. dp-dp-vlw, Stem 9aX (OdXXio, I dloom), Masc.
Part. Perf. te-OtjX-ojc, Fem. TE-GdX-vTa. The Perf. rk-rprjx-a, lam restless,
Pres. ^apdaaix), I disturb. Stem r [ a ] p a x, is irregular.
158 V. THE PERFECT-STEM. § 279.
SO also that of e into w : Stem f 6, Perf. u-wd-a, I am ac-
customed (§ 275). With the Attic reduplication, and in
some other cases also, there is no lengthening of the vowel:
Stem opv^y 6p''(jjpv)(-a, Pres. Ojouo-aw, T dig j yi-y pacji-af
from ypa(p(x), I write.
§ 279. Some Stems ending in the consonants k, 7, tt, /3,
change these into the corresponding aspirates, generally
without any lengthening of the vowels :
Stem KTjpvic, Pres. Krjpvaaio, I jyi'oclaimj Perf. ice-Kfjpvx-a.
" d y, " ayw, I lead^ " j}\;a (dyj70\;-a).
" K TT, " KOTrrw, / hew, " Ks-KO(p-a.
" /3\ai3, " fiXdTTToj.Ihurt, " (i'c-(i\d(p-a.
In spite of the aspiration, the vowels are changed in
Kt-Kko^-a, Stem k X £ tt, Pres. icXiTrrfj, -T steal / izi-Troptp-a,
Stem IT E fXTT, Pres. irijiTrw, I send / Tt-rpocp-Qi, Stem r peir,
TptTTii), I turn^ which is in form the same as the Perf. of
the Stem r/of^ (Pres. rpif^n,), I nourish)', u-\ox-a (com-
pare § 274), Stem X c 7, Pres. Xtyw, I gather.
■Obs. 1 . — Few verbs have both fonns with and without the aspirate :
the Stem Trpay (Pres. Trpdcrau), I do) has both Trk-Trpdy-a (intran-
sitive, //««i'6/«?r<^?) and Tra-TTpdx-a {transitive, I have done) ; Stem
c'lvoiy, Pres. dvoiyu), I opeii, Perf. dv-U^y-a (intrans., 7 stand ojjen)
and dv-£<^x-a (transit., I have ojyened).
2. The aspirated form of the Perfect, contrary to § 277, occurs also
in a number of derivative verbs : Stem dWay, dWdaaio, I
change^ from dXKog, Perf. ?y/\Xax-a.
§ 280. 2. The Weak Perfect (First Perfect)
is formed from the Stem by the insertion of k : Stem X i»,
Xi-Xv-K-a. The Weak Perfect is the more recent form,
and with all Yowel- Stems it is the only one in use, while
it is the more common with Stems ending in r, S, 0, and
those in X, jm, v, p.
Obs. — The only complete Strong Perfect of a Vowel-Stem in Attic
prose is dKrjKoa (§ 275, 1) ; but compare § 317.
§ 281. In regard to the vowel, the Weak Perfect follows
the (T Future (§§ 260, 261): Stem dp a, dpdcrw, di-^pj^-Ka ;
§ 283. THE PLUPERFECT ACTIVE. 159
Stem T I fia, riiur](7(i)f TETifirfKa ; Stem TT X u, irX^vaw, ni-
TrXfuica ; Stem tt t (Trtt^w, / jyersuade), tte/o-w, iriirsiKa.
\iijj, I j[)Our^ Perf. KiyvKa^ is an exception (§ 265). For
other exceptions, see J 301.
Stems in r, ^, % throw out these consonants before a,
without any other change : Stem ic o ju t ^, KOfiiZw, I carry,
KeKO/uuKa.
§ 282. The monosyllabic Stems in \, v, p, having e in the Stem
syllable, change this e in the Weak Perf. into a : Stem (tts\,
GTsWoj^ I send, Perf, t-oTaX-Ka ; Sterii tpO^p, (pOeipo, I destroy, Perf.
t-(p9ap-Ka. Several in v throw out the v: Stem Kptp, Kpivio, 1
judge, Perf. ke-kpI-ku ; Stem kXXv, kXIvu), I incline, Perf. ick-KXX-Ka ;
Stem ttXvv, ttXvvio, I icash, Perf. Trk-TrXv-Ka; Stem rev, re/vw, /
stretch, Perf Ts-rd-Ka. Wherever v is not thrown out before k, it
becomes, according to § 51, a nasal y : Stem ^av, (paivm, I show,
Perf, Tra-(pay-Ka.
Other Stems of this kind, and some in /i, admit of metathesis (§ 59) :
Stem (iaX, fiaXXw, I throw, Perf ^t-jSXr}-K-a ; Stem ku^i, Kafivoj, I
grow tired, Perf. Ke-Kfirj-K-a (§ 321, 9).
2. The Pluperfect Active.
§ 283. The Pluperfect takes the Augment before the
Perfect- Stem ; its terminations are those of tlie historical
tenses. Between the Stem and the termination the diph-
thong H steps in, which in the 3 Plur. is reduced to e.
Obs. — The 3 Plur. in uaav is rare and more modern.
The Temporal Augment of verbs beginning with a vowel
is not recognizable, because their Perfect-Stem has already
§ 282. Dialects. — The Hom. fik-n^Xio-Ka for fie-fiXu)-Ka, from the Stem
^ X (Aor. tfioXou, I went), is explained by metathesis. Compare §§51,
D., 324, 12.
§ 283. Dialects. — The Ionic dialect has the antiquated endings of
the Pluperf : 1 Sing, ea, 2 Sing, eag, 3 Sing. €f(i/), contracted et, eiv,
or t] • the 2 Plur, New-Ion. ea-re. Hom. he-Orj-rr-ea, I was astonished ;
3 Sing. dedH7rv{]K-eiv, from dmrvea}, I dine.
t-[i6ixT]K-ov (Perf. ixefirjKa, I hleat) and i}vioyov, along with rjvojym (Perf.
dv(oya, I compel), are formed quite irregularly, according to the man-
ner of Imperfects.
160 V. THE PERFECT-STEM. § 284.
a long vowel:. Verbal-Stem ay, ayu), I drive, Perfect-
Stem 77 X, ]]x-H-v. The Syllabic Augment is often omit-
ted. The 1 and 3 Sing, in the older Attic dialect have t?
instead of u and uv, as c-XeXvk-tj.
The formation of the Pluperfect is exactly the same as
that of the Perfect, and, like it, it is either strong or weak,
and has the vowel long or short, or unchanged.
§ 284. 3. The Perfect Middle and Passive
c^n be formed only in one way, that is, by appending the
personal endings of the principal tenses of the Middle, with-
out any connecting vowel, to the Perfect-Stem, i. e.^ to the
reduplicated Yerbal-Stem : Stem X v, Perf. Mid. Xi-Xv-jiai,
The Infinitive and the Participle always have the accent
on the penultima : XeXvaOai, XeXvfiivog ; Stem waidev,
Treirai^tiKrdai, from irai^evu), T educate.
§ 285. The vowels are treated in the same way as in the
Weak Perfect : Stem t i^a, TSTifirjKa, TSTifirnmm ; Stem ttX 0,
iriiruKa, irfTreKTiuiai ; Stem (pO e p, ttpOapKa, ttjiOapiuLai ; Stem
^ a X, j3t/3XrjK:a, jStjSXr/^at. The verbs rpi^n), I nourish,
Tpiwii), I turn, and crTpiclxx), I turn, also take a instead of c :
Ti-Opa/ui-fjiai, Tb-TpajJi-nai, hGrpaji-fxai.
§ 286. The final Consonants of Consonantal- Stems change
according to the general laws of sound (§§ 45-49) :
§ 284. Dialects. — In the Horn, dialect, the a of the 2 Sing. Perf. and
Pkiperf. Mid. is sometimes thrown out between two vowels : fxsfiyT]ai
=: HBfivT]<7ai (meministi)^ contracted fj-sfivy; so also in the New-Ionic
the Imperat. fisfiveo for fisfivrjao.
§ 285. Dialects. — The Hom. ■n-e-Trpw-rai, Stem tt p (Strong Aorist
tTTopov, I gave), is explained by metathesis. The following have a
short vowel : rkrvyixaL, from Tevx(t), I prepai^e, 3 Plur. Tsrevxarai ; tte-
^vyfitvog, from ^ewyw, IJiee; ttjavfiai, from csvoy^ITiasten ; v instead of
ty : TT^.-Trvv-fxai, from Trvew, § 248.
§ 286. Dialects. — The of the Stem Kopv9 (icopvaaa), I arm) remains
unchanged in Homer : Ks-KopvO-ixevoQ. aicrxvvio, I put to shame^ has
yaxv^inai.
§ 287. . THE PERFECT MIDDLE. 161
1. Before all terminations beginning with ju
every guttural becomes y : Stem ttXek, ttXsku}, I twist, Trs-TrX^y- fiai ;
" dental " o- : ^tem ttiO, irei9a), I persuade, TrE-Treia-fisOa;
" labial " fi : Stem y pa<p, ypd^io, I write, ye-ypafi-[isvog.
Obs. — When a guttm-al or labial is iDreceded by a nasal, the latter
is thrown out before ^ : Stem KUfiir, Ka/iTrroj, / hend, KtKaiifiai ;
Stem sXeyXj thlyxoi, I refute, eXkXeyfxai (§ 275, 1). Some Stems
in V, by way of exception, do not change the v before fi into (x,
but into fi : w^y^/uat, from o^vpm, I sharpen; those which throw
out the V in the Perf Active do the same here (§ 282) : KkKpijiai
(compare irk-ipacr-nai, from the Stem ^dv): airevdoj, I offer a liba-
tion, Fut. (nreiGuj, has taTruajiai.
. Before o-
every guttural becomes k, and this with <r becomes K : Tre-TrXe^at ;
" labial " tt, " " " ^: yi-ypaif^ai',
" dental is thrown out : Te-ireKrai.
3. Before r
every guttural becomes k : Trs-TrXcKrai ; Stem \ e y, Xs-XeK-rai ;
" labial " tt : ye-ypaTrrai ;
" dental (exc. v) " o- : Trs-Treta-Tai (Stem (pav, Trk-<pav-Tai).
4. The or of gQ after consonants (§ 61) is dropped, and
then
every guttural becomes x • 7re-TrXex-9ov for TTE-TrXeK-aOov ;
" labial " <p : ys-ypa^-Oe for ye-y pacp-aOe ;
" dental (exc. j/) " o- : Tre-Treitr-Oai for Tre-TreiO-aOai.
V, X, and /o remain unchanged before the which has
arisen from gQ : Stem a v, irEcpavOat ; Stem a 7 7 e X,
?777£X0a(.
§ 287. The ending vrai of the 3 Plur. is irreconcilable
with Consonantal- Stems. Sometimes the Ionic arai takes
§ 287. Dialects. — In the Ion. dialect, the forms arai and uto for the
3 Plur. are common : Hom. has ^E-^Xr]-aTai (j3dXXcj, I throw), TrEiroTrjaTo
{irordofiai, I fiutter), dedaiuTai {daiio, I divide), tpxarai, i'tpxaro (dpyu), I
shut in, § 319, 15); in New-Ionic, TrapecTKEvddaro {irapaaKEvdZio, I pre-
pare), KSKoafiUtTai (Kotr/xeu), I adorn). Three Homeric forms insert S :
ippd-d-arai (paivio, I besprinkle), dKr]XE-5-aTo (dxvvfiai, I am grieved),
tXrjXd-S-ciTo (Stem IXa, kXavvio, I drive) ; IprjpsSaTai, from epeidcj, I sup-
port, is irregular.
162
V. THE PERFECT-STEM.
288.
its j)lace (§ 226, D.), before which y, k, j3, and tt are aspi-
rated : y^-ypcK^-arai, r^-ray^-araL (Stem ray, Taaaii), I cor-
range)^ T£-Tpi(f)-aTaL (Stem Tpiji, rpif^u), I rich). But the
common practice is to use the periphrasis by means of the
Participle with Li-cri(v) : y^ypajifiivoi tWiv. Compare Lat.
scrijpti sunt and § 276, Obs.
The following paradigms supply examples of the above-
mentioned changes.
Perfect Middle and Passive.
Guttural Stems.
Dental Stems.
Labial Stems.
TTi-TrX^y-Hai
TTE-irXe^ai
TTE-irXeK-Tai
Tre-TrXey-fieOa
TTE-TrXex-Oe
Tre-TrXey-fisvoi doi
TrE-Treia-fxai
TTE-ireiaai
7re-Trei(T-Tai
7r€-7rct(T-/x£0a
7r£-7r€l(7-06
7re-7rei(T-fxsvoi elai
yk-ypan-fiai
yk-ypa-^ai
yk-ypaTT-rai
ye-ypdix-fjieOa
y'E-ypatp-dE
yE-ypafi-fiEvoi dai
288. After Vowel-Stems, a is frequently inserted before the ter-
minations beginning with ^ and r, but more especially when the
Stems have the vowel short : Stem r e X e, teXm, I complete, Perf.
TE-TEXe-cr-fiai ; Stem c tt a, <nrdio, I draw, 3 Sing. 'i-aira-a-Tai ; but
it also occurs in not a few Stems with long vowels and diph-
thongs: dKovit},niear,i]Kov(Tiiai\ keXevio, I order ; kvX'uxt, I roll ; Xevcj,
I stone to death ; ^voj, I j^oUsh ; Tra'nx), I strike ; ttXeio (TrfTrXeyorai),
/ sail; Trpioj, I saw ; adio, I shake ; %ptw, / anoint; \l/avio, I touch.
Others fluctuate : kXc/w or kX^'w, I close; Kpovu), I push.
289. The Subjunctive and Optative are generally formed by peri-
phrasis with the Participle and the corresponding forms of dfiL
(Compare Lat. solutus sim, essem.) These moods are but rarely
evolved out of Vowel-Stems themselves : KTdofiai, I acquire, k'e-
KTrj-fxai, Subj. Ke-KToj-fiai, KE-Kry, KE-KTij-Tai, Opt. Ke-KTt^-fitjv (from
KE-KTaoi-firiv), Ke-KTtp-To; besides these, we also have KSKTyfirjv, yo,
yro.
§ 289. Dialects. — The Horn. Subj. from Stem f^iva (fiEfivrjuai, memini),
1 Plur, /xefiVMfieQa (New-Ion. /xe/ivew^e^a), Opt. ixsjxvyjfirjv ; 3 Sing. XeXiiro,
3 Plur. XeXvvTo, instead of XeXv-i-ro^ XeXv-i-vro, § 28.
§ 291. THE FUTURE PERFECT. 163
§ 290. 4. The Flujperfect Middle and Passive
differs in every verb from the corresponding Perfect only
by the addition of the Augment and the personal endings,
which are those of the historical tenses. Respecting the
3 Plur. in vto and aro, and their places being supplied by
periphrasis, see § 287, which is here applicable also.
§ 291. 5. The Fttture Perfect or Futurum Exactmn
adds cr to the Perfect-Stem with the Inflexion of the Fu-
ture-Middle ; the o- produces the same changes in the pre-
ceding consonants as in the ordinary Future Middle : Tra-
irpa^ETaL (Stem irpay, irpacrcrii), J do), it will have heen
done ; yey paipETui (Stem y pacj), ypacjxx), I write), it will
have been ivritten.
There are two isolated Future Perfects with Active
endings : idrriZu) (§ 311), I shall stand, and rtOvn^cj (§ 324,
4), I shall he dead, from the Perf. forr/zca, rWvrjKa.
Otherwise its place in the Active is supplied by the Part.
of the Perf with the Fut. of tt/xf, I am {taojuai) : XsXvKtog
taofxai, I shall have loosed (solver o\
164
VI. THE STRONG PASSIVE STEM.
292.
VI. The Strong Passive Stem;
§ 292. From the Strong Passive Stem are formed the
Strong or Second Aorist, and the Strong or Second Future
Passive.
Present : tpaivu)^ Pure Stem ^ a r, Strong Passive Stem <pavt.
1. Strong or Second Aorist Passive.
h<f>di^r}-v, I ap-
tpavut
^aveirj-v
peared.
d
k-<pdvT}-Q
<u
<pavy-g
^aveiTj-c
â– S
h-<pavr)
•S
<l>avy
.^
<paveirf
s
ir<pavri-TO%'
^
<pavrj-TOV
tl
<pavdr]-Tov or (pavelrov
^
i-<pavrf-Tr]v
;f?
^avfj-TOV
&
<paveif}-TTjv or <paveiTr]v
1— 1
t-<f>dvrj-ixtv
13
<pavCj-/xEv
<l>avdr}-^w or ^aveifxev
e-^dvT]-Te
(pavij-TE
(j)avdT]-Te or ^aveire
k-<pdvr]-aav
(l>av&-ai{v)
(pavHTi-aav or <paveiev
(pdvr]-Qt
Inf.
^avrj-vai
Part.
(pavdg, ^aveiaa, <j)avsv
g?
<pavr]-Tu)
Gen. <pavk-VT-OQ
•43
^dvrj-Tov
^avr}-T(i)v
<l>dvri-T£
>5
<pavri-Tio(Tav OV
2. >5
trmg or Second Future Passive.
Ind.
(pavri-aofiai
>|
Opt.
(pavrj-croifiijv
-*etc., tlie same as the Future Middle.
Inf.
(pavTj-ffEaOai
Part.
^avr]-o6fiivoQ^
ri,ov)
§ 293. The personal endings of the Aorist Passive are
of an Active nature, those of the Future Passive of the
nature of the Middle. They are appended, as in the Sec-
§ 293. Dialects.^The Hom. dialect lias the shorter ending ev in the
3 Plur. Ind. Aor. Pass. : e-cpdve-v or ^dve-v ; rpd(pE-v = lTpd<pt}(Tav, from
r/o£0a>. The Ion. dialect leaves the e in the SuIdj. uncontracted : /jXye-o}
(jiicryu), I mix). Homer often lengthens the e in the Subj., sometimes
to et : ddfid-b) = dafiio, Stem da ft, Pres. dd/jivTiixi, I tame; and some-
§ 295. VI. THE STRONG PASSIVE STEM. 165
ond Principal Conjugation (§ 302), to the Stem without a
connecting vowel, and the e of the Stem is lengthened in
the Indicative and Imperative to ??. In the Sjibjunctive,
the £ is contracted with the vowels of the Subjunctive:
(^avi'U), 0avw ; in the Optative, the e, combined with the
modal sign ir], becomes ht] : 0av£-trj-v. The Infinitive al-
ways has the circumflex on the penultima, and the Par-
ticiple in the Nom. Sing. Masc. the acute on the last.
§ 294. The Strong Passive Stem, just like the Strong
Aorist Active and Middle (§ 256), is formed very rarely
from derivative Stems ; but it occurs in verbs of all class-
es, even the first (§ 247), f being added to the pure Yerbal-
Stem : Pres. paiTT-ii) (class 3, / sew), Pure Stem pa^.
Strong Passive Stem pa(p£, Aor. Pass. lppa(l>r\-v ; (j(j)aTTco
(class 4, / slaughter), Pure Stem (T<l>ay, Strong Passive
Stem (T((>ay s, Aor. Pass. i(T(j)ayr}-v, Put. Pass. (T^ayr}-(Toiuiai ;
Pres. ypaiji-w (class 1), Strong Pass. Stem y patpe, Aor.
Pass. lypa^i]'V. The Strong Passive Aor. occurs only in
such verbs as have no Strong Active Aorist. The only
exception is Tplirtj, I turn, Aor. Act. i-Tpair-o-v, Pass.
l-TpCLTTTl-V.
Obs. — By way of exception, ^XXayj/v is formed from the derivative
Stem a X X a y, Pres. aXXdaao), I change.
§ 295. As in the Strong Aorist Active (§ 257), the c is
sometimes changed into a : kXItt-t-w, T steal, e-K\a7rrj-v ;
ariXkh), I send, l-(TTa\r]-v ; Tpit^i-tx), I nourish, l-rpdcprj-v ;
irXiK-u), I twist, l-Tr\iKr]-v and l-TrXaKr^-v ; ttXtjo-ctw, I strike,
times to ri : (pdvrj-y = <pdvy. In the Dual and Plur., the modal vowel
is shortened where this lengthening of the. e occurs: dajxd-tTE (for
daiJ.er]TE, Att, dafiriTe). In the Infinitive we find the Horn, fievai or fxev :
fiiyr]fiEvaij dafiijfiEv.
§ 295. Dialects. — Homer here also employs metathesis (§ 59), as in
the Strong Aor. Act. and Mid. (§ 357, D.) : Pres. rlpTr-w, / delight, Aor.
Pass. e-TdpTTTi-v, Subj. Tpd7rk-(»y 1 Plur. Tpd-n-eiofiev (gaitdeamm), Inf.
Tpdirrj-nevat.
166
VII. THE AVEAK PASSIVE STEM.
296.
has t'7r\riyr}-v, 7r\r]yr]-(TOfiai,hut in composition t^-e-irXayri'V,
eK-7rXay{}-<Toiuai ; the Pure Stem of verbs of the second
class here reappears: (nV-w (Stem a air, I corrupt),
£-o-a7rrj-v ; rrjK-u) (Stem tclk,! melt), e-TaKrj-v ; plu) (Stem
p V, I flow), l-f}pvr)-v, pvrj-GOfjiai.
VII. The Weak Passive Stem.
§ 296. From the Weak Passive Stem are formed the
Weak or I^irst Aorist and ths Weak or First Future
Passive.
Pres. Xuw, Stem Xj;,Weak Passive Stem \vBe.
1. Wealc or First Aorist Passive.
Ind. i-Xv9i]-Vj I
was loosed.
i-\vdt]-Q
Subj. XvOL
\vBy-Q
Opt. \v9eir}-v
XvOeirj-Q
etc., like the Strong or Second Aorist Passive.
Imp. Xv9n-Ti
Xv9f]-r(o
Inf. Xv9i)-vai
Part. Xv9e'i-q, Xv9iiaa, Xv9kv
Gen. Xv9kvT-o£
etc., like the Strong or Second Aorist Passive.
2. TTm/j or First Future Passive.
Ind. Xv9f]-(T0fiai
Opt. Xv9ri-(ToiiXT]v
Inf. Xv9r}-aEa9ai
Part. Xv9r}-(r6iiEvo-Q^ »;, o-v
§ 297. The inflexion of the Weak Passive Stem is en-
tirely like that of the Strong. Eespecting the r of XvOrj-n,
instead of XvOr}-Oi, see § 53, c.
§ 296. Dialects. — The Weak Put. Pass, is wanting in the Homeric
dialect. *
§ 297. Dialects. — Respecting the inflexion, see § 293, D.
§ 298. Dialects. — The Hom. dialect after some Vowel-Stems inserts
V before 9: d]XTrvv-v-9r] (Stem tt w, Trvku), I breathe), idpv-v-9ri Qdpixo,
Isetjirm), and changes the e of the Stem ^aev (<paeiv(jj, (paivM^I Tnalce
appear) into a, ^adv9r]v.
§ 299. VII. THE WEAK PASSIVE STEM„ 167
§ 298. The Weak Passive Stem is formed from the
Yerbal-Stem by appending the syllable 0f. Before this
syllable the vowels of Vowel-Stems are lengthened as in
the Future, the Weak Aorist Active, and the Perfect :
Ti/na, IrifjirtOriv ; irtipa, eTreipaOiiVy I tried. As to the ex-
ceptions, see § 301. As in the Perfect Middle, a is inserted
before 0, especially after short vowels, but often also after
long ones : l-reXi-dSrjv, from rsXtw, / complete ; e-KsXtv-cr-
Orfv, from Kf Xeuw, / order / and this is the case in the verbs
mentioned in § 288, and especially in ytXaw, / laugh, lye-
XcktOtjv ; ^pd(i)y I do, iBpdaOrjv ; wavcj, I cause to cease,
tTravcrOriv, but also liravQnv, The Aor. Passive of (tw^w,
I save, on the other hand, is formed from the shorter Stem
Gil) without the o- : e(Toj6rjv.
As in the Weak Perfect Active and the Perfect Middle,
the £ before X, v, p is sometimes changed into a : Stem rev
(rdvd), I stretch), l-TciOri'V (compare § 282).
The changes of the consonants before are explained
by the laws of sound (§ 45) : Stem tt pay, irpdcrao), I do,
e-7rpdx'0r}-v ; Stem \pev^, \pevdo), I deceive, t-^eva-Orj-v ;
Stem TTCjUTT, Tre/unro), 1 send, l-Treiu(f)-9r}-v. Kespecting
Wpi(f)9riv (Pres. Tpi(j)(i)), £0a<^0rjv (Prcs. OdirTii)), see § 54,
Ohs., and respecting triOriv, lTv9r)v (Stems Be, Ov), see
§53, J.
§ 299. The Weak Aorist Passive and the Weak Future
Passive are, on the whole, more common than the Strong,
and in the case of derivative verbs, as of nearly all Yowel-
Stems, they are the only customary forms of the Aorist
and Future Passive.
There are some primitive verbs of which both Passive
Stems are in use : Stem j3Xa/3, Pres. j3Xa7rra>, I hurt, Aor.
Pass. £/3Xa/3»]v and £/3Xa00rjv.
168 verbal adjectives. § 300.
Verbal Adjectives.
§ 300. The Verbal Adjectives are a kind of Passive Par-
ticiples.
Pres. Xvu), Stem X v, i. Xv-rog, 17, 6v, loosed, capable of
being loosed.
2. Xv-rto-c, a, ov, to be loosened,
solvendu-s, a, um.
The First Verbal Adjective is formed by means of the
syllable to (Nom. ro-c, rr], to-v) from the Verbal- Stem, and
has the meaning either of a Participle Perfect Passive,
Xv-T6-g=solu-tu-s, or of possibility, capable of being loos-
ened.
The Second Verbal Adjective is formed by means of
the syllable rio (Nom. rto-g, Tta, rio-v), which is never con-
tracted, from the Verbal- Stem, and has the meaning of
necessity, like the Latin gerundive : Xv-rto-g, one who is
to be loosened / XvAov tart, loosening' must take place,
solvendwn est.
The vowels preceding the r are in general treated ex-
actly in the same manner as in the Weak Passive Aorist ;
(T is inserted in the same cases as in the Aor. Pass. : tsXs-
a-rog, KsXEv-fT-riov, The consonants before r are treated in
accordance with the laws of sound : irpaK-ro-g (Stem tt pay,
Pres. wpaaaio) ; jpaTT-T6-g{ypa(l)(jj) ; Ko^ut cT-r£0-v( Stem KOfxtd,
KojxiZtjjyl carry).
Verbs which leave their Stem Vowel short in the forma-
tion of their Tenses.
% 301. The Vowel remains short throughout in :
§ 300. Dialects. — Zoa-rb-Q is derived by metathesis (§ 59) from the
Stem ^ € p (^£|oa>, I flay).
§ 301. Dialects. — The H(fm. dialect lpd(i),Ilove, Aor. Mid. '^pdffdfirjv ;
djOKEw, / ward off, ^pKE<ra ; Kopkio, I satisfy, sKopeffa ; kotsoj, I grndge^
KOTeaaaro ; epvoj, I draw, dpvaa. On the usual doubling of the a after
short vowels Opd(T<raro, Ipvaaaro), sec § 261, D.
§ 301.
VERBS WITH A SHORT VOWEL. 169
â– yeXdujj
Ilatcgh,
Fut. yeXaffOfiai,
Aor. Act. tysXdffa,
Aor. Pass. lyeXd(T9r]v,
Fut. Pass. y^XatjQriaofiai.
9Xd(o,
Isqiteeze,
Fut. eXdao),
Aor. Act. WXaaa,
Verb. Adj. eXatrrof.
kXciu),
I break,
Fut. KXdau),
Aor. Pass. tKXdaQrjv,
Perf. Mid. KEKXafffiai.
(TTraw,
I draw,
Fut. OTrciffio,
Aor. Act. to-rrdaa,
Aor. Pass.
kff'n'daOrjv, Perf. Act. itnrdKa,
Perf. Mid.
iairaafiai, Verb. Adj. trTraorroc.
XaXdo),
I slacken.
Fut. xa^affoj.
Aor. Pass. £x«^«<y^^»'-
aideofiai
, I dread,
Fut. aide(TOfiai,
Aor. Pass. yUaOriv (338),
Perf. yde(Tfiai.
uKeofiai,
I heal,
Fut. aKSffOfiai,
Aor. TfKEadfirjv.
dXew,
I grind.
Fut. dXeffio (w),
Perf. Act. tiX^Xem,
Perf. Mid. dXr]Xe<Tfiai.
dpKSUJ,
I satisfy,
Fut. dpKsaoj,
Aor. Act. fipKiaa.
ifieu),
I vomit.
Aor. Act. ijfieaa.
Ke<o,
I seethe,
Fut. ^£(rw,
Aor. Act. t^€(Ta,
Verb. Adj. ?e(rroc.
U<o,
I scrape.
Fut. ^S(T(0,
Verb. Adj. ^earof.
rfXew,
Ijinish,
Fut. TeXkao) (w),
Aor. Act. InXeffa,
Aor. Pass. IreXsaBriv,
Verb. Adj. rtXEffrof,
Perf. Act. TsHXeKa,
Perf. Mid TETeXetrfiai,
dpoo),
Iplow,
Fut. dpoffcj.
Aor. Act. ijpoffa,
Aor. Pass. rip69rjv.
dpvio,
I draw.
Fut. dp6(Toj,
Aor. Act. ijpvaa.
addit. form dpvroj.
eXicvu), I draw, # Aor. Act. 6iX<n;<Ta.
Fut. Pass. iXKV<T9r)ffOfiai, * Perf. Act. eiXicvKa,
Perf. Mid. elXKvafiai.
TTTVii), I ^pit, Aor. Act. iTTTvaa.
Verb. Adj. Trrvtrrof.
2. 7%6 'y^j^eZ ^5 Zc>7i^ in the Weak Aor. Act., and short
in the Perf., the Aor. Pass., and the Verbal Adjective in
Sk(jJ, I Und, Fut. drjffio, Aor. Act. edri<Ta,
Perf. Act. dedeKu,
Aor. Pass. idWrjv,
Verb. Adj. ^erdf,
Perf. Mid. deSeiiai,
3 Fut. SedrjtTOfxai.
H
170 VERBS WITH A SHORT VOWEL. §302.
0vb)^ I sacrifice, Fut. 0i><rw, Aor. Act. tQvtra,
Perf. Act. TsOvKa, Aor. Pass. iTvQrfv,
Perf, Mid. TsQvfiai.
\vw, I loose, Fut. X6<rio, Aor. Act. tXvffa,
Perf. Act. XeXvKa, Aor. Pass. IXvOrjv,
Verb. Adj. Xvrog, Perf. Mid. XeXvfiai.
3. The Vowel is short in the Future and Weak Aorist
Active and Middle, but long in the Perfect, Aorist Pas-
sive, and Verbal Adjective ofKa\i(o,Icall, icaXI(Tw, KiKXriKa,
Ik:X/;0jjv, K\r}r6g ; alviu), J^raise, has alvicra), yvEKa, yvWrjv,
alviTogy but Perf. Mid. rjvrtfxai.
4. iroOlu), I long for ; Trovtw, I toil ; and ^uw, / s^7^^,
fluctuate between the short and long vowels : TroOirTOfim
and 7ro6rj(jijj ; wovicrw, lTrovr\aafir]v ; Siiaw, Aor. Pass. IdvBriv,
Chap. XI. — Second Principal Conjugation,
or Verbs in jut.
Preliminary Observations.
§ 302. The Second Principal Conjugation differs from
the First only in the inflexion of the Present and Strong
AoristStems, and in the case of a few verbs also in the
Perfect and Pluperfect Active.
The special terminations of this conjugation are :
1. The 1 Sing. Pres. Ind. Act. retains the ancient fit : ^j;-/i«, / say
(§ 226).
2. The 3 Sing. Pres. Ind. Act. retains the ancient <n{v) (for ri) :
<prjm{v) (§ 226).
3. The 3 Plur. Pres. Ind. Act. inserts the vowel a before the termi-
§ 302. Dialects. — The Horn, dialect often has the ending aOa in the
2 -Sing. Ind. Act. : TiOrj-aOa, thou puttest ; i-<pri-a6a ; and fiEvai or fiev
instead of vai in the Inf. : ^d-fievai, (pd-fiev ; and a short v instead of
the (Tav of the 3 Plur. of the Preterite : i-^a-v.
The Horn, dialect sometimes lengthens the Stem-vowel in the Subj.
and shortens the Modal-vowel as in the Aor. Pass. (§ 398) : 'tofiev —
'jw/iEv (eamus).
§ 304. SECOND PRINCIPAL CONJUGATION. 1^1
nation ai (for vn) (§ 226, compare Dialects), and this a is lengthened
by compensation (J-aai{v)^ they go, from the Stem /), and unites with
the a of the Stem : ^dm(v).
4. In the Optative, it] (le, i), the Modal-sign attaches itself directly
to the Stem: (pa-irj-v; compare § 293.
5. The 2 Sing. Imperat. has the ending 9i : (pd-Oi. ) ^oj^pare S 292.
G. The Infinit. has the ending vat : <pd-vai. )
7. The 3 Plur. of the Preterite has aav : l-^d-aav (3 Plur. Imperf.).
All terminations of these two tenses are appended to
the Stem without a connecting vowel : (^ta-fiiv (compare
Ti/xa-o-fiev), (pa-TU) (compare Tifia-i-ru)) ; in the Participle,
also, vT attaches itself directly to the Stem : a-v r, of
which the Nom. is formed by the addition of o- : <f)ag ;
Stem So, ^ovg (compare § 147, l). In the Subjunctive
alone the final vowels of the Stems are contracted with
the long connecting vowels, as in the ordinary contracted
verbs (§ 243) : ^a-w, ^w ; ri-Bt-u), tl-9u) ; ^o-io-fiai, ^Cjfxai,
§ 303. In the vowel-Stems of this conjugation a change
of quantity takes place in such a manner that vowels in
themselves short are lengthened in the Singular Indicative
Active, a and e becoming r?, o w, and v v : (l>v-iuih ^ ^^Vy
Plur. i^ta-jxiv, £-0t?-v, Dflal t-(pa-TOv ; [f-^ij-v, / jplaced'],
Plur. t-Oe-jULEv ; ^HKvv-fii, I show, Plur. ^ukvv-h^v.
Obs. — Those forms which always have the vowel long are specially
noticed below.
§ 304. All verbs in fxi are divided into 2 classes :
1. Those which in the Present join their terminations
directly to the Stem : ^rj-jui ;
2. Those which form the Present- Stem by adding vv to
the Pure Stem : ^uK-vv-fii, I show, Pure Stem 3 1 1 ic, Pres-
ent-Stem daiKvv.
172
IRST CLASS OF VERBS IN fit.
305.
I. FiRgT Class of Verbs in jui.
§§ 305 and 306. The Paradigms of this Class of Verbs
are inserted on p. 124, fol. sqq.
§ 307. Some few forms of the Verbs in jui are formed
§§ 305, 306. Dialects. — The following are Ionic secondary forms,
those inclosed in brackets being the New-Ionic.
Active.
2 Sing. Pres. Ind. Ti-eri-aea di-doX-aOa, also Si-dol-g
3 " " " Ti-eu Si-Soi
3 Plur. " " Ti-eel(n(y) Si-domi(v)
also {7rpo)9tovm(y)
2 Sing. Pres. Imperat. di-Sio-Oi
Inf. Pres. TL-drj-fiBvai Si-dS-fiep
di-dov-vai
Imperf. 1 Sing. [i-Ti-Oe-a] [l-di-6ov-v]
3 « [l-Ti-Oe-e]
Middle.
3 Plur. Pres. Ind. [ri-0€-arai 5i-d6-arai
3 " Imperf. "
Pres. Part. n-dri-nwoQ
Active.
2 Aor. Ind. 3 Plur.
u a
" Subj. 1 Sing, ee'no [06a>]
2 " enyq OX OrjyQ dt^c
3 " Oeiy Sa)(n(v) or
6u)y(Ti{v)
" " 2 D.
" " 1 Plur. ekiofiEv or dojojxEv
Qdofiw
" " 3
" Inf.
[i-<rr^]
{Ka9)-i-aTa
[t-ora]
i-(TTe-aTai]
[i-aTs-aro]
tarav
ecrraffav
(TTTjyg
(TTrjirov (§ 302, D.)
(TTswfiev or
(TTeiofisv
[<TTE(0(Tl]
Oefxevai, Qkjxw dofievai, Sofiev arrifjievai
Middle.
" Ind. Wio, Wev (§ 37, D., 1) ' ^
[Herod. irpogOrjKavTo']
" Subj. [Oeajfiai] Oeiofiai
" Imper. 9eo, eev.
§ 308. FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IJT jUt, 173
after the First Principal Conjugation, as, e. ^., the 2 Sing.
Imperf. hiOng, the 3 Sing. hiOeif as if from the Stem riOs.
Ifl the Imperf., the forms i^/Souy, e^i^ovg, l^i^ov are the
only ones in use from the Stem dido; they are formed
in the same manner as those of contracted verbs (§ 243).
Other similar forms will be noticed in treating of the sep-
arate verbs.
In the 3 Plur. Pres. Ind. contraction is sometimes em-
ployed : TiOelmf didovm,
â– In the 2 Sing. Imperat. Pres. Act. the real ending 6i is
dropped, and the Stem-vowel is lengthened to compensate
for it : dldov for dldoOi.
In the same person of the Aorist after a short vowel i
only is dropped, and the remaining 6, according to § 67, is
changed to g : do-6i, dog, but (rrri-Oi, which only in com
pounds sometimes appears as <rra, e. g., Karacrra.
In the 2 Sing. Mid. of the Present and Imperfect the
(T between the two vowels is preserved ; riOe-aai, TiOe-ao,
lTiOs-<To ; only the 2 Sing, of the Subj. is treated entirely
like the contracted verbs of the First Principal Conjuga-
tion. In the 2 Sing. Mid. of the Strong Aorist, on the
other hand, the o- is thrown out, which gives rise to a con-
traction : t-Oe-ao, t-Oe-o, t-9ov ; Imper. Oe-ao, Oi-o, Sov,
Obs. — The forms of the 2 Sing. Imperat. Mid. compounded with
monosyllabic prepositions, after contraction, throw the accent as
a circumflex upon the last syllable : Trpo-9ov ; but Homer has
avv-9eo and Trepi-9ov.
§ 308. The three verbs conjugated above (p. 124) distin-
guish the Present-Stein from the Pure Stem by redujpli-
cation, that is, the initial consonant with i is prefixed be-
fore the ^ Stem : do,dido; eE,riOe{^53h); i-<TTa for
ai-GTay according to § 60, h (compare Latin si-sto). In
like manner, the Stem y^paui the Pres. becomes Kt-x/oa
{Ki-xpv-fJ^iyJ^ ^<^^)i Tr\a and ttjoo, with the insertion of
a nasal, become tt i- /li-ttX a, iri- iJ.-7r pa {jrifXTr\r]fii, I fill ^
7rifi7rpr)iuii, I hum) ; but avfi-irL-TT\r]-ixi, tfji-Tri-TrXri-fjii ; the
174 FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IN fit. § 309.
Stem £ becomes 'l-rj-jui, I send ; and, with the reduplication
within the Stem itself, ova becomes o-vi-vr)-ixiy I henefit.
§ 309. The Deponents Svvafiai, I can ; tTricTTaixai, I understand ; Kpe-
fiafxai, I hang; together with the Aorists cTrpid/ij/v, I bought; ijvti-
fiT]v, 1 benefited^ withdraw the accent, even in the Subjunctive
and Optative, as far as possible from the end : dvviofiai, tm&raivTo
(compare i(Tru>fiai, laTdlvTo).
Other peculiarities of verbs of this class are :
§ 310. The three Stems Ot {rW^iit), go (g/gw^t)^ and I
(V»]/it) form an irregular Weak Aorist in ica : Wr]Ka, f SwKa,
riKa, but in the Middle we find only i]Kafir]v. In the Sing,
of the Indicative the Active forms are customary instead
of those of the Strong Aorist, but in the Dual and Plural
of the Indicative they are rare. The other moods and the
Participles have the strong forms exclusively.
The really customary forms of the Aorist, therefore, are
these:
Ind. Subj. Qut Mid. Wkunv
iOriKa Opt. eeirjv Subj. Owfiai
iQtiKag Imp. Bkq etc.
tOriKf.{v). Inf. BCivai
Wetov Part, edq
iOsTTJV
tOsfiev (seldom WljKanw)
Were ( " WfjKaTe)
tOecrav ( " WriKav).
§ 311. 2. The roicgh breathing instead of the o- of the
Stem o- r a is also used in the Perf. (§ 60, h) : i-drrj-Ka for
(T£-(TTrj-Ka. On the shorter forms, forajufv, etc., see § 317, 4.
icTTij^tx), I shall sta7id, is a Third Future Active. The Per-
fects of Q £ and I are rWetKa, tiKa ; the same vowel also re-
mains in the Perf. Mid. Tidu^iai, Eifiai. The Stems g o and
ara leave their vowel short in the Perf. Mid. and Aor.
§ 310. Dialects. — ^From the Stem d o Hom. has sometimes Fut. di-
Sia-(T(o instead of ddjau).
§ 312. FIRST CLASS OP VERBS IN fxi. 175
Pass., and £ in the Aor. Pass. : ^i-^o-fiai, e^69r}v, IcTraOriv,
IriOrjv, TeOriaojuLai. On the meaning of the different forms
ofW»?/if, see §329,1.
§ 312. To the First Class of the Verbs in fit there also
belong :
A) Verbs whose Stem ends in a (compare *i(TTr)iii) :
1. ri-jui (compare Lat. d-io), I say, only in the Imperf. rjv,
3 Sing, r) (compare § 213, Ohs.).
2. 6'vi-vr}-fjiL (Stem ova,^ SOS), I benefit, Mid. ovivafxat
(§ S09), I have advantage, Strong Aor. Mid. tjvrtfxrjv, wvrjao,
wvr}TO ; Opt. 6vaifjLr}v, Imperat. ovyicto, Inf. ovaaOaiy Fut.
ovYjCTii), bviidOfiai ; Aor. Pass. tJvriOrjv,
3. TrL-fX'-Tr\r]-fxi (Stem TrXa, § 308). Additional form,
irX^di), I Jill [Lat.^Z^-o], Fut. 7r\i](Tw, Perf. Mid. iriirXri-
(Tfiai, Aor. Pass. ettXtj^^t^v.
4. TTi-fi-irpri-fiL (Stem irpa). Additional form, irpriOtjj
(quite like 3).
5. (pri-juL (Stem <{) a), I say, 2 Sing. Imperf. ecjyrjaOa (enclitic
in Pres. Ind. except 2 Sing., compare § 92, 3). Imperat.
(paOi or (jidOi ; compare (paaKU), 324, 8.
6. xp^ (Stem X P «' XP^)' ^^^^ ^lust, Subj. xPVf ^P*'
Xpeivy Inf. xpvvai, Part. XP^^^ (only Neut. from xp^ov
according to § 3^7, D.). Imperf. IxP^^ ^^ XP^^> l^ut. xpn-
o-f t ; air 6 xpVf it suffices, also 3 Plur. airoxp^i^ f^t{v), etc.,
as above awoxpcid)*
7. Ki-xp^'l^^ (Stem xp^9% 308), I lend. Inf. Kixpo,vai,
Fut. xpv<r^f ^or. £ X p »? o" a. Farther the deponents :
8. aya-fxai (Stem 'a y a), I admire, Fut. ayaaojiai, Aor.
Pass. i]7a(T0r]v, Verb. Adj. ayaaroc-
9. ^vva-fxai (Stem ^vva), I can, 2 Sing. Ind. ^vvy is rare
(§ 309), Imperf Idwdfxriv, 2 Sing. iSuvw, Fut. ^vvmofxai.
§ 313. Dialects. — 3. Horn, has the Aor. TrX^ro, it was filled^ 3 Plur.
irXrivTO^ Opt. irXyfiTjv or TrXeifirjv, Imper. [f/x]7rXj;(70.
6. Herod. aTrtxpa.
8. Horn, dydofiai, dyaiofiai.
176 FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IN juii, § 312.
Aor. IdvvriOrjv, seldom IdvvaaOriv. The Augment is fre-
quently 7} (§ 23456^^5.), Perf.'SfSvvTj/zatjVerb. Adj. ^vvarog,
capable, possible.
10. £7rfOTa-/zm (Stem tir kt to), I understand, 2 Sing.
tTTiaTaaai, Imperf. riTTKTTa/xrjVy i]iri<TT(jjf Fut. liriGTr]GOfxaiy
Aor. riTTKTTrjOriv, Verb. Adj. ImaTtiTog.
11. tpa-fiai (Stem Ipa), poetic, / love (commonly ipau)),
Aor. Pass. iipaaQriv,
12. Kpijua-fxai (Stem k pep, a), I hang (§ 309). Fut. icpc-
pr}(Topai, Aor. iKpspatrOriv, Additional forms, § 319, 2.
05s. — The following may serve as examples of the formation of
words : to 6i-fia, the position ; 6 do-rrjp, the giver; 1) ffrd-m-g, the
7^e ; ri 6vr]-(n-Q, the henejit^ from the Pure Verbal-Stem, differing
from the Present-Stem; ») tprj-firj^fd-ma, talk; 1) dvvaixi-g, power;
i} eTri(TTr}-firi, hnowledge, from the Verbal-Stem, which is the same
as that of the Present.
Dialects. — 13. Horn. d/xEvac, satiate, Stem d, Subj. iiofiev.
14, Stem (S a, Part. l3i(3dg, stepping.
14. h. Stem ^ e a, 3 Sing. Imperf diaro, seemed, Aor. dod-aaaro.
15. Stem t \ a, i\d(TKOfiai, iXdojiai, I am gracious, Hom. Imperat. 'i\r]9i.
16. Stem Ktpa (compare Kepdvvvfii,Imix), Hom. 3 Plur. Subj. Mid.
KEpiovrai. fifTo these belong also, in regard to the inflexion of the
Present-Stem, those Hom. verl^s which either are used only in the
Present-Stem, or form the Present-Stem from the Verbal Stem by
affixing the syllable -va :
a) d dfi-vrj-fxi (also Safi-vd-ui), I tame. Mid. dd/x-va-fxai, Fut. ^afioio,
^afidq.Q, Weak Aor. Inf ^andaai, daixd(Ta(T9ai, Perf ^edfiTJixai, Aor. Pass.
idnrjOrjv, dafidaOrjv, and Strong Aor. Pass, iddfiriv (Subj. Safieico).
h) Kipvijui (also Kepdvvvni, § 319, 1), J mix, Part. Kipvdg, 3 Sing.
Imperf kKipvd. Compare § 319, 1.
c) Kpr)}ivdp.ai, poetic additional form of Kpefia-fiai (12). Compare
also § 319, 2.
d) ndpvdp,ai,I contend, 2 Sing. Imperf. kiidpvdo.
e) Trkpvriiii,! sell, Part, irepvdg, Trepvafxevog.
f) TTiXvafiai,! approach. Stem tteX, Aor. 3 Sing. i-Tr\r]-To.
g) TriTvr]fii, I spread. Part. TriTvdg, Imperf TrirvavTo. Compare
319, 3.
h) (TKidvT]fii,I scatter, (TKidvarai. Compare § 319, 4.
§ 313. FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IN /m, 17?
§ 313. B) Verbs whose Stem ends in e (compare Ti6r}iuii) :
1. t-?j-iut (Stem I, Present- Stem l-e, i. e., l-k, according to
§ 308), / send.
Act. Pres. 3 Plur. Ind. ia<n{v), Opt. hir}v (secondary forms
'ioi/ni, 3 Plur. mitv).
Imperf. tVv (secondary forms [touv], 'lug, Ui), Plur.
afxev, 3 Plur. u-dav, (k^ih and r](^Lu {a<^ii}fxi,
I send away). Compare § 240.
Aor. r\-K-a, rJKag, riKi{v), eiTOv, urr\v, UfX^v, alrf, al-
(yav.
Subj. w. Opt. ur]v, Imperat. tg. Inf. uvaiy Part, hq
(Stem I V r). On this Aor., compare § 310.
Fut. rjo-w, Perf. H-K-a,
Mid. Pres. 'i-e-fxai, I hasten, strive, Subj. tw/zat, ly, etc.
Opt. hifxriv (additional form loijuiriv), Imperat. 'leao
or tou, Imperf. T-ifiriv.
Aor. Eijurfv, eiao, elto, Subj. wfjiat, Opt. cY/zijv (addi-
tional form ofjurjv).
055. — The e I of the Ind. e'l-firip is caused by the Augment (§ 236),
that of the Opt. by the Mood-sign (§ 303, 4).
Fut. li-aofiai, Perf a-/iat, Plup. u-nr]v.
§ 313. Dialects. — 1. Horn. 2 and 3 Sing. Pres. '/etc, Vei ; 3 Plur. iHm{v)',
1 Sing. Imperf. Vcij/, 'ihq^ 'Ui ; 3 Plur. 'lev, 3 Sing. Subj. 'Irjmiv) ; Inf.
t£/iex/ai ; Aor. Act. 'ir]Ka ; 3 Plur. 'iaav ; Subj. fVw ; Aor. Mid. 3 Plur. tvTo.
2. Fut. i'jaoj and (aj/)£<Tw [Herod. nEfxErifievog, as a Part. Perf. of fjte-
Tir]iJii=:fiE9ir]fii, § 52, D., as if from ften'w, with irregular reduplica-
tion].
Moreover :
3. Stem d{P)e, Pres. dr)ixi, I hlmc, 2 Dual drjrov, 3 Sing. Imperf dr] and
a£i, Inf. a^vai and dtj/xevai, Part. Aor. Nom. Plur. dtvTsg, Mid. drjixevog.
4. Stem ^t^, (ev) dieaav, they frightened ; dievrai, they flee ; Opt. ^t-
otro.
5. Stem ^i^€, diKrffJiai, additional fomi, ^i^oj,! seeJc; 2 Sing. ^I'^j/at,
Inf. diZT](r9ai, Fut. di^rjcrofiai.
6. Pres. Ktx»7/ii (compare § 322, 18), I obtain; Subj. /ctxet'w, Opt. ki-
X€t^v, Inf. Ktxfjvat, Part. Kix^ig, Mid. KLxnuevog.
Imperf. 2 Sing, t/ct'xei? , 3 Dual Kixhrriv.
H 2
178 riKST CLASS OF VERBS IN fxi. § 314.
Aor. Pass. uOr^v, Subj. kOio. Yut. tOijaofjiai.
Verb. Adj. tTog, ltIoq.
2. St-Sr/-jut (Stem S £), / buid, a rare additional form of
^i-w (§ 244, 1).
§ 314. C) Verbs whose Stem ends in i :
1. el-fii (Stem i, Lat. i-re)^Igo.
Pres. Ind. €i-/ti i-/iEv Subj. i-w t-yf, etc.
eZ I-Tov i-re Opt. i-oirjv l-oig, etc.
€t-fft(j/) i-rov t-a(Tt(^') Imperat. i-9i i-rw, etc.
3 Plur. i-6vT(M)v or t-rwcrav
Inf. l-t-pai Part, j-toi/, i-ovcra, i-6v (Gen. i-ovr-og, compare Lat.
e-unt-is)
Imperf. yeiv or ya yEifiev or ynev
yEig " yeiffOa, yeiTov, yrov, yeire " ^re
yet " ysiv, ydrijv, yrrjv, ytaav
Verbal Adj. Wogy Iriog (additional form trrjrfcov, it is
necessary to go.
Obs. — The Present, especially in the Indicative, has a Future mean-
ing ; the Imperfect has the endings of a Pluperfect ; y is pro-
duced by the Augment preceding e t.
2. Ku-fxai (Stem Kei),I lie, has the Inflexion of a Per-
fect. 2 Sing. KH'crai, 3 Plur. Kttyrat, Subj. 3 Sing. Klrirai,
Opt. KtoiTO, Imperat. Keiao, Inf. KuaOai, Part. K^juevog ; the
compound irapaKUfiai, Inf. irapaKuadai. (Compare r\nai,
§ 315, 2).
§ 314. Dialects. — 1. Stem «', 2 Sing. Pres. Ind. ElaQa, Subj. Ir^aBa^ Irjmvy
1 Plur. 'iofiev, 'tofiEv, and 'tojfiev, Opt. lot, i'ei>^ or elrj, Inf. luEvai, Ifiw.
Imperf riia and 77/ov, 3 Sing. ijk{v) or t6(i;), 1 Plur. yo/xej/, 3 Plur.
»yVov, ii'iaav, with (rj;^, '/i£^', ttrav.
Fut. tlaofiai, Aor. Eiffdfiijv and hiaafiriv.
2. Stem icet, 3 Plur. Keiarai, KtaTui, keovtm, Imperf. Kdaro, ksuto
[jckrai = mrai]. Part. Fut. kswv, cuMturus, Inf KEikfiEv.
6 V is an Hom. Stem in 0, Pres. ovofiai, I vituperate, ovoffai, 3 Sing.
Opt. ovoiTo (§ 309), Fut. ovoffaofiai, Aor. tjvocrd^rjv, and, from the Stem
6 V, wvdfirjv.
p V or £ p V is an Hom. Stem in v, 3 Plur. elpvarai, tliey rescue, protect,
Inf. pvaOai, ipvaOai, elpi)fi€vog, Imperf. 2 Sing, tpvtro, 3 Plur. pvaro, kpvaro,
elpvvTo ; moreover. Inf. Act. elpvuevai, to draw ; Aor. Mid. pmuTo, he
rescued; kpvaoaTo, Tie drew.
§ 315. FIRST CLASS OP VERBS IN juu. 179
Obs. — When compounded witn prepositions, KEifiat is almost iden-
tical in meaning with the Perf. Pass, of the corresponding com-
pounds of riOijfii : vTroriOrjiJit, I lay as a foundation ; viroKeiTai, it is
laid as a foundation.
§ 315. D) Verbs whose Stem 'ends in a consonant (a) :
1. elfii (Stem I e, Lat. es-se),Iam.
Pres. Ind. d-fii (for Icrfii) ia-fisv
el (for iff-ai) la-Tov id-rk (es-tis)
t<T-Ti(y) (Lat. es-t) ia-Tov d-ai{v)
Subj. to a»/i€j/ Opt. drjv eirjfiEv OF Bifiev
yg i]Tov i/TE £ij/c elriTov or drov elrjTe or drs
y ijTOV w(n{v) sir) drjrrjv or drrjv drjaav or dev
Imperat. i(t9l tarov tare Inf. dvai
iaTU) i<TT(>)v i(TT(t)(Tav Part, wp ovffa ov (Stem ovt)
(Lat. esto) eorwj/, ovtujv
Imperf. riv or /} r;/iev
i]rr9a 7j<ttov or r]TOv ijre or ^ore
ijv i'i(TTr]v or i]TT]v fjeap ^ .
Imperf. Mid. i]\ni\v (rare)
Fut. iaofiai, 3 Sing, tcrrai •
Verb. Adj. karkov.
Obs. — 1. The loss of the rr of the Stem is compensated for by the
vowel being lengthened in the 1 Sing. (§ 42) : tj'/ii for t <r;ti, in the
2 Sing. 61 for tai, which has arisen from the laai preserved in
Homer (compare §§ 49, 61, &). In the 3 Sing, the original end-
ing n is retained: tort (i/), the 3 Plur. has €/(ri(v), from la-vn.
The Subj. <u stands for Iw (Hom.), from iai» ; the Opt. dj]v for
§ 315. Dialects. — I(mic additUmal forms : 2 Sing, la-ai or dg, 1 Plur.
dfikv, 3 Plur. ta(Ti{v) ; iam is also enclitic, but not taai{v).
Subj. 1 Sing, tw, etw, 2 Sing, tj/e, 3 Sing. tr](Ti{v), ri<n{v^, iy, 3 Plur.
iio(n{v).
Opt. also tote, coi, 2 Sing. Imperat. Mid. tarro, 3 Act. tarw, 3 Plur.
t<TT(i)V.
Inf. tfifievai (for t<T-fievai), infiev, i/xevaij tfiev.
Part, iwv, eovcTa, toy (Stem £ V r).
Imperf. 1 Sing, rju, ia, tov ; 2 Sing. tj;(T0a [tag'], 3 Sing, »}«;, tj^y, ffriv
[2 ;^r. tare], 3'Plur. taav] 3 Plur. Mid. etaro (//vro).
Fut. tfffTOfiai, 3 Sing, torerai, taaeraij loadrai (§ 264),
2. From ^/tat, 3 Plur. tarat, darai, Imperf. taro, eVaro.
3. Inf. tSfievai, to m^,Pres, ttrOu), iaOik), t^w [Lat, es-tis=ieditis]. Com-
pare § 327, 4.
4. 2 Plur, Imperf <i>epTe = (pepEve, bring [Lat./er^e],
180
FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IN /xt.
§316.
t(T-irjv, as the Inf. Elvai for id-vai ; uiv for kojv (Horn.), from ea-wv.
In the Imperf the Dual has most fully preserved the (t.
Obs. 2. — Eifxi is enclitic in the Pres. Ind. except the 3 Sing, el (com-
pare § 92, 3) ; iaTi is paroxytone when it denotes existence, or
means the same, as t^etrrt, " it is possible,''^ as well as at the begin-
ning of a sentence and after the particles ov, fit], ei, wc, Kai : tcm
Oeog, there is a God; ovk taTi, it is not possible. When merely ex-
ternal causes prevent it from being enclitic (§ 93, c), l<TTi(v) is
oxytone : (piXog 1<ttIv Ijxov, he is mp friend.
Ols. 3. — In the compounds of dfil the accent remains on the Stem-
syllable ; e. g.^ in the Imperf. Trajoijv, in the Subj. and Opt. dTrw,
dTrelev, in the Inf and Part. dTrelvai, irapojv^ in the 3 Sing. Fut.
TrapkaTai.
2. riiiai (Stem
7] g),Isit, has, like Kei/mai, the Inflexion of
a Perfect.
Pres. rifxai
tijueOov riiiiQa ' Imperat. t^go.
rjaai
rjaOov rjads riaOu), etc.
rjarai
rjaOov rjvraL Inf. ^(rOai,
'
Part. rtfievog.
Impf. rijULriv rjcro, etc.
In Attic prose we find almost exclusively the compound
KaOri/uLai, of which 3 Sing. KaOriTai, Subj. KaOw/iai, Opt. jca-
Ooifir]v, 3 Plur. Kadoivro, Imperat. KuOricro or kuOov (from
KaOeao), Inf. KaOriaOaL, Part. KaOijfJievogf Imperf. lKaQr]fxr]v
(§ 240) or KaSrifirjv, 3 Sing. iKaOr)To or KaOriGTO, 3 Plur.
EKa6r)VTO or KaOrjvro.
§ 316. The following Strong Aorists, formed without a
connecting vowel from verbs whose Present- Stem mostly
follows the First Principal Conjugation, likewise belong to
the First Class of Verbs in ju t ;
Stems in a,
1. £-j3rj-v (Stem /3 a), Pres. f^aivii), I go, Impl^t. j3^0f ;
in compounds also /3a {Kara^a), Inf. jS^vat, Part. jSac-
§ 316. Dialects. — 1. 3 Plur. t/3av, Subj. jSet'w, ^riy or /3£t'y, ^uofiiv [Her.
/Stwjuev], Inf. (Srjfxevai.
§ 316. FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IJ^^ fil. 181
2. yr)pa-vai (Stem yn pa), Inf. to the Pres. yrjpa-CFKU), I
grow old, § 324, i.
3. h^pa-v (Stitoi ^pa), Pres. gi-g|oa-<TKw, § 324, 2, 1 run,
Inf. ^pa-vaif Part. ^pag.
4. t'-Kra-v (Stem k r a), Pres. jcre/vw, / ^^7Z, Part, icra-c.
Pari Mid. ktcl-ji^voq {killed),
5. £-7rrr]-v (Stem Trra, Trrf), Pres. irtTOimai, I Jly, Part.
TTTag, Mid. irrajuLevog, Inf. irriadaL.
6. e-rXr^-y (Stem t\ a), I endured, Subj. rXw,Opt. rXanjv,
Imperat. TX»i0f, Inf. rXf/vat, Fut. TXritjoiuai, Perf. TtrXr^ica
(§ 317, D., 10).
7. £-<^0r?-v (Stem a), Pres. (pOavw, I anticipate, Inf.
^Orfvai.
8. l-Trpid-juriv (Stem tt jO t a),I hought, Imperat. 7r/otfi>.
Sterns in c.
9. €-ffj3r?-v (Stem (rj3f), Pres. a^ivvviii, I quench, § 319,
7, Inf. (rj3»}vat.
10. E-cTJcXn-v (Stem (tkXc), Pres. ctkeXXw, / dry, Inf.
(7»cXfiva«.
11. Imperat. crx^-g, from o"X£-0t (Stem gx^), Pres. t'x^,
§ 327, 6, 1 Sing. Ind. t-ax-o-v.
Stems in (i),
12. i-a\(i)-v (Stem a\(i)),I was caught, Pres. akiaKo^at
(§ 324, 17), Opt. aXoirjv, Inf. aXC}vai, Part. aXovg.
13. £-j3t(u-v (Stem j3 f w), Pres. j3tow, / ^^^^, Opt. jSfoJr^y,
Inf. (5iu)vai, Part, jdiovg.
Dialects. — 2. Part, yj^pac
3. [Her. tdprjv.]
4. 3 Sing. tKTci, 3 Plur. tKrav, Subj. nrkiafiw, Inf. /cra/wevat, Mid. tfcraro
^e icas M^, § 225, D., 2), Pass. Aor., 3 Plur. tKrdOep.
5. Mid. tTTTCLTO, Subj. TTTrJTai, DoP. 1 Siug. Act. £7rrar.
6. 3 Plur. trXdv.
7. Subj. 3 Sing. tpOrfy or ^0»7(rt(v), {Trapa)^9air](n{v)^ 1 Plur. (p9s(o/iEv,
12. j^Xwv, Subj. dXww, Opt. 3 Sing. dXoi)/, Inf. dXiofxevai.
182 FIKST CLASS OF VERBS IN jUf. § 316.
14. e-yv(i)-v (Stem y v lo), Pres. yi-yvM-aKw, I come to
hnow (§ 324, 14), Opt. yvoiriv, Imperat. yvCjOt, Inf. yvwvai,
Part. yvovQ. ^
Stems in i,
15. Imperat. ttI-Ql (Stem tt t), Pres. Trivw^Idrink, 1 Sing.
Aor. Ind. 'imov (§ 321, 4).
Stems in v,
16. i-^v'v (Stem 8v), Pres. ^vw,! dive, Imperat. ^vOi,
Inf. Svvae, Part. Sac. As to its meaning, see § 329, 4.
17. e-<f)v-v (Stem (pv), I became, Ties, (pvw, I produce,
Inf. ijivvat.
Dialects. — 14. Subj. yj/wa>, Inf. yvwfxevai,
15. Imperat. vie.
16. 3 Plur. idv-v, Subj. ^ow, ^u^e, 3 Sing. Opt. Un (from ^w-tq), Inf.
17. 3 Plur. ^vp.
Besides these, the following are peculiar to the Ep. Dialect :
18. Part, dirovpag, Pres. d-Kavpcua^I take away.
19. Stem /3 \ j;, Pres. /3a\Xa>, I throw ^ 3 Dual ^vfi(3\riTT}v (met together)^
Fut. ^vfi(3Xri(T0fiai, Mid. t/SXj^ro (w)as ?dt, § 255, D. 2), Subj. (iXij-e-Tai, 2
Sing. Opt. (3XeTo, Inf (iXrjaOai, Part. l3Xf]fievog (hit).
20. Stem o i' r a, Pres. ovrdio, I wound, 3 Sing, ovra, Inf. ovrdfievai,
Part. Mid. ovrd/xevog (wounded), Yerh. Adj. ouraro?.
21. Stem TT r a, Pres. Trrfjcraio, I stoop, 2 Dual i-irTrj-Tijv, Part. Perf.
22. Stem tt X a, Pres. TreXa^w, / approach, Aor. Mid. TrXrjTo.
23. Stem /3|[> w, Pres. (3i-^pib-(TKb}, I eat (§ 324, 13), Aor. e/3pwv.
24. Stem ttX w, Pres. ttXwu), I sail, 2 Sing. Aor. eirXbjg, Part. 7rXb)-g.
25. Stem icrt, Pres. fcW^w, I found, Part. Aor. Mid. tv-Kri-fievog (well-
founded).
26. Stem ^ 1, Pres. <peiv(o,Iwa8te away, Subj. Aor. Mid. (peierai, Opt.
tpOifxrjv, (pQlTO, Inf. (pOicrOai, Part. (^Bi^Evog.
27. Stem kXv, Pres. kXvio, I hear, Imperat. Aor. /cXwOt or kekXvOi, kXvtb
or KEfcXure.
28. Stem X u, Pres. Xww, 7 Z^J^se, Aor. Mid. XvfiTjv, Xvto or Xwro.
29. Stem ttw, Pres. ttvew, / hreathe, Aor. Mid. afiirvvTo (he recm&fed
Irreath).
30. Stem <ru, Pres. cevu),! scare, Aor. Mid. o-yro, Part, avfiwog.
31. Stem xi^, Pres. x«w, /^(mr (§ 248), Aor. Mid. txvro, x^ro, Part.
XVfiEvog.
§ 317. FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IN jui, 183
§ 317. Several Perfects also have some forms without a
connecting vowel :
A) Vowel Stems.
A number of Vowel- Stems form the Sing. Perf. Ind.
Act. regularly, but in the Dual and Plural of the Perfect
and Pluperf. Ind., in the other moods, and in the Infinitive
and Participle, may connect the endings immediately with
the Perfect- Stem.
1. Stem /3 a, Pres. jSatW, I go (§ 321, l).
Perf. Ind . f3i(5r}K-a /Bf/ia-jucv
j3£j3»j»c-ac /3 £ j3 a -TO V )3£j3a-T£
f3ij3r]K-£ f5ij5a-TOV /3£j3a-o-£(v)
3 Plur. Subj. /3£j3w(Ti(v), Part. /Bt/Bwc, jStjSwaa, Gen.
/BtjSwroc.
2. Stem y a (for y a v), Pres. ytyvofiat, I become, Perf
76-70 v-a, Plur. also yi-ya-fitv (§ 327, 14), Part, yaytjg,
Gen. ytywTOQ.
Dialects. — 32. Stem dX (a\Xo/iai,/8pnwg'), Aor. Mid. dX(ro,a\ro, Subj.
uXerai, Part. dX/xevog.
33. Stem yev, only in yevro, he took.
34. Stem ^cx (Pres. Bkxoiiat, I accept), Aor. idsyfirjv, 3 Sing. ^£<cro,Im-
perat. Ss^o, Inf. ^ix^"* (compare § 273, D.).
35. Stem Xey (Xkyio, I collect), Aor. Mid. Xekto, he counted.
36. Stem Xex (no Pres.), Aor. Mid. Xekto (he laid ^mseZ/"), Imperat.
Xs^o, Inf. Xsx9ai, Part. {KaTa)XeyixEvog, Aor. Act. tXe^a, Mid. cXe^aro, Fut.
Xe^o/iat.
37. Stem fi i y, Pres. /utVyw, J mia;, Aor. Mid. ifUKTo, fUKTo.
38. Stem dp, opwui,! excite, Aor. Mid. wpro, Imperat. opao or opaco
(ppfTev), Inf. opOai, Part, opfisvog.
39. Stem Tray {Trfiyvvfii,IJix), Aor. Mid. tTrriKTo,it was fixed.
40. Stem TraX (7rdXX(o,Iwield), Aor. Mid. TrdXro.
41. Stem TTcpO {irep9oj,I destroy), Inf. Aor. Mid. irkpQai {to ie de-
stroyed).
To these are to be added the Participles which have become Ad-
jectives, dfffievog, glad (Stem dd, dvddv<t>, I please); iKfievog, favorable
(Stem t K, iKveofiai, I come).
§ 317. Dialects. — 1. Hom. 3 Plur. pe(3aa(Ti(v), Part. (5e(3awg, Dual (3e-
/3a aire.
2. Hom. 3 Plur. yey ad<Ti{v), Part, yeyawf, ycyavTa, Gen. yey aCjTog, 3
Dual Plup. (kK)yeyari]v.
184 FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IN fit, § 317.
3. Stem Ova, Pres. Ovr}-(TKio, I die, Perf. rc-^vrj-jca, Plur.
ri-Ova-fiev, etc. , Inf. reOv avai. Part. rtOvewg, reOveCjaa,
TtdviOQ, Pluperf. 3 Plur. eTiOvaaav (§ 324, 4).
. 4. Stem (TTu, Pres. '['(ttyi-iul, Perf. t-arrj-Ka,! stand, Plur.
t-cTTa-iuev, Subj. Iotw/xev, idTLJcriiy), Opt. loratr/v, Imperat.
taraOi, tcTTaTio, iCTTCiTOVf torrarf. Inf. I or a vat. Part. k<jTWQ,
iaruxra, tcfrogyQen. e(TTLJTog, 3 Plur. Pluperf. f orao-a v
(§ 306, etc.).
5. Stem gf, Perf. gt'-gi-a or g^gof-ica, //^«7', Plur. ^i^L-
fxiv, Zi-'^iaaiiy), Subj. StStw, Opt. SeStftrjv, Imperat. ^i^iOt,
Inf. SfgfE'va^ Part. SfgitT^c, Pluperf. Egegt'ftv, 3 Dual k^^^lmv,
3 Plur. i^k^taav, also Aor. c^ftaa, Fut. ddaojuLai.
Obs. — The regular and irregular forms are mostly both in use.
B) Consonant Stems,
In these the peculiar changes of the vowels (§ 303) and
consonants (§§ 45-49) must be observed.
6. Stem IB (Aor. ddov,Isaw, § 327, 8).
Perf. Ind. old -a, I hnow, lar-fxev, Subj. siSio ddujfxev
di-oQa la-Tov iff -re eiSyc ddiJTOV sidijre
oIS-e{v) iff-TOV iff-affi(v) Sidy eidfJTOV eida)ffi(v)
Oj)t. eldeirjv, Imp. iff-6i ia-rov iff -re Inf. eidtvai
iff-ru) Iff- rwv iff-rojffav Part, ddtjg, elSvia,
eidog, Gen. eiSor-og
Plup. ydeiv or ySij (IMew) ySeifiev or yffnev
ydeiffOa " ySrjffOa ydeirov or yffrov ySeire " yffre
ydei{v) " ydr) ydeirrjv " yffrrjv ydeffav " yffav
Fut. £t(TOjuai, Verb. Adj. hrhv.
Dialects. — 3. Imperat. rkOvaOi, Inf. re9vdfiev(ai), Gen. Part. reOvsCirog,
reOvTjoJrog, reOvsiwrog, re9vi]6rog, reOveiSrog, Fem. reOvrjvla.
4. 2 Plur. Ind. also 'iffriire, Part, iffracjg, Gen. iffraSrog [Her. cfrrewf,
i(rrew(ra]. ^
5. ^et^ta, deidi/xev, Imperat. SeidiOi, 1 Sing. Perf. also SeidoiKa, Aor. t^-
^£t(Ta (compare § 77, D.).
6. 1 Plur. "id-fiev [Herod, and sometimes also in Att. writers oldajxev,
3 Plur. oldaffi], Subj. eidkoj or Idstj, Plur. eldofiev, eidere^ Inf. iSnev{ai),
Fem. Part. j'^uTa, Plup. [y^ea] jyet^Tje, V^e€(v) or rieidr] [2 Plur. y'^lare], 3
Plur. to-a j^, Fut. ei^^crw.
§ 318. SECOND CLASS OF VERBS IN fit. 185
Obs. — Besides olaOa^ we rarely have oUag, more fr^uently ydeig,
ySrjQ, together "with yhiaQa, and ydefxev, ydsTs, instead of .ijdeifiev,
ySeiTS.
7. Stem t K, only in the Perf. toiKa,! resemble^ appear,
1 Plur. poet. coty/xEv, 3 Plur. quite irregularly A^a(FL{v)
(compare '[(raai), Inf. HKtvai (poet, with loiKivai), Part. elKtjg
(with loiK(x)g), tiKvXa, eiKog, Plur. It^jjcEtv.
8. Stem Kpay, Pres. Kpa^o), I cry^ Perf. KUpaya, Im-
perat. Ke-Kpax'Oi.
11. Second Class of Verbs in /it.
§ 318. 1. The Second Class of the Verbs in jui belongs
to this conjugation only in regard to the inflexion of the
Dialects. — 7. Imperf. eZicc, Perf. [Her. olKa, oIkwq], Dual uktov, 3 Dual
Plup. etKTT]v, 3 Sing. Plup. Mid. tjIkto or ukto.
Besides :
9. Stem /i a, 2 Dual Perf. nefidrov, strive, fisficifiev, fikfiare, fiindd<n, Im-
perat. fn^aTio, Part, fnfiaibg, via, 6g, Gen. wrog, 3 Plur. Plup. fikfidfrav.
10. Stem rXa, Perf. TsrkrjKa,! am patient, 1 Plur. TETXa/xev, Opt. te-
rXaiTjv, Imperat. TerXaOi, Inf. rETXafiev{ai), Part. TerXrjwg, rjvla, Gen. re-
rXfjoTog.
11. Stem avfa>7, Perf. dvioya,! command, 1 Plur. dvojyfiev, Imperat.
dvoJxOi, 3 Sing. dvoJxOio, 3 Plur. dv(ox9e, Plup. ?)va>yea.
12. Stem eyep, Perf. iyp-riyop-a, I am awaJce, 2 Plur. Imperat. fcypi^-
yop9e, 3 Plur. Ind. kypr}y6pQd<n(y).
13. Stem £\i;0, Perf eiXrjXovOa, I have come, 1 Plur. elXrjXovOfiev.
14. Stem 7r6v0, Perf 7r£7rov0a (Pres.'Tradxwj/swjf^r, § 327, 9), 2 Plur.
TrkTzoaQe (for 7r67roi^0-r£), Fem. Part. TrSTrdOvXa.
15. Stem 7rt0, Perf irkiroLQa (Pres. TrdQco, I persuade), 1 Plur. Plup.
eTTSTTiOnev, Imperat. ttettektOi.
Farther the Participles :
16. Stem 13 pu} (fii(ipu)aK(o,I eat, § '324, 13), Part. Perf ^t^pwg, Gen.
(iifiphJTog.
17. Stem TTTE, TTTio (TTtVrw, I fall, § 327, 15), Perf TrtirrwKa, Part.
Gen. irtwTEGJTog, Nom. TreTrrwf .
§ 318. Dialects. — Ion. 3 Plur. Pres. Ind. Act. -v<ti{v), together with
-vdai{v). Hom. 2 Sing. Imperat. -v and -iiBi (daivv, ofivvOi), Inf
Hom. -vfievai, vfiEv (ZevyvvfiEv). Hom. forms from Saivvfiai,Ifeast,
the Opt. daivvTo, for daiw-i-ro. Similar cases see below, § 319, 32. In
186 SECOND CLASS OF VERBS IN fii. § 319.
Present-zStSn. The Present- Stem of this Second Class is
formed by adding the syllable v v to the Pure Stem.
2. The quantity of the v is determined by the rules in
§ 303, hence 8ftKvvjut, but l^dKvv/iev.
3. Yowel- Stems double v in the Present- Stem : Stem
K epa, Kipa-vvvfii, I 'inix,
4. Here also numerous additional forms are in use ac-
cording to the First Principal Conjugation (^uKvvtS), espe-
cially in the 3 Plur. Pres. Ind. : ^uKvvovai{v) ; and these
forms are exclusively used in the Pres. Subj. and Opt.
5. Most of the Verbs of this class have the Weak Aor-
ist; only a^ivvv\xi, I quench (Stem o- j3 c), forms the 2 Aor-
ist cajSrjv, Inf. (j^r\vm. Compare §§ 316, 9; 319, 7.
The Paradigms of this Class of Verbs are inserted on
p. 128.
§ 319. The following verbs belong to the Second Class
of Verbs in /* ( :
Stems in a,
1. Kepdvvvfit (Stem Kipa, Kpd)ylmix.
Aor. tKkpdaa Perf. Act. dKpdKa . p ( UpaOriv
" Mid. KBKpdfiai ' ' I lKepd<T9t]v
2. Kpendvvvfii (Stem Kpefia)/l Mng, trans. Mid. Kpenafiai, I hang^
intrans. (§ 313, 12)
Fut. Kp^iiCj (§ 263) UpefiaffOriv
Aor. tKpefidaa
3. TCETavvvfii (Stem TTETay,! spread.
Trerw (§ 263) t7r£ra(r0j;v
iTrerdaa 7re7r(€)ra/iat [pate-o]
4. (TKEdavvvfii (Stem crfce^a),/ scatter; additional form (TKiSvTjfit
(§ 312, D. 16, 7i)
CKeda (§ 263) IffKidaffOriv
l<TKkdd(Ta IffKBdaff/iai.
the New-Ion. Dialect the t of the Stem deiKis lost in SeKo), tSeKa, de-
deyfiai, IdexOrfv ; Hom. Pf. (deideyfiai, I salute) 3 Plur. deidexarai.
§ 319. Dialects.— 1. Compare § 312, D. 16, and § 312, D. 16, 5. Other
forms : Kepdio, Kepaiw, Aor. iKprjtra.
2. Fut. Kpefiou), KpsfidffQ (§ 243, D.).
§319.
SECOND CLASS OF VERBS IN fil.
187
Stem§ in e.
Obs. — Several of these Stems originally ended in q.
5. 'ivvvfii (Stem originally Peg, compare Lat. ves-tis)^ I clothe (only
dfKpi-evvvm is in use).
dfi(pi-u> (§ 263)
Fut. Mid. dfupi-eaofiai i^fi(piE(Tfiai
Aor. i)fi(pi-£<Ta (§ 240)
Inf. Aor. Mid. linkaaaQai
Q.Kopevvvfit {Stem. Kope), I satisfy.
tKopeaa tKopeaOijv
KfKopecrfiai
7. (TJSevvvjxi (Stem a ^e), I quench.
f''''^ Uransitive '<^^^<^/^«* l<r(3e<rer,v
tajSecea )
t<TJir]v ia^riKa \
(§ 316, 9) \ intransitive (§ 329, 5)
Fut. a(ir]<JO{xai )
8. aTopkvvvfii (Stem ffTope) (compare 11 and 25)^1 ^ead
(compare Lat. ster-n-o)
(TTOpCJ (§ 263). iaropecTixat
laropeaa.
Stems in (X),
(Stem K(t)),Igh'd,
lZ,w(ydfir\v
(Stem pio),I strengthen.
tppojfiai (lam stroTig) tppaxrOijv
(Stem orrpw). Compare No. 8.
iarpojfxai larptoQijv
9. ^(OVVVfll
tlwaa (Mid.)
10. pwvvviii
pU)(T(t)
11. (Trptovpvixt
(TTpbtfflO
t<TTpiO(Ta
12. XQ'^^^^H-'-
fXpiotra
13. ayvvfti
dXio
taKa (§ 237)
ixpii)(TBiiv.
(Stem xp<^)i^ co^'
KSxp(o<Tnai
Consonant-Stems.
(Stem d y, originally Pay, § 34, D.), I hreah
tdya (I am l)roken) Idyriv
(§ 375, 2)
Dialects. — 5. Imperf. ^Ivvov for 1<t-vvov [Inf. Pres. dwaOai], Fut. dfx-
0i£(T(u, eWw, Aor. eWa, Mid. isffaaTO, Perf. Mid. el/iat, tWat, Part, dfikvog,
2 Sing. Plup. tWo, 3 Sing, 'iaro, haro, 3 Plur. eVaro.
6. Aor. Mid. Kopkaaaro, Part. Perf. Act. KeKoprjutg, satiated, Mid. keko-
prjfiai.
13. ^^a with ia^a [Her. Perf. tj;7a].
18^
SECOND CLASS OF VERBS IN jut. § 319.
14. ^£iKvy/At, see § 318.
15. e'lpyvvfii (Stem eipy),I shut in (addit. form e'lpyuj)
^ip^^ tipxOTjv
elp^a Part, ep^ag, dpyfiai
16. l^vyvvixi (Stem Kvy),IUnd.
Kev^u) ilvyriv
tZev^a iZevyfiai [t^evxOtjv]
17. KTivvvfii (Stem K r 6 v) , / killj with (cretVw (§253)
18. fiiyvvfii (Stem /iiy),/w^ with /liayw (§ 327,*7)
/xi^w /^£/itX« ( IfiixOrjv
t^iiKa fisfiiyfiai \ ijxiyrjv
19. olyvvjxi (Stem o I y) , / 6>j9eyi (with o 7 y w)
ot^w l<^X« and t<^ya (§ 279) it^x'^nv
ey^a (§ 237) ti^yiiai
20. oXXvfii (Stem 6X and 6X6),for 6Xwfii,Ii
6\w (§ 262) oXtiXem (§ 275, 1)
wXeca
Fut. Mid. oXovfiai oXioXa
.. , , in trans., //)ms^.
0)X0flT]V ) -^
21. ofxvvfii (Stem 6fi, 6}x6)^I swear.
ofiovfxai (Act.) ofiwuoKa (§ 275, 1) wfioaQrjv
wfxoaa g-gjjjg pgj.f jyjij I ofubfioTai Verb. Adj. (dv)w/toroe
( 6lXb)fiO(TTai
22. ofiopywui (Stem bfiopy)^! wipe out.
w/xopKa (Mid.) wfiopx&vv
23. w^yvvfii (Stem tt a y), /^;i; [compare Lat. pango]
.iirrj^a TrsTrijya {I am fixed) \ t7rrix9r]v
i tTrdytjv
24. (6//yvv/ii (Stem pay), J ^mr.
f |0j6;;?a (Mid.) eppojya (I am tom) kppdyrjv
(§ 278) payrjaofiai
25. (TTopvvfxi (Stem trrop), with <TTopkvvvfii (8) and ffTp^vvv/xi (1 1)
26. ^pdyvvfii (Stem <ppay), also (pdpyvvfiij and, according to
Class 4, a, ^pdatro), I shut in, lock in.
Dialects. — 15. Imperf. lepyvv, with Upycj [epyo], 3 Pliir. Perf. Mid.
epxarai, Plup. tpx^''^ (§ 287), Part. Perf. kpyfikvog, Aor. Pass. IpxQtig,
with Imperf. tpyaOov.
18. Aor. Mid., § 316, 37.
19. wV^a, ^^a [avot^a], Imperf, wiyvvvTO.
20. 6Xs<T(T(jj [oXew], Part. Aor. oyXd/xevof (^Z^s^rwc^i^e), with 6Xk-a>.
21. wfiotTcra or bfioaaa.
To these also belong :
27. aivvfiai, aTToaivvfiaij I talce away, used only in the Pres.
320. IRREGULAR VERBS. 189
Obs. — Nouns are formed from the Pure Verbal-Stems, as : ij SeX^t-c,
the announcement; 6 Kpd-rrjp, tTie mixing howl; rb El-fxa^ the clothing
— for Pea-fxa ; r) ^w-vt/, tlie girdle; rj pw-/f»/, the strength ; to arpu>-fia,
the carpet; to Z,vy-6-v,the yoke; 6 6Xe-9po-Q,the ruin; 6 avv-iofio-
Tr}-Q,the conspirator; 6 Trdy-o-g, the frosty h^ar-frostr
Chap. Xlt. — Irregular Verbs of the First
Principal Conjugation.
§ 320. The irregularities of the Greek Verb chiefly con-
sist in the Present- Stem differing from the Verbal- Stem in
a way different from that which has been pointed out above,
§ 245, etc. To the four classes there enumerated the fol-
lowing four classes are to be added.
Obs. — In these as well as in the following lists, the principal forms
only are given, fi-om which the rest are easily formed. (Mid.),
added to a tense, denotes that, in addition to the Active, the
Dialects. — 28. dwni (and dvv(x)), I complete, only Imperf Mid. i)vvto.
29. apvvfiai, I acquire, Aor. i^pSfiriv, Inf. dpeaOai, 1 Aor. 2 Sing, iipao,
3 Sing. TjpaTo.
30. dxvv^ai, I grieve, Aor. dKdxovTo (§ 257, D.), Perf. dKdxrjfJiai (§ 275,
1), 3 Plur. dKTjx^daTai (§ 287, D.), 3 Plur. Plup. dKuxduTo, Part. dKaxn-
fievog and dKrjxsfieuog. Moreover, the Active a/caxiZw (/ grieve), Aor.
■^Kaxov and dKdxr](Ta (compare § 326).
31. ydvvfiai, J rejoice, Fut. yavvaa^Tai.
32. daivvm, I entertain. Opt. Pres. Mid. 3 Sing. daivvTo (§ 318, D.), 3
Plur. daivvuT, Fut. dai(T(o (Mid.), Aor. iSaiaa (Mid.).
33. Kaivvfjiai (Stem Kad), I Surpass, Perf. KSKatrfiai (I am distin-
34. Kivvfiai, I move, additional form of ictvlw, Preterite i-Ki-o-v,Iwent,
Subj. Ki-cj, Opt. Ki-oi-fii, Part, ki-wv.
35. Tivvfii, Tivvfxai, additional form of nVw, § 321, D. 5.
36. opeyvvfii, additional form of dpsycj, I stretch out, 3 Plur. Perf. Mid.
opwpex"^"* (§ 287).
37. opvvfxi (Stem 6 p), I excite, Fut. opaio, Aor. wpopov (§ 257, D.),
Perf. opojpa (§ 275, 1), I have arisen [Lat. or-ior], Aor. Mid. 3 Sing. JjpTo,
arose (§ 316, 38), Perf. Mid. 3 Sing. Ind. 6pa»p-e-Tai, Subj. bpwpriTai, with
Imperf Mid. opkovTo.
38. Tdvvfiai, with Tavvw, reivu), I extend, stretch.
190 FIFTH, OR NASAL CLASS. § 321.
corresponding Middle form is also in use ; e. g.^ in addition to
iTiaa (No. 5) iri(Tdfii]v also is used.
Fifth^ or Nasal Class.
% 321. The Verbal-Stem is strengthened by the addition
of V, or of a syllable containing v, to form the Present-
Stem.
a) V alone, often united with lengthening of the vowel,
is added to the following Stems :
1. Stem /3 a, Pres. /SatVo), I go.
Aor.Act. Fut. Perf. Pass.
i-fin-v (§ 316, 1) ^iiGoiiai (5e^r}Ka (§ 317, 1)
t/3j7-(Ta (3i](To) (§ 329, 2) Verb. Adj. (idrdg
2. Stem £ \ a, Pres. iXavvw,! drive.
fiXd-aa. iXuj (§ 263) ajjXa/ca (§ 275, 1) v^dOriv
i\r)\anai Verb. Adj. eXareog
3. Stem <p6a, Pres. ^9avu),I anticipate.
< t-<pBr]-v (§ 316, 7) <p9r]<Tonai ttpBoLKa
( t-tpOd-aa
4. Stem TV t, Pres. tt i v w, / drink (additional Stem tr o). Compare
§ 827, 10.
t-ni-o-v (§ 316, 15) Trioiiai (§ 265)
5. Stem r t, Pres. rivo)^ I pay penalty.
l-Ti-aa (Mid.) Ti<7ia TSTiKa IriaOTjv
rkncT/xai
6. Stem ^ 1, Pres. ^Oivu), I perish, waste away.
i-^9i-(Ta (pQi<TO}iai t^Oi/iai e^OiOrjv
7. Stem dv, Pres. dvvu) (with dvo), Class 1), I immerge.
i-dv-v (§ 316, 16) H(T(i) dtdvKa idvOrjv
t^vaa, I dipped. m
8. Stem ^afc, Pres. SdKvo),IUte.
t-ddK-o-v drj^ofiuL ^eSrjxa l^i}xdr]V
§ 321. Dialects.— 1. Aor. ]^id. t/B^aero, § 268, D.
2. Pres. tXaw, Fut. eXow, tXd^c, § 243, D., Aor. tXaaffa, Mid. r/Xdcrdfiriv.
3 Plup. Mid. aj^Xd^aro (§ 287, D.) [^Xatreriv].
3. Ep. (pOdvu), Part. Aor. Mid. ^Od/xevog.
5. Ep. Wvw, with n'-w and rtW/it, § 319, D. 35.
6. Ep. (p9tv(o, (pei(o, Aor. e<p9ifiriv, i(p9lTo, § 316, D. 26 ; with Pres. <})9i-
vv9(>).
7. Aor. Mid. idvaeTo, § 268, D. [Pres. tvdweoj, I put on. Compare
§ 323].
§ 322.
FIFTH, OR NASAL OliASj
191
9. Stem Kdfi, Pres. Kctfivu),! weary.
i-Kan-o-v Kafiovfiai KSKfiijKa
10. Stem Tefi, Pres. rkfivu),! cut.
t-Tefi-o-v (trdfiov) TSfid ThfirjKa (§ 283) hfirjOrjv
§ 322. h) The syllable av is added to the following
Stems :
11. Stem aiaO, Pres. ai<T9-av-o-nai, I perceive.
yad-6-fir}v aiffO-rj-ffOfiai yrrO-ij-ixat
12. Stem dfiapr, Pres. duapT-dv-M,! err,
rifiaprfi-Oriv
rjfiapT-o-v afiapT-rj-ffOfiai rjnapT-rj-Ka
13. Stem a u ^, Pres. avK-dv-u) and au?w, / increase [aug-eo]
av^rf^ofiai (Passive)
14. Stemj3Xa<rr, Fres. (5 Xaffrdvcjjllmd.
t-fSkatXT-o-v
15. Stem 5 ape,
i-Sap9-o-v
16. Stem kxO,
(d7r)rix9-6-fir]V
17. Stem I?,
18. Stem KiX)
i-Kix-o-v
19. Stem olS,
20. Stem 6\i<t9,
utXiaQo-v
21. Stem 6ff({>p,
w<T(l>p-6-firjv
22. Stem 6^\,
(iXaffT-rj-au) tjSXdarrijKa (§ 274 exc.)
Pres. dapOdvtj,! sleep.
dapO-'fi-aofiaL deddpOrjKa
Pres. (dTr)e xOdvofiai,Iam hated.
(d7r)€x0-^-<TO/iai (a7r)i7X^^/iai
Pres. I ^ a V w and t^w, I seat myself.
Pres. Klxctvio,Imeet (compare § 313, D. 6)
Kix-rj-oofxai
Pres. olSdvia and oiSeto,! swell.
oidrj-aui (pdrjKa
Pres. 6 \ t (T a 1/ w, I slip.
6\ia9-rj-a(t)
Pres. 6<T<ppaivofiai,I smell.
6(T<pp-r)-(T0fiai
Pres. o^X-ttTK-av-w (compare § 324) and
6(peiX(t), I owe.
6<p\-r)-(T(iJ u)<p\riKa
Dialects. — 9. Part. Perf. KEKfirjcJg, Gen. KeKfirjwTog.
10. With Tfirjyb), Aor. Pass. 3 Plur. irftayev, with Pres. Hfin.
Peculiar to the Hom. dialect are : Aor. 0a-£(v), illuxit, Fut. m-tpfi-
(TOfiai, from Stem <}> a, Pres. ^aivoj ((i>adv(ti), I shine, shmo, Aor. Pass.
^adv9r}v.
§ 322. Dialects. — 12. Aor. ?)//j3porov for r)fipdrov (§ 257, D. Com-
pare § 51, D.).
13. diP)sK(o.
15. Aor. iSpd9ov (§ 257, D.).
18. Ep. KXxdvb).
21. [Herod, datppdnrjv, 1 Aor.]
192 . FIFTH, OR NASAL CLASS. § 322.
23. Sternal, Vve%. av^ dvio^I please.
24. Stem r y, Pres. 9iyyavb)^I touch.
e-9Xy-o-v Oi^ofiai
25. Stem \ a /3, Pres. Xafifidvoj, I take.
t-\d^-o-v Xfjipofiai tiXij^a (§ 274) i\r]<l>9r]V
dXrjuiiai (seldom XeXijuiiai)
26. Stem Xd9, Pres. Xav9dva),I am hidden, with X^0w (Class 3),
Mid., I forget.
t-Xd9-o-v Xrjau) XkXT)9a
Mid. eXa96fiT]v Xrjffofiai XsXrifffiai
27. Stem \ a x, Pres. Xayxavoj,! attain.
t-Xdx-o-v XriKofJiat £tX»7X" (§ 274)
tlXijyuai
28. Stem fid 9, Pres. fiav9dv<o, J^eam.
t-Hd9-o-v fia9-ri-(rofiai ni}id9riKa
29. Stem tt i; 0, Pres. Trvv9dvofiai,I learn, with mv9ofiaL, Class 2.
l-Trv9-6-HT]v ireixTOfiai ireTrvfffiai
30. Stem r i; x, Pres. rvyxdvu),! meet, with reux*^) I prepare, CI. 2.
i-Tvx-o-v TEv^ofiai TS-Tvx-^-Ka
seldom Hrevxa
31. Stem ^vy, Pres. (pvyydvco, IJiee, with ^evyw (Class 2).
O&s. 1. — The verbs in 23-31, whose Stem forms a short syllable,
insert another nasal in addition to the affix a v. In ^aivio (1)
and dffippaivofiai (21) i has crept in (§ 253), as well as in Kepdaivu),
I gain, which forms only the Perf. KeKspdrjKa, from the Stem Ksp da ;
all the other forms are regular, according to Class 4. A large
part of the verbs (No. 11-16, 18-22, 28, and 30) form either some
. or all the tenses, except those of the Present-Stem, from a Stem
in € (compare below, § 326).
Ohs. 2. — The following may serve as examples of the formation of
nouns : to (^fj-fia, the step ; jy (p9i-(n-g, the consumption ; 6 KUfi-aTo-g,
Dialects.— 23. Imperf , § 237, D., Aor. [eaSov'] evadov (§ 237), [ddriaio]
'dada.
25. [Her. Fut. XdfixpofiaL, Perf. XeXdi3r)Ka, Aor. Pass. iXdfi(p9T}v.
XeXa/i/wai, Verb. Adj. Xa/iTrrof.]
Hom. Inf. Aor. Mid. X€Xa(3s(T9ai (§ 257, D.).
26. Pres., with lKXT]9dvo), cause to forget, Aor. eXijca and XsXd9ov
(§ 257, D.), XeXa96nT]v (I forgot), Perf. Mid. XeXacr/iai.
27. Aor. XkXaxov,! sTiared with [Fut. Xd^o/tat], Perf. XeXoyx"-
29. Aor. Opt. 7re7rv9oiTo (§ 257, D.).
30. Also Tevx<*), Aor. tstvkeiv, Mid. tevvkovto, Perf. Tsrvyfiai, 3 Plur.
TtTEvxarai, Aor. kTvx9T]v, with the Pres. TiTv<7K0fiai (§ 324, D. 37), / aim
at, Aor. iTvxr}<Ta, I met (§ 326).
§ 324. SIXTH CLASS, OR INCHOATIVE VERBS. 193
the exiiaustion; to Xij^-jxa, the assumption; ri Xr]9-r}, ths forgetting;
V Tvx-n^ i^ chance^ accident ; and from Stems which are length-
ened by £ : »7 ai(T9-r]-(n-g, the sensation; to afidpT-r]-fia^ the error;
6 naO-jj-Trj-g, the scholar.
§ 323. c) The syllable ve is added to the following
Stems :
32. Stem /3 u, Pres. jSww, I stop up.
t-^v-aa (3v(T(o Mid. ^k^vfffiai
33. Stem i k, Pres. iKvovfiai,! come, with iKavo), according to
§323
iK-o-fitjv 'l^ofiai ly/xai
34. Stem k v, Pres. Kvvko),! kiss.
i-KV-aa
35. Stem ttet, Pres. tt i r v e w, I fall (compare TrtVrw, § 327, 15)
t-TTBo-o-v (for l-7r€r-o-r), together with t-TriTv-o-v
36. Stem u tt e x, Pres. vtc laxvov jiai, I pivmise (compare ix(o,
§ 327, 6)
VTTSffxonrjv VTroffxv^ofiai vireffxilfJiai
so likewise dfnriax^ovfiai, I wear (also anTrkxofiai), Aor. tjixttktxoVj Inf.
dflTTKTXf^V.
§ 324. Sixth Class, or Inchoative Verbs.
The Yerbal-Stem is enlarged by affixing o-k to form the
Present- Stem. This o- k is added to Yowel- Stems (exc. 21)
at once, but to Consonant- Stems after the insertion of the
connecting vowel i. Several of the verbs belonging to this
class (Nos. 2, 6, 7, 13, 14, 16, 20) farther strengthen the
Present-Stem by means of a reduplication with the vowel
£ : yi'yvw-(TK-(x) [Lat. {g)-no-sc-o'],
§ 323. Dialects.— 32. [Herod. fHvoj.]
33. 'iKio, Aor. l^ov (§ 268, D.), Part. iK/jievog,favoraI)le (§ 316, D.).
34. Kvaaa.
Moreover (to a — c), the Verbs :
37. Stem dXiT, Pres. dXiTaivto, I sin, Aor. ^Xtrov, Mid. dXiVovro, Part.
Perf. d\iTT]fievog, sinful.
38. Stem a X 0, Pres. d\<i)dvo), I acquire, Aor. ^\(pov.
39. dyivku), only in Yres., I lead, with aycj.
40. Ipvyydvu), I roar, Aor. ijpvyov, Pres. also ipevyofjiai.
41. Stem xdd, Pres. x«i'^«»'w, / embrace, Aor. tx«^o^, Fut. x«t<^o/^«i;
Perf. KBxavda.
I
194 SIXTH CLASS, OR INCHOATIVE VERBS. § 324.
As many of these verbs denote a beginning or coming
into being, all of them are usually called Inchoatives.
Stems in a,
1. Stem yrjpa, Pres. yrjpd-aK-io, I grow old (seldom yrjpd-io). Com-
pare sene-sc-o
i-yr]pd-aa yrjpd-aofxai ye-yr/pa-Ka
Inf. yrjpd-vai (§ 316, 2)
2. stem dp a, Pres. di-d pd-<TK-(D^ I run (used only in com-
pounds)
t-dpd-v Spd-aofiai ds-dpd-Ka (§ 316, 3)
3. Stem jf j3 a, Pres. ti^d-oK-io^ I hecome marriageable (compare
pvbe-scrd)
i](3T}-<Ta
4. Stem 9va (from d v), Pres. 9vT]-(TK-io,Idie (usually aTroOvridKw)
t-9dv-ov 6dv-ov/iai Ts-Qvtj-Ka (§ 317, 3)
Fut. 3, Ttepr]^u}, § 291 evTj-To-Q
(mortal)
5. Stem IXa, Pres. i\d-(TK-ofiai, I conciliate.
Mid. iXd-ad-fiijp tXa-(T-o-/iai iXd-aOij-v
6. Stem fiva^ â– Pres. jx i- ft vri-<TK-u), I remember.
i-fivrj-(Ta nvr)-a(3) i-iivrj-aOr}-v
fik-fiVT]-nai fivr]-<T9r](T0fiaL
[Tuemini]
7. Stem TT pa, "PreB. 'TTi-Trpd-ffK-u),! sell.
(for the Aor. and Fut. dTridofirjv irk-irpd-Ka B-7rpd-9Tjv
dTToddxTOfxaC) Trk-7rpd-/iai 7rpa-9r}(TO/xat
TTB-TTpd-ffOHai
8. Stem (p a, Pres. ^ a - tr <c - w, / say. ' Compare (prj-fii, § 312, 5.
9. Stem X a and % « ^j Fres. % a - a k - w, / open the mouth.
i-Xdv-ov xdv-ov^iai Kk-xriv-a.
Stem in c.
10. Stem dpE^ Pres. apk-oK-w^ I please.
fipi-aa dpe-ffu) rjpk-a9r}v.
Stems in (i).
11. Stem/3iw, Pres. (dva)(3iu>-(rK-ofxai,I revive.
(dv)e-(3i<o-v (§ 316, 13)
{dv)e(3i(t)<rdfirjv, I revived. Compare § 329.
§ 324. SIXTH CLASS, OR INCHOATIVE VERBS. 195
13. Stem (3 \ 10 (from /io\, § 51, D.), Pres. jiXdi-a k-m^I go.
e-fio\-ov fioX-ovfiai •
13. Stem fipo), Pres. l3i-(3pu)-(TK-o), I consume.
l3e-l3poj-Ka (Part. /3£/3pwf, § 317,
D. 16)
/3£-,3jO(i»-/iai
14. Stem y v w, Pres. y i-yvio-ffK-o)^ I recognize [Lat. (g)no-sc-o]
i-yv(i)-v (§ 316, 14) yvu)-aofiai i-yvcj-ica i-yvu)-aBriv
• t-yv(o-(r-fiai
15. Stem 9p(o (from o p), Pres. Oput-aK-o), I leap.
t-Bop-ov
16. Stem rpw, Pres. n-Tpw-cK-oj, I wound.
t-rpio-aa rpw-aio rk-Tpio-fiai l-Tp(t)-9r}v
17. Stem aX and dXw, Pres. aX-i-oK-o fiai^I am taken.
j «-a\w-v aXdj-aofiai t-dXoj-Ka or ijXcj-Ka
i ijXojv (§ 316, 12) (compare § 237)
18. Stem d/i/3\ and d/i/3Xw, Pres. dfi^X-i-GK-tjj, I miscarry.
i'lfijSXcj-aa rifi(3XiiJ-Ka
19. Stem d vaX and avaXio, Pres. dvdX-i-<TK-oj, I expend.
dvdXb}-aa or dvrjXitxra dvdXcj-ffCJ j di^aXw-ica j dvdXw-Qrjv
also j}j/dXw-ora ( dvfjXw-Ku ( dvrjXb)-9r}v.
Stem in t.
20. Stem tt t, Pres. in-7ri-aK-<u, I give to drink. Compare tti-v-w,
§ 321, 4.
i-7n-<Ta Tri-ffu)
Stems ill V,
21. stem Kv, Pres. Kv-i-<TK-a), I fructify.
22. Stem jtt 1 y, Pres. fieGv-(TK-(o, I make drunk, Mid., I decome drunk,
l-fikev-aa t-fieOv-aeriv. .
Consonant-Stems.
23. Stem dfiirXdK, Pres. d fiTrXdK-i-a k-m, I fail.
yfiTrXdK-ov dfnrXdK-i)-(Ji»)
24. Stem (£7r)a v p, Pres. (t7r)a vp-i-aK-ofiat, I enjoy.
tTTtJVp-OflTJV
Inf. tiravp-'taOai
§ 324. Dialects. — 12. Perf. fie-fi-ji-Xcj-Ka (compare § 51, D., and .
§282,D.).
13. Aor. t-(3pu)-v (§ 316, D. 23), with tlie Pres. /36/3/3w06>.
15. 3 Pirn-. Fut. Gopeovrai [with edp-vv-fiai, according to § 319].
16. With rpw-w.
24. Aor. tTTtjvpov, Inf. tTravpeiv.
196 SIXTH CLASS, OR INCHOATIVE VERBS. § 324.
25. Stem evp, Pres. ev p-i-cr k-u), IJind.
evp-ov (Mid?) evp-r]-(T(i) fvp-ij-K-a evp-e-9r}v
(.vp-r]-Hai Evp-e-OTj-ffOfiai
26. Stem (rrep^ Pres. crrsp-i-ff k-m, I deprive (with artpib, Mid. ^
(TTEpofiai, I am deprived)
k-arkp-rj-aa (XTep-rj-cru) i-arkp-ri-Ka e-(TTep-r}-9r]v
i-<TTsp-i]-fiai
27. Stem dXvK, Pres. dXv-crK-a), I shun.
tjXv^a dXv^o)
28. Stem diddx, Pres. d idd'aK-o),Iteach.
i-di^a^a didd^u) Se-Sidax-a i-di-ddxOriv
^E-didayfxai
29. Stem X&k, Pres. Xd-(TK-(o,I utter, speak.
i-XttK-ov XaK-r]-(TOfiaL j Xs-XrjK-a
i-XdK-ri-aa \ Xk-XdK-a.
Obs. 1. — The last three Stems suppress a Guttural before ok. Sev-
eral of the Stems quoted form a part of the tenses by affixing «
to the Stem (compare § 322, Ohs., and § 326), especially Nos. 23,
25, 26, 29.
Obs. 2. — The following may serve as examples of the formation of
nouns : 6 Odv-a-ro-g, death ; to fivij-fieXo-v, the memorial ; 6 ahro-
fioX-o-g, the deserter; y yvaj-fir}, the opinion ; y) a\w-<Ti-f, the capture;
6 didd(TK-aXo-g (from the Present-Stem), the teacher; ») SiSax-rj
(from the Verbal-Stem), the instruction; and from Stems which
are enlarged by e : t6 evp-rj-fia, the discovery; t) aTep-rj-cri-g, the
deprivation.
Dialects. — 26. Aor. (mphtrai, Part. Pass. Aor. ffTepsig.
28. [diSacTKTjfrai] a secondary Stem is d a, Aor. dkdaov, I taught (§ 326,
D. 40)..
29. Ion. form Xt/kew (§ 325), Fern. Part. Perf XeXdKvXa.
And the S^Decial Verbs :
30. Stem dXcTa, Pres. dXdfjffKO), I become great, Aor. ijXdavov, I made
great.
31. Stem /c\€, Pres. kikXtjctku), with koXsio, I call.
32. Stem ^av, Pres. [(pav-trK-oj] Tri-^av-aK-u), I call.
33. Stem dTra^ (from d^), Pres. d-n-aip-i-ffK-cj, I deceive, Aor. y'7ra<pov,
SClbj. d7rd(p(t).
34. Stem d p, Pres. dp-ap-i-aK-oj, I Jit, Aor. ypapov, I fitted, Perf. dpijpa,
I suit, Fern. Part, dpdpvla, Part. Mid. dpfievog, suitable, Weak Aor. ypaa,
I fitted, Aor. Pass. dp9riv.
35. Stem Ik, Pres. k-t-cK-u),! mdke equal (compare § 317, B. 7).
36. Imperf. "lOK^iy), he spolce.
37. Stem tvx (compare § 322, 30), Pres. riTvaKOfxai, I aim at.
§ 325. SEVENTH, OR E-CLASS. 197
§ 325. Seventh, or E-class.
A short Stem alternates with one enlarged by c.
A) The enlarged Stem in e is the Present- Stem; the
shorter serves to form the other tenses.
1. Stem ya/i, Pres. yaixe-o), I marry (Act. uxorem dtico, Mid. nubo)
i-yr]^-a yafi-iSJ (Mid.) ye-yafX-ij-Ka
ye-ycLfX-ri-fiai
2. Stem yT]9, Pres. yt]Qk- it), I rejoice.
yk-yrjO-a, I am rejoiced.
3. Stem d OK, Pres. d oks-o),! seem.
i-do^a So^u) Mid. dsSoy-fiai
4. Stem Kv p, Pres. kv pe-o) and Kvpoj, I meet.
i-KVp-aa Kvpcro)
5. Stem fiapTvp, Pres. ixapTvpe-io^Iam icitness.
Mid. fiapriponai, I call to witness.
6. Stem %vp, Pres. ^vpe(o,I shave. Mid. ^vpo/xai-
l-^vp-aiii]v t^vp-r]-fiai
7. Stem TTUT, Pres. Trare-o fiai^Ieat.
t-Traca/iT^v irkiraajxai
8. Stem pt^, Pres. pnrr-e-io and plttt-uj (according to § 249),/
tJirow.
tppirpa pi\p<jj ippi^a j tppitprjv
ippififxai I tppi<p9r]v
9. Stem w 9, Pres. w9s-io, I push.
t-ojaa (§ 237) wo-w {u)9i](T(ti Mid.) i-utr-fiai t-w(T9i]v
§ 325. Dialects. — 1 Fut. yafi4(o, 3 Sing. Fut. Mid. ya/xeafjeTai, slw will
marry.
3. [^0Ki7(rw, t^oKT/o-a.]
8. 3 Sing. Plup. Mid. IpepnrTo.
Besides :
a) Stem yeyiov, Pres. yeyajve-oj^Icall, Perf. yiywi^a, Fut. yf.yo}vr](7(s).
1)) Stem ^ a r, Pres. Sars-ofiai, I distribute, Fut. ddcofiai, Aor. ^do-traro,
Perf. ^k^aarai.
c) Stem d ovTT, Pres. dovTrk-o},I malce a sound, Aor. l{y)^ovTrr)-aa, Perf.
67) Stem €tX, tX, Pres. d-\k-io,I j^ress, Impcrf. tfiXfov (§ 237), Aor. 3
Pirn-. t\aav, Perf. Mid. teX/zat, Aor. Pass. edX?;!/ (§ 295), 3 Plur. aXiv, Inf.
e) Stem KeXaS, Pres. Kika^e-tx), I resound. Part. KsXdd-Mv.
f) Stem fc € V r, Pres. Kevre-oj, I stiJig, Aor. Inf. Ksv-crai.
198 SEVENTH, OR E-CLASS. § 326.
Obs. — In some verbs the Stem with e extends even farther than the
Present-Stem. Examples of the formation of nouns : b ydfi-o-Q,
the wedding; r) So^a, the ajipearance ; to fiaprvp-io-v, the testimony;
â– t) bj-ai-g or wQrj-aiQ^ pushing.
% 326. B) The shorter Stem is the Present-Stem ; the
enlarged one in £ serves to form the other tenses.
10. Stem aid{t), Pres. ald-ofiai and aldk-ofiai, I am ashamed.
11. Stem d \ € ^ (e), Pres. d \ I ^ - w, / ward off.
ijX^^-dixriv aXe^-rj-(Toixai
12. Stem d X (0? Pres. axQ-ofiai^I am xiexed.
dxOe-aojxai rixQ'^-<y9r}v
dx0e-(T9r](TOfiaL
13. Stem (3o<TK (f), Pres. (3 6(tk-o), T pasture.
l3o<ricf)-aio ; from the Stem /3 o the Verb. Adj . ^o-t6q
14. Stem (iovX (c), Pres. (iov\-ofiai,I will.
(Augment, § 234) (SovXIj-aoixai (is-(3ovXri-fiai t-(5ovXrj-Qr]v
15. Stem ^6(e), Pres. di-u),I need {M, it is necessary), Mid. Saofiai,
I require.
t-der}-(Ta Serf-au) de-Serj-Ka k-d£^-9t]v (§ 328, 2)
16. Stem I p (e), Pres. not usual (§ 327, 13)
i)p-6^t}v, I asked. lpr)-(TOfiai, Inf. ip'taBai
17. Stem ip|6(e), Pres. tpp-io, I go away,
fjpprj-ffa tppt]-(Jio TippT]-Ka .
Dialects. — g) Stem ktvtt, Pres. Krvn-k-io, I ring, Aor. tK-nJTr-ov.
h) Pres. TTif^w and 7rte^£-w,/j?r^ss, Aor. lirUaa.
i) Stem p I y, Pres, piyi-w, I shudder, Perf tppiya.
Tc) Stem orvy, Pres. <xTvys-io,Ihate, shun, Aor. tarvyov and (TTvyrjffaiy
tarv^a, I made dreadful.
I) Stem ^ t X, Pres. ^iXtw, / Zm?*?, Aor. l-(fCX-d-\i.i\v.
Ill) Pres. x9<^^^V^''^^i I help, Aor. txpaia/xov.
Three Verbs in aw with a movable a are here to be noticed :
n) Stem y o, Pres. yod-(o, I wail, Imperf. l-yo-ov.
o) Stem jxd K, Pres. p,r]Kd-o.-}iai, I low, Perf, fik-nrjK-a, Aor. t-fidK-ov.
p) Stem fiijK, Pres. fivKd-o-fiai, I roar, Perf. ^kfivK-a, Aor. tfivK-ov.
§ 326. Dialects. — 10. y^kaaro, Imperat. ai^ecraai, Fut. aiU-oonai, Aor.
Pass. 3 Plur. olhadEv.
11. dXaXKoa/ (§ 257).
14. Pres. f36XeTai, Imperf tfSoXovTo, Perf ^k^ovXa.
15. Aor. thvr](Ta, once ^/"/cra, I was in want of, also Pres. ^eyo/xai.
16. Pres. elpofiai, Fut. elprjaofiai.
§ 326. SEVENTH, OR E-CLASS. 199
18. Stem evd{e), Pres. ev ceo, I sleep (generally KaOevSu))
Augment, § 240 (KaO)Evdri-(Toj
19. Stem c ^ («), Pres. s ;// - a>, / cooh
i]}pr]-(Ta ixptj-tjo/xai tj^prj-fiai r)\l/r)-6T]V
Verb. Adj. t(i>06g
20. Stem 9e\(e) or l9eX{e), Pres. 9s\-io or ies\-o), I will
rjOtXij-ffa {t)9E\ri-(ru) ,rt9k\r}-Ka
21. Stem iS(e), Pure Stem tiJ, Pres. 'li^ofiai, I seat myself; also
iKdvoj, Class 5. Compare eKofiai.
iKa9i(Tdfir]v (§ 240) Ka9iZ,i]<Tonai and Ka9edovfiai (§ 2G3)
22. Stem kXuv and icXaie, Pres. KXaio) (kXoho), I weep. Com-
pare § 253.
tKXav-aa KXair)<T(i) with.' KXavcrofiai
23. Stem /tax (e), Pre^ fidxo fiai, IJigTit.
l-/iaxi-(Tdixt]v fxaxovfiai (§ 263) fie-fidxv-H-(^'-
24. Stem fiEX{e), Pres. fisXei fioi,it is a care to me ; Mid. /^eXo-
juai, I care for^ take care of.
i-fieXT}-(Te fieXt)-<Tet /xe-fikXrj-Ke t-fx.EXr]-9r]v
{lTn)fiEXr](TOfiai
25. Stem /i e X \ (e), Pres. fi eXX-oj, lam on tlie point, hesitate.
i)-^EXXr]-<ra fieXXrj-ab)
(§ 234, Ohs.)
26. Stem fiev{e), Pres. fikv-u, I remain [mane-o, man-si], Verbal
Adj. fiev-e-Tog
i-fieiva {itv-Ca fie-fievij-Ka
27. Stem fivK (f), Pres. ixv^o), I such
28. Stem veju(€), Pres. vsfi-cj, I assign.
t-veifia vEfx-uj ve-vefuj-Ka (Mid.) e-vefir]-9T]v
29. Stem 6K(e), Pure Stem dd, Pres. uK-(o,I smell.
ujKr}-(Ta d^-(To} od-(o8-a (§ 275,1).) [Lat. od-ov]
30. Stem oi(€), Pres. oi-ofiai,ItMnJc (compare § 244)
oir]-(TOfiat (^rj-9Tiv
31. Stem oi'xCO? Pres. olx-ojxai,I am off.
olxri-CTOfiai oix-wfc-a
Dialects. — 19. [Imperf. t^ee.]
23. fiax^-ofiai, Part, ^ax^iofievog or ^axEovfievog, Fut. juaxv^^ofiai and
juax£<T'o/iat.
24. Perf. fXEfirjXs, Plup. fisfiriXei, Perf. Mid. nk-fi-^-XE-Tai (Plup. -ro),
§51,D.
26. Perf. fikjiova, I am disposed, strive.
30. Pres. bt-ofxai, 6i-w, Aor. Mid. otaaro, Aor. Pass. m.a9r]v.
31. Perf. oixnKa {olx^fxai), with the Pres. ot'x-vi-w, according to § 323.
200 SEVENTH, OR E-CLASS. § 326.
(oix-iOK-a, with irreg. Reduplication [§ 275] for o/x-wx-a. Com-
pare § 35, a)
32. Stein 60ei\(€), Pure Stem o^eX, Pres. 6(pei\u), I owe (§ 253,
Obs.)
uk})eX-ov [utinarri] 6<pEiX7j-(X(o ujcpdXrj-Ka
oxpeiXrj-aa
33. Stem rrepd^e), Pres. jrepdu)
i-Trapd-ov 7rapdt]-<T0fiai irk-iropd-a
34. Stem tt (e) r (e), Pres. Trkr-ofiai, I Jiy.
l-7r{e)T-6-/J.T)v 7r{s)ri]-(T0fiai
(§61,c)
35. Stem pv{e), Pres. pko), I Jiow (§ 248).
ippev-<Ta (rare, § 260, 2) pvrj-ao/iai Ippvrj-Ku Ippvrjv
(with peixTOfiai)
36. Stem <Tri/3(e), Pres. (TTei(i-io,Itread.
i-arilSij-fxai
37. Stem tv-ttts, Pure Stem r w tt (§249), Pres. rvirrw, 1 strike.
i-TVTT-ov TVTTTri-au} Mid. Te-rvfi-fiai l-rvTr-rjv
38. Stem x « * |0 «, Pure Stem x a p, Pres. xccipfo, I rejoice (§ 253)
XciLpr]-aix) KS-xdpT}-Ka k-xdp-T)v
Ke-xdpr]-fiai
Obs. — The e sometimes appears in all the tenses except the Present,
sometimes only in some of them ; sometimes it is added to the
pure, sometimes to the strengthened Stem: fiev-e, aTi{3-e, t^e,
6Ke, TVTrre. The formation of nouns -shows the same varieties :
aldrj-fKjjv, shame-faced ; r) (iovXi]-(n-g, voluntas; lOeX^-fKjjVyVoluntarj/;
Dialects. — 38. Part. Perf. Ksxaprnog, Fut. Kexapriao), Aor. Ixriparo, and
3 Plur. KsxdpovTo, § 257, D.
Besides :
39. Stem dX9{e), Pres. dXO-ofiai, I become well, Fut. dXOri-ffofiai.
40. Stem d a, Aor. dedaov (§ 257, D.), / taught, Aor. Mid. Inf. dedda-
<r9ai {to get to hiow), Aor. Pass, tddriv {I learned), besides Fut. dariffofiai,
Perf deddrjKa, Part. Perf deSaiog.
41. Stem Kr]d{e), Pres. Kt)S-u), I grieve, Fut icjy^jy-aw, Perf KeKr]d-a (/
am concerned), Fut. KEKadrjaonai.
42. Stem fied{a), Pres. ned-io, I rule, Mid., I reflect, Fut. fiEdrj-tro/xai.
43. Stem tt 1 0, Pres. TreiQtu, I persuade, Fut. also Tn9r)<Tu), Part. Aor.
44. Stem ro|o(€), Aor. t-rop-ov and l-Toprj-cra, I bored through, Fut
r£ro|077-(ra>.
45. Stem ^ i ^, Pres. (pEidoixai, I spare, Aor. Mid. Tre(pidka9aL (§ 257, D.),
Fut. Trecpidrj-aofiai.
§ 327. EIGHTH, OR MIXED CLASS. 201
6 fiaxv-Trf-c, t^ warrior ; y fiEWrj-fri-g, the delay; fiov-ifio-g, remain-
ing; 6 vofi-o-g, the law; y od-ixTj, the smell; 7) x^P'^j the jay .
§ 327. EigJitJi^ or Mixed Class.
Several essentially different Stems unite to form one
verb ;
1. Present aipk-ix),! tdk£, ; Mid., I choose ; Stems a\p?. and k X.
€CK-ov (§ 336) aipr)-a(i) yprj-Ka ype-9r]V
Inf. (Xuv
d\6fir]v aiprj-(TOfiai yprj-fiai
2. Pres. t px-o /xai, I go, come ; Stems kpx and t\(v)9
fiX[v]9-ov IXev-aofxai tX-rjXvO-a (§ 275)
Imperat. lX9s (§ 333, 12)
Inf. tX9eiv. The place of the Fiit. is generally supplied by eJiu.
3. Pres. tp d-oj and peZ-io,I do; Stems tpd, epy, pey
i-pe^a tp^ii) • ipkx9r]v
Obs. — The original Verbal-Stem is /^ e |0 y, hence to Fkpy-o-v (§ 34,
D.), Att. tpy-o-v, worJc ; from (P)tpy,hj the addition of the en-
largement of the Present i (Class 4), arose {P)tpy-t-(o, and from
this tpS-(o. But by metathesis P epy became P pey, and, with
loss of the P, pey, whence the regular Present, according to Class
4, is piZ-o), i. <?., pey-t-u) (§ 251).
4. Pres. t(r9i-(x),I eat ; Stem l(r9L, tS{e) [ed-o], and ^ a y
t-(l>ay-ov Fut. td-ofiai kd-rjdoKU (§ 275) TjSa-<T9T]v
(§ 265) t^-rjhafxai
5. Pres. s TT - o n a I, I follow (Imperf e'nrofirjv, § 236); Stems Itt and
(r(£)7r
i-(nr-6p.r]v 'iiponai * Sul>j. (r7rio-fj.at Inf. aTrk(T9ai
Obs. — The original Stem is o-e tt, from which k tt has arisen by weak-
ening 0- to the rough breathing (§ 60, V). In the Aor. Ind. the
rough breathing is not organic, e being properly only the Aug-
ment. Besides this there is a syncope (§ 61, c).
§ 327. Dialects. — 1. [^apaipyKa, dpaiprjfiai, § 275.]
2. Aor. fiXv9ov, Perf eiXriXov9a (§317, D. 13), Part. tXr]Xov9wc.
3. [Pres. spS-oj] Perf iopya (§ 275, D. 2), Plup. iuipyeiv, Aor. tp^a and
tpe^a.
4. Pres. t(T9ix) and tcio, Inf. 't^-p.evai, Perf tS-rjS-a, Mid. IS/jSoTai.
5. Pres. Act. tVw, I am occupied, Aor. t-air-ov, Inf. (nrelv, Part, (nrwv^
Fut. fi/'w, Subj. Aor. Mid. tWw/^ai, kaTroifiyv, kaTrk(T9ai, kaTTofievoQ.
I 2
202 EIGHTH, OR MIXED CLASS. § 327.
C. Pres. tx-i^^I'have^ liold (Imperf. fixov, § 236) ; Stems tx a^^l (Tx(e)
t-ax-ov, I seked. 1. i'^w (Mid.)
Subj. <TxtD, Opt. axoir]v
Inf. ax^lv^ Part, ax^v 2. axtj-aa) i-axrj-Ka e-(Txs-9r}v
Imperat. ax^-c (§ 316, 11) i-crxv-fiai Iktoq (tx^toq
Mid. t-(TX-6fiT]v, CTXwyuai, etc.
Ind. Gx-tadai
Obs. — The original Stem is o- e x> from which « x lias arisen by weak-
ening a to the rough breathing (§ 60, 1). From (rex by syncope
came t-ax-o-v, by metathesis ax^, from which axs-e, t-axv-Ka.
From i X came the Future Ua and the Verbal Adj. t/c-rd-e, while
in the Present-Stem the rough breathing was changed into the
soft breathing, because of the aspirate in the following syllabic
(§ 53, 5, Ohs.) : tx-oj for ix"^* Compare also v-n-icrxveofiai and dfi-
iriaxveofiai, § 323, 36. All the Stem forms also appear in the
formation of nouns : to axT}- ^a^ the form ; i) t^i-g ^ the leaving ; ix-
vp6-Q,Jirm^ tenable.
7. Pres. fiiay-w, I mix, misc-eo ; Stems fiKry and ft i y, additional
form fiiyvvfii (§ 319, 18).
8. Pres. opd-a),I see; Stems 6pa, iS, ott
Eid-ov (Mid.) vxpofiai t-wpd-KU w<pQr]v
UTT-iOTT-a (§ 275)
Imperat. l^a Mid. Idou (333, 12)
Inf. io-eiv tiopd-fiai opdroQ
lOfi-lXaL OTTTOg
Obs. — On the irregular Augment of the Stem bpa (Imperf. iwpwv),
§ 237. The Stem l d was originally Pid {^ 34, D.). Compare
^'wZ-e-o ; the Aor. Ind. therefore, e-PiS-ov, with Syllabic Augment,
contracted to eU-o-v, but Subj. Id-io, Opt. U-oi-fii. The Perf of
this Stem is oUa^Ucrww (§ 317, 6). All three Stems appear also
in the formation of nouns : rb opd-fia, the spectacle ; to eW-og, the
form, appearance; j) o-^i-r, tlie sight; to 6fi-fia, the eye, hole.
0. Pres. 7rd(Tx-<^,I »ujfer; Stem ttoo-x, 7ra0(£), ttbvO
t-irdO-ov Trd-aop.ai irk-TrovB-a TraOrj-Tog
(for TTSvO-troftai, § 50)
Dialects.— 6. Perf. 5x-<u/c-a (§ 326, 31), Perf. Mid. ^yfim, 3 Plur. Plup.
WXCITO.
8. Aor. Idov, Weak Aor. Mid. kiaaTo and daaTO, Part, kicrdfievog to
the Pres. etdo/xai, I appear, resemble (compare § 34, D. 4). As a shorter
additional form of the Stem 6 pa, we find in Homer the Stem 6p {Pop),
thence 3 Plur. Pres. kirl bp-o-vTai, they overhoTc.
9. 2 Plur. TtkirouQ^ (§ 317, D. 14), Part. miraQvla.
§ 327. EIGHTH, OR MIXED CLAS§. 203
Obs. — From the shorter* Stems we have the nouns : to TrdQ-og^ the
suffering; to irevO-og, the mourning.
10. Triv-(o, I drinlc ; Steins Trtv, 7rt, tto [Latin ^o-tus]. Compare
§ 331, 4.
t-TTL-OV Fut. TTl-Oflai (§ 265) TTS-TTIO-Ka l-7r6-9t]V
Imperat. ttI-Oi (§ 316, 15) 7r£-7ro-/xai tto-toq
Obs. — From the Stem tto we have the nouns: 6 7r6-TT]-c,po-tor; r)
TTo-m-g, po-tio ; to iro-Trjpio-v, po-culu-m.
11. Pres. rp£x-w,/rw/i; Stems rpex and dpEfx
i-dpdfx-ov dpaixovfi-ai Se-dpdfiij-Ka OpsKTSov
OpB^ofjiai (§ 54, c)
Obs. — Nouns from both Stems : 6 Tpox-6-g, the wheel; 6 dpofi-Ev-g,
the runner.
12. Pres. <psp-o),I carry [fero] ; Stems ^ep, lve{y) k, o l
-qveyK-ov oi-(T(i) tv-Tjvox-a (§ 275) oi-<T-0ri<JO}iai
ol-a-TOQ
fjveyK-a (§ 269) ijvkx-Oriv
i^veyK-d-firjv olaofiai tv-rjvey-fiai fci^ex-^r/co/uai
Obs. — From the Stem <pep we have the nouns: ro ^ep-e-Tpo-v,t7ie.
bier; 6 (pop-o-g^ the contribution, tax; 6 ^6p-To-g, the Mrden.
13. Aorist el-TTov,! spoke ; Stems e i tt, i p, and p e
dTT-OV
el-rr-a (§ 269) tp-ui u-pr}-Ka (§ 274, Obs.) IppfjOtjv
Imperat. eiTr-e Inf. eiTr-elv £i-pr]-fiai pr]-9r](Tonai
(§333,12) ^
ei-pf]-<T-ofiai prj-To-g
Obs. — The Stem e / tt has arisen by contraction from e-ett, and i-eir
from Pe-pETT, the reduplicated Aorist-Stem of the Verbal-Stem Pi.ir
{tTTog, word, § 34, D. 1). This is the reason why the dijihthong
d belongs not to the Indicative alone (§ 257, D.). The Stem tp
(Fut. tpw), to which the Mid. IpsaOai, to ask (§ 326, 16) belongs,
has likewise lost P, it being originally Pep (compare Lat. «jer-bu-m).
From Pep, by metathesis (§59), arose Ppe, after the loss of the P, pe,
Dialects. — 11. Wpe^a [Spafieo/xai], Sedpofia.
12. 3 Plur. Imperat. Pres. <pep-Te [Lat. fo^te], Aor. yveiKa, 3 Sing.
Opt. Ive'iKai {tve'iKoi) [Perf. ivr]veiyfiai\, Imperat. Aor, pZo-e, Inf. olaefievai
(§268,D.).
13. Pres. e'lpu) (Class 4, d), Aor. i<nr-ov (Stem aev, compare 5), 7
spoke, Imperat. tair-ere, Pres. tv-e-jr-oj, Imperat. tvveire (§ 62, D.), Aor.
ivKTirov, Subj. iviaiTii), Opt. 2 Sing. ivi(JTrQig, Imperat. tvitnce and tvicnreg,
Fut. Ivixpu) and IvKnrijffco.
204 irregula:kities of meaning. § 328.
hence ei-prj-KU for Pe-fprj-Ka, Ippri-Orj-iT for E-Ppf]-9r]-v, prj-ro-g for
Pprj-ro-g. As Present forms, 0/;/ij, Xlyw, and, especially in com-
pounds, dyopevoj may be used, e. g., dTrayopevcj, I forbid ; Aor.
dTreiTTov, Fut. ctTrepu), Perf. cnrdpr]Ka. Nouns from tlae Stems k tt
and pe : I'l o^, the voice; to pfj-fia, the word; 6 prj-Tcop, the orator.
In addition to these, there are three verbs which redu-
plicate the Stem in the Present :
14. Present yi-yv-ofxai (also yiv-ofiat), I become.
Stem y I - y (e) V and y e v («) (Lat. gi-g(e)n-o, Perf. gen-m)
l-yev-o-firiv yevrj-ffonai ye-yov-a
ye-ysvT}-fiai
Obs. — From the Stem yev we have to yev-og, the rcLce^genm; oi
yov-iiQ, the parents^ from y e v c, r) yive-ffi-g, the origin.
15. Pres. TTi-TTT-bi (from 7ri-7reT-w),IfaU; Stem ttIttt, ttbt, tttcj
l-TTEtr-ov, from t-Trer-ov (§ 60, a), Trta-ovfiai (§ 264), Tre-Trrw-Ka (com-
pare § 323, 35).
Obs. — From the Stem tttw : ») TTTuj-ai-e, to irTw-fia, the fall.
' 16. Pres. Ti-Tpd-<i),Ibore; Stems tit pa and Tpa
i-Tpri-aa Tprj-ffco
(§ 270, Obs.).
Irregularities of Meaning.
§ 328. The most important^regularities of meaning cof
sist in the fluctuation between the Active, Middle, ana
Passive, as well as, on the other hand, between the transi-
tive and intransitive meaning.
A) Active, Middle, and Passive Meaning.
1. Very many Active verbs have a Middle Future with
Active meaning (§ 266). This is the case with most verbs
of Classes 5 to 8. *
Z- The Deponent verbs are to be regarded as Middle,
Dialects.— 14. Perf 1 Plur. y's-yd-fiEv, § 317, D. 2. Compare § 329, 8.
15. Perf. Part, tte-ttte-ujq, § 317, P. J 7,
Besides :
17. t-aua>, Stem av, dP^ I sleep {I as Reduplication, compare § 308),
Aor. ataa.
§ S29.
IRREGULARITIES OF MEANING.
205
and also make most of their tenses in the Middle form.
Those are called Passive Deponents whose Aorist has a
Passive form : e. g., (dovXoiuai, I wish, ij3ov\r)9r)v, I wished.
The most important Passive Deponents are the following,
of which those marked * have a Passive Future, which is
used alons: with the Middle :
EvXaphiiai, I am on my guard.
*i]SoiJiaL, I rejoice.
J- Ovuiouai
TTjOO
^ItaTce to heart.
I am inclined.
Htti )
( / am anxious.
jxera J
CLTTO ^
K vosouai
tv
Trpo ,
' / repent.
' I despair.
I reflect.
I ponder.
. I anticipate.
dyafiai, I admire (§ 312, 8).
^aidkofiai, I dread (§ 301, 1).
aXdofiai, I ramble.
afiiXKdofiai, I rival.
*dpvso/iai, I deny.
*dx9ofiai, lam indignant (§ 326,
12).
(SovXofiai, I wish (§ 326, 14).
Seofiai, I need (§ 326,15).
depKOfiai, I look.
*dca\eyo[xai, I converse.
Uvafiai^ I can (§ 312, 9). olonai, I am of opinion (§ 326, 30).
ivavTioofiai, I am Opposed. asfiofjiai, I reverence.
iTTiffTafiai, I know (§ 312, 10). (jtiXoriixkofiai, I am ambitious.
O&s.— Several of these verbs have the Middle Aorist as well as the
Passive.
3. The Passive Aorists of several Active verbs have a
Middle meaning : thtppaivw, I rejoice, ev(j)pav9riv, I re-
joiced ; arpicjxjj, I caiise to turn, larpai^nv, I turned —
myself; (^taivw,! show, t(l>avriv, I appeared, etc.
4. The Passive forms of several Deponents have also a
Passive meaning: laojiai, I heal, laOr^v, I was healed;
Ziyjipai,! receive,V^iy(%r\v,I VMS received; in some even
the Middle forms have both Active and Passive meaning :
fiLfiioiiai, I imitate, ninifir]ixaL, I have imitated or have heen
imitated.
§ 329. B) Transitive and Intransitive Meaning.
When the meaning of a verb fluctuates between Trans-
§ 329. Dialects. — The Strong Aor. tTpa(pov {Tp'tcpu)^ I nourish) in Horn,
has an intransitive meaning, I grew up. In Herod. , dvkyvojv {dvayi-
yvuxTKU)) means I read, dvkyvwaa, I persuaded ; Hom. ypLTrov, I fell, Aor.
to kpe'nru) (Class 2), / throw down; tvaaaa, I caused to dwell, Aor. to
vaio), I dwell.
206 IRREGULAEITIES OF MEANING. § 3^9.
sitive and 'Intransitive, the Strong Aorist has the intran-
sitive, and the Weak Aorist and Future Active the tran-
sitive meaning ; when there are two Perfects, the Strong
likewise has the intransitive and the Weah the transitive
meaning ; if there is only one Perfect, it is intransitive.
The most important cases of this kind are :
1. Stem (xra, Pres. to-rr^^t, /^Z^J^c^, Weak Aor. iaTr\<m,
I jplaced, Put. ot»Vw, / shall jplace^ Pres. Mid. 'iarainai, I
jplace myself^ Strong Aor. laTr\v, I placed myself— stood^
Perf. f o-rr^fca, / have jplaced myself, or stand (§ 503), Plup.
t(TTr}Keiv, I stood, Put. karij^tj (§ 291), I shall stand,
Obs. — This same important distinction appears in the numerous
compounds : d^iaTrjui, I cause t9 revolt, to separate, dTradTrjv, I re-
xolted — separated, d<}>k(rTr]Ka, I Tiave revolted; i<pi(TTr}}ii, I put over,
iTrk(TTr}v, I put myself over, ttp'tGTrjKa, I am put over; KaOitrrrjixi, I put
down, Karkarriv, I put myself foncard, KaOkarrjKa, I stand tliere or
forward. The Aor. Mid. has a specially Middle meaning, e. g.,
KariarriaaTo, he determined for himself (compare § 479).
2. Stem |3a, Pres. (^aivw,! go,is commonly intransitive
with the Put. f^iiao/uai ; but in the poets, I cause to go,
also in the Weak Aor. ijdwa, Put. j3)7«rw ; but intransitive
in the Strong Aor. t(5r]v,Iwent, (5i[5r}Ka, I have advanced,
stand firm (j3i(5a-io-g,firm),
3. Stem (j) V, Pres. (pvo), I heget,We2ik Aor. t(j)V(Ta, (pv&h) ;
but the Strong Aor. '^(j)vv,Iwas hegotten,Tri(l>vKa,I am hy
nature, to which the Pres. is (jtvoiiat.
4. Stem S V, Pres. Suw, I sinlc, hide, often transitive ;
icaraSuw, I cause to sink, also t^vaa, Zvau) ; but c^Dv, I
sunk myself , I dived ; Ividvv, I put on; l^iZvv, I pict
off-
5. Stem (Tj3€(c), Pres. (T(5tvvviuii, I que7ich. Weak Aor.
£-<Tj3£-cra, / quenched. Strong Aor. t<j^r\v, I was quenched,
ta^r\Ka, I am quenched. The Pres. to it is (r^ivvvjjLai.
6. Stem cr k: £ X, Pres. a/caXXw, / dry, but Aor. tV/cXr^v, /
grew dry, with the Pres. o-icfXXojuaf.
§ 331. ACCENTUATION OF VERBAL FORMS. 207
7. Stem IT I, Aor. Iettiov, I drank^ iifiaa (irnricrKU}), I
caused to drinlc.
8. Stem Y £ V, Pres. ydvojuai (compare § 327, 14), / am
horn, Aor. iyuvafxnvy I hegat.
9. Stem 6 X, Pres. oWvui, I ruin, strong Perf. oXwXa,
/ am ruined, jperii, Weak Perf. dXwXsica, / Itave ruined^
jperdidi.
§ 330. In a number of verbs the Strong Perfect alone
has only an intransitive meaning, as :
1. ayvvni,IhreaJc., Perf. iaya,I am hrohen (§ 275, 2).
2. lyupwy I awaJce, *^ lyprjyopa, lam awake (§ 275, l).
3. ndOw, I persuade, " iriiroida, I trust {irudoixaiy I fol-
low, ohey).
4. irnyvvfiL, I fasten, " TreVjjya, / stick fast.
5. prjyvviui, I tear, " Vppiiiya, I am torn (§ 278).
6. <7/i7rw, I cause to rot, " aianira, I am rotten,
7. rri/cw, I melt, " rtrrjica, I am melted.
8. <ltaivix),I show (rarely shine), Perf. iricjiriva, I have ap-
l^eared {^(^aivop.ai,I apjpear\
On the (li'stinction between avtwya and av£(i>x", and be-
tween -Ki-wpaya and TrLirpaya, see § 279.
§ 331. General View of the Accentuation
OF Verbal Forms.
The general rule given in § 229, that in the verb the
accent is removed as far hack as possible from the end, is
subject to the following exceptions :
For all contracted syllables the accentuation is seen
from § 87. Hence Sokw, eXw^ev (§ 263), TrEaovjuLai (ttitttii},
§ 327, 15), TiOw^ai (§ 302), XvOw, Xv% (§ 296). Compare,
however, § 307, Ohs.
§ 330. Dialects. — 9. Horn. daiu),lsetjire to, Perf. Udr]a, I have caught
fire.
10. Horn. tXTTw, / ghe hope, Perf. iokira, I hope.
11. Horn. (pOeipio, I destroy, Perf. {ci)t<i)dopa, I am destroyed.
^08 ACCENTUATION OF VERBAL FORMS. § 332.
§ 332. Compound Verbal forms follow the general rule
laid down in § 85, with the following limitations :
1. The accent never goes back beyond the syllable on
which the first word had it before the composition: aTro-
Soc, give hack (otto), not aTroSoc ; liriGXiq, hold in (liri),
not iTn(j\z^.
2. In double compounds the accent never goes back be-
yond the first : cvviK^oQ, give out loith ; irapivOeg, j)ut in
besides.
3. The accent never passes heyond the Augment or He-
duplication : a-rrriXOE, he went aioay ; atfiKrai^ he has ar-
rived. This is the case even when the Augment or Re-
duplication is not expressed : vtteTkov, I gave way ; a'vevpsy
he found again / (rvvoi^a, I hnow along with^ from oI§a,
Ihnow^^Qxva^ an exception.
§ 333. The other exceptions are :
1. All Infinitives in v a t have the accent on the penult-
ima : TiOivai, Quvai, \i\.vKivaiy XvOrjvai.
. 2. the Infinitive of the Strong Aorist Active of verbs in
w is perispome : Xafinv.
3. the same form in the Middle is paroxytone : Aaj3f-
aOat.
4. the Infinitive of the Weak Aorist Active has the
accent on the penultima : irai^ivaai, lirmvicjaL (§ 268, Ohs.
!)• _ _
5. SO likewise the Infinitive of the Perfect Middle : ttc-
TTttf^fucr^af, KEKOfiicrOai.
6. the Participle of the Strong Aorist Active of verbs
in (1) is oxytone : XajSwy.
7. the Participle of the Present and of the Strong Aor-
ist Active of verbs in ju t is oxytone : riOeig, cnro^ovg.
8. so likewise the Participle of the Perfect Active : Xe-
\vK(i)g {xna, 6g, Gen. orog) ; and,
9. that of both Aorists Passive : XvOcig, ypa^dg.
§ 337. FOKMS OF VERBS IN THE IONIC DIALECT. 209
10. the Participle of the Perfect Middle is paroxytone :
XeXyjuiivog.
11. the contracted 2 Sing. Imperat. of the Strong Aor-
ist Middle is perispome : XajSou. Only the compounds of
monosyllabic forms with dissyllabic prepositions form an
exception : irEptOov {ir^piTidrifjLL). Compare § 307, Ohs.
12. The 2 Sing. Imperat. of the Strong Aorist Active
in the following verbs is oxytone : utte, sjpeak ; IXOi,
come; svpiyjl'iid; l^i, see ; \a(5i, take. But aTTfiTre, etc.,
according to § 85.
On the accentuation of the three equal forms of the
Weak Aorist, see § 268, Obs. 1.
Peculiar Forms of Verbs in the Ionic Dialect.
§ 334. Dialects. — The Iterative form, denoting the repetition of an
act, is frequent in Homer and Herodotus, though foreign to Attic
prose. Its characteristic sign is the letters a k affixed to the histor-
ical person-endings, in the Active as well as in the Middle, by means
of the connecting vowels o and e ; hence 1 Sing. Act. (tkov, Mid.
aKO]jii]v. The Augment is generally wanting, in Herod, always.
The inflexion is quite the same as that of the Imperfect.
§ 335. Dialects. — The Iterative c k may be affixed to the Present as
well as to both the Strong and Weak Aorist-Stems ; hence we distin-
guish Iterative Imjjerfects^ as : tx-e-(7Ko-j/, / used to liave^ and Iterative
Aorists^as: U-e-ck-o-v^ I used to see ; IXaaa-aK-^-v ^ he used to drive ; the
former denote the repetition of continuance, the latter the repetition
of the occurrence of an action (§ 498).
§ 336. Dialects. — In verbs of the First Principal Conjugation, e is
the constant connecting vowel for the Iterative Imperfects and the
Iteratives of the Strong Aorist : fxev-e-crKop (/jievio, I remain)^ (io<jK-k-
(TKovTo {i36(TKw, I pasture), (pvy-E-crKe {(pevyw^ Ifl^e) ; a occurs rarely in its
stead : p'nrT-a-aKov (ptTrrw, / hurl), Kpinrr-a-oKov {icpvTrTU), I hide). Con-
tracted verbs in the Iteratives either leave the two vowels uncon-
tracted : koXUgkov (KoXeoj, I call), or reject one of them : wOeaKov (w0£w,
I push), EiaaKov (edu), I leccve) ; the Stems in a sometimes change ae
to aa : vaiSTaaffKOV {vaieTccoj, I inlidbit). Compare vaurdq,, § 243, D.
§ 337. Dialects. — In verbs of the Second Principal Conjugation <tk
is affixed immediately to the Stem : t-^a-crfcov (Stem ^ a, ^»?/ut, I say),
210 FORMS OF VERBS IN THE IONIC DIALECT. § 338.
ard-ffKov {iarrjv, I placed myself), t<jKov instead of ia-cKov (Stein i q,
eifii, I am)j ke-<tk^to (Stem kei, Ksi/xai,! lie), ti-Oe-ctkov (TiOrj/JLi, I put),
prjyvv-aKov (prjyvvfii, I tear). For the Stem 6 X, as in other formations
{wXe<Ta, oXeao)), e is the connecting vowel : oX-e-o-Kcro.
CK is farther appended directly to the Weak Aoiist-Stem : Iprjrvaa-
<TK6 (tpTjTvoj, I pacify), fivrjcrd-GKETo (jivdoixui, I remember).
§ 338. Dialects. — Many Stems of the Present and Strong Aorist in
poetry (seldom in Attic prose) have 9 added without any particular
modification of meaning. The Preterite is the most frequent of the
Stems thus strengthened. The 9 is connected with the Stems some-
times by a, sometimes by e. The most important forms of this kind
are :
^lofKu), additional form di(OKd9w, I pursue.
el Kit),
^ eiKd9u), I yield.
dfivvta,
rifivva9ov, I warded off.
e'tpyo),
ipyd9ov {iepya9ov), I separated, sTiut off.
KllO,
tKia9ov, I went.
deipofiai.
r/epWovTai, they Twver.
dyEipo),
i)yepE9ovTo, they were assembled.
<l)9ivoj.
<p9nw9oj.
*xw,
((
u
(TxiOeeiv, Aor. Inf., to hold.
§ 340. SIMPLE DERIVATION. 211
III. DERIVATION.
Chap. XIII.
§ 339. A word is either sivvple^ i. e., sprung from a single
Stem : \6y-og, speech (Stem X e y), ypcK^t-w, I write (Stem
y pacf), or co7npound, i. e.^ formed from two or more Stems :
\oyo-ypa^O'Q, sjpeech-writer.
A) Simple Derivation.
Simple words are either jprimitive {Verbalia)^ i. e.^ are
formed directly from a Verbal-Stem (§ 245) : apx~^h begiii-
ning^ from the Verbal- Stem a p\ (apx(i>f 1 hegin), or de-
rived {Denominativa), i. e.^ formed from^ a N'ominal-Stem
(§ 100) : apxa-lo-q, incipient, ancient, from the Nominal-
Stem dpxa, Nom. apxi], beginning.
% 340. Nouns are usually formed — whether from a Ver-
bal or from a Nominal- Stem — by means of a termination.
This termination, added to the Stem, is called a derivative-
ending or suffix. Thus X070-C is formed by means of the
suffix o from the Verbal-Stem Xty, apxa-lo-g by means
of the suffix Lo from the Nominal- Stem apxa. The suf-
fixes serve more clearly to define the idea of the noun, or
to mark the different relations in which the general idea
of the Stem is to be conceived : Verbal-Stem ttoie {ttoilj,
I p7'oduce, compose), TToi-n-Tit-g, compos-^/*/ 7roirj-(n-g,com-
â– posi-tion ; 7rot?j-jua(r), composition, poem; Verbal-Stem
y pa^ {ypd<ptj, I vjrite), 7|oa<^-£v-c, ^^r\ier ; ypacji-i-g, writ-
ing instrument; ypapr^ay vfviting ; ypaji-fxi], a line;
Nom.- Stem St/ca {^Ikt], right), tiKa-io-g, right, just ; ^i-
Kaio-avvrj, righteousness ; Nom.-Stem (iaaiXev (j^aaiXev-g,
Mng), |3a(TtX€-ta, gueen ; j^amXt-lcif kingdom ; (^aaiXiKo-g,
kingly.
Obs. 1. — Only few primitive nouns are formed without a suffix :
^wXa^, guard, Nominal and Verbal-Stem (pvXaK (^vXdaaoj, Class 4,
a,Igicard); 6\l/, voice, Stem 67r,Verb.-Stem Itt (elTrelv).
212 SUFFIXES FOR FORMING SUBSTANTIVES. § 341.
Obs. 2'. — The Consonant-Stems undergo the necessary changes be-
.fore suffixes beginning with a consonant (§ 44, etc.) : .ypa^,
ypdix-fia, Xey, Xe^ie, WOJ'd ; diKad (diKaZio), ^iKaa-Trjg, judge. Vow-
el-Stems readily lengthen the vowel and sometimes insert a be-
fore several suffixes, as in the Perf. Mid. (§ 288), and in the Weak
Passive-Stem (§ 298) : Troirj-fxa (compare Tre-Troirj-ixai), aei-a-fio-g,
shaking (compare Gk-trn-cr-fiai).
Obs. 3. — In many primitive words the Stem undergoes a change
in its vowel, which generally is like that of the Strong Perfect
(§ 278): Stem X a 0, X/j0-j;,/or^e^MZ;iess, compare \k-\r)9-a; Stem
TrefXTT, TTOfiTT-r}, escort^ compare Tre-TrofKp-a ; Stem Xitt, Xoitto-c, re-
maining, compare Xs-\onr-a. The most frequent vowel-change is
that of € to o : Stem tte^tt {Trefiiru), I escort), tto^tt-j?, escort ; Stem
^Xcy {(fKkyio, I hirn), ip\6^, Jiame ; Stem rpEir {rpsTrio, I turn),
TpoTT-og, turning, manner.
Obs. 4. — A general rule for the accent of nouns is that the Neuters
are almost all barytone (§ 19) : to ykv-og, tJie race; Sui-po-v, gift;
XeiTpavo-v, remains ; Trvev-ixa, breath.
§ 341. I. The most important Suffixes for forming
Substantives.
A) Substantives (Jenoting an agent are called nomina
agentis. The person acting or occupied in and belonging
to something is indicated by the following suffixes :
1. Ev, Nom. Ev-Q (always oxytone), Masc. (§ 137).
Examples of Primitive words are :
7(oa^-ey-c, «^5n^ER, Verb. -Stem ypa<p, Pres. ypdipco (Class 1).
yov-ev-g, begett-Bn, " yev, " yiy vo/iai (Class 8).
Kovp-Ev-g,barb-ER, " Ksp, " <c6/|0w (Class 4, d).
An examj^le of the not very numerous Denominatives
is :
7rop9n-ev-g,ferry-MAN, Nom.-Stem TropOfio, Nom. TropQii6g,X)Cissage.
Obs. — Several Masculines in e w - ? have Feminines in e t a (proparox-
ytones) : jSamXevg, Mng; (3aai\eia, queen.
2. TTjp, 'Nom. TTjp ^ T e I p a, 'Nom. Teipa ^
Top, " Tiop CMasc. rpia, " rpia i-p^^
ra, " Tr]-g ) Tpid, " rpi-g |
Tid, " Ti-g J
§ 343. SUFFIXES FOR FORMING SUBSTANTIVES. 213
Examples of Primitive nouns are :
Stem and Nomin. (T(x)-Tr}p,deUver-En,'Mai3c. ) Verb.-Stem (toj ((tw?w)
" ad,-Tecpa, " Fem. \ (§298).
^^ pr]-Top, " pn-Tiop, ora-TOR, Verb.-Stem pe, Fut. ipcj (§ 327, 13).
^^ Kpi-Tu, " Kpi-Tf')-g, judge, " /Cjot, Pres. fcpiVto (§ 253,
Ods.).
-^ocn-ra,-^ ^ocy^-g,poet ) , ^ot.,Pres.7rocaa; (CI. 1).
Stem and JNomm. 7roir]-Tpia, poetess ) ' ^
" avXrj-ra, " av\rirr]-g, Jlute-play-BH, Masc. ) Verbal- Stem avXe,
" avXrj-Tpid,^'' avXijrpi-g, " Fem. f Pres. auXew (CI. 1).
Examples of Derived words are :
Stem TToXl-Ta, Nom. TroXirrj-g, citizen, Nom.-Stem ttoXi, Nom. TroXi-g.
" oi/ce-ra, " otKgrT^-f, ^Zowes^ic, Masc. ^ Stem oi/co, Nom.
oiKE-Tid " oiKSTi-g, " Fem. f
OtKO-jf.
§ 342. B) Substantives expressing an action are called
nomina actionis ; the following suffixes are the most com-
mon for them :
1. rt, Nom. Ti-g â– ]
a I, " ffi-e, from rt-c, according to § 60, a [com- I Feminine,
pare Lat. tio\ | Barytones.
(J I a, " (Tia J
All nouns of this kind are Primitives, as :
TTia-Ti-g, faith, Verb.-Stem ttiO, Pres. Mid. TreiOofiai (Class 2).
fiifir]-(Ti-g, imitation, " ft i fie, Pres. (Dep.) jut/isojwai (Class 1).
(TKs\pi-g, contemplation, " (tkctt, " " (rK£7rro/iai (Class 3).
TTpa^i-g, action, , " Tjoay, Pres. Act. Trpdaaia (Class 4, a).
yere-(Ti-f, or^^^7^, " ye 1^(0? Pi'es. Mid. yiyvofiai (§ 327, 14).
doKifia-m-a, examination, " doKi/xad, Pres. doKind^uj (Class 4, b).
2. /xo, Nom. /tto-c (always oxytone), Masc.
a7ra-(T-fi6-g, cmm^, Verb.-Stem o-Tra, Pres. trTraw (Class 1), I draw.
de-(T-fi6-g,dond, " ^e, " dko), " lUnd.
ddvp-n6-g, wailing, " ddvp, ^'' 6^0jOo/iat (Class 4, d, 05s.).
05s. — From verbs in euw substantives in ud are derived, which de-
note the action, and are all paroxytone : Traihvu),! educate, irai-
Ma, education; (BaffiXeino, I am Tcing, (SaaiXda, lcing''s rule. Com-
pare § 341, 1, Obs.
§ 343. C) The result of an action is indicated by :
214 SUFFIXES FOR FORMING SUBSTANTIVES. § 344,
1. IX ar, Nom. /xa, Neuter (accent, § 340, Ols. 4).
Trpdy-fxalr], the thing 6Z(9?i€, Verb. -Stem Trpay, Pres. irpaarno (Class 4, a)
(almost the same as to TreTrpay/xevov, hat. factum).
pf}-fia[T], word,YeTb.-Stem. pe, Fut. kput (§ 327, 13) (compare to elprjfiE-
vov, Lat. dictum).
r/i)7-/ia[r], cw^, Verb.-Stem te/x, Pres. re/ivw (§ 321, 10) (compare to
TeTfitjfxsvov, the piece cut off).
2. €c, Nom. oc, Neuter (accent, § 340, Obs. 4). [27).
Stem X a X - 6 f, Nom. Xaxog, Z(?^, Yerb.-Stem \ a %, Pres. Xayxavw (§ 322,
." i0-ec, " Wag, custom, " £0, Perf. £(w0a (§ 275).
" TEK-eg, " TtKog^ child, " r £ k, Pres. n'fcrw (Class 3).
05s. — The same suffix in derived words denotes a quality :
(3dpog, weight, Adjective-Stem (3apv, Nom. (3apv-g.
f5d9og, depth, " /3a0v, " /3a0y-c.
fxfJKog, length, " fxaKpo, '"'' fiuKpo-g.
§ 344. D) The instrument or means for an action is
expressed by :
Tpo, Nom. Tjoo-v [Lat. ^rw-m] (accent, § 340, Obs. 4).
apo-Tpo-v,plow, Verb.-Stem a |0o, Pres. apow (CI. 1) [«m-t?'w-m].
\v-Tpo-v, redemption money,'"'' \v, " Xuo) (Class 1).
USuK-Tpo-v, a teacher's fee, " ^t^ax, " ^i^atricw (§ 324, 28).
05s. — The meaning of the kindred feminine suffix rpa is less fixed :
^v-(T-Tpa {^v(o,I scrape), scraper, instrument for rubbing; 6pxh-(T-Tpa
(opxeo/xai, I dance), dancing place ; TraXai-c-Tpa {iraXaiix), I wrestle),
wrestling school.
% 345. E) Place is indicated by :
1. TTjpio, Nom. TT]pio-v, Neuter proparoxytone.
dicpoa-Tripio-v, audi-toriu-m, Yerb. Stem uKpoa, Pres. ccKpodofiai (CI. 1).
hKaa-TYipio-v, judgment hall, " hKuS, " ^iKrd^w (CI. 4, b).
2. E 1 0, Nom. Ho-v, Neuter properispome.
\oy-(.lo'V, speaJcing place, from the Nom.-Stem Xoyo, Nom. X6yo-g.
Kovp-i.lo-v,barbef8 shop, " " Kovpev,^'' Kovpev-g.
M.ov(t-eIo-v, seat of th^ Muses, ^^ " Mov.aa, " Moma.
3. w v, Nom. wr, Masc. oxytone,
denotes a place where any thing is in abundance: a/iTreXwv, vineyard;
dvSpwv, men's room ; olvdjv, icine vault.
§ 348. SUFFIXES FOR FORMING SUBSTANTIVES. 215
§ 346. F) Substantives of quality are derived from Ad-
jective-Stems by means of the following suffixes :
1. TT/r, Nom. Tr]-Q^ Fern. [Lat. tat^ tut^ Nom. tds^ tus\.
Stem Traxv-rriT, Nom. TraxvTTjQ, thickness, Adj. -Stem ttuxv, Nom.
TTaxv-g.
" veo-Tijrj " vsoTijg, youth, " v€o,Nom. v£o-e.
" lao-TTjr, " hoTTiQ, equality, " Lao, " 1<jo-q.
2. <Tu va, Nom. <Tw»;, Fem. paroxytone.
diKaio-(T V V r}, jlCStice, Aclj.-Stcm diKaio, Nom. SiKaio-g.
ffcj^po-ffvvT], soberness, " awtppov, " adxppwv.
3. ta, Nom. ta, Fern, paroxytone.
<TO(l)-ia, wisdom, Aclj.-Stem (TO(po, Nom. (ro(p6-g.
evdaifjiov-i a, bliss, " evdaifxov,'^'' evSaifioJV.
The suffix t a, with the vowel £ of the Adjective -Stems
in -Eg, Nom. -rig, becomes eia ; and when the final o of an
Adjective-Stem is preceded by another o, it becomes oia,
oia (proparoxytone); »
dXr}9E-ia, truth, Adj.-Stem d\r}9e[g], Nom. akr}9f}Q (§ 165).
evvo-ia,benevole7ice, " svvoo, " evvov-g.
4. 6c, Nom. og. Neuter, § 343, 3.
§ 347. G) DiQuinutives are formed from Nominal- Stems
by the suffixes :
1. 10, Nom. w-v. Neuter.
7raid-io-v, little boy, Nom.-Stem rraid, Nom. Trai-g.
KTfiir-io-v, little garden, " kj^tto, " Kriiro-g.
Obs. — Other forms of lo are t^io (Nom. idio-v), apio (Nom. apio-v)^
vdpio (Nom. vdpio-v), vWio (Nom. vWio-v) : oiKidio-v, a little
house {oiKo-g)', rrai^dpio-v, a little boy (Tral-g) ', jxeXvdpio-v, a little
song (jikXog) ; ei6v\\io-v, a little picture (eldog).
2. Masc. iffKo, Fem. ktku, Nom. laKo-g, ktkij, paroxytone.
vEav-i a k o-g, adolescen^wZws, Nom.-Stem veavia, Nom. veavm-g,
7raid-i<TKri,girl, " vaid, " 7raX-g.
(TTE<pav-i a K o-g, a little garland, " <TTe<pavo, " (TTs<f)avo-g.
§ 348: H) Patronymics or substantives which denote
descent from a father (or ancestor) — more rarely the de-
scent from a mother — are most frequently formed by the
suffix S a (Nom. ^ri-g) for the Masculine, and only 3 (Nom.
216 SUFFIXES FOR FORMING SUBSTANTIVES. § 349.
-g) for tlie Feminine. The Masculines are paroxytone,
the Feminines oxytone. This suffix is added to Stems in
a without any connecting vowel :
Masc. Boped-drj-g, Fem. Bopsa-g, Nom.-Stem Bo pea, Nom. Boped-g.
" Alveid-dr]-g, " Aiveia, " kivda-g.
The same is affixed to Consonant-^iQm?> by means of
the vowel i :
Masc. KeKpo7r-t-dr]-g, Fem. KeKp07r-t-g, Nom.-Stem KEKpOTT, Nom. Ke-
KpOXJ/.
Stems in ev and o of the Second Principal Declensiopi
also adopt the connecting vowel i, before which the v of ev
is dropped :
UriXe-i-d r]-g, from the Nom.-Stem UrjXev, Nom. Uri\ev-g. Homeric ad-
ditional form UriXrjiddii-g (compare § 161, D.).
Ar}To-i-S r)-g, from the Nom.-Stem Atjto, Nom. ArjTw, son of Leto.
The Stems of the 0-Declension substitute l for o :
Masc. TavraX-i-d rj-g, Fem. TavTaX-i-g, Nom.-Stem TavTaXo, Nom. Tdv-
TaXo-g.
" Kpov-i-dT]-g, *' K p o v o, Nom. Kpo vo-c.
Only those in lo (Nom. lo-g) change these letters to m :
Masc. eecTTid-drj-g, Fem. Oeand-g, Nom.-Stem QEffTio, Nom. Qeano-g.
" MevoiTid-d r]-g, " Mevo itio, Nom. Mevoi-
Tio-g.
01)8. — A more rare sufSx for Patronymics is lov or Xwv, Nom. kov :
Kpovicov, son of Kp6vo-g. The Poets take many liberties with re-
gard to the metre.
§ 349. I) Gentile names, or substantives describing per-
sons as natives of certain towns or countries, have the suf-
fixes :
1. €u, Nom. Evg (compare § 341), oxytone.
Msyap-ey-g, Nom.-Stem Meya/oo, Nom. rd May apa.
'EpETpi-ev-g, " 'Epsrpio, " 'Eperpia.
2. Ta, Nom. TT]-g, paroxytone.
Tiyed-TT]-g (Teyea), Aiyivr]-Ti]-g {Aiyivrj)^ 'RTreipuj-rri-g {'HTTEipo-g), SiK£'
Xi(ij-Trj-g (2<K€X(a).
§ 351. SUFFIXES FOR FORMING ADJECTIVES. 217
Obs. — The feminine gentile names end in d (Nom. -q) : Meyapi^,
Nom. Meyap/g ; T £ y e a r i ^, Nom. Teyeartf ; SuceXt wn^, Nom. 2t-
KtklCjTlQ.
§ 350. II. The inost imjportant Suffixes for forming
Adjectives.
1. I o, Nom. Lo-q (proparoxytone),
expresses the most general relation to the idea of the sub-
stantive from which the adjective is formed : ovpav-i o-c,
heaven-^?/ (ovpavog) ; icjirip-i o-q, belonging to evening {ka-
TTtpa). The I sometimes combines with the final vowels of
Vowel- Stems to diphthongs, which then frequently receive
the circumflex : ayopa-X o-g, forensis {ayopa) ; aiSo-T o-g,
modest, from the Stem al^o (Nom. ai^wg) ; but ^iKa-io-g,
just, from, the Stem ^iku (Nom. ^iKrj, justice); so also,
after rejecting the g, we have from the Stem Os pag {to
Oipog, sicmmer), 6ipE-i o-g, summer-like. By the suffix i o,
adjectives are also formed from AdjectiveSteiins : eXevOip-
lo-g, liher-alis {iXevOepo-g, liber), and gentile adjectives
(§ 349) from names of places, which, however, are also used
substantively : MiXri<j-i o-q (for MiX^t-l o-g, from MiXtiro-g,
according to § 60), 'A9r}va-Xo-g {'AOrivai).
§ 351. 2. Ko, Nom. Ko-g (always oxytone),
is mostly affixed to the Stem by the connecting vowel i,
and, in words derived from Verbal-Stems, denotes ftness :-
ap^-L-Ko-g, suited for governing ; ypa(f)iK6g, suited for writ-
ing or painting (picturesque). Many Verbal- Stems insert
the syllable ri before the suffix ko (§ 342) : at(T0r/-n-Ko-c,
capable of perceiving • wpa-KTi-Ko-g, suited for acting.
From Nominal- Stems the suffix ko, Nom. Ko-g, forms ad-
jectives denoting what is pecidiar, belonging or referable
to the thing expressed by the noun : ^aaiXiKog, kingly *
i^vcTLKog, natural ; iroXejuiKog, warlike.
Obs. — By means of tins sufRx are formed the names of many arts
and sciences, the Feminine being used substantively, originally
with the addition of Tix^^rj, art, science; ?/ hovo-i-kt}, music; i)
K
218 SUFFIXES FOR FORMING ADJECTIVES. § 352.
ypanfiar-i-Kr)^ from rd Ypd/xfiaTa, Utterce, grammar, tlie art of writ-
ing ; r) TUKT-i-Kr), tactics. The corresponding Masculine denotes
one who is experienced in such art or science : o fiovmKo-g, mu-
sician ; 6 ypafifiaTiKo-g, grammarian / 6 ruKTiKo-g, tactician.
§ 352. 3. ivo, Nom. ivo-g, proparoxytone, and
4. f o, Nom. Eo-g [Lat. eu-s~\, proparoxytone (ovg peri-
spome, § 183), denote the material of which any thing
consists : \'S-i v o-q, of stone (XiOo-g) ; ^v\-i v o-g, wood-en
(^v\o-v) ; ^v(j-i o-g, ^vaovg, gold-en \aur-eu-s\ {^pvao-g),
Obs. — ivo, Nom. iv6-Q, oxytone, fonns adjectives of time: x0€<T-t»^o-c,
yesterday' s^irom. xQkg, yesterday ; tap-iv6-£,'Dermis; with enlarged
suffix : vvKT-ep-i V 6-Q, noct-ur-nu-s,
5. evT, Nom. Masc. ei-g, Fern, c trtra, Neut. ev,
denotes abundance : xapi-e i-g, grace-ful {^api-g) ; vXr^-f i-g,
wood-y (vXri) ; rjfxaOo-e i-g, sand-?/ (afxaOo-g). Compare Lat.
OSU-S : gV2i\A0SUS, ^WyOSUS, SiYeiiOSUS.
6. ju o V, Nona. Masc. juwv, Neut. fiov,
denotes the he7it or inclination to something : iivr]-jjL to v,
'ini7idful ; t\{\-ii to v, patient ; lTn\i](T-fx w v, forgetful.
Obs. — Adjective suffixes of less defined meanings are :
vo, Nom. vo-Q, oxytone, mostly passive : ^u-v6-q, terriible; asfx-vo-g ((7t/3-
o-nai), venerable.
Xo, " Xo-g, mostly oxytone and active: dei-Xo-g, fearful ; cnruTri-
X 6-f , deceitful.
no, " /io-c, proparoxytone, partly active: ^dx-i-jJio-Q, warlike; and
partly passive : doid-i-/xo-£, capable of being mng ; akin
tb it is
mno, " mixo-Q, proparoxytone : xph^^^o-g, useful; tpv^ifio-g, capable of
being fled from, avoidable.
eg, *•' Tjg, Neut. eg : ^pevd-rjg, false, almost exclusively in compound
words (§ 355).
§ 353. III. Derived Verbs
are formed in various ways from ir<?mm«Z- Stems. The
most important endings of derived verbs, differing little
from one another in meaning, are the following, arranged
according to their forms of the Present :
§ 353, h, DERIVED VERBS. — ADVERBS.
219
1. o-w : \xi(jQ6-i))^Iliire
Xpvao-ijj, I gild
^yjfiio-io, I jmnish
2. a-w : Tifid-io, I honor
aiTid-ofiai^ I Harm
yoa-w, / wail
3. €-w : apiOns-io, I number
evrvxe-<j^, I am fortunate
icTTopk-u}, I search
4. sv-(o : (3a<n\ev-(i), I am king
(3ovXev-o), I advise
5. iK-b) : cXttj^-w, / hope
eX\r}vi^-u), I speak Oreeh
^iXiTTTt^-w, I am inclined
to Philip
6. a?-w : ^KaK-ia^ I judge
tpydK-ofiai, 1 WOrJc
^id^-ofiai, I use violence
7. aiv-u) : (TT]fiaiv-iOj I sign
XevKuiv-oj, I whiten
Xa\e7ratV-w, / am it
8. vv-b) : I'jdvv-u), I sweeten
\an7rpvv-(jj, I brighten
(ijli<t96-q, hire).
(xpvao-Q, gold).
{^T]nia, punishment),
{rifir], hanor).
(aHa, hlame).
{yoo-g, wailing).
{dpi9fi6-g, number).
{^vTvxm, fortunate).
(i(TTiop, searcher).
{iSamXev-g, king).
(/3ovXi7, advice).
(IXTTi-g, hope).
{"EXXt]v).
((piXnnro-g).
(SiKT], justice).
(tp-yo-v, work).
(/3ia, violence).
{(TTJfia, sign).
{XevKo-g, white).
(xaXeTTo-g, severe, indignant).
{r)dv-g, sweet).
{Xafi7rp6-g, bright).
Obs. 1.— From a few Nominal-Stems verbs are derived with differ-
ent endings and with different meanings; thus from SovXo,
Nom. dovXo-g, slave : dovX6-io, I enslave, dovXev-io, I am a slave ; from
TroXefxo, Nom. TrdXefio-g, war, TroXe/ue-w and TroXefii^-oj, I make war,
TToXefio-oj, I make hostile.
Obs. 2. — A desiderative meaning belongs to verbs in (teioj, as well as
to several in aw and lau) : yeXaGsiu), I am inclined to laugh; ^pa-
aeiix), I desire to do; ^ovdio,I want to murder; KXavaidoj, I want to
weep. The verbs of the last two terminations frequently indicate
a bodily weakness or illness: wx/oiaw, / am pale; d^OaXnidb), I
suffer in the eyes.
IV. Adverbs,
§ 353, h. On the Adverbs formed from Adjectives, com-
pare §§ 201-204.
From Verbal and Substantive-'^iQm^ adverbs are formed
by the suffixes :
220 FORM OF COMPOSITION. § 354.
5dv, oxytone: ava-^av-^6v^<ypenly ; ayE\r]-^6v^gregatim.
St]v (aSrjv), paroxytone : KpvjS-S r] v, clam ; <Tv\\r](i-S ri v, collectively^
hriejly (Stem Xa/3) ; (nrop-ddrjv, scatteredly (Stem airEp)^ o-Treipw,
/ sow.
Ti, oxytone : dvofiaa-Ti, h/ name (dvofidi^w) ; iXkr}vi(T-Ti, gr(Bce {eXKrjvi^w).
B) Composition.
§ 354. L JPorm of Composition.
A noun, standing' j^/'^^ in a compound, appears in the
form of its Stem : aGTv-yuTijjVf neighbor to the city ; x^po"
^tSacTKaXo-c, teacher of the chorus / aaKiqrTraXog, shaker
of the shield (to o-aicoc)*
ConsonatitStems are usually united to the second part
by the connecting-vowel o : av^piavT-o-iroLO-g (6 av^pia-g),
maker of statues, statuary; iraTp-o-KTovo-g, murderer of
a father. This o, farther, is frequently inserted after weak
vowels : ^u(Tt-o-Xoyo-c, acquainted with nature ; \y^v-o-
^w^o-q, fish-eating ; and regularly stands in place of a in
the Stem: i7jU£po-S]0o/zo-c, a runner hy day ; xw/oo-ypa^o-c,
descriher of a country. The o is dropped before vowels :
XO/o-Tjyo-c, leader of the choi'us ; 7raTp'a^eX(f>0'g, a father'^ s
hrother ; it remains, however, where the word originally
began with digamma (§ 34, D.) ; Hom. drfjULioepyo-g, Att.
^rjluLovpyogj artisan.
Obs. — Exceptions to these rules are frequent. Thus Stems in or
often appear in an abbreviated form in compounds : ^Kpo-KvovoQ^
Mlling with tJie sword (Stem ^ i ^ e e) ; Tuxo-naxia, « contest at the
wall (Stem Teix^Q)i the final vowel of A-Stems is sometimes
preserved as a or ?; : dpeTd-Xoyog, a speaker about mrtUe; xorj-ipopog,
hearer of funeral offerings. A case-form seldom occurs instead of
the Stem-form : vewg-oiKog, shedfm' shijjs; dpEaai-^drrjg, wandering
on the hills.
§ 355. The ending of a word is often somewhat altered
in composition, especially when the compound word is an
adjective : rt/i//, (piXo-Tijuo-gy amhitious y irpayfia, ttoXv-
TTpdjfjibJv, 'inuch occujpied. The ending y\ g Masculine and
§ 358. FOEM OF COMPOSITION. 221
Feminine, e g Neuter, deserves special notice ; this ending
occurs :
a) in many adjectives formed directly from Verbal-
Stems : a-j5\aj5-r]g, uninjured (/3Xa/3, Pres. /BXaTrrw) ; av-
rapK-rjg, self-sufficient (avro-g and a/OKtw).
b) in adjectives, whose second part comes from a sub-
stantive in £ c (Nom. og) : ^cica-trijc, ten year's old (trog) ;
KaKo-{]Or]g, of a had nature {^Oog).
Obs. — Observe also the compound adverbs in e i or t, oxytone :
avTo-x^ip-i, with one's own hand; d-fxiaO-i, without pay ; 7rav-di]ix-ei,
with the whole people.
§ 356. A verb — without changing its nature — can only
be compounded with a preposition. The looseness of the
connection in such compounds is the reason for the posi-
tion of the Augment mentioned in § 238 : a7roj3aXXw, /
throw away; airijdaXov, I threw away. For the same
reason, prepositions are frequently separated from their
verbs in the poets and in Herodotus, and in some cases
even in Attic prose (compare § 446). This separation is
called tmesis.
When any other word is to be compounded with a Ver-
bal-Stem, a noun is first formed of the two, e. g., from
\iOo-g and Stem /3 a X, \i6o-f36Xo-g, throwing stones, and
thence Xt 0o/3oXf-w, I throw stones ; so likewise from vav-g
hnd fia^^o/iiai comes first vav-ixayo-gi fighting at sea, and
thence vavixayjihi ; from cu and Stem £ /o y, evipyirrig, hene-
f actor, ^vepy^ii),! do good.
§ 357. A substantive of an abstract meaning can only
be compounded with a preposition without changing its
termination: irpo and /3ouX/) make Trpoj^ovXri, previous
consultation. In every other compound the abstract sub-
stantive must take a derivative ending : XiOog and ^oXit
make Xt0oj3oXm, throiving stones / vavg and fiaxn, vai>-
fJLaxia, seafijght / tu and Trpa^ig, evirpa^ia, well-heing.
§ 358. Compounds having the first part formed directly
222 MEANING OF COMPOUNDS. § 359.
from a Verbal- Stem are rarely met with except in the
poets. They are formed in two ways, viz. :
1. the Verbal or the Present- Stem is joined directly to
Stems beginning with a vowel, and to those beginning
with a consonant by means of the connecting-vowels e, i,
or o : ^aK-i-Ovfio-g (Pres. ^clkv-oj, Class 5), heart-gnawing/
TTud-apxo-Qf obedient to order {TreWojuaL and apxn) ; apx-i-
TtKTtJv, master-huilder ; fjucr-o-yvvo-g, hater of women (jui-
(ri(x)).
2. A form strengthened by o-, and resembling the Weak
Aorist-Stem, is joined in the same way to the second part
of the word: Xva-i-rrovo-g, freeing from trouble; 7rXrj|-
nnro-g {wXridau), Class 4, a), tohipping horses; (Trpeipi-hKO-g
(orpf^w, Class l),perverter of right.
§ 359. II. Meaning of Comjpounds,
In regard to their meaning, compound Adjectives and
Substantives are divided into three principal classes :
1. Determinative compounds. In them the second word
is the principal, which, without in any way altering its
meaning, is merely defined by the first. These compounds
may be paraphrased by changing the first part either into
an Adjective or an Adverb : ajCjOo-TroXf-c, high town, castle^
i. e., aKpa TToXig (Hom. iroXig aKpri) ; juea-riiuj^pia, midday,
i. e., fjLiar] ri/uipa ; ipBv^o-Kripv^, i. e., ^ev^rig Ki]pv^y false her-
ald ; 6 fio-^ovXo-g, fellow-slave, i. e., 6 fjiov ^ovX^vmv; fieya-
XoirpeTrrig, grand, properly, ajpjpearing as great ; o^i-yovog,
late born, L e., 6\ps jevofKvog. This class is the least nu-
merous.
2. Attributive compounds. In them the second word is
indeed also defined by the first, yet so that the latter alters
its meaning, and, together with the first, forms a new idea,
which is attributed as a quality to another word. These
compounds can generally be paraphrased by employing
the Participle of ix^> ^^ ^ verb akin to it in meaning, and
adding to this the second word as an object, the first be-
§ 359. MEANING OF COMPOUNDS. 223
coming an attribute to the object : jjiaKpo-x^ip, longi-manus,
long-handed^ i. e., juaKpag x^^P^^ ^'x**^^ (^^^ ^^^ long hand
itself); apyvp6'To^o-g,j>?'ovided with a silver how, i. e.,
apyvpovv to^ov (^ipuyv ; o/uLo-Tpoiro-g, of the same Jcincl, i. e.^
ofxoiov TpoTTov f x^i^ 5 yXavK-ioTTi-g , hri(/ht-ei/ed, i. e.^ ykav
KovQ ocpdaXjuovg exovcra ; TriKpo-yajuo-g, having a hitter
wedding y Kov<^6~vov-g, frivolous^ trifling / o-Gj-<^|Owy, of
sound se?ise, sober ; ^EKa-sTiig, ten years old, i. <?., having or
lasting ten years j avTo-x^ip, making use of one^s own
hands.
Obs. — To these belong the numerous adjectives in -ojdrjg and osiSrjg :
yvvaiKoJdrjQ := yvvaiKO-eidrjg (ddog), WOmanZi^^, woman^sA,
3. Ohjective compounds, or those of dependency. In
them, either the first word is grammatically governed by
the second or the second by the first, so that in the para-
phrase one of the two must be put in an oblique case :
rivi-oxo-g = Ta r]via t'Ywv, ^?^?'<im^ ^A^ reins^ driver ; Xoyo-
ypa<po-g, speech-writer, i. e., Xoyovg ypa(f>ii)v ; a^io-Xoyo-g,
worth sj)eaMng, i. e., \6yov a^iog ; (l)iX6-iuiov(To-gy loving the
Muses, i. e., (j)iX{ov rag Movaag; ^£i(Ti-^aifjiwv, fearing the
gods, i. e., ^^^iwg Tovg ^ai/uLovag ; x^fjOOTronjroc, made hy
hand, i. e., Xipai iroir]T6g ; 0wl3\a(^{]g, injicred hy God, i. e.,
viro Oeov jdtjdXapfxtvog ; oiKoytviw, horn in the house, i. e.,
Iv o'/k(^> yevofxevog.
Obs. 1. — Prepositions may he joined with substantives in any of the
three principal classes — (1) Determinative : dix<pi-9eaTpov, a round
theatre, i. e., a theatre extending itself round in a circle; dir-
eXevOepog, one who has been freed by anothei-, not by himself, i. e.,
a freedman (6 utto nvog IXsvOepog wv) ; (2) Attributive : tv-9eog,
i. e., Iv tavTtp Bebv txiov, carrying a god in himself, god-inspired ;
dfx<i>iKi(i)v, viz., vEojg, i. e., Kiovag afi<p' kavrbv ix^v, a temple encom-
passed around with pillars ; (3) Ol^ective : tyx^piog, i. e., iv ry x^P?-
^ Mv, at home ; t^iTnnog, i. e., l^' 'iTnrqj wv, being on a Jwrse, belonging
to a hoarse.
Obs. 2. — Against the general rule (§ 85), according to which com-
pound words draw back the accent as far as possible from the
end, those compounds in -o-g in the Nominative, whose second
part comes directly from a Verbal-Stem (§ 356), usually accent
224 MEANING OF COMPOUNDS. § 360.
this Stem if it has an active meaning. They are paroxytone
when the last syllable but one is short, oxytone when it is long :
Xoyo-jpd^o-Q^ speech-writer ; fiijTp-o-KTovog, 7)iotlier-murderer ; Traid-
aywyo-f, hoy-leader ; fiEXo-Troiog, composer of songs. When the mean-
ing is passive, the second word remains unaccented : avTo-ypa^o-g,
written hy one\ self; iirjTp-o-KTovo-Q, murdered hy the mother ; dva-
dywyogj liard to guide. •
§ 360. The prefix a v [compare aveu, without, Lat. in-,
Engl. un-'\, before consonants a [compare Lat. i- in i-gna-
ru-s], called aljpha jorivative on account of its meaning, is
found in a very large number of compounds, which belong
to the determinative ciass if the second part has arisen from
a verb or an adjective, but chiefly to the attributive if from
a substantive : a-ypa^og, unwritten, i. e., ov yEypafi/nivog ;
av-BXevOapog, unfree, i. e., ovk tXtvOepog ; av-ai^ijgy shame-
less, i. e., al^u) OVK ix^*^ J airai-g, childless, i. e., Trdtdag ovk
iX^^' Determinatives with a v (a) from substantives are
rare and poetic: iur]Tr}p ani]Twp, an unmotherly mother,
%. e., iiy]Ty\p ov fxrjTTip ovcra,
Obs. — Words originally beginning with digamma (§ 34, D.) have d,
not dv: d-k-wv, contracted ukov, unwilling ; d-£ifc->ye, contracted
aiK-rjg, reproachful (Stem e t k, toiKo) ; d-epy6-g, contracted dpyo-g,
inactive (tpyo-v, work).
The prefix ^vg corresponds to the English 7nis, and, as
the opposite to eu, denotes something unfortunate, awk-
ward, difficult : ^vgapearog (§ 324:, 10), displeased ; ^vg-
/SouXoc, ill advised, i. e., KUKag (5ov\ag t'xwv (attributive) ;
cvgaXwTog, hard to capture (§ 324, 17). Here, too, de-
terminative compounds from substantives are rare : Hom.
Avgirapig, unfortunate Paris,
PAET SECOND.
S Y N T AX.
Preliminary Hemarhs.
§ 361. 1. Syntax {avvTa^iq^ arrangement) teaches the
use of the forms discussed in the first part of the grammar,
and the way in which words are arranged into sentences,
and sentences are combined together.
2. A sentence is either simple or compound. Every
sentence is simple in which the necessary parts of a sen-
tence occur only once.
3. The necessary parts of a sentence are :
a) the Suhject, i. e., the person or thing about which
something is stated ;
h) the Predicate^ i, c, that which is stated.
Obs. 1. — Every form of the finite verb (§ 225, 4) contains a com-
plete sentence in itself, in which the personal ending contains
the Subject and the Verbal-Stem the Predicate : 0?y/«t, / say ;
t<paixw^ ice said.
Obs. 2. — In many cases the Subject remains undefined : <paai, they
say, people say ; or it is not defined, because readily understood
by the Greeks : vu. Tie rains, i. e., Zeus, for he alone can cause
rain ; ttraXiriy^e, he Mew the trumpet., i. c, the trumpeter, for it is
his business. The Subject of the impersonal verbs ^a, xphi ii ««
iiecessary, is also undefined.
4. The Predicate is either Verhal or Nominal ; it is
Verbal when expressed in the form of ^finite verb': Kupoc
i[5a(TiXev(rey Cyrus rided ; it is Nom,inal when expressed
in the form of a noun (substantive or adjective)*: Kupoc
jSamXfvc rfv, Gyrus was king.
5. The Predicate must agree with the Subject, viz., the
Verbal Predicate in number, the Nominal in number and
case, and, when it is an adjective, in gender also : ot TroXt-
K 2
226 PRELIMINARY REMARKS. § 361.
fjLioL £viKri(yav, the enemies conquered / rj juiaxrj fxeyaXt] ^v,
the battle was great.
Exceptions, §§ 362-366.
6. In many cases this agreement alone is sufficient to ex-
press the relation of a Nominal Predicate to the Subject :
6 iii'yaq oXjSoc ov ii6vi\xoq, great jprosjperity is not lasting ;
Aipioi- KaKoi, the Lerians (inhabitants of the island of Le-
ros) are had. But mostly the Nominal Predicate is more
clearly connected with its Subject by the verb to he (sub-
stantive verb) : 6 fieyag oXfiog ov fiovi/uLog IcrriVf Aipioi tcaicoc
ti(Tiv. This verb, thus used, is called the Copula.
7. The intransitive and passive verbs, which denote to
heeome, he 7nade, appear, he named, designated, chosen, and
the like, in order to produce a complete sentence, often re-
quire a Nominal Predicate along with the Verbal one. In
this case also the Nominal Predicate must agree with the
Subject : Kvpog lyiviTo fiaaiXevg, Gyrus hecarne king^ Cy-
rus rex foetus est. Compare § 392.
8. The Greek language expresses many definitions of
time, order, and kind, less frequently of place, by adjec-
tives, which are expressed in English by adverbs or prepo-
sitions with substantives. These adjectives, which must
agree with the Subject, are to be considered as supple-
mentary Predicates : rpiToXoi cnrtiXOoVf they ivent away on
the third day j AaKe^aifiovioi varepoi a<f)iKovTO, the Lace-
dcemonians arrived later, posterior es advenerunt ; opKiog
aoL Atyw, / tell you on oath.
On the similar use of the participle as a supplementary Predicate,
see ^ 589, etc.
9. A simple sentence is emiarged by an Object being add-
ed to tlfe verb. The Object is that to which the action of
the verb extends : ot 'A0r/vatot a-KkKTiivav tov Sw/c/oarr^v,
the Athenians killed /Socrates.
On the different kinds of Objects and the manner in which they
are indicated, see §§ 395-403.
§ 361. PRELIMINARY REMARKS. 227
10. The Active verbs, which correspond in meaning to
the Intransitive and Passive ones mentioned in 7, i. e., the
verbs which denote to make^ name, designate, choose, and
the like, frequently also require a Nominal Predicate.
But, as this belongs to the Object, it must agree with it :
Of Yiipaai Tov Kvpov hXovto (iacriXia, the Persians chose
Cyrus Icing [Per see Cyrum i^egem elegerunt\ Compare
§ 404. This kind of Predicate is called a Dependent Pred-
icate. As the Dependent Predicate here appears in the
Accusative, so it may in other cases appear in the Genitive
or Dative. Compare § 438 ; Ohs. % 589, etc.
11. Another enlargement of the sentence is the Attri-
hiote, i. e., any nominal definition added to a substantive as
essentially belonging to it and forming with it one idea :
KoXoQ "iTnroQ, a fine horse j' 6 irapiov Kaipog, the present time
(the present).
Obs. — The Greek language in many cases adds an Attribute to the
designation of a person, expressive of a generic idea : Horn, ripuitg
Aavaoi, ye heroes Baiiai (ye warring Danai) ; dvdpeg SiKacrTai^ ye
judges^ judices.
12. Different from the Attribute is the Apposition.
Apposition is such a subordinate definition added to a sub-
stantive as does not exactly form 07ie idea with it, but is
superadded .rather for describing or illustrating it, and
hence might generally be expressed in the form of a de-
scriptive clause : Ylapvaang, 7j tov Kvpov fxrjrrjp, tovtov
paXXov tcjiiXei fj TOV ^ApTa^tp^riv, Parysatis, the mother of
Cyrus — who was Cyrus's mother — loved him more than
Artaxerxes ; IvTsvOev Kvpog l^tXavvti Sm ^pvyiag Hg Ko-
Xo(T(TOvg, TToXiv olKOvpivrjv, ev^aifiova KaX fAEyaXr)v, fipom
there Cyrus marches through Phrygia to Colossi, a popu-
lous, prosperous, and large city (which was a . . . city).
The Attribute and Apposition must agree with the sub-
stantive to which they belong, in the same way as the
Predicate (5, 7).
228 NUMBER AND GENDER. S 362.
Chap. XIV. — Number and Gender.
§ 362. The singular sometimes has a collective sense, de-
noting a plurality : I <t // Cj clothing^ clothes ; irXlvOo g,
bric/cs / 77 t TT TT o Cj cavalry; ri atririg, the heavy-armed.
Sometimes a Predicate or Apposition in the Plural re-
fers to collective substantives in the Singular : 'A0rjvatwv
TO TrXrjOog otovTat"l7r7rap\ov rvpavvov ovra airoQavtlv,
the mass of the Athenians believe Hijpjparchus died as
ruler; to cPTpaTtvfia tiropiZ^TO gXtov kotttovtsq tovq
(5ovg KOi ovovg, the army obtained food by killing the oxen
and asses.
A Plural is formed in Greek from many words, especial-
ly abstracts, which have no plural in English, especially
when the repetition of an idea is to be expressed : ai lir i-
<P av E I at KOL \a juTT p 6t r) T e g tie twv aywvwv yiyvtadat
(piXovmv, celebrity and glory usually arise from the con-
tests ; e/Liol ai aai fxeyaXai EVTV\iai ovk api(TKOV(Tiv,your
(repeated) great success does not please me ; Hom. iravTig
OdvaToi aTvyepoi, all kinds of death are hateful.
Ohs. 1. — Poets frequently use the Plural in a generic sense where
we employ the Singular with the indefinite article : ovk av ywai-
Kutv ij(T<roveQ KoKoifxeff dv, I should not like to T)e called inferior to a
woman ; (piXoi, a friend. •
'Obs. 2. — The speaker often uses the first person Plural of himself
[compare Lat. nos]. In this case the Masculine is used even
when a woman is the speaker. Thus Electra says : TrsffovfieO',
d xpv, T^aTpl Tifnopov/xevot, I loill fall^ if it must he, as my fathers
avenger. %
Obs.^. — In Homer there are many Plurals of abstract ideas, which
we express in the Singular ; the Plural, however, properly de-
notes the various manifestations of such ideas : i-KiroavvyQ
UeKaaro, by horsemanship he icas distinguished ; d(ppadiy<ri vooio,
in the foolishness (the foolish thoughts) ofJiis mind.
§ 363. The Neuter Plural comes very near in its mean-
ing to the Singular. This explains the peculiar Greek
custom, that the Neuter Plural has the verb in the Sin-
§ 366. NUMBER AND GENDER. 229
gular : ttwc ravra iraiKTErai', how is this to end f ra
TT pay fiara Tavra ^ewa 1(jt l v, these things are terrible.
Obs. 1. — Some Plural Neuters, which denote a plurality of persons,
sometimes have the verb in the Plural, as : to. HXr], in the sense
of the mithorities; ra iOvt], the peoples.
Obs. 2. — The Homeric and the Common Greek Dialects (Introduc-
tion, 4) generally allow the Plural Verb with the Neuter Plural :
Hom. (TTrdpTa XeXvvrai, the ropes are loosed.
•
§ 364. With an indefinite Neuter Subject (in English,
it) the Adjective Predicate is frequently^ in the Plural:
aSvvaTa Icjtlv awotpvyuvj it is impossible to escape ; this
is the case especially with the Verbal Adjective in rto-c :
iTTix^tpvTia r]v,it was to he attemj^ted.
§ 365. When two persons or things are spoken of, the
Plural is always admissible as well as the Dual, and both
numbers may be used in referring to the same thing :
E'ytXao'arjjv ajucfxi), [5\i\liavT£g elg aWrfXovg, they
both laughed after looking at one another y' ^6tb^ irapa-
^aiyfia, tj AaxvQ re kol Nticm, give an exaniple, Laches and
Nicias ^ w Kayj\q re Kai NtKta, uTrarov, O Laches and
Nicias say.
§ 366. The Neuter of an adjective in the Singular as
well as in the Plural easily becomes a substantive : Iv
ju £ o" (j>, in medio, in the midst ; iv ri^ irapovr i, at the
j>rese?it moment, for the present; Ik iroWovyfor a
long time ; S c t v a, terrible things.
Hence a Neuter Adjective often stands as Predicate to
one or more Masculine or Feminine substantives to ex-
press a class or genus in general : Hom. ovk. ay aObv
iroXvKoipavirif the government of many is not a good thrnig;
opOov aXi^OeL aeiy truth is always the right thing ; Beivov
ol iroXXoi, KaKovpyovg orav t^wm TrpoaTarag, a bad thing
is the many when they have base leaders; rapaxat ica\
araoHQ oXiO pia Ta7g TToXfcrtv, disturbance and disCord
are ruinous to states.
230 THE ARTICLE. § 367.
§ 367. The demonstrative pronoun, instead of being in
the Neuter as in German, frequently agrees in gender and
number with the Predicate to which it refers, just as in
Latin: ovtoi hctiv av^pig, those are men j ovroq opog
coTt ^iKaioarvvrjg aXr]Ori re Xiyeiv Koi a av \dj3ri rig airo^ido-
vai, this is the idea of justice, to speak the truth, and to
give hack what we have received \_haiG notio justitice est'].
The relative pronoun also often agrees in Gender and
Number, not with tlie preceding substantive to which it
refers, but with the substantive following, which is added
as a Predicate: (ItiXov, 6 luiyicrrov ayaOov lariVf ov (ppov
TiZovaiVy they do not care for a friend, which is the great-
est good.
Chap. XY. — The Article.
§ 368. The Article 6, 17, to is originally a demonstrative
jpronoun, and still employed as such in Homer, both in a
substantive and adjective sense, and frequently also in the
language of the other poets : Hom. rv\v eyw ov Xvau),
her / will not give ujp ; poet, tov, ^ Zev irarsp, ^^t'orov,
uiM, father Zeus, destroy , Hom. (^tdlau as to aov juivog,
this thy courage will he thy ruin.
§ 369. The Article in this demonstrative sense is also
employed in the following cases in Attic prose :
1. In connection with ixiv and ^£ : 6 /xl v, the one ; 6 ^i,
the other.
O&s.*— Used adverbially, to {to) \ikv — to {to) de, mean partly —
partly.
2. Sometimes also with Kai and ^i : jcat tov KeXevcTai,
and that he ordered ; tov koi tov, the one and the other.
3. In TTjOo r ov, hefore that, formerly.
§ 370. The real Article generally corresponds to the
English definite article. It serves to set forth an object.
§ 374. THE ARTICLE. 231
either as a single one (the individualizing article) or as a
class (the generic article).
Obs. — 6, »7, TO in Homer almost always has a demonstrative power.
Yet in many cases — compare especially § 379 — the use of these
forms approaches very near to that of the Attic Article. The
Article, however, in Homer is scarcely ever necessary, and is fre-
quently omitted also in the Tragic writers.
§ 371. 1. The Individualizing Article sets forth a sin-
gle object above others of the same kind, and that :
a) as known or having been pointed out before : Herod.
XaXjcf 8f £c T CLQ Itt ^AprejuLKTito eiKom vrjaQ Trapei^ovTO, the
Chalcideans furnished the (before mentioned) twenty shij^s
at Artemision ; IS^ip^rig ayeipag Trjv dvapiOiuLr)TOv (rrpariav
ijXOev ewl ttiv 'EXXd^a, after having collected the (well-
known) innumerable army, Xerxes marched against
Greece.
Obs. — In this sense proper names also, which in general do not
need it, may take the Article : o ^oKpdTtjg, Socrates, whom you
know, or who was mentioned before.
§ 372. h) A thing as distinguished from others by the
addition o^ distinguishing circumstances : 6 rwv 'AOrjvaiwv
^rjl^og, the Athenian j)eople (no othei:) ; 17 woXig rjv noXiop-
KovfjL^v, the city lohich we are besieging (just this).
§ 373. The distinguishing circumstance expressed by
the Article is often indicated in English by the, possessive
pronoun : cjcaoroc tCjv ^r]iiLOvpyC)v tt) v ri)(yriv KaXtog £$-
EipydZeroj each of the artisans practised his art well.
§ 374. In connexion with numerals, the Article some-
times denotes that the number to which it is added stands
in a defined relation to another number : rd ^vo julprj, two
thirds / Twv Tpiy]pii)v rpiaKoaiujv ovaCjv twv iracrwv rag
^laKomag ii iroXig rrapicTX^To, of the triremes, of which there
were three hmidred in all, the city furnished two hun-
dred. The Article has a similar effect with quantitative
adjectives of a more general kind : iroXXoi, inany — ot ttoX-
232 THE ARTICLE. § 375.
Xoi, most; irXtovBgy more — ol nXeoveg, the greater part ;
aX\oi,alu — ol aXXoi, cceteri / oX[^oi,afew — ol bXLyoi,the
oligarchs.
§ 375. 2. The Generic Article indicates a whole class of
homogeneous objects : ol iroXlrai, all the citizens ; 6 pwwp,
the orator (by profession) ; ^a tov (TTparitJTr}v top ap\ovTa
fiaXXov rj Tovg iroXEfxiovg (j)oj5ei(TdaL, the soldier must fear
his superior rather than the enemy.
Obs. — Hence the Article may also be used with proper names in
the plural when a whole class is to be described : o I ArjfioaOeveig,
. orators like Demosthenes (a Demosthenes, compare § 363, Obs. 1).
§ 376. The Article is not used when a substantive only
expresses an idea in general : aydpilyirov xpvxrj tov Ohov
pETtx^i, man's soul partakes of the divine / so 0f oc de-
notes the deity ; 6 0£oc, a particular god ; so likewise, in
many other current expressions, the more ancient method
of not using the Article has been preserved : wktoq, hy
night; r}iuifpag,hy day; IttX OaXcKrari, at sea; irpog ckjtv,
to town; Kar'aypoVfin the country; Kara yfjc, under the
earth ; Iv ^t^ia, on the right ; l^aiptj X6yov,I exempt.
% 377. The Article is omitted with a number of sub-
stantives, which by custom have almost acquired the force
of proper names : fiaaiXevg, the king (of the Persians) ;
TrpvTavEig, the presidents (as officials); hv clkpottoXei, i7i the
Acropolis (Athens).
§ 378. The Predicate (§ 361, 3, lo) generally has no
Article : YJjpog tyivETo f^atriXev g rtjv Hepcrwv, Cyrus
hecame Jdng of the Persians; irovog evKXdag Trarrip,
labor is father of fame ; ol "AOrjvaloi IlspiKXia eIXovto
(TT parriy 6v, the Athenians chose Pei'icles general (com-
pare §§ 387, 392, 403, and 438, Ols.
§ 379. By means of the Article, any adjective, partici-
ple, or adverb, as well as the infinitive, may be made a
substantive : Hom. 6 ylptjjv, the old man ; ol nXoixnoi,
the rich; 6 Xiywv, the speaker ; 6 TrtXac, the neighbor; ol
§ 385. THE ARTICLE. 233
TrapovTsg, those present ; to. koltcj^ the tender (part) ; ot 7ra-
Xai, the ancients / to julktuv, hating or hatred.
Obs. — With the Neuter Article, any word, or even a whole sentence,
may be represented as one object : to dvrjp, the word dvrjp or the
idea " man ;" to TvutQi aeavTov, the saying or rule " Know thy-
self."
§ 380. The Generic Article (§ 375) generalizes the idea
of a participle, which then is to be translated by a relative
phrase : tzoihtu) tovto 6 j3ovXo/x£voc, do that, who will; jmij
t^rireiTS rov ravra Xi^ovra, seeh not (one) who will say this
(compare § 500).
§ 381. By the Article, many adverbs, placed between it and a sub-
stantive, become attributive adjectives: oi tote dv9pu)7roi, the people of
that time ; i] TrapavTiKu ridovr), the momentary pleasure ; ai evOdde
yvvdiKEc, the women of this place ; rj dyav iXevOepia, the excessive free-
dom.
§ 382. In the same way, a genitive, or a preposition with a substan-
tive, placed between the Article and another substantive, becomes
an attributive clause : tu tHjv 'AOrjvaiojv TrpdyfiaTa, the affairs of the
Athenians ; oi iv Ty iroXu avOpioiroi, the people in the city ; ?) Ka9' rjfikpav
Tpotpf], the daily nourishment; al dvev XvttCjv r/dovai, the painless pleas-
ures.
§ 383. The Article often stands alone, sometimes with
the Genitive of a substantive (compare §§ 409, 410), some-
times with a preposition followed by a substantive ; in
such a construction the Article has the force of a substan-
tive (§ 379) : ra rwv 'AOr^vaiwv, the affairs (possessions,
interests) of the Athenians ; o\ Iv ry TToXei, ^/i^ (people) in
the city; ra /^tra ravra, what JvUows, the later (events).
§ 384. When a substantive with an attributive (§ 361,
ll) adjective has the Article, the adjective staiids between
the substantive and the article : 6 ayaOog avrjp, the good
man.
§ 385. If the substantive alone is to be prominent, and
the adjective to be added as apposition (§ 361, 12), the
substantive stands first, and the adjective with the article
follows, thus :
234 THE ARTICLE. § 386.
a) The siobstantive without Article, when tlie case is
such that the substantive, if put alone, would have no arti-
cle : TL ^la^ipH avdpwTTog aKpaTrjg Or^piov tov aKpars-
arciTov; in what does an ungovernable man differ from
the most ungovernable beast f for if Or^piov stood alone it
would be without Article, dr]piov,from a beast.
b) The substantive has the Article when by itself, even
without an adjective, it must have the Article : ol Xloi to
Tuxog ir^pieiXov to kuivov, the Chians pulled down (their)
wall— the new one (which they themselves had built) ; for,
even without the adjective, it would have to be to TCi\oq
TrepidXov (§ 373).
§ 386. The same rule holds good with regard to the po-
sition of the attributive additions mentioned in §§ 381 and
382 : 6 'A9r}vai(i)v S^/xoc, the Athenian jpeojple ; 6 S^/ioc,
6 rwv 'A^Tjvatwv, the people, that is, the Athenian ; 6 jueTo.
TavTa xpovog, the after time / 6 yjpovog 6 jueTo. TavTa, the
time v^hich followed this.
§ 387. An adjective which, without the Article, either
precedes or follows a substantive having the Article, is pre-
dicative, i. e.^ the character is assigned to the substantive
only by this word (§ 361, 4, 8, and lo) : ayaOog 6 avr)p or 6
:^vrjp dyaOog (viz., l(TTiv)ithe 7nan is good; aTravTsg txojuiev
TO (TWjua OvriToVf we all have a body (which is) mortal.
The translation may often be effected by a relative clause :
ol ^A6r]vaLOi riyovvTO avTOVOfxiov to irpCnov GViip.a\wv, the
Athenians had the lead of allies (who) at first (were) inde-
pendent / (jjaivoiuai fULeyaXag Tag v7ro(Txi(TEig iroiovfjLivog, I
seem to onake promises which are great. Compare § 378.
Obs. — Witli proper names, the use of the Article is very uncertain
when the class is added to which they belong : b EixppdrrjQ -n-ora-
fiog or 6 TTOTafibg 6 'Ev^pdrrjg, the river Euphrates ; t) Ahvt] to opog,
Mount Etna; StKeX/a ?) vrjtrog, the island of Sicily ; r) ttoXiq ol Tap-
(Toi, the city of Tarsi.
§ 388. T\\Q possessive pronoun is precededby the Arti-
cle when a single definite object is referred to : 6 Ifiog
§ 391. THE ARTICLE. 235
iraipog, my (particular) friend ; Ifiog haipog, a friend of
7)iine.
§ 389. aurocj as ^ jpredicate, ^\xi before or after a sub-
stantive with the Article, means self: avTog 6 TraTrip or 6
irarrip avrog, the father himself ipse pater ; but as an at-
tribute it is put between the Article and the substantive,
and means sam^e : 6 avrog dvrjp, the same man, idem vir.
With the demonstrative jpronouns ovrog, 6§c, iKuvogy a
substantive, not being a predicate, has regularly the Article :
ovrog 6 dvrip or o dvrip ovrog, this 7nan y Ikhvo rb ^iopov,
that gift. But when the substantive is a predicate the
Article is wanting : Iv Uepdmg vo/uog e<jr\v ovrog, atnong
the Persians this is law. Compare § 367.
§ 390. TT a c without the Article before a substantive with-
out the Article means in the Singular every : iraaa iroXig,
every dty. The Article before irag gives it the meaning
oi whole : i] ttcktu rroXigythe whole city,' rovg irdvrag onXi-
rag, the whole of the heavy -armed. Most generally Trac
as well as o\og without the Article precedes or follows a
substantive provided with the Article : Trao-av v^iv rrjv
dXtfOsiav lpCj,I will tell you the whole truth ; rov dpiOfxov
wdvra St'xa ^isXd(5oiJ.sv, we divided the whole number into
two parts / rrig rijiipag o\r]g ^iriXOov ov ttXeov irivre KaX
itKocTi xrradlwv, during the whole^ day they proceeded no'
more than twenty-five stadia.
Obs. — iraQ, with the Article added to a numeral, may often be
translated by " altogether" or " in all :" Aajoaoe llSaaiXevae to.
Trdvra U Kal TpiaKovra irr], Darius ruled altogether thirty-six years.
§ 391. Expressions for measures are to be understood differently,
according to the position of the Article : terxarov to 6pog, the extreme
end of the mountain ; to ttrxaTov opoQ, the farthest mountain (in contrast
to other mountains); r) dyopd ixetrrj^the middle (of the) market-place;
r) ukat} dyopa, the middle market^ that placed in the middle of several
others. In hsiim, forum medium means both.
236 THE NOMINATIVE. § 392.
Chap. XVI. — Use of the Cases.
A) The Nominative.
§ 392. The Nominative is the case of the subject and of
the predicate belonging to the subject (§ 361, 3, 4).
Hence, as in Latin vfiihfio^dicorjVideoT^creor, etc., so
in Greek with verbs of the same meaning, 'the predicative
noun referring to the subject is in the Nominative : Kadi-
(TTarai Pa(Ti\evg,he is appointed king / ^AXl^av^pog Oeog
wvojuaZero, Alexander deus appelldbatur. Compare § 361,
7 ; §§ 378, 403.
Obs. — cLKovit)^ Ihear^ in tlie sense of lam called [Lat. avdio], also be-
longs to these verbs : oi Iv 'AOrjvaig (piMTnriKovTEg KoXaicag Kai
OeoXg ix^pol vKovov,the PMlippizers in Athens were called flat-
terers and objects of the gods' hatred.
§ 393. The Nominative is frequently used instead of the Vocative
in addressing a person, especially in connection with ovj-oq : o 'AttoX-
\6d(x)poQ ovTog, oh TrEpifievelg ; You I Apollodorus, won't you stop 1 and
also in exclamations : vrjinog, the fool I ,
B) The Vocative.
§ 394. The person or thing addressed is in the Vocative.
In Attic prose w is generally put before it, except some-
times in animated discourse : fir) dopv^ure, w avdpig 'A0»;-
vaioi, don^t mahe a disturbance^ Athenians ; aKoveig Al-
(Txtvrj; do'youhear^^schinesf
Obs. — The Vocative, like interjections, does not belong to the
structure of a sentence, whence a word in the Vocative is in-
closed by commas.
C) The Accusative.
§ 395. The Accusative, Genitive, and Dative mark an
object as dependent, whence they are called cases of de-
pendence {casus obliqui^ oblique cases).
The Accusative is the case of the Object, and therefore
denotes generally the person or thing to which an action
is directed.
§ 398. THE EXTERNAL OBJECT. 237
The Object is either external to the action by which it
is affected : tutttw tov ^ovXov, I strike the slave, or inter-
nal, i. <?., already contained in the action itself: tvtttoj wev-
TYiKovra irXrjyag, I strike Jlfty blows.
Obs. — The Accusative, therefore, in the great majority of cases, is
dependent on a verb. Only in a very few cases does it happen
that a substantive after the manner of a verb is followed by an
Accusative : ol avjx^axoi reOvaai t<^ Ssei tovq toiovtovq ccTroffToXovg,
the allies are dead (beside themselves) /rom/e^r of such embassa-
dors.
§ 396. 1. The External Ohject
is expressed by the Accusative with transitive verbs as in
other languages. Several verbs, however, are treated in
Greek as transitive which in other languages are intransi-
tive. Such verbs are :
. a) Those which signify to benefit or injure, whether it
be by act or speech : tv or ayaOov Trotew, evEpjETiw, I ben-
efit {roxjq evfpjETridavTagf my benefactors^ ; 6vivr]fjiif w^eXtw,
J am xiseful y KUKiog or kukov iroiiii), icaicow, T do ill/
a^iK^w, I do wrong ; vj^piZio, I insult ; jSXaTrro), / hurt,
etc. ; also icoXa/cfuw, I flatter, and TLfxiopio/aai, I avenge my-
self {tov Ix^pov, on my enemy) ; 6 Sa>jC|oarr/C ovctva twv
TToXiTwv -n^iKtitjEv, Socrates acted unjustly to none of his
fellow-citizens.
§ 397. Not unfrequently the verb of a jDrincipal clause takes as its
object what should properly be the subject of a subordinate clause :
Kai fioi TOV vibv eiTre, d /xeixdOjjKS Trjv rexvrjv, more animated than Kai fioi
dire, d 6 vibg ii£nd9r]Ke ri^v texvtjv, and tell me about my son, whether he
has learned his trade. Compare § 519, 5, Obs. 2.
§ 398. b) The Accusative of the external Object is used
with the verbs : ^^vyw (compare fugio), a7ro^i^pa(TKw, I
run away from ; <^0avw, / get before ; OtjpaM, OrfpEvcj, I
hunt after; fxifuLiojuai (compare imito?'), ZrjXoto, T rival ;
afxhi^ofxaiy I repay, I respond to ; XavOavo) (compare lateo),
ekXeitto) (compare deficio); IkXeitth jU£ 17 iXirig, spes me
deficit.
238 THE INTERNAL OBJECT. § 399.
§ 399. c) This Accusative is farther used with verbs of
emotion : al^eoimm, aKTX^vofxaiy I am ashamed {tov iraripa,
hefore my father) ; ^vXarTojiai, ivXap>iojiai, I am on my
guard against; Qappiti), I have confidence (rriv i(Txyv,in
my strength) ; eKirXriTToiuai, KaTairXriTToiuai, I am amazed
at ; similarly with ojuvvjui, I swear hy {tovq Oeovg, the
gods).
Obs. — As witli oiivvfii, so in exclamations, the Accusative is used
even without a governing verb : vai fia tov Ata, Tes^ ly Zeus !
(§ 643, 16).
§ 399 J. The S^ace and Time over which an action ex-
tends are often expressed by the Accusative : koivtiv oSoy
riXOoiuLw, yje came hy a common road ; Horn. KXifiaKa
v\prj\riv KarefdrjaETo, she came down the high ladder ;
ir\uv BaXacraav, to navigate the sea ; evravOa Kvpog ifxuvE
nuipaQ irivre, there Cyrus remained five days. Compare
§ 405.
On the Accusative of the aim^ see § 406.
§ 400. 2. The Internal Object
is expressed by the Accusative not only with transitive,
but also with intransitive and passive verbs.
The internal Object is :
a^ a word of cognate origin with the verb : Horn. a^Ckoi
^' h-ii^ aWrjm judxriv Ijulolxovto irvXy^aiv, alii circa alias
jportas jpugnam jpugnahant ; retx^? ruxCCovTai, they
wall (build) a wall ; TrojUTrrjv TrifXTreiv, to send an escort,
make a solemn procession ; KaKiarrjv ^ovXeiav b^ov\ev(T£v,
he served the worst service (endured the worst slavery) ;
Hom. rt[» TTEiaeai 6q kev apicTTriv jdovXrfv f^ovXevtr^, you will
obey him who advises (gives) the best advice; rr\v ivavriav
voaov vocTovfiEv, we suffer (sicken) from the ojyposite sick-
ness ; fjLEyaXrjv Tiva Kpimv Kpiverai, he is judged (tried) in
a great trial ;
b) or a word akin to the verb in m^eaning / irkriyriv tvtt-
rsrai /3a/ourarnv, he is struck a very severe blow ; iraaag
§ 402. DOUBLE OBJECT. 239
vocTovg KajjLVH, he suffers from all diseases ; poet, o^vpfxara
yoacrOai, to moan lamentations / ttoXejuov e oTjoarevo-av rov
hpbv KoXovjULEvoVfthey marched out to the so-called holy
war ; ypacpriv ^iwKuv, to pursue with a lorit (compare
ypa(l)rjv ypa^EcrOai) ;
c) or a substantive defining the verb : ^OXv/xiria vikuv,
to conquer in the Olympic games ; ydfiovg lormv, to give
a marriage-feast; Horn. vo(Trov odvpojUBvoi, weeping for
the return ; fxivm irvHovTEg 'Axato/, the courage-hreathing
Achceans ; ayyeXiriv eXOnvyto go a message; nvp ocjiOaX-
fioim ^e^opKtjg, looking fire with the eyes (flashing fiery-
looks) ;
d) or the result of the action expressed by the verb :
IeXkoq ovraaai, to strike a wound (produce by blows) ; op-
fcm raixvHVyfoedus ferire,i.e.,fo6dus hostiam feriendo ef
ficere / poet. i\^i. (17 avap\ia) rpoirag Karapprtyvvcn, it (an-
archy) hreaJcs flight, i. e., produces flight by breaking through
the ranks.
§ 401. Often, especially in the poets, a neuter adjective
or pronoun in the Accusative is added to a verb as a
special qualification, almost like an adverb (§ 400, c) :
oXiyov cnrtivat, to he a little way off; jxiy a \pev^eTaif
he tells a great lie (compare /miya xl^^v^og \pevdsTai) ; tov-
T o \aip(i), at this I rejoice ; ri ^^prtcrojuiai rovrtoj what
use shall I make of this f ir avra Trdaofihi, I will ohey in
all things.
§ 402. 3. Double Object.
Many verbs have a double object, consequently a double
Accusative ; the following, which most frequently occur
with this construction, may serve as examples : ^^i^ddKii)
{e^i^a^av tov irai^a rriv fxovmKi]v, docuerunt jpuerum mu-
sicam) r KpvTTTOjf I hide ; Ipwrdu), I ask ; aiTicj, I demand;
TrpcLTTOfiai, I acquire {dpyvpiov rovg irapovrag, money from
those who are present); kukov Xiyto rovg axOpovg, I speak
240 DOUBLE OBJECT. § 403.
ill of my enemies ; a(^aipko}xai, cnrocTTepioj, I deprive of/
avajuiiuvrjCTKU), I remind of/ Ivtvii), kiK^iivvviii, I put on
{tlvcl ')(^iTU)va, a coat on some one) ; Tr^pi^aWofxai, I encircle
{ruxn TYiv itoKlv, the city with walls). Horn. : 17 ^£ jiiyav
larov vtpaivev ^iirXaKa, she wove a double garment at the
loom (§ 399, h),
Obs. 1. — In the passive construction the thing remains in the Accu-
sative : diSdcTKOfxai ttjv fiovaiKrjV'^ a<pypr}fiaL tov 'ittttov, I am
robbed of the horse.
Obs. 3. — ^Many other verbs besides these have a double Accusative,
by an external object being added to the internal one : Horn.
ov Zevg (piXei TravToirjv ipi\6Ti]Ta, whom Zeus loved with multiform
love, i. e., to whom Zeus manifested love in various ways (§ 400,
a) ; AhxivrjQ Krrjffi^oJVTa ypa^tjv Trapavofiiov ISiioKev, ^schines pros-
ecuted Ktesiphon with a charge of violating the law (§ 400, b) ; poet.
TToXXd ere odvpfiara KUTeldov Ttjv 'Hpa/cXetov t^odov yoatfievtjv, many
tcailings I saw you give vent to about the departure of Heracles
(§ 400, c) ; Hom, iXkoq fie (ipoTog ovraaev dvrjp, the wauiid which
a mortal man struck me (§ 400, d).
§ 404. 4. The Accicsative as a Predicate.
A dependent Predicate relating to an Object is in the
Accusative. Hence the verbs mentioned in §§ 361, 10,
and 392, which signify naming^ deeming^ onahing, appoint-
ing, choosing, representing, and the like, have a double
Accusative in the Active — one of the external Object, and
one of the Predicate : ol KoXa/cec 'A\i^av^pov Oeov tjvo-
}jLaZ,ov, the flatterers used to call Alexander a god ; alpn-
adai Tiva or par r]y6v, eligere aliquem ducem / oi> roiig
irXdcTTa exovrag ev^ai/uLOveaTa t o v g vojiiZii), I do not
deem those possessing most the happiest ; -Kapi^^ l/uavrov
evTTBiOriy I show myself obedient ; cXa/Be tovto ^tj pov,
he received this (as) a gift.
Obs.— The want of the Article often of itself distinguishes the pre-
dicative accusative from the objective (§ 378). In the passive
construction both Accusatives must become Nominative*, accord-
ing to § 392.
§ 404. 5. In a freer way the Accusative is joined to
4®i-
§ 405. DOUBLE 0BJE®4: 241
verbs and adjectives, to point out to wliat the idea of
these words refers, in Teference to what tliey- are to be
understood : Ka/xvw Tr\v k^(^ a\y]v,I suffer in the head
(compare § 400, h) ; o^ikoq ircKrav a^iKiav, unjxist in
every (kind of) injustice (in every way, compare § 400,
a)\ "EXXrjveg elm to y ivog, they are Greeks in race;
ev txojuev TO. (Tw fiara, we are well in hody ; Hom. o/x-
fxar a koX ic £ a X ?) v 'iKeXog Ail repTTiKepavviOf in eyes arid
head like thunder-loving Zeus ; wapOivog KoXri to tldog,
a maiden heautiful in form, or of beautiful, form {facie
pulchra) ; ouSeic avOptJirog avTog tt clvt a aoc^og, no 'inan
is himself loise in every thing ; 6 Map(Tvag TroTajmog ukocfi
KCLi irivTe iro^ag hx^ to tv pog, the River Ma/rsyas was
twenty-five feet in breadth. This Accusative is called the
Accusative of reference.
Obs. — Hence a great number of independent, almost adverbial, Ac-
cusatives : TO ovofxa, in name, by name ; to TrXtjOog^in number; t6v
TpoTTov, in character ; tovtov tov TpoTrov, in this way ; tyjv <pv<jiv, by
nature; Trp6^a(nv,on the pretext, ostensibly ; diKT]v,UJce; xapiP,for
the saJce of (gratia) ; to irav, altogether, on the whole ; ttoXv, by far ;
Ti, quid, what f why ? tI KXaieig ; why weepest thou ? avrd tuvtu
ijK(t),for this very reason I have corns.
§ 405. In regard to the ideas of space and time, the
Accusative expresses extension (compare § 399, h) : Hom.
Trav i]ixap (^ipointiv, a whole day I was home along., to-
turn diem ferebar ; j^amXevg koX "EWrjvEg cnruxov aX-
XtjXwv TpicLKovTa (TTaSta, the hing and the Hellenes
were thirty stadia distant from each other ; Hom. XdireTo
^ovpbg lpu)r]v,he remained a spears throw behind ; tov
filv tv TraOovTa eel fiefxvr\adai tov tt clvt a X9 ^"^ ^^f ^oy
Se TTOLTiaavTa Evdvg £7riXe\ri(T0aiy he who has received kind-
nesses ought to remember them throughout all time, but he
who has done them immediately to forget them.
Obs. 1. — An Accusative used with ordinal numerals, in regard to
time, is to be translated by since before or ago : kjSdSfiriv ijfispav
rj Ovydrrjp avT<^ iTeTeXevTrjKEi, his daughter had died seven days be-
fore. â– '
L
242 THE GENITIVE. § 406,
Obs. 2. — Freer Accusatives, referable chiefly to time, are : tovtov
Tov xpovov^ at this time ; to \onr6v,far tlie future, henceforth ; riXogy
at last; Trporepov, formerly ; dpxnv, up to the beginning, hence en-
tirely; TYjv Taxi(Trr]v, supply 6d6v,tlie quickest (way); ixaKpdv,far,
distant.
§ 406. In the poets, the Accusative joined to verbs of
motion also denotes the j)lace toward which an action is
directed : Horn, rov ^l KXiog ov pavov 'ikh, Ms fanfie
reaches up to heaven ; wCjg riXOeg "A jO 7 o c ; quomodo Ar-
gos venisti f On the absolute Accusative of participles,
see § 586.
D) The Genitive.
% 407. The Genitive generally denotes a thing helong-
ing to another.
Obs. — Hence the Genitive is most commonly dependent on a noun,
and, even where it is governed by a verb, its use resembles that
with a noun.
§ 408. 1. The Genitive with Suhstantives,
One Substantive may be joined to another in various
ways ; the most common are :
1. Sa)ic/oarj]c ^ 'Siw ^ pov i <t kov vlog, Socrates son of
Sophrokiscus : Origin.
2. 7] oiKia TOV Tvarpog, the father's house : Possession,
3. vofiKTiua dpyvpiov,a silver coui : Material.
Horn, ^iirag olvov,a cup of wine : Contents.
4. Gt TrXuaTOL t Cj v 'EW ri v w v,7nost of the Hellenes:
Partitive Genitive.
5. 6 (}i6f5og tCjv TroXefjiiwVf metus hostiurn, i. e., either
a) the fear of the enemy .^ i. e., the fear w^hich the
enemy feels {Subjective Genitive), or,
h) the fear about the enemy, i. e., the fear of which
the enemy is the object {Objective Genitive).
6. ^ovKog irlvre juvwv, a slave worth five Tnince : Value,
7. ypa^ri Kkowrig, an accusation of theft : Cause.
8. irokiTov aptTY], a citizen! s virtue : Quality.
§ 412. THE GENITIVE. 243
9. Horn. TpoiiiQ TTToXiSpov, the city of (called) Troy :
Designation.
Which of the two substantives in any particular case
has to be expressed by the Genitive is generally quite as
clear from their meaning as in English.
But the following special peculiarities in the use of the
different kinds of Genitives deserve to be noticed :
§ 409. a) The Genitive denotes descent from a father,
even without the addition of a Substantive : 2wK|oar»jc o
1>w(l)povi(7Kov, Socrates, the son of Sojphroniscus ; MiKria-
^rig KliuLwvo g, Ifiltiades, son ofKimon; poet., At6c*'A/o-
r^piq, Artemis, daughter of Zeus.
§ 410. J) The Neuter of the Article with a Genitive has
very diflferent meanings (compare § 383) : to. tCjv 'EXXr^-
vb) V, the affairs, interests, possessions of the Hellenes (com-
pare ra 'EXXr]v«ica) ; to Tr\Q 6\Ljap\iag, the nature of the
oligarchy y on the other hand, to tov ArjfiocrOivovg, the
word of Demosthenes ; to. tCjv ^iKijjv Koiva, the property
of friends is common.
§ 411. c) The idea of abode is to be supplied in the ex-
pressions : HQ ^L^aaKoko v <^ofrav, to go to the master's
(house), i. e., to go to school ; Iv or elg "Ai^ov (Homer, hv
^Ai^a o ^ofjioig, in Ilades^ dwelling, dominion), in or into
the lower world.
§ 412. d) The Partitive Genitive (4)3 denoting a whole
to be divided, is most common with numerals and superla-
tives : TT o X X o I TMv ^AOr)vaiwvj multi Atheniensium ; tt o-
TEpog TLJv aSfX^wv ; which of the two brothers f iravTojv
apioTOQj omnium optimus ; but also with various adjec-
tives: 01 (TTTov^aloi Tbjv TToXiTOJVfthe assiduous among
the citizens. So, more freely in the Homeric poems : ^a
OEawVf the divine one among goddesses; drijuov avrip, a
man of the people ; and similarly, a v^j/o rwv pr^Topwv, a
man from the number of the orators.
244 THE GENITIVE. § 413.
The Partitive Genitive with names of places denotes the
whole territory; e?)]3ai rrig Boiwriag, Thehes in Boeotia ;
with Neuter pronouns it sometimes denotes a whole which
is attained by degrees : dq tovto avoiag r}\9ov, eo usque
insanice progressi sunt.
Obs. — Adjectives wliicli have a Partitive Genitive sometimes follow
the gender of the Genitive dependent upon them : 6 rj/xKrvg tov
Xpovov, the half of the time (instead of to ijixiav tov xpovov) ; »)
TrXdaTT] TfjQ x<^P«C, '^^^^i of ihe land.
§ ^13. e) The Objective Genitive (5, e) may be translated
by various prepositions: wvoia tCjv (I}l\ix)v, benevolence
tovmrd friends ; airopia aiTovyWant of food; Hom./f^oc
l^x\rvoq i\^\ iTOTr\To Qy eagerness for food and drinh ; riavxia
Ix^P^ ^y J9^(2C6 from enemies ; ayihvig Xoyw v, contests in
speeches ; cKpopfxri Epytjv, stimulus to deeds; aTrocrramc T(i>v
^AOrivaiwv, defection from the Athenians ; Xvmg OavaTov,
deliverance from death ; j3/g iroXirw v, with violence against
the citizens, in spite of the citizens.
2- Genitive loith Adjectives and Adverbs.
% 414. The Genitive is joined to many relative adjec-
tives and their adverbs, i. e., to such adjectives and adverbs
as are conceivable only in reference to something, and
points out the person or thing they refer to. The most
important adjectives of this kind are :
1. KoivoQy common; l^iog, olKHog, own, peculiar, and oth-
ers which imply property or belonging to, as : vaog hpbg
TOV 'AttoXXwvoc, ^ temple sacred to Apollo (possession,
compare § 408, 2).
2. Adjectives denoting j^Z^wi^^/ ^^^ want (contents, § 408,
3), as: iuL£GT6gftiunr\sii)g,TrX7] prig, full; ifKovaiog, rich ; Iv
^BTig, wivrig, necessitous ; farther, the adverb aXig, enough :
iravTa EV(l)pO(Tvvr}g irXia i]v, all was full of joy.
3. Those signifying acquainted or imacquainted with :
llxiTupog, peritiis ; aireipog, imperitus ; lTri(TTrifxu)v, sldlled
§ 416. THE GENITIVE. * 245
(rixvv^, in o^Ti art)\ fjLvyjjudJv, ajuvrjjuwv, mindftd and un-
mindful.
4. a^ioQy worthy j ava^ioQy unworthy ; TrXeUrov a^iov,
worth most, the worthiest thing (§ 408, 6);
5. Adjectives implying participation (§ 408, 4), whether
it be positive or negative: fiiroxog tov 7r6vov,particeps
laboris; ajxoipog, without a share j' ainog, author, guilty,
reus. .
Obs. — To these belong many adjectives compounded with dv (d,
§ 360) privative, which, especially in poets, are joined with the
genitive : poet. aio)v kukCov dyevarog, a life which has not tasted of
misfortunes ; cpiXbJv uKXavrog, unwept ty friends.
6. Adjectives in -iKog (§ 351) denoting capability or fit-
ness for (compare 3) something : ^L^aGKokiKoq jpa/uiuaTiKrig,
capable of teaching grammar ; TrapacTKevaariKbg tcjv ug rbv
TToXcjuoy, skilled in obtaining the necessaries for war.
§ 415. Many Adverbs of Place are joined with a Geni-
tive, which is mostly of a Partitive nature (compare § 412):
TTou yfie; where on earth? so with IvTog, within ; aW,
inside; iKTog, without ; t^oj, outside/ o.yxi) lyyvgy nXtj-
aiov, near; Trpoo-w or ir 6 ppto, forward ; iripay beyo'nd ;
evOv, straight towards ; irporrOev, tjULTrpocrOev, in front; om-
(rOeVf behiiid; djKliOTipwdiv, on both sides; avh), upward
(TTora/xwi', up-stream^) \ and corresponding with these also
some adverbs of time and manner : TrrjvUa Trjg rjl^epag ;
at what time of the day f iruig 'i^^ig rfjc yvh)fxr)g ; what do
you think? XaOpa ra>y yoviwv, secretly from the parents.
§ 416. The Comparative may have the object with which,
any thing is compared in the Genitive (as in the Abla-
tive in Latin) : iulh^wv tov d^eX(l>ovj major fratre, i. e., rj
6 d^iX(l)6gy than the brother; ov irpogmu rbv apxovra
TMV dpxo/mhujv irovrfpOTepov uvai, i. e., rj rovg dpxofiivovg,
it is not becoming that the governor should be worse than
the governed.
Obs. 1. — This Genitive is used most frequently where it represents
246 THE GENITIVE. § 417.
y with the Nominative or Accusative ; yet it may also more
freely represent ?/ with the Dative : poet. TrXejwv xp^^^^Qi '^^ ^^'^ /^'
apkcTKuv ToiQ KCLTio Tuiv tvOd^E (tj Tolg tvOdSe), longer is the time that
I must please those below than tJmt I must please those here.
Obs. 3. — Like th6 Comparative, the Superlative is sometimes joined
with the Genitive of the things with which any thing is com-
pared : poet. <l)doQ KoXXi arov twv Trporspwv, a light most beautiful
in comparison with the former ones, where we might have expected
(pdoQ KdWiov riov Trporepujv, lux prioj^bus pulchrior, or (pdoQ KdWt-
GTov Trdvrwv, omnium pulcherrima.
Obs. 3. — All adjectives expressive of a comparison follow the rule
of Comparatives : hTrXdaiog, doubly (as great as) ; hvT^poQ (ovdevog),
second {to none) ; vonpoQ, later than ; 'irepoQ, another than. _
3. The Genitive with Verbs.
Very many verbs are joined with the Genitive on the
general principles mentioned in § 408.
§ 417. 1. The Genitive represents a Predicate (§ 361 > 7
and 10) with verbs which denote being., becoming^ making.,
deeming.^ in order to predicate something of a substantive,
as originating from, possessing, consisting of, or in any
other way qualifying it, § 408 : SwK/oarTjc ^(i)(l)povi(Ticov rjv,
Socrates was Sojphroniscus' s son (§ 408, i); i] oiKia rov
irarpog tyivtroy the house became the fathers jpro^erty
(§ 408, 2); TO rCiyoq \iOov TTfTrotrjraf, the wall has been
made of stone (§ 408, 3) ; ol eEcro-aXoi rwv 'EXX?}vwv naav,
the Thessalians belonged to the Hellenes (§ 408, 4) ; TroXt-
Tov ajaOov vojuiZeTai Oappuv, to be courageous is deemed a
good citizen! s quality (§ 408, 8).
Obs. — The Genitive often occurs with verbs of perception and ob-
servation in such a way that it is properly dependent on a noun
or pronoun : tovto vfiajv ndXiara Oavixd^oixev, this we most admire in
you (properly : this of you we most admire).
§ 418. 2. The Genitive of Material (§ 408, 3) is also
used with verbs oi plenty and want (compare § 414, 2):
iripnrXrijiL, ir\r]p6ii),I fill ^' irXi^Bw, y^jjib), I a7n full ; ^eojuai
(Sti poi), I need ; ra wra iviirXridav ^aipoviag aocpiag, they
filled the ears with wondrous wisdom; 6 irapwv Katpbg
§ 419. THE GENITIVE. 247
TToXXijc (ppovTi^og KaX j3ouXr/c ^iiTai, the jpresent time is in
need of much reflection and advice.
% 419. 3. The Partitive Genitive (§ 408, 4) is used with
many verbs which only jpartially affect the object of the
action :
a) With all verbs which contain the idea of sharing :
luieTi\u) {jiiTiiGTL fjiQi), I have a share in ^ jmeTaXajildavti),!
take a share in ; jueTa^iEufxi, I give a share (rJjc Atmc, of
the booty) \ KOLvijjviw, I share (compare § 414,5); Hom.
aiTOv 8' al^oiT] rafiir} TrapiOr^Ke ^apiZ^Ofxivr] Trapaovrtuv, the
modest stewardess brought bread sujpjplying from the store.
*Obs. — oCo),I smell, also belongs to these: jivpojv 6K^i,he smells of
myrrh.
b) With verbs which denote touching^ laying hold of
seizing : airroixai, xpavw, I touch ; txofiaiy I hold by, border
{Tivoq) on something^' avTi\oiJiai, l-rriXafiptavofiaL, I lay
hold of; Xafij^avu) Tiva T7}g ^iLpog,! seize one by the
hand ; ap\o\mi, I begin (r ^ c tt a t ^ 1 1 a c, with the educa-
tion)-, poet, ^avovrtiiv ov^lv aXyog airrf^rai, no jpoAn
touches the dead.
c) With verbs which denote striving, aiming at : oro-
Xa^ofxai Tov gkottov,! aim at the- goal ; optyoimai, /strive;
^ixpaw, I thirst,; rvy\aviii, I hit, attain (fVux^ twv aOXwv,
he wo?i the prizes); l(lnKvovnai, I reach, attain; r'lKw, I
have attained (Herod, ^vvafxiog, power).
d) With verbs which denote enjoying : laOiw, I eat ;
irivw,! drinJc ; y^vu),! give a taste; k(jTiab), I entertain;
aTToAaww, / enjoy {imeyifTTwv ayadwVf the greatest blessings);
tvog av^pog iv (Ppovriaavrog TroXAot av diroXavaEiav,
inany %oould enjoy a man who has thought sensibly.
e) With verbs denoting the opposites of the ideas enu-
merated under a — d, that is, the exclusion from a share in
something: a-i\o^ai, I refraiii {gltov , abstineo cibo); x!^-
pitii) , I separate ; upyw^I keep off; aripicsKM , I deprive ;
TTavojuai, I cease; tiKw, Trapa\iopi(x), I yield ; Xuw, / loose ;
248 THE GENITIVE. § 420.
IXevOepou), I free j t^u^o^xai, I sjpare ^ afiapTavii), cnrorvy-
yavu),I miss,' \piv^opai, ac^iaWofxaiy I aon deceived {rrig
IXiri^ogy in my ho])e).
Obs. — Many of these verbs are also joined with an Accusative
when an object is to be expressed as wholly encompassed by the
action : irXdarov fispog rivog /zfrixetv, to Jiave the greatest part in
any thing; irivio oJvov, I drinJc wine; qivov, some wine; Xayxavio
ri, I attain something; rtvog, a share in something.
§ 420. 4. The Genitive is joined with many verbs de-
noting a sensuous or m^oral jyerception or emotion (com-
pare § 414, 3), as: aKOvtj, aKpoaofiai, I hear j aKrOavofiai,
I perceive ; iiifxvy]<jKOfiaiy I rememher {rov (^i\ov, memini
amici); imXavdavofJLai, I forget ,' fxiXn fioi TLvoqylTrip.^Xi-
ofiaif I am concerned about sonnetliing^ I care ; Ivrpinoiuai,
Hom. aXiytjy aXeyiZtjj, I concern myself; ajULsXtio, I neg-
lect ; oXiyiopiu), I care little about ; Ipad), I love (§ 419, c);
iTriOvjuioj, I desire ; irvvOavofiaL ri Tivog, I learn something
about one.
Obs. — The Accusative also is admissible with several of these
verbs : with ukovu), if the object is directly audible : ^96yyov, a
sound, but tov didauKoXov, the teacher.
§ 421. 5. With verbs of estimating, buying, selling, etc.,
the Genitive denotes the value or price (compare § 408, 6,
and § 417) : 6 dovXog Trivre p.vu)v TifiaTai, the slave is valued
at five mince; iroXXov wveiaOai, magni emere; raXdvTov
airo^oaOai, to sell for a talent.
§ 422. 6. With verbs of judicial proceedings the Geni-
tive denotes the cause (§ 408, 7, § 414, 5): kXott^c ypa^^-
adai aiaxpoVffurti occusari turpe est ; (povov ^itoKsiv, to
prosecute for murder; (pEvyn irapavofiwvyhe is charged
with violating the law ; airi^vye KaKtjyopiag, he was ac-
quitted of libel; kaXhiaav Ttpo^ocjiaq, proditionis condem-
nati sunt.
Obs. — With verbs of emotion the Genitive likewise expresses the
cause, as : QavfidZo) o-e rrjg aojtppoavvrjg, I admire thee for thy mod-
eration ; Hom. xw6/i£voe ywaiKoq, angry about the woman.
§ 425. THE GENITIVE. 249
§ 423. 7. The Genitive is also joined with verbs which
imply the meaning of a Comparative (§ 416), as : Kpariuj
{icpHTT(i)v el/JLi), cLp\ii) {Kpoiaog AuSwv ^Vx^^> Crmsus ruled
over the Lydians) ; jSao-iXeuw, / ride ; iripiup.i, -rrepiyiyvo-
fxaijlam sicperior ; -nrraoimaL {inTwy ufxi), I am inferior;
Xdiro/bLai, v(TTepi(ij,Iam behind; ^ta^apw TivoQfdiffero ab
aliquo ; fiap^aptov "EXXrjvag apx^tv aicoc, '^t is reasonable
that Hellenes should rule over barbarians.
§ 424. 8. The Genitive is joined with verbs compounded
with prepositions, which either always, or in the sense
which they have in the compound verb, require the Gen-
itive (compare Chapter XVII.) : £ic/3aXXw tlvcl rifxrig, I
eject sotne one from office ; irpoaraTzvu rf)(,* iroXzwQ, he pre-
sides over the state ; 1<jxvv tov ^lkuiov irpoTiOrjGiv, he pre-
fers might before right ; Kara(l>povuv nvog, to desjpise any
one; Karriyopdv tl tivoq^Io accuse one of a thing ; Trarpiov
yv rri ^AOrjvaiiov woXei TrpoeGravai tu)v 'EXXr/vwv, it VMS a
hereditary custom for the city of the Athenians to be at
the head of the Hellenes.
4. Freer use of the Genitive.
§ 425. The Genitive, without immediate connection with
a noun or verb, expresses :
1. Place (local Genitive), almost exclusively in the lan-
guage of poetry, and that eithei^ the place fro7n which
something is removed : '[(rraaOe [5adpo)Vf get up from the
stej)s; virayuv rf/c oSou, to go out of 'the way (compare
§ 419, e) ; — or the space within which something takes
place (compare §§ 412, 415) : rfjc 'Iwvmc tovto ai(s\pov
vevo/uiiaTai, within Ionia that is considered disgraceful;
Hom. i;f<^oc oh (^taiv^To iraariq yairig, no cloud ajppeared
within the com/pass of the whole earth ; ip^ovTai ir^^ioio,
they go through or within thej^lain (compare the German
ich gehe des Weges).
On another local Genitive, see § 412.
L2
250 THE DATIVE. § 426.
§ 426. 2. Time (temporal Genitiv^),in which case it is
a Partitive Genitive expressing the whole of a space of
time (§ 412) within which something takes place: rpig
Tov IviavTov, thrice in the yeai* j i]fxipag,hy day j vvKTog,
hy night y tov avTov yiifjLwvoQf in the same winter j tov
XoLTTovyfor the future ^' \p6vov av\vov,for some timej
iKaaTov tTovg, each year.
§ 427. 3. Cause (causal Genitive, compare § 408, 7,
§ 422), in exclamations : otjuoi Trig rvyr\g^ alas ! for my
fortune (compare the German O des Leides) ; and in In-
finitives with the Genitive of the Article (in order to).
§ 574, 3, Ohs,
§ 428. 4. Occasion, time, circumstances, etc., as an al>so-
lute Genitive, in connection with participles, just like the
absolute Ablative in Latin : Kvpov (iamXevovTog, Gyro reg~
nante, § 584 (compare the German : stehenden Fusses),
Obs. — The absolute Genitive very rarely occurs, like the absolute
Ablative of the Latins, without a participle ; when the verb to le
occurs in the clause the participle u)v is to be used : te jpuero^ aov
Traiddg uvtoq.
E) The Dative.
§ 429. The Dative denotes, in general, the person or
thing more remotely connected with an action.
Obs. — The Dative, therefore, depends just as often on verbs as on
adjectives (adverbs), but very rarely on a substantive.
§ 430. 1, Dative <di iha person concerned.
As in Latin and English, so in Greek, the person more
remotely affected by something is in the Dative, and :
a) with transitive verbs it is the so-called indirect oh-
ject : ^om. kwTa ^i ol Swo-w svvaiojLieva TTToXUOpa, and I
will give him seven flourishing cities.
h) with intransitive verbs it expresses the person or a
thing conceived as a person to which the action refers :
§ 435. THE DATIYE. 251
iTpiiTu fjLoi Tij a thing hecomes me / Stt [loi nvog, I need
something ; IjuoX ovrw ^okeT bx^iv, it seeUis to me to he so ;
/3orj0w rote (J\)iilio.yoiq, SUGCurro sociis / ireiOov rolg vo/moLc;,
ohey the laws ; fux^o'^e rote Oioig,pray to the gods; fxifM-
^ofxai Toiq fxadr]Taig,I rej[)roach the scholars.
Obs. — Substantives derived from such verbs are sometimes followed
by the Dative : j? Iv n^ TroXefiq) roTg avmidxoiQ (3oT]9Ha, the help to
the allies in the war.
c) with Adjectives : 6 ayaOog tio ayaOc^ fxovog (plXog, the
good alone is dear to the good.
431. 2. Dative oi interest.
The Dative denotes the person for whom — for whose
interest — something is or takes place ; hence
a) the person henefited or injured {dat. commodi, incom-
modi) : irag avrjp avrto irovu, every man toils for himself;
(l>d6vog /mijKTTov kukov Toig i)(ov(Tiv avTov, envy IS the great-
est evil to them that have it.
432. h) the possessor with tt/xf, yiyvoimai, and similar
verbs: iroXXoi fioi cjiiXoi daiVy I have many friends.
Obs. — The possessive Dative is sometimes, like the Genitive, joined
with a Substantive : Herod., 61 a^t /Sdee, their oxen.
• § 433. c) the symjpathizing person (ethical Dative) : poet,
w tLkvov, y\ f3l(5wsv r\iiLv 6 ^ivog ; O child, has the stranger
left us f ri yap Trarfip juoi irpia^vg Iv ^o/ulokti ^pa ; for what
is my aged father doing in the house f
§ 434. d) the acting person with passive verbs (common-
ly vTTo with the Genitive), which is then to be viewed as
one interested in the action : Hom. iroXUg ^ajuev "Eicro/ot
S/q>, many were overcome by godlike Hector ; ri TriirpaKraL
Toig aXXoig ; what has been done by the rest f This Da-
tive is regularly joined with the Verbal Adj. in -Tiog : t/uoi
TToXejUY^Ttov Igtiv, miM 2)ugrvaiyJiiim est.
§ 435. e) the person remotely connected with an action :
riOvTix ^H-'^v TToXai, he died to you long ago-; Hom. wcktiv
252 THE DATIVE. § 436.
Ksv TpwecTGi Kv^og apoio, thou mightest get thee fame with
all Trojans ,' Horn. toIglv avtcrrr}, among them arose ; vtto-
Xafi^avHv ^a ti^ toiovtm on tv{}Or}g laTiv, in regard to such
a one we must su^pjpose him simjple.
Obs. — In this manner participles are most frequently used, partly
with, partly without, an accompanying noun : Hom. 77/tiTv dvarog
i(TTi 7repiTpo7rsu)v iviavroQ IvOdde fiifivovreaffiv, it is tJie ninth year
Jar us lingering here; r) diaj3dvTi tov Trorafibv irpbg koTrkpav 6d6g,
the road westward when you have crossed the river ; yiyverai n tfioi
(3ovXofisv(p, something ha/ppens to me as I wish; crweXovrt. or mq
avv^XovTi eiTreiv, to spealc briejly.
§ 436. 3. Dative of community.
With verbs, adjectives, and adverbs, which denote com-
munity, agreement, friendly or hostile meeting, the person
or thing with which such a community, agreement, or such
a meeting takes place, is in the Dative.
a) Verbs of this kind are : Koivajvuv, I share {rivi rtvoc,
something with one) ; crvfKJiwviu), o/uioXoyiu}, <tuvo[Sw, ojulo-
voiu), I agree ; u/bioioofiaiy I resemble ; o/unXia), I associate
with; ^laXiyoiiaiy I converse ; ^icK^lpofxaiy I differ ; juaxo-
fiaif I fight ; Ipi^io , I dispute ; ra tpya ov av/uKpoyvH roTg
Xoyoig, the deeds do not harmonize with the words ; poet.
KaKoiaiv \xy] npogojuiXei av^pdaiVy aXX alei tCjv ayaOiov t'x^o,
with bad men do not associate, but always hold to the
good.
b) Adjectives : \(jog, like / ofioiog, TrapaTrXrjcriog, simi-
lar / 6 avTog, the same ; oiKuog, ^^log, j[>eculiar ; Koivog,
common (compare 414, l); vjuivvv/Liog, of like name; cruv-
wvvjuog, of like meaning; ^ta<popog, different; IvavTiog,
ojpposite : wirXiaiuivoi rjtjav roig avroTg Kvpi^ oirXoig, they
were armed with the same weapons as Cyrus.
c) Adverbs : besides those derived from the adjectives
just mentioned, especially afia, at the same time; ojuov,
together : afxa t^I} halpoj, at the same time with his friend.
§ 437. The Dative is used with many verbs which, com-
§ 440. THE DATIVE. 253
pounded with prepositions, denote a contact, or union, es-
pecially with such as are compounded with h, avv, liri,
yet also with those compounded with irpog, irapa, irspi,
VTTO, as : iTnaTi]p.r]v Ifnroiuv ry x^vxy, to bring knowledge
into the soul ; i-KiKua^ai nvi, to press tcpon, to tirge, orle ;
iTTiTifxuv Tivt TL, to rejproack one with something * irpogdvai
Tt[) ^i)iu(jt)y to come before the jpeojple / TraptcrTaaOai, irapelvai
Tivt, to suj>port one; TrspiiriTrTstv nvi, to meet one.
§ 438. 4. The Instrumental Dative, answering to the
Latin Ablative, denotes that hy or hy means of which an
action is brought about ; hence
«) the "means or instrument (compare Sta, § 458) : Horn.
rov fjilv Kara GTrjOog f3a\s ^ovpi, the one he struck on the
breast with the spear; optjfxev To1g o^daXpoXg, we see with
the eyes ; ov^ug iiraivov ri^ova7g licr/jo-aro, 7io one gained
praise by pleasures ; Zvimiovv nva Qavarix), to punish one
loith death ; Horn. Tiauav Aavaol t/za ^aKpva aolm jScXeo--
mv, may the Danai pay for my tears by thy darts,
Obs. — Hence the Dative is used with xp>l(TOai, to make use of; as the
Ablative with uti in Latin. A second predicative Dative is often
added (§ 361, 10) : tovtojv nai (pvXa^iv txpn'^'o, some of them he used
as guards.
. § 439.^) the operating power or cause from which an
action proceeds : avOpioirog (pvcreL ttoXitikov, man {is) by
nature fitted for the state ; iroXXaKig ayvoia a/uLapravoiuev,
we often err from ignorance ; (j)6(5uj, from fear.
Obs. — With verbs of emotion, the Dative expresses the ground or
occasion of the emotion : tjdofiai, x«'P<^ ^y ixovaiKy, I delight in
music; XvTTovfiai, I am grieved; %aX£7ratVw, / am angry; arkpyM^
ayaTrCJ^iI am satisfied (with something); aiaxvpofiat, lam ashamed
(about something).
§ 440. c) the measure, by which a thing is measured,
by which one thing surpasses another, by which it is dis-
tinguished : TO. fxiXXovTa Kpivofiav Tolg y^'yzvr]fxivoig, thefu-
254 THE DATIVE. § 441.
ture we judge ofhy the jpast ; dUa treat irpo rrig ev ^a\a-
fjiivt fxa\r]g ot ^ Adr]vaioi Iv MapaOiovL fy/jcrjcrav, te?l years
hefore the hattle of Salamis the Athenians conquered at
Marathon; noXXi^) /ndZivv, multo major (also ttoXv, § 404,
Ohs^\ ^ia(piptiv Tivog ^povi]<TUf to differ from any one in
insight.
§ 441. 5. The, freer use of the Dative expresses:
a) the way and manner, or an accompa;nying circum-
stance : TovTio rtp TpoTTM, iu tMs way ; ^'la, by force;
(Tirov^y, with seal; aiyy, in silence; tpyc^, in fact ; r([)
ovTi, m truth ; l^ia, privatim ; Zmxoma, puhlice ; Hom.
vrjTriirjm, in his folly (§ 362, Obs.).
Obs. — The Dative with avrog should be particularly noticed : 6
<^i\nnroQ TrevTaKOcriovg tTnreag iXafSev avrolg toIq ottKoiq, Philip took
Jive hundred horse together with their armor. (Compare the Dative
of community, § 436.)
§ 442. b) The j^ted? where something happens is ex-
pressed by the Dative more rarely in prose than in poetry :
MapadCjvif at Marathon; Hom. 'EXXa^t oiKia vainjv, in-
habiting his house in Hellas ; Hom. rof wjjLoiaiv e'xwv,
having the bow on his shoulders ; poet. 68o7c, on the way.
§ 443. c) Time is expressed by the Dative as definitely
limited in answer to the question when : r^Sf rij vvkti, hac
node; ry vGTipaia,on the following day ; TerapTa) lTu,in
the fourth year ; ^OXv/uLwioicat the Olympic ' games ; poet.
Xsijuspiii) voTt^y in a stormy south wind.
05s.— Notice the diflference between the Accusative (§ 405) and the
Genitive (§ 436), in their application to relations of time.
447. THE PREPOSITIONS. 255
Chap. XYII. — The Prepositions.
§ 444. Prepositions have a double use. Either they are
combined with a verb, to define the direction which the
action of the verb takes, or they are used independently,
and serve, in connection with different cases, to point out
the relation of single words in a sentence to one another
more distinctly than could be done by the cases alone.
§ 445. Obs. 1. — As the name prcepositio (TrpoOacrig) points to tlie first
of these uses, those prepositions which are not combined with verbs,
such as: dvev, without (poet, â– ^t'xa, xwjo/c) ; dxpi, f^^XPh ^^^^^' f^^Ta^v, be-
tween ; svEKa^ on account of; irXqv, besides, are called spurious. They
are all used with the Genitive (compare § 415), except wg, to, which
has the Accusative.
§ 446. Obs. 2. — All Prepositions were originally adverbs ; many of
them are still used as such in poetry, and a few even in prose : irepi,
beyond, very ; fierd, later; irpog, in addition. On account of this ori-
gin, their position jn Homer is very free ; they may be separated
from their verb as well as from their substantive : Hom. iv S' avrbg
tcv(7ETo vuipoira xa^Kov, and he himself put on the glittering brass ; dn<pi
Se xcti'''<^'^ cjfioig aXaaovTai, and the manes wave around the shoulders. On
the anastrophe in placing the Prepositions behind, see § 90. In prose
only TTEpi is sometimes thus used.
§ 447. With regard to the cases joined with Prepositions,
the following general rules are to be noticed :
1. The Accusative with Prepositions expresses the object
upon which, over which, toward which an action extends
(§§ 395, 405), and with many Prepositions the goal of an
action itself (§ •406).
2. The Genitive frequently denotes iho^ jplace from which
an action proceeds (§ 425), often also a moral relation
(§ 408, etc.), while it depends on other Prepositions in the
same way as on the adverbs mentioned in § 415.
3. The Dative denotes a more external connection (§§ 435,
442).
256 prepositions with the accusative. § 448.
General View of the Prepositions.
§ 448. I. Prepositions which can have only one case :
A) the Accusative : uq, wq.
B) the Genitive : avri, airo, Ik (c^, tt/oo — aviv, a-\pi,
C) the Dative : Iv, gvv (Svv).
II. Prepositions which can have two cases :
A) the Genitive and Accusative : 3m, Kara, virip.
B) the Dative and Accusative : ava.
III. Prepositions which can have all the three oblique
cases : ajuipi, Itti, /uL^ra, irapa, Trepi, irpog, vtto.
I. Prepositions which can have only one Case.
§ 449. A) Prepos-ltions with the Accusative.
1. elg or £c (Lat. in, c. Accus., and inter), to, into, points
out the goal toward which the action is directed. The
opposite is t^, oict. tig is used :
a) of jplace : ol AaKt^aifiovioi Eiglj3a\ov elg rrjv 'Arrfjcr/v*
the Zacedcemonians invaded Attica; elg ^iKaarripiov slg-
livai, to come into court; Xiyeiv elg to nXriOog, to speak to
the multitude ; elg avdpag eyypa(^eiv,to enroll among men.
Compare lv,% 456, a.
h) of time : elg rrjv vaTepaiav, in diem proximum, for
the next day ; elg ernrepav, toward evening; poet. eTog elg
hog, year hy year ; elg Kaip6v,for the right time.
c) of measure and number : elg ^laKomovg, tip to two
hundred; elg ^vva/miv, up to one^s power, as much as is iii
one'' s power.
d) of purpose : xpv<riiuLov elg tov iroXejuiov, useful for the
war'; elg ro^e r\KOfiev,for that we have come.
In compounds it is to be translated by into, in, to.
% 450. 2. wg (compare § 631), to, only of persons : Horn.
§ 453. PKEPOSITIONS WITH THE GENITIVE. 257
aUX Tov bfioXov ayu Oiog ojg tov ofxoTov, God always brings
like to like.
§ 451. B) Prepositions with the Genitive.
1. avTi (compare Horn, avra, avTr]v, avriKpv), originally
opposite to (compare Iv-avri-og), then instead of, for :
Hom. avxi Kaariyvy^TOv ^dvog 9' iKtTrig re rirvKTai, a stranger
and a suppliant is instead of a brother (like a brother) ;
avTi dvr\TOv aivjuarog aOdvarov ^o^av aWa^aaSai, to ex-
change a 7/iortal body for immortal glory.
In compounds it signifies against.
§ 452. 2. ctTTo (Lat. ab, a, Engl, off), frorn, in the sense
of separation, severance, and origin :
a) of place : Hom. a(^' ^l-mriov oXto xa/maZe, he sprang
of the chariot to the ground.
b) of time : from, since: air lKHvr\g rrig r]ixipag,from
that day.
c) of cause : by, from, through : avrovofiog awo rrig upr}-
vrjg, independent through the peace.
Phrases: airo aKoirov, far from the goal; ano yvtofxrig,
contrary to expectation ; awo (TTOfxaTog Xlyeiv, to speak
from memory ; ot Il-ko aKy\vr\g, those of the stage, the act-
ors.
In compounds it signifies ^c>m, off, away,
§ 453. 3. Ik, before vowels e? (Lat. ex, e), out of (op-
posed to Etc), denotes removal from within or from among :
^) of place : Ik. ^iraprrig (pEvyei, he is banished out of
Sparta.
b) of time : Ik iTal^b)v,from boyhood {a pueris).
c) of origin,: Ik warpbg xprjaTov lyiveTO,he sprang from
a brave father ; seldom with a Passive verb: rifiacfOai ek
Tivog, to be honored by any one.
d) close connection and conformity with : after, secun-
dum : Xoyov Ik Xoyov Xtyeiv, to deliver speech after speech;
258 PREPOSITIONS WITH THE DATIVE. § 454.
tK tC)v o/jtoXoyovjuhwv, according to the agreement (Lat.
-secundum).
Phrases : Ik ^t^iag, on the right ; l^ 'laov, egtially; ^ricrai,
Kptfxaaai tl Ik rivog, to fasten^ to hang one thing to another
(Lat. ^endlre ex, ah aliqua re).
In compounds : out, away.
§ 454. 4. 7rp6ilLi2ii.j>rd), for, before, instead.
a) of place, before : irpo OvpCJv, before the door.
b) of time : irpo Tr\q /xa^rjc, before the battle.
c) of preference : irpo tovtwv TsOvavai fxaXXov av 'iXoiro,
he would choose death before this, i. e., rather than this.
d)for, a rare use : ir-pb irai^wv fxaxecrdai, to fight for the
children.
Phrase : irpo ttoXXoO iroidaOai (c), to prefer greatly.
In compounds: before, forth, beforehand, forwa7'd.
§ 455. The spurious Prepositions :
5. ay£v, without (poet. X(i)pig, ^ixa, arep),
6. a\pi, fiixpif until.
7. pera^v, between.
8. 'ivEKa, also evtKev, tiveKa (poet. ovviKo), for the sake of
an object to be attained (Lat. causa): rfjc vyieiag evsKa
Xpwp^Qa rq> larpiio, we employ a physician for the sahe of
health. (Compare ^m with Ace, § 458, B.)
9. 7rX?)v, besides {proeter).
Obs. — Tr\r]v is often used quite adverbially without governing a
case : poet, ovk ap 'AxaioXg dv^peg dai ttXtiv oh ; huTe then the
Achmns no men hut this ? It might be TrXrjv roUe, besides this ?
§ 456. C) Prepositions tvith the Dative.
1. Iv (Hom. Ivi, Iv, Lat. in, c. Ablat., and inter), in, an-
swers to the question where ?
a) of place: Iv ' AOrjvaig, in Athens ; also a77iong (inter) :
tv TovToig, among them; Iv ^po) XijEiv, to speak before the
people (compare § 449, o).
§ 458. prepositTions with the gen. and acc. 259
. h) of time : Iv tovtoj r^i tVff, in that year.
c) a moral relation : with : Iv to} Otoj to ttiq fxaxnQ riXog,
the result of the hattle rests vnth God.
Phrases: 77 Iv MapaOtJvL juaxn^ihe hattle at Marathon ;
Iv Toiq TTpCjTog, first hy far j iv KaipCjt, at the right time ;
iv 7rpoqdi]K.r]Q jiipu,in addition^' iv xt^pGi Ti9ivai,to put
into the hands (compare Lat. in mensa ponere).
In compounds : in, into, on. The accented ivi — tveaTi
signifies it is in, it exists, it is possible.
§ 457. 2. avv or ^vv (Lat. cum), with, denotes compan-
ionship (opposed to av^v, compare fx^Ta with Gen., § 464,
B) ; (Tvv 'A9{}vy syt/crjo-cv, he conquered {with the help of)
Athene y avv v6p.i^)yin accordance with the law (opposed
to irapa with Acc, § 465, C, h). .
In compounds : with, together.
11. Prepositions which can have two Cases.
The Genitive and Accusative.
Obs. — Here, as every where in what follows, that use of a Preposi-
tion is placed first in which its original meaning is most mani-
fest.
§ 458. 1. ^la (akin to Sue, as between is to two [twai^i]),
originally between, then through.
A) with the Genitive :
a) of space : most frequently throtcgh (Lai. per) : Hom.
Sm fxlv cKTTTi^og ffXOe (jtaeivrjg oj^pi^ov ij^OQ, through the
glittering shield pierced the mighty lance.
b) insti'umental : by or vnth : Sm rwv oc^tdaXjuiiov opw/mev,
by (by means of) the eyes we see (compare § 438).
c) of space and time : a^nong {inter), during, in : ^la
yjiipC)v 'ix^iv, to have in hand j 3(a vvKTog, during night y
^la (piXiag livai, to be on friendly terms.
• Phrases : ^la aTo/xaTog tx^iv, to have in the motcth, to
260 PREPOSITIONS WITH THE GEN. AND ACC. § 459.
be talking about; ^i' ovdsvog iroLuaQai, to deem as nothing ,'
^la fxaKpov, after a long interval^ interruption.
B) with the Accusative :
a) of space and time, almost exclusively in the poets :
through, during : Horn. Sm Stj/maTa, through the rooms /
diet vvKTa, during night.
h) usually causal : on account ^(the operating cause)
(compare f vfica, § 455, 8) : ^m tr\v voaov xptJjueOa t(^ larpt^,
we employ the physician on account of the illness.
Phrases : avroq St kavrov, by himself; Sia tl ; why f
In compounds, Sta is through, or denotes separation, like
Lat. dis' : ^ia(^ipii)=differre, diaipio), I sever.
§ 459. 2. Kara (compare Adv. icarw, dow7i), originally
downward, down (the opposite to avd).
A) with the Genitive :
a) of space : down from : Hom. /3r) ^t icar OvXviuiroio
Kap{]VLov, he came down from the heights of Olympus ;
helow {sub) : to. kuto. yrig, things below the earth.
b) tropically : about, against : Xtytiv Kara nvog, to speak
about, against one.
Phrases : ttoXlv kut uKpag eXuv, to capture a city com-
pletely ; Kara vljtov, behind.
B) with the Accusative it denotes in its most general
sense extension over, relation to, direction toward some-
thing :
a) of place : Kara poov, down a stream ; Kara yriv koX
OdXatraav, by land and sea ; Hom. Zeitg t/Br? Kara ^aiTa,
Zeus went to the feast.
b) of time : kut Ikhvov tov xp^^^^f ^^ ^^^^ time; -ol
KaO' i7Mac, Our contemporaries.
c) of other relations : Kara tovtov tov rpoirov, in this
way ; Kara Trdvra, in every respect ; Kara ^vvajMv, accord-
ing to ability, as much as possible ; Kara rovg vojuovgy in
accordance with the laws; kut Ifit, as regards one; Kara
Uiv^apov apiGTov vdwp, according to Pindar, water is best.
§ 461. PREPOSITIONS WITH THE DAT. AND ACC. 261
d) distributive in divisions : Horn. Kara (^tvKa, hy tribes ;
Kara rpttg, by threes / kuO' r]fxipav, daily.
In compounds : dow7i, downward, against, toward, very
often untranslatable.
5 460. 3. viripl Horn, also vwup (Lat. super), radical mean-
ing over.
A) with the Genitive :
a) of sjpOAie : 6 r\kioq virlp tjiulujv iropeveTai, the sun passes
over us.
J) tropically, y6>/'.' fxax^aOai virip rivoq, to fight for any
one (originally over, e. g., over a corpse) : 6 v-Klp r^c Tra-
Tpi^oq Kt'v^uvpc, the danger for one^s country; instead of:
lyuj virlp (Tou airoKpivovjiaL,! will answer instead of you.
B) with the Accusative :
over, beyond — oi space and oneasure : Horn, vir'^p oh^ov
tj5n<yeTo, he went over or beyond the threshold ; virlp ^va-
fiivy beyond {his) power.
In compounds : over, away over, excessively, for.
With the Dative and Accusative.
§ 461. 4. ava (compare adv. avw, above), originally upon,
up (opposed to KaTo).
A) with the Dative only poet., on the top of, upon :
Hom. yjpvaiij^ ava (TKYjirrpij^, on the top of a golden staff.
B) with the Accusative ava denotes the direction ^ip-
ward, up toward something, then spreading out over some-
thing (compare Kara).
a) of space : ava p6ov,up the stream; ava iracrav rriv
yriv, over the whole earth, over the whole country.
b) of time : ava Trao-ay Tr\v niiipav , per totum diem.
c) tropically : ava \6yov, in accordance with.
d) distributive : ava rirrapag, by fours (four men deep,
compare Kara, ^ 459, d).
Phrase : ava arojuia 'ix^iv, to have in the mouth, to be talk-
ing about (compare ^la).
In compounds : up, upward, again, back.
262 PREPOSIT. WHICH CAN HAVE THREE CASES. § 462.
III. Prepositions which can have three Cases.
Obs. — The original meaning is usually most manifest in connection
with the Dative.
§ 462. 1. aiui(l}i (Lat. amh-, German um, akin to aiuLcfxi),
both), radical meaning arowid {i. e., on both sides, compare
TTfjOt).
A) with the Dative :
only poet.: Hom. l^pwaH rfXa/zwv ajucfn GTt]0£(T(n,the belt
around the breast will siveat; a/uKft (j)6jdi^, from fear.
B) with the Genitive :
Hom. a^Kla (^iXoTnTOQ addeiv, to sing about love.
C) with the Accusative :
of jplace^ time^ ineasure, occupation : a/x^i to. opia, about
the J^oicndaries ^ a/uKfl tovtov tov \p6vov, about this tiine j
aju^X ra i^i]KovTa, circiter sexaginta y apcfit Shttvov ttovhv,
to be occupied about a meal.
Phrase: ol ajupi riva, any one with his attendants;
hence even : oi afuKjH UXarwva, Plato and his followers.
In compounds : about, around, on two sides, doubly.
% 463. 2. liriy radical meaning upon, on, on the surface,
by.
A) with the Dative :
a) of space : Hom. lirX xQovi chtov t^ovriq, eating bread
on earth; Im. rf] OaXaatTy oIkhv, to dwell by the sea.
b) of time: IttI TovToig, thereupon.
c) of an ethical relation : lin toIq irpayiuatTiv elvai, to
preside over the business; etti roTg TroXeiuioiQ eivai,to be in
the power of the enemy ; lirl tlvl yaipuv, to rejoice at a
thing ; especially also oi purpose : tw\ Trai^ela tovto tfiadEg,
you learned this for education; and of condition: l-nX
TOKOig' ^aveiZtiv, to lend on inte?'est ; iirX rovrti), on this
condition.
B) with the Genitive :
a) of space, in answer to the question where : YJvpoq
§ 465. PKEPOSIT. WHICH CAN HAVE THREE CASES. 263
7rpov<paiv£To l(f apfxarog, Cyrus apjpea^ed on a chariot y
and to the question whither : lin Sa^ou ttXhv, to sail to
Samos. (Compare § 419, c.)
h) of time : em Kpoicrov apxovTog, in the reign of Croesus y'
also in many connections : near^ hy.
C) with the Accusative :
on,on-to : ava^aivuv l(f "nrirov, to mount {on-to) a horse ;
IttX ^cSta, on the right.
Phrases: wq lirX to Tro\v,for the tnost joart ^ to Itt l/mi,
for mpjpart.
In compounds : o?i, at, hy, in addition, he-, very often
untranslatable.
§ 464. 3. fi'cTa (German 7nit), radical meaning in the
midst.
A) with the Dative :
in poet, only : amid, among (inter) : Horn. "Etcro/oa, oq Oeog
1e(tke fxeT av^pacTi, Ilector, who was a god among men.
B) with the Genitive :
with, in the sense of participation with (compare avv,
§ 457) : yL^TCL tCjv ^vfx^a\(jjv KivdvvevaiVf to fight with (in
alliance with) the allies / ixeTa ^aKpvcov, with tears.
C) ^Yl1^ the Accusative :
a) into the midst, am,ong : poet. : Hom. libv jueTii 1 0i/oc
iraipuyv, going among the*crowd of companions.
h) usually after : Hom. ot'xovrat fieTa ^uirvov, they go
after {for) a meal y' fxeTu tov UaXoTrovvrimaKov iroXefjiov,
after the Peloponnesian War.
c) seldom in (as w^ith the Dative) : iuhto. x^'^P^^ ^'x^^^> ^^
have in hand (compare ^la) : fxeO' r]fiipav, interdiu.
In compounds : with, after, trans- {jueTaTiOevai, trans-
§ 465. 4. wapa (Hom. 7rap,Trapai), radical meaning he-
side, near.
A) with the Dative :
at or near : Hom. Trapa vr\\)a\ Koptoviat fxifjivaZiLv, to linger
264 PREPOSIT. WHICH CAN HAVE THREE CASES. § 466,
near the curved shijps ,' koI irap' lp.oi tiq ifxirupia l<jTiv,I
also have some experience {with me also is, etc.).
B) with the Genitive :
a) Jrotn, with verbs of motion, and such as denote re-
ceiving either bodily or mentally : Horn. cnrovoaTHv irapa
VYjtJv, to return fro7)i the shijps j Xaji^avuv, iiavdavuv irapa
TivQQ, to receive, learn from some one.
h) hy, very rare, and only poet. : vanTuyv irap 'Itr/xrjvou
psiOptJVy dwelling hy the waters of the Ismenus.
C) with the Accusative :
a) to : Horn, rw S' avTig hrjv irapa vijag, they went again
to the ships.
h) along, near hy :
of place : Hom. irapa Qlva Qa\aa(Tr)Q, along the sea heach,
of time : during : irap o\ov tov ^iov,per totam vitam,
during the whole of life •
compared with : ^u Tag irpa^ug irap aWr]\ag TiOtvai,
you must put the acts by the side of (or compare with)
07ie another; with the comparative: fiu^ov ti irapa tovto,
something greater than this /
on account of (compare propter, near, and on account
of) : irapa ttjv rijutTepav ajuiXiiav ^iXnnrog av^e^i, on ac-
count of our neglect Philip becomes great.
Taken negatively ; besides : ^ofilv n irapa ravra aWo
Xeyuv, we have something else to say besides this /
contrary to (opposed to Kara with the Ace. : irapa tov
vopovy contrary to the law, properly past the law, by evad-
ing the law.
Phrases : Trapa fxiKpov, nearly/ irap* ov^lv iroLEiaOai, to
deem as nothing.
In compounds : near, at, past, beyond, over {irapa(5aiveiv,
overstep).
§ 466. 5. irepi (Hom. adv. irepi, very =Jja,t. per in per-
magnus), radical meaning around (from above), compare
§ 467. PREPOSIT. WHICH CAN HAVE THREE CASES. 265
A) with the Dative :
round, around, near, for : Horn. Trtpt SKatr/crt TruXrjo-f,
round the Skcean gate,' inpX to7q (jiLXraTOLg KujScvctv, to
gamhlefor what is dearest.
Horn. TTfjOt KT} pi, at heart ; Trepl i^o^ti^, from fear.
B) with the Genitive :
a) mostly in a figurative sense, about, Lat. de : nva
^o^av sxeig irepl tovtwv ; what opinion have you about
this f jdovXevovTai irepl tov iroXifjiov, they consult about the
vjar.
b) in Horn, over, above : mpl navriov tmi^vai aWwv, to
be above all others ; hence the prose phrases : ir^pX ttoXAou
TTouXaOai, to place above much, i. e., estimate highly ; Trepl
ov^ivbg TTOLHdOa, place above nothing, i. e., estimate at
nothing at all.
C) with the Accusative :
almost the same as a/x<^t (§ 462): ttejoi A'/yuTrrov (around,
i. e., every where in Egypt), about the country oi Egypt ;
figuratively : iii regard to, about, concerning : irepl 0fXo-
(io0tav airov^aZiiVy to be zealous about philosophy.
In compounds (with adjectives = Latin per-) : round,
rouiwL about, besides, over.
% 467. 6. TTpoq (Hom. irpori, irori), akin to wpo,
radical meaning at, to (toward the front), compare Trapd,
A) with the Dative :
a) at, near : 6 Kvpog nv irpog Ba(5vXiovi, Cyrus was near
Bcmylon.
b) on, to : Hom. tto-I ^e avUyKxpov ^aX^ yairj, he threw
the staff 071 the, ground, rov vovv Trpogi^ere rrpog tovtw,
give your 7nind to this.
c) besides, in addition to : irpog Tovroig, besides this;
irpbg Tolg aXXoig, besides the rest.
B) with the Genitive :
a) with, in the sense of community : Hom. Trpog yap
Aiog HCTiv airavTeg ^ttvoi re 7rrw;\;oi rf, with (protected by)
M
266 PREPOSIT. WHICH CAN HAVE THREE CASES. § 468.
Zeus are all strangers and the poor • irpog nvog uvai,to
he with (on the side of) any one; irpog larpov lariv,it is
with (belongs to) a^ physician, meclici est; npog Tivog X(-
yeiv, to sveak for (in behalf of) ariy one ; irpbg Oeiov^ with
(in presence of, by) the gods, per deos, form of an oath.
h) toward (versus) : wpog iii(jr\jjL^piag^ toivard the south,
compare irpog with Ace.
c) from, hy (compare irapa with Gen.) : oXftog wpog Of ojv,
Messing from the gods ; sometimes with Passive verbs :
irpog nvog (piXucrdai, to be loved by some one.
C) with the Accusative :
a) to : ip^ovTai irpog r]fiag TTpiG^ng, embassadors come
to us ; irpog Tov ^ri/mov ayop^vtiv, to speak to the people.
b) toward, against {versus, adversits, ergo)-, irpog j3o^-
pav, toward the north (compare irpog with Gen.) ; ^tKaJe-
aOai irpog rivay to enter an action against any one ; iriaTiog
^laicHaOai irpog Tiva, to be faithfully disposed toward some
one; irpog jSao-tXta airovdag iroidaOat, to make a treaty to-
ward (with) the king.
c) in regard to, according to : diaipipHv irpog aperriv, to
differ in regard to virtue; irpog to. KoXXifTTa tCov virap-
x6vT(i)v dti Ta Xoiira irparreiv, we ought to arrange the
future according to the best of the present means ; irpog
ravra, according to this. «
Phrases: irpog r]'^ovi)Vf according to pleasure ; irpog xa-
pLVy in favor of; irpog (iiav, by force; ovBlv irpog ^jui,
nothing to me.
In compounds : to, in addition, near, together with.
§ 468. 7. viro (Hom. also virai, Lat. sub),
radical meaning under, below.
A) with the Dative :
under : Hom. rdv viro irocrm piya (7Twa\iZeTO yaia, un-
der their feet the earth loudly groaned ; vir ''AOnvaloig
eivaif to be under (subject to) the Athenians ; poet. x^P^^^^
§ 470. THE PRONOUNS. 267
u<^' rjfjLeripymv aXovaa, (Troy) conquered under (by) our
hands.
B) with the Genitive:
a) under ^ in space : vtto y^c? under the earth ; in the
sense of dependency : utt' ai»Xrjrwv xop^vuv, to dance un-
der (the guidance oT) flute-jplayers ; hence
V) hy, with Passives and verbs of Passive meaning : //
ttoKlq eaXit) vtto twv 'EXXr/vwv, the city ^vas taken hy the
Hellenes y ttoAXoi airWavov viro tCjv (^apjiapwv, many were
killed hy the harharians.
c)from^ hecause of: vtto yvptog adOevrig vv, he was weak
from old age.
C) with the Accusative :
a) under : Horn, wg uttwv vtto ttovtov edvcrsTo KvfiaivovTa,
having thus spoken, he dived under the billowy sea / vtto
TO opog r}v\iZovTOf they spent the night under (at the foot
of) the 7nountain.
h) of time; toward {Jjut suh) : vtto vvktu, toward night ;
VTTO Trjv vvKTa, during the night.
In compounds : under, down under, gradually, secretly,
often untranslatable.
Chap. XVIIL— The Pronouns.
§ 469. 1. The Nominative of the Personal Pronouns is
used, as in Latin, only when the person is to be mentioned
with special emphasis : koi av oxpei avrov, tu quoque eum
videbis, i. e., ov /xovov lyiL (not merely I).
§ 470. 2. The place of the Possessive Pronoun is fre-
quently supplied by the article (§ 373). On the article
with the Possessive Pronoun, § 388.
a) Instead of the Possessive Pronoun, the Greek likes to
use the Genitive of the corresponding Personal Pronoun.
Such a Genitive, when the substantive to which it belongs
has the article, usually stands either before the article or
268 THE REFLEXITE PRONOUN. § 471.
after the substantive : aov 6 vlog or 6 vlog o-ou, thy son,
not 6 crov vlog.
h) As the Possessive Pronoun approaches very near to a
possessive Genitive (§ 408, 2), it may be qualified by a
Genitive : rafia ^vcrrrtvov kuku, my ills, the ttnfortunate
one^s [mea Qiiiseri mala],
§ 471. 3. The Reflexive Pronouni refers either to the
subject of the clause in which it occurs : w ayaOi, jultj ayvou
aeavTov, good flriend,he not ignorant of thyself ; or, in de-
pendent clauses, it refers back to the subject of the leading
clause : elgiEvai tKiXsvaev, d jdiXXoig avv kavTto tKTrXav, he
hade you enter, if you were going to sail aioay with him
{secunfh). ^
Obs. a)— Instead of the Reflexive Pronoun, the usual Personal Pro-
nouns also may be employed : ^okCj jxoi ovk dTrapdcKevog eivai, I
tMnk myself not to he unprepared.
Ols. b) — The simple Pronoun of the third person, oii, ol, e, etc., is
commonly used reflexively by the Attic writers, but in Horn, it
is exactly like the English, of him, to him, him, etc. (like the
Attic avTOv, avT(^, avTov, etc., according to § 474) : Xeyerai 'AttoX-
Xmv eKdeipai Mapavav epi^ovrd oi Trepi ao<piac, dicitur Apollo Marm/m
cutem detraxisse de arte secum certanti ; Hom. avTofxaroQ ^e ol ijXQe
— MevsXaog, sponte sua ad eum venit Menelaus.
Obs. c) — The Reflexive of the third person sometimes supplies the
place of that of the first and second : M i)fiag dvepeaOai eavrovg,
we must a^lc ourselves; in like manner, the Possessive og some-
times stands for the Possessive of the first two persons : Hom.
oi) yap tywye rjg yaiijg dvvafiai yXvKepwTEpov dXXo idkaBai^foT I can
see nothing sweeter than my own country.
§ 472. The following are used as Possessives of the Re-
flexive Pronouns :
a) the Genitives of the Reflexive Pronouns, especially in
the Singular : Ijiavrov, (jeaurov, eavTov. When the sub-
stantive to which they are joined has the article, the Gen-
itives stand between the article and the substantive : Zei/g
rrjv 'AOrivav t^ucrfy ek rr)c eavTOv KEcpaXrig, Zeus produced
Athene out of his own head.
h) the Possessives of the Personal Pronouns, especially
§ 475. DEMONSTRATIVE AND INTERROG. PRONOUNS. 269
in the plural ; r^fiiTepogy vfxiT^poQ : crcjiiTepog is exclusively
Reflexive.
c) The Possessives in connection with the Genitives of
avToc : TjfjiiTepoc; avrwv, etc.
§ 473. The Reflexive Pronoun in the Plural is also used
instead of the ^^<3^^^(9(?(^Z Pronoun aWiiXtJv : ^i^XEjofxiQa
viLuv avTolq, we Conversed with one another (among our-
selves).
§ 474. On auToc, s^lf] and 6 avTog^ the same, see § 389.
avTog in the oblique cases, like the Lat. is, ea, id, is used
as a Personal Pronoun referring to some person or thing
mentioned before : t^tovro avTov irapafiuvai, they wanted
him to remain.
The Genitive avTov, ijc? wv, like the Lat. ejus, eorum, is
the Engl, his, her, their, when it does not refer to the sub-
ject. Its position is that pointed out in § 470, a : o vlog
avTov or avTov 6 vlocfllitcs ejtis. Still the Genitive of
avTog often supplies the place of the Reflexive of the third
person.
§ 475. Of the Demonstrative Pronouns, ovtoq points
more to what precedes and is already known ; oSe to what
follows and has not yet been named ; so likewise are dis-
tinguished ToiovTog, of such quality; ToaovTog, so great ;
ri]XiKOVTogf so old — from roiog^e, roaog^e, rrikiKogde. On
the article with these Pronouns, § 389.
On the demonstrative uses of 6g, § 213, Obs.
§ 475 J. The Interrogative Pronouns mentioned in § 216 :
rig, TTorepog, ttoToc, etc., are used exclusively in direct ques-
tions. In intlirect ones the compound Relatives oaTig, otto-
Tspog, biroiog, etc., are employed. The former, however,
are often used in indirect questions, though the latter never
in a direct one : Tig u ; who are you f nrri juoi, oarig u, or
rig H, tell me who you are.
On the Attraction with Relative Pronouns, §§ 597-603.
270 THE ACTIVE VOICE. § 476.
Chap. XIX. — The Voices of the Verb.
§ 476. 1. The Active Voice.
1. The Active voice not unfrequently has an intransitive
as well as a transitive meaning. Thus Vkavvuv means to
drive and to ride / f x^f v, to have, hold, and to he in a con-
dition (icaXwc c'x^^ hene se habet) ; irpaTTuv, to do and to
he {iv irpaTTb),! am doing weW)\ ^tjXoui^, to maJce and to
hecome. manifest.
In some verbs different tenses are assigned to the different mean-
ings. See above, §§ 329, 330.
2. Simple verbs which are transitive often become intran-
sitive when compounded : jSaXXtfv, to throw — fi^Taf^aXXetv,
to change; Igj^aXXeiv and f/^jSaXXatv, to fall into, issue (of
rivers); ^id6vai,to give — Iv^L^ovaiyto give in; hiri^tdovai,
to grow ; K6~THv,to cut; TrpoKoirTHVyproficere^maJce prog-
ress ; (jitpHv, to hear; ^la^ipuvydifferre, to differ or he dis-
tinguished.
3. The Active often denotes an action which the subject
accomplishes not immediately, but ^mediately, that is, causes
or allows to be done by others : 6 Kvpog KarUavcTe ra /3a-
cyiXeia, Cyrus had the royal castle hurned down. This is
called the Causative use.
§ 477. 2. The Middle Voice.
Its primary meaning is reflexive, i. e., the action of the
verb in the Middle refers back to the subject from which
it issues.
The Middle, in the first place, may be either transitive
or intransitive ; it is transitive when it can have an object
in the Accusative: irpaTToixai xpy^fiara, I gain for myself
money ; intransitive when it is incapable of having such an
object : aTrtxofiai, I restrain inyself
The Middle, farther, can vary much in its mode of refer-
ring back to the subject. We distinguish : •
§ 480. THE MIDDLE VOICE. 271
§ 478. 1. The Direct Middle,
in which the subject is at the same time the direct object
of the verb : Xovojugl, I wash myself; rpi-wojiaiy I turn my-
self ; iTn^uKwuaijI show Quyself; 'laraiiaii I Jplace myself ;
KaXvTTToiuai, I hide myself This kind of Middle is the
rarest. The Active with the reflexive pronoun in the Ac-
cusative is more generally used to express direct Reflexion.
Obs. — Through the direct Middle, several middle verbs have be-
come intransitive or passive : Traww, / cause to stop; Travofiai, I
stop myself, cease; ^aivio,I sJiow ; (paivoixai^ I shoio myself , appear ;
Vj//ti, I send; 'lefxai, I send myself, hurry.
§ 479. 2. The Indirect, or Dative-lihe Middle (§ 431),
in which the subject is but indirectly affected by the ac-
tion. Here the action takes place for or in the interest
of the subject, so that in other languages the Dative may
generally be used to denote the reflex influence : tto^oiSw,
I provide ; TropiZoiuiai, I provide for myself e. g., xp^jfiara,
money; ayofiai yvvaiKa, I take a wife to myself; fiKrOov'
fiai (TTpaTiwrag, I hire soldiers for myself (but /xicrOovv,
hire out, juktOovv tavrov, to hire on(^s self out) ; fiETaTTtiu--
TTOfiai Tiva, I send for some one ; Hom. avrog l(lti\KtTaL
av^pa (Ti^r)poQ, the iron itself draws a man to it. Hence
the Athenian says ; 6 vojuLoOirric Ti6r}(n vofiovg, the lawgiver
gives laics, but 6 ^Tiiuoq TiOerat vojuovg, the people gives laws
to itself
Obs. — The interest of the subject sometimes consists in an object
being removed from its reaofe : d/jivvofiai kivSwov, I ward off dan-
ger from me; TrpoUfiai riva, I send some one away from me; d-n-o-
docrOai vavv {to give away for one's interest), to sell a ship. (Com-
pare § 324, 7).
§ 480. 3. The Subjective or ethical Middle.
This denotes that an action originates not only external-
ly, but also internally from the subject, i. e., from its means,
power, or disposition : -Kapkyj.iv, to furnish ; irapix^aOai, to
furnish from on^ s own means; iroiuv Blp-nv-qvyto make
peace; iroiucrOai dprivr^v, to strive to make peace; Xa^u-
272 THE MIDDLE VOICE. § 481.
fdavtiv Ti, to take soTiietJiing j Xajuj^aveaOai tivoq, to lay
hold of sonnetliing ; (jK07rtiv,to look at; aKoiruadaiyto re-
flect.
Obs. — The subjective Middle is formed also from intransitive verbs ;
it then expresses a state more intensively than the active : ttoXi-
raveiv, to de a citizen ; TroXtreufo-Oat, to act as a citizen ; (SovXeveiv, to
give advice; (iovXeveaOai, to deliberate with one's self.
§ 481. 4. The Causative Middle.
As the Causative Active (§ 476, 3) expresses an ac-
tion only occasioned by the subject, so the Middle is often
used to denote that the subject has an action done for
or (9^ itself: 6 Trarrip ^i^aaKbTai tov viov, the father has
his son instructed; irapaTid^fxai ^eiirvov, I have a meal
placed before me; ^iKaZo/iai, I have judg?7ient pronotmced
for me; airori^vojiaL tqq \HpaQ, I have my hands cut
off.
§ 4815. As examples, the following more important verbs
may be adduced, whose meaning in the Middle essentially
differs in various ways from that of the Active : ap;^w, I
am first, ap\ofiai, J begin; 6 pr^rtop ypacpn vojuov^the ora-
tor j[>ro])oses (writes down) a law ; 6 KaT{]yopog ypa<^iTai
TOV adiKtiaavTa, the accuser prosecutes (has the name writ-
ten down) the wrong doer ; TijumypC) nviyl help one; tijulu)-
povfiai Tiva, I avenge 7nyselfon one; aipC)yItake, alpovjuai,
I choose ; ^aveiZ^M, I put out to interest; ^avdZofiai, I
borrow at interest; irudM, I persuade, irudofiai, I allow
myself to be persuaded, I obef.
One and the same Middle may occur in different senses : didddKoixai
(4), I catcse to teach, or (1) / teach myself, learn ; rpsTrofim (1), /
turn myself, or (2) / turn to myself; rpkirovTai rag yviofiag, they
change their opinion ; Tpk-xovTai tovq -n-oXefiiovg, they turn away (put
to flight) the enemy (§ 479, Obs.).
§ 483. Obs. — The deponents are distributed among the different
kinds of Middle verbs, and differ from the verbs mentioned only by
having no active form. Thus v-n-itrxvovfiai, I pledge myself, is a direct
Middle ; but dexo/Jiat, I receive ; KTaojiai, I acquire, are indirect ; ayia-
USE OF THE TENSES. 273
vii^ofiai, I contend ; olfxai, Ithink^ are subjective : dvafSidjcraaQai, to revivCy
is causative. On the Passive Deponents, § 328.
§ 483. 3. The Passive Voice
has a freer use in Greek than in Latin, viz. :
1. even such verbs as in the Active take a cliiFerent case
from the Accusative, form a Passive : Karafppovio tivoq
(§ 4:24:), I despise one j KaTacppovuTai rig vii ijuov ; tticttev-
ovcFi rti> j3a(Ti\H, they trust the king/ o ^acriXkvg TrtcrreuErat
vtt' avTwv ; tTTfjSouXfvfi Tt[t TroXcju/tj), he plots against the
enemy ; 6 TroXifxiog sTrij^ovXeveTm vtt' avrov, a plot is made
against the enemy hy him.
2. Neuters of Passive participles may be formed even
from intransitive verbs : ra (rrpaTavofiivay the warlike meas-
ures ; TO. o-ot 7r£7roXtrfUjU£va, your political course^ your
policy.
3. The exclusively Passive forms even of Deponents are
sometimes used in a Passive sense ; (iiaZofxai, I force, £j3t-
dffOiiv, I was forced; in like manner a Passive may be
formed from a Middle : aipiu),I take, alpiojiai, VsL^s.^Iam
chosen; iii:TeTreiui(j>Orj,he was sent for, fxETaTri^Trojxai, I send
for (§ 479).
Chap. XX. — Use of the Tenses.
§ 484. In marking the time, the Greeks distinguished :
1. The Order of time. The three Orders of time being
the Present, the Past, and the Future.
2. The Kind of time. In regard to the Kind of time,
an action is either
a) going on, e. g., yiyvwcxKuv (gradually), to learn to
know ; or,
T)) momentary, e. g., yvCyvm, to perceive, know ; or,
M2
274 USE OF THE TENSES. § 485.
c) completed, e. g., lyvwKivai, to have learned, to know
(Lat. nosse).
Obs. — The momentary action may be compared to a point, the ac-
tion going on to a line, and the completed action to a surface.
An action going on is indicated by the forms of the
Present-Stem.
A monientamj action is indicated by the forms of the
AoristStems.
A completed action is indicated by the forms of the
Perfect-Stem.
The Future denotes the future Order of time of an ac-
tion going on, as well as of a momentary action : yvtJCFOfim,
I shall (gradually) get to 'hiow, and / shall perceive^ the
Third Future (^futurum exactum) that of a completed
action : lyvwKwg itrofiai, I shall have learned (Latin no-
vero).
In the Present, Aorist, and Perfect, only the Indicative
indicates a definite Order of time; the other Moods, the
Infinitive and the Participle, resemble the corresponding
Indicative only in regard to the Kind, not in regard to the
Order of time.
The following table presents a general view of these
relations :
Present.
Past.
Future.
Going on. Ind. Pres.
Imperf.
Subj., Opt, Imperat, Inf., Vart., of tJie Preserd.
Momentary. Aor. Ind.
Subj., Opt, Imperat, Inf., of the Aorist.
Completed. Perf. Ind. Plupeif. Futurum exact
Subj., Opt, Imperat., Inf., Part., of the Perfect.
§ 485. Ohs. — As the English as well as the Latin language gener-
ally neglects the distinction between an action going on and a Mo-
mentary action, it is difficult to comprehend it. A similar distinc-
§ 488. THE PRESENT INDICATIVE. -275
tion, however, may be perceived in some English verbs, as fiee ((pev-
yeiv) and escape {(pvyCiv) ; flicker and flash ; fear (^ofStXaOai) and de
frightened {^ojiriQiivai, deXaai) ; wonder {Oavfid^Eiv) and to be surprised
{Oavfidaai) ; to he tusy about {TrpdaaHv) and to accomplish (irpd^ai) ;
yeXdv, to be laughing, and yeXaaat, to burst out laughing.
1. Forms of an Action in Progress.
a) The Present Indicative.
§ 486. Th^ Present Indicative denotes, as in English
and Latin, an action going on or in progress at the jpresent
time : iKErevofjiiv as Travrtg, we all imjplore thee. Hence
by the Present are expressed general assertions, valid for
all times, and therefore also for the Present: tari Qtog,
there is a God.
Obs. — Actions whose commencement indeed belongs to the Past,
but whose effects extend to the Present, are sometimes expressed
by this tense : aKovoj, I hear, also in the sense, / have heard and
still bear in mind; vikuu), I conquer, i. e.,1 am victorious; ^evyw,
I am banished; dhKkio,! am wrong (have done wrong); 9vr](jKu,
he is dead. In this sense alone are used i]Kio,Iam come; o'ixofiai,
I am gone.
§ 487. By a lively apprehension a past action may be
represented as present, hence the use, very frequent in
Greek, of the Historical Present, which frequently alter-
nates with past tenses : poet, koi iriog oparai KaX ypiOr] ;
and how is she seen, and was she captured f £7ra y]y Ciro
^ Apyi^afxoq koi liropevETO £7ri rovg avrnraXovgf IvravOa ovroi
ouic idi^avTO Tovg TrepX tov ^Ap^ida/moVf aXX' eyKXivovcriv, as
Archidamus tooh the lead and ^inarched against the enemy,
the latter did not wait for the troops of Archidamus, hut
retreat.
§ 488. I) The Imperfect
is the Preterite of an action in progress, like the Latin
Imperfect.
The Greek therefore uses the Imperfect where he wishes
to describe past states or past actions in their progress, in
their continuance along with others, or in their frequent.
276 THE IMPERrECT. § 489.
continued repetition : Horn, ol filv ap olvov i/iiayov Ivt
Kpr)Tr\p(JL /cat v^wp, ol S' avTe (nroyyoKTi TroXvTpiiroKTi rpaTriZag
viZ,ov Koi TTporiOev, tol ^l Kpea iroXXa ^aTevvTO, soiae were
Tmngling wine and water in mixing-hoiuls, others cleaning
tables withjporous sjxmges, and placing them^ the rest were
carving triuch meat ; rovq p\v ovv TreXracFTag t^iE,avTo ol
(5ap(5apoi KOL IfjLa^ovTOf the harharians met the peltasts^
and then were fighting^ — Horn. o<^pa pXv iiwg r> koX at^tro
hpbv v/uap, To^pa paX ap(^OTipii)v (iiXe T^irTeTO, irTTrrs re
Xaog, as long as it was morning^ and holy day increasing^
so long the darts ofhoth were striking and people falling.
— ovTTOTi: puov aTr^dTpaTOTTi^ivovTO ol j5ap(5apoL tCov *EXXr]-
vu)v i^riKovra (7Ta^i(Dv, the harharians (did not encamp) used
never to. encamp*less them sixty stadia from the Hellenes.
§ 489. Obs. 1.— The Imperfect frequently expresses a merely at-
tempted but not accomj)lisliecl action : Trputrog JiikeapxoQ tovq avrov
aTparuoTag e/3id?£ro ievai, oi Se avrbv £/3aXXov, vcrrepov de tTret eyvw on ov
dvvr}(T£rai (SidtracrOai, (Tvvrjyayev hKK\r]mav, first Glearchus tried to force
his soldiers to go, hut they shot at him ; afterward, however, as he perceived
he would not he able to force them, he sumrrmied a meeting. So idi^ov
sometimes means he offered to give, to distinguisli it from tSwKEv, he
gave.
§ 490. Ohs. 2. — The Imperfects of the verbs which denote should
and must are used, just as in Latin, to denote what should be done
in opposition to what was done : tda tovq XkyovTag fir^TE irpbg tx^pav
TToiuadai Tov \6yov firjre irpbg x^^P^'^i '^^^ speakers ought to have made their
speeches neither from fear nor from favor (Lat. oportebat) ; so xpn'^) ^'^
ought ; eiKog ijv, it would he fair.
On the Imperf. with dv, § 494, Ohs. 1, and § 537, etc.
§ 491. c) The Suhjunctive,Optative, Imperative, Infniti^e,
and Participle Present
simply express an action in progress, whether it lie in the
present, past, or future : paivo^iSa iravThg, o-rrorav opyiZw-
peOa, we are all mad when we are angry ; Wzyov tm
EvOvdvptf), oTL TravTEg LToipoi uev pavOavHv, they told Eu-
thydemus that they were all ready to learn ; ovrw iroiriaw,
§ 492. THE AORIST INDICATIVE. 277
oTTwg av (TV KiXevyg, I loill do as you may hid irne {sic
again, ut tic me agerejubehis)-, ravTa Xtywv 9opvj5ov riKovat,
dia tCjv tcl^uov \6vtoq (cat r/jOtro, rig 6 Oofxvfdog ar;, saying
this, he heard a noise pass through the ranhs, and ashed
what the noise was.
Obs. — These Present forms sometimes, like the Imperfect (§ 489),
express a mere attempt : to dirodi^pdaKOVTa fxrj SvvaaOat cnro^pdvai
TToXkri nojpia, for a man not to he able to run away when he tries to
run away is great stupidity.
§ 492. 2. Forms of a Momentary Action.
a) The Aorist Indicative
is the Preterite of a Momentary action, and therefore de-
notes the actual beginning of an action in the past^^ similar
to the Historical Perfect of , the Latins.
The Greeks employ the Aorist Indicative when they
wish to narrate past facts, to state past actions simply as
having happened, or to represent them as individual facts
without reference to other actions : lara rrjv Iv Kopvjvuq.
IJ.aj(r]v Of ^AOrivatoi t^lXiTTOv Tjjv BoiwTiav Traaavf^of^e?^ the
hattle at Coronea the Athenians left all Boeotia; — Ilai;-
aaviag Ik AaKe^aijuovog GTpaTYiyhg viro 'EXXrjvwv I^i7ri/Li(f)6ri
ju^TCL eiKOCTi vEwv ttTTO YleXoTTOVvrjcTOv, ^vvtirXeov ^£ Koi 'A0»7-
vaioi Tpiatzovra vavai kol laTpaT^vaav Ig Kvirpov koI avri^g ra
TToXXa KaTECTTp^xfjavTo, Pausanias was sent out from Lace-
dmmon as general hy the Hellehes, with tv^enty ships from
the Peloponnese, hut Athenians also accompanied him
(accompanying circumstance) with thirty ships, and they
proceeded to Cyprus and subdued the greater part ofit;
ro^iKtiv Kai laTpiKriv koX juavTiKrjv 'AttoXXwv gvevpev, Apollo
invented the arts of archery, medicine, and prophecy ; —
Hom. rr\v Sc ttoXu Tcpdrog '/& 1^7]ki\xayog Oaoeidrjg, j3ri S'
lOvg TTpoOvpoiOf v^jJLia(jy]Br] 8' ivi Ov/ui^j ^dvov ^rjOa Ovpyjaiv
t(j)e(TTap£Vy lyyvOi §£ (rrag xup fXe ^i^LTEpriv koL l^iK,aTO
X'^Xkiov tjx'^^f ^^^i ^^^ ^r^^ Telemachus of form divine
heheld,and he went straight to the porch, and was grieved
278 THE AORIST INDICATIVE. § 493.
at heart that a stranger stood a long time at the door, and
going near he took him hy the right hand and eased him
of his hrazen sjpear.
§ 493. As the Aorist Indicative simply expresses an ac-
tion as having taken place in the past, it answers to all the
different Preterites in other languages, especially often in
subordinate sentences to the Latin and English j^lii^perfect :
Aaps'iog Kvpov /uieTaTriiunreTai (§ 487) airo rfjc ^PX^^ ^^ avTov
aaTpdrrriv l7roir}(Ttv, Darius has Cyr^s sent for from the
province, over which he had made him satrap {fecerat).
Thus the Aorist is used with the Conjunctions of time/
lird, wcj oT^, as, when, like the Latin Perfect with post-
guam, uhi, ut : wq 6 Kvpog rjaOsTO Kpavyrjc;, av£7rtjcr)(nv
IttI top "ttttov w(T7rep hOovaitov, when Cyrus perceived (ut
audivU) a cry, he sprang upon his horse like one inspired.
§ 494, The Aorist Indicative is used in statements of experience im-
plying that a thing once happened^ but admitting an application to
all times : poet. T<ii xP^v(ji y ^ikt] TrdvTiog ijXO' cnroTiaankvr), icith time
avenging justice alxoays came (and hence always comes) ; koX f3paSvg
evfiovXoQ sIXev raxvv dv^pa diujKwv, even a slow man^ when icell advised^
overtooTc (of ertakes) iy pursuit a quick marl. In English we employ
the Present in such general assertions, and often add such adverbs
as usually, commonly, ahcays, etc. : tclq twv (pavXiov avvovaiag oXiyog
xpovog SuXvasv, a short time usually dissolves tJie associations of the l)ad.
This Aorist is called the. gnomic Aorist, because it is often used in
gnomes, proverbs, or maxims. In Horn, it is often also used in com-
parisons.
Obs. 1. — In expressing what usually happens, the Aorist sometimes
has dv in order to express the case as one that may have occurred,
and therefore may occur oftener : tXE^ev av, he may have said. In
the same way the Imperfect is used, but referring to an action
m progress : dvaXafil3dvu)v avTuiv rd TroirjfiaTa dirjpcjTUJV dv, rt Xe-
yoisv, taMn^ip their poems I would ash ichat they meant.
Obs. 2. — The Aorist Indicative, especially in the 1 Pers. Sing., is
frequently used to express actions and states beginning only at
the moment of speaking : iykXaaa, I burst out laughing; poet.
BTryvecr' 'ipyov Kai Trpovoiav i)v iOov, I praise the deed and the pru-
dence which you have exercised.
On the Hypothetical Aorist, § 537, etc.
§ 496. THE AOR. SUB J., OPT., IMPERAT., AND INFIN. 279
§ 495. h) The Aorist Subjunctive^ Ojptative, Imperative,
and Infinitive-
denote a Momentary action simply, whether of the present,
past, or future : oi TpiaKovra TrpogeraE^av airayaynv Aiovra,
"iv cnroOavoi, the Thirty commanded to take leon away to
die y airopio, tl irpC)Tov fjiV7](jdC),I a'tn in doubt what first
to mention j /urj OavfiaarjTe, lav irapd^o^ov eiiroj ti, be not
surprised if I say something strange; gv jjlol airoKpivai,
S) TToi, give me an answer, boy ; juiya otjiaL tpyov to ap\r\i>
Karairpa^ai, ttoXv S' tri fiuZov to Xa(56vTa ^ia(TU)(Taadai, I
deem it a great thing to found a government, but a still
greater to maintain it after acquiring it.
Obs. — The Subjunctive, Optative, Imperative, and infinitive Aorist,
therefore, differ from the corresponding forms of the Present,
just as the Aorist Indicative differs from the Imperfect ; the
Aorist forms express a single fact, conceived as a i)oint, the
Present, as a state or condition, sometimes of long duration :
XaXsTrbv to Troieiv, to Ik KtKEixrai pg,diov, it is difficult to do, easy to
command; el Try tx^ig avTiKkyuv, dvTiXeye ' ei de /x?;, Travaai TroXXocKig
Xsyiov Tov avTov Xoyov, if you have any thing to say in reply, reply
(even in a long speech), |/* Tiof, cease (at onco) frequently repeating
the same statement.
% 496. The Aorist Participjle regularly expresses some-
thing which took place earlier or before the act of the prin-
cipal verb : K/ooTo-oc "AXi»v ^laj^ag iueya\r}V apxrjv KaToXixTEi,
Croesus, after crossing the Ilalys, will overthrow a great
empire ; TraOwv ^i ra vriTriog tyvio (§ 494), after suffering
{hy ^Vi^Qvmg) even a fool becomes 7c7iowing.
Obs. — As the Aorist generally indicates the moment at which an
action actually begins (§ 485), so the Aorist Participle also only
expresses that the beginning of an action took place before an-
other action, while its progress may continue simultaneously with
that other : ytXdaag dire, he began to laugh and said (laughing)
\risu oborto dixit]. Hom. tLSe de Tig eiTreaKev iSojv eg TrXrjaiov dXXov,
thus would say many a one while looking at his neighbor; xaptcrai
fiOL aTTOKpivdiuvog, answer and oblige Tne, inasmuch as the xapi(Taa9ai
follows immediately after the beginning of the answer.
280 THE FUTURE. § 497.
§ 497. As the Aorist Indicative may frequently be translated by the
Pluperfect (§ 493), so also the Aorist Optative and Infinitive in asser-
tions generally denotes something which took place lefore : oX 'IvUl
iXe^av on Tre/x-ipeie (r<pag 6 'Iv^utv (3a(nXevg (Ind. on iTrefi-ipe)^ the Indians
said that the king of the Indians had sent them ; KuKrXwTref Xkyovrai Iv
'SiiKfXiq, oiKfjcrai, the Cyclops are said to have dwelt in Sicily.
§ 498. Many verbs whose Pre^nt-Stem expresses a state,
denote in all the Aorist forms the entrance into this state :
apx^tvyto rule, ap^ai, to obtain dofninion; f^amXtvEiv, to
he king, (^amXevcrai, to hecome hing ; Xg^uv, to he strong,
la^Gai, to heconie strong j Giyav, to he silent, myriaai, to
hecome silent; ex^iv,to have, o-x"*^^ ^^ ohtain; (paivECfOai,
to appear, ((tavrivai, to, hecome apparent; voativ, to he ill,
voai]Gaif to hecome ill; ttoXejuhv, to he at war {helhcm ge-
rere), TroXEfxriaai, to hegin war (helium inferre). (Compare
§ 485.)
Obs. — This meaning, however, is not always attached to these forms ;
and kiro\kfir}(rav may also signify simply Mlum gesserunt (§492).
§ 499. 3. The Future
expresses the futurity both of an action in progress and of
a Momentary action : ap^b), I shall hecome rider, and I
shall rule.
Ohs. 2. — The 2 Person Future with ov nearly resembles the negative
Imperative : ovk kTnopKrjffeig, thou wilt (shalt) nat swear falsely.
§ 500. The Future Indicative in relative clauses, and in clauses
with OTTMQ, that, is worthy of notice, for there the Future denotes
what may or should happen : ovk cxo/iev otov alrov wvTjaofieOa, we have
nothing with ichich we can l)uy food (noji habemus, quo cibum emamus) ;
^£1 uiravTa dvSpa tovto TrapacrKevd^eijOai, oTrojg wg ao^wrarog icrrat-, every
man should take care to be {that he shall be) as icise as possible (compare
§ 553). The Participle is similarly used : ij xwpa TroXXrj koL dyaOrj ijv
Kai Ivfjaav oi ipyaaoiitvoi, the land was large and good, and there were
people to {who could) cidtivate it ; rig larai 6 rjyrirjojxivog ; lohx) will be
there to {who can) guide us? (compare §§ 380, 578).
Obs. — av (Hom. Kt) is sometimes added to the Future Indicative
to denote that a case may possibly occur : (.v old' on dcrfiEihg dv
§ 503. THE PERFECT INDICATIVE. 281
TTpdg dvdpa olog aii el d-!raXKayr]<TeTai, I well TcnoiD that he will he glad
to he reconciled to a man such as you are ; Horn, 6 Se icev /cexoXw-
cerai ov Kev 'iKojfiai, and he will doubtless he in wrath whom I come
upon.
§ 501. The verb julXXw is used with the Present, Future,
or, though more rarely, the Aorist Infinitive, to express
an immediately ajpjproaching ^ or, at least, intended action :
/^tfXXw v/xac ayctv uq 'Ao-tav, / am going to lead yoii to
Asia {in Asiam vos ducturus su7n). This is called the
jyerijphrastiG Future.
Ohs. 1. — nkWu) may also be used in oilier tenses than tlie Present
with an Infinitive, like esse in Latin, with the Part. Fut. : 7rXr]<riov
ySr] i]v 6 (TTaOfibg evOa ifieXXov KaraXvcrsiv, jam prope aderat statio
iibi deversuri erant, where they wished to rest.
Ohs. 2. — ttCjq or TL ov jweXXw, is elliptical in the sense of Why should
I not?
4. Forms of a Completed Action.
§ 502. a) The Perfect Indicative
is the Present of a completed action, i. e.^ by the Perfect
the Greeks denote an action completed y6>7' and with ref-
erence to the Present : poet. X070C \i\iKTai irag, the whole
speech has hcen sjpohen [dixi'] ; evprjKa, I have found, I
have it / Hom. 7]^r] yap r^TtXaaTai a fioi (j)iXog tiOeXe Ov/nog,
for noiu has been finished what my dear soul desifed ;
17 TToXfc 'iKTicfrai irapa twv KopivOicjVf the city has heen
founded hy the Corinthia^ns (of a still existing city) ; to.
XprijuaTa TOig irXovaloig 17 ^vx^ ou ^e^uypr^Tai aXXa cecaveiKEv,
Fortune has not given, hut lent (at interest) their unoney
to the rich.
§ 503. Ohs. — Several Perfects have an entirely Present meaning,
inasmuch as they present in a completed state the action of which
the gradual accomplishment is expressed by the present : fiinvfj<TKonai,
I remind myself; fieixvrjfiai^Ihear in mind, remember (memini) ; KoXsoiJiaij
Iam7iamed; KeKXrfixai, my Tiame is ; irdOonai, I follow ; TrsTroiOa, I con-
fde in; oXXvfii, I am p)erishing ; 6Xu)Xa,Iam lost; Krao^ai, I acquire;
KSKTi]fiai, I possess; 'larafiaij I place myself ; earrjKa, I stand ; (^aivio^I go;
(isl3r]Ka, I arri gone.
282 THE FUTURE PERFECT. § 504.
§ 504. h) The Plu^perfect
is the Preterite of a completed action, i. e., by the Pluper-
fect the Greeks express an action completed for and with
reference to a jpast time : Hom. 3j7 rort y arpifxaq tu^c
\Aa(jfiivoQ oo-CT lirtTTovOti, then truly he slejpt quietly ^for-
getting what he had suffered , Iv toIq ApuKovTog vo/noig
juia cLTTamv wptaro tolq afiapravovtri Z,7)fiia Oavarog, in Dra-
cd's laws death had heen ajpjpointed for all criminals as
the only jpimishment — says an Athenian after 4:he laws
were abolished. (As long as they were in force : wpidTai.)
Obs. — The Pluperfects of the Perfects enumerated in § 503 are to
be translated by Imperfects.
On the Aorist in the sense of the Latin Pluperfect, § 493.
§ 505. c) The Future Perfect (Futurum Exactum)
is the Picture of a completed action, i. e.^ it denotes an
action which will be completed in the future. It is only
in the Middle that the Greeks have a special form for this
Third Future, which has generally a Passive meaning. In
the Active, the circumlocution by means of the Perfect
Participle and the Future of uvai must be used (§ 291):
av TovT H^iojueVf to. ^eovra IcropsOa tyvtJKOTsg, whe?l we
knqw this, we shall (thence) have got to hnoio our duty ;
Hom. ijLtoi Z\ XtXdxpETai aXyea \vypa, hut I shall have
gloomy woes left me. ^ ^
Obs. — The Future Perfect of the PeriQ^cts mentioned in § 503 serves
as a common Future : /xefivijaoijai, meminero, etc.
§ 506. d) The Perfect of all the Moods, of the Infinitive,
and of the Participle,
expresses a completed action generally, and may refer to
any of the three Orders of time : ov (^ovXeveaOm wpa aXXa
jdsj^ovXeiKTOai, now is not the time to consult, hut to have
consulted (to be resolved) ; &ph\g wc ^ttvO^to top 'EXX?V-
TTovTov tZ^v^Oaif TTporiyev Ik twv SapSfwv, when JTerxes
§ 511. USE OF THE MOODS. 283
learned that the Hellespont had heen hridged over (and
Avas still provided with a bridge, on fStu/cro), he marched
forward from Sardis j ravra filv ovv TrpoeiprjdOijjythus
much he said beforehand (now to something else) ; Horn.
tcT(TETai rjfxap 6t av ttot oXwXri "IXloq ipri, a day will come
when holy Ilios will he lost (has been lost) ; yjii]aiii6v n
IdKejUfxivog tikio, I am come after having devised something
useful.
Chap. XXI. — Use of the Moods.
A) The Moods in Simple Sentences.
§ 507. 1. The Indicative.
The Indicative^ in accordance with the usage of other
languages, is employed simply to state something positively
or negatively, or simjjly and directly to ask a question :
poet. Tl\q apETtig i^pioTa Oeoi irpoirapoiOev Wr)Kav, the gods
placed sweat before virtue; Horn, irodtv uq avdpCov ; from
what class of men are you f *
05s. — On tlie Indicative in hypothetical sentences with or without
av, § 536, etc. ; in sentences expressing a wish, § 515. On the
Aorist Inch with av^ to express what usually happens, see § 494.
2. The Subjunctive.
§ 508. The Subjunctive expresses what ought to take
place ; it always refers to the present, to reality. * Hence
it is used in the foMowing cases :
§ 509. 1. as a challenge in the first person : itoiutv, let us
go [_eamus'] ; 0£/)£ S/j, rag juapTvpiag v/uuv avayvCj, well, come !
let me read you the testimonies \reciteni\.
§ 510. 2. with the negative ixi) in prohibitions and in
negative admonitions (compare § 518) : ju?) tovto Tronitryg,
ne hocfeceris, you ought not to do this.
§ 511. 3. In hesitating questions, where it is asked what
284 THE OPTATIVE MOOD. § 512.
should be done: ri 0w ; what am I to say? Horn, ttw?
Tiq TOL irpocjypwv iirEaiv TTiiOrjrm ^A\aiCjv ; how shall any of
the Achwans willingly trust thy words? ^iE,ea6e -n/xag rj
airi(i)^iv ; will you receive us, or are we to depart f
§ 512. 4, jyith /i?'^ in sentences expressing/^a^/' or anxiety :
jurj aypoiKOTEpov y to a\r)Qlg utthv, if it he not rather rude
to say the truth. If the anxiety is to be negatively ex-
pressed, jur) ou is used : Horn, ^r; vv tol ov ypaKTfiri aKxiTTTpov
KOL arififxa Oeolo, lest the staff and wreath of the god should
not help thee, i. e., it will certainly be of little help to thee
[Lat. vereor ne non or %it tejuvet']. Compare §§ 533, 616,
Ohs. 3, § 621, a.
§ 513. Obs. — The Homeric language employs the Subjunctive of
future events, quite like the Fut. Ind., to express a thing that is to
be expected (§ 545) : ov ydp ttoj roiovg tdov avkpag ovSk Uiofiai,for never
yet did I see such men nor may (shall) / see them, dv is sometimes
added in Hom. to this Subjunctive : ovk dv roi x9<^'i^l^V KiOapig rd re
dojp 'A^poSiTt]g, the lyre and Aphrodite'^s gifts would not help thee. Com-
pare § 500, Obs.
3. The Optative.
§ 514. 1. The Optative alone (without the particle av)
is used to express a wish that something may take place :
poet, w Trat, yivoio irarpog iVTv\iaTEpog, hoy ! may you
he happier than your father [Lat. Pres. or Perf. Subj.].
The particles used (like Latin utinani) to introduce a
wish are : ti (Hom. at), a^e (Hom. aSi), u yap, wc.
m
§ 515. Ods. — If it is to be intimated that a wish is not to be realized,
it is referred to the past, and expressed by the Imperfect or Aorist
Indicative : d9' rjaOa dvvarbg ^pdv ocov TrpoQvfiog eZ, would that you were
able to do what you wish; dOe (toI tots avveyevoixrjv, would that I then
had met you. The same kind of wish is expressed by the Aorist
wtpeXov (properly " I owed") and the Infinitive : 6\ka9ai w^eXov ryS'
j7/i£jO^, would that I had perished on that day [Lat. Imperf and Plup.
Subj.]. Compare § 5C7.
§ 516. 2, The Optative with the particle av (Hom. ke or
§ 519. THE IMPERATIVE MOOD. 285
Ktv) expresses possibility : tovto yivoir av, that (could)
Tnight he j ti yap yivoir av IeXkoq iihZ,ov rj (piXog KaKog ;
what greater evil could there he than a had friend ; ttov
^riT av dev ol ^evoi ; why ! where can the strangers he?
[Latin Pres. and Perf. Subj.]. The Optative with av is
therefore called ihQ potential Optative.
§ 517. Obs. 1. — Hence the Optative with av is used in modestly ex-
pressed assertions : ovk av Xsyoi/ii, I would not say [non dixerim] ; wpa
av avaKwaZ,Ea9ai eir], it is perhaps time to hreaJs up; ovk av dvvato firj
Kafxujv evdaifiovelv, you could not, witlumt taking trouble, te happy.
Obs. 2. — In the poets the Optative in a potential sense is also used
without av : Horn, peia Oeoq y WsXcjjv Kai tt]X69ev avSpa trawcrai, a god
who is willing can easily save a man even afar off. But this use of the
Optative to denote a possible and merely imaginary case is originally
peculiar to this mood, and hence is preserved in dependent clauses,
§§ 528, 529, 532, Obs., 546, 552, Obs.
§ 518. ^. The Imperative.
The Imperative is the mood of command, and, with neg-
atives, of prohibition.
A prohibition in the second person can be expressed only
in two ways, viz., either with firi and the Present Impera-
tive : firj iTpaTTu, of a continued action, or with /x// ^nd the
Aorist Suhjunctive : p,ri Trpa^rig, of a Momentary action,
do not do : ravTO. pot irpa^oVf riKVOv, Ka\ prj f5pa^vve pr)^^
tTripvYicrOyg in Tpoiag, do me this, child, aiul delay not nor
think farther of Troy.
In the third person also pi] with the Aorist Imperative
is admissible: pr\^ug vpC)v Trpog^oKr]aarii) aX\(i)g,let none
of you expect otherwise.
On the Infinitive instead of the Imperative, see § 577.
On the Imperative as a substitute for a hypothetical clause,
§ 545, Obs. 3.
B) The Moods in Compound Sentences.
§ 519. Preliminary remarks on the connection of sen-
tences with one another. •
286 THE MOODS IN COMPOUND SENTENCES. § 519.
1. Two simple sentences (§ 361, 2) may be combined in
two ways, viz., either
a) so that the one may be quite independent of the other
— this combination is called Co-ordination, or Parataxis
(jrapaTa^ig). *
h) so that they mutually are referred to each other, and
express a complete thought only in their combination —
this combination is called Subordination, or Hypotaxis
{v7r6raE,ig).
2. Of two Co-ordinate sentences each is a principal sen-
tence, and in every respect independent of the other : Koivrj
r) Tvxv KOL TO juLiWov cLopoLTov^fortune is GOimnon, and the
future invisible ^' tovto lyw ovt tlpr^Ka, ovTi Xiyotim av,
I have neither said that, nor could I say it.
On the manner in which co-ordinate sentences may be
combined, § 624, a.
3. By Subordination two sentences are combined in such
a way that one expresses the principal idea, the other a
secondary one. The former is called the leading sentence,
the latter the secondary, dependent or Subordinate. One
leading' sentence often has several subordinate ones de-
pendent on it. The moods of subordinate sentences are
in many ways determined by the leading sentence : "Yia-
(TUiptpvrjg ^ia(3aXXeL rov Kvpov irpog rov adeXcpov, wg btti-
J^ovXevoi avru), Tissophemes brings a calumny against Cy-
rus before his brother, (saying) that he was plotting against
him ; Hom. o-ot a/x' ecnrofjieO', 6(j)pa av -xaipTjgyWe have fol-
lowed thee that thou mayst rejoice.
4. The Correlative connection of sentences is a special
kind of subordination. Of two correlative sentences, one
always refers to the other. The one is called th^ Prota-
sis, and the other the Ajpodosis. The Protasis, which re-
quires to be completed by another sentence, is subordinate
(3). The Apodosis is a leading sentence, which furnishes
the necessary completion : Hom. wg 'ISev, tjg mv f^v xoXog,
§ 520. THE MOODS IN COMPOUND SENTENCES. 287
as he savj it wrath seized him; Horn. oTTTroToii k d-rrridOa
'iirog Toiov k iTraKovaaiQ, the hind of word yoto sjpeak^ such
you will hear.
Obs. 1. — This correlation is frequently expressed by two Pronouns
or Particles referring to each other (§§ 316, 317), as in the exam-
ples just quoted, but not always : d iry tx^ig avriXeyeip, dvriXeye,
if you can in any way reply ^ reply.
Obs. 3. — The Apodosis often precedes the Protasis : ovtoq (^sXricrTog
av eiT] '6<TTig KoafiiiOTara Tag avfKpopag (pspeiv ^vvarai, he would be the
best who can bear calamities with most dignity.
5. From the subordination of one clause to another there
arises a convpound sentence.
Obs. 1. — The same thought may often be as w^ell expressed in two
Co-ordinate sentences as in one Compound sentence : ixrjSevl avjx-
^opdv^veiSicrygj kolvi) yap r) Tvxn-,i'^p^oach no one with a calamity^
for fortune is common ; or tied r) ry%// Koivi] Icttij fir]hvi avfopopav
* oveiSiiryg, since fortune is common, reproach no one with a calamity.
The Homeric language abounds in series of Co-ordinate sentences
(the paratactic arrangement).
Obs. 3. — Frequently a word belonging to the Dependent sentence
is drawn into the Principal sentence, where it may appear in
different cases. If the Principal sentence stands first, the ar-
rangement is called prolepsis (7rp6\r}\pig, talcing beforehand) : kuL
fioi Tov v'lbv eiTTEj d fiefidOrjice rrjv tsxvtjv â– =. Kai fioi sitts, ei 6 vibg
fiEfidOrjKB Ty)v Hxvrjv (§ 397). Hom. TvSeidrjv d' ovk dv yvoirjg, tto-
rkpoKTi fiETeiri, you could scarce perceive on which side Tydides stood;
Kai tCjv f3afll3dp(t)v tTrejueXeiro, ihg TroXefxdv iKuvoi a'irjaap, he also tooTc
care that the barbarians should be capable of carrying on war. On
the other hand, a substantive may pass from the Principal to
the Subordinate sentence : Hom. /^em S' tcrtrerai i}v tot d7rr]vp(ov
Kovpr]v Hpitrfjog, among them also will be the daughter cf Brises, whom
I then tooh away (compare § 603).
6. On the different kinds of sentences according to their
substance., % 624, etc. Only those kinds will here be no-
ticed which are most important in regard to the use of the
Moods.
§ 520. The use of the Moods in Dependent sentences is
subject to the following general rules :
1. The Indicative in Greek is very extensively used
288 THE MOODS IN COMPOUND SENTENCES. §521.
even in Dependent sentences, the Greeks merely annexing
or inserting many sentences without any mark of depend-
ence where the Latin language marks the dependence by
the Subjunctive or Infinitive : /jlt] ji avepy, rig djui, ask me
not who lam \_ne me interroges, quis sini].
^ § 521. 2. The Subjunctive in Dependent sentences also
denotes always that which ought to take place, and can
generally be employed only when the leading sentence
contains a principal tense.
Every verbal form is regarded as a Principal tense which
connects the action with \kiQ jpresent ; hence the Present
(except the Historical Present, § 487), the Perfect, and
the Future Indicative, and all tenses of the Sicbjunctive
and Imjperative.
§ 522. 3. The Optative (without av) denotes something*
merely conceived or supposed (§ 611 ,Ohs. 2), and generally
can be employed only when the Principal sentence contains
an Historical tense.
Every verbal form, however, is regarded as an Historical
tense which connects the action with the past, hence the
Historical Present (§ 487), the Indicative of the Aorist,
the Imperfect and Pluperfect.
A Dependent clause, moreover, frequently has the Op-
tative when this mood occurs in the Principal sentence.
§ 523. 4. In indirect speech {oratio ohliqua) the Opta-
tive (without av), but only after an Historical tense, is
used to denote something which is to be stated, not as the
opinion of the speaker, but of another person : ol 'AOrjvatot
TlepiKXia tKaKit^ov, on (rrpaTrjyog tov ovk iir^^ayoi IttX rovg
TToXe/uLiovg, the Athenians reproached Pericles because, be-
ing a general, he did not lead them out against the enemy
\_quod non duceret\ ; t^v^avro (rcoTrjpia Oikthv tvOa irpCiTov
ug (jiiXiav yriv a(l)iKoivTo, they vowed to offer thanh-offerings
whenever they should first come to a friendly land ; a ng
TToXfc £7rt TToXtv (TrpaTevcFOi, £7rt ravTYiv i<l>r] livai, si qua civ-
((• BESITYJ
§ 526. MOODS IN DEPENDENT ASSEBTlIONSJ^WCCv 289
itas contra [aliam'\ civitatem pugnatura ess€i:pmmfti hano
se dixit iturmn:
In this case, however, the Indicative also is admissible
according to § 520, but never the Subjunctive, even after a
Principal tense, its employment being limited to the case
mentioned in § 527.
§ 524. 5. The Potential Optative (with av) may occur in
Dependent, in the same sense as in Independent, sentences
(§ 516), to denote something as merely possible: Xlyw, qtl
TovTo ovK av yivoLTo, I say that this probably could not
happen.
The farther use of the Moods in Dependent sentences is
treated of specially in what follows, according to the differ-
ent kinds of Dependent sentences.
I. Moods in Dependent Assertions and in De-
pendent Interrogative Sentences.
§ 525. Sentences containing Dependent assertions are
those which annex the substance of a speech or opinion to
a Principal sentence by means of the conjunctions, on, wc,
that ; Dependent or indirect Interrogative sentences are
connected with the Principal sentence by means of £/, ifj
TTorepov . . . ri \utTum . . . a7i\, whetlier . . . or (in double ques-
tions), or Interrogative Pronouns (§ 214) or Adverbs.
§ 526. 1. The Indicative
is used in those sentences which, when conceived independ-
ently, would have the Indicative, and thus,
a) when the leading sentence has a Principal tense, the
Indicative must be used (§ 521): uiri jioi, riva yvwfxriv
£X£f Cj t^^l ^^? what opinion you have (direct : Tiva yvwiurjv
aX^ig) [Lat. die mihi, quam sententiar)i habeas'] ;
b) when the leading sentence has an Historical tense
the Indicative inay be used (§ 522) : uirov, rivTiva yv<l)fir\v
ei\ov,dixi quam' sententiam haberem ; rJKev ayyiWiov rig,
N
290 MOODS IN DEPENDENT ASSERTIONS, ETC. § 527
wg 'EXdreia icarfiXr^Trrat, some one came hringing the news
that Elatea was taken (direct : 'EXareta Kctr£tXr;7rraf).
Besides the Indicative, the Optative also is in this case
admissible, § 528, a.
S/' % 527. 2. The Subjunctive
can not occur at all in Dependent assertions, and in De-
pendent Interrogative sentences only if, when conceived as
independent, they would necessarily have the Subjunctive,
and thus
a) when the leading sentence has a Principal tense the
Subjunctive must remain : fdovXtvojuai, ttwq (te cnrodpu),
I am planning how to escape from you (direct accord-
ing to § 511: TTwc (T£ cnrodpC) [delibero, quo modo U effu-
giam'] ;
h) when tlie leading sentence has an Historical tense
the Subjunctive may sometimes occur: t/BouXeuojUTjv^ ttw?
o-£ airo^poj ; but the Optative is more frequent in this case
than the Subjunctive (§ 528, J). The Subjunctive in De-
pendent Interrogative sentences accordingly is to be trans-
lated by may or shall. " " ' " "
§ 528. 3. The Optative (without av)
may occur in such sentences ;
a) as a substitute for the Indicative (§ 526, b\ i. e.^
when there is an Historical tense in the leading sen-
tence, in case the Dependent sentence, if conceived inde-
pendently, ought to have the Indicative : uirov, rivriva
yvvjfiriv i^x^ifj-t (direct : ftx^^) [Lat. dixi, quam sententiam
haberem'] ; iyvuyGav on kevoq 6 ^ojSoc "»?, they knew that
the fear was groiCTidless (direct: 6 (l>6(5og kevoq ^v), com-
pare § 523.
b) as a substitute for the Subjunctive (§ 527, b), i. e.,
when an Historical tense occurs in the leading sentence,
in case the Dependent sentence, if conceived independent-
ly, ought to have the Subjunctive : tjSouXtuo^nv, niog ere
airo^pairiv (direct : jrwg at airo^pto) [Lat. delibero^am, quo
§530. MOODS IN SENTENCES OF PURPOSE. . 291
modo te effugerem'],! was reflecting Jiow I should escape
you.
In the second case the Optative is to be translated by
should.
Obs. — Which of the two meanings belongs to the Optative is gen-
erally perceived from the connection quite as easily as in the
Latin nesciebat quid faceret^ Tie Tcnew not what he did or what he
should do.
§ 529. The Optative as a substitute for the Indicative is found also
without a Conjunctioji in the continuation of a direct speech : tXe^ov
TToXAoi, oTi iravTOQ d^ia Xeyei (§ 526, 5), %€i/ia;j/ yap e'ltj kuI oiKude cltto-
•TrXHv ov dwoTuv etr], many said that he says what is worthy of the ut-
most regard^ for that it was winter, and that it was impossible to sail
home.
On the Infinitive in assertions, § 560. On the Participle in asser-
tions, § 593.
Mixed examples :
TTEiVf OTI TO lulv bCjjia T^Ovri^eTat (§ 291), /; 0£ ^I'X'? avawTacra
(§ 316, 5) oix{](TeTaL aOavaTog kol ayrfpwQf Pythag07'as the
Sainian was the first among the Greeks who ventiored to
maintain that the hody will he dead^ hut the soul, flying
u/pward,will depart immortal and ever young ; Oe/uncrTo-
kXtj^ viog tTi (jjv tXEysVf wg Kadev^eiv avTov oi/k €(j>)7 to tov
MtXTia^ov TpoTratoVf Themistocles, when still young, used to
say that the trophy of Miltiades would not let^im sleep ;
^AiropCjjTov (§ 214:fOhs. 1) irpioTov fivr]<rdC),I am at a loss
what to mention first y ol ^^iri^afivioL Tov^Oeov £7r//jOovro, d
Trapa^oTev KopivOioig Trjv ttoXlv, the Epidamnians ashed the
god whether they should give up their city to the CorintT^-
ians.
11. Moods in Sentences of Purpose, or Final
Sentences.
§ 530. Sentences which express an object or a purpose
are introduced by the Conjunction %a (Horn. 6(f)pa), wg,
oTTwc, in order that, that, in order to, juri, or oirwg jxi), *iva
fxri, m 07rler that not.
292 MOODS IN SENTENCES OF PURPOSE. § 531.
As such sentences express something which is expected
to happen, they take :
§ 531. 1. The Suhjunctive
a) necessarily when the leading sentence has a Principal
tense : dg Kaipov 7]Ketc;, oirwg Tyjg ^iKrjg cLKOva^g, you have
come at the right time to hear the trial [in tempore ades,
ut causam aiidias\,
V) more rarely when the leading sentence has an Histor-
ical tense : ug Kaipbv ^k:£^, oirwg rrig diKri£ aKovayg [aderas
ut audires\ ; ImTx^ig as ovk riyeipov, *iva cjg H^icrTa ^layyg,
I purposely did not wake you, that you might pass your
time as pleasantly as possible.
Obs. — The Conjunctions wg, ottujq, sometimes have av (Hom. kI, dv)
added to them in this sense : tovt avrb vvv didatrx, oTrojg av Ik-
Hd9u), explain that very thing now that I may learn it. The pur-
pose is thereby represented as one whose attainment depends on
conditions (as here, if you explain it). Compare § 554.
§ 532. 2. The Optative.
as a regular substitute for the Subjunctive (§ 531, lj\ when
the leading sentence has an Historical tense: eiriTri^lg ae
OVK ^yeipoVf "va tjg ^ofora oiayoig ; Hom. Ti;oft^p Aio/z//o£t
riaXXac ^AOf)vr] Swfcf fiivog kcli Oaprrog 'iv eicdriXog /nera iracnv
''Apydoim yivoiro, to Tydides Diomedes Pallas Athene
gave strength and courage that he might he distinguished
among aluthe Ar gives \_Diomedi Minerva animos dedit,
ut insignis fieretjinter cunctos Argivos\.
Obs. — The distinction between the Subjunctive and Optative in
sentences of purpose after an Historical tense consists in the
* rarer Subjunctive exjDressing the sentence more as an object or
demand that may be attained, the Optative more as the thought
or conception of the acting person (compare §§ 521, 522).
On the Future Indicative with ottwc, §§ 500, 553. On the hypo-
thetical Indicative in Sentences of Purpose, § 500. On the non-
intended consequence (wore), § 565.
§ 533. Sentences expressive of /mr, introduced* by /«7 (L^t. ne) or
/*}) ov (Lat. ut), follow the construction of sentences of purpose (com-
pare § 512). They have the Subjunctive necessarily when dependent
§ 536. MOODS IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 293
on a Principal tense : oh <pol3eT, jxtj ydrj 7rpe(TJ3vTEpoQ yg ; do you not fear
to 1)6 already too old [jionne times, ne cetate j^rovectior sis] ? Tlie Optative
is commonly used after an Historical tense : tipojSovvro, fxi) tl ttccOoi,
they feared he might suffer somewhat [verebantur ne quid illi accideret] ;
but not unfrequently also the Subjunctive : oi 'AOrjvdloi tovq ^v^ixdxovg
eSedistrav, firj airoaTuxriv^the Atlienians were alarmed lest the allies should
remit (compare § 519, 5, Obs. 2).
Obs. — ni] and ottwc m ^^^^^ verbs of fearing seldom have the Fu-
ture Indicative, oftener the Perfect Indicative when the fear refers
to a completed action : <po(3ovixe9a, fiij dfKpoHpojv rjfiaprrjKafiev, we
fear we have failed in both.
Mixed examples:
Touro oi) TTpoyprjiuai \tyeiv, *iva tktIv vfxCjv a7r£\9civ(i)fxai, I
have not chosen to say this in order to he hateful to some
of you y Kvpog ^tXwv (yero ducrOaif wg (Tvv^pyovg f'x^f, Cy-
rus thought friends necessary that he might have helpers;
Ai^oiKa, lui) eTriXaOwnisOa rrJQ ot icaSe o^ov, I am afraid lest
we should forget the way home; ^iXnnrog h ^o/Btj) rjv,
/xr) Ik^vjol to. TrpdyiuaTa avTov, Philip was in fear lest the
affairs might escajpe him.
III. The Moods in Conditional Sentences.
§ 534. Conditional or hypothetical sentences belong to
the Correlative sentences (§ 519, 4). The Protasis states
a condition under which something is to occur ; the Apod-
osis states that something happens under a certain con-
dition. Both sentences together form a Hypothetical Pe-
riod.
§ 535. In the Protasis, u (Horn. a\), lav (^. e., d-av),
contracted to j\v or av (Ilom. ti k£-v), if are employed ; in
the Apodosis the particle av is sometimes used to show that
it is true only under certain conditions.
In Greek there are fotcr principal forms of the Hypo-
thetical Period :
§ 536. 1. in the Protasis d with the Indicative, in the
Apodosis the Indicative without av, or the Imperative.
294 MOODS IN CONDITIONAL, SENTENCES. § 537.
This form of the Hypothetical Period is employed when
the relation between the Protasis and Apodosis is to be
represented as one absolutely necessary, actual, without any
opinion being expressed by the speaker as to the probabil-
ity or improbability of the case : d OeoI tWiv, Igti kclI ipya
Oewvy if there are gods, there are also works of gods; goI
el Try aXXy ^i^oKTai, Xtye kol ^tSao-Kt, f you have any dif-
ferent opinion, sjpeah and exj)lain.
Obs. — All tenses may be used in this form, consequently also His-
torical tenses. If these latter occur, care must be taken not to
confound this first principal form with the second : i^fjv aoi
airikvai Ik rtJQ TroXeiog^ d firj i/petTKov aoi oi vonoi, you were free to
leave the city if its laws did not please you (in the present : t^eort
— £1 ///) dpkaKovai) ; d tl tCjv deovTwv tTrpdxOrj, tov Kaipov, ovk Ijxk
(prjaiv a'iriov yejevfjaOai, if any thing right was done, he says that the
occasion, not /, was the cause. A sure sign of the second principal
form is the particle av in the apodosis.
§ 537. 2. in the Protasis, u with the Indicative of an His-
torical tense ; m the Apodosis, av with the Indicative of
an Historical tense.
This form of the Hypothetical Period is applied when
the relation between the Protasis and Apodosis is to be
represented indeed as one quite necessary, but at the same
time 7ieither of them as real. The Indicative in such con-
ditional sentences is called the Hypothetical Indicative,
which, therefore, always denotes the opposite to reality
(compare § 515).
In such Conditional Sentences, a sentence contradictory
of the Protasis may always be supplied in thought.
Hence the Protasis may, have the following forms :
§ 538. a) The Imperfect is used when a condition is
stated as not existing at present: d tov ^iXnnrov ra ^iKaia
TTpaTTOvra tiopwv, a(l)6^pa av OavjiaGTOv rjyoviurjv avTOv, if
I saw (were to see) Philip acting justly, I should deem
him very admirable. Here we may oppose to the Protasis
the thought vvv Se oux opw ra ^iKaia 7rpaTTovTa,but now
§ 54t. MOODS IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 295
/ see him not act justly. The verb of this contradiction
to be supplied is in the Present.
To this form corresponds in Latin the Imperfect Sub-
junctive: si viderem^ ^utarem.
§ 539. 5) The Aorist Indicative is used when a condi-
tion is stated which did not take place in the jpast : cnri-
Oavov av, u /mi) 77 rwv TpiaKOVTa ap^(ri Kar^XvOr], I should
have died if the government of the thirty had not heen
overthrown.
Here we may oppose to the Protasis the thought icar-
Avdr] Uy hilt it was overthrown. The verb of this contra-
diction to be supplied is in the Aorist.
To this form corresponds in Latin the Pluperfect Sub-
junctive : jperiissem^ nisi dominatio eversa esset.
§ 540. c) The Pluperfect is used when a non-completed
condition is stated : d tovto tj/uoXoyriTO rijULv-f padiwg av
^lEfxaxofieOafif in this we had heen agreed, we shoidd eas-
ily carry the contest through.
Here we may oppose to the Protasis the thought aXX'
o\)\ (l)fio\6yr]Tai, hut we have not heen agreed. The verb
of this contradiction to be supplied is in the Perfect.
To this form corresponds in Latin the Pluperfect Sub-
junctive : si inter nos convenisset.
§ 541. The Apodosis to a Hypothetical Protasis of this
kind may have either the Imperfect or the Aorist Indica-
tive, or the Pluperfect with av [Hom. icc-y], and that quite
independently as to which of the three tenses occurs in
the Protasis. In this case, also, the Imperfect corresponds
to the Latin Imperfect Subjunctive ; the Aorist and Plu-
perfect, to the Latin Pluperfect Subjunctive : d tots. t(5o-
rjOtjcraiuiiv, ouk av r}vu))(Xei vvv 6 <PiXnnrog, if we then had
rendered help, Philip would not now he troublesome ; ft
avTapKT) TO. \pY}(l>i<JiuaTa riv, ^iXnnroc iraXai av I^e^ivkh ^t/cr^v,
si plehiscita per se svjjicerent, Philippus dudum pmnam
dedisset.
296 MOODS IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. § 542.
§ 542. Obs. 1. — The particle dv is sometimes omitted in the apodo-
sis : y(Txvv6nrjv^ d vtto TroXefxiov ye uvroQ t^r}7rarr]97]v, I should he ashamed
if I had leen deceived ly an enemy.
§ 543. Obs. 2. — The Imperfect sometimes refers to a past time when
the continuance of an action is to be made particularly emphatic :
d TovT IttoUi (not tTToirjaiv) eKuaTo^, tviiciDv dv, if each had been acting
so, they'icould be victorious. On the other hand, the Aorist is sometimes
used referring to present time, when the rapid commencement of an
action is to be indicated : el tiq ae ypsro, tI dv direKpivio (not diriKpivov) ;
if any mie asksd you, what answer would you give ?
§ 544. Obs. 3.— A Hypothetical Apodosis may stand alone, the Prot-
asis being supplied in thought or deduced from the context : f/3ou-
\6nr]v dv, I should like {d Idvvdfirjv, if I could, dared) ; di vfidg avrovg
TrdXai dv dTroXwXEire, you would long since have perished through your-
selves (i. e., if left to yourselves).
§ 545. 3. in the Protasis^ lav (rjv, hv, Horn, ii ict-r) with
the Subjunctive j' in the Apodosis, the Indicative of a
Principal tense or the Imperative.
This form of tha Hypothetical Period is used to ex-
press gr prescribe something in regard to a case that iS
to he taken for granted and exj^ected. It is admissible
only in connection '^\\h jpresent and future thne (§ 521),
and is met with chiefly in maxims or proverbs : ^tt ra jSeX-
Tiara avri tCjv i)^iix)V, av firf crvvaiuKpOTEpa i%y, Xafi^avuv,
you must choose what is hest rather tlian v^hat is agree-
able, when both together are not allowed; av to. Trap^XrjXv
OoTa fxvr]fjLoviiVTgQ , afiuvov TTEpi tCov fieXXovriov fdovXeixTH, if
you remember the vast, you will judge better about the
future.
Obs. 1. — The Aorist Subjunctive in such conditional sentences often
comes very near to the Latin Future Perfect : vkog dv irovYiayQ,
jripaQ e^fig eWaXeg, si juvenis laboraveris, senectutem habebis jucun-
damfi.
Obs. 2. — We find d with the Subjunctive in Homer, and occasion-
ally also in Attic writers, in the same sense as idv, d dv, find d
KE-v : Soph. dvSpa, kei rig y (ro<p6g, to fiavOdvuv ttoXX', alaxpov ov-
^kv,for a man, even if he is wise, to learn much, is no disgrace.
Obs. 3.- — The Subjunctive in Conditional sentences is akin to the
§ 548. MOODS IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 297
Subjunctive of Challenging (§ 509). The speaker thereby puts
or demands an assertion, to which, for the present, he requires
the hearer's assent : tovto tdv o-KOTriyre, evprjcrere, on TrdvTUJV dpiara
iXei, if you consider this you will find tliat it is the hest of all ;
which is almost identical with the challenge : consider this, etc.
[compare Lat. Naturam expellas furca^ tamen usque recurret]. In
a similar way the Imperative sometimes takes the place of a
Hypothetical Protasis : Poet, -kKovtu re yap kut oIkov, ei (iovXei,
fieya Kul Z,}} rvpavvov oxnii tx^tv, tdv d' diry tovtwv to xaipuv,
TokX iyu) KUTTvov (TKidg ovK dv 7rpLainT]v,for he rich, if you will, at
home, and live in the splendor of a great ruler; hut if joy he wanting
to it,Iicould not give the shadow of snwkefor the rest. (Compare
§ 549.)
§ 546. 4. in the Protasis, £t with the Ojptative ; in the
Apodosis, av (k£-v) with the Optative.
This form of the Hypothetical Period is employed in-
tentionally to represent what is said as quite uncertain, as
merely possible, as a merely conceived case: a Tig KtKTr}-
fnivog tir] ttXovtov, XPV''^ ^^ avTi^ fii], ap av ivdrnjuovol ;
should any one possess wealth and not make use of it
(suppose any one possessed), tcould he he happy ? Com-
pare §§ 516, 517, Ohs. 2. The Present or Perfect Sub-
junctive in Latin corresponds to this form: si possideat
(or p>ossederit), num heatus sit f
Ohs. — In Homer the Protasis of such a period also sometimes has
Ks-v or dv : €1 TovToi Ks XdjSoifiev, dpoiixeOd Kev kXsoq iaQXov, if ice
should get these two, we should get glorious fame. The Attic writers
very rarely use dv in the Protasis.
§ 547. Since h with the Optative intimates that a thing
is merely possible, it expresses in reference to the past
what possibly might have been, i. e., a repeated case (com-
pare § 494, Ohs. 1) ; the Apodosis then usually has the In-
dicative : £1 TTOU t^tXauvod 'Acrrua'/Tjc, \^ 'iinrov \pvao\aXivov
Trepiriye tov Kvpov, if ever Astyages rode out (might ride
out), he tooh Cyrus %cith him on a horse loith a golden
hridle.
% 548. u with the Optative in the oratio ohliqua takes
the placCj accord]^ to § 523, of u with the Ind. (1), or
N 2
298 MOODS IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. § 549.
tdv with the Subjunctive (3), when a Hypothetical sen-
tence depends, on a Historical tense : y'^n Kvpog, on u tl
iua-)^r]g ttots ^f^crof, f/c rwv (piXtov avrt^ TTapaaTaraq XrjTrriov
eir), Cyrus hiew that, if ever any hattle should he necessary,
he would have to take his supporters from his own friends.
In direct language, Cyrus would say, ti]v ttote deijarj or a
TTorc ^eyjcTEL — XrjTTTiov Igti. If, in its relation to the time of
the governing verb, the condition lies in the Future, the
Future Optative is used. We seldom, in this case, find lav
with the Subjunctive.
The following general remarks also are to be observed
in regard to Conditional sentences.
§ 549. 1. The two members of a Hypothetical Period are
not so dependent on each other as that the one necessarily
requires a special form in the other. A Protasis of one
form niay, on the contrary, be joined with the Apodosis of
another form. It occurs very frequently that a Protasis is
in the first or third form, and the Apodosis in the fourth,
in order to represent the Assertion which it contains as
merely possible : u rouro Xtysig, afiapTavoig av,if you mean
this, you would he in error; lav lOeXriarjTe irpaTTtiv a^itjQ
vjjlC)v avTMVyiaijjQ av fiaya ri KTrjaaKrOe ayaOov, if you should
he disposed to act in a riianner icorthy of yourselves, you
would perhaps gain great good. The connection of a
Protasis of the second form with an Apodosis of the fourth
is rare ; Hom. K.ai vv kev tvO' clttoXoito avaE, avdpMv Al-
vdaQf tl lULYj ap o^u vorj(7£ Atoc Ovyarrjp 'A^joo^trrj, and now
assuredly ^neas, rider of men, would there have perished,
if Zeus^s daughter Aphrodite had not Jcept a sharp look-
out.
§ 550. 2. A Hypothetical Period may partly or entirely be inserted
in anvother sentence. The most peculiar in this respect are sentences
expressing a purpose, when connected with Conditional sentences:
ix yap M<pt\ov oloiTB dvai oi ttoXXoI to, fisyiara kukci l^epydZsaQai, 'iva oloire
rjffav av Kai dyaOd rd fieytara, I would that the^nany were capable of
doing (to a man) tJie greatest evil, in order thai^ey might also, on the
§ 552. MOODS IN RELATIVE SENTENCES. 299
other Tiand, te capable of (effecting) the greatest good (instead of: for if
they were capable, they would also be capable). The Hypothetical
Indicative here denotes the impracticable purpose (§§ 515, 537).
On the Hypothetical Participle, §§ 583, 595. On the Hypothetical
Infinitive, § 575, etc.
Mixed examples :
Et viTo (f)i\u)v WiXeig ayairacrOai, tovq (fiiXovg evspysTr^Tiov,
if yoio wish to he loved hy your friends^ you musl henefit
your friends y Ei to t\uv ovTiiiq locnrep to Xaiuf^aveiv ri^if
rjvf TToXu av dii(j)epov EvSaijuovi^ ol irXovarioi tu)v iTEvriTwv,
if having were as sweet as getting, the rich woidd he
greatly distinguished ahove the poor in hlessedness ; Poet.
Et traai TavTo KaXbv t(pv <J0(p6v 0' afia, ovk rjv av a/LKpiXsKTog
avOpwiroLQ ipig, if the same things were to all heautiful
and wise, people would have no hitter disputes; IlXarwy
TT/ooc Tiva Twv wai^MV, fi^fiaaTLjwao av, ecprj, h fir) wpyiZofirjv,
Plato said to one of his servants, you would have heen
flogged if I were not arigry ; 'Eav fiiv ti vfxiv doKtj aXrjOlg
Xiyeiv, ^vvojuoXoyriaaTE, if you think I utter any truth,
agree with ine ; Ei izoXig av^pwv ayaOujv ytvoiro, Trepijua.'
XnTov av UT] TO /uLYj ap\uv, log-rrep vvvl to ap^eiv, if there
were a state (consisting) of good onen, it woxddhe an ohject
mf contention to avoid ruling (how one might not rule),
as now to ride ; *^Hv rwv aTpaTiMTiov ^oyjia, a Tig, ottots
i] (TTpaTia l^LOL, i^in Arjt'^ofro, ^rjuoaia elvai to. XrjcpOtvTa, it
was a decision of the soldiers, if, when the army went out,
any one tooJc hooty hy himself what he tooh was common "
property (direct lav Xrii^rjTai — drjfioma t<TT(i)). *
IV. The Moods in Relative Sentences.
§ 551. Helative sentences are those which are connected
with others by means of Relative pronouns (§§ 213, 214,
216) or Relative adverbs (§ 217).
§ 552. In Relative sentences all moods are possible in
the same meanings as in independent or hypothetical sen-
300 MOODS IN RELATIVE SENTENCES. § 553.
tences : ovk £x<*^ o ti irpwrov Xa/3w, I*have (know) not wliat
I shall take first (§ 511, compare § 527); Ojow o-e "^ulyKovra
Mv lurj Tvxotg, I see you pursumg what, I ;pray, you 'may
not attain (§ 514); vfiuq lar^ irap wv av KaXXtora rig
TovTo fiadoi, you are they from whom any one m^ight hest
learn this (§ 516) ; ovk i'jOeXov Xeysiv irpog vjuag Toiavra
oV av vjMv i]^iaT nv cikovuv, I did not wish to say to you
such things as might he jpleasantest to you to hear. Com-
pare § 544.
Obs. — Sometimes, especially in tlie Poets, Relative sentences have
the Optative without av in an indefinite assertion, very much
like the potential Optative with av : ov tcoXiq arfjcTEie, rovde xpv
kXveiv, wTwm the state may appoint, him we must listen to (compare
§ 517, Ohs. 2}.
§ 553. On the I^iiture Indicative in Relative sentences
expressive of purpose, see § 500. ottwc* how, that, in or-
der that, very frequently has the Future Indicative (yet,
according to § 531, also the Subjunctive of other tenses)
after verbs which denote looking after, caring for, striving,
avoiding : (TKoirei, oiriog to. irpayjiaTa (Tii)Or}(TeTai, see that
the affairs (the state) s/ball he safe ; ^u. k iravrog rponov
airavra av^pa tovto TrapacTKevaZecrOai, oiriog wg aotpuyTaTog
%(TTai, every one ought to take care in every way to (tha^^
he shall) hecome as wise as j)ossihle.
Obs. — oxu)Q is often used in challenges and warnings in such a
t manner that the governing sentence has to be supplied : ottw^
^TrapscTH elg ttjv icrirepav, that you shall he here for the evening (more
completely somewhat like : gkottei ottwc, see that you, etc.) ; ottioq
irepi Tov iroXkfiov firjdev Ipeig, that you shall say nothing about th^
war (supply something like : ^vXarrov, taJce care).
§ 554. The particle av (Hom. kI-v) is added to the Rel-
ative when the Relative sentence expresses something mere-
ly conceived, so that the assertion contained in the leading
sentence is true only when what is asserted in the Relative
sentence really occurs. Such a Relative is called a Hypo-
thetical Belative. The Hypothetical Relative with av in
§ 555. MOODS IN RELATIVE SENTENCES. 301
general is used only where the verb in the leading sentence
is in Si 2^rij'i^cipal tense, and is then accompanied by the Suh-
Junctive. Such a Relative sentence may easily be changed
to a Hypothetical senteilce of the third form (§ 545); irav
o ri av jULtWyg IptTv wpoTspov liriGKOTTH ry yvMfjLri, whatever
you inay he about to say ( = £ay rt Ipuv luLtWyg), examine
it first in your mind ; in which it is left quite undecided
whether one wishes to say any thing; e-n-affOe oiry av rig
riyriTai,fiollo20 wherever any one may lead you {—lav rig
TTY) riyvTai), where you must first wait to know whether any
one leads.
Obs. 1. — As the Relative is generalized by the addition of dv, it
may often in English be translated by ever (Lat. cunque) : oq av
TovTiov Ti Sp^ reOvdriOj quicunque Tiorum aliquid fecerit, perito ;
Xsye oa dv OeXyg, say whatever you wish (compare Idv n dkXyg
Obs. 2. — In the same sense the Poets use the Subjunctive with a
Relative without dv (or ks-v) : rwv de Trrjfiovi^v fidXicTTU Xvttoixt' al
(pavCja avOaipeToi^ the sufferings affiict most which ajjpear self-caused
(compare d with the Subj., § 545, Obs. 2). Homer has also the
Fut. Ind. with ks and the Relative (§ 500, Obs:).
§ 555, If the verb in the leading sentence is an His-
torical tense or an Ojptative, the Relative without av with
tlje Optative is used, quite in the same sense, as a sub-
stitute for the Subjunctive (§§ 522, 523). These Relative
sentences take the place of those mentioned in § 554, in
the same way as the fourth kind of Conditional sentences
takes the place of the third (§ 548) : EjccXeuo-fv avToig tire-
adai, oTTOL Tig rtyoTro, he hade them follow wherever any
oim might lead. Thus we read in Homer : ov ^i k iyb)v
ajravevOe na\r]g iQiXovra vor]rTU) fiijxvaZ,uVf ov ol iirura ap-
Kiov laauTai (pvykiv Kvvag 7]8' olwvovg, hut whomsoever I
m^ay see inclined to remain away from the hattle, to him
there shall he no security of esca/ping dogs and hirds {i. e.,
death), but : ovnva /lev jSadtX^a icat t^oxov av^pa KL\dr],
rbv S' ayavoTg lirkcrmv iprirvaaaKE, hut whatever (where a)
king or promi7ient man he might meet with, him he
S02 MOODS IN TEMPORAL SENTENCES. § 556:
soothed with gentle words. Horn, wq clitoXolto koI aXXog
6 Tig ToiavTo. ye ptZoi, SO may any other perish who shall
do such things (but og av ptZy — aTroXeaOii)).
Obs. 1. — This Optative often implies repetition : ovriva Kixdrj, as
often as Tie might Jind one (§ 547).
Obs. 2. — The Subjunctive and the Relative with av occur only ex-
ceptionally after an Historical tense, and the Optative with the
Relative and dv, in the same case (compare § 546, Obs.).
Y. The Moods in Temporal Sentences.
§ 556. Temporal Sentences, ^. e., those which indicate
time, are properly only a particular kind of Relative sen-
tences, and follow them almost entirely in the use of the
Moods. The particles of time employed in such sentences
are : lirsi, tTrei^fj, tjg (^when, after ^ as) ; ore, oirore, riviKa,
when, as; awg, tgre, fiexpi-g) till; irpiv, hefore; in Hom.
o^pa^as long as, till; ^p.og,when; and besides the Rela-
tive expressions: a^' oS, l^ ov, since; Iv oj, whilst; a\pi
oVf Eig o, until.
In these sentences the Indicative is used when any
thing actual is stated ; the Optative may supply the place
of the Indicative in indirect speech after an Historical tense
(§ 522).
§ 557. When a Temporal sentence states something mere-
ly conceived, occurring only conditionally, the particle of
time, like the Relative, has av (kI-v) joined to it (§ 554).
This occurs usually only when the leading sentence has
a principal tense, and the Subjunctive must then foUo-w.
By combination with av are formed the Hypothetical par-
ticles of time : orav, oirorav, tTredv or sirriv, ETrci^av : Ittel-
^av Travra otKouo-rjre, KpivaT£,whenye have heard all, judge ;
tbjg av au)Z,r]Tai ro (XKa^og, tote \prj Kat vavrriv Ka\ Kvf^Epvrj-
TTiv Kai iravT av^pa TrpoOvpovg eivat, as long as the vessel is
safe, the sailor, the pilot, and every one ought to he^zealous.
Obs.— Rere also av is sometimes wanting (§ 554, Obs. 2).
§ 558. MOODS IN TEMPORAL SENTENCES. 303
§ 558. If the leading verb is in an Historical tense^ the
particle of time with the Optative without av occurs in the
same sense : tX^yw on, Itth^t) Travra aKovauav, Kpiveiav.
Ohs. 1. — Here, too, the Optative often implies repetition (compare
§ 554, Obs., and § 547), so that ore, oTrore, Itth, with the Optative,
may be translated by " as often as," " whenever :" ottots. ol "EX-
Xriv^Q toIq TToXEfiioig t-jrioiev^ pg.diiog cLTretpevyov, CIS often as the Hel-
lenes went up to the enemy ^ the latter readily fied. ♦•
Obs. 2. — Here, too, exceptionally, av and the Subjunctive sometimes
occur after an Historical tense (§ 555, Obs. 2).
On TTpiV with the Infinitive, § 565.
Mixed Examples of Relative and Temjporal Sentences.
'YiiEig Travra XoyKra/uevoL ravra \upoTOVHQ\ 6 ri ay\ Vfjuv
^oKy iuiaXi(TTa (TVfx(pipuv rij ttoXu, after having weighed all
this, vote for what yoio think will most benefit the state ;
Of tC}V l3ap(5ap(jL)v tTTirdg, ^tlvl lvTvy\avoL^v *'Â¥Xkr]VL, iravrag
eKTeivov, the cavalry of the harharians, whatever GreeJc they
met, hilled them all y Miyjuq av tyo) rjKw, at o-7rov8ai /xcvov-
Th)v, till I come, let the treaty remain; Poet. M?77ror' lirai-
v^)<^\iQf TTplv av el^rJQ avSpa aa(^r\vCjgy opyrjv Kai pvO/uov Ka).
rpoTTov oarig av y, 7iever praise a man hefore you clearly
Jcnoio his temper, and hearing, and character ; -'ETrcfS// tl
l}X(^ayom>, avicrravro /cat liropsvovTO, after having -eaten
something, they rose and proceeded ; 'O '^wKparr^g Tovg
(Tvvovrag IttoUi^v jliovov ottote vtto tCjv avOpwTTtJV opiiwro,
a7ri\t<TUai rwv aciic(i)v KOt a\a\pC)v, aAXa jcai oTTorf Iv Iprifiia
uEVf Socrates caused his disciples to abstain from what
was unjust and shameful, not only when they were seen hy
men, hut also when they were in solitude.
304 THE INFINITIVE. § 559.
Chap. XXII. — The Infinitive.
A) The use of the Infinitive generally.
§ 559. 1. The Infinitive is a verbal noun (§ 225, 5) which,
as such, has certain properties in common with a verb, oth-
ers with a noun.
With a noun the Infinitive agrees
a) in expressing the action of a verb in general, like the
nomina actionis (§ 342) : ttoluv, irparTeiv, doing ; compare
TTOiriaig, irpa^ig.
b) in the fact that it may have the article like nouns : to
TToiHVf TO TTpcLTTEiv, the doi?ig / comparc rj Troirjcng, i] npa^ig.
With the verb, on the otker hand, the Infinitive agrees
a) in its power of denoting diiferent times : ttoieTv, wot-
ri(Tai, TTiiroiriKivai, and of being formed from the Active, the
Middle, and the Passive : Troirjcjai, ironiaaaSai, 7roir}0tivai.
h) in being occasionally joined with av, and thereby shar-
ing the functions of mood (§ 575, etc.).
c) in governing the same case as the verb to which it
belongs: Trotay Ta^iovTa, doing your duty; xpijo-^at toXq
oTrXoiQf making use of arms.
d) in being qualified, like the finite vifb, by adverbs,
never by adjectives : KoXwg irpaTTuv, doing nobly ^ but Kakr\
TTpa^ig, a noble action.
2. The Infinitive is used very extensively in Greek.
Very often, besides the more definite mode of expression,
by means of a Conjunction with ^finite verb, the less def-
inite, by means of the Infinitive, is admissible.
§ 560. The Infinitive serves to complete and qualify dif-
ferent sorts of verbs, viz. :
1. those which express the occasion, capability, modality
of an action: ^vvavTai air eXOetv, they can go away ; fjnT^^v
§ 562. THE INFINITIVE. 305
TL .£xtt uTTuvyhe has something greater to say (can say);
Poet, ovroi avvky^uv oKka avii<^ikCiv e^uv, I a'in horn not
to join in hating hut in loving ; (ipxoiuai \iyuv,I hegin
to sjpeah ; tmrptTro)^ croi iroiuv o ti av jdovXy, Heave you to
do tchatever you wish ;
2. such verbs as denote appearance, perception, opinion :
^0KE7g cLfxapTuv, you seem to have erred;
3. such verbs as denote striving after something, impel-
ling toward, or frightening, deterring, preventing some-
thing : fiY) (tttsvEe TrXovTtXv, do not hasten to he rich / Horn.
KiXsai jue fxvOijcradOai, you hid me to Sjpeak ; iravTig al-
Tovvrai Tovg deovg to. (I)av\a cnroTpiTruv, omn&s homines
jprecantur deos, ut mala avertant; (pofioviuai ^isXlyx^iv ae,
lam afraid of refuting you; fXtyov aoi jurj ya/meivjdixi
tihi,ne uxorem^ duceres ; rig avrov kwXiktei ^^vpo (da^tZnv ;
quis eum imjpediet, quominus hue veniat f avt^aWETo juol
diaXexOiivai, he jfut off conversing with me.
§ 561. Even \kiQi jpurjpose of an action may be expressed
by the mere Infinitive, as in English by the Infinitive with
to or in order to : Sevo(f)iov to rj/xto-u tov aTpaTsvparog
KaTtXiTTe (l)v\aTTUv TO (TTpnTOTre^oVfJ^enophon left half the
ariny hehind to guard the^ camp ; irapix^ IpavTov rto laTpot
TifivHv Ktti Kaieiv, I give myself \ip to the physician to cut
and hum (me) ; ttiuv ^idovm tivi, to give a?iy one (some-
thing) to drinh.
Obs. — Not only with verbs of this kind, but also with those men-
tioned in § 560, this Infinitive has a much wider application in
Homer: apiGTEmaKe. fidx^(r9ai, he iised to he the first infighting ; dai
Kal o'ide Tad' Ehsfiev, these too, then, are (able) to say this; (3fj ievai,
he started to go; ^werjKe fxdx^adai, he urged (them) tofi^ht.
§ 562. The Infinitive serves to. complete or qualify ad-
jectives of different kinds, partly in the sense of the En-
glish Infinitive with to, partly corresponding to the Latin
supine in it : ^j^aXaTrov Evptiv, difficult to fiiid \difficile in-
ventu\ ; oWia TiVi(rrr\ IvdiaiTaaOai, a house very pleasant to
306 THE INFINITIVE. § 563.
live in; a^ioq Igtl TrXr^yag \a^u.v,he deserves to gethlows;
o^vTaroL ecTTs yvojvai ra pr]QivTa,you are very keen in per-
ceiving what is said ; ^eivbg XijEtv, powerful in sjpeah-
ing ; 6 \p6vog (5paxvg a^itvg dirjyr)(Ta(TOai to. irpa^QivTa,
the timh is short for worthily narrating what has haj>-
jpmied.
Obs. — In Homer such Infinitives are particularly frequent : ^kya kuI
k(j<TOfxkvoL(n TTuOstrOai, great also for posterity to learn; Oeieiv dve/toi-
(Tiv o/ioioi, lihe the winds in running; so with some substantives :
Oavfia ideaOai, a wonder to see.
On olog, oUgre, and baog, with the Inf., § 601.
§ 563. The Infinitive, as in English and Latin, is used
as the Subject of a sentence to which the predicate is a
neuter adjective, a substantive, or an intransitive verb :
TTCKTiv adnv \a\e7r6i^, to jplease all is difficult/ Kivdvvog
kcTTiv riTTCKrOai, there is danger of being worsted; abv spyov
Xeyeiv, sjpealdng is your business.
§ 564. The Infinitive is used in a freer way, without depending on
a particular word, with and without the particle w^, in several phrases
almost like a free Accusative (§ 404) : Cjq eiTrelv, so to »peak ; kfiol do-
keTv, as seems to me; oXiyov ^eTv, almost; to vvv elvai,for tJie present;
Kara tovto elvai, in this respect.
On tKujv elvai, § 570, Ois.
§ 565, The Conjunctio7is loffTe, so that; irpiv, before, and
its Homeric synonym Trajooc, are joined with the Infinitive :
^tXojuaOicTTaTog r^v 6 Kvpog, iogts iravra irovov avarXfivat rou
eiraivHdOaL fvEfca, Gyrus was very fond of learning^ so as to
endure any trouble for the sake of being jpraised ; irptv rrju
ap^rjv opOiog viroOecrOaif fxaraiov rjyovpaL irspl Trig reXevTrig
ovTivovv iroieidOai Xoyov, before properly establishing the
foundation, I deem it useless to maJce any words whatever
about the end.
Obs. 1. — These conjunctions may also be joined with the finite verb
(compare § 556) ; ware with the indicative represents a sentence
as an actual consequence more independent and by itself, and
may accordingly be often translated by fhsrefore^ hence : elg rrjv
vanpaiav ovx rJKEv, wgO' oi "E\\r]veg scppovTL^ov, he came not on the
following day^ therefore the Hellenes became anxious.
g 567. THE INFINITIVE. 307
Obs. 2. — For irpiv we also find irplv i), jprius-quam ; properly trpiv,
wlien it means sooiier tlmn^ is always to be regarded as an abbre-
viation for TTplv //, irpiv originally answering entirely to the Latin
2yrius. On the Infinitive after ?), than^ see the following §.
Oil t^' ^re, on condition that, with the Infin., § 601.
§ 566. After a comparative, the Infinitive is preceded by ^ loare or
»/ alone in the sense of than tJiat : ^ojSovfxai ni) n fxeli^ov t} were (pspeiv
dvvaaOai kurov ry ttoXu o-i;/f/3j?, I fear ^ lest^too great an evil should le/all
the state for it to he able to bear (greater than that it should be able).
On the Genitive of the Infinitive with the Article, which also is
possible here, § 574, 3, Obs.
B) The case of the Subject and Predicate with the
Infinitive.
§ 567. The Subject of the Infinitive is that word from
which the action of the verb in the Infinitive proceeds.
When the Subject is to be expressed with the Infinitive, it
appears :
1. most generally, as in Latin, in the Accusative, which
gives rise to the construction of the Accusative with the
Infinitive : i]yyu\av tov Kvpov viKriaai, nuntiabant Cy-
rum vicisse. The use of the Accusative with the Infin-
itive, like that of the Infinitive alone (§ 559, etc.), is more
common in Greek than in Latin. Not only can the sub-
stance of a statement or perception — which, however, may
be also expressed in one of the forms discussed, § 525,
etc. — be given in this construction, but also the effect and
consequence of an action. Hence the Accusative with
the Infinitive also occurs after verbs of happening, and is
admissible after verbs of commanding, demanding, forbid-
ding : iravTiQ ofioXoyovai rriv bfxovoiav jiiyidTOV ayadov d-
vaiy all agree that concord is a 'very great good; (Tuvif5ri
iur}^iva tCjv (TTparrjywv TrapHvai, it happened that none of
the generals was present ; lypa-^a (nroirXuv rrjv Taxiarriv
Tovg 7rpi<Tf5eig,proposui ut guam celerrime legati proficis-
ceremtur.
308 THE INFINITIVE. § 568.
The Accusative with the Infinitive is properly dependent on the
verb of the leading sentence (compare the English : I hear you
sing, I bid you go), and is explained by the prolepsis mentioned
in § 519, 5, Obs. 2. Instead of -rjyynXav on b ILvpog tviKrjaev, we
might have : yyyEiXav rbv Kvpov oTi iviKrjffev ; and for on kviKijaeVj
viKfjaai^ according to § 560, 2 ; thus we obtain i'lyynXav rbv Kvpov
viKijaai. If the governing verb is intransitive or passive, the Ac-
cusative is of a freer kind (§ 404) : IXTrig tan Tcavra KoXwg txeiv,
there is hope that all is wdl.
Obs. 1. — The impersonal verbs del and xph, '^t is Tiecessary, are joined
with the Accusative and Infinitive like the Latin oportet : xp*)
ToXfidp xaXeTToTo'i^' tv dXyeai Keifxevov dvdpa, the man that lies in
painful sufferings ought to he courageous.
Obs. 2. — As a continuation of an Accusative with the Infinitive,
the same construction may be employed in indirect speech in
Relative sentences and after Conjunctions, denoting time and
circumstances : toiuvt uttu (rcpag t(pT] diaXexOevrag ikvai ' tird dk
yEveaOai iiri ry oiKiq. ry 'AydOuJVog, dv^ipyjikv^v KaraXafx^dvuv tyjv
Ovpavj he said tluit after such conversation they went ; but that, tchen
they readied Agathon's house, they found the door open.
§ 568. 2. A Predicate referring to such a Subject must
necessarily be in the Accusative : tov cl^ikov koX wovrjpov
av^pa (^riiJLi aOXiov iivai, I maintai7i that the unjust aiid
had man is miserable.
Not unfrequently a Predicative expression requires an
indefinite Subject (tlvo) to be supplied: ra roiavra i^tarL
{tivcl) juLtTpyjcravTa koX apiOjurjcravTa tl^evai, one may Icnow
such things hy measuring and counting.
% 569. 3. When the Subject of an Infinitive is the same
as that of the leading sentence, it is usually not expressed
at all : vo/ui^u) v^viKmivai, jpiito me vicisse, I think I have
conquered; WiriZ.uq r^v^^a^ai wv av ^iyj you hope to obtain
what you need/ v7rt(T\ETO irapiaiadaL ug rriv kcnripav,pro-
misit se afficturioi^ ad vesperam.
Obs. — For greater emphasis, especially when opposition to some-
thing else is to be expressed, the subject may be added, and that
either in the Accusative or Nominative : Herod, ol Alyvirnoi lv6-
fiilov ewvTovg irpioTovg yevkaBai dvOpoj-mov, the Egyptians thought
that they first of all men came into existence; d ohaQe XaXKidsag
ri Meyapeag rrjv 'EXXa^a ahXJHv, vfiaig dk dTrodpdaetrQai rd Trpd^fxaTa,
§ 571. THE INFINITIVE. 309
oi>K 6p9CJg oletrQe, if you think the Chalcidians and Megarians will
save Greece, hit you escape f?'om trouble, you are mistaken.
§ 570. 4. Predicative qualifications referring to the Prin-
cipal Sicbject are in the^ Nominative : 6 'AXi^av^pog £0a-
cTKEv alvat Aibg vlog, Alexander dicebat se esse Jovisfilium'
fyw ovK bfxo\oyr\(JU) aKXrjTog rjKHV, a\X virb o-ou K^KXrifjiivog,
I will not acknowledge that I am come uninvited^ hut i?i-
vited hy you j oi SoKouvrtc o"o0ot uvai, they who seem to he
wise.
Ohs. — From the Predicate, Ikwv, joining the freer Infinitive, Civai
(§ 564), arises the combination c/cwv tlvai : tovto Ikwv dvai ov
TToiTjaw, this (if I am) to he of free will I will not do.
§ 571. 5. In m#ny cases a personal instead of an im-
personal form of expression is used in Greek, the Subject
of the Infinitive being made the Subject of the leading
sentence ; so, instead of the English " it was announced
that Cyrus had conquered" {riyyiXOr) rov Kupov viKriaai),
we have, 6 KvpoQ riyyiXOrj viKriaaiy Cyrus was announced
to have conquered. This form of expression occurs not
only — as in Latin with dicitiir, videtur — with coku, toiKs,
it seems; XiyErai [dicitur, traditurl ; ayyiXX^Tai,it is an-
nounced; ofioXoydrai, it is agreed, but also with av/jLJ^ai-
vHyit happens, siR^ with several adjectives with ufii, as:
^iKaioQ,just ; iTTiTYi^eiog, liriKaipLOQ, fitting ; lTri^o^oq,proh-
ahle ; avayKoiog, necessary ; avrog fioi Sokw IvOade Kara-
fitvHVyit appears to me that I myself shall remain here;
ZiKaioq kx ayuv avOpwirovg, it is just that you should lead
m,en (you are justified in leading men); Wi^o^oi elm to
avTo ireicrecTOai, it is to he expected that they will suffer the
same; Poet. TrpiTrojv €«^uc irpo riovde (jtwvtXvyit hecomes you
to speak in their presence.
The personal construction is explained, like that of the
Accusative with the Infinitive (§ 567), by prolepsis (§ 519,
5, Ohs. 2). For rjyyiXOr) oti 6 Kvpog hiKr]<jt there might
be rtyytXOr} b Kvpog bri tviKrfCTE, and for this again r}yyiXOrj
310 THE INFINITIVE. §572.
6 Kvpog vLKTicrai ; for Itti^o^ov Icttiv on to avTO nticTOVTaL —
iTrido^OL tlm oti to avTo irdaovTai, and hence iTrido^oi dcri
TO avTO Trda^crOaL.
Ols. — The Accusative construction, however, is almost every where
applicable : Xeyerai tov ILvpov viKrjaat, dicunt Cyrum mcisse.
§ 572. 6. Predicative qualifications referring to a Gen-
itive or Dative 7nay be in these cases : r^XOov liri Tiva
Twv BoKovvTwv <T0(l>u)v Eivai, I Came to one of those who
seem to he wisej iX^yov toXq doKOvcn o-o0o7c tivai, I said
to those, etc. ; Kvpov iZiovTO wg TrpoOvjuoTaTOV y^vicrOai,
they begged Cyrus to he as ready as jpossihle / iravrX ap-
XovTi irpogmu (ppovifxij^ eivat, it hecomes every ruler to he
judicious.
Still the Predicate is often in the Accusative ^itvfKpepH avrolg <pi\ovg
eTvai fiaXKov ^ TroXefiiovg, it is to their advantage rather to le friends
than enemies.
C) The Infinitive with the Article.
§ 573. The Substantive nature of the Infinitive is made
more manifest by prefixing the Article. Yet the Infinitive
with the Article must nevertheless have a noun in the case
required by the verb to which the Infinitive belongs: to
Tag -n^ovag (^^vyuv,the shunning of jpleasures ; the Infin-
itive in this case also is qualified by adverbs : to Kokhig Zm',
living rightly.
The rules given §§ 567-572 for the case of the Subject
and Predicate are applicable also to the Infinitive with
the Article. Thus the Accusative with the Infinitive is
often preceded by the Article : to irpou^ivai tov Otov to
fiiWov KOI TO Trpo(jr]jJLaivuv uj ^ovX^Tai, kcli tovto TrdvTeg
KOL Xtyovm KoX vojULiZovai, God'^s foreknowing the future
and jpointing it out beforehand to whom he will, all assert
and believe.
§ 574. By having the Article prefixed the Infinitive be-
comes declinable, and thus answers to the Latin Gerund.
§ 574. THE INFINITIVE. 311
1. Nominative :
Poet. TO (ppovtXv ev^aijuoviag TT/owrov vTrap\H, to he thought-
ful is the first step to hwppiness ^' to afxapraveiv avOpijjTrovg
ovrag ov^lv OavfxcKTTov, that those should commit errors who
are human is nothing surjprising.
2. Accusative :
avTo TO aTrodvi](TKuv ov^eig (poj^aiTai, dying itself no one
dreads. Especially to be noticed is the Accusative with
the Prepositions etc, kutu, in reference to ; ^m, on account
ofhecausej irpog, em, besides : Kvpog ^la to (fnXoiiiaOrig
(Nominative according to § 570) elvaL ttoWo. Tovg irapovTag
avr}pwTa, Cyrus, through being eager for hiowledge, asked
those jpresent about many things ; irpog to fx^Tpiwv ^elcrOai
KoXCog TrsTraldeviuai, I have been well trained to require what
is moderate.
Obs. — This Accusative of the Infinitive with the Article has some-
times a freer connection with a verb or adjective after the man-
ner of the freer Accusative (§ 404) : ol UeXoTrowTjmoi avkXTntrTol
dm TO tQ Triv yrjv t'lfiwv kgl3aXKeiv, the Pelopminesians have no hope in
regard to invading our country.
3. Genitive :
tTndvjjLia Tov TTiuv , desideriu'in bibendi j to £u irpaTTHv irapa
TYjV a^iav affyopjui^ tov KttKtJg (ppovuv Totg avorjTOig jlyvsTai,
prosperity without merit is an occasion to fools of base
sentiments ^' fjuoi ov^lv 7rpea(5vT£pov tov otl j3iXTi(TTov tfxl
yev^rrOai (§ 416), nothing is inore important to me than
my becoming as good as possible. Especially to be noticed
is the Genitive with the prepositions Ik, from; irpo, be-
fore ; tvzKa, because, on account of; virip,for,for the sake
of in order to ; ^la, by, through; avtv, without ; ol av-
OpwTTOL navTa iroiovcriv virip tov firi ^ovvai ^iktjv, people do
every thing in order not to swffer punishment.
Obs. — Purpose is often expressed by the Genitive of the Infinitive
even without a preposition : tov firj Sia^evysiv tov \aycjv Ik twv
diKTvojv (TKOTTovg KuOicTTafiEv, we place scouts that the hare may not
escape from the nets. (Compare the rare use of the Lat. Genitive
of the Gerundive : arma cepit opprimundos libertatis.)
312 THE INFINITIVE. § 575.
4. Dative.
The Dative is especially frequent to express %n8trumen'-
tality (§ 438); it is then, like the Latin Ablative of the
Gerund, to be translated, hy : ^iXnnrog KeKpaTrjKe ri^ rrpo-
Tspog (§ 570) npog rovg woXejuiovQ Uvai, Philip lias gained
the victory hy going first against the enemy [compare the
Latin docendo discimus'] , also with the prepositions sy,
in; eTTiyOn, on condition that; irpoQ, besides, and others:
TTpog Ti^ /irjStv tK Ti}g Trpecrjidag Xa^dv rovg aixfULoXcjTovg
k Twv i^iojv eXvaajuriv, besides gaining nothing from the
embassy , I set free the captives at my own expense.
D) The Infinitive with av.
§ 575. By the addition of av the Infinitive acquires a
potential or hypothetical meaning, and denotes therefore
either that something only might happen, or that under
certain circumstances something would happen or would,
have happened. Here two cases are possible :
1. the Infinitive with av can be replaced by the Optative
with av : fiaXiara oifjiai av crov irvdiaSaL {irvdoifxriv av), T
thinTc I could learn it best from you ; ^oKuri jioi iroXv
jSfXrfOv av TTEpX tov iroXifJiov jdovXivaaaOai {(^tXriov av f5ov-
XeiKrairrOE), d tov tottov Trig \(i)pag irpbg t]v roXt/iara tv-
Qviir]ddr]Ti, it seems to me you, would m^uch better settle
about the war, if you, took into account the localities of
the country against which you are inahing war.
Tills Infinitive with av therefore answers either to the Potential
Optative (§ 516), or to the apodosis of a Hypothetical Period of
the fourth form (§ 546).
§ 576. 2. The place of an Infinitive with av can be sup-
plied by the Hypothetical Indicative with av : YJvpog u
tptaxTCV, apLCTTog av oo/c£t ap^aov ysviaOai {apiGTog av lyi-
vtro), if Cyrus had lived, it seems he would have become
one of the best of rulers; Tovg TavTa ayvoovvTag ^iDKpaTrig
avcpa7roc(jjc€ig av KEKXricfOai rjy^TO (el Tiveg TavTa riyvoow.
§ 578. THE PARTICIPLES. 313
tKiKXrivTo av av^pairodivdEit:), Socrates thought that, if any
did not know this, they would he called slavish.
This Infinitive with av thus answers to the apodosis of a Hypo-
thetical Period of the second form (§ 537, etc.).
Obs. — The context must show into which of the two forms the
Infinitive with dv is to be resolved.
E) The Infinitive instead of the Imperative,
, § 577, belongs almost entirely to poetry ; it is used for
the second, and rarely for the third person. The Suhject
and Predicate are in the Nominative : Horn. Oapaiov vvv,
Ai6iur}deg, IttX Tpiveaai fxax^ddai, courageously now, Dio-
mede, fight against the Trojans ; Tral^a S' IfioX Xvcral re
(l)iXYiv ra T cLTToiva ^ix^aOai, deliver up to me my dear child
and accept the ransom.
Chap. XXIII. — The Participles.
Preliminary Remarh.
A Participle, like the Infinitive (§ 559, l), is a verlal-
noun (§ 225, 5). It has the same things in common with
the verb as the Infinitive, the same points also in common
with the noun ; but it is distinguished from the Infinitive
inasmuch as the latter resembles a nomen actionis, whereas
the Participle has the nature of an adjective.
A) Their Attributive Use.
§ 578. A Participle, corresponding to an adjective or to
a relative sentence, is joined to a substantive, to ascribe to
it a permanent quality : iroXiq evpdag ayvtag l[xov(Ta, i. e.,
Horn, evpvayvia or r) tifpeiag ajviag f'x^^* ^ ^^'^l/ having
broad streets ; ai Ka\ov\xEvai AioXou vy\<joiy the so-called
islands of JEolus ; 6 wapayv Kaipog, the present opportu-
nity (compare § 361, 11).
.0
314 THE PARTICIPLES. § 579.
Obs. — Like an adjective, the Participle also becomes a substantive
by having the article prefixed : oi irapovTEQ^ those present (com-
pare § 379) : 6 rvxojv, tJieJirst comer. Such participles may often
be translated by substantives: 6 dpdcrag^ the doer; oi Xsyovreg, th^
speakers; to avf^pepov^the advantage; rd deovra, the duty; Trpbg to
TeXevToiov (§ 361, 8) IkISclv 'iKacTOV TcJv Trpiv virap^dvTiov KpiveTaij
every thing that happened }>efore is judged of in accordance icith its
final remit.
On the peculiar use of the Fut. Part, with the Article, § 500.
' B) Thew Ajpj)ositive Use.
§ 579. The Participle serves to ascribe to a substantive
a merely transient quality or activity. In this case the
Participle is a shorter and less definite mode of expression
for what is otherwise expressed by subordinate clauses with
conjunctions of the most different kinds (compare § 583,
Ohs.).
A Participle used in this way is :
§ 580. 1. Temporal,
with the distinctions of time mentioned in Chap. XX. (esp.
§ 496) : TTpogexeTE tovtoiq avayiyvwGKOfiivoiQ tov vovv, give
attention to this while heing read ; Hom. a>c apa ^wv^cac
a7r€/3r]cr£To=£7r£i wc t^wvTjtxf, after having thus sjpohen he
went awcty. Observe especially tx^v and tpipwv in descrip-
tions, which may frequently be translated by the English
with : rag vavg airicTreiXav exovra 'AXfctSav, they sent away
Alcidas with (having) the ships; xpwfx^voq/ui a similar
sense : TroXXp re x^y xpMfi^vog, with (using) much skill.
So, also, apxpfxEvoq, at first / rt Xtvrwv, at last / ciaXnrwv
Xjoovov, after a time; ev lioihiv^fortunatety; koXCjq woiiov,
justly. The Participle wv can not be omitted when heing
is to be ascribed to a substantive : 'AXic^jSmSr^C '^'^^ '''"^c <^v
eOavfiaZero, while yet a hoy (Lat., merely ^'W^t') Alcihiades
was admired (§ 428, Ohs.).
§ 581. 2. Causal and final,
where the Participle is to be resolved by since, hy or hy
§ 583. THE PARTICIPLES. 315
the fact that, when referring to the present or past, and by
that, in order that, when referring to the future : oi»/c tanv
a^iKOVVTU SvvajuLiv J5ef3aiav KTrjaaaOaifJirm power is not
to be gained hy acting unjustly f' tov a^iKovvra irapa rovg
^LKacTTcig ayeiv Sat ^iktjv dcjcrovTa, he who acts unjustly ought
to he brought hef ore the judges in order that he may suffer
punishment.
§ 582. 3. Concessive,
a somewhat rarer use : to vSwp evojvoTarov apiarov 6v, water is the
cheapest though it is the dest/ vfieXg {xpoptofievot to. TreTrpaynsva Kal
dvQxspaivovreg iiyere rriv eiprjvTjv b/iwc, tJimigh suspicious of what had
been done, and indignant, you still maintained tlie peace.
§,583. 4. Hypothetical,
a very frequent use, where the Participle is to be resolved
by if, and corresponds to one of the forms of the Hypo-
thetical P^rotaseis mentioned in § 534, etc. : tovq (l>i\ovg
evEpyerovvTag kol rovg e\9povg dwyicTErrOa KoXaZeiv , if yotl
benefit your friends you will be able also to punish your
enemies {lav) ; also with the article : 6 p^] ^apiig avOpiowog
ov TTaidevsTaiy a person is not educated if he has not been
beaten. Such a Participle with pi] may often be translated
by without : ovk eanv ap^uv prj ^i^ovra picrOov, a man can
not rule without giving pay.
Obs. — With the varied use of the Appositive Participles, it must
not be overlooked that such a Participle of itself does not clear-
ly express any of the meanings developed in §§ 580-583, but
that we make use of the one or the other turn in translating
only in order to express in a more precise way what is simply
suggested by the Participle. Hence there are many transitions
between these meanings, especially between the Temporal and
Causal, but also between the Temporal and Hypothetical mean-
ings, just as in Latin sentences introduced by quum : Trdvra ravTa<
avvidovTag uTravTag (vpdg) del iSorjOeiv, it becomes every one of you,
when you have considered all these things, to render help; vopi^oj
dfieivov av vfidg irtpi wv vvv tpCJ KpXvai, fxiicpd ru>v TrpoTspSv ttote
pr\Q'tvTiov fivrffiovEvfravrag, I think you would better judge about what
I am now going to say, when you remember a little what was said
before.
316 THE PARTICIPLES. § 584.
C) The Participle with an Absolute Case.
§ 584. The Participle with a noun or pronoun in the Absolute
Genitive (§ 428) or Accusative serves to point out the circumstances
mentioned in §§ 579-583. The noun or pronoun to which the Par-
ticiple refers may be regarded as its subject^ since from it jDroceeds
the action expressed by the Participle. This construction, therefore,
may be resolved by a separate clause, beginning with a conjunction,
in which the word in the Genitive or Accusative must appear in the
Nominative : rovnov dvayiyvoxjKo^ikvtjjv tov vovv TrpoQEx^Ts, attend while
this is heing read (compare § 580). %
1. The Absolute Genitive (compare § 428),
for which may be substituted clauses with temporal, causal,
concessive, or hypothetical conjunctions : Df/oticXtouc 1770U-
fitvcrv iroXXa Koi KaXa tpja airedei^avTO 01 ^AOrjvaioiy as long
as Pericles led them {Pericle duce), the Athenians pro-
duced 'many and splendid works ; vavfxaxiag jEvojuivr^g
TiTTapag Tpiripeig Xa/i/3av£t TopytJirag, navali pngna facta
Gorgopas quattuor triremes capit ; oXrjg rrig iroXeixig Iv
Toig TToXeimiKoTg Kiv^vvoig iTTLTpeTrofxivrig r^i aTpaTYiyt[), imsyaXa
ra T ayaOa KaropOovvTog avrov, kol to. kuko. ^la/uLapravovrog
eiKog yeviaOai, as the whole state i7i the dangers of war is
committed to the care of the general, it is natural both that
great good should happen when he is successful, and great
evil when he fails. Poet, yivoir av nav Oeov TE\vh)fiivov,^
all may be done if a God contrives it {u r^xvioTo).
§ 585. The Absolute Genitive differs from the corresponding Latin
construction of the Ablative Absolute in the following points :
a) The subject of the Participle is more frequently omitted in Greek
when it is either easily understood from what precedes, or from the
meaning of the verb, or when it remains indefinite (compare § 361, 3,
Obs. 2) : Trpo'iovTiov, as {they) went forward; vovtoq^ when he (Zeus) rains;
i^ayyfXQkvTiov^ when it had been announced.
. &) On the necessity of the Participle of Civai — aov TraiSbg uvtoq [Lat.
tepiiero], see §§ 580, 482, Obs. An exception occurs in the case of the
adjectives UiIjv and clkijjv^ which very much resemble Participles : kfiov
Ikovtoq, with my will; Ifiov ukovtoq, me invito. The Poets take other
licenses.
c) As the Greeks have two active Participles to express a past ac-
tion, they use the Absolute Genitive of a Passive Participle less fre-
§ 587. THE PARTICIPLES. ,317
quently than the Romans do their Absolute Ablative : 6 Kvpog, tov
KpoXaov viKTjffagj KaTearpsxparo tovq Avdovg, Cyrus, Crceso victo, Lydos Slbi
aubjecit.
d) The Absolute Genitive is employed even where the subject of
the Participle is mentioned also in the leading sentence : tuvt uttov-
TOQ avTov t^o^e Ti Xkyeiv t(^ 'Karvdyu, after thus speahing he seemed to
Astyages to say something (of importance). [Lat. ita locutus — visus est]
§ 586. 2. The Absolute Accusative
is usual in the case of some impersonal verbs, especially
^iov,it being a duty; t^ov, 7rap6v,it being allowed, fea-
sible ; TrpogriKovyit being befitting/ d6^av,it having been
decided / ovdtlg lE,bv dp{]vr)v ayuv iroX^jjiOv aiprjaerai, no
one, being allowed to be at peace, will choose war ; iroX-
XaKig vfXiv l^ov TrXcovffcrrjo-at ovk r}9e\{](Tar£f though it was
often easy for you to gain 7nore,you were unwilling ; ol
^vpaKOiKTiOL Kpavyy ovk oXiyy i\pCovTO, a^vvarov 6v iv vvktl
aWtt) T(jt) (TTiimrivaif the Syracusans raised no small shout, it
being impossible to 'malce a signal during the night by any
thing else.
D) Supplements to Participles.
§ 587. For the sake of greater clearness, certain particles
are added to Appositive Participles, as well as to Participles
joined with an absolute case ; they give more distinct
prominence to the idea expressed by the Participle. Such
Supplements to Participles are :
1. (ifia, at the same time, denoting contemporaneousness : ot "EXKrjves
tjxdxovTo tifia -rropzvojxBvoi, tlie Hellenes fought while marching.
2. fiera^v, 'between, amidst, with pretty nearly the same meaning :
iir'tax^ fis Xkyovra fiera^v, he checked me in the midst of my speech.
3. avTiKa and (.vQvq, to express immediate succession : r^ ^e^iy Kkpq,
ev9vg dirolitfirjKoTi tTreKeivro, they pressed upon the right wing immediately
aftei' its landing.
4. TOTS, fiTa (Kg,Ta), tireiTa, o'vTiog, are added to the principal verb to
indicate that the action of the Participle was past before, and take
up the substance of it with various accessory ideas: KaToXnrcjv ^pov-
pav oi5rwg Itt oikou dvex(opr}(7ev, after Imving left a garrison, he thu^ went
318 THE PARTICIPLES. § 588.
away home;. Poet, /i?) vvv (pvyovreg eJO' aXwixev vaTspov, lest though now
escaping we should afterward be caught.
5. KaiTTEp (more rarely kuL alone), with a Participle, to be translated
though, renders prominent tlie concessive meaning : KuiTrep ovtoj co^dg
wv (SeXtiiov av yevoio, though SO wise, you might perhaps become hetter;
Homer often separates Kui from Trep : ol dk koI dxvvfievoi Trep Itt' avriii
r'lSi) ykXaaaav, and though vexed they heartily laughed at him ; o/jlojq, in
the same sense though or yet, ia used with the principal verb : Herod.
vGTEpov dxiKoixevoi Trjg (Tvn(3o\r]C IfiEipovro ofiujg GefjaaaOai Tovg Mrjdovg,
though they did not come till after the engagerrient, yet they desired to see
the Medes.
6. are, with a Participle (like olov, ola crf), answers to the English
in as far as, since, and brings into prominence its causal meaning :
KUTsSapOe irdvv ttoXv are ^uKpwv twv vvktwv ovaujv, he slept a great while
since the nights were long. [Compare Lat. quippe quum, quippe qui.]
§ 588. 7. tog and ibgirsp added to a Participle suggest
that what is expressed in the participle is subjective, i. e.,
is the opinion, the conception, the view of the principal
subject. Both particles are joined to the Appositive Par-
ticiple as well as to a Participle connected with an abso-
lute case, either the absolute Genitive or the absolute Ac-
cusative. The latter case in this connection is far more
extensively used than without those particles (§ 586). If
the opinion expressed in the Participial construction is to
be characterized af once as false, tjg and wgirEp may be
translated by as if: Sediaai tov OavaTov wg bv tl^oreg on
fiiyiGTov TLJv kukCjv i(TTiv, they fear death as if they well
Icnew that it was the greatest of evils ; but by in the be-
lief that, since, in the feeling that, etc., if the correctness
of the opinion is to be left undecided : i7/xac iravTig t/SXtV-
ofXBv TTpog avTov cjg avriKa jiaXa aKOvaroiuEvoi QavfiacTiovg
TLvag A070UC, we all looked at him, expecting immediately
to hear some wonderful statements j Poet. t^eaTi (jxvvhv
wg Ijiiov /uovrjc niXag, you may speak out since (in the con-
viction that) / alone am near ; Xiyei wg SidaKTOv ovarrig rrig
apBTrig, he speaks thinking that virtue is capable of being
taught f' cnrefiXixljaTE irpog aXXrjXovg wg avTog filv f/caoroc
ov TTOir]<Twv TO ^o^av, TOV ^£ ttXtjctlov irpa^ovTa (absolute
§ 590. THE PARTICIPLES. 319
Accusative), you looked at one another thinJcing that each
one of you would not do what %uas decided upon^ hut that
his neighbor would.
E) The Predicative Participle.
§ 589. The Participle, like the Infinitive (§ 560), serves
to complete a verb, by attributing to a word contained in
the sentence something which is not a mere addition, but
an essential part of the statement. The Supplementary or
Predicative Participle may refer either
1. to the subject of the sentence (§ 361, 5, 7, 8) : TraverrOe
au TTCjol TU)v avTtJv (^ovX^vojuevoi, cease always consulting
about the same things; 'icfOi Xvrrrjpog wv,Jcnow that you
are troublesome^ or
2. to a dependent word in the sentence (compare § 361,
10, and § 403) : 6 TroXe/uLog tiravcre rovg ^AOrivaiovg aal irspl
TU)v avTU)v (5ovXsuofjiivovg, the war caused the Athenians to
cease from always consulting about the ^me things ; olda
avTov Xvirripov ovra^Ilcnoio him to be troublesome.
In English such Predicative Participles are mostly ex-
pressed by the Infinitive with to^ or by sentences with that^
sometimes also in other ways. In some cases, however,
the English language also makes use of a Participle in a
similar way : I feel myself affected by it, he found him
armed (compare § 361, 10, Obs}).
The verbs which admit of a Supplementary Participle
may be classified as follows :
§ 590. 1. Verbs which express a condition,
as: %yjj),I am in a condition; rv^xdviti, I chance to be
(Poet. (cu/oEw) ; AavQavii), I escap'e notice ; <paivojiai,^i]X6My
(pavepog, ^rjXog djui, I am manifest ; toiKa, I seem ; ^ta-
TeXioj, ^layw, T continue; avi\ojuai, Kapnpiti), T hold out,
endure; KUfivw,! grow weary; aTrayop^mo, I desj)air ; as
well as the verbs which denote the beginning, interrupt-
ing, or ending of a condition; ap^op-ai, I begin ; ^Qavoj,
320 THE PARTICIPLES. § 591.
I a7n beforehand; oLxojjiai,I depart,! am off; em-, ^la-
\d'Kb),Ihreah off , I suspend ; Travio,! make to cease {rrav-
ofiai, I cease). In translating we frequently change the
Participle into the principal verb, and render the principal
Greek verb by an adverb. Examples : KTjpu^ac t'x^ (more
emphatic than lKi]pv^a, compare Latin nuntiatum habeo),
I have announced ; rig trvx^ Trapayevojuivog ; who hap-
pened to he present f ^LareXio tvvoiav '^x^^ ttcktiv v/uuv, J
continue cherishing a hindly feeling for you all ; ixii Kajuyg
^iXov av^pa evepyezLJv, don't grow weary of benefiting a
friend ; aWa fivpia lirikuTrti) Xkyuiv, I refrain from say-
ing innumerable other things; Horn. u[>x^t aTroTrTafievog,
he was gone flying away,
Obs. — Even the verb dfil may be joined with a Participle : tf tovto
ovK tffTi yiyvSixevov Trap r/fuv ; is this not happening (usual) among
us? A Participle is necessarily so used with f/^t to complete
certain verbal forms (compare §§ 287, 291), especially the Par-
ticiple of the Perfect or Aorist with cZ/ti instead of the Future
Perfect : dedcoKujQ or Sovg tau = dederis.
§ 591. 2. Verbs of perceiving,
as : opau), I see {Trepiopaio, I overlook, endure) ; afcouo), /
hear ; ol^a, I know ; fiavOavu), I learn ; jiyvcjaKO), I get to
know ; alaQavofim, I perceive ; tvpi<jKio,I find ; fiifivriiiai,
I remember. In several of these the object is in the Gen-
itive, according to § 420. Examples ; wg aSov avrovg tte-
XaZovrag, oi XsriXaTovvTeg ivOvg cKpivrsg to. xpVI^(iTa ecji^vyov,
cum COS appropinquantes vidissent, prcedantes proida sta-
tim relicta fugam capessiverunt ; riKovaa nore Swicjoarouc
irspX (fiikijjv haXayojULtvov, I once heard Socrates discoursing
about friends [audivi Socratem disputantem\ ; Xe/o/jo vij-
oroy KaTi/uaOs noXtig ev^SKa ?} ^wSejca txov(Tav, he learned
that the Chersonese had eleven or twelve cities ; avOpwiroi
KaXot KayaOol lirH^av yvtjcriv aTnaTovfxevoi (compare § 483,
l), ov ^iKovGL Tovg airicTTovvTag, when good tnen perceive
that they are distrusted, they do not like those who distrust
them.
§ 595. THE PARTICIPLES. 321
Obs. — With (Tvvoi^a fioi, I am conscious, the Participle may be con-
nected with the Nominative of the Subject or the Dative (jioi) :
tfiavTiii (TvvySeiv ovSev tTriaTdnwoQ or S7ri<7ra^£v<^, / was conscious of
hnowing nothing. In the sense of " to be aware" it may also have
the Accusative with the Participle.
§ 592. 3. Verbs of emotion,
as : â– )^aip(i), 7i8o/xaf, Tipirofiaif I rejoice j ayaTrcni), I am sat^
isfied ; xaXtTrCyq ^iptOjCegrefero ; axOo/nai, I am dissatis-
fied ; ayavaKTiwylam vexed; alcrxvvo^aL, I am ashamed ;
imeraiuiXoiLiai or ju^rajuiXH fiot, I repent. Examples : Horn. 6
^E 0/ocat TtpiTET aKov(i)v, hut he rejoiced in heart at hear-
ing (it) ; fitrafxeXsi avTcji \piV(Tafxivi^, he repents having told
a lie.
§ 593. 4. Verbs oi pointing out and asserting,
as: ^eiKw/LH, aTro(j)aivijj, T show / l^^ki'^xiii^I prove, con-
vict; ayyiWiDy I announce ; bjuoXoyiw, I assent. Exam-
ples : ^iXiTTiroQ TTCLvra evsKa ^avTOv ttoiCjv tSfXrjXt'yicrm, it
has been proved that Philip does every thing for his own
sake; a-no^aivovai rovg (p^vyovTaq iraXai irovrjpovg ovrag,
they mahe manifest that the banished had long been base.
§ 594, Obs. — The Infinitive, according to § 560, may be used as well
as the Participle vrith many of the verbs enumerated in §§ 590-
593, but in a somewhat different sense : apxofiai didd(TKwv,Ibegin
to he a teacher; dpxofiai ^i^daKuv,! begin to teach (my teaching);
ahxvvofiai Xsywv, / am ashamed though I say it ; aityyvvon-ai Xeyeiv,
shame presents me from saying.
F) The Participle with av.
§ 595. By the addition of the Particle av the Participle,
in every case like the Infinitive (§§ 575 and 576), acquires
the meaning oi possibility or that of an Apodosis in a
Hypothetical Sentence, and may therefore be resolved in
two ways :
1. by the Optative with av (§§ 516 and 546):
\yh) ilfiL TU)v -n^iiog /utv av IXeyxOivrojv, rt^ewg S' av eXey-
ZaifTtJv, I com one of those who would gladly be refuted
{pi av iXeyxOdtv), and would gladly refute (ot av iXiy-
02
m
322 THE PARTICIPLES. § 596.
Semv); evpicTKio ravrriv av iui6vr]v y^vo}iivr\v tCjv /j^eWovtiov
KivSvv(i)v aTTOTpoTTijv, I find tMs would 1)6 ths only jpre-
vention of the coming dangers (on av ytvofro); ta^fv koI
vjuag av KTttt aWovg, ev ry avT^ ^vvafiu 7]jjuv ysvojuivovg,
^pCjvrag av avTo, we know that you as well as others in
the same position would do the same thing, i. e., 6tl el
ytvoiaOe cpc^rs av.
2. By the hyjpothetical Indicative with av (§ 536, etc.):
^fXfTTTroc WoTi^aiav iXwv koi ^vvriOeig av avTog t\iiv, el
e(^ov\r)9r}, 'OXvvOioig aire^ajKev, when Philip had' taken Po-
tidcea, and might have {ore e^wriOt] av) kept it himself, if
he had wished, he gave it hack to the Olynthians.
G) The Verbal Adjectives.
§ 596. Verbal Adjectives are, like Participles, verbal
nouns of an adjective kind, but differ from particij^les by
a usage much more restricted, and referring to no special
time, which has been treated of generally in § 300.
The Verbal Adjectives in -reogy implying necessity, are
worthy of notice. A double construction is here possible :
1. The ohject of a necessary action becomes the suhject,
and the Verbal Adjective agrees with it: 6 irary^p ctoi tijulyi-
Ttog laTiv, pater tihi venerandus est l n iroXig rolg TroXiraig
tj(peXr]Tia, the state must he assisted hy its citizens. In
this construction the subject is emphatic.
2. The Neutral or impersonal construction, where the
necessity of the action is made specially prominent ; the
object of the action is in each instance in the case required
by the verb*: Siwfcrfov rriv aperriv, we must pursue virtue;
eip'qvrjv ciKriov earriv, pax agenda est; aitrkov rov iroXejiov,
you must try war ; (5ori9r}Teov rjiulv tdri rolg irpayp.aaiv, we
must help the state.
The person who is to, or must do something, is in both
cases in the Dative : in the second, according to the anal-
ogy of Set (§ 567, Ohs. 1), sometimes in the Accusative :
§ 597. PECULIARITIES OF RELATIVE SENTENCES. 323
ov^evl rpoTTfj) ticovrag adiKriTEOv, in no way must you will-
ingly do injustice.
Obs. 1. — The Verbal Adjective sometimes has the meaning of a
Middle : Truarkov kaTiv, we must obey {ireiOofiai, not TreiOoj).
Obs. 3. — In the Neuter construction we often find the Plural : tto-
XifirjTea iariv, we mmtjiglit (compare § 364).
Chap. XXIV. — Some Peculiarities of Eelative
Clauses.
A) Attraction.
§ 597. 1. The Kelative Pronoun in general follows tlie
rule that it agrees in Gender and Number with its ante-
cedent, that is, with the word to which it refers,4)ut in Case
with what follows ; that is, it accommodates itself to the
sentence in which it stands: fx^iuLvr^aOe rov lipKov ov 6/iw
jULOKars, he mindful of the oath which you have sworn.
2. An exception from this rule is the Attraction, or the
process by which the Kelative is attracted in Case also by
the word to which it refers, so as to take its case : jue/jLvriaOs
TOV OpKOV ov bfKjJflOKaTE.
3. With Attraction' another process is frequently com-
bined, viz., shortening. This consists in the Article or
the Demonstrative Pronoun being left out, an(? the Rela-
tive, with the word to which it refers, being draw^together
into a single clause : jutjuvrjo-^e ou o/jiwjLioKaTE opKov.
4. If the word referred to by the Relative is a mere pro-
noun, the Relative remains quite alone, but stands in the
case which the Demonstrative would have had; fiefivrjaOe
ov 6fi(jJiui6KaT£ = fiefjivrjaOs to6tov o ofHiyfioKarE, remember that
which you have s^vorn • a/ufXw wv /uc Set 7rpaTTeiv^aij,e\Cj
Tovrwv a fxe du. it paTTuv, I neglect what I should do.
324 PECULIARITIES OF RELATIVE SENTENCES. § 598.
§ 598. Attraction, however, can occur only under the
following conditions :
1. The Relative clause must be closely connected with
the word to which it refers, must be an essential part of
it. Attraction is inadmissible in a Relative clause, which
only loosely adds a remark to a substantive, which might
quite as well be wanting, or be annexed by means of Kai
and a demonstrative pronoun.
2. The sentence must be such as would have the Rela-
tive pronoun in the Accusative^ but its antecedent in the
Genitive or Dative : tiq 17 w^tXcm ToTg O^oXg rvjxavH ovaa
dwo Tbjv ^ijjpwv iov Trap vjiCjv Xafx^avovmv , what advan-
tage have the gods from the presents which they receive
from you f ug^iptTE a(f ocfojv SKacrrog 'ix^i, contribute
from whojt each has {airb roaovrwv oaa) ; Xbjeig ov GVfx-
<^ix)va oig TO irpCjTov tXtyeg, you do not say what harmon-
izes with y^hat you first said {rovroig a); roj -nyenovi ttkt-
Tivaofiev (^ av Kvpog Sq>, vje shall trust the commander
%ohoin Cyrus gives (us) {rovTi^ ov).
Obs. — Attraction very seldom takes place with other cases : wv iv-
Tvyxavbt) fidXKTTa dyafiai ckj i. €., tovtujv olf, I admire you most of all
I meet.
§ 599. All clauses subordinate to a Relative Sentence,
so far as they consist of words referring to the Relative,
and are capable of inflexion, must likewise be modified in
the Attraction : olg ovaiv vfx^Tipoig f'x^*' rovroig iravra raX-
\a a(T(l)a\i^g KiKrrjrai, i. e,^ a ovra vfiirepa t'x^^j rovroig, he
keeps all the rest in safety hy means of what he has of yours,
§ 600. oToe, and sometimes o(toq and jjXikoc, have quite a peculiar
attraction ; viz., dvai is often omitted wlien it would stand with olog
in the nominative, and the latter is put in the same case as its ante-
cedent : oV<^ ye iiiol TTavTctTramv drropop tovto, i. ^., togovti^ olog kyu) el/xi,
that is quite impossible to such a inan as lam. Sometimes the article
is prefixed at the same time : toXq o'loig ijjuv, to such as we. By the
same ellipsis ogngovv acquires the fixed meaning, whoever, i. e., any
whatever : ovk tan diKaiov dvdpbg (SKd-rrTuv ovrivovv dvOpwTTujv, it is not
a just 'man's nature to injure any person whatever (i. e., any one, who-
§603. PECULIARITIES OF RELATIVE SENTENCES. 325
ever he may be). [Compare Lat. cuicunque Twmini nocere.] So ogng
^ovXh means the same as ovtoq ov iSovXei, like quivis.
§ 601. Other Relative expressions, all involving either
Shortening or Attractior^ are :
av0' ojv, hecause, i. e.^ avrX tovtljv a, or avrt tovtiov otl :
av ev tTTOirjcFag avO' wv tiraO^Qj you did good because, you
received good (for that which you received).
t0' to, £(^' wra (Herod, lin tovti,^, lir' (orf),/6»7' the pur-
pose of^ on condition that, i. e., hn tovtoj logre, often with
the Infinitive : ol rpiaKOVTa ypiOrjaav 1^' tiyTe avyy paxpai
v6ij.ovg, the thirty were chosen J^br the purpose of drawing
up laws.
f ? ov, cKf)' ovf ex quo, since, i. e., since the time that. On
Iv (J, uq o, o.yjii ov, § ^o^,
oloc, more complete roiovrog mog, with the Infinitive, of
the hind that, of the kind to, and ocogr^, with the Infinitive,
able, possible : -ovk riv lopa ola apduv to Tre^iov, it was not
the season to water the field j ovx oIoits riaav fior^Oricrai,
they were not able to render help (compare § 562). oo-ov,
for roaovro o<jov, enough to, with the Infinitive : Ixoixzv
oaov a-KoZ,r\v, we have enough to live on. ^
§ 602. An inverted Attraction takes place when a noun
or pronoun is put in the same case as the Relative which
refers to it : Tr\v ovaiav v\v KariXnrE rql vlu ov TrXdovog a^ia
IcTTiv, the property which he left his son is not worth more,
instead of 17 ovaia r]v ; Poet, ragde S' agirsp tlgopag riKOvai
irpog o-f , those whom you see (the girls) have come to you
(ai^E ag). So ov^Etg, jurjSft'c, become one word, as it were,
with ogrig ov '. ov^evi otlj ovk awoKpivETai, properly ovdeig
t(TTiv oTt^ OVK, nobody whom he does not answer. Observe
also such expressions as : OavjuaaTog ocrog, i. e., OavjULaarov
icTTiv oaog, wonderfully great ; OaviaacTTiog wg, i. e., Oav-
fiaGTov IcTTiv wg, it is wonderful how. Compare § 519, 5,
Obs. 2.
§ 603. A singular anomaly is presented by Relative sentences after
t(jTi^ in the sense of " there is." tan is in the Singular even when the
326 COMBINATION OF RELATIVE SENTENCES. § 604.
relative is in the Plural : icmv o'l, there are those who, i. e., some ; tanv
oIq ovx ovrojg tSo^ev, there are some to whom it did not appear so. So
tcTTiv oTE (:=.lvioTe), sometimes ; tanv ov, in some vlaces; tanv y, in some
ways.
B) Coinplication.
§ 604. In translating Greek Relative clauses into En-
glish, difficulties sometimes arise through the particular re-
lations of the sentences :
1. When the Relative as an Accusative of the Subject
belongs to an Infinitive : ol iroXijuioi, ovg (j[)ovTb airoipvyeiv,
t^ai(pvr]g Trapriaav, hostes, quos aufugisse jputdbant^ suhito
aderant, the enemy ^ whom they thought to have fled, were
suddenly th^re.
2. When the Relative depends on a participle : Kara-
Xa/ufidvovcTL Tei\og o TeiXKrafisvot Trorf 'AKapvaveg KOtytj)
SiKaarripitj^ t\pu)VTO ( = 6j l\pwvTO Tu\iGajiivoL avro), they
take possessio7i of the fort which the Acarnanians^ after
building it, used as a common judgment hall.
3. When the Relative is in the Genitive dependent on a
comparative : ap^n), rig ov^lv KTij/xa aefivoTspov, virtue, than
whichmuo possession is more venerable (§ 416).
4. When the Relative depends on the verb of an inserted
clause \ uipoviuLeOa avTO/moXovg, oig onoTav Tig irXuova fiiaQov
8<S(jJ, fiiiT Ikhvwv aKoXovOijCFovaiv (duces) eligimus trans-
fugas, quibus si quis plus stipendii prcebuerit illos se-
quentur (i. e., ol, oirorav ng — S<8(o, uKoXovOijaovaiv, qui, si
iis — -prcebuerit, sequentur), we choose deserters, tvho, if any
one gives them inorepay, will follow him.
Obs. — In the cases enumerated under 2 and 4, as well as those dis-
cussed in § 605, and others besides, the Greek language satisfies
itself with putting only once a word which has to be supplied in
different cases for several clauses belonging to one another.
§ 605. C) Combination of several Relative Clauses.
When several Relative clauses follow one another, the Relative pro- '
noun need be expressed only once, even when, the second time, it
would require to be in a different case : Horn, avwx^* ^^ V^^^ yafxkcrOai
§ 606. INTEKROGATIVE SENTENCES. 327
Ti^ oTe(^ re Traryp fceXerai /cat avddvet avTy, hid her marry whomsoever her
father urges and (who) phases herself; 'Apialog, dv yfieig rjOiXofiev (3a-
aiXea KaQiardvai kuI [^] louiKafiev Kai [d^' ov] eXdlSofiev Tr/ora, ovtoq rjfidg
kukCjq TToiHv TTHpdTai, AricBUS, whom we wished to Tnalce hing^ and (to
â– whom we) gave and (from whom we) received pledges of fidelity^ at-
tempts to ill use us.
Obs. — Sometimes, instead of the repeated Relative, avTog is substi-
tuted in the case required by the construction of the sentence.
So likewise fiiv in Homer ; oi Trpoyovoi, olg ovk Ixapi^ovO' ot Xeyov-
TEg ovS' l^iXovv avTOvc^ ojgTrep v^dg ovtoi pvv, ttsvte kuI TiTTapdKovra
tTt} tS)v 'EWrjvojv rjglav tKovTiov, your ancestors^ whom the speaJcers
did not gratify, nor did they flatter them, as these now do you, ruled
forty-five years over the readily submitting Hellenes. Hom. : avri-
6eov UoXixprjfiov, oov Kpdrog lari fikyidTOV Trdaiv KvKXioTreacn, Gdoxra
de fiiv Hks vvfKpT], godlike Polyphemus, whose power is the greatest
am/)ng all the Cyclops, and him (whom) the nymph Thoosa hare.
Chap. XXV. — Interrogative Sentences.
§ 606. 3- The simple direct question may be introduced
by the Interrogative pronouns or adverbs mentioned § 214,
etc. In Greek several different questions may be included
in one interrogative sentence : Hom. rig ttoOev ug av^ptov ;
whai 7nan, whence are you f airb tovtiov (jtavtpbv ybvi](TETai,
Tig Tivog aiTiog ifTTiv,froin this it will he clear who is
chargeable with what (who is chargeable and with what).
Obs. 1. — An Interrogative pronoun may be joined with a demon-
strative : dyyeXtav ^epw jSapnav ' riva tuvttjv ; I bring heavy tid-
ings ; what (is) that f (rig avrt] tariv ;)
Obs. 2. — A question may also be expressed in a subordinate clause
and by a participle : ttote d xpv T^pd^ETE ; tTTHddv ri yevijTai ; when
will you do your duty ? when what shall happen ? ri idojv t6v Kpt-
t6(3ovXov TTOiovvra ravra KareyvojKag avrov ; what have you seen
Critobulus doing that you have charged him with this f o\ TzaXai
'AOrjvdioL ov CieXoyicravro, virip ola TreTroirjKOTUJV dv9pioTru)V klv^vvw-
crovmv, the old Athenians did not calculate how much people have
328 INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. § 607.
done for whom they were going to incur risk Of this kind also are
the phrases : rl ttuOwv ; what have you passed through^ that f ri
fiaOujv ; wJiat have you got to Jcnow^ that ? ri iraOojv dSiKelg Trjv ttu-
Tpida ; what have you passed through to males you act unjustly to-
ward your country ?
§ 607. 2. When the question refers not to a single word,
but to a whole sentence, it may be indicated
a) merely by the tone of voice ; oh (jtojdeX jurj r]^r} tt/oeo--
j3vT£pog yg ; do you not fear that you are already too old?
V) by Interrogative particles, which, in translating into
English, can not always be expressed by separate words,
but often may be rendered by the position of the words
and the tone of pronunciation. The most important Inter-
rogative particles are apa and rl, both comparable to the
Latin affix -ne. Which answer is expected is indicated by
neither of these particles : ap dju ixavng ; am I a jprojphetf
^ ovToi TToXifjiioL dcTiv , are those enemies f
Obs. — If an affirmative answer is to be specially indicated ov is add-
ed ; if a negative^ fir) is added to dpa. Hence apa ov corresponds
to the Latin nonne. apa firi to the English surely not.
§ 608. Of other Interrogative expressions the following may be no-
ticed : // yap ; isn''t it ? ») irov ; surely f dXKo ti »), properly aWo n tanv
7] ; does any thing else happen than f hence, also with ?/ omitted (com-
pare § 626, O&s.), like the Lat. noTvne^ where an affirmative answer is
expected : aXko n r) ddiKov/xEv ; are we not doing wrong f dXXo n ovv
Trdvra ravra dv elrj jiia iTrLarrjfir] ; would not this, then, he all one science ?
ov put in a question also anticipates an affirmative answer, and may
be compared with nonne and the English not. The opposite to it is
/ti77, which may often be translated by surely, as /uwv, formed from fii)
ovv, surely not, always points to a negative answer. /«?) 'AxiXXsa otei
^povricrai Qavdrov /cat Kivdvvov ; surely you do not think Achilles cared
about death and danqer ?
% 609. 3. The indirect question in Greek, according to
§ 520, is by no means clearly distinguished in regard to
Mood from the direct. So likewise the direct Interroga-
tives, pronouns and adverbs, are often used instead of the
mdirect ones : al jwaiKeg iipwTuiv avTovg, Tiveg ehv, the
women asked them who they were (§ 475, ^).
§ 612. THE NEGATIVES; 329
§ 610. 4. The English indirect Interrogative if ox whether
is represented by ci (§ 525, etc.), more rarely by lav (with
the Subj.), sometimes by apa, and in Homer by r) (r]^).
Whether or not or whether jperhajps may be rendered by
}xi]\ (TKOTTttra, £i ciKaitjg \pi](TOfiaL roj Xoytjj, see whether I
sjpeak justly ; opa, /mrj iraiZwv fXtyav, see whether or not he
spoke in jest.
On the subject of tlie Interrogative Sentence being drawn prolej)-
tically into the principal sentence, see §§ 397, 519, 5, Obs. 3.
§ 611. The direct double question (disjunctive question)
is most generally introduced by iroTEpov (iroT^pa) — r), Lat.
utrum — a?i : iroTspov ^idpaKtv rj ov ; Trorepov a/cwv rj sKtJv ;
has he done it or not f %oillingly or unwillingly f In an
indirect double question the same Interrogatives may be
used, but also 1 1 — r), whether — or^ and f iVc — fire : airopov-
fiEVf ure aKiov ht£ kwv di^paKEv, we are in doubt whether
he did it willingly or tonwillingly.
Obs. — The Homeric language has for the direct, but more frequent-
ly for the indirect double question, the conjunctions fi {i^e), r/
(ije) : r} vfifi tv vrje(T(Ti Iloaeiddcjv IddixacTcrev, fj ttov dvdpmoi dvdpeg
kSrjXrjffavT IttI x^P^^ov ; did Poseidon overpower you in your ships, or
have hostile men injured you on land? dire dk jioi ixvrjcTTrjg ciX^ov
l3ovXr]v Tf. voov TS, rii fievet -rrapd TraiSl Kai tfiTreSa Travra (pvXdaaei,
rj fjSri fiiv tyrjuev 'Axaiwv ogrig dpitrrog, tell me the purpose and in-
clination of the wooed wife, whether she remains with the son and
guards all carefully, or whether he who is the best of the Achceans lias
already Tnarried her. ij {ns) is also used for ij (^e) in the second
member.
Chap. XXVI.— The Negatives.
A) Simple. Negatives.
§ 612. Tli# 'Greeks have two diiFerent negatives, ou and
^77. Numerous compounds and derivatives are formed
330 THE NEGATIVES. § 613.
from each, as : ovte, fxr^re, ov^dg, lurjdsig, ovdajuLiog, jUTjSa/iwc.
The principal distinction between ov and fir] is that ov
denies, but ^r) declines. Hence arise the following special
rules :
§ 613. 1. oh is used in all direct statements, whether
the reality of something is denied by the Indicative, or
the possibility or probability of something by the Opta-
tive with av : ^iXiinrog ovk ayei £ipr]vriv, Philij^ does not
inaintain peace • ouic av ayoi dpi]vriv,he would not {will
hardly) maintain peace j ovk av ^vvaio firj Kafxojv evSai-
fwvEiv, you could not he happy without laboring (§ 516).
Obs. — ov is also used in jlie peculiar Subjunctive of tlie Homeric
language mentioned § 513.
2. ov is used in direct questions to which an affirmative
answer is expected (§ 608), but pi] when a negative an-
swer is expected (§ 608).
§ 614. 3. In independent sentences pi] is used with the
Subjwictive (§§ 510, 512), with the Optative of wishing
(§ 514), with the Indicative of wishing (§ 515), and with
the Imperative : prj 9opv(3i](Tr]TE, do not make a disturh-
awie ; prj yivoiTo,may it not happen; Hom. ioq prj w^cXXe
yeviaOai, would it never happened ! pi]-Kor W airp-nKToim
voov t\t, never devote your thoughts to what is imprac-
ticable.
Ods.— In these cases fir} generally corresponds to the Latin m. It
is often used in negative oaths with the Indicative, in so far as
the swearer declines something (§ 612) : Hom. laruj vvv roh Vala
. . . . fxr) di kfi^v ioTijra Uocreiddojv .... Trrifiaivn Tjowag, let Ocea
now hww this . ... not with my consent does Poseidon afflict the
Trojans. * •
§ 615. 4. oi> in general is used in all those dependent
sentences which do not express a negative purpose or
a condition : y^eiv, on ov pa^iov e'/r?, / /meiv it was not
easy / a ovk iare roitg iral^ag ttoihv, ravra avToX Troieire,
what you do not allow your children to do'fotc do your-
selves.
§ G16. THE NEGATIVES. 331
Obs. 1. — In indirect questions ov as well as }ir] may be used with
f I in the sense of whether : aKOTruJixev, \^ irpkirn ri ov, let us consider
whether it is becoming or not ; Treipdaofiai fiaOelv, ei d\r]9eg fj ^f], I
icill try to Imrn whether it is true or not.
Obs. 2.^In such Relative Sentences as contain quite a general idea,
Hi] may be used : a fiij oUa, ovde oloixai eldevai, what I do not hnow,
I do not think I Tcnow.
§ 616. 5. fill in. general is used in all those dependent
sentences in which a negative jpurjpose or a co')idition is
expressed ; hence fxi\ is the negative in sentences denot-
ing intention or jpui^jpose (§ 530), in those indirect Inter-
rogative and Relative sentences where a purpose of hin-
dering is implied, in all the Protaseis of Hypothetical
Periods (^§ 534, etc.), and lastly in Hypothetical Rela-
tive (§ 554) clauses, as well as in Hypothetical Temporal
clauses (§§ 66Q, 557): lav rig Kafiri, napaKoXtig larpov,
oTTwg fxri aTToOavT), when any one is ill., you send for a
physician., that he may not die j •\\jy\<^iaaa^^ Toiavra tS wv
fuLTidiTTOTe vfXLv fiiTafiAnaHy vote for such things as will
never cause yoio to repent \ea quorum numquam vos
poeniteat\ ; opa, ottwc im <yoL airoaTrfbovTai, see that they
do not ahctndon you j i^y]v croi cnriivm Ik rrig ttoXewc? ti
firj ripe(TK6v aoi ol vo/lloi, it was at your choice to leave the
state., if its laws did not please you ; OsacracrOe, tjg aa-
Opov kari irav, o tl av fir) ^tKaiwg y ireirpayixivov, see, hoi^
rotten every thing is, which is not justly done,' fieyicTTti
yiyverai a(i)Tr\pia, orav yvvi) irpbg avSpa jurj ^ixocTTary, it is
the greatest safety when a wife is not at variance with
her husband.
Obs. 1.— In sentences of this kind, sometimes ov is used to negative
a single word ; iravrioQ ovtu)q tx^i, tdv re ov (ptjre lav fe <prJTe, it is
entirely so whether you deny or assert it.
Obs. 2. — The Optative expressing repetition likewise has firj (§ 547).
Obs. 3. — With verbs of fearing, /xr/, like the Latin ne, signifies lest or
thut: dedoiKu. firi iTnXaQMfitda Tfjg olKade 6Sov,Ifear lest we forget
the way home (compare § 533). Even without a governing verb
the fear that something may happen is introduced by /«//, which
in this case is to be translated if only not, or if but not: fii) Itti'
332 . THE NEGATIVES. § 617.
XaBiofieOa Tfjg oiKade oSov, if only we do not forget the way home
(compare §§ 620, 621, and 512).
§ 617. 6. The Infinitive generally has fx{], particularly
when the Infinitive has the article ; raq o/uLolag xapirag /z?)
avTi^i^ovai alaxpov, not to return equal thanks is hase j
aoi TO iir\ (TiyricTai Xolttov ^v, it remained for you not to he
silent.
Obs. 1. — ov may be jDut with the Infinitive after verbs of declaring
and conceiving : ufioXoyoJ ov Kara tovtovq tlvai pi'irwp, I acknoicledge
I am not an orator in tJieir sense.
Obs. 2. — ufQTs, so that, when joined with the Infinitive generally has
fir), more rarely ov.
Obs. 3. — After verbs of hindering, forbidding, refusing, denying, and
others which contain the idea of declining (§ 612), fxrj is usually
added to the Infinitive, and is rendered in English by from, or
not expressed at all: KioXvofxeOa firj ixa9elv,we are hindered from
learning ; i)pvovvTo /xt) TreTrTcoKkvai, they denied having fallen.
§ 618. 7. With PartiGijples fir) is used when they are to
be understood hypothetically, i. e., in the sense of a Hyjpo-
thetical JProtasis {% 583): ouk av Svvaio firj Kafxwv zv^m-
jUGvav, i. e., el /xi) ^/uoig (§ 613); so, likewise, when the
Participle has the article, if it can be resolved into a hypo-
thetical or a hypothetical relative clause : 6 jur) ^apeig av-
6pu)iroQ ov Trai^aveTai, i. e.^ lav rig fir) ^apy, or og av jui)
^apy (§ 583).
Obs. 1. — When firi Is added as a Negative to single words, they are
likewise to be taken hypothetically : to )u/) dyaOov, the not good,
1. €., o av firi ayaQbv y.
Obs. 2. — With Participles as well as with other words //// often oc-
curs as a Negative on account of the prohibitive, declining, or
hypothetical nature of the whole sentence : â– ^r](i>iaa(jQe tov iroXeinov
ixri (pof3r]9evT£Q rb avriKa deivov, determine upon the war without fear-
ing the immediate danger.
B) Several Negatives comhined.
% 619. 1. A Negative is not neutralized by a subsequent
compound Negative of the same kind, but only continued.
In translating, the Negative is employed only o,7ice in En-
§ 621. THE NEGATIVES. 333
glish, and the place of the other Negative is supplied by
an indefinite : Poet, ouk Itcmv ov^lv Kptlaaov rj voiaoi woXei,
there is not any thing hetter for a state than lavjs ; ov^elg
TTWTTorf "EwKparovg ov^lv acrfjSfC ov^e avoaiov ovte irpar-
TovTog ti^Ev, ovre Xiyovrog 7]Kov(Tev, no one ever either saw
Socrates doing or heard him saying any tiding i^n^ious or
unholy.
Obs. — A Negative is neutralized by a subsequent simple Negative
of the same kind : ovSdg dvQpwTrujv dSiKu/v riciv ovk dTro^wo-ei, no
one wTio does wrong will not {I. e., every one will) pay the penalty.
§ 620. 2. ov followed by /z// with the Subjunctive or Fu-
ture Indicative is an emvhatio negative. This mode of
speaking is to be explained by the idea of fear being sup-
plied after ov (compare § 616,6^^^.3): ov jurj noiriaw,
abcTut the same as ov ^ojSrjrtov ju?) iroiriaii), there is no fear
that I shall do it, i. e., I shall certainly not do it : ov'Bhq
firjiroTs evprjcFEi to kut sfxl ov^ev lX\H(l)9iv, no one will ever
find that any thing, as far as defends on me, is neg-
lected j ov /JLYITTOTE t^apvoQ yivtojuai, I shall certainly never
deny.
§ 621. 3. jut) , followed by ov is used in very different
ways :
a) After verbs o^i fearing, julyj ov corresponds to the Lat.
ne no7i or ut, and is to be translated by that no^ ^i^oiKa,
juri ov OtfxiTov y, vereor, ne non justurn sit, I fear that it is
not just (compare § 616, Ohs. 3); also without a governing
verb, jurj ov Oepirov y, if it be but not not right, i. e., if
it be only not wrong (compare § 512, and § 616, Ohs. 3);
Hom. pi\ vv roi ov yjia[G\xy aK.r]Trrpov kcli aTkiipia 0£Oto, the
god^s staff and garland will surely not help you.
J) In indirect questions where p.i} would mean if per-
haps (§ 610), [IT] ov means ^yor whether perhaps not : aOpu
lj,ri ov TovTo y to ayaOov, look- whether perhaps this is not
the good.
Obs. — In the cases adduced under a and 5, fir) is a Negative Con-
junction, and ov the Negative to a special word.
334 THE NEGATIVES. § 622.
c) fjLTi oil is used with the Infinitive after Negative ex-
pressions, in the sense of so as not, or not to : ov^tig ologTs
(iWwg Xijijjv fJLi) ov KarayiXaarTog uvai, 710 one SJ>eaJcing
otherwise is able not to he ridiculous.
d) jurj ov is farther used with the Infinitive after nega-
tive verbs, or questions containing verbs of hindering, for-
bidding, denying, refusing (§ 617, Ohs. 3). The Infinitive
in this case is often preceded by the Article. In English
the negative is not expressed : ov KwXvoiueOa /bLrj ov fiaOaiv,
we are not hindered from learning ^ ixr\ irapijg to ^f/ ov
^paaaiydo not omit saying it / riva out airapvyicrtcrOai /arj
ovxi tTriaraaOaL to. diKaia ; who do yoih think will deny
at all understanding what is just?
Obs. — ov is here only a repetition of the Negative contained in the
principal sentence.
C) 8o7ne Negative Phrases.
§ 622. 1. ovUv, ixn^iv, and ovti, fiini, nothing, are often
used as free Accusatives, like the Latin nihil, meaning
not, not at all / compare § 404, Ohs.
• 2. ouTTw, luyjTTd), not yet, are to be carefully distinguished
from ovKETtj fxrjKhi, no longer : outtw ireiroirjKa, 7%ondum
feci^ ovKtTL iroiqaix), 7%on amjplius faciam.
3. ovy^ri stands for ou Xtyw on, I do not say that, not
. to onention ; /cm ovx on 6 Kpinov ev vrrvxici w, aWa kqX
ol 0fXot avTov, and not to ^mention {i. e., not only) Crito
was quiet, hut his friends also were.
4. pi) on for pi) tiTTd) on (pi) oirayg) means do^i^t suppose,
nedum, by which the mention of something is declined
as unnecessary, and hence may sometimes be translated in
Negative sentences by not only not : pi) on Oeog, aXXa
KOL avOpMTTOi ov (piXovm Toifg aincrTOvvTag, dorH suppose
that only God, hut men also do not love the faithless [non
homines infidos amant ; nedum dens']. In like manner
oux oirijjg, properly not that, donH suppose, may frequent-
- 0^ T!f V •
§ 624. a. THE PARTICLES. 335
ly be rendered in connection with Negatives by not only
not.
5. juLovov ov, jLLovov ovxh ouly not, is equivalent to aU
most, nearly; oorov ov, temporal [tantum. noji], nearly,
almost : KarayeXa vtt' avdpiov ovg av fxovov ov TrpogKVveig,
you are ridiculed hy men whom you almost worship.
6. o\) fxrjv or ov fxivroi aWa, however, notwithstanding,
is to be explained by an ellipsis: 6 iWoc iiiKpov Ikuvov
\^iTpayj]Kia^v ' ov fiiiv (viz., l^iTpax<]\i(Tiv) aWa lirifiuvw
6 Kvpogy the horse nearly threw him off, {did) not, however,
hut Cyrus Icejpt his seat.
On ovTt, fXijTs, ov^e, /nrj^i, § 625.
Chap. XXVIL— The Particles.
§ 623. Particles are also indeclinable words which serve
partly to connect sentences, partly to give emphasis to
particular parts of a sentence, and to enliven language.
The Particles which serve to connect sentences are called
Conjunctions ; those which give prominence to particular
parts of a sentence, or impart animation by making entire
sentences prominent, are called eniphatic particles.
In regard to position, they are either prepositive, i. e.,
take the first place in a sentence, or postpositive, i. e., al-
ways stand after at least one other word in a sentence.
Obs. — The Conjunctions are divided into various classes according
to their meaning. Several Conjunctions, however, belong equal-
ly to different classes. They will be arranged according to their
original or primitive signification.
A) Conjunctions.
Preliminary Kemark.
§ 624. a. The Conjunctions are here enumerated without
regard to the formal relation of sentences to one another
(§ 519). But
336 THE PARTICLES. § 624.
1. Co-ordination is implied in all Copulative and Dis-
junctive Conjunctions, the Adversative Conjunctions with
the exception of ojutjQf which is used principally in the
Apodosis, among the Causal Conjunctions yap, and all Illa-
tive Conjunctions except logre ;
2. Subordination is implied in all the rest.
Ods. — Much more rarely than in modern languages, more rarely
also than in Latin, is one word or one sentence added to another
in Greek without some Conjunction. The Asyndeton (davv^ETov,
want of connection) takes place more frequently only in an Epex-
egesis (s7re?]7yr/(ng), i. e., a subsequent explanatory addition to some-
thing already alluded to in the previous sentence : elfii ng yeXolog
larpoQ ' iojusvog /xEiZov to vofftjfia ttoiw, / am an odd physician ; Tyy
curing the disease I make it worse. Wherever the Asyndeton oc-
curs in other cases, the speaker generally intends to produce a
special effect by it.
I. Cojpulative Conjunctions.
§ 624. h. 1. The two Copulative Conjunctions are »cat,
which in general corresponds to the Latin et^ and the post-
positive, enclitic ri, which in general corresponds to the
Latin que. The language of poetry has besides i^St and
'tSf , with the meaning and [compare atgue\,
2. The Greeks, like the Romans, are fond of expressing
the idea of addition in two connected parts of a sentence,
either by Kai — Kai or rt — jcat, or rk — rk : koli Kara yfjv koX
Kara OaXacrcrav, both hy land and by water / Hom. ^ krpu^ai
r£ Koi aXXoL evKvri]Ln^eg ^Axaioi, ye AtridcB as well as ye
other well-greaved Achmans ; Hom. mil yap tol epig re
(j)i\ri TToXefioL re ficixat n^^for strife is always jpleasant to
you, and wars and battles. We may farther add the Epic
rifikv — r]^k, as well — as also.
Obs. — In single instances we also find rk — ^£, where the second
member is made more prominent by contrast.
3. Kai has, moreover, the meaning also : Hom. Trajo' tfjioiye
»cai aXXof, oi K£ fXB Tiiinaovai, with me are also others^ who
will honor me.
§ 625. THE PARTICLES. 337
In this sense, also, Km is frequently used in both the
connected parts of a sentence : koI rj/buv ravra ^oku air^p
KCLL P^aaiku, we also ajpjprove the same thing as the Jcing
{does also). The meaning also by intensification becomes
even : kol Xiav, even verij much / and in the opposite case
even hut : kol (5paxvv xpovov, eve?i lut a short ti?ne. koi
^i answers to the English and also : ^iKaiov kol irpiirov ^l
cLfia, just and at the smne time also hecoming.
After words of resemblance or likeness Kai means as :
oiuLoiwg Kai, ceque ac.
4. aXXwg re Kai properly means " both in other respects, and also ;"
it serves to give prominence to the subsequent word or words, and
may be translated by especially: x«X£7rov tan dia(5aivHv rdv Trorafiov
dXXojQ re kuI TroXefiiujv 7roXKu>v ejyvg ovtmv^ it is difficult to cross the river^
especially as many of the enemy are near. kuI Srj Kai is used to make
the last part of a series emphatic : Herod. Kpoiaov jiamXEvovroQ din-
KvkovTai kg 'EdpSiQ dXXoi re oi ttcivteq Ik Ttjg 'EXXddog ao(pi(TTai^ Kai di^ Kai
SoXwv, during the reign of Crcesus there came from Hellas doth all the
other wise men and especially Solon [Lat. cum — tum\
5. In the Epic Dialect re is frequently employed to indicate the
agreement not only of separate parts of a sentence, but of whole sen-
tences, often, too, in connection with other Particles, such as Kai, /^ev,
^g, aWo^and with relatives (ogT^, oaogrE). In these cases re must gen-
erally tlpleft untranslated or rendered by an unaccented also : Horn.
og K€ QioTg tTrnrsiOijTai fidXa r tKXvov avTov, wlwever oheys the gods they
greatly listen to him also.
m Obs. — The re in we«, olocre, which occurs also in prose, is of the
same origin.
6. The rising climax^is also expressed by ov fiovov —
aXXa Kai, not only — hut also. On 6i>x ort, firi otl, ov\
oirwg, see § 622.
§ 625. 1. The* Particles ov^i, fxtj^i and ours, jui^rg, serve
to form a negative series. Two different meanings belong
to ouSt and luri^if viz. :
a) nor either, and not / in this sense they are used to
connect a single member of a sentence "v^lh a preceding
one negatively : Hom. jS/ow/irjc ov\ a-KT^ai ovde iroTriTog,
you touch not meat nor drinJc either / Trpog gov ovS' Ijjlov
(l)pa<no, to your advantage and not to mine I will speah.
P
338 THE PARTICLES. § 626.
h) also not, not even : IXttIZ^io oy^l tovq iroX^fiiovq imeveiv
hiy I hope that the enemy also will not longer stay ; ovdt
TovTo l^rjv, not even this was allowed [ne hoc quidem lice^
hat\
2. ovre — ovte, jurfre — luiire, are used with mutual refer-
ence to each other, and may be translated neither — nor :
Horn. our£ TTor Iq noXeiiiov TrwXeaicfro, ovre ttot uq ayoprjv,
he neither went to war nor to the assemhly. Sometimes
a negative member of a sentence is brought into relation
with a positive one by means of omz or iiixri: — rk [Latin
neqtce — et~\: wfxoaav fxi]Tt irpodwcreiv aXXr^XovQ GVfi}xa\OL
T£ £(7£o-0a(, they sivore not to betray one another and to he
allies.
Obs. — If something else be added to two members connected by
owre — ovre, or iitjte — /wjjre, it may be done by oUk^ fxrjSe. When,
on the contrary, ovSe or i.ir)Ss corresponds to a preceding ovre or
IxrjTE, it must be called an irregularity (compare re — ^e, § 634, 2,
» Ods.), and the member thus added is emphatic : dXXd yap ovre
TovTOJv ovdsv i(TTiv oXijGeg, ovde y' et rivog dKrjKoaTe^ wg lyoj TraiSeveiv
ETTtxeipw dvOpwwovg, but neither is any of these things true, nor even
if you have heard from any one that I undertalce to train men.
II. Disjunctive Conjunctions. ^
§ 626. 1. rj, carefully to be distinguished from ^ (§§ 643^
607), means #
a) or, and in this sense is often doubled : rj — ?/, either —
or, for which i'^tol — rj is used wh^ greater emphasis is to
be given to the first member of a sentence : r\ aoroc tiq v
Ktvog, either some citizen or a' stranger.
h) than, after comparatives and comparative adjectives
like aXXoQ, alius; Evepog, alter ; Zia^opoq, different ; Iv-
avTLog, opposed to, etc. : tlvl av jiaXXov iriaTivaaipL rj aoi ;
whom should I trust more than you f ovSlv aXXo tirirr]'
^avovaiv rj cnr&SvricFKeiv, they think upon nothing else than
dying.
Obs. — After TrXeov (TrXeTor, contracted TrXelv), m&re, and tXaTToi^, pelov,
less, 7) is sometimes omitted with numerals, just as quam is after
§ 629. THE PARTICLES. 339
plus : tTij yeyovwg ttXhov ejSdoixfiKovTa, more than seventy years old
[plus septuaginta annos natus]. The same is the case also after
dXKo Ti in questions (§ 608).
§ 627. 2 EiT£ — are, tavre — eavre, are used like the Latin
sive — sive, when it is to be left undecided which of two
sides is to be chosen : arc aXr^Otg sire xpev^ogf ov koXov jioi
^OKH TovTo Tovvojua ^x^iv, whethev true or false ^ it seems to
Trie not fair to have this name.
III. Adversative Conjunctions.
§ 628. 1. ?i expresses so slight a contrast or opposition
that^ though it is generally rendered by hut, it may also,
and especially in Horn., be translated by and. The Greeks,
however, also like to indicate the first of two sentences
which are contrasted to one another, and this they do by
fiiv, in truth, truly, indeed ; but it may often be left un-
translated: Horn. aWoL juEV pa Oeoi re KaX avipig iinro-'
KopvaraX ev^ov Travvv\ioi, Aia S' owk exe vri^viuog vTTvog, the
other gods, indeed, and the horse-hair crested men slept
through the night, hut sweet sleep did not hold Zeus.- As
here, jiiv — St express a contrast, so elsewhere they indicate
only a difference : AapEiov /cm UapvaaTidog yiyvovrai iraX^tg
^vo, 7rpE(TJ3vTepog fxlv 'A/ora^fp^Tjc, vewrepog ^l Kvpog, Darius
and Pary satis had two children, the elder Artaxerxes, the
younger Cyrus; Horn. Trspt plv f5ov\y Aavaiov TTEpX S' eare
fiax^adm, in council on the one hand, and in hattle on the
other, you are distinguished among the Danai.
Obs. — In Homer an Apodosis also may be opposed to its Protasis
by means of ^s, especially when the Protasis is introduced by a
temporal conjunction : 'iujq 6 ravQ' wpfiaive Kara <ppeva Kal Kara
Ovfiov, i/XOE 6' 'AOrtvT], while he pored on this in his mind and spirit
Athene came. This is founded on a combination of co-ordination
and subordination. Compare § 519, 1 and 5, Obs.
% 629. 2. aWa, yet, hut (originally Ace. Plur. Neut. of
aWog), denotes a stronger contrast than Se : Horn. tvQ''
aXXot fxlv TravTEg sTrsw^rj/xrjo-av 'A^a<ot — aXX ouk 'ArpctSr^
^ Aya/aepvovi T]v^ave Qvpt^y, aSXa KUKiog a(f)iei, then all the
340 THE PARTICLES. § 630.
other AchcBans assented, yet it did not meet the feelings
of Atrides Agamemnon, hut he harshly dism^issed him.,
Qlg^ 1, — After a hypothetical sentence either expressed or under-
stood, aXXd^ sometimes with a strengthening ye added to it, may
frequently be rendered by Imt or yet at least : d firj rravra, dXXd
TToXXd Y laTs, if not all, yet you hnow at least much ; Poet. t5 Qtol
-TraTp^oi (7vyysv£(T6s y dXXd vvv, oh gods of my fathers, he with me at
least now [if not before].
Obs. 2. — dXXd frequently serves to break off a long discussion and
emphatically to introduce a request : Horn. dXXd iriBEaQt kuI vfifiee,
lut do you also follow me.
Obs. 3. — After negatives dXX ?; or dXXd alone means except : dpyvpwv
fitv ovK tx(^ d\X' fi fiLKpov Tijlhave no money except a little. On ou
firfv oKkd, § 622, 6.
§ 630. Other Conjunctions which point out a contrast or
a transition to something diiFerent are :
3. av, avT£, properly again, then on the other hand, yet.
4. Horn, avrap, and arap, hut, on the contrary, yet.
5. jUEVToi, certainly, however, see § 643^ 13,
6. KaiToiy and yet, still.
7. ojuwg, nevertheless, yet, denotes a strong contrast [Lat.
tamen, nihilominus']. On ojuwc as a supplement to a par-
ticiple, § 587, 5.
IV. Conjunctions of Comparison.
§ 631. 1. w(,', as (Lat. ut),
is properly the adverb of oc, ri, o. It differs in accent from
wg, so or thus (§ 99), except when in poets and the Homeric
Dialect it is placed after the word compared (§ 98, a), in
which case it is oxytone : 7raTi)p wg ijiriog ^£v, he was gen-
tle as a father. Like the Lat. ut, it is employed in very
different ways :
a) In its original C07nparative sense wg means as or how,
and is used in comparisons : wg J^ovXei, as you wish; fia-
Kpov iog ytpovrijfarfor me an old man (Lat. tanquam)-,
Horn, wc fJiOL ^i\ETaL KUKov EK KaKov aid (how with me one
evil always follows another, Lat. quam); with superlatives
§ 632. THE PARTICLES. 341
like the Lat. quam : w^ TaxKyTa, guam celevTime^ as quick-
ly as possible (compare otl). In statements of number and
measure it means about ^ nearly : wc V^Ka, about ten ^ ojg
lin TO Tro\v,for the most part ; with verbs of motion or
action it indicates what is merely intended, apparent : air^qu
(oq HQ TovQ TToXeiLLiovg, he went away in the direction of the
eneifny (as if he went against the enemy) ; hence it occurs
^ith. participles in the manner described § 588. On its
use with the Infinitive, § 564, and on wg as a preposition,
§450.
h) In a temporal sense w^ means when^ as soon as (com-
pare Lat. ut) : Hom. wg ei^\ log fxiv juaWov t^v x^^^oc, when
he saw him, ancjer pierced him the onore j wg ra^iaTa 'iwg
vir^c^aiv^v, IQvovro, as soon as dawn appeared, they sacri-
ficed [Lat. ut pTimum\
c) In a causal sense wg means as (Latin quum), since,
and with subsequent statement of the reason, j^?' .• Kojuai
(70V TTapafXHvaiy wg lyw r\^iaTa aKOvaaifXL aov, I beg you to
stay here, as I should hear you with the greatest pleas-
ure,
6?)» After verbs of saying and declaring wg means that:
riK^v ayyeW(i)v Tig, u)g 'EXarem KaretXrjTrrat, 807ne one came
announcing that Elatcea has been tahen. § 526, b.
e) wg is rarely used in a consecutive sense, so that (wgTs).
f) In 2^ final sense a>c means in order that : wg firj navTeg
o\(i)VTai, in order that all may not perish. Compare § 530,
etc.
g) On wg expressing a wish (Lat. utinami), see § 514.
§ 632. 2. wgirep, as,
is only a strengthenecl'^wc (compare § 641, 3), and is used
only in a comparative sense.
3. oirwg, how, that, in order that,
is principally used as a final Conjunction, and may then
B42 THE PARTICLES. § 633.
be translated by that^ or in order that^ compare § 530, etc.
On ovx oTTwc, § 622, 4.
4. a)OT£, as, so that,
bas rarely tbe comparative meaning as, generally tbe con-
secutive so that, when it is followed either by an Infinitive
or a finite verb. Compare § 5^5.
5. Hom. ^i5rc, as, just as,iike, only in comparisons.
§ 633. V. Declarative Conjunctions,
1. OTL, that, because [Lat. quod^,
is originally nothing but the Neuter of the pronoun oqtlq,
6 ri, on the distinction of which from on, compare § 214,
Obs. 2. Like the Latin quod, on has two principal mean-
ings, the declarative that and the causal because.
a) on means that after verbs of saying and declaring
(compare § 525) : 'HpaKXeiTog Xiyei, on iravra x^P^^ '^"^
ov^lv juiveif Ileraclitus says that every thing moves, and
nothing is stationary. Hence the phrase S^Xov on (also
written SrjXovori), it is clear that, manifestly.
Obs. — Sometimes, also, a direct speech is introduced by on, so that
the Conjunction is, as it were, a mere sign of quotation : ISrjXov
r) ypacpf], on QEfiicrroKXrjg ^kw Trapd gs, the letter Stated (that) I The^
mistocles am come to you.
b) because, that [Lat. quod^ : Hom. x^ojuevog, or api-
arov ^Axaiiov ovSlv tncrag, angry that you have not hon-
ored the best of the Achceans.
The use of oti (or o ri) with a superlative deserves at-
tention : on raxK^ra like mq raxK^ra, as quickly as possi-
ble/ and on ju//, except, besides : ovk riv Kprivrj on fxrj juiia,
there was no fountain except one,0
2. ojg, that, § 631, d.
3. gioTf, that, § 636, 2.
4. ovveKa, that, § 636, 3.
§ 635. THE PARTICLES. 343
yi. Temporal Conjunctions.
§ 634. (Respecting the Moods, see § 6oQ, etc.)
1. oTi, oiroTE, whe?i, as \_qtm?ido, cum] : orav, oTrorav,
when^ if : r/v ttotc \p6voq, ore Otol /jlv ^<jav, Ovrjra ^l yivrj
ovK riv, there once was a time when gods existed^ hut moi'-
tal races did not exist ; Horn, ol ^' ore h) XijiivoQ iroXv-
(ievOiog ivTog *Ikovto, iGTia fxlv (rrdXavro, hut when they got
within the deep harbor they furled the sails, ore and
oTTorc with the Optative, according to § 558, Ohs. 1, mean
whenever, as often as : Horn. Ivda irapog Koifiad' ore jullv
jXvKvg vTTvog iKavoi, where formerly he used to lie down
whenever sweet sleep came upon him. Sometimes ore has
the causal meaning since.
2. Hom. £ur£ = orf.
3. riviKa, oTtriviKa, when, at the time when (§ 217), de-
notes rather a point of time : -qviKo. r\v ^aiXri, eK(nr(vr}g tiri-
<l>aLvovTai OL TroXijULOi, when it was evening the enemy sud-
denly appeared.
4. riiioQ, poet, when :
Horn. ii]\iOQ d' 7]sXiog ji'taov ohpavbv afx^ilSefSTjKei, Kai Tore Si) xpycreta
Trarijp iriTaive raXavra^ lolien (at the moment) the sun liad entered
mid heaven, just then the father raised the golden scales.
•
§ 635. 5. lird, (Tfter, when, as : linav, lirriv, lirav, lohen ;
Hom. avrap liru Trocriog koX k^rjTvog l^- tpov fVro, hut when
they had quenched the desire for food and drinh ; YJvpoq
vTricTXsro av^pl licaorq^) ^(xxjelv Trivrs apyvpiov fxvaq, lirav
elg BajivXiova t]K(i)(Tiv, Gyrus promised to give each man
five silver mince when they should come to Bahylon. iizu
frequently introduces a reason, and then is to be translated
by hecause or for : Hom. aXXa TrWiaOe kol vfifiegf Ittel
TrELOerrOai afiuvov, hut do you also ohey me, for it is hetter
to ohey.
6. eTTEi^T], now since, since : liru^avy when, is liru strength-
ened by §// (§ 642), and points more strongly to the reason
y = tojg.
344 THE PARTICLES. § 636.
assigned than eird : iTreidrj aveujxOri to ^Eo-juwr/jjotov, tig-
riXdoiuLEv, now si7ice the prison was opened we entered.
7. EU)g, as long as, till [qioamdm, duin, done(i\ : twc £Tt
kXirig, as long as there is still hope; TnpL^^ivoji^v iujg avoi-
xOdrj TO ^E(Tiuiii)Ti]piov, we waited till the prison shoidd he
opened,
8. iCJTS.
9. fJi^xP'-f ^XP'- (compare § 455
10. poet, ocjipa, as long as, till :
Horn, o^pa fikv i]u)g r/v, as long as it was morning; Horn, ix^i kotov,
o^pa TtXkaay^ he nurses wrath till hefuljills it. o<ppa is very often
a Particle of purpose or intention, and then to be translated by
that^ in order that : Horn. 6<ppa fii) dlog aykpaarog Iw, in order that
I may not de alone unhxmored.
11. TTpiv, hefore, sooner \_priusquam] (compare § 565),
is joined sometimes with the Infinitive, sometimes with a
finite verb. Its original adverbial meaning, previously y
earlier, has been preserved, especially in to it pivy formerly.
In Hom. the Conjunction irpiv may refer back to the ad-
verb TTpiv : ouS' 6y£ TTpIv AavaoXcTiv auKia Xoiyov clttmctei,
irpiv y* ctTTo Trarpi ^tX({^ dojuevai tXiKwiri^a Kovprjv, and he
will not avert the dreadful suffering from the Danai he-
fore they have given hacJc the quick-eyed maiden to her
father,
12. Trapoc, Hom. =:7r|0tV. •
VII. Causal Conjunctions,
§ 636. 1. oTLy § 633, h,
2. Iloti, hecause, properly ^la tovto oTi,for this reason
that, or that,
3. ouvEKa, hecause, poet., from ov fvsKa, for tovtov fvtjca
oTiffor this reason that ; hecause, also declarative that.
So likewise oOovvsKa from orou (ovrtvoc) cvfKa.
4. IttsI, § 635, 5.
5. ore, § 634, 1.
6. yap (always postpositive),yc»7', namely, to wit. Spe-
cial peculiarities in the use of yap are :
§ 637. THE PARTICLES. 345
a) In animated discourse the sentence containing a rea-
son is often put before the one for which the reason is
given, especially after a Vocative : Horn. 'Arpd^r], ttoXXoi
yap TeOvaai KaprjKO/uLOWVTeg ^A-)(aLOi — no aa )(pri ttoXs/jlov
iraixrai, Atrides,for many rich-Imired Achceans have died,
therefore you ought to jput an end to the war.
h) By namely, yap may be translated when it introduces
the substance of a speech or opinion before announced, so
especially after TSKfiripiov SI, jiaprvpiov di (supply l(jTi),fo'r
that there is a jproof, a testimony.
c) In answers yap may often be rendered by yes, cer-
tainly, but must in reality be explained by an ellipsis :
aywvKjriov fjilv apa r]fuv irpog Toifg avdpag ; avayKt] yap,
i^r]y 7nust we then contend with the Tnen f yes, it is nee-
essary, said he — the complete answer would be, we must
contend, for it is necessary.
d) In anima^ questions yap serves to give emphasis
like the Lat. ncmi : tl yap ; quidnam f how so f ^ yap ;
ov yap ; is it not so f ttCjq yap ov ; how could it he other-
wise f u yap is the Lat. utinam. oKka yap [at eniml
corresponds to the English hut surely ; ov yap aWa prop-
erly : for it is not so, hut, hence however.
WII. Inferential Conjunctions.
§ 637. 1. apa (Ep. ap and enclitic pa, poet, also apa,
postpositive), then, therefore, accordingly, always refers to
something known or resulting from what has gone before.
It is most frequently used in Homer to connect sentences
slightly: loq ap e(pr^,thus then he spoke; ^Arpeidrig S* apa
vna Oorjv aXa^e irpoipvaaav, and Atrides accordingly drew
the fleet ship to the sea (as was to be expected), ovk apa
often means not forsooth, u apa if then or if perhaps, and
in indirect questions whether perhaps:
On the Interrogative apa, % 607, h.
2. ovv (New Ion. wv, postpositive), then, consequently, is
P2
346 THE PARTICLES. § 638.
more emphatic than apa : Horn, rirot voaTog aTrwXfro ira-
rpog tfxoio ' ovt ovv ayyeXiy £rt TrdOofiai, el ttoOev tXOot,
ovre OeoTTpoTrir^g efiirdZofiai, surely my father's return is
lost, therefore I no longer believe a message, if one comes
from any where, nor concern myself about prophecy, plv
ovv (compare § 643, 12), no doubt, certainly, well then;
3' ovv, certainly; a AX' ovv, but certainly ;. yap ovv, yet
surely. When joined to relatives, ovv has the generalizing
meaning of the Lat. cungue : oqtiqovv, whoever, guicungue
(§§ 218, 600).
By combination with ovv we obtain the Negative oi^/c-
ovv, not then, to be carefully distinguished from ovkovv,
which is properly an Interrogative, not then f but as an
affirmative answer is expected after an interrogative with
ov (§ 608), it has acquired \h^ positive meaning, therefore,
accordingly, now : ovkovv tfioiye ^0KH,hence Ido not think
so; Poet, ovfcouv orav ^rj fjirj adivix),'iTe'irav(TOiiai, well, then,
I will cease when I really have no stroicMk.
3. vvv (enclitic, postpositive), a weakened vvv, corre-
sponds to the unaccented English now,
4. Toivvv, hence, therefore, surely, is a vvv strengthened
by the assuring tol (§ 643, 10).
5. ToiyapySO then, therefore, yet ; more emphatic roiyap-
TOi, Toiyapovv. ^
6. (ogrs, SO that, § 632, 4.
IX. Final Conjunctions.
.^ (Respecting the Moods, § 530, etc.)
§ 638. 1. *lva, that, in order that, in order to [Lat. ut\,
as an adverb also signifies ivhere in a relative sense and in
indirect questions : o^x opag "iv d kukov ; do you not see
in what (position of) evil you are? tVa -as a Particle of
purpose is elliptical in \va ri ; where yhr^TaL must be sup-
plied, i. e., that what may happen? whyf
§ 639. THE particles; 347
On 2, wg and
3. oTTwc, see §§ 631, 632, 3. •
4. oippa, § 635, 10.
5. fii] = ljat. ne, that 7iot, in order that not, §§ 530,
etc., 614 ; after verbs of* fearing, § 616, Ohs. 3.
X. Hypothetical Conjunctions.
(Kespecting the Moods, § 535, etc.)
§ 639. 1. a, if,
in indirect questions whether, § 610 ; in wishes (where a^t,
u ^dp are also used), if only ^ if hut, § 514. Observe also
u iii] in the sense of except, like the Lat. nisi: rifuv ov^iv
i(TTiv ayaBov aXXo el firj oTrXa kol apirri, we have no other
good except weapons and valor ; £t ixr\ f(, nisi si, unless ;
tlirep, siquidenif if indeed, certainly if, contains aji em-
phatic assurance : Poet. i\ Koi yeyrtOtbg ravr ad Xi^nv ^o-
KEig ; HTTEp TL y tan t7]q aXrjOeiag adivoQ, do you really
thinJc you ivill always speah thus joyously f (answer) if
indeed (certainly if) there is any force in truth.
2. laVf i. e., u av (ay, I'lv), if/
in indirect questions, whether, § 610.
3. av, I suppose, perhaps (postpositive),
always denotes that something may happen only under
certain conditions, and hence is often untranslatable.
On av with the (potential) Optative, § 516.
" " (hypothetical) Indicative, § 537.
'' ^^ Indicative, denoting repetition, § 494.
Future Indicative, § 500, Obs.
'' " Subjunctive with relatives, § 554.
'' '' " with particles of time, §557.
« '' Infinitive, §§ 575, 576.
" " Participles, § 595.
Obs. — dv is often used twice in the same clause : ovk av dpOcig ovd'
vyiCJQ 6 TOVTO TTOirjirag Trepi ovSevbg dv XoyiaaiTO, Tie wTw did this WOvld
not^ I suppose Judge correctly or soundly about any thing.
348 THE PARTICLES. § 640.
4. Horn. KB, dv (enclitic and postpositive) is used almost entirely
like dv.
XI. Concessive Conjunctions,
§ 640. 1. el Kai (iav Kai), if even, although,
denotes a simple concession : poet. ttoXiv, tl kol ju?) j3Xt-
ireig, (ppovug S' ofnog, olq. vocrt^ ^vveartv, though you have
not sight, yet you are aware in what misery the city is
involved.
2. KOI el {kol eav, kuv), even if, even though,
denotes an emphatic concession, like etiamsi : riyeiTO av-
^p6g ehai ayaOov ^(^eXcTv roifg (piXovg, kol el jurjSac M^'XXot
eiaeadai, he deemed it to helong to a good man to benefit
his friends, even if no one should hnow it,
05s.— The distinction between d Kai and Kai ci consists mainly in
the former giving the emphasis of the Kai to the Protasis, the
latter to the Apodosis. Hence the meaning is in many cases al-
most the same.
3. Kuiirep with the participle, § 587, 5. '
In the Apodosis, the Concessive Conjunctions are often followed
by ofidjg, notwitMtanding, § 630, 7.
B) Particles of Emjphasis,
§ 641. 1. ye (enclitic and postpositive), at least [Latin
quideifn\, gives the word before it greater weight, and is
often represented in other languages merely by a more
emphatic accent on the word to which ye is attached:
Horn, eiirep yap "Ektwjo ye kqkov koX avaXKida (jtrjcrei, aXX
ov ireiaovrai Tptjeg,for if Hector shall call (you) hase
and effeminate, yet the Trojans will not believe (it) ;
Horn. aXXa av, el ^vvacrai ye, Trepi(T\eo irai^og, but do you,
if you can, protect your son; tovto ye oip.ai vfiag airavrag
ytrOriaOai, this at least I think you all have perceived;
Horn. oTig roiavra ye peZ,oi, whoever should do such things,
ye is very frequently affixed to pronouns : tywyt, ego qid-
§ 642. THE PABTICLES. 349
dem^ oye (Horn, he^ he sjpecially) ; o'cyf strengthened o'c,
qui quidem,
2. yovv (postpositive), at least [Lat. certe'], is compound-
ed of Y£ and ovv, and hence more emphatic than ye alone.
3. Trip (enclitic and postpositive),^''^^^, exactly, very,
shortened from the adverb tte/oi, very{% 466), serves to give
precision to the relative : ogir^p (§ 218), the very one who ;
u)QTrip,just as. In Homer it is added to participles in a
sense similar to that of Kalirep (§ 587, 5) : ^rjS' ovTU)g aya-
Oog irep lu)v OEOEiKiX 'Ax^AXtv icXeTrrt vo(jj, he not so stealthy
in jpurpose, divine Achilles, though you are so very noble
{ironical).
§ 642. 4. ^7] {certainly, to he sure, well then, therefore),
points to what is ohviotcs in a single idea or in a whole
sentence. ^{\ is used principally in three ways :
a) to emphasize single words : irota Igtlv a r)fxaq wtpeXsi ;
vyieia koI Icrxvg koi KoXXog koX irXovrog ^r/, what kind of
things are those which benefit us f health, and strength,
and beauty, and, certainly, wealth • ^riXa S77, to he sure if
is clear ; vvv hpar^ ^7), now you surely see ; aye ?»), well!
come ; tI h) ; what then f p.akiaTa St}, very much so, at the
beginning of an apodosis ; kox tote S//, now, just then. On
KOL ^ Kai, § 624, 4.
h) to confirm a sentence by referring to what precedes :
Tov fxlv ^rj TrifXTTu, him, then, he sends ; Poet, ot rrjXiKoi^e
KOL dida^ojULecrOa ^i) ^poveiv irpog avdpog rriXiKOvda ; we even
at such an age are, then (according to the preceding
speeches), to he taught wisdom by a man of such an
age? (og \v nvi ^povpii. lapev ol avOpwiroi, kol ov ^h 3?)
tavTov Ik TovTYig \vuv, we men are, as it were, placed
at some post, and it is therefore not proper to aban-
don it.
c) referring to time, very much like the particle of time,
rjt^r], Lat. jam : Kai rroXka ^i) aXXa Xi^ag eIttS, and after
having already stated m<iny other things, he said ; vvv ^ri,
350 THE PARTICLES. § 643.
just now, Horn, ra S/) vvv wavra TeXnTai, all that is Just
now being done.
5. drjTTov, surely, I suppose, also SrjTrovOev,
is often used ironically in assertions which admit of no reply :
Tpk<p^Tai dk ^vxr) rivi ; fiaOrjfiaai Sr)7rov, the soul IS rwurished lyy loJiat?
(answer) surely lyy learning. H Sjjttov, well, then, what do you sup-
6. dfjra, certainly,
negative ov SrjTa, certainly not ; tL drjTa, well ! what then f
7. ^yiBev, clearly, evidently.
8. ^al,
another form of ^7';, but only used in questions: H ^ai; well!
what? liow so?
§ 643. 9. ?], verily^ truly
(to be distinguished from ?J, or^ than^ § 626), strengthens
an assurance, r] }i{]v (Horn, r] fxiv) is the common form
of an oath : wfioaav opKovg i) fxriv fxrj fxvr](jLKaKi](juv, they
swore that they would truly not cherish revenge. On the
Interrogative n, §§ 607, 608.
In Homer ?] is appended to lird and rt, to add strength
to them : Ittu r], ri i], for which also lirui], nrf is written.
10. Toi (enclitic and postpositive), I assure yon, let me tell you.
ovToi, truly not; strengthened forms: roiyap, roiyapovv, roiyapTOi
(§ 637, 5).
11. I'lToC, xerily, faith (j) and toi),
serves as a naive assurance in Epic poetry: i'lTot 07 wf dirwv kut
ap eZsTo, now when Tie had so spolcen he sat down.
On the disjunctive iiToi — ?}, either, or, see § 626, a.
12. fxi]v (Hom. iiav, juh), verily, truly [Latin verum,
vero],
Hom. ojde yafy t^epiu), /cat jur)^ rertXeaiuivov tarai^for SO
will I sjpeah out, and truly it will he fulfilled; ri ////v ;
why! what? lohy not? (compare § 404, Ol)S.\
13. luLtvToiy yet, however, certainly, Lat. vero,
from fiiv, the weaker form of /ulyjv : eg Olvia^ag liTTparevcrav
Kol tTToXlO^OVV, ov jlivTOL u\6v JBy ClXX aVE\d)pt)(TaV ItT
oiKov, they made an expedition against (Eniadce, and he-
§ 643. THE PARTICLES. 351
sieged it j yet they did not conquer it, hut returned
home,
14. vaiy yea, in fact.
15. VI} y truly,
followed by the names of gods in the Accusative, who are
invoked as witnesses in an oath : vr) Am, hy Zeus.
16. fia, truly,
in negative oaths: oh fxa Am, 7io, hy Zeus; also in positive
ones, when val precedes : vol fxa Ala, truly hy Zeus (§ 399,
Ohs.).
17. Horn. er]v (enclitic), truly ^ surely,
similar to the Attic dti-n-ov (§ 642, 5), often with an ironical mean-
ing : ow 9r]V fiiv ttoXiv avTig dvrjcTEi Ovfiog dyrivojp vukuuv (iamXrjag,
his courageous heart will surely not again incite him to taunt
ENGLISH INDEX.
(The numbers indicate the §, not the pages.)
ABODE.
«'^6ode,"to be supplied, 411
Absolute Genit., 428 ; 584—
Ace, 586.
Abstracts in the Plur., 362,
Obs.— mostly Fem., 103.
Accent, 17, etc. — General
rules, 79, etc. — of Nouns,
107, etc.; 118; 123; 148 —
of Comparatives, 171 — of
Pron., 207 — Irregularities
in the declensions, 121 ;
123; 131; 133; 142; 163;
166; 181 ; 183— in Adverbs,
201; 165 — in Verbs, 229;
331, etc. — in the Strong
Aor., 255— in the Perf.,
276; 284- in the Strong
Pass. Stem, 293 — irreg.,
332, etc. — in derivation,
340, Obs. 4, etc.
Accusative, orig. ending, 173,
Obs. — meamng, 395 — of
the outer obj., 396, etc.— of
the inner obj., 400, etc —
of double obj., 402, etc.— of
the predicate, 403 — free
Ace, 404, etc.— Adverbial,
201 ; 203 ; with Prep., 447, 1
—with the Inf., 567, etc.
"Accustomed to," expressed
by Aor. and Imperf. Ind.,
with !iv, 494, Obs. 1.
"Acquainted with," or "ig-
norant of," with Genit.,
414, 3.
Action, Suffixes for, 342.
Active, 476 — Act., Mid., Pass,
meaning, 328.
Acute Accent, 17 ; 80, etc.—
87 2
"Adapted for" Suffix, 351.
Adjectives, decleiis.,114:; 126;
154; 164, etc. — Compar.,
197— Genders, ISO, etc.— of
3 Endings, 185, etc of 2
Endings, 182; 189 — of 1
Ending, 190— Derived, 350
— Contr., 183— Subs, fem.,
127, 4— with Art., 379— fol-
low the Genit., 412, Obs.
Adverbs, 201, etc. — Correla-
tive, 217, etc. — Num. Adv.,
ATTRIBUTE.
223— with the Art., 379-
as Adject., 382.
"Aim," expressed by Ace
406.
Alphabet, B.
Anastrophe, 90.
Aorist, weak, with transitive
meaning, 329— with «, 310
— strong with intransitive
meaning, 329— of proverbs
andgnomes,494 — Ind., 492,
etc. — in Condit. sentences,
543— in Condit. sentences,
. 539 ; 541— Moods, 495, etc.
— Subj. in cond. sent., 545,
Obs. 1— Opt. and Inf. 497
—Part., 496.
Apoco2}e, 64, D.
Apostrophe, 15; 64; 65, D.
Apposition, S61, 12; 385— Ap-
positive Partic, 579 ; 583
Article, 106 — Crasis, 65-
without Accent, 97, 1— as
Demonstr. Pron., 212, D,
for the Relative, 213, D.—
Origin in Homer, 368 ; 370,
Obs. — omitted, 376, etc.—
Meaning, 369, etc. — Neut.,
with Genit., 381 ; 410— Po-
sition, 383-390.
Aspirates,d2; 52, etc. — at the
begin, of two successive
syll., 53 ; 274, 1— Redupli-
cated by Tenues, 62.
Aspiration dropped or re-
moved, 32, D. — thrown
back, 54— omitted, 52, D.—
in the strong Perf., 279.
Assimilation, 45 ; 47, etc. ;
50 6 ; 51 ; 56.
Asyndeton, 624 a, Obs.
Atona, 97— before Enclit., 93
e; 98.
Attempting an action," ex-
pressed by the Imperf., 489.
Attic Decl., 132— Ending, 157
—Future, 263— Reduplic,
275,1; 278.
Attraction, 597, etc. — ^invert-
ed, 604.
Attribute, 361, 11 — Attribu-
tive Adjective Art., 384 —
COMPLETED.
Attrib. compounds, 359, 2,
. and Obs. (Comp. 300)— At-
* tributive additions, 383-
386 — Attrib. Partic, 578.
Augment, 234, etc.— Omitted,
234, D. ; 235— Double, 237 ;
240 — in Compounds, 238,
etc.— irreg., 270, D.
Barytones, 19.
"Be," "become," "make,"
etc, 417; 361,7.
"i5e(7m," "interrupt," "end,"
verbs with Part. , 590 — with
Genit., 419 6.
" Benefiting,"YeY\)B of, 396.
"i>M7/," Verbs with Genit.,
421.
" Capability, "QiQ,.,'SfQvhs, with
Inf., 560, 1.
Cardinal Num., 220.
Case, 100— Use of, 392, etc.—
Endings, 100 — Ace, 142;
153— in Comps., 3W, Obs.
" Cause," in the Genit., 408,
7—422; 426 — Dat., 439—
Part., 581.
Challenge or Command — in
the Subj unc, 509 — by ottws-,
553, Obs.
Characteristic, 249.
Circumflex, 21 ; 80 ; 83, etc. ;
87 a.
Classes of Verbs in &>, 247-
^ 250; 320-327; of Verbs in
* HI, 305-319.
Collective Sing., 362.
Common Gend., 127, 5 ; 140.
" Community," expressed by
Dat. 436.
Comparative, 192, etc. — de-
clens., 170, etc— irreg., 199
—Adv., 203— with Genit.,
416 — Adj. and Verbs with
Genit., 416, Obs. 3 ; 423.
Compensation by lengthen-
ing, 42 — for V, 49, Obs. 3 ;
147, 1 ; 233, 2— for vt, vO, vd,
50 ; 147, 1 ; 187— for a, 270.
Completed Action in Verbs,
484; 435; 502-506.
354
ENGLISH INDEX.
COMPOUNDS.
Compounds, Divis. of Syll.,73
— Accent, 85; 131; 165;
183; 332 — Adj., 182, etc.;
189, 8 — Augm. in Comp.
Verbs, 238, etc.— treated as
simple Verbs, 402 — with
Genitive, 424 — with Dat.,
43T.
Concessive Participle, 582.
Conditional Sentences, 534,
■549— uegat., 616.
Conju7ictions, 623, etc.
Connecting Vowels, 233, 1, 2,
5 ; 262, etc. ; 275.
Consonants, Divis. of, 30, etc.,
44 — in dividing iSyll., 71,
etc.
Contraction, 36, etc.— in De-
clens., 118; 122; 128; 130,
etc.; 103, D. ; 166; 108 —
Double, 167— Omitted, 85,
D. 1; 165; 160, D. ; 288,
D. 4 ; 243, D. ; 263, D.— of
the Pres. Stem, 243, etc.—
of Adv., 201— Contr. Syll.
long, 75, Obs.— Accent, 87 ;
168; 881— Contr. Fut., 269 ;
262, etc.
Co-ordination, 519, 1 a, 2.
Coronis, 16 ; 05.
Correlation, 519, 4 — Correl.
Pron. 210 ; 218— Adv., 217,
etc.
Crasis, 10; 65 — Accent in.
Dative, Perispome, 109— Oxy-
toue, 188, 2— in Monosyll.,
142 — in <n{v), 08; 165, D.
— represented by <}>iv, 178,
D. — Meaning, 429, etc. —
withPrepos.,447,3— ofad-
vant. and disadv., 431— of
interest, 431, etc. — ethical,
483 — of community, 436,
etc. — of instrument, 438,
etc. — of measure, 440 —
free, 441-443.
"Declaration," Verbs of—
with Ace. and Inf., 567 —
with Inf, 500, 2 — with
Part., 593 — with oi^, 617,
Obs. 1— Sentences of, 525. .
Decomposites, Augment in,
239.
Defectives in Compar., 200.
Defining Object, 400 c— Inf.,
562.
Demonstrative Article, 369—
Pron., 212; 216; 475— fol-
lows the predicate, 367 —
Art. with, 389.
Denominatives, 389.
Dental Cons., 30— dissim. 40
— become a, 47 ; 07 — mutes
dropped before a, 49 ; 147,
1; 149; 260— in Per f., 281
— Charact. in Verbs, 250,
Obs — Fut., 260, 3.
Deponents,4S2—PaiSS.,S2S, 2—
Pass. Mean., 328, 4: 483,3.
Derivative Ending in Com
paratives, 357.
Description expressed by the
Imperf., 488.
Desideratives, 353, Obs. 2.
Determinative Comps., 359, 1
and Obs. (Comp. 300).
Diceresis, 9 ; 22, Obs.
Digamma, 3, D. ; 34, D. ; 85,
D. 2 ; 63, D. ; 75, D. ; 160
237 ; 283, Obs. ; 360, Obs.
Diminutives, 347 ; 104.
Diphthongs, Pronunciation.
8— Origin, 26; 35, 2— be-
fore Vowels, 35, Obs. ; 160 :
248, Obs.— without Angm.,
235— spurious, 27.
Disjunctive questions. (See
Double question.)
Dissimilation, 40.
Distributives, 223.
Doric Fut., 204.
Doubling of Conson., 62 ; 34
Double questions, 611 — oi
and M';, 615, Obs. 1.
Dual represented by PI., 366,
Effect and Consequence ex-
pressed by Ace. and Inf.,
567.
Elision, 64— Accents, 88— be-
fore Enclit, 96, 3.
Enclitics, 92, etc.— retaining
the Accent, 96.
Endi7ig, 100 — changed in
Comps. 855— of the IstDe
clens., 134— of 2d,172.
Enjoying,\erhs of, with Gen
itive, 419 d.
Epexegesis, 624 a, Obs.
Ethical Dative, 433.
Exclamations, 393 — in Ace.
399, Obs— in Genit., 427.
Extent, exp. by Ace, 405.
Fear and Anxiety, 538 ; 512
616, Obs. 3.
Feeling, verbs of, with Ace.
899— with Dat., 439, Obs.—
with Genitive, 422, Obs.—
with Part., 592.
Feminines, 103; 127; 188;
108.
Fi7ml letters, 07, etc. — Syll.
long — bef. vowels short, 75,
D. 2— Contr. Accent, 87;
183.
Future, 499, etc., 484 — Act.
. with trans. Meaning, 329
— periphrastic, 501 — Fut.
Perf., 505 — Ind. with /ce,
554, Obs. 2— Particip. with
Art., 800.
Gender, known by general
rules, 101, etc.; 127 — by
ending of Stem, 125 ; 137,
INTEEROGATIVE.
etc.— by Declens., 105 ; 122
—in A Declens., 122 — in O
Declens., 127 — in Conson.
Declens., 137, etc.
Generic Article, 375.
Genitive Perispome, 100 ; 118
— Oxytone,133, 2— Paroxy-
toue, 181 — in Monosyll., 142
— represented by Oev and
0rv,178,D.; 118— Meaning,
407— with Prepos.,447, 2—
with Subst.,408, etc.— with
Adj. and Adv., 414, etc.—
with Verbs, 417, etc.— free
Genit., 425, etc.
Gentile l>iames, 349; 350.
Grave accent, 19, etc. ; 86.
Gutturals, 30 — with a form f ,
48 ; 260 — before n, become
7,47 — with t, become era-,
57— Charact. of Pres., 250 ;
251, D.
Heteroclites, 174.
Hiatus, 08 — apparent, 68, D. 4.
Hypothetical Sent (See Con-
ditional Sent.).
Imperative, 228 — 1 Aor., 53 —
268,D.;518— iuCond.Sent.,
545, Obs. 8— exp. by 2 Pers.
Fut. with ov, 499, Obs. —
supplied by Inf., 577.
Imperfect,4SQ, etc. — in Cond.
Sent., 548 — in Prot. and
Apod., 538; 541.
Inclination, 91, etc.
Incomplete Action, 484, etc.
Indefinite Subject, 361,3, Obs.
2— in Neut., 864.
Indefinite Prououus,214,etc. ;
216— Adv., 92, 4.
Indicative, &)! — in Depend.
Sent., 620; 528— in depend.,
declar.,and interrog.Sent.,
626— in Condit. Sent., 530,
etc., 545 — in temp. Sent.,
566— hypoth. Ind. in Cond.
Sent., 637— in Sent, of pur-
pose, 650.
Indirect Object, 430 a.
Individualizing Article, 371,
etc.
Infinitive Act., in ij.evai, ixev,
233, D. 3; 265, D. — in vai
Aor. and Perf. Accent, 383,
1-^; 268, Obs. 1 — Use, 659
—with Art., 379— as Sub-
ject, 563 ; 574, 1— Ace, 2—
Gen., 8— Dat., 4— with ju'v,
and ou, 017 — with nh ov,
621 c, d— for Imper., 677.
" Injure," Verbs— with Ace,
896.
Instrument, suffix, 844 — Da-
tive of, 438 ; 674, 4.
Interest or Advantage, Dat.
of, 431, ete— Middle of,479.
Interrogative Pron., 214 ; 216
ENGLISH INDEX.
355
IKREGULAB.
— direct andindirect,475 6;
609— in depend. Sent., 525
— joined with Demonstr.,
606, Obs. 1.
Jz-rfif/M/Jar Nouns, 177 — Verbs,
320, Obs.
Iterative form, 334, D., etc.—
in Imperf. and Aor., 335, D.
Judicial Proceediugs, Verbs
of— with Genit., 422.
Kinds of Verbs, 225, 2.
Labials, 30 — before /x. 47
before o-, 48; 260 — verbal
stem, 249.
Lengthening, 40, etc. ; 147 ;
155 ; 165 ; 173, Obs. — in
Pres.,24S— intheFut.
2; 261 — in Redupl., 275
(Com p., 273, D. ; 278)— of
Vowels, 243, D. 3 ; 263, D.
Liquids, 33— in divis. of Syll.,
Locative, 179.
Long by Nature, 75.
Manner, exp. by Dat, 441.
Masculines,102; 137— distiug,
from Fem., 113; 122; 134
—for Fem., 362, Obs. 2.
Material, suffix, 352, 3, 4-
Genit.,408, 3; 414,2; 418.
Measure, in Dat., 440.
Medice, 32.
Metaplasm, 175.
Metathesis, 59 ; with strong
Aor., Act. and Mid., 257
D., 282, 285 ; with strong
Aor. Pass., 295, D.
Middle, 477, etc. — direct, 478
— indirect, 479 — Subject-
ive, 480— Causative, 481 —
Aor. with Mid. meaning,
255, 2 ; 271— Fut. with Act.
meaning, 264 ; 266 ; 328, 1
— with Pass, meaning, 266.
Modesty of Assertion, exp. in
Opt., with uv, 517, Obs. 1.
Jfomeritory Action, 484; 492-
498.
Monosyllabic Stems, length-
ened, 142 &— in \, V, p,Perf.,
282— AccentofMon. words,
142— with Enclit., 94.
Moods, 225, 4,
Multiplicatives, 223.
**Must" and "^^/lowW, "Verbs
of, in Imperf., 490.
JfM^es,31, etc.— Assimilation,
49, D, ; 52— before Liquids
and Nasals, 78— Stems of
Verbs, 248.
Ka'ine in Genit., 408, 9 — of
Animals, Gender, 140.
•'iVawe,""Select,"etc.,Verb8
of, 361, 7, 10; 392; 403.
PASSIVE.
Narrative in Aor. Ind., 492.
Nasals, 33— in divis. of Syll.,
72,1.
Necessity, expressed by Ver-
bal Adj., 300.
Negatives, 619, and Obs.
Negative Pron. and Adv., 219.
Neuters, 104 ; 139 — Dental
Stems, 147 b; — Liquid
Stems, 151 — Sigma Stems,
165— Marks of, 105, 3 ; 125 ;
136— Accent, 340, Obs. 4 —
as Adv., 201 ; 203 ; 401 —
Plu. with Sing. Verbs, 303
—Adj. as Predic, 366.
Nominal Predicate, 361, 4,
etc.
Nominative Dual oxytone,
131,1— for Voc, 129; 393-
meaning, 392.
Nouns from Verbal Stems,
245.
Numbers, 100, 1 ; 225, 1 —
"two" in the PI., 305.
Numerals, 220, Obs. — with
Art., 374,
Objective Inf., 501 — Genit.,
574, 3, Obs.— Part., 581 ; 361,
9 ; 395.
Objective Compp., 359, 3, and
Obs,- Genit.,403, 5 b; 413.
'â– 'â– Opinion to be of,'' Yerh,
with Inf., 560, 2; 567.
Optative, 228— Pres., 2 Pers.
Sing, in atia, 233, D. 1 —
Perf. Mid., 2S9 -514 — po-
tential with av, 517, Obs. 2 ;
552, Obs. — in dep. sent., 524
— Opt.in dep. Sent., 522,etc.
—in indir. Speech, 523 — in
depend., declar., and inter.
Sent, 528— in Sent, of pur-
pose, 532— in Sent, of fear,
533— in Condit. Sent., 546,
etc.— in Relat. Sent., 555—
in tempor. Sent., 556 ; 558
—exp. interest, 430.
Ordinal Numbers, 220 — in
Ace, 405, Obs. 1.
Oxytones, 17— before Enclit.,
93 a.
Paroxy tones, 11 — \n Crasis,
"—before Enclit., 93 c.
Participles, Declens., 187 —
Voc. Siug.,148— Perf, Act.,
276, D. -^em., 188 ; 277,
D.— Pres., Aor., and Perf.
Mid., 333, 6-10— with Art.,
379, etc. ; 578, Obs. — in
Dat., 435, Obs. — hypoth.
with /u»';, 583,618.
Particles, 92, 5 ; 623, etc.
Partitive Genitive, 403, 4;
412; 419.
Passive, 483 — with Dative,
434— Aor. in Active verbs
with Mid. meaning, 328, 3.
PRESENT.
Patronymics, 348.
Peculiar Charact. Suffix, 351
—Genit., 408, 8.
"Perccwe," Verbs of, with
Genit., 420 ; 417, Obs. —
with Infln., 560, 2 — with
Part., 591.
Perfect, weak, 277, D. ; 280,
etc. — strong, 277, etc, — in-
trans. meaning, 330— trans,
and intrans. meaning, 329
— use of the Ind., 502 —
Moods, Inf., Part., 506 —
Perfects with Pres, mean-
ing, 503.-
Period, hypoth., 534 — inter-
posed, 550— Negative, 616.
Perispomes, 21 — before En-
clit., 93 6.
Personal Endings, 226— Pro-
noun, 250, etc. ; 92, 2 —
Meaning, 469— Genit. ,470 a
—for reflec. pron., 471, Obs.
a, 6— Personal Constr.,571.
Place, Suffix of, 345— Genit
of, 412 ; 415 ; 425— Dative,
442— Adv. with Genit, 415
— Desig. of, 82, 2 ; 179; 412.
Plenty and Want, Adject, of,
414, 2— Verbs, 418.
Phiral, 3 Pers. PI. Mid. in
-arai, -aro, 226, D. ; 233, D.
6—1 Mid. in fieaOa, 233, D.
5 ; 362, etc.
Position, 71, etc. ; 193.
Possessive Article, 373 —
Pron., 208— with Art., 388 ;
470 — of the reflective, 472
b, c — Poss, exp. by Genit,
408, 2 ; 414, 1— by Dat, 422.
Possibiliy,ex\).hy Verb Adj.,
300— by Opt with av, 516,
etc.; 546 — by Part with
iiv, 595.
Predicate, 361, 3, etc. — de-
pendent, 361, 10; 589, 2 —
without Art, 378, 387.
Predicative Ace. , 403— Genit ,
417— Ace. with Inf., 570—
Gen. or Ace, 572 — Part,*
589.
Prepositions, lose their Ac-
cent, 88â €” Elision in dissyl.,
64; 90; 238— Anastrophe,
90— Augm. aft Prep., 238,
etc. — Use, 444 — Adverbial,
446 — with Ace, 449 /—
Genit, 451, etc.— Dat, 456,
etc.— Genit and Ace, 458 —
with three cases, 462, etc. —
spurious, 445.
Present Ind., 4S6, ete —
Moods, Inf. Part, 491 —
hist, 487 — exp. by Ind.
Aor., 494, Obs. 2— enlarge-
ment of, 246— Stem, 231—
like the Verb Stem, 247—
with lengthened Stem
Vowel, 248— from Verb
356
ENGLISH INDEX.
PKIMITIVE.
Stem with t, 249 — with i,
250, etc.
Primitive words, 339.
Principal Conjugations, 230
—first, 231, etc. ; 320, etc.—
second, 302-319— Declen-
sions, 111— first, 112-134—
second, 135,
Proclitics (see Atoua).
'' Prohibition," 518 ; 510; 499
— Prohibit, Hinder, Deny,
etc.— have the Infln. with
Idf], 617, Obs. 3— with M^; ov,
621 d.
Prolepsis, 519, 5, Observ. 2
(Comp.,567; 571).
Pronunciation, 4, etc.
Proparoxytones, 17 — before
End., 93 d.
Properispomes, 21 — before
Eucl., 93 d.
Proper Names in -a, 115, D. 2
— n?, 174— KXr^f, 167— with
Art., 371, Obs. ; 375, Obs, ;
387, Obs.
"Property," Suffix of, 346;
343, Obs.
Quantity, in Crasis, 65 — in
Monosyll., 142 — doubtful,
75, D., 1 — reversing quant.,
37, D., 2 ; 161, Obs.
Quantitative Adj. and Adv.,
224— with Art., 374.
Questions, dubious in the
Subj., 511.
Reciprocal Pi'on., 211.
Reduplication, 53, 10 a — in
the Perf., 273, etc.— in the
2 Aor., 257 d— in Verbs in
m, 308.
Reflective Pron., 210— Mean-
ing, 471— 3d for 1st and 2d
Pers., Obs. c — to denote
possession, 472 — for Re-
ciprocal, 473,
Relative Adj., 414.
Relative Pron., 213 ; 216 —
Crasis,65— Compound,214,
Obs. 2— Hypoth., 554— fol-
lows the Predic. Subst,, 367
—used once only, 605,
RelativeSeutences,551 — with
Future Ind., 500— with /u^,
615, Obs. 2— complication,
604— Connection, 605.
"Reference to," exp. by the
Ace, 404.
Rejection of letters, 61— of a
"Vowel at begin., see Syn-
cope—of a vowel at end,
see Elision.
Repetition, exp. by the Opt.,
547 (Negative, 616, Obs, 2)
555, Obs. 1 ; 558, Obs. 1.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Result of an Act, 343— in the
Ace, 400 d.
Root, 245.
"Scare," "Obstruct," a d
other Verbs, with the Inf.,
560, 3.
Semivowels, 31.
Sentences, Compound, 519, 3,
5 — Principal, Subordinate,
519, 4— Moods of, 525, etc.
— Condit., 534; 549, etc.—
Negat., 616 — of Experience
in Aor. Ind., 494 — luterr,,
525— of Purpose, 530-533—
Negat,, 616.
Shortening, at the begiun.,
74, D.— of the final syll,,
75, D. 2— in the Perf, 285,
D.— in the Subj., 228, D. ;
233, D. 2 — in Rel. Sent.,
597, 3.
"Should," exp. in depend.
Sent, by the Subj., 527 b.
Opt., 528 b.
"Show,"\erhs of with Part.,
693; 580.
Sigma, future, 259 ; 260, etc.
—Aor., 269.
Singular, 3 Pers. in e (i/), 68,
4 — Accent on Imp. Mid.,
268, 2 — Accent on 2 Aor.
Imper. Act. and Mid., 333,
11, 12, 362.
"Space," exp. by the Accus,,
399 b.
Spiritus, position, 12; 22 —
with p and pp, 13 — Spir,
Asper, 60 6— in Augment,
235, Obs.— Spir. Lenis, 11.
Stern, 100— St. Vowel length-
ened, 147, 2 ; 248 ; 253, Obs. ;
261, 270, changed to e, 157.
"Strive," "Aim at," Verbs
with Genitive, 419 c — with
Inf., 560, 3.
Subject, 301, 3— Omitted, Obs.
2— with Genit. Abs., 585 a
—of a Subordinate Sent,
as Object of the Principal
Sent., 397 ; 519, 5— Obs. 2—
Subj. of Prin. Sent, in the
Subord. Sent., 602 ; 519, 5,
Obs. 2.
Subjective Genit., 408, 5 a.
Subjunctive, 228 — Shortened,
233, D. 2 ; 255, D. 1 ; 302, D.
—of the Perf;^id., 289-
of verbs in /mi, accent, 309 —
Meaning, 508, etc. — similar
to Fut,, 513 — in dep. sent.,
521 — in depend, assert, and
interrog., 527— in sent, of
purpose, 531, 532, Obs.—
exp. fear, 533 — in condit.
sent,, 545, 554, 555, Obs. 2
—in tempo r. sent., 557, 558,
Obs. 2.
Subordination, 519, 3.
Substantive, degrees of, 199,
D.— joined to the Dat., 430,
Obs., 432, Obs.
Suffixes, 340 ; 178.
Superlatives, Adv., 203— with
Geuit.,416,Obs.2— withwr,
631 a— with 6ti, 633, 1 b.
Supplements to the Part.,
361, 8,
Supplementary Aorist, 270,
etc.
Syllabic Augm., 234 — with
initial vowel, 237 — omit-
ted, 283.
Syllables of both quantities,
75, D., 1 ; 77.
Synizesis, 39 ; 66 ; 243, D., 3.
Syncope, 61 c; 257, D.
" Taking part in," with Gen-
itive, 414, 5 ; 419 a.
Temporal Adj., 352, 4, Obs.—
Augm., 234 ft; 235.
Tenses, 225; 3 Prin. Tenses,
521— Subord., 522— Tense
Stems, 227.
Tenues, 32— for Aspirate8,-S2,
D.
Time, in Ace, 399 b; 405 —
in Genit., 4-26— in Dat., 443
Adv. of with Genit,, 415—
kiuds, degrees of, 484, 1, 2.
Transitive and Intransitive
Meaning, 329, etc. ; 476—
Mid., 477.
"Touch," and other Verbs
with Genitive, 419 b.
UncontracUd Syll., 35, D., 1.
Verba Contracta among Iter-
atives, 336 d— V. pura, im-
pura, 247.
Verbal Pred., 361, 4— Nouns,
225, 5 — Stem, 245, etc. —
Pres. Stem, 246 ; 260, 3.
Vocal Stems, 1 Perf. 280.
Vowels, 24, etc. — in divis. of
Syll., 470 — before others,
74— long without Augm.,
235— Changes, 40, etc.— in
2 Perf, 278— in derivation,
340, Obs. 3.
Weakening of Conson., 60.
''iF/ien," expressed by Dat.,
443,
" Whither," expressed by Ac-
cusative, 406,
"Wish," expressed in the
Opt., 514, etc.
Worth and Price, in the Gen-
itive, 408, 6; 421.
GREEK INDEX
a for »i,24,D.2; 41, D.; 115,
D.1;121,D.2; 235 D.; 270,
Obs.
d for n, 277, D.
a bee. o), 268; 278— bee. 0,268.
abec. M,40; 115,1, c; 116, d;
235; 270; 268; 278; 303,
abec. €,37,D.2;169D.; 243,
D.3.
a bee. ai, 24, D, 3.
d from ao, ato, 866 ao,
d after e, «, p, 41 ; 115, 1, a;
116, c; 121; ISO; 261; 270;
278.
a before vowels, 235,
a, connecting vowel, 276 ;
336, D.; 338, D.— in the 3
Plur., 302, 3,
a, characteristic of the First
or Weak Aorist, 268.
a, privative, 360 — in Adj. with
the Genit. 414, Obs. 5.
-a, ending of the Accus.,141;
156; 173, Obs.; 181; 276.
-a, quantity of, 117; 121; 161;
169; 181,1.
-a, Plur. ending of Neuters,
125,2; 136; 141; 173.
-a, Adverbs in, 202.
-a, Nom. of Substant, in, 172.
•a, from ao in the Genit.,
122, Obs.
a'^aOo?, Comparison, 199, 1,
a'^aiJ.ai (uydofiai), 312, 8 —
Pass, Depon., 328, 2.
a^awaKTfcWjWith the Partlcip.,
592.
ityanu), with the Dative, 439,
Obs,— with the Partic.,592.
ayteWo/xai, constmed per-
8onally,571— u-yYtWto.with
aPartic.,593.
076 6n> 642, 4 a.
u^e/pw, 2 Aor., 257, D.— Perf.,
275, 1.
iiytjoxa, 279.
<i7<i/ea),323,D.39.
tiyvviJit, 319, 13— Perf., 275, 2
— Signif. 330, 1.
ayxh Comparison of, 203, D.
—with the Genit,, 415.
07(0, 2 Aor., 257— Imper. of 1
Aor., 268, D.
«de\^6s,Voc. Sing., 129.
adiKeo), with the Accus,, 396
—Signif., 486, Obs.
ae (an) into d, 38; into rj, 243,
D. 2— into aa, 336, D.
aei into 9, 38 — into a, 243,
Obs.- into ac, 38, Obs.
iefw, 322, D. 13.
aecra, 327, D, 17.
-aCo), Verbs in, 353, 6— Fut,
263.
at^diiv, Gen. Sing., 163.
atiiJLt, 313, D. 3.
a>;p, Masc,,140.
at, in the Compar. for o or w,
195— into v, 235.
-ai, Elided, '64, D.— Short in
regard to the Accent, 83,
Obs.2; 108; 229; 268,Obs.l,
ai, a'lOe, See ei, ei'^'e.
aideofjiat, a'tdoimai, 301, 1 ; 326,
10— Pass. Depon., 328, 2—
with the Aceus., 399.
'Ai6n^, 177, D. 19 — ew, ely,
"Atdov, 411.
aldwi, 163.
-aiv, in the Dual, 173, 4.
-om-a, Fem. ending, 115, 1 b.
alvecx), 301, 3.
aivvnai, 319, D. 27,
-a(va),Verbs in, 353, 7.
ai'f , of both genders, 140.
alpeoy, 327, 1— Perf,, 275, D. 1
— Distinct, between Act.
and Mid,, 481 b— Passive
meaning, 483, 3,
a'ipw, Aor., 270, Obs,
-a«p, Subst. in, 172.
-aiP,intheDat,Pl,,119,
a\a-OdvoiJ.at, 322, 11— with the
Gen, ,420— with the Partic,
591.
alo-xpoy, Comj)arison of, 198.
ai<rx''voixat, with AcC, 399 —
with Dat., 439, Obs,— with
Partic., 592— with the Inf.,
594— alo-x-'i'to, Perf, 286, D.
aiTto>, with double Ace., 402.
!xKax^t,u>, 319, D. 30.
uKCOfxai, 301, 1.
uK^Koa, 275,1; 280, Ob
aKT)x^^aro, 287, D.
aKovo), Perf. Act, 275, 1 —
Perf, Mid., 288— with the
Num., 392, Obs.— with
afxevai, *
Gen,, 420, and Obs ^wlth
Partic, 591.
aKparor.Comparison of,196&,
uKpodofxat, Fut,, 261 — with
Gen., 420,
a/ctoi/, Gen, Abs., 585 b.
d\a\Kov, 326, D. 11.
aXdXniJiai, 275, D.
uXdojuat, Pass. Depon., 328, 2
— Perf., 275, D.l,
uXyeivoi, Comparative of,
199, 8.
a\di]aKO), 324, D. 30.
uXeacOai, 269, D.
a\€/0ap,176.
uXei<po}, Perf., 275, 1.
aXeKTuvwv, of both gendcrs,
140.
aXev, aXrtiJ.evai, 325, D. d.
uXef w, 326, 11.
uXeo), 301, 1.
aXr)0e9,165.
aXOofJiai, 326,1). 59.
dXti, with Gen., 414, 2.
aXlaKonai, 327, 17— Perf,, 275,
2— Aor,, 316, 12— with the
Genit,, 422,
aXiTaivM, 323, D, 37,
<k\K^, Dat, Sing., 175, D.
aXXu, 629— uWa jdp, 636, 6,
d; uW ^, 629, Obs. 3—dXX'
ouv, 637, 2.
aWao-o-o), 1 Aor. Pass., 294,
Obs.
u\\>;Ao(i/, etc.,211.
liXXo/iai, 1 Aor., 270, Obs.—
2 Aor., 316, D. 32.
aXXo?, 2il — dXXo ri r] ; oKXo
Ti ; 608.
aWtof re Ka/, 624, 4.
aXi, 150,
a\i;<7Ka), 324, 27, Obs.
aX<pdvo}, 323, D. 38.
aXwvai, 324, 17.
u\a)7r»)^,in''g.Nom.Sing.,146,
a/xu, with Dat., 436 c — with
Part., 587, 1.
a/uaprdvo), 322,12— with Gcn.,
419 e.
afi(3Xi(TK0), 324, 18.
anei^Ofxai, with AcC., 398.
iifxcivuiv, Signif., 109, 1, Obs.
uMc^fw, with Genit., 420.
dn^vai, 312, D. 13.
358
GREEK INDEX.
afiiWdofiai.
afitWdoiJiat, Depou. Pass..
328, 2.
uij.vfjiJ.Mv, with Genit., 414, 3.
a/jotpoi, with Geuit., 414, 5.
a/JOi, ayaoy, 208, D.
aftTTfcXW, 53, d.
ufjiriax'-'ov^xai, 323, 36.
a/JTrXaKia-Kto, 324, 23.
afxirvvvtiri, 298, D. — afxnvvTO,
316, D. 29.
ufKpi, 462 — without Ana-
strophe, 90.
itn(pitvvvfjLi, 319, 5 — Augm.,
^240— with double Acc.,402.
u/u0(o, ufxcpoTepoi, ujui^oTepoi/,
221 — aiJi<poTtpo30ev, with
Genit., 415.
-ai/-, aflBxed to form the Pres-
ent Stem, 322.
iiv-, privative, 3G0.
'ai', see ectv.
ui/, 639, 3— with particles of
time, 557 — in the Apodosis
of Conditional Sentences,
535 ; 53T ; 541 ; Comp. 542 ;
546— with Aor., 494, Obs. 1
— with Subj., 513— with
Fut. Ind., 500, Obs.— with
Imperf., 494, Obs. 1— with
Ind., 536, etc.— with Inf.,
575, etc.— with Opt., 516 ;
546— with Part., 595— with
Relatives, 554 ; 555, Obs. 2.
-av, Nom. Masc. and Neut.,
172.
-5"' for diov, Gen. Plur. of
a-Decl., 118, D.
ava, see ava$.
uvd, 461 — Apocope, 64, D. —
without Anastrophe, 90.
ava/3dk\ofxai,w\ih Inf.,560,3.
uvafiiwaKOfiai, 324, 11.
avaifnaln^ eiju«,construed per-
sonally, 571.
uvaXicTKcx), uvaXiixTco, 324, 19.
uvafjtfivrcrKw, with double
Acc, 402.
ai/af ,Voc. Sing., 148, D.
uvd^ioi, with Genit., 414, 4.
av6dvoi, 322, 23— Augm., 237.
wdpdnodov, Dat. PI., 175, D. _
avtyvtov, uve'^vaxra, Diflf. of
^ Signif.,329, D.
avev, 445 ; 455, 5.
iivexoiJai, double Augm., 240
—with Part., 590.
avew'/a, uveu>xa, 319, 19 — Dis-
tinction, 279.
uvj-fVoOev, 275, D.
avrp, 153 ; 177, 1— Genit., 51,
Obs. 2.
aviip, 65, Obs. 1.
iivO'Siv, 601.
avoi-^w, Augm., 237 — Perf.,
275, 2 ; 279.
iivopOow, double Augm., 240.
avra, avrnv, avTiKpv, See
aVTi.
uvTtxofiat,with Genit., 419 b.
apxiv.
avTi', 451 — without Ana-
strophe, 90.
avo), Compar., 204 — with
Genit., 415.
Hvioya, 517, D. 11— Pluperf.,
283, D.
a^to?, with Genit., 414, 4 —
with Inf., 562.
a^ioxpeo}?, 184.
ao into d, 37, D. 3 ; 122, D. 2
—into o), 37 : 122, D. 3 c—
into €0), 37, D. 2 ; 122, D. 3
b; 132; 243, D. 8.
-ao, Genit. Sing., 122, Obs.,
etc., D. 3 6.
aoi, ^nto w, 37.
aov, into e&), 243, D. 3 b.
uTraYopei'o), with Part., 590.
ravrdoo, Fut. Mid. with Act.
meaning, 266.
una(pi<TKu), 324, D. 33.
uneiTTbov, 327, 12.
avretpo^. With Genit., 419 e.
unexOdvofjat, B22,16.
u7rtxoMa«,with Genit, 414, 3.
uTTo, 452 — Apocope, 64, D. ;
Compar., 204.
aiTodldoi.iai, with Genit., 421.
anodi&pdaKco, with AcC, 398.
uTToepaa, 270, D.
anoXauta, Fut. Mid. with Act.
meaning,266— with Genit.,
419 d.
'AiroXXiav, AcC, 171 ; Voc.
148, Obs.
uTToo-Tepeo), with Doub, Acc,
402.
uiTOTvyx»v(o, with Genitive,
419 e.
UTTOipuf, 316, D. 18.
uno^alvoi, with Part., 593.
cnroxpri, 312, 6.
aTTTojuar, with Genit., 419 6.
-ap, Subst injl72.
apa and dpa, Distinction, 99.
apa (ap'), Apocope, 64, D. ;
_ 637j 1.
&pa, in questions, 607 &— in-
direct, 610; dp' oi; &pa jU'/,
607, Obs.
upaplffKiOi 324, D. 34— Perf.
275, D.l.
apeitiv, aptffTOi, 199, 1, and
Obs.
upe(TKoo, 324, 10.
apr}pwi, 280, D.
"Apur, 177, 2.
-apiov. Neuters in, 347, Obs.l
upK6to, Aor., 301,1.
dpMoTTO), 250, Obs. — Fut.,
260, 3.
upi eojLtai, Depon. Pass., 328,2,
upv^r, etc., 177, 3.
apvvfxat, Aor., 319, D. 29.
ap6<o, 301, 1— Perf. Pass., 275,
D. 1.
apptjv, 189, 3.
api'iQ), 301, 1.
apx'jv, 405, Obs. 2.
fiacnXevi.
apxofiai and tipxco, Distinc-
tion, 481 b.
apxofxai, with Genit, 419- &
—with Inf., 560, 1— with
Part., 590— with Inf. and
Part, 594.
apxto, with Genit, 423— DiflF.
of Pres. and Aor., 498.
-ar. Ending of the Acc. PL,
141.
-di, Fem. in, 138.
-ar, Neut. in, 139.
-as, Subst in, 172.
ao-pevof, 319, D. — Compar.,
_ 196 b.
acraov, utrffoxtpo), 203, D.
a<rT/;p, Dat. PI., 153.
uo-Tu, 158— Gend., 139,
aTat, -aro, 3 PI. Mid., 226, D.;
233, D. 6 ; 287, and D.
ardp, avrdp, 630, 4.
are, with Part, 587, 6.
tirep, 455, 5.
aTTa,dTTa, 214.
V, avTC, 630, 3.
aif dio), a'u^oy, 322, 13.
-aur,Fem. in,172.
ai-TiKa, with Part, 587, 3.
auToy, 200 — position with the
Art, 389— with Dat., 441,
Obs. — in the Genit. with
Possess., 474— for the Rel.,
605, Obs. — 6 avjdi, with
Dat, 436 6.
<i^a(pfco/ua«,with doub. Acc,
402.
a<pd(rcra>, 250, D.
u<pir]ni, 313, 1— Augm. 240.
<:.<^' oS, 556 ; 601.
aipvoffoi, 1 Aor., 269, D.
cixaptr, compar. 193, D.
axOo/jai, 326, 12 — Depon.
Pass., 328, 2— with Part,
592.
dxvvfjai, 319, D. 30 — Plup.
287, D.
axpti'!), 69, Obs. 3 ; 445 ; 455
b; without Elision, 64, Obs.
1 — tixp' ov, 556.
-aw, Verbs in, 353, 2, and
Obs. 2— lengthening, 243,
D. 3.
-aw, Fut in, 263, D.
/3, inserted between ju and p,
51, Obs. 2, and D. ; /3 for m,
sec /x.
jSabitui, Fut Mid. with Act
meaning, 266.
/3a.Vw, 321, 1, and D-Perf.,
317, 1 — 2 Aor., 316, 1 — 1
Aor. Mid., 268, D.— mean-
ing, 329, 2— of the Perf.,
503.
ySdXAw, A«r., 316, D. 19 —
Perf., 282— Signif., 476, 2.
/3dpdt<Tro9, 198, D.
/SaaiXeta and /3a<riXeia, 117.
/3a<7iXev^, 161, D.
GREEK INDEX.
359
(iaaiXtvu).
(3a(Ti\eva), with Genit., 423—
Diff. of Pies, and Aor.,498.
/Se^pwOoy, 324, D. 13.
^eio^ai, jSto/jiat, 265, D.
/Jtta),/3;;»7, etC.,31G, D. 1.
/JeXWcoi/,' /3t\Ti<7Toi, 199, 1.
/3idi^oiJLat, Pass, meaning,
483,3.
/«4/3d9, 312, D. 14.
/3i/3\o9, Fem., 127, 5.
liijipwcTKU), .S24, 13— Aor., 316,
D. 23— I'erf. Part., 317, D.
16.
^i6u), Aor., 316, 13.
/3\,Redup.,274, Ex.
/3\u/3erai, Horn. Pres., 249, D.
/3\a7rTto,Aor.Pa8S.,299 — with
Ace, 396.
/SXaindfu, 322, 14.
/3\7,(y0ai, etc., 316, 19.
/3\irro), 250, Obs.
/3Xwo-Kto, 324, 12 ; 51, D.
/3od(i), Fut. Mid. with Act.
meaning, 230.
f36XeTai, 360, D. 14.
/3oppus, Genit. Sing., 122,
Obs.
(36<TKw, 326, 13.
/JoTpi/ff, Masc.,140.
/SovKofxai, 326, 14 — Angm.,
234, Obs. — 2 Sing. Pres.
Mid.,233,3— Depou. Pass.,
328 2
/3ori?,'l59; 160; 35, Obs.— of
two Genders, 140.
(Spuaffu), 250, Obs.
/3pcia-au)v, 198, D.
/3paxi^?, with Inf., 502.
/SpoTor, 51, D.
/3yi/a., 323, 32.
(3wca?, 35, D. 1.
7, Pronunt., 4 — Character of
Verbs, 251, Obs. — their
Fnt.,260,3— Perf.,279. .
jafxeoi, 325, 1.
-Yavvfiai, 319, D. 31.
7«p, 636, 6 — yap ovv, 637, 2.
7ao-Trp, 153— Fern., 140.
77, Char, of Verbal Stems,
2.51, Obs.
7e, 041, 1— Affix, ibid.
ttyovcL, 327, 14.
767covea), 325, D. Cf.
7e('i'0|uai, Signif., 329, 8.
7e\da), 301 , 1— Aor. Pass. , 298
— Fut. Mid. with Act.
meaning, 266.
76\a)9, 109, D.
7fryxw, with Genit., 418.
feveaOai, jevija-o/Jiai, etC, 327,
14.
yivTo, 310, D. 33.
yepaioi, Compar., 194.
yeno}, with Genit., 419, D.
7n(^ea,, 325, 2.
7MP«(TKa), 324, 1— Aor., 316, 2.
7t into C, 58 ; 251.
fljvonai, 327, 14— Perf., 317,
devrepo^.
2— With Genit, 417— with
Dat., 432.
yiyvuKTKb), 324, 14 — Aor., 316,
14— with Part., 591.
-rK yv, Rednpl. with, 274,
Ex.
jodio, 325, D. n.
yovv, 177, 4.
â– yovv, 641, 2.
ypavi, 159.
'Ypd<f>ofxai, with Genit., 422.
1pd(poiJ.ai and 7p«0w, Diff.,
4816.
7i'»';;, 177, 5.
6 inserted betw. v and p, 51,
Obs. 2; 287, D.; 612— Char-
acter, 251. See Dentals.
5ai, 642, 8.
3u<'/ua)i/, of two Genders, 140.
daivvfic, 319, D. 32 — Opt.,
318, D.
dalay, meaning, 330, D. 9.
ddKv(o, 321, 8.
ddKpvov, 175.
Sdfxap, 147, 1, Ex.
5dM»"?M', 312, D. a— Aor. Subj.
Pass., 293, D.
daveiZ<^, DifF. of Act. and
Mid., 481 b.
6ap0dvu, 322, 15.
6uy, Accent, of Genit. PI. and
Dual, 142, 3.
daTionai, 325, D. 6—1 Aor.
Inf., 269, D.
-de, affixed, 94; 212; 216—
Enclitic, 92, 5— Local Suf-
fix, 178.
at, 628—5' ovv, 637, 2.
S^aTo, 269, D.
dkifiai, 312, D. 14, 6.
didaov, 324, D. 28 ; 320, D. 40.
dtdeyfxai, dt^to, etc., 318, D.
dtdia, dedoma, 317, 5, and D.
5ei (see 8e<o), with Ace. and
Inf., 507, Obs. 1—edet, 490.
3eidw, forms Position, 77,D. —
doubling of the 6, 234, D.
delavviJii, 318— with Partic,
593.
deTva, ludef. Pronoun, 215.
6eiv6r, with Inf., 502.
deipr], 115.
d('vdpov, 175.
dtofxai, Depon. Pass., 328, 2.
See 3t'a).
6tov, 586.
atTras-, Dat. PI., 169, D.
ae'pKo/uat, Depon. Pass., 328, 2
—2 Aor., 257, D. ; 59, D.—
with Ace, 400 o.
aeo-juof, Nom. and Ace. PI.,
175, D.
3e<T7r6Tr)r,VoC. Sing.121— ACC.
Sing. 174, D.
Sevofjiai, 326, D. 15.
aei3TaTor,199, D. (Defectives),
aei^repor, with Gcnitivc, 416,
Obs. 3.
dparv^.
6exofxai,Ferr., 273,D-2Aor.,
310, D. 34— Aor. Pass. Sig-
nif., 328, 4.
dtm (I bind), 301, 2— Contrac-
tion, 244, 1.
dial, dtofiai (I am in want of),
320, 15— with Genit., 418.
a/;, 642, 4— Affix, 218.
6J,0ex',O42,7.
d7,\ov ort, 633, 1 a.
an\6a), Meaning, 476, 1— arj-
Xoco and arjXor eifjii, with
Part., 590,
A>|/u/;Tr)p, 153.
dijv, makes position, 77, D.
dtjTTOTe, Affix, 218.
6t]Trov, diiTTovOev, 642, 6.
-any, Mas<f. in, 348.
dnaa, 326, D. 15.
dTiTa, 642, 6.
a* into C, 58 ; 251.
did, 448; 458— without Ana-
strophe, 90— with Inf. and
Article, 574, 2, 3.
Sla, 181, D.
didyoi, diaXeinoo, diaTeXtoi,
with Part., 590.
dtana, 115.
diaixda), with double Auffra.,
240.
amKoi/eto.with doub. Augra.,
240.
diaXtyonai, Depon.Pas8.,328,
2— Rednpl., 274, Ex.— with
Dat., 436 a.
SidXeKTOi, Fem., 127, 5.
a^a0e'po^lu«, 436 a.
6ui<f>ipo),42^; 440.
did^opoi, 436 6.
6i6d<TKu), 324, 28, Obs.— Aor.,
326, D. 40 — with double
Ace, 402— ata«(7Ko/ia«, 481,
dl6t)fj.i,Bl3,2.
dldio/xi, Compounds — Mean-
ing, 476, 2— with Inf., 501.
didpdaKoj, 324, 2— Aor., 316, 3.
a/eaa./, etc., 313, D. 4.
a<C'IMa<, aiXa,,313,D.5.
ai/caCoMa'j Meaning, 481.
.diKaid? eifxi, consirued per-
sonally, 571.
la/Kfji/, free Ace, 404, Obs.
;a.6T<,636, 2.
idmXda-toi, diaaoi, etc., 223 —
! with Genit., 416, Obs. 3.
Slxa, 445.
|aix|,da),Contr.,244,2.
\diu>KM, with Genit., 422.
aMa.c,Gen.Pl.andDual,142,3.
:ao/a>, ete,220, D.
doKtw, 325, 3— with Inf., 560, 2
— constr. personally, 571.
aoKar,Fem.,127, 5.
66^av, Ace Abs., 580.
jaapu, 177, 6.
\8ovn4<o, 325, D. c.
dpafxelv, Spa/xov/xai, etC, 327,
I 11.
i apara?, 300, D.
360
GREEK INDEX.
6puoj,
^paw.Aor. Pass., 298,
6p6(ro?, Fern., 127, 5.
dOvafxai, 312, 9— Augm., 234,
Obs Subj,, Opt., Accent.
309— Depon. Pass., 328, 2—
with Inf., 560, 1.
Siir, Compounds with, 360,
Obs.— Augm., 241.
ayw.at'i/o), 321,7; 301,4— lAor.
Mid., 268, D.— 2 Aor., 316,
16— Meaning, 329, 4.
CITTOV.
eyprjfopa, 275.
eyw, Synizesis, 66 — e^M^e,
641,1.
i6Veva',315,D.3; 327, D. 4.
edonai, Fut., 265. See e<r(*i'a).
ee bee. ei, 36 — bec. €1 and n,
243, D. B. — bec. n in the
e for a, 268, D.— bec. a, 257;
282; 285; 295; 298.
ebec. r),40; 147,2; 151; 161,
D.; 233,4; 235; 293.
e bec. ei, 24, D. 3 ; 42 ; 147, 1 ;
236; 243,D.B.; 270; 293, D.
c bec. o, 165 ; 278 ; 340, Obs. 3
—bec. w, 278.
6 for digamma, 34, D. 4 ;
237, D.
e inserted, 264 ; 269, D.
e rejected, 153 ; 243, D. B. ;
257, D.— in Synizesis, 59, D.
€ contr. with preceding vow-
el, 166, D.
e affixed to the Stem, 322,
e^iTreipo?.
-op, Subs, iu, 172.
e'lp-yvv/jit, 319, 15.
eipYw, Perf. and Plup., 287, D.
— with Genit., 419 e.
e;'pnKa,274,Ex.; 327,13.
e'ipofxai, 326, D. 16.
cVpco, 1 Aor.. 270, D.— Perf.
and Plup., 275, D. 2.
Dual. See -rj.
ee'pxaTO, 287, D.
-eef bec. €19 in Nom,Pl.,157
—bec. et? and n?, 161 d.
-en for -em, 185, D.
erif, 213, D.
eWCw, Augm., 236.
: for c, 24, D. 3— for a., 267,
etc.— from e, t, see e,
ei, Redupl., 274, etc.— in the
Plup., 283.
u in the Dat. Sing., 157 ; ^^Vkw, 324, D. 35.
161 6— connecting vowel,lel'o-oMa<, etc., 314, D. 1.
233, 1—3 Sing. Ind. Act., jeiW, with Genit., 415.
233, 2^2 Sing. Ind. Mid.jieiTa, with Part.,587,4.
233, 3. I eiVe, 94— eiVe-eiVe, 611 ;
;, 639, 1— Atonon, 97, 3— iu giw^^a, 275, 2 ; 278.
Cond. Sent., 535 — with U, ef , 69, Obs. 2 ; 448 ;
Ind., 536— with Opt., 546, with Augm., 238— Atonon,
etc for edv, 545, Obs. 2. 97, 2— with Inf. and Art.,
Obs. ; 324, Obs. ; 325, etc.— el, eWe, el -^dp, in a wish, 514 574, 3— unaltered, 45, Obs. ;
considered as Stem-vowel, — " whether" in Depend. 47, Ex. — ef oZ, 556 ; COl.
43. Interr. Sent., 525; 610. f Kav, Compar., 203, D.
e in the Augm., 236; 275. el-r?, 611 — ei' kcv, see ^dv— iKelvo9,212.
See Syllabic Augm. | el apa, 637, 1— el ydp, 637,'tKt/<XeTo, 257,D. ; 61, D.
€iy, 2 Sing, of ei/ui', 92, D.
el?, h, 448 ; 449— Atonon, 97,
2— with Inf. and Art., 574,
2 — els o, 556.
-e.9, Nora. PL, 157; 161 <?.
-eis-, Masc. and Fern, in, 172.
-etr, 2 Sing. Ind. Act., 233, 2.
-eti-eaaa-ev, Adj. in, 352, 5:
187— Dat. Plur., 50, Obs. 1 ;
149.
eI<7a,def.Aor.,269,D.
627.
453-
e in Redupl., 275— as Redupl., 6 d—ei Kai, 640, 1— el uw,
274,3,4. 639,1.
e connecting vowel, 233, l,!-em,Fem. in, 185— Quantity,
and D. 3, 6 ; 262 ; 336, D. ; 117 ; 341, Obs. ; 342, Obs.
338, D. emro, 315, D. 2.
-e in Nom. Ace. and Vocative et6oi/, 327, 8.
Dual, 141. -ei»},Fem.in,115,D.2. .
ea bec. a", 130— bec. n, 38. eiKe, cUtov, 317, D. 7.
-ea for em, 185, D.— for w in ei'Koo-<(y), 68, 3 ; 220.
Acc. Sing., 185— in i and elKo), with Genit., 419 e.
V Stems, 157— in Diphth,
Stems, 161— bec. n and a,
ibid — bec. ti in the Acc.
PL, ibid.— hec. d or »j in
Fem. of Adj., 183— Ending
of the Plup., 283, D.
td^a, 275, 2; 319,13.
eat bec. f], 38 — bec. e<, ibid.,
Obs. '
kdv, 639, 2— in Condit. Sent.,
535; 545; 548— "whether,"
^ 610— Comp. el.
edvre-hdvTe, 627.
ea^a, 319, 13.
-ea? bec. -et? in Acc. PL, 157
—from na?, 161, Obs
eaTa«,etC.,315, D. 2.
eavTov, 210— used as a pos-
sessive, 472 a.
ed(o, Augm., 236.
e-^yv?, Compar., 204 — with
Genit., 415.
fydov'jrr]<Ta, 325, D. C.
heipw, 2 Aor., 275, D.— Perf.,
275, 1 ; 317, D. 12— Mean
ing, 330, 2.
el«a)i/, Genit., 163
elXeo), 625, D. d.
el\/;\oi/<<a,40,D.; 317, D. 13.
el'Arj^a, ei'\»ixa, 274, Ex.
e'iXoxa, 274, Ex. ; 279.
Aoi/, etc., 327, 1.
elXo), 253, D.— 1 Aor., 270, D.
eJnat, 319, D. 5.
e'ifJiapTai, 274, Ex.
el/x', 315, 1 — Enclit., 92, 3;
315, Obs. 2— with Partic,
287; 289; 291; 505; 590,
Obs. — with Genit., 417 —
with Dat., 432— Accent of
compounds of el/i*, 315,
Obs. 3— <^i/, 428, Obs. ; 580 ;
,585 6— T45 6Wi, 441.
eifxt, 314, 1 — Meaning, 314,
Obs.
elVeKa, see t'veKa.
e'lvuov, 319, D. 5.
ei'fa<r/,317,7.
-etov, Neuters in, 345, 2.
eiTrep, 639, 1.
etVov, 327, 13— Aor. Imper.
Accent, 333, 12.
eKexetpta, 53, 10 d.
kKK\t)(ndt<i), Augm., 239.
UKeiiru), with Acc, 398.
"(cXn^Jai/w, 322, D.26.
eKTr\i]TTOfj.ai, with AcC, 399.
tKT6y, 327, 6.
tKTof, with Genit, 415.
fK(ov, Genit. Abs., 585 & —
eKwv eivai, 570, Obs.
eXdaaav, e\dxi<TTo9, 199, 4
— eXaTTOV, without »;, 626,
Obs.
\a6v(o, 821, 2 — Fut., 203 —
Perf., 275, 1— Plup., 287, D.
— ^Meaning, 476, 1.
Xe-fX^, Perf. Mid., 275, 1;
286, Obs.
XeXv, 827, 1.
eXevOepoM, with Genit, 419 e.
iXOe'iv, eXeixTopiat, 327, 2.
kXr)XddaTO, 287, D.
t-Xiaca), 236.
eXKro), tXKo), 301, 1— Augm.,
236.
eXpitvs!, 50, Obs. 2.
^Xtt/Cco, with Inf., 569.
«?\7ra), Perf., 275, D. 2— Mean-
ing, 330, D. 10.
fc^\<7a,270,D.; 325,D.cZ.
eMawToCs 210— Poss., 472 a.
eptpiy^Kov, 283, D.
e/jLtb), 301, 1.
efjipLevat, 315, D. 1.
i-H/Jiopa, 274, D.
(^pivijpvKa, 275, D. 1.
efiTtecpoi, with Gcuit, 414, 3.
x-
GREEK INDEX.
361
e'MTrXecoc.with Genit.,414, 2.
flJ.npoaOev, with Geuit., 415.
iv (i*-.), 448; 450— unaltered
in corapouutls, 49, Obs. 1 —
bef. p, 51, Obs. 2— Atonon,
97, 2— with Inf. and Art.,
574, 4—61' J), 556.
-e(i'),3Siug.,68,4.
-ei', Nom. of Neuters, 272.
-ei', 3 PI. Aor. Pass., 293, D.
-ivat, Inf., 276,
tvaipu), Augm., 239.
kvavTi6op.ai, Depon. Pass.,
328, 2— Augm., 239.
i-vavrio^, with Dat., 436 h.
tvaaaa, Meaning, 329, D.
t>3e>;9, with Geuit., 414, 2.
hdOo), with double Ace, 402
—Meaning, 329, 4.
eveiKai {eveUot), 327, D. 12.
ti/€Ka, 445 ; 448; 445, 8— with
^ Inf. and Art., 574, 3.
eviniM), evveTTC, Ivianu), etc.,
327, D. 13.
eveprepot, 199, D. (Defect.).
ivijvoOev, 275, D. 2.
eviivoxa, 327, 12.
en, 90.
cuttto), 2 Aor., 257, D.
fvi<Tcra), 250, D.
ivvvfit, 319, 5.
evoxXf'w, double Augm,, 240.
ti/Tor, with Genit., 415.
fvTpinofxai, with Genit., 420.
tft\t7xw, with Part., 593.
l^tKvovfxat, with Genit., 419 c.
f f 6y, 586.
e^o), Comparative, 204 — with
Genit,, 415.
eo bee. ow, 37— bee. ev, 37, D.
1; 165, D,; 233, D. 4; 243,
D. B,j C.
to, cv, eio, etc., 205, D.
eoi bee. 01,37.
toiKa, 317, 7; 275, 2 — con-
strued personally, 571 —
with Part., 590.
toXna, 275, D. 2.
6op7a, 327, D. 3.
fopTu^ca, Augm., 237.
toy, 208, D.
-eo9, Genit. in, 161, D.
-eo9, Adj. in, 352, 4 ; 183— for
-ew9, 184, IX
eov bee. oi», 37— bee, ev, 37, D.
1; 243, D.B.
eiravpidKonai, 324, 24.
CTrej, 556 — knedv, enl/V, lirdv,
557; 635, 5 — in Syuizesis,
C6— with Aor. Ind., 493—
"whenever," 558, Obs. 1.
^ncLdiu 556 ; 635, 6.
eirena, with Part., 587, 4,
^ni, 448 ; 463— with Inf. and
Art., 574, 2, 4.
eTTt'dofor, kniKaipto^ eiyut. Con-
strued personally, 571.
(â– TTihffairtiat, 319, 5.
fc7r4(yu/xt'a>, with Geuit., 420.
CTcid^riK.
hiTiXanfidvopi.ai, tiriXaM^civo-
Ma<,withGenit.,419 6,- 420.
iTTtKeiiro), with Part., 590.
67r(Mt'Xo/ua«,Depon.Pass.,328.
2— with Genit., 420.
eff<<TTaMai,312,10 — Accent. o(
Subj.andOpt.,3t)9 — Depon.
Pass., 328, 2.
67r£<7T/;/Lia)i/,with Genit.,414, 3.
67r<T»j66i6feijut,construed.per-
sonally, 571.
Innpenw, with Inf., 560, 1.
6V\riTO,312,D./.
tnoiJiai, 327, 5— Augm., 236.
e'puCe, 178, D.
fpa/Jiat, 312, 11.
ip<ioi,Aor. Mid.,301, D.— with
Genit., 420.
ep'idCop.ai, Augm., 236.
eptaOov, 319, D. 15.
epdu), 827, 3.
fcpe(7o-co,250,Ob8.—Fut., 260,8.
tpeO-ronai, 322, D. 40.
epr\pi6aTai, 287, D.
epi^oi, with Dat., 436 a.
eptfipo?, Nom. PI., 175, D.
tprro), tpTrtCw, Augm., 236.
eppadarai, 287, D.
eppd), 326, 17. '
eppco-ya, 278 ; 319, 24.
eppoj/utVor, Compar., 196 h.
ipct], 115.
6'po-n»',lS9, D.
epi;'j7oi/w, 823, D. 40.
ept^Kco, 2 Aor.,257,D.
epi/fft'a<,etC.,814, D.
epi)a)*Aor.,301, D.
'4pxarat, etc., 319, D. 15.
epxoMai, 327, 2.
fp5, 327, 13, and Obs.
t'pwr, 177, D. 20.
epwTftoj.with doub. Ace, 402.
-e?, Nxjm. of Neuters^72,
-er, Ending of Nom. PI., 141 ;
173, 8, 2.
kaeiu,, 315, D. 3 (errM ; 327, 4
—with Genit., 419 d.
fCKov, 337, D.
eV7ret<7|Liai,286, 1, Obs.
eaTTofinv, etc., 327, 5.
eanov, 327, D. 13.
-eaaa, Fem. of Adj., 187.
eVo-a^ etc., 269, D.
-ecr<7<(0,Dat.Pl.,14l,D.; 153,
D. ; 158,_D. ; 105, D.
HaavjjLai, 274, D.
iaauiv, 199, D. 2.
'taTe, "until," 550.
-eTTepo^, -cffTaTor, Compar.
Ending, 196.
eo-T/jf o), 311, 291.
bori. Accented, 96 ; 315, Obs.
2—eariv o'i, ov, etc., 603.
Utiuu), Augm., 236 — with
Ace, 400 c— with Genit.,
419 d.
e<rxaTor, 200 ; 391.
f-'o-o), Compar,, 204. See el'o-w.
£tu(^hi/,29S.
Q
iiwvvvjsi.
i-Td(j}r]v, see OdTTToy.
trepos.with Genit.,416,Obs.3.
ht^ciai. Genit. PL, 123.
f-Topoi/, 326, D. 44.
ev bee. ef, 35, D. 2 ; 248, Obs.
— from €o, €ov, see eo, eov.
ev, 202 — Augm. in Com-
pounds, 241— £11 7rottw,wilh
Acc, 396.
evadov, 322, D. 23.
evdioi, Compar., 195.
evep'^eriu), with Acc, 396.
eudv, with Geuit., 416—evOvt,
^ with Part., 587, 3.
evKTifxevoi, 316, D. 25.
fci<Xa/3eoMa4,Depon.Pass.,328,
2— with Acc, 399.
ewour, Accent, 183 — Compar.,
196 c.
evpioKui, 324, 25— with Part.,
591.
eiipiii, Acc. Sing., 157, D.
-euv, Genit. in, 1G1,D.; 165,D.
-e..?, Nom. Sing., 841, 1 ; 849,
1; 187; 172.
eine. See ore.
ey<^a«'vw, Meaning of the Aor.
Pass., 828, 8.
-efw, Verbs in, 853, 4.
e'^a^ov, 327, 4.
t^' J), e(p' tuTc, 601.
exea, 269.
frx^por, Compar., 198.
txw, 327, 6 — Augm., 236 —
Meaning, 476, 1 — Diff. of
Pres. and Aor., 498 — with
Inf., 560,1— with Part., 590
— ex^f, SSO — e'xofiat, with
Genit., 419 b.
Ho), 320, 19.
€0) for ao, see ao — in the At-
tic Declens., 132, etc.— in
Contracted Verbs, 243, D.,
Herod — as one Syll., 121,
D. 3&; 133,1; 157.
eco, Genit. Sing., 121, D. 3 &;
177, 11 — Verbs in, 248;
253, 8 — Fut., 260, 2; 204;
263.
eu>0a, 275, D. 2.
awfiei', etc., 312, D, 13.
-ewv, Genit, of o- Declens.,
118, D.
tcorC till"), 556; 035, T.
tw9,Decl.,163.
-ew9, Genit,, 161, Obs.
C, Pronunt., 5— Pres. Stems
"n, 251, Obs.
C'«w, Contract., 244, 2.
Ce, Local Suffix, 178.
^eu-yi/K/ut, 819, 16.
/.evi,in,l.
Cew, 301,1.
CnX6fc),withAcc,, 398.
Co), Char, of Verbs, 251, Obs.
andD — Fut, 260,3. Comp.
203.
J^iovvvfit, 319,9.
362
GREEK INDEX.
», for d, 24, D. 1; 115, D. 2;!
ISO, D.; 244, 2; 161, D.;!
270, Obs. See e. I
t] after o.lSO, Ex.— bee. <o,43.
n, Syll. Augm., 234, Obs.
-t], Voc. Sing., 121— iu Ace.
Pl.,157— iu the Dual, 158;
16G— in the Aee. Sing., IGl,
D, ; 166— Conn. Vowel, 233,
1— Ending of 1 and 3 Plur.
Flap., 283.
-n, 2 Sing.Ind. and Subj.Mid.,
' 233, 3, 4.
»j and h, Synizesis, 66— Diff.,
99; 643,9.
fi {iif)-ri (lie), 611, Obs.
ri, in iudir. questions, 610 —
n and ri-n, 626 a, and Obs.
— ») and n ware, with Inf.,
566.
n, luterr., 607 &— "really?"
643, 9 — ri -jap, fi TTov, 608;
636, 6 d—h M^", 643, 9.
^, "he spoke, "312,1.
pa, yetv, 314.
rifiuaKU), 324, 3.
i'tyayov, 267.
»,dfe, 624 b, 1.
»j5oMat, Depon. Pass., 328, 2—
with Dat., 439, Obs.— with
Part., 592.
riaw, Fern., 185, D.
Tieipa, 270, D.
^Ka, 313.
mtara, 199, 2.
iiKM, Meaning, 486, Obs.
fiXiKo?, Attr. in, 600.
aXirov, 323, D. 87.
fiXvOov, 327, 2.
Vfxai, 315, 2.
rin^poTov, 322, D. 12.
»!/ueV->)ae, 024 6, 2.
V«. ^v, ^, 312, 1.
^Mo?, 556: 634,4.
riij.iTiarxov, 323, 36.
inintXaCKov, 324, 23.
rifJ^<piecra, 319, 5.
-riv, Nom., H2.
VV, see edi/.
^w€7Koi/, »ji/e<Ko, 327, 12.
r,v{Ka,556; 634,3.
r,i'£7ra7rov, 257, 1).
tji/uTo, 319, D. 28.
t]o bee. 0), 37 no?, rjo, rja?,
^ 161, Obs.— not; bee. w, 37.
11 Trap, 176.
riT!-a<pov, 324, D. 33.
-rip, Nom. 172.
^P,142,4.
•HpaK\r,r, 167, D.
tipapoi/, 324, D. 34.
vpiirov, Meaning, 329, D.
»}p6/iriv, 326, 16.
-nr, Nom. PI., 161 d.
-m, Nom. Sing., 172 ; 174, D.
->i?, Prop. Names in, 174.
'm, Adj. in, 355 — Comp., 197.
-»;<n(i/), Dat. Plur. of a-Decl.,
' 119, D.
iifTaoiv, 199, 2.
mvxoi, Compar., 195.^
mot, 94; 643, 11 — rirot- »i,
626 a.
nrop, Gender, 139.
fmuofxat, with Genit., 423.
riTTCiV, 199, 2.
rjtiTc, 632, 5.
i,<piet, 240 ; 313, 1.
7ixa.279.
w,217,D.
M, 163, D.
0, Pronunt., 7 — in the Perf.,
286, 4— iu the Weak Pass.
Stem, 298— Nopi. Sing, of
Stems iu, 147, Obs. 2— Af-
fixed to Pres. and 2 Aor.
Stems, 338, D.— bee. a, 307.
Sefe also Dentals.
Oavelv, 324, 4.
OdnTU), 64 c ; 298.
Oappiw, With A-ce., 399.
Odaaov, gee TaxiT.
et'nepov, 66, Obs. 1.
Oavixd'Cu), with Genit., 417,
Obs. ; 422, Obs.
OavfiacTTo^ bao^, ete., 602.
Oed,115,lD.2; 117.
OiXa, lOeXm, 326, 20.
6/eM'y, 177, D. 21.
-Oe{v), Suffix, 178, 2 ; 68, D.—
for the Genitive, 205, D. ;
178, D.
6>e6r,Voc. Sing., 129, D.
Otpetoi, 350.
Oipofiai, Fut., 262, D. •
t^tw, 248— Fut., 260, 2.
^^n^iT, as Fem., 185, Obs.
ei]v, Enclit., 92, 5 ; 643, 17.
Onpaa, with Aceus., 398.
Oi bee. CO-, 57.
-Oi, Loc. Suff.,178, 1— Ending
of 2P.Imper.,228; 302,5;
807.
Oif-idvui, 322, 24.
exdo), 301, 1.
OviiaKoi, 324, 4— Perf., 317, 3—
Perf. Part., 276, D.— 3 Fut.,
291— Siguif.,486,Obs.
Oo]iJidTiov, 65, Obs. 1.
eopvvpiai, 324, D. 15.
^Pif,54a; 145.
6 pinna), 54 f'.
OpwaKoy, 59 ; 324, 15.
(/i/7«Tnp, 153.
ev- npo- Ovfjieofiai, Dcpon.
Pass., 328, 2.
6»^pdo-<(i/),179.
Oufo, 301, 2— Aor. Pass., 53,
10 6.
6>a.9,Genit., PI. and Du.,142, 3.
J, Pronnnt., 4— Long by Nat.,
83, Obs. 1 — Lengthened,
253, Obs.— r bee. .-, e<, oi,
40 ; 278—. of the Stem bee.
e, 157— Changes, 55; 168;
250, etc.
-I, Locative Ending, 179 —
Demonst., 212— Neat, in,
139; 172.
-I, Nom. Ending in the PI.,
134, 9 — Dat. Sing., 141;
173, 2.
I, Sign of the Opt., 22S-Ke-
dupl.,308; 327, D. 17— Con-
nect. Vowel, 348; 351— Af-
fixed to the Stem in the
Dat. PL, 119; 134,8.
I, Subscribed, 8; 12; 27; 65,
Obs. 2— Dat. Sing., 134, 3;
169 ; 173, 2.
I, Verbs in the Pres. with,
250, etc.; 822, Obs. — their
Fut., 260,3; 262.
la for to, 348.
-la, Fern, in, 346, 3; 185,
ete.
i'a, iTi^, ifj, tw, 220, D. 1.
IdoMoj, Meaning of the Aor.
Pass., 328, 4.
laCio, 327, D. 17.
-mw, Verbs in, 353, Obs. 2.
ide (Couj.),624 b, 1— (Imper.),
827,8; 333,12.
-idiov, Neut. in, 347, 1, Obs,
'idi or,wit h Genit. , 414, 1— wi th
Dat., 436 6.
«apir,158; 189,3.
idpvu), Aor. Pass,, 298, D.
Idpwi, 169, D.
lepoi, with Genit., 414, 1.
lC«i'a),822,17.
't^otxat, 326, 21.
-<C«, Verbs in, 363, 5-Fut.,
263,
in, Char, of the Op* 293;
302, 4.
i'nM«, 313, 1.
100^, Superl., 193, D.
iKfxevov, 316, D. ; 323, D, 33.
iKveo/JLai, iKvvviJiai, 323, 83—
1 Aor., 268, D.
-ik6<:, Adj. in, 351 — with
Genit., 414, 6.
iXdaKo/jiai, 324, 5 — Imper.,
312, D. 15.
i'Xeur, 184.
IfxdcTKTa), 260, D.
-IV, Subs, in, 172 tv, Dual
Ending in Genit. and Dat.,
134,6; 173,4.
IVa, 638, 1 — in Sentences of
Purpose, 530.
-<i/or. Adj. in, 852, 15, 4, Obs.
-lo, Geuit. Ending, 128, D.
-jo^, Neut. in, 847,1.
-4 09, Adj. in, 350.
L^ov, 823, D. 83,
ipor, 35, D. 1.
-<9, Nom. of Fem. in, 138 ; 172
—Barytones in Ace. Sing.,
156.
IVkc, 324, D. 36,
-to-Kof, -laKti, Subs, in, 847, 2.
l'o-o9,Corapar.,195— withDat,,
436 &.
GREEK INDEX.
363
-lO-TCpOf.
-taTepo9, -tffTaTor, Compar.,
197.
iffTHM<, Perf., 31T, 4— Mean-
ing, 329,1— of the Perf., 503.
io-xi'to, Diflf. of Pres. and Aor.,
498.
*xf)6i, Dat. Sing., 158, D.—
Ace. PI., 158— Masc., 140.
Jxwp, Ace. Sing., 175, D.
-luv, Nom. of Masc. in, 348,
Obs.
-lav, -to-Toy, Compar,, 198.
K, in ouK, C9, Obs. 1 — New-
Ion, for TT, 216, D— Asp. in
the Perfect, 279. See also
Gutturals.
-Kajl Aor. in, 310.
KaOedovfxai, 326, 21.
KaOeOdu, 326, 18— Augm., 240.
KdOnfiai, 315, 2— Augm., 240.
KaOiK<o, Fut., etc., 32G, 21—
Augm., 240.
Kal, 624 6— Crasis, G5— with
Numbers, 222— with Part,
S87, 5 — Kai or, Kai Tov, 369,
2 — Kai 6e, G24, 3 — Kai-Kai,
624, 2, 3— Kai a;; Kai, 624, 4
— Kac 61,640, 2 — Kai Tore 6>i,
642, 4 a.
KatVu/ia*, 319, D. 33.
Kaiirep, with Part., 587, 5.
KaiTOi, 630, 6 ; 94.
Kaioi, 35, Obs.; 263, Obs
Future, 260, 2—1 Aorist,
269, D.
KaKov \tyo), KaKwt 5ro£ta),with
Acc.,402; 896.
KaKoi, Compar., 199, 2.
«a\6a),301,3.
Ka\69, Compar., 199, 6.
Kd/jivo^, 321, 9— Perfect, 282—
with Ace, 400 & — with
Part., 590.
Kai'eoi', Kavovv, 131, 3.
K«pa, 177, D. 22.
Kaprepto), with Part., 590.
Kara, 448; 459— Apocope, 64,
D. — with Inf. and Art.,
574, 2.
KaTairXiiTTO/jiai, with AcC,
399.
Karrjyopto), Augm., 239.
Kara), Compar., 204.
Ke7ai, etc., 269, D.
KeliJiai, 314, 2.
Keli/or, see eKeTvo^.
Keipa, Fut., 262, D.
K6KacrMa',320,D. 33.
KtKXniJiai, Meaning, 503.
KtKTt^fjiat, 274, Ex. — Moods,
289— Meaning, S03. ,
KeXade'o). 325, D. e.
KeXeuo), Perf., 288.
«6\\a),FHt.,266,Es.
KeXofiat, Aor., 257, D.
«e(v), 68, D.— Enclit., 92, 5.
See ttf.
Kevrea, 825,1}./.
Kepdvvvnt, 31^, 1— Sub. Mid.,
312, D. 16.
Kepdaivw, Aor., 270, Obs. —
Perf., 322, Obs.
KeffKCTo, 337, D.
Krai, etc., 209, D.
Kiidu), 326, D. 41.
KKpv^, S3, Obs. 1 ; 145.
KiK\t]ffKM, 324, D. 31.
Kivunai, 319, D. 34.
Kipvn^xi, 312, D. &.
K(x«i/a), 321,18.
K.xMM', 313, D. 6 ; 322, 18.
k/xpiM<. 312, 7.
1/, etc., 319, D. 34.
K\aCw» 251, Obs. — Meaning
of the Perf. Act., 276, D.
KXa/o), 253, Obs.; 326, 22 —
Fut., 260, 2.
KAdo), 301,1.
KXe/fjAcCjlSG.
KAe/o), KAjio), Perf. Mid., 288.
KXtTTTn?, 'Compar., 197.
KXtTTTw, Perfect, 279— Aorist
Pass., 295.
kXts, Proper Names in, 167;
174.
kA/i/o), Perf., 282.
kAuo), Aor., 316, D. 27.
Kvuu), Contr., 244, 2.
i/.Vffr),115,D.2.
Koiv6<s, KotvMvtoj, with Genit.,
414, 1 ; 419 o— with Dat.,
436 a, b.
KoTo^, Koao^, etc., 216, D.
KoXaKet'jo), with Acc, 396.
KoTTTwandcompoundSjMean-
ing, 476, 2.
Koptvvvfxi, 319, 6.
Kopeo), Aor.,801, D.
K6pr\, Koppr], 115.
Kopvaau), 250, D. — Perfect,
286, D.
-Koi, Adj. in, 351.
KOTtw, Aor., 301, D. — Per£
Part., 277, D.
KpdC«, 251— Perf., 317, 8.
Kparew, with Geuit., 423.
KpuTo?, etc., see Kdpa.
KpuTy?, Positive, 199, D. 1,
Kpciaaiav, Kpariaro^, 199, 1,
Obs.
Kpe^dvvvfxi, KpffiajJiat, 319, 2;
312, 12— Acc. of Sub. and
Opt., 309.
Kpefxoui, 319, D. 2.
Kpecraav, 199, D. 1.
Kpijfxvaisai, 312, D. C.
Kpivoi, 253, Obs.— Perf., 282;
286, Obs.
Kpoyo), Perf. Mid., 288.
(cpyTTTWjWith double Acc.,402.
KTcti/o), Aor,, 316, 4.
KTivVVIXl, 319, 17.
KTi/Treo), 325, D. g.
KvlffKia, 324, 21.
KVKewv, Acc. Sing., 171, D.
KvXlo}, Perf. Mid., 288.
xi^ctw, 323, 34.
fxaKpav.
Kvvrepo^, 199, D.
Ki/ptoj, Kupo), 325, 4— Future,
262, Ex with Part., 590.
Kvarai, Kvaaa, 323, D. 34.
Kvuv, 177, 8.
KwAyco, with Inf., 560, 3.
A doubled after the Syll.
Augm., 234, D, — Charac-
ter, 252.
A, n, V, p, Metathesis, 59 —
Position, 77, /, and D
Eedupl., 274, 2 — Fut, of
Stems in, 262— Aor,, 270—
Perf,, 280.
A,v,p,Monos. Stems in, Perf.,
282— Aor, Pass., 298.
Aa7xdi"o, 322,27— with Genit.
and Acc, 419, Obs.
Aa7c69,174.
Ad^pajWith Genit., 415.
AdAor, Compar., 197.
\an/3dvo), 322, 25-Perf., 274,
Ex.— with Genit., 419 b—
Meaning, 480.
\dfx\},ofxax, 322, D. 25.
WavOdvoo, 322, 20- with Acc,
398— with Part., 590.
Aar, 177, 9.
Ado-Ko), 324, 29, and Obs,
Xeyonai, construed person-
ally, 571,
A67<o (collect), Perf., 279—2
Aor. M., 316, D. 35.
AetVoyuat, with Genit,, 423.
XeKTO, Afr7/i£vo9, etc, 316, D.
36 ; 268, D.
Ae'AnKa, 324, 29.
XtAo7X<if322, D. 27.
Aeuo), Perf. Mid., 288.
XfiOcj, 322, 26.
ArjKea), 324, D. 29,
A^?oMa«,322,27.
Ayjx//oMa(,322,25.
Xi bee AA, 56 ; 252.
Xicao/jiai, 250, D.
AA, Pres. Stems in, 252.
Aoe, 244, D. 4.
XSeaaa, 269, D.
TO Xoiniiv, 405, Obs, 2.
XoTc70oi, XoiaOio^, 199, D.
-Ao?,Adj. in, 352, Obs.
Xovo}, Constr., 244, 4 — 1 Aor.,
269, D.
Ai/TToI^Ma', with Dat., 439,Obs.
Xvw, 301, 2— Perf. Opt. Mid.,
289, D.— Aor,, 316, D, 28—
%yith Genit, 419 c.
Xutoiv, AaJffToy, 199, 1.
fi bef. p, 51, Obs. 2— bef, A bee.
/3, 51, D.— Change of pre-
ceding Cons., 47; 286, 1—
doubled after the Syll.
Augm., 234, D.
fxd, 643, 16.
-na, Nom. of Neuters, 343, 1 ;
130.
/iuKpdi', 405, Obs. 2.
364
GEEEK INDEX.
fxuXa.
fxd\a, /laWov, /uuXiffra, 202
fidXicna hi], 642 a.
ixdv, see fxtiv.
fxavOdvu), 322, 2S— with Part.,
591.
fxdvTi^, of both Genders, 140,
/uapi/o/Liaj, Imper., 312, D. d.
fiapTvpeu), 325, 5.
Iidprvi, 177, 10.
fJ.d(T<T(l}V, fXrjKtCTTO^, 198, D.
uao-Ti'Ctd, 251, Obs.— Future.
260, 8.
M«<rTjf, 177, D. 23.
fxdxonat, /jLaxto/iXai, 326, 23,
and D.— with Dat., 430 a.
nejai, 191 — Compar., 198 —
/ue^a, 401,
fxidonai, 326, D. 42.
fieeuffKco, 324, 22.
fxeipofxai, Perf., 274, D.
/ueir,177,D.24.
fietcav, see fjiiKpoi — /ueroi/ with
out n, 626, Obs.
/LteXar, 186.
fxtXet, 826, 24— with Geuit.
420, J-
/txeXXo), 826, 25— Angm , 2li,
Obs.— as Fut., 501— TTws, ti
oil txiXKu), 501, Obs. 2.
/xfcjuaToi/, etc., 317, D. 9.
fiefji/3\eTai, etc., 326, D. 24.
/ueM/3Xa)Ka, 51, D. ; 282, D.
324, D. 12.
/Li€jueT<juti/oy, 313, D. 1.
/xfM«'»iMa«.274,Ex.— Sub.Opt,
289, D.— Meaning, 503-
with Part., 591.
fiiv, comp, firiv—fxevs^e, 628 —
fxev olv, 637, 2, *
-ftew, 1 Pers. Dual and Plural
Act., 226,
-fxevai, -fxev. Inf. Act., 233,
D. 3 ; 255, D.— Aor. Pass.,
293, D, — in Verbs in /u.,
302, D,
nivToi, 630,5.
Mt'i'a),326,20,
iie(Tt]iij3pia, 51, Obs. 2.
ixtaoi, Compar., 195— Mean-
ing, 801.
/leo-Tcis-, with Genit, 414, 2.
nerd, 448; 464— Adverb, 446.
HeTaSidoaiuLi, fieTaXan^dvu),
with Genit,, 419 a.
{leTafxeXofjiai, Dep. PaSS.,328.
2— with Part., 592.
MeTaf^,446; 448; 455,7— with
Part., 587, 2.
HeTanefxnoiJiat, Pass. mean.,
483,3— Indir. Mid., 479.
/icTfrxw, jU€Toxor, with Genit,,
419 a, and Obs.; 414,5.
fieXP<W, 69, Observ. 3; 445;
448 ; 455, 6 ; 556— without
Elision, 64, Obs. 1.
H^, Synizesis, 66— Neg., 612,
etc. — in sentences of pur-
pose, 530— with Verbs of
prohibiting,518; 510— with
Verbs of fearing, 512 ; 533 ;
616, Obs. 3— with Future
and Perf. Ind., 533, Obs.—
with Hypoth. Part., 583-
In questions, 608 — "wheth
er perchance," 610 — m'/ ov
621; 512; 533 — M^; on
622, 4.
litlSeii, fiijiro}, etc., see ovdek,
ouno), etc.
UTtKdo/iai, 325, D. 0,
finv, 643, 12.
M^Tr)p,150. 153.
-ju^ 1 Pers. Sing. Act., 226 ;
302, 1 — Subj., 233, D. 1;
255, D.
fii-ivvfxi, 319, 18.
niKpoi, Compar., 199, 3.
/jn/jiiofxat, Meaning, 328, 4—
with Ace, 398.
txi^ivijaKU), 274, Ex.; 824, 6—
fjnnx/riffKofxai, with Genit.,
420.
niv, 205. D.
Mil/tor, Acc. Sing., 103, D.;
174, D.
fiicryu), 327, T— Aor. Mid., 316,
D.87.
fiv, in divis. of Syll., 72, 1.
nva, Genit. Sing., 116 c.
imitjfKav, with Genit., 414, 8.
Mo\oi}/uu', 324,12.
fjiovov ov, ovxi, 622, 5.
/j.ovocpd'foi, comp., 197.
Mor, Masc. in, 342, 2— Adj.
in, 352, Obs.
fiiC^, 326, 27.
fXVKdofJiai, 825, D. p.
iJiV9, Masc, 140.
', before o- (and dropped,
49; 147,1; 149; 187— bef,
other Conson., 51 — bee. 7,
51 ; 282— Present Stems in,
253 — dropped in Perfect
Stems, 282 ; 286, 1, Obs.—
inserted in 1 Aor, Pass.,
298, D.— affixed to Verb.-
Stem, 321— doubled after
the Syll. Augm., 234, D.—
doubled in the Pres. Stem,
318, 3— movable, 68.
V, in the Acc. Sing., 134,4;
141 ; 155, etc. ; 173, 3— in
Neuters, 125—1 Pers. Sing,
in Hist. Tenses Act., 226—
3 PI. in Hist. Tenses, 226 ;
302, D.
va, affixed to Verb.-Stems,
312, D.
vat, Inf., 302, 6; 333,1.
vai, 643, 14.
eT«a)^Contr.,243, D.l.
vavi, 177, 11.
I'd, vO, VT, dropped before a,
50—147, 1 ; 149.
-v€, affixed to Verb.-Stems,
323.
o'Uade.
vefxu>, 326, 28.
veto, 24S— Fut., 260, 2.
vi,, 643, 15.
w'Co), 251, Obs.
iiKaoi 'oXufjiiria, 400 c — Mean-
ing, 486, Obs.
wi/,205,D. ^
uTTo-, dia-, €v-, Ttpo- voiofiat,
Dep. Pass., 328, 2.
i/o/u«Cw, with Genitive, 417 —
with Inf., 569.
-vof, Adj. in, 352, Obs.
i/oo-ew.Diflf. of Pres. and Aor.,
498.
voaoi. Fern., 127, 5,
-vTi, 3 Plur. of Princ. Tenses
Act, 226.
-vrwv, 3 PI. Imper. Act., 228.
-vv affixed to Verb.-Stems,
804, 2 ; 318, 1,
vvix<j)a,Yoc. Sing., 117, D, 3.
vv{v), 08, D.— Enclit., 92, 5—
Diff.of vi'i/ and vvv,^Q\ 637,
8 — vvv 61}, 642, 4 c.
i/wtrepor, 208, D.
f,34;48;260.
-f , Masc. and Fern, in, 172.
fto), 301,1.
^vpto), 325, 0.
^vio, Perf. Mid., 288.
o, bee. oy, 24, D. 3 ; 42; 147,1;
bee. oi, 24, D. 3— bee. w, 40 ;
147, 2; 151; 193; 233, 4—
bee. e, 243, D. c — dropped
after ai, 194— for a, 268, D. ;
854— Conn. Vowel, 178; 238,
1; 354.
-o, Genit. Ending, 122, Obs. ;
128; 131, D.
o, for o?, 213, D.— Neut. for
oTi, 633, 1— Crasis, 65.
o /div — o 6e, 369,1 — Tov Kal top,
369, 2. See t6.
I bee. a, 87— bee. a, 188.
ode, 212; 475. See also De-
monst. Pron.
iSOpecrOai, with AcC, 400 C.
6du}da, 275, D. 1.
bee. ov, 87.
oei bee. oc or ov, 87; 248, Obs.
-oeidn<:, Adj. in, 359, 2, Obs.
o^o), 326, 29— Perf. 275, D. 1.
on bee. (o, 87.
oOi, irdOi, t60i, 217, D.
oOovveKa, 636, 3.
ot from t, 40— bee. w, 235.
<,dropped,64,D.— Short in
regard to Acc, 83, Obs. 2;
108— Voc ending, 163.
o'l'ywimi, 319, 19.
o'lda, 317, 6— with Part., 591.
6dvta,ol6em, 322, 19.
O'ldinovi, 174, D.
o« n, ending for -om, 115, D. 2,
-GUI', Genit. and Dat. Dual,
128, D. ; 141, D.
oJ'Kade, 94 ; 178.
GREEK INDEX.
365
o.Ketor.
oUeiov, with Genit., 414, 1—
with Dat., 436 &.
o'lKot, 179.
o<.KTpor, Compar., 108.
olfxai, 244.
oifxwX.'^, 251, Obi'.— Fnt., 2C0, 3
—Mean, of Fut. Mid., 266.
-oil/, ending of Genitive and
Dative Dual, 141 ; 173, 4.
oicoxofco), Angm., 237, D.
-oio,\n the Genit., 128, D.—
2 Pers. Sing. Opt. Mid.,
233, 5.
olo, 213, D.
oi'oMai, 6i'oMa«, 326,30— 2 Pers.
Sing. Pres., 233, 3 — Dep.
Pass., 328, 2.
olor, Attr. and Article, 600 —
with Inf., 601 — oI(io-Te, 94
— olov, ola bij, with Part.,
587, 6.
oh, 160.
oiae, 268, 'D.—o"iGei, 327, 12.
-ot<7«(0,I>at.Pl.,128,D.
oiVoj, ett., 327, 12.
oixofxai, oix>'tw, 326, 31, and
D.— Meaning, 486, Obs
with Part., 590.
oXeKo), 319, D. 20.
o\t7o?, Compar., 199, 4.
o\i7a)pe'&), with Genit, 420.
hXiaOdvu), 322, 20.
oWvut, 319, 20— Meaning of
Perf., 329, 9; 503 — Itera-
tive, 337, D.
oXof, Position, 390.
*O\i^M'''»a,400 c.
o/itXew, with Dat., 436 a.
ofivvnt, 319, 21 — with the
^ Ace, 399.
o/io<09, onotoofiat, o/xoXo^t'o),
oyuoi;, etc., with Dat., 436 a,
6, c.
6fio\oy4ofxai, constr. person-
ally, 571.
oidop'fvvfMi, 319, 22.
6fiuivv/j.o<!, with Dat., 436 b.
o/utof, 630, 7— after Participle,
587,6.
-oi/,Nom. of Neuters, 172.
oveipof, 175.
ovivnfJ-i, 312, 2 — Ace. of Aor.
Sub. and Opt. Mid., 309—
^ with Accus., 396.
ovo^xat, 314, D.
if .^yo), Perf. Mid., 28G, Obs.
oo bee. ou, 36 ; 130.
-oor, Adj. in, 183.
vov, 213, D.
oTrnv/Ka, 634, 3.
oniaOev, with Genit., 415.
oTTore, oiroTov, 556 ; 634, 1 —
" as often -as," 558, Obs. 1.
oVtriTra, 275, D. 1.
oTTWf , 632, 3— in sentences of
purpose, 530— with av, 531
6, Obs.— with Future Ind.,
500; 553 — in Challenges
and Warnings, 553, Obs.—
oTTwv jLi>'/, with Verbs of
Fearing, 533, Obs.
opao), 327, 8 — Double Augm.,
237— Perf., 327, 8; 275, D.l
—with Part., 591.
opfaivoi, Aor., 270, Obs.
opiyvvm, 319, D. 30.
ope-fofjiat, with Genit., 419 c.
opeovTo, 320, D. 37.
opwf , 177, 12— Ace. Sing., 156.
iipwijit, 319, D. 37—2 Aorist
Mid., 316, D. 38.
opovTai, 327, D. 8.
op6m, 243, D. 3 a.
Spaeo, 268, D.
opvGCTo), Perf., 275, 1.
opwpa, 320, D. 37.
-09, Neuters in, 243, 2, and
Obs. ; 139; 172— Ending of
Genit., 141 ; 157, D. ; 173,
8,1. .
o9, Relative, 213— Demonst.
212, D.; 213, Obs., and D.—
for the Possess, of 1 and 2
Pers., 471, Obs. c; 208, D,
oaw, Attr., 600— cffov, 601—
oaov ov, 622, 5.
oaaaTio?, 216, D.
6'aae, 177, D. 25.
oCTTiy, 94—214, Obs. 2— offTt?
and 6(TTiiovv,Me£in., 600.
IxTtppaivo/iai, 822, 21, and Obs.
ore, orav, 556; 634, 1— with
Aor. Ind., 493 — "as often
as," 558, Obs. 1.
on and o Ti, 214, Obs. 2.
oTt, 633, 1— without Elision
64, Obs. 1 — in Dependent
Declarative Sentences, 525
— oTt lit], 633, 1 b.
6rin, 218.
St.9, 214, D.
ov from o. See o.'
-ou, Genitive ending, 122, 2 ;
128; 134, 2-Conn. Vowel,
233, 1—2 Pers. Sing. Imper.
. and Imperf. Mid., 233, 5.
ov, ovK, ovx, 69, Obs. 1 ; 52, D.
— Atonons, 97.4; 612, etc.
—with Prohibitives, 499,
Obs.— in questions,60S — ov
tap, ov yap aWd, 636, 6 d.
— ov 6rira, 642, 6 — ovk iipa,
637, 1—ov fxiu 620— ou /u^"
(juevTOi) aWd, 622, 6 — ov
{Xovov-uWcc Kal, 624, 6.
ov, ol, J-', etc., Meaning, 471,
Obs. b.
oi5e,625, 1.
oidek, 221— Attr., (J02—ov6ev,
622, 1.
o^K6T<,622, 2.
ovKovv and ovKovv, Diff. 99 ;
637, 2.
ov\6fxevof, 319, D. 20.
olv, 637, 2— Atfixed, 218.
-oyv, Ace. Sing., 163, D.
ovveKa, 636, 3.
o£,?, 65, D.
Trutrxo).
oiVo), 622, 2.
ovptio. Augment, 237.
-01/9, Adj. in, 183; 352, 4—
Nom. of Subs., 172.
ol?, 177, 13 ; 142, 8 — Neut.,
140.
ouTuoj.Aor., 316, 20, D.
ovTe,94 — ovTe-ovTe,ovTe-ovde,
625, 2, and Obs.
oUti, 622, 1.
ovToi, 643, 10.
ouT09,,212; 475;— in address-
ing, 393— ouToo-;, 212.
o[;T<o(9),69,Obs.3— withPart.,
587, 4.
o^x',,97, Obs.
ovx OT«, oix O7rt09, 622, 3, 4.
bcpeiXo) and 6d)e\\w,Diff.,253,
Obs.
b<pei\u), 326, 32.
o<p€\\a), 1 Aor., 270, D.
o0\«ffKai/c<), 322, 22.
o(Ppa, 556 ; 635, 10.— See 'iva.
b<ppvi, ACC. PI., 158.
6'xo9, PI., 174, D.
6xo)Ka, 327, D. 6.
b\j/iof, Comp., 195.
o^ofiai, 327, 8.
b^o(pdyo^, Compar., 197.
-ow, Length, in Contr. Verb,
243, D. A. 3— Attic Fut.,
263, D.— Verbs in, 353, 1,
and Obs. 1.
IT, doubled, 217, D. (62, D.)—
Aspir. in Perf., 279.
7ra7f, Genit., Plur. and Dual,
142, 3— Voc. Sing., 148— of
two Genders, 140.
naiw, Perf. Mid., 288.
naXaiov, Compar., 194.
wdAiv, in Compos, before a-,
49, Obs. 1.
ndX\o>, Aor. 257, D.— 2 Aor.
Mid., 316, D. 40.
nav, 142, 6— in Compos, be-
fore or, 49, Obs. 1.
â– 7ravT(ina<rt{v), 68, 3.
napci, Ttapai, nap, 448, III. ;
465— Apoc, 64, D.
irdpa, 90.
napavoiJ.eb}, ineg. Augm. ,239.
napan\i](Ttoi, With Dat., 436
&— Compar., 195.
irapaTiOeiJiat, 481,
7rapaxc«jp6'«>,withGenit.,419 e.
Trape'xw and wapexoMa'. 480.
Trape'xw, with Inf., 561.
napoivfo}, double Aug., 240.
wapov, 586.
ndpov, 565 : 635, 12.
nappnTid^onai, Augm., 239.
7ru9, Genit. and Dat. Accent.,
142, 2— meaning with and
. without Art., 390, and Obs.
Trdaau), 250, Obs.- Fut. 260, 3.
Trdaacov, 198, D.
Trdcrxo), 32Y, 9— Perf,, 317, D.
14. /
366
GEEEK INDEX.
Trareojuaj.
irareoiJiai, 325, 7.
<irar>]p, 153.
iravonai, Aorist, 298 — with
Genit., 419 e— with Part.
mean., 590.
irelOa, Aorist, 257, D.— Perf.,
317, D. 15— Fut. aud Aor.
Part., 326, D. 43 —Mean-
ing, 330, 3 ; 503.
ireivdu), Contr., 244, 2.
TretVojaai, 327, 9.
neKdC(a,l Aor. Imper., 268, D.
jreXeKy?, Masc, 140 ; 157.
nenTTu, Perf., 279.
Trevn?, Compar., 192 — with
Genit., 414, 2.
ireiToi0a, 317, D. 15.
nenovOa, 317, D. 14.
7re7rpa7a and irtirpaxo-, DiffL,
330.
ireTT p(i}Tai, 285, D.
weTTTa/xat, 274, Ex.
weTTTto/ca, 274, Ex. ; 327, 15.
jrenoiKa, 327, 10.
irenojv, Coinpar., 196 a.
jrep, 641, 3— Enclit., 92, 5 —
Affix, 218.
wepa, with Genit, 415— Corn-
par., 200.
jrepdoi, 326, 33.
irepOoi, 2 Aor., 257, D. ; 59, D.
—Aor. Inf. Mid., 316, D. 41.
nepi, 448, III. ; 466— without
Elision,64,Obs.l-Anastr.,
446— Adverb, ibid.—with.
Augm,, 238.
irepi/3dX\oiJiai, with double
Ace, 402.
Tceptfiyvofxat, irepleiiJit, with
Genit., 423.
nepvnm, Part., 312, D. e.
ir€pvcn{v), 68, 3.
Treffetv, 327, 15.
weo-ffw, 250, Obs.
neTuvvvfxi, 319, 3.
nerewf, Genit. Sing., 131, D.
neronai, 326, 34— 2 Aor., 61 c;
257, D.; 316,5.
TtevOoixai, 322, 29.
Tre^i/ov, 257, D.
•Keipvi^oTc^, 277, D.
ff^, Enclit., 92, 4.
nnyvvpLi, 319, 23 — 2 Aorist
Mid., 316, D. 39— Meaning.
830,4.
wnv/Ka, with Genit., 415.
TTJJxi'r, Masc.,140; 154.
ffteCew, 7rjtCw,325,D. A.
nWc, 316, 15.
TrtXi/ajuat, Aor., 312, D.f.
TrjMTAnM', 312, 3— with Gen-
itive, 418.
ninnprifxi, 312, 4.
tt/vo), 321, 4 ; 327, 10— Future,
265— Aor., 321, 4; 316,15—
Meaniug,329,7— with Gen-
itive, 419 d, and Obs.
niofxa,, 265; 327,10.
iriTtiaKca, 324, 20.
TrpaTTCi),
â– mirpdaKOi, 324, 7.
tt/ttto), 327, 15 — Perf. Part.,
317, D. 17.
nlavpe<!, 220, D. 4.
TTiTi-ea), 323, 35.
TTtTvu/xt, 312, D. (7.
7r£0ai/cTKw, 324, D. 32.
7r«wv, Compar., 196 a.
TrXdCw, 251, Obs.
irXdcrao), 250, ObS. — FutUre,
â– ",3.
TrXetwv, wXeTcTTo?, 199, 5 —
TrXeov, without n, 626, Obs.
— irXeuv, 199, D. 5.
TrXtKw, Aor. Pass., 295.
TrXeo), 248— Fut., 260, 2 ; 264
-Perf. Mid., 288.
TrXewr, 184 — with Genitive,
414, 2.
nXriOo}, 312, 3 — with Genit.,
418.
nXjv, 445 ; 455, 9, ^
â– nXhpn^t TrXnpoo), with Genit.,
414, 2 ; 418.
nXmiov, Compar., 195— with
Genit., 415.
ffX^ffffM, 2 Aorist and Future
Pass., 295.
TrXfiTO, 316, D. 22.
-ttXoCs, in Multiplicat., 223.
TcXovaio^, with Genit., 414, 2
nXvv(a, Perf., 282.
itXtiiU), Aor,, 316, D. 24.
TTveo), 248 — Fut., 260, 2 ; 264
—Perf. ,285, D. -with Ace.
400 c.
nw^f,177,14
7ro66y, see ttow.
7ro6»6i/, End., 92, 4.
iroeiu, 301, 4.
n-o(^t, see Tvou.
TTot, Encl.,92, 4.
TTOteo) and Tzoieonai, 480 —
with Genit., 417.
7r6X.9, 151, D.— Gender, 138 &
Compos., 189, 3.
TToXtTeuo) and iroXnevouat,
480, Obs.
7roXXdK«(9),69, Obs.3; 224
TToXu?, 191 — Compar., 199, 5
— TToXu, 404, Obs. TToXXw,
with Comp., 440.
noveo), 301, 4.
TToppo), with Genit, 415,
noaeiduiv, Acc, Sing., 171 —
Voc.,148,Obs.
iTore, End., 92, 4.
TTOTepoi/ »j, 611 — in Depend.
Interr. Sentences, 525.
iroTi, see TTpor,
TTou, with Genitive, 415.
7rou(7ro(^0,Encl,,92,4.
TToyXi'/?, Fern,, 185, D.
TToik, 142 b; 147, 1, Ex, —
DatPlur,,49, D.; 141, D.
149, D.— in Compos., 160-
Masc, 140.
wpyor, 191.
TrpdTTO), Meaning, 476, 1 -
Trpdr.To/ia/, with double
Acc, 402.
7rptcr/3i;9, 177, 15.
irp/j(^a), 312, 4.
Trpm/iat, 2 Aorist, 316, 8 —
Accent of Aor. Sub. Opt,,
309.
npiv, 556 ; 635, 11— with Inf.,
565, and Obs. 1, 2.
npioi, Perf. Mid., 288.
np6, 448, B ; 454 — Crasis, 65
— with Augm., in Compos.,
238 — with Inf. and Art,
574, 3 — vp6 Tov, 369, 3.
irpo? {noTi, irpoTi), 448, III.;
467 -Adv., 446— with Inf.
and Art, 574, 2,4.
irpoaOev, itpoaut, with Genit.,
415.
irpo^r,Kov, 586. n
irpo^MTTov, N©m. Acc. Plur.,
175, D.
wpoTcpof, TrpwTor, 200.
npovp'^ov, Compar., 195.
Trpwioi, Compar., 195?
mt]<T(T(t), 316, D. 21.
miaata, 250, Obs.— Future,
260, 3.
nriju), 301, 1.
TTTwxo?, Compar., 197.
TTveiaOai, 322, 29.
UvKvoi, 177, 14.
nO/xaToi, 190, D. (Defect).
nvvedvofxai, 322, 29 — with
Genit,, 420.
irUp,142 6; 151; 175; Neut,
140.
wti), irw(s), End., 92, 4.
Trios', witli Genit,, 415 — nws
7fip oi), 636, 6 d.
p, doubled, 62 — after the
Augm, ,234— after Redupl.,
274, 4^Metathesis, 59— in
2 Aor., 257, D p,pp, 13.
pd, End., 92, 5.— See apa.
pd^boi, Fem., 127, 5.
pd6io^, Compar., 199, 7.
pa/i/co, Plup., 287, D.
pe^co, 327, 3.
pepuTTWjuei/or, 274, D.
peo), 248 ; 326, 35— Fut., 260, 2.
p;77i/i;M', 319, 24; 278— Mean-
ing, 330, 5.
pnOr]<Tonai, etc., 327, 13.
piytu), 325, D. i.
piyiov, 199, D.
piyoM, Contr,, 244, 3.
pmreo}, plirTU), 325, 8.
pvcrOat, etc., 314, D.
pwvvviJ.1, 319, 10.
(T, 2 ; 33 c — effect on preced-
ing Vowel and Cons., 46,
etc. ; 260, etc. ; 286— Cora-
bin,, 48 — Assim, to p, 50 b
—to X, iJi,v,p, 270, D bee.
Spir. Asp,, 60 b; 308; 327,
5 Obs.— from t, see t.
GREEK INDEX.
367
a, dropped, 61 a, ft— in Sigma
Stems,166— iuPres.Steras,
233, 3, 4, 5— in the Future,
202, Obs., etc. — in tlie 1
Aor., 268; 269, D.; 270 —
in the 2 Aor. Mid., 307— in
the Pert*, and Plup. Mid.,
2S4, D.
<r, inserted in the Perf., 2S8
—in the Weak Pass. Stem,
2ys— in the Verb. Adj., 300
—in Deri v., 340, Obs. 2— in
Compos., 358, 2.
(T, doubled in the Dat. Plur.,
158, D.— in the Fut., 261,
D.— in the 1 Aor., 269, D.—
after Syl. Augm., 234, D.
r, dropped, 69, Observ. 3— in
Compar., 204.
9, ending of Nom. Sing., 173,
1 ; 113 ; 122, 1 ; 134, 1 ; 141 ;
145 ; 147, 1 ; 155 ; 160 —
wanting, 122, D. 1 ; 147, 2 ;
151; 163.
r, ending of Dat. Plur., 119 ;
134, 8-of Ace. PL, 134, 10;
173, 7— of 2 Person Sing.
in Hist. Tenses Act., 226
—Nom. of Fem., 348 ; 349,
Obs.
-a a, Fem. ending, 187.
<Ta\iTitoy, 251, Obs.
-aav, 3 PI. in Preter,, 302, 7.
2ap7rn6aii/, 174, D.
afitvvvfii, 319, 7—2 Aor., 316,
9 ; 318, 5— Meaning, 329, 5.
-o-e, Local Suffix, 178.
oeavTov, 210 — PoSS., 472 a.
ae(3ofxat, Dcp. Pass., 328, 2.
-<7e<a), Verbs in, 353, Obs. 2.
aeco,, Perf. Mid.,'28S.
ae6a), 248, D.— 1 Aor., 269, D.
—Perf. Mid., 274, D., 285,
D 2 Aor., 316, D. 30.
ff/jTTo), Mean, of Perf., 330, 6.
<r>;9, Gen., PI. and Du., 142, 3.
aO, after Cons. , 61 a ; 286, 4.
-<r0a, in the 2 Pers. Sing. Sub.
and Opt., 233, D. 1 : 255,
D. 1— Ind.,302,D.— in the
1 Person Plur. Pres. Mid.,
233, D. 5.
-cOe, 2 Pers. Plural, Imper.
Mid., 228.
'ffOov, 1 Pers. Du. Pres. Mid.,
233, D. 5 — 3 Person Dual
Imperf., 233, D. 7-2 Pers.
Du. Imper. Mid., 228.
-atiia, -aOuiv, -aOuxrav, 3 Pers.
Sing. Du. PI. Imper. Mid.,
228.
-ai, 2 Pers. Sing, of Princ.
Tenses Act., 226 ; 302,2.
-<Ti(i/), Dat. Plur., 68, 1 ; 119 ;
134, 8; 141; 160; 173, 6 —
3 Pers. Sing. Pres. Subj.,
233, D. 1 ; 255, D. 1— Local
ending, 179 ; 68, 2—3 Pers,
Plur. and Sing., 68, 5.
tr(p€,
aia, -(TK, Fem. in, 342, 1.
ai'^dai, Diff. of Pres. and
Aor., 498 — Mean, of Fut.
Mid., 266.
fft/xor, Adj. in, 352, Obs.
aioiTcdu), Meaning of Fut.
Mid., 266.
(jK, in forming Inchoatives,
324— Iteratives, 334,D.,etc.
a-KedcivvvfJii, 319, 4.
o-KeAXo), Aor., 316, 10— Mean-
ing, 329, 6.
(7K/av.iM«, 312, D. h ; 319, 4.
cKoitico and eofjiai, 480.
(TKOTO?, 174.
lKi6\Kt), 115, D. 2.
andop, 176.
(T/udo), Contr., 244, 2.
-GO, 2 Person Sing. Imper.
Mid., 228.
o-Trdw, 301, 1— Perf. Mid., 288.
aTrtvdo), Fut., 260, 1 — Perf.
Mid., 286, Obs.
cTTreoj, 166, D.
o-7r6(7(ya<,etC.,327, 5.
o-7reiv6a), with Inf., 560, 3.
aiTovbdt,iis, Meaning of Fut.
Mid., 266.
cro-,57; 250.
-ffo-o), Verbs in, 250— Future,
260, 3.
-ara, 307.
(rTd^w,251,Obs.— Fnt.,260,3.
o-rdxi'S', Masc.,140.
£rT£(/3a). 326, 36.
areWw, Perf., 282 — Aorist
Pass., 295.
<TTei/dCw, 251, Obs.— Future.
260, 3.
(TTei'MTr^c, Masc, 127, 2.
ffrepTO), with Dat., 4^9, Obs.
arepicKO), 324, 26 — with Gen-
itive, 419 e.
(TT.Cw, 251, Obs.— Fut., 260, 3.
(TTod, 115 (Ex.).
<rToptvvviJL.i, 319, 8.
cTTopw/jit, 319, 25.
(j-Tox«Co/^««> with Genitive,
419 c.
arpe<p(a, Perf., 285— Meaning
of Aor. Pass., 328, 3.
(TTpUVVVfll, 319, 11.
aTvyem, 325, D. k.
ffv/jiftaivo), Constr. personal-
ly, 571.
o-K^i^coveo), avvc^8u), with Dat.,
436 a.
(Tvv, ^vv, in Compos, bef. a
and C, 49, Obs. 1— in Dis-
tributives, 223.
-<rvvrt, Fem., 340, 2.
cr6voi6d fxoi, with Part., 591,
Obs.
a-vvwvvfjLov, with Dat., 436 b.
avi, 142 6— of two Genders.
140.
(T^d \XoMa«, with Gen., 419, e.
(T(pe, 205,-D.— o-0eTepor, 472 b
—a<p6s, 208, D.
(r(prj^, Masc, 140.
o-xe«te<i/,33S,D.
<rxtf, etc., 310, 11 ; 327,6.
crxoXalo',; Compar., 194.
<T(iCw,l Aor. Pass., 298.
SwKpdrf]?, 174.
(Tws, 184.
<TWT>;p,Voc. Sing., 152.
T, Prounnt., 4— bee. 9, 54 —
becomes ff,60a; 67; 187—
dropped, 147, 2 ; 169 — in
the Perfect, 281— changes
before, 286, 3 — affixed to
Verb. Stem, 249— movable,
169, D.
rdv, Defect., 177, 10.
Tdn;Ma«,319,D.38.
Tcixa, 212 — tJ(i/ TUXtTTtlV, 405,
Obs. 2.
raxt'i, Compar. 0d<7ffco^, 54 &;
198.
-T6, 2 Pers. Plur. Act., 226—
2 Plur. Imper. Act., 22S.
-re, 624 6 — Enclit, 92, 5 —
Affix, 94 ; 624, 5 — rt-Kai,
76-6e, 024, 2, and Obs.
reOvi^^oi, 291.
7etv, 205, D.
Te/wo), Perfect, 282—1 Aorist
Pass., 298.
-re/pa, Fem., 341, 2.
Teiifxr]piov 6i, 636, 6 b.
reXeo), 301, 1— Perf. Mid., 288.
Tf/u£., 321, D. 10.
Tfyui/w, 321, 10.
T60, rev, Tfo), etc., 214, D.
reoi, 208, D.
-reo?, Verb. Adj., 300; 590—
with Dat., 434.
-T6po9, Compar., 192 ; 208,
Obs.; 216.
ripnonai, Aorist, 59, D. ; 257,
D. ; 295, D.— with Partic,
592.
TCTa'^wv, 257, D.
reruKa, 282.
TtrXn/ca, 317, D. 10.
TtT/iov, 257, D.
rerpaivu), Aor., 270, Obs.
TtTpnxa. 277, D.
TeTi-Keli/, 322, D. 30.
T£i''x«, 322, 30 — Perf. Mid.,
285, D. •
Tr,KU), Meaning, 330, 7.
TM^'Koi/TOS', TTi^iKoide, 212 ;
475.
-rm. Ending of the 3 Person
Dual of the Hist. Tenses,
Act., 226— of the 2 Person
Dual, 233, D. 7.
-Tnp, Masc. in, 341, 2 ; 137.
--npiof, Neut. in, 345, 1.
-Tr79, Nom. of Masc. in, 341,
2 ; 349, 2— Voc. Sing., 121
—Nom. of Fem. in, 346, 1 ;
138.
Ti bee. aa-, 57— inserted in
Derivation, 361.
368
GEEEK INDEX.
'Ti, 3 Pers. Sing. Act. iu the
Princip. Tenses, 226.
Tt ; why ? 404, Obs. — t« 7dp ;
636, 6d — Ti dn; 642, 4 a
— Tt dfjirov ; 642, 5 — ri
8hra ; 642, 6— rt ij.a0wv ; t<
iraOiuv ; 606, Obs. 2 — t« /i>ji/ ;
643, 12.
rin, 218.
riOnui, Aor. Pass., 53 &.
TtKTd), 249.
Tj/i"". with Genit., 421.
Tilj.u)peojj.ai and -fco), 481 & —
-eofjiai, with Acc, 396.
T/Vi^M'. 319, D. 35.
fivw, 321, 5.
riTTTe, 61, D.
T/pwi/r, 50 b, Obs. 2.
-T«,Nom. Fern., 341,2; 342,1.
t/?, t/, 214— for orTif, 609.
T/y, Ti, 214— End., 92, 1— T/^a,
to be supplied, 568.
T(Tpda), 327, 16.
rtrpuxTKU), 324, 16.
rnvaKofiai, 322, D. 30; 324,
D.37.
rXTivat, etc., 316, 6.
TM-ta, 321, D. 10.
TO, 879, Obs.; 104; 559 6— t6
/Liei/, to 6i, 369, Obs. — to
irpt'i/, 635, 11.
ToOi, ToOev, Tto?, 217, D.
Tot, 643, 10— Eucl., 92, 5.
Toi'^ap, roi'iapoiiv, rof^apTOi,
643, 10; 637, 5 — toivvv,
637, 4.
Tolo, etc., 212, D.
TOioi/Tor, Toiorde, 212; 475.
Toir6e<7«,212,D.
toXm", 115 (Ex.).
-Toi/. 2 and 3 Pers. Du. Act.,
226—3 Pers. Dual Imperf.,
233, D. 7—2 Pers. Du. Im-
perf., 228.
-Tor, Verbal Adj. in, 300.
Tooroi'Tos', rocToide, 212 ; 475.
TOTe, with Part., 587, 4.
rov, Tw, 214, Obs. 1.
-Tpa for -Tep in the DatPlur,,
153. •
-Tpa, Fem. iu, 344, Obs.
TpeTTO), 2 Aorist Act., 257 —
2 Aorist Pass., 294— Perf.,
279; 285.
Tp(:0w,54 c— Perf., 279 ; 285—
Aor. Pass., 295— Aor. Act.
Meaning, 329, D.
Tp^;xw,54c; 327,11.
Tpt]ao}, 327, 16.
-Tpm, Fem. in, 341, 2— Quan-
tity, 117.
Tpivpn9, Genit. PI., 166.
-Tp<?, Fem. in, 341, 2.
rpixo^, see t)pi^.
-Tpov, Neut. in, 344.
TpwYo), 2Aor. Act.,257.
Tpw^, Gen, PI. and Du.,142, 3.
Tpwu>, 324, D. 16.
TT, -TTW, see <ra; -aaia.
(peidofiat,
Tvjxavi^, 322, 30, etc. —with
the Genitive, 419 c — with
â– Part., 590.
rvvtu 205, D.
Tl^TTTCO, 326, 37.
Tv<po>, 54 c.
rvxdv, 322, 30.
-TO), -Twv, 3 Pers. Sing, and
Du. Imper. Act., 228.
-Twp, Norn. Masc. iu, 341,- 2 ;
137.
-TWffai/, 3 Pers. Plur. Imper.
Act., 228.
V bee. F, 35, D. 2 ; 160 ; 248,
Obs.— bee. a, 40 — bee. cv,
40; 278 — bee. ov, 40, D.—
of the Stem bee. e, 157—
Long by nature, 83, Obs. 1
—lengthened, 253, Obs.—
dropped, 253 — not drop-
ped, 64.
ri/, Neut. in, 139; 172.
6/3p<'Cw, with Acc, 396.
v/3piaTi]i, Compar., 197.
-v8p,ov, Neut. in, 347, Obs. 1.
uSwp, 176— Neut., 140.
i/e bee. 0, 158.
VI, Diphth., 28.
-via, Fem. of Perf. Partic,
188.
v\6i, 177, 17.
vjjiiv, v/jiiv, etc., 207 — iifioi,
208, D.
-vv, Nom. of Masc and Neut.
iu, 172.
-uvw.Verbs in, 353,8.
inai, see vno.
uTraTO?, 200.
hittp (bneip), 448, II.,*A. ; 460
—with Inf. and Art, 574, 3.
virttrxvov/Jiai, 323, 30 — with
Inf., 569.
hno, 448, III.; 468— Apoc.,
64, D.
vnoTTTevco, Augm., 239.
-w, Nom. Masc. and Fem.,
172 — Barytones in Acc.
Sing., 156.
vanivt), Dat. Sing., 175, D.
UCTTepoc, vararof, vaTUTio^,
200 : 199, D.
vffTepo^, varepta, with Gen.,
416, Obs. 3; 423.
<p, Pronunt., 6.
<padi>0t]v, 521,1).
ipaeivoi, Superl., 193, D.
(paivo), (paeivu),32l, D.— Perf.,
282— Meaning, 330, 8— Aor.
Pass., 298, D. — Meaninc:,
828, 3 — Diff. of Pres. and
Aor., 498.
(jyaivoixai, (pavepos e/jut, With
Part., 590.
(puaKbi, 324, 8.
<pei6ofxat,?i26, D.45— Aor. and
Fut., 257, D.— with Genit.,
419 e.
XP«w.
0epT€, 315, D. 4.
^epTcpo?, ^epTaTor, d>tptaTOS,
199, D. 1.
^epo), 327, 12— Imperat. of 1
Aor. Act., 268, D.— Mean-
ing, 476, 2—<ptpwv, 580.
0eu7a),822, 31— Fut. Mid., 264
—Perf. Mid., 285, D.— with
Acc, 398— with Genit., 422
— Meaning, 486, Obs.
(pniJii, 312, 5— Pres. Ind.Eucl.,
92 3.
4>0uL', 321, 3—2 Aor., 316, 7
— with Acc, 898 — with
Part., 590.
(pOe'tpui, Perf., 282— Meaning,
330, D. 11.
<l>eivu>, 321, 6— Aor. Mid., 316,
D.26.
<i>i\tui, 825, D. 1.
0tXor, Compar., 195.
(p(\oTifiionai, Dep. Pass.,
828, 2.
-0^(1/), 178, D.
(po/Sovfiat, Meaning of Aor.,
828,3— with Inf., 500, 3.
^olwf , 83, Obs. 1 ; 145.
(poprivai, see <j)ip(>i.
(ppayvvpn, ipcip-yvvfjit, 319, 26.
0paCw,Aor.,257,D.
ippiap, 176.
(ppijv, Fem., 140.
(piifade, 178, D.
ipvfjdvM, 322, 81, and Obs.
-^y^?,Adj. in,Acc. Sing.,166.
<pv\dTTop.at, with Acc, 899.
0.^pa), Fut.,262,D.
ipvo), Aor., 816, 17— "Meaning,
829, 3.
<pwi, ^lo'r, Genit. Plur. and
Dual,' 142,* 8.
xa/po), 326, 38— with Dat., 439,
Obs.— with Part., 592.
XaXdu', 301, 1.
XaXc7ratVa),withDat.,439,ObS.
xaXcTTos, with Inf., 562.
xaXenwi ^f p(o,withPart.,592.
Xov5di/a),323, D.41.
Xai/oi;Ma«,324,9.
xdpiv, 404, Obs.
x«pK,Compar.of compounds
with, 197.
Xfiffhto, 324, 9.
xe/p,177,18— Fem.,140.
Xe/pwi/, xcp'O'Tor, 199, 2.
xe«VoMa«,323,D.41.
xepn?, etc, 199, D. 2.
Xfco), 248 — Fut., 265 — Perf.,
281—1 Aor., 269 — 2 Aor.,
816, D. 81.
xpaifffxeu), 325, D. tn.
xpaofiai, xpdco, Coutr., 244, 2
—Future, 261— with Dat.,
438, Obs.
xpv, 312, 6—xp7iv, 490— with
Acc. and Inf., 567, Obs. 1.
Xp/;<rTnr, Genit. PL, 123. •
xpio, Per£ Mid., 288.
GKEEK INDEX.
369
Xpoa.
Xpoa, 115 (Ex.).
â– Xptiivvvni, 319, 12.
Xpwy, 169, D.
xupt'Co), with Genit., 419 e.
X(>)pi^, 455, 5.
^, 34 ; 48 ; 260,
-\/^, Subs, in, 172.
Vauo), Perf. Mid., 288— with
Genit, 419 6.
^au), Contr., 244, 2.
^tiidonai, with Genit., 419 e.
o), for o, 276, D.— See Att.
Declens. — from o, see o—
from n, see n.
-ft), Fern, in, 138— Nom., 172
— Adv. in, 204 — Proper
Names in Ace. Sing.,163,D.
—in the Genit., 122, D. 3 c
—Conn. Vowel, 233, 1—1
Pers. Sin^. Ind. Act., 233,2.
Zi'iixat, 327, D. 6.
-odn?, Adj. in, 359, 2 Obs.
e^(^, 325, 9 — Syll. Augm.,
237.
\Ao«,65, D.
w/dfiai, 327, S,
-ft)i/,Nom. ofMasc. andFem.,
172; 345, 3 — Genit., 118;
134, 7 ; 141 : 173, 5.
a)i/d/u»)i/, etc., 3' 4, D.
livaf ,-65, D.
<ii/eoMai, Syll. Angm., 237—
Perf., 275, 2— with Genit.,
421.
w^vfi,iai, 280, 1, Obs.
-cop, Subs, in, 172.
iopaaiiv), 179.
-0)?, Nom. 172 — Adj., 184 —
Peff.Part.,276; 188— Fem.,
138— Adv., 201 ; 203— End-
ing of Genit. Sing, in, 161
— with I- and v- Stems, 157
—in -ev Stems, 161 a.
w9 and «>?, 217.
(5,9 and wi, Diff., 99 ; 217, D. ;
031.
iixpeXov.
w?, Atonon, 97, 3; 98— with
Compar., 631 a — with Inf.,
u)? eiTreii/, tor to hvv eivat,
etc. ,564 — "as ihough,"etc.,
with Part., 588— "when,"
"as," 556— with Aor.Ind.,
493— "that," in Dependent
Declarative Sentences, 525
— "in order that," in Sen-
tences of Purpose, 530 —
with av, 031 b, Obs. — iu
expressing a wish, 514.
(is, Preposit., 445 ; 448, A. ;
450.
(icTrep, 032— with Part., 588.
(iirre, 94; 560; 632, 4— with
Inf., 566— joined with fxij,
617, Obs.^2.
(tiTor, see ovf.
cou, Diphth., 26, D.
a)uT(3r,etC.,209, D.
lixpeXta, with Acc, 396.
</,e\oi/, 320, 32- in express-
ing a wish, 515.
Q2
THE END.
0^
GENERAL LIBRARY
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA— BERKELEY
RETURN TO DESK FROM WHICH BORROWED
This book is due on ike last date stamped below, or on the
date to whidl renewed.
Renewed books are subject to immediate recall, i ^
JUN 2 195A
JUL2 81954LU
250c'55JB
, 31955115
'• v>
DtO
14 ^9S9
^'9 aosEPWAi
j*>c»V^''
v?,^^"^
DEC is
REC'D Uo
lECDCD JUN 3 73 -9 AM 9^
LD 21-100m-l,'54(1887sl6)476
THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY
